summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-09 00:49:07 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-09 00:49:07 +0000
commit007f67a693e4d031fd3d792df8e4d5f43e2cb2e7 (patch)
tree90d17e00e572ecb1e24764b6f29c80e098b08d29 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base
parent950209b26f70aa87ed07c54f82a95b6f03b7c3a0 (diff)
doc/latex
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@84 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/00readme.txt121
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/amiweb2c.txt306
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/autoload.txt138
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/begleit.err2164
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt135
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdfbin0 -> 138815 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex561
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt8994
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdfbin0 -> 264339 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex1872
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/compan.err2975
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cstex.txt19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdfbin0 -> 130940 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex398
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/decustex.txt373
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/directex.txt135
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtex.txt124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtextds.txt232
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdfbin0 -> 257706 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex1830
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/grphcomp.err1135
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/handbuch.err340
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/install.txt534
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexbug.el502
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt46
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lindner.txt171
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt211
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt314
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt318
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt401
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdfbin0 -> 79387 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex152
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdfbin0 -> 75709 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex154
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdfbin0 -> 76351 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex145
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdfbin0 -> 74629 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex143
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdfbin0 -> 88479 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex158
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdfbin0 -> 72271 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdfbin0 -> 73655 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex146
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdfbin0 -> 78858 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex154
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdfbin0 -> 64461 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdfbin0 -> 78244 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex153
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdfbin0 -> 59050 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex141
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdfbin0 -> 76717 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex154
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdfbin0 -> 85073 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex201
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdfbin0 -> 84444 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex169
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdfbin0 -> 72094 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex169
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdfbin0 -> 72409 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex161
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltpictur.pdfbin0 -> 123035 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdfbin0 -> 115979 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex474
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex974
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt410
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err330
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/microtex.txt115
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/miktex.txt138
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdfbin0 -> 128852 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex412
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/multitex.txt198
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/oztex.txt128
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pastex.txt193
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/patches.txt56
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pctex.txt203
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex483
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/template.txt198
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tex2.txt83
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt206
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/textures.txt1771
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/truetex.txt263
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdfbin0 -> 276442 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex1810
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8-test.tex73
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8test.tex73
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtex.txt175
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtexfree.txt192
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/web2ctex.txt185
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err300
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcompg.err392
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/yandytex.txt181
93 files changed, 36856 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..baa863bfc57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+ LaTeX Distribution Guide
+
+ 2003/12/01
+
+
+WELCOME TO LaTeX!
+
+This file contains a brief distribution guide for the latest standard
+version of the LaTeX document preparation system.
+
+This system is maintained by The LaTeX3 Project Team.
+
+ ********************************************************
+ * Please read this file carefully because it gives *
+ * important information about other documentation *
+ * provided with the LaTeX system that will help you *
+ * in installing and using it. *
+ ********************************************************
+
+ ********************************************************
+ * The files ltnews*.tex (and ltnews*.dvi, .ps, .pdf) *
+ * contain the LaTeX newsletters, the highest number *
+ * being the most recent. *
+ * *
+ * Please print this latest edition and distribute it *
+ * to all users ... and to anyone else who may be *
+ * interested. *
+ * *
+ * It normally fits onto a single sheet, so it can be *
+ * displayed as a poster. *
+ ********************************************************
+
+
+The LaTeX system is described in:
+
+ * LaTeX: A Document Preparation System; Leslie Lamport, Addison-Wesley
+
+ * The LaTeX Companion, 2ed; Mittelbach and Goossens with Braams,
+ Carlisle and Rowley, Addison-Wesley
+
+ * Guide to LaTeX 4ed; Kopka and Daly, Addison-Wesley
+
+
+This distribution is described in the files ending with .txt. You
+should read install.txt before starting to install LaTeX.
+
+Here is a brief description of some of these files:
+
+ * 00readme.txt is this file.
+
+ * manifest.txt lists all the files in the LaTeX distribution
+ with one line information about their contents.
+
+ * install.txt describes how to install LaTeX.
+
+ * tex2.txt contains important information for users of extremely
+ old versions of TeX (pre 1990).
+
+ * autoload.txt describes a variant of LaTeX that is no longer supported.
+
+ * unpacked.txt lists all the files in the unpacked LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * legal.txt and lppl.txt describe the LaTeX copyright, warranty and
+ copying restrictions.
+
+ * patches.txt describes the update policy and how important changes
+ will be distributed between release dates.
+
+ * texpert.txt contains information about the installation that is
+ useful for TeX experts.
+
+ * bugs.txt describes how to submit a bug report for LaTeX.
+
+
+Other documentation files include files with names of the form:
+
+ <xxx>guide.tex
+
+You will probably need to update your system before you can typeset
+these files. Each file needs three LaTeX runs.
+
+
+The following files also contain useful information:
+
+ * ltx3info.tex gives you some information about the LaTeX3 project.
+
+ * the other files ltnews*.* are the news files from previous releases:
+ these contain useful information but be warned that some of it may
+ be out-of-date as these files are never changed.
+
+ * manual.err lists errata in:
+ LaTeX: A Document Preparation System; Leslie Lamport, Addison-Wesley
+
+ * compan.err lists errata in:
+ The LaTeX Companion; Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison-Wesley
+
+ * begleit.err lists errata in:
+ Der LaTeX-Begleiter; Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison-Wesley
+
+ * grphcomp.err lists errata in:
+ The LaTeX Graphics Companion; Goossens, Rahtz, and Mittelbach,
+ Addison-Wesley
+
+ * handbuch.err lists errata in:
+ Das LaTeX-Handbuch; Leslie Lamport, Addison-Wesley
+
+ * webcomp.err lists errata in:
+ The LaTeX Web Companion; Goossens and Rahtz, Addison-Wesley
+
+
+In general you are not allowed to change the files in this
+distribution unless you rename them, *except* for certain
+files such as the configuration files, ending with .cfg.
+Please see the licence (in lppl.txt) for further details.
+
+
+Please do not request updates from us. Distribution is done only
+through the CTAN archives.
+
+
+--- Copyright 2003 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/amiweb2c.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/amiweb2c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b11952efee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/amiweb2c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,306 @@
+
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for AmiWeb2c TeX
+
+ 15 March 1998
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for Web2c TeX
+on the Amiga (aka AmiWeb2c). Before reading this file, you should read
+install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works, and
+web2c.txt, which describes the Unix version of this TeX system.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to configure LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the
+following:
+
+ * the file `/texmf/tex/generic/local/hyphen.cfg' coming with the source
+ distribution of AmiWeb2c, loading hyphenation patterns for US English
+ (hyphen.tex aka ushyph1.tex) and UK English (ukhyphen.tex), and German
+ (ghyph31.tex). In the commentary section of `hyphen.cfg' a list of
+ many other languages is given together with references to pattern
+ files. Feel free to modify `hyphen.cfg' as you need (or replace it
+ with your own version).
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX
+===============================
+
+Nobody should ever have installed LaTeX 2.09 with AmiWeb2c (which was
+first released in April/May 1995), so there is no need for a special
+treatment of such an old version of LaTeX.
+
+Updating installations of LaTeX2e is completely similar to a generic
+LaTeX installation. This simply amounts to replacing all files with
+their new versions and recreating the LaTeX format file `latex.fmt'.
+
+
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+During the installation procedure, it may be easiest to set some
+temporary device names.
+
+The LATEXINPUTS: directory is where the LaTeX base packages and classes
+will finally be installed. In the `TeX Directory Structure' assumed by
+AmiWeb2c this defaults to:
+
+ assign LATEXINPUTS: HD:AmiWeb2c-<version>/texmf/tex/latex/base
+
+The LATEXFORMAT: directory is where the LaTeX format is stored:
+
+ assign LATEXFORMAT: HD:AmiWeb2c-<version>/texmf/web2c
+
+The LATEXDIST: directory is where the LaTeX distribution is stored:
+
+ assign LATEXDIST: HD:AmiWeb2c-<version>/texmf/source/latex/base
+
+You should put all files coming with the base distribution of LaTeX in
+the LATEXDIST: directory. After the successful installation procedure,
+you can safely remove the complete LATEXDIST: directory.
+
+If you started with the ready-to-use binaries, I suggest that you get
+Norbert Püschel's `DOSPrefs' commodity from the Aminet at
+
+ Aminet:/util/misc/DOSPrefs31.lha
+
+This program patches the AmigaOS to enable the Unix notations `.' and
+`..' for the `current' and the `parent' directory respectively. There
+are similar tools for this purpose, but AmiWeb2c was only tested with
+`DOSPrefs'. For your convenience, "DOSPrefs 3.1" is included with the
+AmiWeb2c distribution.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+To unpack the LaTeX distribution, you should:
+
+ cd LATEXDIST:
+ tex --ini unpack.ins
+
+This takes about 15 minutes on a 50 MHz 68030, but considerably longer
+on a standard 7.19 MHz 68000 (most likely several hours). Why don't you
+just go and make a good cup of tea? [Personal note: on a P5/133 running
+the Linux operating system the very same task takes about half a minute,
+so I have my tea ready before I install a new version of LaTeX.]
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LATEX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+How was your tea? To install the LaTeX files created in the previous
+step, you should:
+
+ cd LATEXDIST:
+ copy latexbug.tex testpage.tex lablst.tex idx.tex ltxcheck.tex +
+ nfssfont.tex small2e.tex sample2e.tex docstrip.tex +
+ #?.cls #?.clo #?.sty #?.fd #?.def #?.ltx +
+ LATEXINPUTS:
+
+(The `+' character means that you should type this as a single command.)
+
+WARNING: This single command line most certainly exceeds the maximum
+length the AmigaOS is able to cope with! Please, make sure that ALL
+these files are correctly installed in `LATEXINPUTS:'. And make sure
+that all these files are copied "as is", the file lookup mechanism of
+AmiWeb2c won't find files with incorrect uppercase/lowercase spelling,
+e.g., OT1enc.def (old) versus ot1enc.def (new).
+
+If you have MakeIndex installed or intend to do so, copy #?.ist to the
+MakeIndex inputs directory, which should be in TDS notation:
+
+ /texmf/makeindex/
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+After the unpacked files of the LaTeX distribution are installed at
+the appropriate place, you have to create the LaTeX format proper.
+This will conveniently be done by the following commands:
+
+ cd LATEXFORMAT:
+ tex --ini --progname=latex latex.ltx
+
+Thus the format file latex.fmt will be created at the correct place and
+also the correctness of the installation will be tested, because the
+necessary files will be read from the appropriate paths. A useful
+shortcut to invoke LaTeX is `alias latex="tex --progname=latex"'.
+
+If you intend to use any of the advanced features provided by `e-TeX'
+(`enhanced TeX'), like left-to-right typesetting, you should instead
+use the commands
+
+ cd LATEXFORMAT:
+ etex --ini --efmt=elatex *latex.ltx
+ etex --ini --progname=elatex latex.ltx
+
+to create the format file and set `alias elatex="etex --progname=elatex"'
+and `alias latex="etex --progname=latex"'. (Note the asterisk in front of
+`latex.ltx'; this invokes a special feature of the etex binary, i.e., the
+`extended mode of e-TeX'.)
+
+If you intend to produce output in Portable Document Format (PDF) from
+your LaTeX sources, you may additionally use the command
+
+ cd LATEXFORMAT:
+ pdftex --ini --progname=pdflatex latex.ltx
+
+together with `alias pdflatex="pdftex --progname=pdflatex"'.
+
+If you intend to use the 16-bit UniCode version of TeX, aka Omega, you
+may additionally use the command
+
+ cd LATEXFORMAT:
+ omega --ini --progname=lambda lambda.tex
+
+together with `alias lambda="omega --progname=lambda"'.
+
+
+GETTING A WORKING LaTeX
+=======================
+
+As soon as the format file `latex.fmt' is created in the proper place, you
+are set for using LaTeX. Either use `alias latex "tex --progname=latex"'
+or `makelink from latex to tex' to conveniently set up a `latex' call.
+
+Oh, and don't forget to remake the ls-R database!
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To check that the installation worked, you should:
+
+ cd LATEXFORMAT:
+ latex ltxcheck
+
+This will perform a number of tests, which should all report `OK',
+except for the "\@currdir" part (and, depending on your installation,
+the "DC/EC" font stuff). According to the LaTeX check routine, all
+files come from the current working directory, contrary to the common
+installation. Due to the limitations of the Amiga implementation of
+file lookup, which is inherently very Unix-prone, there seems to be
+no remedy to this situation. Press "return" to skip the warnings.
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+`texsys.cfg': Due to technical limitations of the Amiga port of the
+ Kpathsea library it is necessary to "\let\@currdir=\@empty" in this
+ file. The LaTeX test suite "latex ltxcheck" will issue a warning
+ message when checking the current directory syntax. Proceed.
+
+`File missing': As long as the default search paths of AmiWeb2c are
+ correctly set up and used, you won't encounter this message.
+
+`Font missing': Some of the fonts, i.e., tfm files, required by LaTeX
+ are missing. In addition to the 75 standard fonts of the `Computer
+ Modern' family, several additional fonts are needed. Run MetaFont
+ on the respective font drivers and install the tfm files in the
+ `texmf/fonts/tfm//' directory structure. You may choose to ignore
+ the warning about the missing `EC' fonts issued by the LaTeX
+ check suite.
+
+`Out of memory': The memory configuration file `texmf.cnf' coming with
+ the source distribution of AmiWeb2c in `texmf/web2c/' was used for the
+ installation of LaTeX on my system, so it should be appropriate for
+ your machine too. Since AmiWeb2c is directly descended from the Unix
+ Web2c distribution, its binaries are designed for a BigTeX setup. If
+ you really want to install it on machines with less than 4 MB of RAM,
+ you will most likely have to restrict yourself to a single language in
+ `texmf/tex/generic/local/hyphen.cfg' and comment the value for `triesize'
+ in `texmf/web2c/texmf.cnf' in order to start IniTeX. Please do not
+ request a SmallTeX version of AmiWeb2c, it just can't be done.
+
+If you have any other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the
+`PROBLEMS' section in install.txt.
+
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files that
+are not needed to run LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of personal
+taste and availability of disk space but here is some guidance.
+
+ * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex, can be
+ used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt for
+ further information).
+
+ * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for the
+ font definition files.
+
+ * The files ltnews<xx>.tex and ltnews<xx>.ps both contain the lastest
+ LaTeX newsletter.
+
+ * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project
+ and how you can support it.
+
+ * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst
+ other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports;
+ and those with extension .err contain errata lists for various
+ publications: see 00readme.txt for further details.
+
+ * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference
+ information convering only those features new to this version of
+ LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user guide or a
+ complete reference.
+
+ * The files with extension .ltx, together with latexcheck.tex, are
+ used to create and test the format; therefore you should keep these
+ together with the installed LaTeX system in the LATEXINPUTS:
+ directory if you expect to remake the format before getting the next
+ full distribution.
+
+ * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the
+ .dtx and .fdd files.
+
+ * We recommend that you keep, in the LATEXFORMAT: directory, the
+ transcript file latex.log that was produced whilst creating the
+ format.
+
+If you don't need the documentation or if you are lacking enough disk
+space to permanently keep the LaTeX distribution files, you can now:
+
+ delete LATEXDIST:#?
+
+
+SYSTEM-SPECIFIC SECTIONS
+========================
+
+As the maintainer and distributor of AmiWeb2c I'm interested in feedback
+about problems with the application of this TeX system for the Amiga.
+Please report difficulties installing and/or using LaTeX that are
+clearly related to any (mis)feature of AmiWeb2c to
+
+ Andreas Scherer
+ Rochusstraße 22-24
+ 52062 Aachen, Germany
+ <andreas.scherer@pobox.com>
+
+
+ --- Copyright 1995, 1998 Andreas Scherer and the LaTeX3 project. ---
+ --- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/autoload.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/autoload.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8e3e242a19f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/autoload.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+ IMPORTANT NOTICE
+ This variant of LaTeX is now UNSUPPORTED but we have left its
+ description in this file for posterity ... enjoy!
+
+ LaTeX on small systems: auto-loading
+
+ 21 November 1995
+
+
+On some small systems (perhaps most noticeably emTeX for PCs if your
+machine is unable to use the TeX386 version) LaTeX uses up a large
+amount of the memory available to TeX, leaving very little for storage
+of any further commands, complex text (such as tables), floats or
+cross references that may occur in a typical document. Note that
+these limits are built into the TeX executable and do not directly
+correspond to any physical memory that your machine has installed.
+
+In order to help with this problem, we have produced an *experimental*
+configuration of LaTeX in which certain functions are not predefined
+in the format, but are loaded automatically from a style file the first
+time they are used. This saves a lot of memory in the case that a
+document does not use these features.
+
+In this release two environments are `auto-loaded' in this way,
+`picture' and `tabbing', as are various bits of internal code used in
+error handling, font loading and advanced page makeup.
+
+
+MAKING THE AUTOLOAD FORMAT
+==========================
+
+NOTE: Before you can proceed any further you *must* unpack the standard
+version from unpack.ins.
+
+Process the file autoload.ins (with plain TeX or LaTeX, not iniTeX).
+
+This will produce six files:
+
+ latexa.ltx source file for the smaller format
+
+ And the following five package files:
+
+ autopict.sty source for picture mode
+ autotabg.sty source for tabbing environment
+ autoerr.sty texts of most LaTeX error commands
+ autofss1.sty little used internal font selection commands
+ autoout1.sty source for \enlargethispage and related commands.
+
+The `latexa' format should then be made by running iniTeX on the
+file `latexa.ltx'.
+
+To do this, follow the instructions in install.txt (and emtex.txt
+etc) but replace:
+ `latex.ltx' and `latex.fmt'
+by
+ `latexa.ltx' and `latexa.fmt'.
+
+Finally, the five files `autoxxxx.sty' should be moved to the
+directory in which the other LaTeX .sty files have been placed.
+
+
+USING THE FORMAT
+================
+
+The resulting format should normally be used in exactly the same way
+as standard LaTeX.
+
+Picture mode can be used without any special commands. Since picture
+mode is not pre-defined, you will notice TeX loading the `autopict'
+package the first time you use \begin{picture} (or \thicklines) in a
+document. This takes some time (and the name of the file being loaded
+appears on the terminal) but otherwise the behaviour should be just as
+with standard LaTeX.
+
+For instance, processing usrguide.tex (which has a picture on page 23)
+produces the following terminal output:
+
+ This is TeX, Version 3.1415 (C version 6.1)
+ (usrguide.tex
+ LaTeX2e (autoload version) <1995/06/01>
+ )
+ (ltxguide.cls
+ Document Class: ltxguide 1994/12/14 Standard LaTeX class
+ (article.cls
+ Document Class: article 1995/06/05 v1.3d Standard LaTeX document class
+ (size10.clo))) (usrguide.aux) (OMScmr.fd) (usrguide.toc [1]) [2] [3]
+ [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]
+ [19] [20] [21] [22] (autopict.sty) [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29]
+ [30] (usrguide.aux) )
+
+(The output may differ on your machine due to different path names for
+the files.)
+
+
+POSSIBLE PROBLEMS
+=================
+
+Sometimes you need to redefine a command before it is used. Clearly, if
+the command is not initially defined, it cannot easily be redefined!
+
+As a real example, the popular `epic' package redefines some picture
+mode commands, therefore to use epic it is necessary to force
+picture mode to be loaded by explicitly putting in your document
+\usepackage{autopict} before \usepackage{epic}.
+
+If a document containing \usepackage{autopict} is sent to a site using
+the `full' version of LaTeX (which has picture mode defined in the
+format) then this \usepackage will be silently ignored and the
+document will still work correctly.
+
+A note to package writers: if your package depends on the picture
+environment being loaded then you can avoid the user needing to add
+the extra \usepackage to documents by adding \RequirePackage{autopict}
+to the beginning of your package file.
+
+Similar comments apply to `tabbing' and the `autotabg' package.
+
+
+INTERNAL INTERFACE
+==================
+
+Most new features added in LaTeX2e that were not in LaTeX2.09 have a
+consistent interface of commands \WithMixedCase names.
+
+If you inspect the implementation of this auto-loading feature you will
+not find any such interface, but rather an ad hoc collection of low-
+level TeX commands.
+
+This situation may change as more practical experience is gained with
+the auto-loading feature. In future releases it may be possible to
+auto-load more parts of LaTeX (so making an even smaller `base' format)
+and an interface for producing the auto-loaded files may be defined.
+
+However, for the user, the nature of the implementation should not
+matter too much since in the normal case the loading of the file is
+`invisible' and happens automatically the first time it is needed.
+
+--- Copyright 1995 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/begleit.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/begleit.err
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8829e269cf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/begleit.err
@@ -0,0 +1,2164 @@
+Errata Liste f"ur:
+
+@book(A-Wgerm:GMS94,
+ author = {Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and
+ Alexander Samarin},
+ title = {Der {\LaTeX}-Begleiter},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ address = {Bonn; Paris; Reading, Massachusetts},
+ year = 1994,
+ pagenums = {554 + 34},
+ bibliography = {yes},
+ index = {yes},
+ isbn = {3-89319-646-3},
+)
+
+Weitere Fehlermeldungen bitte an:
+
+ Frank.Mittelbach@Uni-Mainz.de
+
+(Wenn m"oglich bitte im Format
+
+ * Seite <X>, Zeile <X> (<Kuerzel>)
+ Text
+
+Danke)
+
+Version: 30 Apr 1999
+--------------------
+
+Neuste Version dieser Liste ist Teil der LaTeX Distribution
+
+
+***********************************
+* *
+* Fehler in der 1. Auflage *
+* *
+***********************************
+
+Ein Teil der Fehlerbeschreibungen sind in Englisch (da im Companion
+gefunden und noch nicht "ubersetzt), die Seitenangaben sind aber
+korrekt.
+
+========== Allgemein ==============
+
+-* Allgemein (MSc)
+ Ersetzte LaTeX3 Projekt durch LaTeX3-Projekt
+
+ * Kapitel"uberschriften (FMi)
+ Alle Kapitel"uberschriften wurden beim Druck um vier bis f"unf
+ Zeilen zu hoch plaziert. Dies ist im Nachdruck korrigiert.
+
+ * Optischer Randausgleich bei Bindestrichen (MiB, FMi)
+ Bei W"ortern mit Bindestrich, die am Bindestrich getrennt wurden,
+ ist der optische Randausgleich in vielen F"allen aufgrund eines
+ Fehlers in der Programierung nicht korrekt ausgef"uhrt.
+
+===================================
+
+ * Seite iii, copyright notice (BDe)
+ True copyright symbol provided by Lucida Bright should be used.
+
+========== Zur deutschen Ausgabe ==
+
+-* Seite vii, 2. Absatz, 1.Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: Wesentlichen durch wesentlichen
+
+========== Vorwort ==============
+
+ * Seite ix, Absatz 2, Zeile (MCl)
+ Das "-" in Natur- h"angt nicht.
+
+-* Seite xiv, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze hinter: 90\% "der" englischsprachigen Ausgabe
+
+ * Seite xv, 2.Absatz, 6. Zeile: (TQ)
+ streiche: Allerdings ist TeX ist auf
+ ^^^
+ * Seite xv (FMi)
+ Add a section entitled "Verwendung der Beispiele" and describe the
+ need for a) \makeatletter ... for commands with @ in their name, ie
+ something like the explanation on Seite 15 and b) that people have
+ to watch out for the packages they need, something that might be
+ explained a little earlier on in the same section.
+
+ * Seite xvi, 2.Zeile: (TQ)
+ F"uge Leerzeichen ein hinter "Kapitel 7."
+
+========== Kapitel 1 ==============
+
+ * Seite 1, 1. Absatz, 7. letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: werden die Vorteile des generischen Ansatzes erl"autert.
+ ^
+-* Seite 2, 6. Zeile (ADe)
+ Entferne Komma: "im TeX-Format wird, dem Computer"
+ ^
+-* Seite 2, 7. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze hinter: auszusehen haben"." durch ","
+
+ * Seite 3, Kapitel 1.1.3, 1. Zeile (LSD)
+ f"uge "-" ein: Anzahl von TeX- und insbesondere von LaTeX-Anwendern
+ ^
+ Seite 4, Absatz 2, Satz 2 (SSl)
+ der Satz enthält 2x "und", Vorschlag: ein "und" durch ein Komma ersetzen.
+
+ * Seite 4, Absatz 2, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: book, slides und letter
+ ^
+ * Seite 4, 5. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Leerzeichen: TeX positioniert seine (Zeichen-) Boxen mit
+ ^
+ * Seite 4, 5. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: mit einer Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+-* Seite 6, 3. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein hinter: von BiBTeX" "gelesen
+
+-* Seite 6, Kapitel 1.2.2, 1. + 2. item (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 6, Dritter Listeneintrag in 1.2.2 (MCl)
+ Es hei"st "X Window System" oder einfach "X", nicht
+ "X Windows".
+
+ * Seite 6, Dritter Listeneintrag in 1.2.3 (MC)
+ Es hei"st "X Window System" oder einfach "X", nicht
+ "X Windows".
+
+ * Seite 7, 1. Absatz, 5. Zeile (LSD)
+ l"osche Komma: Modern, LaTeX, American Mathematical Society und Euler
+ ^
+-* Seite 7, Kapitel 1.3.1, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung, statt "Mar-kup" setze "Mark-up"
+
+ * Seite 8, 2. Absatz, 7./8. Zeile (LSD)
+ Ersetze: Das Formatieren (visuelle Darstellen) der Komponenten
+ ^^ ^^
+ * Seite 8, letzter Absatz, 2. Zeile (LSD)
+ l"osche Komma: Brian Reids Scribe System entwickelte
+ ^
+-* Seite 8, letzter Absatz, 13. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma hinter: Einf"uhrung in SMGL"," siehe [33,113].
+
+ * Seite 9, Kapitel 1.3.3, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (LSD)
+ f"uge "-" ein: Elemente in der Dokumenten-Pr"aambel generisch
+
+ * Seite 9, Kapitel 1.3.3, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VLS)
+ l"osche 'n': gesetzt werden, sollten man neue
+ ^
+ * Seite 9, Kapitel 1.3.3, 2. Absatz, 7. Zeile (LSD)
+ f"uge "-" ein: Umgebungen in der Dokumenten-Pr"aambel.
+
+========== Kapitel 2 ==============
+
+ * Seite 13, 4.Zeile: (TQ)
+ F"uge Komma ein hinter " M"oglichkeiten"
+
+ * Seite 13, Kapitel 2.1.1, 1. Absatz, 7. Zeile (SSl)
+ oder eines einzelnen Pakets
+ ^
+* Seite 14 und Seite 91 (MCl)
+ Soll das "\varepsilon" von \LaTeXe wirklich so weit in den
+ Rand h"angen?
+
+ * Seite 20, Tafel 2.2, 2. Zeile (SPi)
+ Ersetze durch
+ \section[toc_eintrag]{titel} ja toc_eintrag titel
+ ^^^^^
+ * Seite 24, Beschreibung des Arguments "name" (BRa)
+ Add something like:
+ The \emph{name} must be non-empty. \@startsection internally
+ calls the command \\emph{name}mark with one argument to produce
+ the running head if necessary, see pages 93ff. For this reason one
+ has to define such a command for completely new sectioning
+ commands. Similarily, a command with two arguments (title and
+ page number) and the name \l@\emph{name} must exist to format any
+ table of contents entries properly, see pages 34ff.
+
+ * Seite 25, letzer Absatz, 1.Zeile (CLa,FMi)
+ Entferne:
+ "Die Abbildungen 2.6 und 2.7 auf der naechsten Seite..."
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ da nicht klar ist ob es sich auf 2.6+2.7 oder nur 2.7 bezieht
+
+ * Seite 25, description of "nachabstand" (CRo)
+ boundary condition is wrong.
+ replace: nachabstand \geq 0 by nachabstand > 0
+ and
+ replace: nachabstand < 0 by nachabstand \leq 0
+
+ * 26, Abb. 2.7; Markierung des Nachabstandes (TLa)
+ Ersetze: (<) ... auch hier durch (\leq)!
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 28, 4.Zeile in Abbildung (TQ)
+ Setze ""Uberschrift" f"ur ""uberschrift"
+
+ * Seite 34, 26. Zeile (SPi)
+ Dadurch, da\ss
+ ^
+ * Seite 35, 2.4.2; Absatz 3, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: toc, lof oder lot
+ ^
+ * Seite 41, 11. Zeile (SPi)
+ ..., die Umgebungen (Klammer ueberfluessig)
+
+ * 41, 2.5; Absatz 3, 3. Zeile (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: die Umgebungen equation,
+ figure, table und die theorem-Familie ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 41, 3. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche hinter: Dies wird anhand "von" des folgenden Beispiels
+
+ * Seite 42, 2.5.1; Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Numerierungssystem
+ ^
+ * Seite 43, Fussn. (SPi)
+ ...das Paket flafter verwenden, das in Abschnitt ...
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 44, 9.Zeile: (TQ)
+ F"uge ein "e": in beide Argumente eintr"agt
+ ^
+-* Seite 45, 2. Absatz (VSc)
+ "Andere Definition von \reftextcurrent zu:
+ \newcommand{\reftextcurrent}
+ {auf dieser Seite}
+
+-* Seite 46, Kapitel 2.5.2, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein hinter: das Paket xr" "in der
+
+ * Seite 46, Absatz 2, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: hat oder da"s
+ ^
+========== Kapitel 3 ==============
+
+ * Seite 49, 5 Zeile von unten (SPi)
+ ...des Marquis de Sade mitgespielt. (kein Ausrufezeichen)
+
+-* Seite 50, Z.15 (FMi)
+ Ersetze "Lmcsxspace" durch \xspace.
+
+ * Seite 52, Z.11 (SPi)
+ ... Anwendungen, bei denen...
+ ^
+-* Seite 53, Kapitel 3.1.5, Tafel 3.1 (Vsc)
+ Plazierung der Tafel (bottom float) besser vor Kapitel 3.1.6
+
+ * Page 53ff (PvO)
+ An alternative to picinpar is the pickins package which provides
+ sophisticated picture inclusion (with and without caption, with
+ frames etc.) into a paragraph. Main drawback perhaps: the
+ documentation is very good but right now only available in German.
+
+-* Seite 54, Abbildung 3.2 (MSc)
+ Die Umlaute "u usw. sind nicht korrekt formatiert.
+
+-* Seite 54, Abbildung 3.2, Bildunterschrift (VLS)
+ Anf"uhrungszeichen nicht formatiert ("`, "')
+
+-* Seite 57, 3. Absatz (VSc)
+ Einf"ugen der Kommata: Der Pr"afixbefehl \@enumi"," der f"ur
+ Querverweise verwendet wird"," hat als ...
+
+ * Seite 57, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u./3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: III. Forschungsantrag
+ ^
+ Erg"anze: \item \textbf{Forschungsantrag}
+ ^
+-* Seite 58, 1. Absatz, enumerate-Beispiel (VSc)
+ Einr"ucken der 2. Zeile des letzten \item-Textes:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Listentext, weiterer Listentext,
+ Listentext, \label{w1}
+ :
+ \item Listentext, weiterer Listentext,
+ ......Listentext, weiterer Listentext.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+-* Seite 59, 2. Absatz, \label und \ref Beispiel (VSc)
+ die Label "EX i.", "EX ii." und "A-1" befinden
+ sich alle auf unterschiedlicher Einr"uckungstiefe.
+F"uge folgenden Absatz ein:
+ Die Einr"uckungstiefe wird durch den Stil, in dem der Z"ahler
+ dargestellt wird, beeinflu"st. Bei \Lit{i} wird \zB{} soviel Platz
+ reserviert, da"s die Zahl 8 (viii) dargestellt werden kann. Aus
+ diesem Grund sind die Einr"uckungstiefen im nachfolgenden Beispiel
+ unterschiedlich.
+
+-* Seite 64, code \Lentrylabel (FMi)
+ Change the line
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\}}%
+ \end{verbatim}
+ to
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\\mbox{}}}%
+ \end{verbatim}
+ to avoid an underfull hbox message.
+
+-* Seite 67, Abbildung 3.6 (VSc)
+ F"uge Leerzeichen ein hinter: Mit" "`\(\backslash\)input\{foo\}'
+
+ * Seite 67, 3.3.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: "ubergeht, zur Verf"ugung.
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+-* Seite 68, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ streiche in: Einige "wenige" solcher Erweiterungen wurden
+
+-* Seite 69, \verbatimtabinput (VSc)
+ "ubersetze Inhalt von "testtab.out"
+
+-* Seite 71, \listinginput (VSc)
+ "ubersetze Inhalt von "testtab.out"
+
+-* Seite 71, Kapitel 3.4, 3.Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze Text: w"ahrend in Kapitel 6 ab Seite 143 Gleitobjekte
+ ^^
+-* Seite 72, 1. Absatz, Fu"snoten (VSc)
+ die Abst"ande nach den Fu"snotensymbolen sind unnat"urlich gro"s,
+ so als ob sich in die Definition ein Leerzeichen eingeschlichen hat:
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}~}
+FMi: Hat sich nicht. Allerdings ist vielleicht an anderer
+ Stelle ein Fehler. Im Text ist der Abstand jedenfalls zu weit.
+ Am Fu"s der Seite ist Absicht.
+FMi: bug in changebar.sty
+
+ * Seite 72, Z -2 (OBa)
+ footnoterule should be \footnoterule
+
+-* Seite 73, Z. 3 (GGr)
+ footnoterule should be \footnoterule
+
+-* Seite 75, letzter Absatz von 3.4.2 (GGr,FMi)
+ Ersetze durch:
+ Der Stil von Marginalien wird durch drei Parameter festgelegt:
+ \marginparwidth, \marginparsep und \marginparpush. Ihre
+ Voreinstellungen findet man in Tafel 4.2 auf Seite 87.
+
+========== Kapitel 4 ==============
+
+-* Seite 87, Tafel 4.2 (FMi)
+ The table shows the value for the document styles of LaTeX
+ 2.09. The class files of LaTeX2e have slightly different values:
+ two-sided one-sided
+ 10pt 11pt 12pt 10pt 11pt 12pt
+\oddsidemargin 35pt 29pt 17pt 62pt 55pt 39pt
+\evensidemargin 89pt 80pt 62pt -- -- --
+\marginparwidth 121pt 113pt 95pt 94pt 88pt 73pt
+\topmargin 16pt 21pt 17pt 16pt 21pt 17pt
+\textheight 46 40 38 46 40 38 (in lines)
+
+-* Seite 85, Abbildung 4.1 (VSc)
+ f"uge Komma ein: Paket \texttt{layout} (von Kent McPherson,
+ ^^
+ * Seite 85, Abbildung 4.1 (RHa)
+ die Bezeichnungen sollten uebersetzt werden: Body=Textkoerper,...
+
+ * S. 85, Abbildung 4.1 (TBo)
+ Erste Zeile der Bildunterschrift: "Andere `mit Hilfe das Befehls' in
+ `mit Hilfe des Befehls'.
+
+-* Seite 88, 1. Absatz (VSc)
+ l"osche Wort: um den Schriftgrad auf auf die im Dokument verwendete
+ ^^^
+-* Seite 90, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ Komma entfernen:
+ wie man die horizontalen Seitenlayoutparameter unter
+ Ber"ucksichtigung des normalen Schriftgrades des Dokumentes und des
+ ein- oder zweiseitigen Drucks, berechnet:
+ ^
+-* Seite 92, 1. Absatz (VSc)
+ Ersetze Satz:
+ Die erste Seite von "Uberschriftsbefehlen ...
+ durch:
+ Die erste Seite von "Uberschriftsbefehlen der h"ochsten Gliederungsebenen
+ (wie \verb|\part| oder \verb|\chapter|, aber auch \verb|\maketitle|)
+ wird in den Standardklassen von \LaTeXe{} hingegen mit dem Befehl
+ \verb|\thispagestyle{|plain\verb|}| gebildet.
+
+ * Seite 92, Absatz 2, Zeile 2/5 (TLa)
+ empty/plain in \thispagestyle{..} nicht in \ttfamily
+
+ * Page 92 l. 5 (BDe)
+ Replace "pagestyle{empty}" with "\pagestyle{empty}".
+
+ * Seite 96, Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: \chaptermark, sondern ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 92 Z. 14 (EPi)
+ Ersetze "thispagestyle{empty}" durch "\thispagestyle{empty}".
+
+-* Seite 95, 3. Absatz (VSc)
+ Ersetze Absatz durch:
+ Beim Seitenstil \textsf{headings} verwenden die Gliederungsbefehle
+ automatisch \verb|\markboth| und \verb|\markright| zur Erzeugung
+ von Kopfzeilen, siehe hierzu Tafel 4.3 auf der n"achsten Seite.
+
+ * Seite 96, Abschnitt 4.3.2 (SWi)
+ Im vierten Punkt der Aufz"ahlung ist das Semikolon direkt an das Wort
+ Fu"szeilen zu setzen.
+
+-* Seite 98, 6.-8. Zeile von unten (VSc,FMi)
+ ersetze: \sl durch \slshape
+ \rm durch \normalfont
+
+ * Seite 100, Absatz 1, Zeile 1/2 (FMi)
+ Entferne Klammern: (F"ur diesen ... dar.)
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 101 (FMi)
+ Add a warning that \enlargethispage only modifies the
+ main part of the page: running headers and footers stay
+ unchanged. This means that it is possible to overprint
+ information in the footer if the main text gets too large.
+
+========== Kapitel 5 ==============
+
+-* Seite 103, 3. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge Komma ein: f"ur die Grundumgebungen \texttt{tabular} und
+ \texttt{array}, die mit dem Paket
+ ^
+ * Seite 103, Absatz 4, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: automatisch, sobald ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 103, 5. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: Dabei geht es im einzelnen um
+ ^
+ * Seite 106, 5.2.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u./2 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Index erzeugt (Wenn ... werden.).
+ ^ ^ ^
+-* Seite 107, Tafel 5.1 (CMi,VSc)
+ ersetze: p{width} durch p{breite}
+ ersetze: \parbox{width} durch \parbox{breite}
+
+-* Seite 108, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma: In Spalten, die mit \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} oder
+ \texttt{b}, erzeugt wurden, betr"agt der
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 111, Absatz 3, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Wenn vertikale ... und nach den ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 112, \doublerulesep (VSc)
+ ersetze:
+ Abstand zwischen Linien, die durch zwei aufeinanderfolgende
+ |-Zeichen in der Tabellenpr"aambel oder
+ ^
+-* Seite 114, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: F"ur den Fall, da"s eine bestimmte Spaltenspezifikation
+ ^
+ * Seite 115, 5.3.4; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Paket, wohl aber ... ...colsep{\fill}}}.
+ ^
+ * Seite 116, 2. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ F"uge ein: welches dann zu der \texttt{tabularx}-Pr"aambelspezifikation
+ ^
+ * Seite 116, Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: dings nicht mit Hilfe der >-Syntax ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 117, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: legt zwei Spalten fest, bei denen ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 119, 1. Absatz, letzter Satz (VSc)
+ ersetze letzten Satz durch: So wurden f"ur das Beispiel von Seite 117
+ folgende Werte ausgegeben:
+
+ * Seite 121, 5.4.1; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 v.u. --> \tablehead{...} (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: al, das zwischen Zeilen ... \hline), enthalten.
+ ^
+-* Seite 122, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung: Positions-argumente
+
+ * Seite 124, 5.4.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: unterschiedlichen Spaltenbreiten einer Tabelle auf den ...
+ ^^^^^2^^^^^^^-------1----
+ * Seite 124 5.4.2. zweiter Absatz Zeile 6 ff (DKa)
+ Mit Version 4.00 von longtable wird \setlongtables nicht mehr
+ ben"otigt. Damit entf"allt die Beschreibung:
+ Diese Funktion muß zunächst mit dem Befehl |\setlongtables|
+ ...
+ bis zum Ende des Absatzes auf Seite 125. Ebenso sollte
+ \setlongtables aus der Tabelle auf Seite 126 und der Beschreibung
+ auf Seite 127 verschwinden.
+
+ Vorschlag von David als neue Beschreibung:
+
+ |longtable| unterteilt die Tabelle in mehrere `chunks', die
+ hintereinander gesetzt werden. Da die Tabellenbreiten in späteren
+ chunks die in vorhergehenden nur über den Umweg der |.aux|-Datei
+ beeinflussen können, sind unter Umständen mehrere \LaTeX-Läufe
+ notwendig, bis das Aussehen der Tabellen konvergiert (sollten weitere
+ \LaTeX-Läufe nötig sein, wird dies von \LaTeX\ mitgeteilt). Frühere
+ Versionen machten die Verwendung des |\setlongtables| Befehl zur
+ Steuerung dieses Verhaltens nötig, dies entfällt seit Version~4.00.
+
+ Weiterhin hat longtable seit 1996/12/01 noch zusätzliche Befehle
+ der Art \pagebreak und so erhalten, und unterscheidet mittlerweile
+ \\ und \\* (was ja in nicht umbrechbaren Tabellen die gleiche
+ Bedeutung hat).
+
+-* Seite 124, Bekannte Schwierigkeiten, 3. Punkt (VSc)
+ ersetze:
+ Diese F"alle sind in der (dokumentierten Version des)
+ Paketes beschrieben.
+ durch:
+ Diese F"alle sind in der Dokumentation des Paketes beschrieben.
+
+-* Seite 124, Kapitel 5.4.2, 2.-3. Zeile (VSc)
+ Ersetze Text:
+ mehrseitige Tabellen, bei denen man eine gleichbleibende Tabellenbreite
+ f"ur mehrere Seiten einstellen m"ochte, das
+ durch:
+ mehrseitige Tabellen, bei denen man eine gleichbleibende Tabellenbreite
+ einstellen m"ochte, das
+
+ * Seite 129 in Abbildung (JKn)
+ su sudanese should read su sundanese (2 times)
+ te tegulu should read te telugu (2 times)
+
+ * Seite 130, Abb. 5.5; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 8 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: ...\small\slshape ...
+ ^^^^^
+ * Seite 132, Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: maltrennzeichen wird ... zentriert), breiter ist ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 132, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: Dezimaltrennzeichen
+ ^
+ * Seite 137, multirow; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: sonders gro"s sind, ... verwendet wurden oder ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 137, multirow; Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: 3pt voreingestellt ... verwendet wird, um ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 137, multirow, 2. Absatz (VSc)
+ entferne Komma:
+ die auf 3pt voreingestellt ist, und verwendet wird um
+ ^
+ * Seite 139, Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: man \firsthline ... (zwei besondere Versionen von
+ ^
+ * Seite 141, 5.6.6; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Leerzeichen: zw"olf die gleiche ... multirow wird der ...
+ ^
+========== Kapitel 6 ==============
+
+ * Seite 143, 6.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Leerzeichen: wie ">nicht mehr als \dots"< ... Platz \dots"<
+ ^ ^
+-* Seite 144, \dblfloatpagefraction (VSc)
+ ersetze 0,5 durch 0.5 in: (voreingestellt ist 0.5)
+
+ * Seite 145, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Leerzeichen: Dieser Proze"s erzeugt so lange ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 145, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Ersetze: Gleitobjektseiten, d.h. ... befinden, enthalten.
+ ^
+ * Seite 146, 6.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: tuationen am ... F"ur diesen Zweck ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 151, Abbildung 6.1 (VSc)
+ Ersetze: \floatname{algorithm}{Algorithm}
+ ^^^^^^^^^
+-* Seite 151, Abbildung 6.1 (VSc)
+ F"uge Leerzeichen ein:
+ Definition neuer Gleitumgebungen -- \texttt{Program} und
+ ^^
+ * Seite 152 Letzter Absatz (FVi)
+ Replace this para with:
+ Newer releases of the \textsf{float} package (v1.2 and higher)
+ integrate the functionality of the package \textsf{here} by David
+ Carlisle completely. With older versions one had to first issue
+ \restylefloat{table} and/or \restylefloat{figure} to be able to use
+ the H specifier with the standard LaTeX environments.
+
+ * Seite 153, 6.4.1; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Ersetze: Das Paket floatfig ...
+ ^^^^^^^^
+-* Seite 155 (ADu)
+ In the wrapfig example the "boxit" environment is used but never
+ explained. better use \begin{fminipage}[3in].
+
+ * Seite 155, Absatz 5 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: list) verwendet ... in einem, mit twocolumn ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 155, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: Es ist am einfachsten, den Befehl ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 155, Wrapfig-Beispiel, vorletzte Zeile (VLS)
+ Streiche Klammer: Die Umgebung \Lmenv{wrapfigure}} ist
+ ^
+-* Seite 155, vorletzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung: Zeilen-umbruch
+
+ * S. 156, Absatz 4 (TBo):
+ In Z. 1/2 wird gesagt, da"s eine `tabular' Umgebung verwendet
+ wird, um die Bilder in Abb. 6.4 auszurichten. Dies ist jedoch
+ nicht richtig.
+
+-* Seite 158, \@makecaption and \@isucaption example (JvM,FMi)
+ In both cases is a closing brace missing:
+ \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\wd\tempbox > \linewidth}}%
+ %%% ^ closing brace
+
+========== Kapitel 7 ==============
+
+-* Seite 159, 2. Absatz, 7. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 159, 7.1; Absatz 3, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Leerzeichen: Im Entstehungsjahr von TeX (1979) ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 160, 3. Absatz, 2.Zeile (VSc)
+ 7. Absatz, 5.Zeile
+ vereinheitliche Schreibweise: PostScriptfonts <=> PostScript Fonts
+
+-* Seite 162, 2. Absatz, 8.Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: Blocksatz wirkt
+ ^
+ * Seite 163, Fu"snote 1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze: beschlo"s Knuth, ... einen anderen Namen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 164, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Indem einige METAFONT-Parameter auf ganz ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 166, 2. Absatz, 5.+9.+11. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere 3x Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 166, Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: die Punktgr"o"sen 7, 8, ..., 30 und 36 ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 167, 2. Absatz, 2.Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: die Wenigsten durch die wenigsten
+
+ * Seite 168, 7.3.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: Die Schrift, die man f"ur ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 169, vorletzte Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 170, Absatz 4, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: man am besten ... mittels der
+ Low-Level-\fontseries-Deklarationen ...
+ ^ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 170, Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: \textit und \textsc, die ... Kursivschrift bzw. ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 171, letzte Zeile (FMi)
+ Ersetze \lowercase durch: \MakeLowercase
+
+-* Seite 172, erste Zeile (FMi)
+ Ersetze: wird der Plain-TeX-Befehl \lowercase
+ durch: wird der \LaTeX2e-Befehl \MakeLowercase
+
+ * Seite 173, Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: ge, angefangen mit ... \Huge als gr"o"stem ...
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 173, 7.3.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 7 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: \sffamily zuerst die ... medium 10pt, geladen, ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 173, 7.3.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 8 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: die serifenlose Schrift, breitfett 10pt, und nach ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 174, Fu"snote (GRo,FMi)
+ Ersetze:
+ Alle Pakete, die den \catcode eines in der \nocorrlist benutzten
+ Zeichens "andern, m"ussen ...
+
+ * Seite 175, 7.3.4; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. in Ein- und Ausgabe (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: anderem die Zeichen ... \S und \symbol{32}, ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 176, Zeile 10 in Tafel 7.3 (TCo)
+ ersetze \itseries durch \itshape
+
+ * Seite 177, Abschnitt 7.3.5; Absatz 3, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: fehl \bfseries ... nicht breitfett, was die ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 177, 3. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung: mitt-le-rer
+
+ * Seite 179, 7.4.1; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: einem einzelnen ... Wort) besteht, welcher in einer ...
+ ^ ^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 180, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Schrift gesetzt werden soll ,\zB
+ ^^
+ * Seite 181, Absatz 2, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: dern Sans Schriftfamilie ... und schr"aggestellter ...
+ ^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 181, Absatz 5, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: werden. Jedesmal, wenn dieser ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 183, Absatz 1, Zeile 5 (BBe, FMi)
+ F"uge ein "aufrechte" in:
+ ... sondern den Alphabetbefehl \mathbf f"ur aufrechte
+ alphanumerische Zeichen bzw.
+
+ * Seite 183, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ F"uge ein: Gegebenenfalls
+ ^^
+ * Seite 183, 3. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: was mit den Alphabetbefehlen
+ ^
+ * Seite 183, letzter Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: \SetMathAlphabet-Deklarationen
+ ^
+ * Seite 184, 7.5.1; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Leerzeichen: gen Fontdateien (\zB die .tfm- und .pk-...
+ ^
+ * Seite 185, Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: An der Universit"at Bochum wurden die Computer ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 185, 2. Absatz, 1.Zeile (CLa)
+ Ersetze:
+ "Wenn man nach dem Befehl \documentclass das Paket t1enc angibt,
+ wird ..."
+ durch:
+ Wenn man die Zeile \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} in die Pr"aambel
+ einf"ugt, wird ...
+
+ * Seite 185, Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: k"onnen ebenfalls mit der der Cork-Kodierung ...
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 185, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne: Daneben gibt es ..., da"s nicht nur ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 187, Ende erster Absatz (FMi)
+ F"uge ein: Umlaute und \ss{} werden bei diesen Zeichens"atzen durch
+ Ligaturen mit dem Zeichen " erzeugt, z.B. "s, "a usw. Dies
+ funktioniert nicht korrekt, wenn man das babel- oder german-Paket
+ geladen hat.
+
+ * Seite 188, Abschnitt latexsym (NBe)
+ Ersetze letzten Satz durch:
+ Bei Bedarf k"onnen diese Symbole durch Angabe des Pakets latexsym
+ geladen werden.
+
+ * Seite 189, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma: z.B. in "Uberschriften, oder auf Folien
+ ^
+ * Seite 189, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge Leerzeichen ein/l"osche Komma: 14.4pt, 17.28pt, 20.74pt, und 24.88pt
+ ^
+ * Seite 191, 1. Absatz, 3. Item: infoshow (VSc)
+ l"osche Wort: erscheinen normalerweise auch auf dem Bildschirm.
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 191, Beschreibung von debugshow (FMi)
+ Add: This option might change the typesetting of material in
+ certain circumstances. For this reason it should not be turned
+ on when producing camera ready copy.
+
+ * Seite 191, 2. Absatz, 2. Item: loading (VSc)
+ Ersetze Satz: Zeichens"atze, die ...
+ durch Zeichens"atze, die schon im Format oder in der
+ Dokumentenklasse geladen wurden, werden bei dieser
+ Option nicht mit angezeigt.
+
+ * Seite 191, letzter Absatz, 3. letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Satz: wird \init eingegeben; um den Test zu beenden; \bye oder
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 191, Fussnote 8: fuege ein (HPV)
+ ... Standardnamen auch zu verwenden.
+ ^^
+ * Seite 192, 7.6; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: ">Kodierung"<, ... ">Form"< und ">Gr"o"se"<.
+ ^
+ * Seite 192, 7.6; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: Font mit der gew"unschten ... (d.h., ob ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 192, 3. Absatz: ersetze (HPV)
+ Intern ... richtig unterstuetzt werden [koennen] kann, wenn ...
+ ^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^
+ * Seite 192, 4. Absatz, 2. Item (VSc)
+ f"uge Leerzeichen ein/l"osche Komma: \fontfamily, \fontseries, \fontshape,und
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 194, Tafel 7.10, caption (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: Ist einer "der" Werte m (Medium), wird er weggelassen;
+
+ * Seite 194, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: Der Schriftgrad wird nach dem Befehl \fontsize{<gr"o"se>}{...
+ ^
+ * Seite 194, letzter Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: "traditionellerweise" durch "traditionell"
+
+ * Seite 194, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: doch eine Gummil"ange ist, d.h., wenn er ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 195, 2. Absatz, vorletzte Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: Gr"o"senkorrektur
+ ^
+ * Seite 196, letzter Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: Schriftform
+ ^
+ * Seite 198, Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: eine Standard-Schriftform zugeordnet ...
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 198, 7.6.4; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Teile des Dokumentes ... keinen \fontfamily-Befehl ent...
+ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 198, Abschnitt 7.6.4; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: Wenn m"oglich sollte auf ihren ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 198, 7.7.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: Neue Zeichens"atze ... einzubinden bedeutet, ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 198, Fu"snote 10; Absatz 1, Zeile (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Ungl"ucklicherweise ist die \$/\pounds-Vertauschung ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 199, Kap. 7.7.2, 1. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma: Das dritte Argument ist
+ ^
+ * Seite 199, 7.7.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: ersten vier bezeichnen ... die Familie , die ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 200, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Wie in den vorangegangenen Beispielen ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 201, Absatz 2, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: sind als 10pt, und <12-> f"ur alle ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 202, Die Funktion >leer<, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: minimalem Speicherbedarf.) Bei
+ ^
+ * Seite 202, Die Funktion ">leer"<; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: 10pt ausgelegt ist (... in 10pt), werden ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 203, Die Funktion >gen<, 2. Zeile (VLS)
+ l"osche Komma: cmtt8, cmtt9, und cmtt10
+ ^
+ * Seite 203, Die Funktion >gen<, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma: 8, 9 und 10pt
+ ^
+ * Seite 203 (FMi)
+ There is now also a genb function that generates names for the ec
+ font naming conventions eg <10.95> genb * ecmr -> ecmr1095
+ and there is, of course, a silent variant sgenb.
+
+ * Seite 203, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: tes gibt die leere ... Benutzer davon in Kenntnis ...
+ ^^^
+-* Seite 205, Zeichensatz-Ladeoptionen, 3.Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung: Type-wri-ter
+
+ * Seite 205, Die Funktion ">fixed"<; Absatz ^ ^3 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: Wenn vorhanden, gibt das optionale ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 205, Die Funktion ">sfixed"<; Absatz ^ ^2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: wird \zB verwendet, ... die gro"sen mathematischen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 205, Zeichensatz-Ladeoptionen; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: anderen Zeichensatz umschaltet. Dadurch, da"s ...
+ ^
+-* Seite 206 Z. 11 (PBL)
+ Ersetze {dcmr} durch {cmr}
+
+ * Seite 207, vorletzter Absatz, 7. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze Komma: Zeichensatz verbundene, Parameter zu "andern.
+ ^
+-* Seite 208, Zeile 17 (ADe)
+ Ergaenze Komma: m"oglich wird, W"orter, die Akzente enthalten, korrekt
+ ^
+ * Seite 209, Absatz 2, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ L"osche Klammer: stehen die g"ultigen Standardwerte ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 209, Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: serie und die Schriftform, die f"ur die Fontersetzung ...
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 209, 7.7.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: mentes oder dynamisch innerhalb des Dokumentes, wenn ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 209, 7.7.5; Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: lie foo im Kodierschema ... NFSS erwartet, die folg...
+ ^
+ * Seite 209, Kap. 7.7.5, 2. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Klammer: (Erweiterung (.fd), deklariert sein,
+ ^
+ * Seite 209, Fu"snote 11; Absatz ^ ^1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: Es ist m"oglich, die Generierung ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 211, Absatz 4, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne: Die Symbolfonts werden ... Namen angesprochen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 212, Absatz 4 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: dos. Es beschreibt ... d.h., ob es sich um ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 214, Absatz 3, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: \Set...-Befehl ge"andert werden. ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 215, 7.7.7; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: kann (d.h., da"s er entweder ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 218, shape <...> tried; Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne: NFSS hat eine andere ... geladen, weil es die gew"unschte ...
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 219, Item: "Math version <name> is not defined", 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma: falsch geschrieben oder das Formellayout wurde
+ ^
+ * Seite 219, Redeclaring math symbol <...>; Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: wurde mit einer neuen Deklaration ...
+ ^^^^^^
+ * Seite 220, This NFSS system isn't set up properly; Absatz ^ ^3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: eine \DeclareFontSubstitution- oder die ...
+ ^
+========== Kapitel 8 ==============
+
+ * Seite 222, 2. Absatz, 5./6. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: unterst"utzt von Michael Downes, der in der technischen
+ Abteilung von AMS arbeitete.
+ durch: unterst"utzt von Michael Downes aus der technischen
+ Abteilung von AMS.
+
+ * Seite 222, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Satz: auf Datentr"ager eingereichte Manuskripte akzeptiere.
+
+ * Seite 222 letzte Zeile in 8.1 (FMi)
+ Replace "you should load the amstex package"
+ by "you should load the amsmath package"
+
+ Note that 1.2 release of amslatex introduced amsmath as the
+ successor to amstex. Starting with this release the package amstex
+ should only be used in compatibility mode, i.e., in old documents
+ using \documentstyle. Nearly all documentation in this chapter is
+ nevertheless still valid (if amsmath is used). Exceptions are
+ hopefully all documented in the errata by now. Sorry for the
+ inconvenience but this incompatible change happened after the LaTeX
+ Companion was printed and making a second edition for that reason
+ would look silly in my eyes.
+
+ * Seite 222 first two paragraphs of 8.2.1 (BBe)
+ Replace "amstex" by "amsmath"
+
+ Replace the first sentence of the second paragraph by
+ In the amsmath package, \boldsymbol is to be used for individual
+ bold math symbols and bold Greek letters---everything in math
+ except for bold upright letters (where one would use \mathbf).
+
+ To the list of examples in the second sentence, after "pi", add
+ a bold italic A, and insert "\boldsymbol{A}," in the appropriate
+ place in the code list.
+
+ * Seite 223, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Label/Reference: Die Tafeln 8.13 auf Seite 226 bis 8.18 auf
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 223, letzter Absatz, 5.-7. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze Zeilen durch: kann das \textsf{amsfonts}-Paket zusammen
+ mit dem in Abschnitt 7.7.6 erl"auterten Befehl \verb=\DeclareMathSymbol=
+ verwendet werden.
+
+-* Seite 224, Tafel 8.1 4. Eintrag (ADe)
+ Ersetze "Versions" durch "Versionen"
+
+-* Seite 225 Tafel 8.5 (KSi)
+ \simeq shows a wrong symbol. the correct one should look like a tilde
+ on top of a minus. The symbol shown seems to be only available in the
+ Lucida fonts where it is call "lessmuch".
+
+ * Seite 225, Tafel 8.9, \caption (VSc)
+ Vorschlag statt: Logarithmus"ahnliche Symbole
+ : Funktionsnamen
+
+ * Seite 226, Table 8.13 (GFe)
+ Remove the \dashleftarrow and \dashrightarrow entries, because they
+ do not belong to the AMS-Fonts. (only in the lucida fonts)
+ Add a \Rrightarrow entry.
+ Remove one of the two \rightrightarrows entries.
+ Add an entry for \restriction as synonym for \upharpoonright.
+
+ * Seite 226 table 8.13 (FMi,PNu)
+ \rightleftarrows are shown twice at entries (7,1) and (7,3)
+
+ * Seite 227, Table 8.15 (GFe)
+ Add an entry for \llless as synonym for \lll.
+ Add an entry for \gggtr as synonym for \ggg.
+ Add an entry for \Doteq as synonym for \doteqdot.
+
+ * Seite 228, Table 8.17 (GFe)
+ Add an entry for \doublecap as synonym for \Cap.
+ Add an entry for \doublecup as synonym for \Cup.
+
+ * Seite 228, Table 8.18 (GFe)
+ Remove footnote.
+
+ * Seite 231, Kapitel 8.3.7, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge Punkt ein: nach links bzw. nach oben
+ ^
+ * Seite 232, 8.3.10; Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: Wenn jedoch nicht nur das Ableitungssymbol, sondern ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 233, 1. Absatz (VSc)
+ Empfehlung zum besseren Verst"andnis statt: \sideset{_*^*}{_*^*}\prod_k
+ besser: \sideset{_a^b}{_c^d}\prod_k
+
+ * Seite 233, Kapitel 8.3.11 (VSc)
+ warum ist im linken mathematischen Ausdruck (\smash[b]{\lambda_j} nicht
+ nur die Tiefe, sondern auch die H"ohe geringer ?? Beschreibung besagt
+ etwas anderes.
+FMi: Weil TeX ein anderes Wurzelzeichen verwendet. In beiden F"allen ist
+das \lambda innerhalb der Wurzel. Bei \smash oder \smash[t] w"urde der
+Querstrich der Wurzel durch das \lambda verlaufen.
+
+ * Seite 235, 1. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Kommasetzung: verwendet wird, die im Text eingebettet sind.
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 235, Kapitel 8.3.15, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Zeichen: verf"ugt \textsf{amstex} "uber x\dfrac
+ ^
+ * Seite 239, example on top (GRo)
+ "\dots" should be replaced by "\hdotsfor 2" in the first two rows
+ of the matrix (lines 2 and 4 of the input) to align the last column
+ of the matrix.
+
+ * Seite 239, Section 8.4.3 The Sb and Sp Environments (MMu)
+ In amsmath.sty these environments no longer exist.
+ Use \substack instead as in
+ \sum_{\substack{0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n}} P(i,j)
+ Note, that there is also slightly more general environment
+ subarray, which allows for greater control over horizontal
+ positioning.
+
+ * Seite 240, letzte Zeile (ARo)
+ ersetze: 'funktionen' durch 'funktionieren'
+
+ * Seite 240, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Bei L"angspfeilen wird ... und zweiten >- oder ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 242, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: eine bin"ares Relationssymbol.
+ ^
+ * Seite 245, Kapitel 8.5.7, 1. Absatz, 11. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: ohne er da"s dadurch empfohlen
+ durch: ohne da"s er dadurch empfohlen
+
+ * Seite 246, Kapitel 8.5.8, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: und nach dem dem Einschub wieder
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 248 (GZi)
+ The commands @, and @! (supposedly they yield 1/10 of \, and \!)
+ are not any longer supported with the amsmath package.
+
+ * Seite 248, letzte Zeile von 8.6.3 (ARo)
+ ersetze: 'Feinstellung' soll wohl 'Feineinstellung' hei"sen (jedenfalls
+ lautet es f"unf Zeilen sp"ater so)
+
+ * Seite 249, nosumlimits (VSc)
+ optische Senkrechte: der Divis von "ober- und unterhalb" ragt
+ nicht in den Rand hinaus.
+
+ * Seite 249, Option nonamelimits (ARo)
+ l"osche: anstatt von ober- und unterhalb
+ ^^^
+-* Seite 250, Abschnitt 8.6.6 Zeile -3 (ADe)
+ Ersetze "KLassen" durch "Klassen"
+
+ * Seite 250, 8.6.6; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: s"atzlicher Optionen: ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 250, vorletzte Zeile von 8.6.6 (ARo)
+ setze Komma: und nomath, welche verhindert
+ ^
+-* Seite 252, 3 Zeile des Codes (FMi)
+ it should be: g(\xi,t) not g(x\i,t)
+ (that typo was now caught by the recent LaTeX release which detected
+ and the \i in math mode (where \imath should be used))
+
+ * Seite 255, 4. und 5. letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Einr"uckung:
+ \begin{gather}
+ :
+ :
+ \begin{align*}
+ :
+ ...\end{align*}
+ ...\end{gather}
+
+ * Seite 256, Gleichung 8.59 + unnumerierte Version (VSc)
+ das Kerning f"ur den Subscript "j" f"uhrt zu einem zu gro"sen Abstand
+ (z.B. bei U_ju_j) zum "U" und zum kleinen Abstand zum "u".
+FMi: Font Fehler (reported)
+
+ * Seite 257, Abschnitts"uberschrift (ARo)
+ l"osche: Erweiterungen zur der theorem-Umgebung
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 257, Kapitel 8.8, 2. Absatz, vorletzte Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: Remark
+ durch: Bemerkung
+
+ * Seite 257, Kapitel 8.8, 2. Absatz, 5. Zeile und 3. Absatz 3. Zeile (MC)
+ Die Trennung von "Theorem" in diesen beiden Zeilen ist ein sch"oner Beleg
+ f"ur die im Vorwort zur deutschen Ausgabe gemachte Einschr"ankung, da"s
+ es zur Zeit keine verl"a"sliche M"oglichkeit zum optischen Randausgleich
+ in \TeX{} gibt.
+
+ * Seite 259, Abschnitt 8.8.1; Absatz 3 v.u., Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: k"onnen daher plus- und minus-Anteile ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 261, Abschnitt 8.8.3; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: geben: \... \bfseries} erfolgen.
+ ^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 261, Abschnitt 8.8.3; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Auf diese Weise ... ben"otigten Zeichensatzinformationen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 262, 4. Absatz, Formel (VSc)
+ sollte es nicht b_0 statt b^0 hei"sen??
+
+ * Seite 262, 5. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ sollte es nicht a^0 statt b^0 hei"sen resp. b_0 statt b^0 ??
+
+ * Seite 262, 5. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: wobei die 0 in S gesetzt wird.
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 263, Forrmel (VSc)
+ sollte es nicht a^0 statt b^0 hei"sen resp. b_0 statt b^0 ??
+
+ * Seite 263, Kapitel 8.9.2, 2. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Zeichensetzung: linksb"undig setzte.
+ ^
+ * Seite 263, Kapitel 8.9.2, 2. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Wort: mu"s man leqno angegeben werden
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 263, Kapitel 8.9.2, Item: \mathindent, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: von abgesetzen Formeln bei Verwendung der
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 264 (FMi)
+ Add (somehow): the parameters \abovedisplay... and \belowdisplay...
+ depend on the current font size. For this reason one can't modify them
+ in the preamble of a document using \setlength but need to change
+ the definition of \normalsize etc.
+
+========== Kapitel 9 ==============
+
+ * Seite 265, 9.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Entferne: panisch, Koreanisch, ... Vietnamesisch, mit verschiedenen ...
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 266, Absatz 1, 1. Item (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Anpassung aller Programme ... spezielle(n) Sprache(n):
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 266, 1. Absatz, 2. Item, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: "Ubersetzungen f"ur Elementennamen des Dokumentes,
+ ^^
+ * Seite 266, vorletzter Absatz, 6. letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: mit dem Versendung von Mails
+ durch: mit dem Versenden von Mails
+
+ * Seite 266, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze Komma: Eingabekodierung k"onnen ... neue Standards, wie ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 267, 1. Absatz, 8. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: in Englisch und der in Zielsprache enthalten.
+ durch: in Englisch und der Zielsprache enthalten.
+
+ * Seite 267, 9.1.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: zu definieren. Sie ... Zeichen (\zB Zeichen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 267, 9.1.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: Sprache angepa"st sind (... Kodierung bzw. sp"ater ...
+ * Seite 269, 2. Absatz, 2. Item, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ Trennung: Pos-TeX
+
+ * Seite 267, Abschnitt 9.1.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: physikalischen Sinne ... kann die an es gestellten ...
+ ^^^^^^
+ * Seite 270, Fu"snote 1 (SWi)
+ Am Ende der ersten Fu"snote fehlt der Satzendepunkt.
+
+ * Seite 271, Fu"snoten, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ das von DANTE koordiniert wurde und von Bernd Reichle gepflegt wird.
+ l"osche: ^^^^^
+
+ * Seite 273, 4. Abschnitt, 1. Zeile (SWi)
+ Ersetze 'alle zus"atzliche' durch 'alle zus"atzlichen'.
+
+ * Seite 274; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: S"amtliche zus"atzliche ... zusammen mit den ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 275, 2. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ jetzt besser: german ghyph31.tex % German
+ ^^
+ * Seite 275, Kapitel 9.3, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: werden interne \LaTeX-Definitionen modifiziert;
+ ^^
+ * Seite 276, Abbildung 9.2, 6. letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ Ligaturtrennung: Handbuch (2. Auf"|lage)}
+ ^^
+ * Seite 277, wie Source oben: 3. letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ Ligaturtrennung: Handbuch (2. Auf"|lage)}
+ ^^
+ * Seite 281, Table 9.4 (DMa)
+ entries in the column "French input" should be set in verbatim mode,
+ instead of ttfamily, in order to properly illustrate the user input.
+ Ie the spaces (indicated by _ below) should be removed:
+ point-virgule_;
+ Il dit_: oui
+ Mon Dieu_!
+ Pourquoi pas_?
+
+ * Seite 282, Abschnitt 9.3.3, Zeile 2 (SWi)
+ Ersetze 'einigen' durch 'einige'.
+
+ * Seite 284, Zeile -10 (AzS)
+ Ersetze: per Definition durch: nach Definition
+
+========== Kapitel 10 =============
+
+ * Seite 283, Fu"snote 1; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: Umst"anden \LaTeX eine ... verschafft bzw. durch ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 284, Punkt 4; Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: lung der Bilder ... verwenden [34] oder bereits ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 284, Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze: die Erweiterungen zu ..., mit denen qualitativ hochwertige, ge-
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 287, untere Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Bcenter, Bflushleft ... eine center-, flushleft-
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 287, untere Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 2, Zeile 1+2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Bitemize, Benumerate ... eine itemize-, enumerate- bzw. ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 288; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: der folgende Code:
+ ^
+ * Seite 291; Beschreibung von \branch (TLa)
+ Ersetze: branchid durch zweigid
+
+ * Seite 292, \setdepth; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne: Dies definiert ... ein 3 D-Balkendiagramm
+ ^
+ * Seite 292 (MDa)
+The commands `\legend' appears outside of the `barenv'. This is
+contradictory to the explanations on pages 284-285 which start with
+"Inside a `barenv' environment..."
+
+ * Seite 293 (MDa)
+The description of the command `\setyname' has the argument "x-label"
+which I presume should be "y-label" (cf. the command `\setxname').
+
+ * Seite 295; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne: Manch einer ... eine 3 D-Darstellung ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 295, Eingabe letztes Bsp.; Zeile 5 (TLa)
+ Entferne: \setdepth{10}% 3 D-Ansicht
+ ^
+ * Seite 295, Eingabe letztes Bsp.; Zeile 7 (TLa)
+ Ersetze: \setnumberpos{up}% Wertangabe oberhalb der Balken
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 296, 2. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Klammer: (Abbildung 10.2 auf Seite 298)).
+ ^
+ * Seite 296, Abschnitt 10.2.5; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1+2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: als 2 D-Balkendiagramm ... und dann als 3 D-Diagramm ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 296, Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 3 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Unabh"angige Skalierung von Kurvenabszissen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 297, Abb. 10.1; Eingabe, Zeile 9 (TLa)
+ \setstyle{\bfseries} steht im Widerspruch zur Ausgabe?!
+ Kommentar FMi: wirkt wohl nur auf Achsenbeschriftung deshalb
+ ohne Bedeutung? --- ueberpruefen
+
+ * Seite 297, Abb. 10.1; Bildunterschrift (TLa)
+ Entferne: ... Balkendiagramm -- 2 D-Ansicht
+ ^
+ * Seite 299, \curve...; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Dieser Befehl ... die angegebenen Koordinaten. ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 301, Abschnitt 10.2.7; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: dosprache, die auf ... die verschiedenen Partikelbah-
+ ^
+ * Seite 301, Abschnitt 10.2.7; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: bolen f"ur \LaTeX s \texttt{picture}-Modus ...
+ ^^^^^^^^ ^
+ * Seite 303; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: Der h"aufig verwendete Low-Level-Befehl ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 303, Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 3, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: "Ubersetzung der ... ein ($x$,$y$)-Koordinatenpaar ...
+ ^ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 303; Aufz"ahlung, Punkt 4, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne Komma: derholung der Schritte 1 und 2, ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 303, letzter Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze "\": wie der \line-Befehl implementiert ist
+ ^
+ * Seite 304, Abschnitt 10.3.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Nummern entlang der $x$-Achse ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 304, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze "-": "Aquivalent des \LaTeX-Befehls
+ ^
+ * Seite 306; Absatz 2, Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Ersetze: duziert; dehn < 0) wird. Wenn dehn gleich null ...
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 308, 3. Zeile (SWi)
+ Ersetze: "verschieden" durch "verschiedene".
+
+ * Seite 308, \putfile...; Absatz 1, Zeile 5 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze/Erg"anze: Datei mu"s f"ur jede Zeile ein
+ ^^^^^
+ ($x$,$y$)-Koordinatenpaar ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 308, \putfile...; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze: als Kommentarzeichen ... nach dem $y$-Wert min-
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 308, \putfile...; Punkt 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Erstellung einer Datei mit den ($x$,$y$)-Koordinaten ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 308, 3. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung: Flie"skomma-arith-me-tik
+ ^
+ * Seite 308, Kapitel 10.4, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: gestrichtelten und gepunkteten Linien erweitert wird.
+ ^
+ * Seite 309; Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Verschiebe [23] 2 Zeilen h"oher hinter "`Programmiersprache pic"'
+
+ * Seite 310, Zeile 1, (RHa)
+ Syntax des oval-Befehls:
+ teil ist optionales Argument, also muss es in eckigen Klammern stehen
+ \oval(x-wert,y-wert)[teil]
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 310, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze "-": gew"unschten \TeX-Wert
+ ^
+ * Seite 311, \filltype...; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Der \filltype-Befehl ... f"ur die \circle*- und
+ ^
+ * Seite 315, \begin{bipartite} (VSc)
+ Teile der Parameter und Argumente sind "ubersetzt, andere nicht
+ so leftwd, gapwd, rightwd, gapht, labelwd, leftnode, rightnode
+
+ * Seite 316, 2. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche "'": \textsf{epic}'s
+ ^
+ * Seite 317, 1. Beispiel (VSc)
+ die "bundle" sind im Beispiel nicht untereinandergesetzt;
+ deshalb hat \vspace{1cm} auch keine Auswirkung
+FMi: \par fehlt vor \vspace!
+
+========== Kapitel 11 =============
+
+ * Seite 319, Fu"snote 1; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: ghostscript ist f"ur die verschiedensten Computerplattformen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 321 (und m"oglicherweise an anderen Stellen) (BDe)
+ Replace "Bezier" with "B\'ezier"
+
+ * Seite 320, 1. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|l"osungsunabh"angige statt aufl"osungsunabh"angige
+
+ * Seite 320, 2. Absatz, 1.+3.+4 Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|l"osungs- statt aufl"osungs-
+ korrigiere 2x Ligaturen: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 321, 1. Subitem (2. Zeile) (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|l"osungsunabh"angig statt aufl"osungsunabh"angig
+
+ * Seite 321, Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 3, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: in jeder Auf"|l"osung und ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 321, letztes Item, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ setze Komma: wie z.B. JPEG und LZW, zur Verf"ugung,
+ ^
+ * Seite 323, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: durch das Textformatierungsprogramm
+ ^
+ * Seite 323, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma: festgelegten Seitenaufbau, hervorrufen.
+ ^
+ * Seite 323, Abschnitt 11.1.2; Absatz 3, Zeile 5 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Die vier in ... sind die $X$- und $Y$-Koordinaten ...
+ ^ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 324, 1. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: auf eine nat"urlichen Weise
+ ^
+ * Seite 324, 3. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: mit \TeX\ zu verwenden,
+ ^^
+ * Seite 325, Tafel 11.1 (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligaturen:
+ D # Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+ X # Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+ Y # Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 326, 2. Absatz, 7. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Klammer: mit dem Befehl \epsfig{file=cm.eps,height=3mm}) erzeugt)
+ ^
+ * Seite 327, 2. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung: Bound|ing|box-Parameter
+ ^^
+ * Seite 326, Description bbllx; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Die $X$-Koordinate der unteren linken Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox}
+ ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^
+ * Seite 326, Description bblly; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Die $Y$-Koordinate der unteren linken Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox}
+ ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^
+ * Seite 327, Description bburx; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Die $X$-Koordinate der oberen rechten Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox}
+ ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^
+ * Seite 327, Description bbury; Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Die $Y$-Koordinate der oberen rechten Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox}
+ ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^
+ * Seite 327, Description clip; Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: seiner \texttt{BoundingBox} ausgegeben ...
+ ^^^^^^^^ ^
+ * Seite 327; Absatz 1, Zeile 1+2, 5, 6 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: ... \texttt{BoundingBox}
+ ^^^^^^^^ ^
+ * Seite 327, Abschnitt 11.3.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Abbildung 11.2 ... von 3~cm hat.
+ ^
+ * Seite 329, Kodierung (ADe)
+ Ersetze "1991" durch "1990"
+
+ * Seite 330, 4. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: von Absatzdrehungen vorgenommen werden.
+ ^^^^^^
+ * Seite 333, Abb. 11.3; Eingabe, Zeile 5 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: \begin{rotate}{-90}\hspace*{8mm}Formatklassen
+ ^^
+ * Seite 333; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: zu dem \tabcolsep-Wert von 2~mm
+ ^
+ * Seite 337, vorletzte Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche Komma: einen schwarzen Balken ergibt, und 100 zur Ausgabe von
+ ^
+ * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.5.3; Punkt 4, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: sei die Folge ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.5.3; Punkt 4, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: ein Zeilenumbruch erfolgt ... unkorrekterweise um ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 338, Kapitel 11.6, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze: Um die PostScript-Befehle dieses Paketes zu initialisieren
+ ^
+ * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.6; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: det werden k"onnen, ... siehe die nachfolgenden
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.6; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Beispiele). Das ... \TeX-material wird ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 339, Abschnitt 11.7; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: In Analogie zu ... \textcolor-Befehl, dessen
+ ^
+ * Seite 340, \fcolorbox, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ entweder: Dieser Befehl "ahnelt \colorbox, nur wird
+ oder: Dieser Befehl "ahnelt dem \colorbox-Befehl, nur wird
+
+ * Seite 340, letzter Absatz, Item: rgb (VSc)
+ italic correction fehlt (warum??): Spezifikation \textit{spez}\/ist eine
+ ^^
+ * Seite 342, 2. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ besser: Die meisten, h"aufig sogar alle Zeichens"atze in Tafel 11.6 auf
+
+ * Seite 342, Abschnitt 11.9.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: reduziert. Die ... der Computer-Modern-Fonts wurden ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 342, Abschnitt 11.9.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Sky Research ... die \LaTeX-, \AmS- und Euler-Fonts ...
+ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 342, 3. Absatz, 11. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur 2x: Auf"|l"osung oder Drucker. Dadurch wird besonders
+ bei hoher Auf"|l"osung
+
+ * Seite 343, table 1.6 letzte Zeile (FMi)
+ Zapf Chancery is only available in italic thus the shape column
+ should show "it and not "n".
+
+ * Seite 343, 1. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: wahrscheinlich nur eines der Pakete
+ ^
+ * Seite 343; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Ersetze: text-Fonts durch eine oder ... serifenlosen bzw. Typewriter...
+ ^^^^^ ^^^^
+ * Seite 343, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: (normalerweise die Basisschrift eines Dokumentes),
+ ^
+ * Seite 343; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Entferne/Korrigiere: ter-Schrift aufgef"uhrt, ausgenommen die Pakete
+ ^ ^^
+ * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: che Lucida-Bright-Schriftfamilie ... die Karl-Berry-Namen ...
+ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: cida-Math-Fonts ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 5 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: meln ohne Verwendung von Computer-Modern-Schriften ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 6 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: man auch das Lucida-Bright-... das lucidbrb-(lucidbry-)Paket
+ ^ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 346, Abschnitt 11.9.4; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: fontname den (kurzen Karl-Berry-) Namen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 348, Abschnitt 11.9.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne: Entsprechungen zu Hilfe nehmen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 349, Abschnitt 11.9.7; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: bildung 11.9 ... mit Computer-Modern-Schriften.
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 349, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: von \textsf{NFSS2} zur"uckgreifen, siehe
+ ^
+ * Seite 349, Abschnitt 11.9.7; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: binieren dies mit den Computer-Modern-Schriften ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 350, Z.11 (FMi)
+ Das Paket hei"st mathptm nicht mthptm.
+
+ * Seite 350, Abschnitt 11.9.7; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: da-Bright- und ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 350, Abschnitt 11.10; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Die Adobe-PostScript-Fonts ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 350, Abschnitt 11.10; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: derjenigen, die im ... betrachte als ...
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 351, Tafelunterschrift 11.11 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Original Adobe-Font-Kodierschema ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 351, Tafelunterschrift 11.12 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: DC \TeX-Font-Kodierschema ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 352, Bildunterschrift 11.9 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Computer-Modern-Fonts ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 353, Formel (3) (MWi)
+ Das Summenzeichen ist von the CM-Fonts nicht von den
+ Euler-Fonts (in den Euler-Fonts hat es keine Serifen)
+
+ * Seite 353, Bildunterschrift 11.10 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Euler-Math-Fonts ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 354, Abb. 11.11 (TLa)
+ Typewriter f"allt aus dem Rahmen ... ?!
+
+ * Seite 354, Bildunterschrift 11.11 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Mathtime-Fonts ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 355, Abb. 11.12 (TLa)
+ Typewriter f"allt aus dem Rahmen ... ?!
+
+ * Seite 356 (FMi)
+ Aus unerfindlichen Gr"unden sind beim Drucken alle Klammern,
+ Symbole und Integralzeichen auf dieser Seite verschwunden.
+ Sie sind im PostScript file noch vorhanden!
+ Dies ist im Nachdruck korrigiert.
+
+ * Seite 356, Bildunterschrift 11.13 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Lucida-Math-Fonts ...
+ ^ ^
+========== Kapitel 12 =============
+
+ * Seite 357, 2. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: auseinandersetzen. [35,7,117,8,24,101,102].
+ ^
+ * Seite 357, 3. Absatz: nur eins von beiden (HPV)
+ Abschnitt ... geht dabei naeher [mehr] auf die Formate ...
+ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^^
+ * Seite 360, 1. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: im obigen Beispiel auf die style-Eintr"age auf Seite 14
+ ^^^^^
+ * Seite 361 Bestimmung der Darstellungsform (MSc)
+ Unter(unter)eintr"age k"onnen eigene Schl"ussel haben:
+ \indexentry{aa@\textit{aa}!bb@\textit{bb}!cc@\textit{cc}}{10}
+ Wird zu
+ \item \textit{aa}
+ \subitem \textit{bb}
+ \subsubitem \textit{cc}, 10
+ Dies ist nicht explizit gesagt.
+
+ * Seite 361, Kapitel 12.1.4, 5./6. Zeile (VSc)
+ Abstand/italic correction hinter:
+ Der \textit{schl"ussel} legt dabei die
+ ^
+ * Seite 361, Kapitel 12.1.4, Beispiel Zeile 2 (RSc)
+ Im Index ist das "\delta" nicht zu sehen.
+
+ * Seite 361, Kapitel 12.1.4, 1. Absatz, 4.+5. Zeile (VSc)
+ warum ist das '"u' in kursiv wesentlich fetter als die restlichen
+ Buchstaben?? Fehler im Font??? In diesem Kapitel sind alle Umlaute
+ fetter als die restlichen Buchstaben (siehe auch 10.letzte "a,
+ 7.letzte "u, 3.letzte "o).
+
+ * Seite 362, Abschnitt 12.1.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: kiert ein nicht maskiertes "-Zeichen ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 362, Abschnitt 12.1.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: Teil eines \"-Befehls. ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 364, Abschnitt 12.1.7; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne Leerzeichen: sogar einen Schritt weitergehen ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 364, (MDa)
+ The example definition
+ \newcommand{\Indextt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1@\texttt{#1}}
+ lacks a further closing brace.
+
+ * Seite 364, letzter Absatz, vorletzte Zeile (VSc)
+ italic correction: \index{\texttt{schl"ussel}} und \index{schl"ussel}
+ ^ ^
+
+ * Seite 365, Abb. 12.3, Absatz 2, 1. Zeile v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: in der Pr"aambel des Dokumentes angegeben wurde.
+ ^^
+ * Seite 365, Abb. 12.4, Absatz 2, 1. Zeile v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze analog zu vorhergehender Korrektur.
+
+ * S. 366, Kapitel 12.2.1 bzw. 12.2.2 ("Uberschrift) (SWi)
+ Index oder Indexes, (obwohl beides richtig ist).
+
+ * Seite 368, Option -p nr, 12. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze Dot: vorhanden sein oder die .log-Datei nicht
+ ^
+ * Seite 367/368 Option -g (MSc)
+ ab MakeIndex 2.13:
+ -g setzt `+' als quote, kein Stil mehr erforderlich
+
+ * Seite 368, Option -p nr, 5. Zeile v.u. (TLa)
+ Vereinfache: der Protokolldatei nach der letzten in der Datei
+ ^^ ^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 370, Abschnitt 12.3.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Conflicting entries ... auf zwei verschiedene
+ ^
+ * Seite 371, Tafel 12.1, quote (VSc)
+ statt: '<<
+ richtig: '"'
+
+ * Seite 371, Tafel 12.1, page_compositor (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: "--"
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 372, Tafel 12.2; headings_flag (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Gro"s-/(Klein)buchstaben ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 372, Tafel 12.2; headings_flag (TLa)
+ Entferne: headings_prefix und headings_suffix ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 373 Tafel 12.3 (MSc)
+ suffix_p2 mu"s suffix_2p lauten.
+ suffix_p3 mu"s suffix_3p lauten.
+ suffix_pm mu"s suffix_mp lauten.
+ Im Beispiel auf Seite 378 sind die Namen korrekt.
+
+ * Seite 374, Absatz 4, Zeile 3 (MiB)
+ korrigiere: ...die Option -p, die auf Seite 368 beschrieben ist).
+ ^^^
+ * Seite 377, Abschnitt 12.4.5; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: betrachtet, und ... Buchstaben. Dies bedeutet
+ ^
+ * S. 377, 3. Absatz, 5. Zeile (SWi)
+ ersetze 'Bearbeitung obigen Indexeintr"age'
+ durch 'Bearbeitung obiger Indexeintr"age'.
+
+ * Seite 378, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: A--11, und B--5.
+ ^
+ * S. 378, 3. Zeile (SWi)
+ ersetze 'Nach einen Durchlauf' durch 'Nach einem Durchlauf'.
+
+ * Seite 380, Abbildung 12.7, 15. Zeile (VSc) (ditto Abb. 12.8)
+ l"osche: k"onnen Benutzer Daten in mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse Indizes
+ ^^^^^
+ * Seite 382, Abbildung 12.9, nach 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: \usepackage[german]{babel}
+
+ * Seite 382, Abbildung 12.9, 5. Zeile (VSc)
+ "andere: \newindex{not}{ndx}{nnd}{Notationsliste}
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ (siehe 12.11)
+========== Kapitel 13 =============
+
+ * Seite 387, code middle of the page (GGr,FMi)
+ First example is missing a closing brace:
+
+\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{%
+ [{#1\ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}]}
+ ^
+ Second example would nowadays be better done with \textsuperscript:
+
+\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{%
+ {\textsuperscript{#1}\ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}}
+
+ * Seite 387, vorletzter Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze: sortiert die "Seitennummern" -> "Nummern"
+
+ * Seite 389ff (MSc)
+ Die Definition des BibTeX-Logos ist fehlerhaft (fehlt ein \textnormal)
+ wie man an den Kolumnentiteln leicht sehen kann.
+
+ * Seite 389, Kapitel 13.2, 1. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ italic correction: \cite{sschl"ussel\/}
+
+ * Seite 390, Abbildung 13.1, 4.Item, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 393, Abschnitt 13.2.2; item alpha (TLa)
+ Hinweis auf Sortierung nach Labeln (s. a. S. 398, Abb. 13.6)
+
+ * Seite 396 (FMi)
+ Extend the source of example to include abstract and keyword field
+ which then can be shown in output of printbib auf Seite 410
+
+ * Seite 399, Abbildung 13.7, Typ: apalike, (VSc)
+ warum erscheint hier als "Uberschrift "References" statt "Literatur" ?
+
+ * Seite 401, Abbildung 13.8, 6. Zeile von unten (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: \section{Beispiel f"ur Verweise in einem mit \texttt{include}
+ ^^^
+ + Seite 402, Abbildung 13.9, Resultat von Text oben
+
+ * Seite 407, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze: so da"s die Wahl des einen oder anderen
+ ^^
+ * Seite 407, Abschnitt 13.4; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Ersetze: Eine Reihe von ... verf"ugbar. Die
+ ^^
+ * Seite 409, Zeile 5 (RSc)
+ In dem Wort schl"ussel-Argument ist der Umlaut als "u dargestellt.
+
+ * Seite 409, bibkey-Item, 10. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze: nach mehreren Schl"usselw"ortern:
+ ^
+ * Seite 409, printbib-Item, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze: C-Shell-Script
+ ^
+ * Seite 409, Abschnitt 13.4; item bibclean (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: BiBTeX-Literaturdatenbank ... auf
+ UNIX-, Vax-/VMS- und MS-DOS-Plattformen
+ ^ ^ ^ ^
+ * Seite 411, vorletzter Absatz, letzte + 3.letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere 2x Ligatur: Auf"|listung statt Auflistung
+
+ * Seite 412, Zeile 21; Abschnitt 13.5.1, Zeile 5 (WJu)
+ Ersetze in schl"ussel das Anf"uhrungszeichen-u durch echten
+ Umlaut.
+
+ * Seite 412, Kapitel 13.5.1, Beispiel (VSc)
+ Update??: @book{lamport94, .... year=1994}
+
+ * Seite 412, vorletzter Absatz (PVi)
+ Say explicitly that quotes or braces *must* be omitted around
+ abbreviations like the month names.
+
+ * Seite 417, Abschnitt 13.5.2; Absatz 2, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze: gesamten Eintrag begrenzen). Um ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 419, 3. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|f"uhrt statt auff"uhrt
+
+ * Seite 423, Item: article + book, jeweils 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ Satzendepunkt fehlt (article nur im Sinne der Allgemeinheit,
+ da eigentlich kein Satz. Es sollte alternativ nur ein Satzendepunkt
+ bei den Items book, misc, unpublished).
+
+ * Seite 423, Tafel 13.2 (VSc)
+ italic correction vor allen Doppelpunkten, die den Worten
+ "Zwingend" und "Optional" folgen.
+
+ * Seite 425, Tafel 13.3, edition-Item, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|lage statt Auflage
+
+ * Seite 425, Tafel 13.3, edition-Item, 1. Zeile (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Die Auf"|lage eines Buches, z.\.B. ">Zweite"<. Sie ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 425, Tafel 13.3, type-Item, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Vertausche: man anstelle ... chapter = "1.2",
+ ^^
+ * Seite 428, Tafel 13.5, if$-Funktion (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: F_1 ausf"uhren, wenn ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 431, Abschnitt 13.8.1, FUNCTION fin-entry, Zeile 6 (TLa)
+ Entferne: skip$
+ ^
+ * Seite 433, vorletzte und letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere 2x Ligatur: Auf"|lage statt Auflage
+
+ * Seite 434, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|lage statt Auflage
+
+========== Kapitel 14 =============
+
+ * Seite 439, Fu"snote 1, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ setze Komma: des Basissystems zu erhalten, mu"s man lediglich die Datei
+ ^
+ * Seite 440, Kapitel 14.2.1, 2. Absatz, ab 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ statt: Benutzerkommentare k"onnen durch Eingabe des ^^A-Zeichens
+ eingegeben werden.
+ besser: Kommentare m"ussen durch ein ^^A-Zeichens eingeleitet werden.
+
+ * Seite 444, Tafel 14.1, Item: \DeleteShortVerb (VSc)
+ erg"anze: \DeleteShortVerb{\zeichen}
+ ^^^^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 444, Tafel 14.1, Item: \MakeShortVerb (VSc)
+ erg"anze: \MakeShortVerb{\zeichen}
+ ^
+ * Seite 444 table 14.1 (FMi)
+ We should also describe the LaTeX counters IndexColumns (number of
+ columns in the index) and GlossaryColumns (number of columns in the
+ history listing).
+
+ * Seite 444, Z.-6 (FMi)
+ Satzendepunkt fehlt.
+
+ * Seite 445, Tafel 14.1, Item: \actualchar (VSc)
+ l"osche: Zeichen zur Trennung des >>Sortierschl"ussels und des
+ ^^
+ oder: Zeichen zur Trennung des >>Sortierschl"ussels<< und des
+ ^^
+ richtig: Zeichen zur Trennung des "Sortierschl"ussels" und des
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 446, \endfoot (VSc)
+ Linienst"arke verdoppelt durch Zusammentreffen von Seitenumbruch
+ direkt vor einer \hline f"ur neue "Uberschrift, deshalb f"allt
+ \hline von "Uberschrift mit \hline von \endfoot zusammen.
+ Automatische Abhilfe ? (w"u"ste ich auch gern, da ich immer manuell
+ korrigiere !)
+
+ * Seite 447 table 14.1 (MDa)
+ In the last section of this table, "Layout and typestting parameters",
+ the commands `\tt' and `\sl' appear. (Cf. your own remark in the
+ errata file regarding page 350.)
+
+ * Seite 449, Kapitel 14.2.8, 1. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Zeichensetzung: Es ist relativ einfach, eine .doc-Datei
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 449, Kapitel 14.2.8, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ ersetze wegen Wortwiederholung: da"s sie allein durch Umbenennen der
+ ^^^^^^ ^^
+ * Seite 449ff Kapitel 14.3 (FMi)
+ Seit LaTeX2e 95/12/01 ist docstrip in der Lage auch mehr als eine
+ Datei parallel zu erzeugen. Diese erweiterte Funktionalitat ist
+ momentan nur in der dokumentierten Fassung des Codes beschrieben
+ (d.h. docstrip.dtx).
+
+ * Seite 450, Abbildung 14.1, links, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge "!" ein wegen (rechts, 8. Zeile von unten}:
+ \textbf{Sch"on, Sie verwenden doc!}
+ ^
+ * Seite 450, Abbildung 14.1, rechts, 11. Zeile von unten (VSc)
+ ist das "'" absichtlich dort? :
+ \changes{v2.2}{17 Nov 94}{"uberfl"ussiges 'item entfernt}
+FMi: ja alte konvention \ darzustellen :-)
+
+ * Seite 450, Abbildung 14.1, rechts, Absatz 3, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: \newcommand{docsamplecmd}[1]{\texttt{doc:}...
+ ^
+ * Seite 451, Abbildung 14.2, links, Abschnitt 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: nen Text in kursiver ... verwenden doc!
+ ^
+ * Seite 451, Abbildung 14.2, links, Abschnitt 3, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: 3 \newcommand{docsamplecmd}[1]{\texttt{doc:}..
+ ^
+ * Seite 453, Abschnitt 14.3.1, Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: gabe von \keepsilent ... wird ein gro"ser ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 453, Abschnitt 14.3.1, Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze/Ersetze: hinaus stehen ... zur Verf"ugung --- N"aheres ist ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 454, Kapitel 14.4, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc)
+ erg"anze: da"s weitere Aktionen des Benutzers n"otig werden.
+ ^
+========== Anhang A ==============
+
+ * Seite 459, Kapitel A.1, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: Vorteile der Konsistenzspr"ufung von
+ ^
+ * Seite 460 (FMi)
+ As a general comment we should remark that when nesting command
+ definitions, eg a \renewcommand inside a \newenvironment one has to
+ double the # characters denoting the arguments when refering to the
+ arguments of the inner definition, eg
+
+ \newenvironment{foo}[1]
+ { ... #1 % argument of environment foo
+ \renewcommand\bar[2]{ ...
+ ##1 % argument of command \bar
+ #1 % argument of environment foo
+ ##2 % argument pf command \bar
+ }%
+ ... #1 % argument of environment foo
+ }{...}
+
+ * Seite 460 following (FMi)
+ \newcommand and \renewcommand do now support a star form which make
+ it illegal to use \par (or an empty line) in the argument(s) of the
+ command being defined. This can be helpful for tracking down errors
+ of missing closing argument braces and can be used if a command is
+ intended to be used only within paragraphs.
+
+ * Seite 460, Abschnitt \newcommand{\EPsI}; Absatz 5, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ l"oesche: \index{\Ps!Encapsulated}}\index{EPs}}
+ ^
+ * Seite 462, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc)
+ l"osche: verwendet, so da"s damit wird das gleiche Resultat
+ ^^^^
+ * Seite 462, 3. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge Leerzeichen ein: >>unsichtbare Linie<<, da"s die
+ ^
+ * Seite 463, 3. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc)
+ f"uge ein: Zusammenfassung in einer quote-Umgebung.
+ ^^
+ * Seite 468, Abschnitt A.1.3; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: \newcommand{\labelenumiii}{...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 468, Abschnitt A.1.3; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: \newcommand{\labelenumiv}{...
+ ^
+ * Seite 468, Abschnitt A.1.4; Absatz 'stretch', Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: Positionierung von Text vorzunehmen bzw. ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 469, Z. 4 (EPi)
+ Entferne Akzent von: Did\^ot.
+
+ * Seite 469; Absatz dd (TLa)
+ Entferne: ... eines franz"osischen Zolls = ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 472, Zeile -5 (UMa)
+ Ersetze:
+ von TeX dar, und zur Umsetzung ...
+ durch:
+ von TeX dar. Zur Umsetzung ...
+
+ * Seite 472, Zeile -1 (UMa)
+ Boxen k"onnen nach oben, unten, links und rechts ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 473, Abschnitt Rule; Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: der Kolumnentitel vom Haupttext.
+ ^
+ * Seite 474, Zeile 7 (UGo)
+ The optional arguments to \raisebox are exchanged: "height" comes
+ before "depth".
+
+ * Seite 476, Abschnitt parbox-Beispiel; Absatz 3 v.l., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: lich ist, den Text
+ ^
+ * Seite 476, Abschnitt parbox-Beispiel; Absatz 4 v.l., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: oft unm"oglich ist, den Text
+ ^
+ * Seite 479, Abschnitt A.2.2; Absatz 3, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: zu erreichen. In ... Benutzers, n"otigenfalls ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 480, Zeile 10 (UMa)
+ Kein Komma vor und:
+ ... in den der gesetzte Text abgespeichert und
+
+ * Seite 482, Zeile 15 (WJu)
+ Ersetze YYYY/MM/DD durch JJJJ/MM/TT.
+
+ * Seite 483, Tafel A.4; item \NeedsTeXFormat, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze/Entferne: Ben"otigt Format ... einem Versionsdatum nicht ...
+ ^ ^
+ * Seite 485, 2ter Absatz, Zeile 4 (UMa)
+ ... das sp"ater mit \usepackage geladen wird.
+ ^^^^^^^
+ * Seite 485, Abschnitt A.3.3; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: gekn"upft werden. ... beispielsweise, Dateien
+ ^
+ * Seite 486, Abschnitt A.3.4; Absatz 3 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze: tionen werden ignoriert. ... wird der in
+ ^
+ * Seite 486, Abschnitt A.3.4; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: bearbeiten, in der sie ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 487, Abschnitt A.3.6; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze: tionen, die von der ... dem entsprechenden
+ ^
+ * Seite 490, Abschnitt A.3.8; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Entferne: zur Erzeugung der ... (welche die gesetzte
+ ^
+ * Seite 493, 2.Zeile: (TQ)
+ Ersetze "s: einfache Beispiel (das einen ...)
+ ^
+ * Seite 494, Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Dieses Beispiel erzeugt ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 495; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Ersetze: Zum Vergleich von ... Verf"ugung. In seinem
+ ^
+ * Seite 495; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: test-Argument k"onnen ... explizite Werte wie 20cm ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 496, 2ter Absatz, Zeile 3 (UMa)
+ Ersetze ; durch ,
+
+ * Seite 496 (FMi)
+ Add a remark that one can't use \isodd to directly test \value{page}
+ and expect correct information because the value of this counter
+ isn't always correct due to TeX's asyncronous output routine.
+
+ * Seite 498 (ASc)
+ The host pit-manager.mit.edu has changed its name to rtfm.mit.edu.
+
+ * Seite 498; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Ersetze: nach einem Benutzernamen und Passwort ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 498, Zeile 7 von unten (SWi)
+ korrigiere Trennung im Wort 'Ziel-adresse'.
+
+
+========== Anhang B ==============
+
+ * Seite 500, Z. 1 (MSc,FMi)
+ Es mu"s: Der Befehl cd ctan: hei"sen (mit Doppelpunkt)
+ ^
+ * Seite 500; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: en mit xspace im Namen ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 502; Absatz 5, Zeile 2 (TLa)
+ Entferne: anschauen, bevor man entscheidet ...
+ ^^^^^
+========== Literatur ==============
+
+ * Seite 505, [1], 11. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: Addison-Wesley, 1992
+ ^
+ * Seite 505, [2], 6. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere: Encapsulated PostScript beschrieben.
+ ^
+ * Seite 506, [10], Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: analysiert. Das Programm ... von Initialisierungsdateien ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 507, [17], Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Eine Beschreibung ... von sprachspezifischen ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 509, [30], 10. Zeile (VSc)
+ "ubersetze: ibidem -> ebenda
+ besser: Diagrams with TeX von Michael Ramek, S. 227-258.
+
+ * Seite 509, [34], Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: schriften von ... METAFONT Fonts ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 509, [35], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Die Beschreibung des Bourne-Shell-Skripts latexindex zur ...
+ ^ ^ ^
+ * S. 510, Literaturstelle 41, 3. Zeile von unten (SWi)
+ korrigiere Silbentrennung von 'kur-zen'.
+
+ * Seite 510, [41], Zeile 4 (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: zifiziert dessen ... f"ur einen 32-Bit-Zeichencode, ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 512, [56], Zeile 5 (TLa)
+ Entferne: wicklung von TeX, METAFONT und Computer Modern ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 512, [60], 3. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Ligatur: Neuauf"|lage statt Neuauflage
+ + Update: "Ubersetzung ins Deutsche -> Referenz [??]
+
+ * Seite 513, [69], Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: neue Benutzerkreise erschlie"sen bzw. Probleme ...
+ ^
+ * S. 515, Literaturstelle 80, 5. Zeile (SWi)
+ korrigiere Silbentrennung von 'Benutzer-oberfl"ache'.
+
+ * Seite 515, [81], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Entferne: Ein detaillierter "Uberblick "uber verschiedene Wege ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 517, [98], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Es benutzt die ... diagonale Pfeile, oder man ...
+ ^
+ * Seite 517, [105], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa)
+ Erg"anze: Aufs"atze aus verschiedenen Schaffensperioden ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 517, [107], Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: Seit 1906 ist das ... Chicago Press die Standardreferenz ...
+ ^^
+========== Index =================
+
+ * Seite 519--554, pauschal (TLa)
+ Es fehlen etliche Bindestriche: *-Fonts, *-Option, *-Paket, *-Programm,
+ *-Klasse, *-Umgebung, *-L"ange, *-Farb*, *-Z"ahler, etc.
+
+ * (JKn)
+ I suggest to index the table 5.4 (page 129) under `language'
+ and the table on bottom of page 141 under `SI'.
+
+ * Seite 523 (FMi)
+ Bindestrich
+ siehe auch Silbentrennung
+
+ * Seite 526, Indexeintrag dd (MCl)
+ Ersetze Di\^{o}t durch Didot
+
+ * Seite 527, Indexeintrag Didot (MCl)
+ Ersetze Di\^{o}t durch Didot
+
+ * Seite 550 (SSl)
+ table Umgebung: fett 143f nicht 104
+
+ * Seite 531 (MSc,FMi)
+ Indexeintrag f"ur Geviert sollte 61 und nicht 62 sein;
+ ditto f"ur Durchschu"s (Seite 528) und Ausschlu"s (Seite 521).
+
+ * Seite 553 (ARo)
+ Indexeintrag f"ur \vector sollte 300 und nicht 301 sein
+
+========== Zur Entstehungsgeschichte
+
+ * Seite 555, 2. Absatz, 4. + 7. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere 2x Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung
+
+ * Seite 555; Absatz 3, Zeile 3 (TLa)
+ Korrigiere: -Side Studios. Frank ... in eine \LaTeXe-Klassendatei ...
+ ^^
+ * Seite 555, 5. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc)
+ korrigiere Trennung, statt "Mar-kup" setze "Mark-up"
+
+ * Seite 555, 5. Absatz (VSc)
+ dieser Absatz enth"alt 6 aufeinanderfolgende Zeilen mit Trennung
+
+ * Seite 556; Absatz 3 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa)
+ Entferne: Ein harter Seitenumbruch ... jeder zehnten Seite ...
+ ^
+
+==================================================
+
+Ein Dankesch"on an alle, die Fehler entdeckt und gemeldet haben.
+Namentlich aufgef"uhrt sind alle Personen, die einen Fehler zuerst
+gemeldet haben.
+
+ADe Andre Deparade
+ADu Alain Dupuis
+ARo Andreas Rotterdam
+ASc Andreas Schwab
+AzS Axel zur Strassen
+BBe Barbara Beeton
+BDe Bernard Desruisseaux
+BRa Bernd Raichle
+CLa Claus Langhans
+DKa David Kastrup
+EPi Eric Picheral
+CMi Christel Mittelbach
+FMi Frank Mittelbach
+FVi Frode Viste
+GFe Gabriel Valiente Feruglio
+GGr George Graetzer
+GRo Guenter Rote
+GZi Georg Zimmermann
+HPV Hans-Peter Vetter
+JKn Joerg Knappen
+KSi Kimmo Sipila
+LSD Luzia S. Dietsche
+MiB Michael Brade
+MCl Matthias Clasen
+MDa Mats Dahlgren
+MMu Martin C M"uller
+MSc Martin Schr"oder
+MWi Marcus Wissmann
+NBe Nelson Beebe
+OBa Øyvind Bakke
+PBL Peter Busk Laursen
+PNu Peter Nuechter
+PVi Philip A. Viton
+PvO Piet van Oostrum
+RHa Ralph Hangleiter
+RSc Ralf Schoenstein
+SSl Schorsch Slickers
+SPi Stefan Pichel
+SWi Stefan Wilkes
+TBo Tilmann B"o"s
+TCo Tobias Conrad
+TLa Thomas Lauke
+TQ Thomas Quintus
+UGo Ulrich Goldschmitt
+UMa Ulrich M"anz
+VLS Volker Solinus
+VSc Volker RW Schaa
+WJu Werner J"urgens
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a72ba3400d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+ LaTeX Error Reports
+
+ 12 January 1999
+
+ERROR REPORTS
+
+Before you report an error please check that:
+
+ * Your LaTeX system is not more than one year old. New LaTeX
+ releases occur at 6 monthly intervals, thus your problem may
+ have already been fixed.
+
+ * The error is not already fixed by a patch added recently to the
+ current distribution. If you have access to a CTAN archive then
+ you can easily check whether there is already a patch that fixes
+ your problem; so please do so. The patches are described in the
+ files patches.txt and ltpatch.ltx; these are in the current
+ distribution. This check is especially important if you are using
+ a distribution that is more than one month old.
+
+ * The error is not already mentioned in the documentation of the
+ distribution, e.g. in a .dtx file (in this case it is a feature :-).
+
+ * The error has not already been reported. If you have WWW
+ access, you can search the LaTeX bugs database using this URL:
+
+ http://www.latex-project.org/bugs.html
+
+ * The error is not caused by software other than the core LaTeX
+ software that is produced and maintained by the LaTeX3 project
+ team (please report problems with other software to the authors
+ or suppliers of that software).
+
+ * The error is not caused by using an obsolete version of any file or
+ of other software.
+
+ * You are using the original version of all files, not one that has
+ been modified elsewhere.
+
+If you think you have found a genuine bug in a recent version of the
+core LaTeX software, please report it in the following way:
+
+ * Prepare a *short* test file that clearly demonstrates your
+ problem; see below for a discussion of `short'.
+
+ * Run this file through latex to obtain the transcript file
+ (often .log) since you will need to submit this file also.
+
+ * Generate a bug report template by running the file
+ latexbug.tex through LaTeX.
+
+ * Fill in the spaces in the generated template file. Please note that
+ the reporting language is *English* irregardless of the fact, that
+ the address you are sending the bug report to, might not be in an
+ English speaking country. Reports received in a language other than
+ English might not be understandable for the person currently
+ looking at bug reports!
+
+ * Include all necessary information, especially a complete input
+ file, a complete transcript file, and all other files used (if they
+ are not standard).
+
+ Please check carefully to ensure that any non-standard files are
+ essential to the bug; and remember that we cannot debug files not
+ supplied by us.
+
+ Any such non-standard files should be included in a `filecontents'
+ environment at the start of your input file! This allows us to
+ run your test file without a lot of manual preparation; this is
+ essential since we have to deal with many reports, not just with
+ the one written by you.
+
+ * Please note that it is important to make the input file as short
+ as possible since this will enable us to find and fix the error
+ quickly. It also helps us because then we can often use it as a test
+ file for future releases.
+
+ We would expect most files to be less than 60 lines, and very
+ rarely to be longer than 100 lines.
+
+ This can often be achieved by defining a command to be some
+ arbitrary text and using this several times if it is necessary to
+ generate longer bits of text.
+
+Error reports concerning UNCHANGED versions of CORE LaTeX files
+which are less than one year old should be sent by E-mail to:
+
+ latex-bugs@latex-project.org
+
+You will receive an acknowledgement by E-mail containing at the
+beginning of its subject line a problem reference of the form
+category/number, e.g. latex/1234. Please use this subject line in ALL
+further E-mails concerning the problem. Otherwise your reply will be
+categorized and filed separately.
+
+
+LAYOUT PROBLEMS
+
+If you think you have found a bug or some problematic behavior that
+has been present in LaTeX for a long time (e.g., it was already in
+LaTeX 2.09) you are, of course, equally welcome to report this, using
+the above procedure. However, please note that we will normally not
+change layout decisions made in the LaTeX standard classes (which are
+derived from their 2.09 counterparts); nor will we change layout
+decisions or the behaviour of core commands, even when these are
+questionable from a typographic point of view, since such changes
+would make thousands of documents invalid. See also the file
+ltnews07.tex with regard to this policy.
+
+
+
+DOCUMENTATION ERRORS
+
+If you find an error in one of the following books:
+
+ TITLE Author Errata File
+
+ The LaTeX Manual Lamport manual.err
+ The LaTeX Companion Goossens, Mittelbach, Samarin compan.err
+ The LaTeX Graphics
+ Companion Goossens, Mittelbach, Rahtz grphcomp.err
+ Das LaTeX Handbuch Lamport handbuch.err
+ Der LaTeX Begleiter Goossens, Mittelbach, Samarin begleit.err
+ The LaTeX Web Goossens, Rahtz webcomp.err
+ Companion
+
+then please check first whether it is already mentioned in the errata
+file for that book (these files are part of the LaTeX distribution).
+If this is not the case then please report the error to the address
+given in that corresponding errata file.
+
+Please *do not* send such reports to the latex-bugs address.
+
+
+--- Copyright 1997,1998 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fc6c0501688
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9e734529ea9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,561 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: cfgguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+
+\newcommand{\filesection}[1]{\subsection{\sffamily{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\iniTeX}{ini\TeX}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
+
+\title{Configuration options for \LaTeXe}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998, 2001, 2003 \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+ All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{14 February 2003}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\newpage
+
+\section{Configuring \LaTeX}
+
+Since one of the main aims of the new standard \LaTeX{} is to give all
+users the freedom provided by a reliable document processing system
+linked to a highly portable document format, the number of
+configuration possibilities is strictly limited. The reasons for this
+are explained in more detail in the article
+\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file \texttt{modguide.tex}.
+An important consequence of this is that any document that relies on
+any extension package must declare this package within the document
+file; this helps to ensure that the document will work at a different
+site, where the \LaTeX{} system may be configured differently.
+
+Local configuration options are, by convention, placed in
+`configuration files', which have extension |.cfg|. This document
+describes the possibilities for configuration in this release of
+\LaTeX; it also explains how to configure the font definition files to
+take advantage of the available fonts.
+
+The last section considers briefly how to proceed if you require
+further customisation of the formatter.
+
+
+\section{System configuration}
+
+\filesection{texsys.cfg}
+
+This is the only configuration file that \emph{must} be present.
+During installation, if \LaTeX\ cannot find a file with this name
+then a default file |texsys.cfg|, consisting entirely of comments, is
+written out and used. Note that, until this file has been read,
+\LaTeX{} is not able to test reliably whether a given file exists on
+the system.
+
+The contents of the file |texsys.cfg| allow \LaTeX{} to cope with
+various differences between the behaviours of different \TeX{} systems,
+mainly in relation to file handling. The default version of this file
+contains, in its comments, possible settings that may be needed for a
+range of \TeX{} systems. For more information, typeset the file
+|ltdirchk.dtx|.
+
+If you have copied your \LaTeX{} installation from a computer that
+used a different operating system then you may well have a version of
+|texsys.cfg| that will make it difficult to install \LaTeX{} on your
+system. If this happens then start the process again with an empty
+|texsys.cfg| file; this will produce an installation that should, at
+least, allow you to typeset the documentation. However, it is
+possible that \LaTeX{} can still find only those files that are in the
+current directory; in this case you must set the macro |\input@path|
+correctly for your system.
+
+
+\section{Configuring the \LaTeX\ format}
+
+There are four configuration files that enable personal preferences to
+be incorporated into the \LaTeX{} format file |latex.fmt|. The range
+of preferences that can be configured by these files is strictly
+limited as this helps to ensure document portability.
+
+All four files work in the same way: if the file \m{file}|.cfg| is
+found, it will be input by \iniTeX; otherwise a default file
+\m{file}|.ltx| will be input; this is sometimes done via a
+minimal \m{file}|.cfg| that simply inputs \m{file}|.ltx|. Thus,
+providing your own version of any of these |.cfg| files can completely
+override any settings in the corresponding default standard |.ltx|
+file.
+
+
+\subsection{Font configuration}
+
+Before you even think about configuring the font declarations by
+producing a file |fontmath.cfg| or |fonttext.cfg|, you should
+read the documented file |fontdef.dtx|. This is the source file from
+which the default files |fonttext.ltx| and |fontmath.ltx| are
+produced; it contains information concerning the
+contents of the default files and what sort of customisation is
+possible. In particular, it describes in detail the effects of
+individual customisations on document portability including: which
+customisations can be made without endangering the ability to exchange
+documents with other sites (even if the formatting differs); and which
+things should be left untouched because they will make your system so
+different from others that the documents it produces will be
+non-portable.
+
+\textbf{WARNING } Please note that use of either of these font
+configuration files has the following consequences.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Since the content of the file |fontdef.dtx| \emph{might}
+ change in the future, anyone writing a font configuration file
+ must be prepared to update it for use with future releases.
+ \item Documents produced on your system are likely, at best, to be
+ portable only in the sense of being processable at a different
+ site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different
+ fonts are used.
+ \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in
+ diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format
+ that does not use any configuration files.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+\filesection{fonttext.cfg}
+
+The file |fonttext.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use
+of fonts in text modes.
+
+If it exists, it defines which font shapes, families and encodings are
+normally used in text mode, as well as the behavior of font attribute
+commands such as |\textbf| etc.
+
+It could be used, for example, to produce a \LaTeX\ format that, by
+default, typesets documents using Times fonts. Be warned, however,
+that such customisation can have unfortunate consequences; so please
+read carefully this section and the file |fontdef.dtx| below if you
+are thinking of doing this.
+
+Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}.
+
+\filesection{fontmath.cfg}
+
+The file |fontmath.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use
+of fonts in math mode.
+
+If it exists, it defines which fonts in which sizes are used in math
+mode, and how they are used. It also defines all the math mode
+commands that `are likely to' depend on the choice of math fonts used
+(e.g.~commands that depend on the position of a glyph in a math font).
+
+The main reason for the existence of this file is to provide for future
+updates when a standard math font encoding is available. Right now we
+do \emph{not} encourage the use of this configuration file other than
+for special applications. Writing a proper configuration file for math
+mode needs expert knowledge!
+
+Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}.
+
+\filesection{preload.cfg}
+
+The contents of the file |preload.cfg| can control the preloading of
+commonly used fonts. Preloading fonts speeds up the processing of
+documents but, because fonts cannot be `unloaded', you should not
+preload too many; otherwise you may be unable to process documents
+requiring unusual font families.
+
+The default file |preload.ltx| is produced from |preload.dtx|. It
+loads only a few fonts and these are a good choice if you normally use
+documents at the default, 10\,pt, size. If you normally use 11\,pt
+or~12\,pt then the time for \LaTeX\ to startup may be noticeably
+decreased if you preload the corresponding fonts for the sizes you
+use. Similarly, if you normally use a different font family, for
+example Times Roman (|ptm|) then you may want to preload fonts in this
+family rather than the default Computer Modern fonts.
+
+\subsection{Hyphenation configuration}
+
+\filesection{hyphen.cfg}
+
+In order to hyphenate text, \TeX{} must have hyphenation patterns and,
+since these patterns can be loaded only by \iniTeX, the choice of
+which patterns to load must be made when the format is created.
+
+The hyphenation patterns for American English are stored in the file
+named |hyphen.tex|; \LaTeX~2.09 always loaded this file when its
+format was made.
+
+With \LaTeXe{} it is possible to configure which hyphenation patterns
+are to be loaded into the format. When \iniTeX{} is processing
+|latex.ltx|, it looks for a file called |hyphen.cfg|; this file can
+be used to control which hyphenation patterns are loaded. If a file
+|hyphen.cfg| cannot be found then \iniTeX{} will load the file
+|hyphen.ltx|.
+
+The file |hyphen.ltx| loads the file |hyphen.tex| if it can find it;
+otherwise it stops with an error since a format with no hyphenation
+patterns is not very useful. It then sets |\language=0| and it sets
+the values |\lefthyphenmin=2| and |\righthyphenmin=3|, which are
+needed for American English.
+
+Thus, if you want any other patterns to be loaded then you should
+create a file |hyphen.cfg|. For each language for which you wish to
+load hyphenation patterns this file should:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item set |\language=|\m{number};
+\item load the file which contains the hyphenation patterns for that
+ language.
+\end{itemize}
+If the patterns you use require some definitions or assignments then
+a group should be used to keep such changes local to their file.
+
+\textbf{Note.} The hyphenation files that are read in should \emph{only}
+set the hyphenation tables for the language, using the commands
+|\hyphenation| and |\patterns|. In particular they should make no
+assignments to the lowercase/uppercase tables (|\lccode| and
+|\uccode|) and should not make any global command definitions to be
+used after the file has been read. Unfortunately some older
+hyphenation files do contain such settings; thus they are
+\emph{incompatible} with the mechanisms \LaTeX\ uses to ensure
+independence of input and output encodings.
+
+After this the file |hyphen.cfg| should:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item set |\language| to its default value;
+\item set |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| to the correct values
+ for this default language.
+\end{itemize}
+
+There are packages available, such as `french', that can help you with
+this configuration. The `babel' collection contains many examples of
+setting up a multi-lingual \LaTeX{} format. The documentation in
+|lthyphen.dtx| (the source file for |hyphen.ltx|) also contains some
+useful examples.
+
+[We intend in a future release of \LaTeX{} to provide a set of
+standard commands for use in configuring hyphenation.]
+
+
+\section{Configuring the font definition files}
+
+If you have special fonts available (or if some fonts are unavailable)
+at your site then you may need to produce customised versions of the
+font definition files; these have extension \texttt{.fd} and are read
+by \LaTeX{} to obtain information about the font files installed at your
+system and when to load them.
+
+Although we do not encourage such customisation, you will find
+information about the content of these files and its syntax in the
+documented source file \texttt{cmfonts.fdd} and
+\textit{\LaTeXe{} font selection} in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}.
+[We hope to be able to provide further information and examples on
+this subject at some time in the future.]
+
+Please note that the use of customised font definition files has the
+following consequences.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Documents produced on your system will, at best, to be
+ portable only in the sense of being processable at a different
+ site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different
+ fonts are used.
+ \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in
+ diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format
+ that does not use any customised font definition files.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+Please also note that the whilst licence conditions on the standard
+font definition files allow you to produce a customised version for
+your own use, they do not allow you to distribute such a customised
+font definition file under the original file name!
+
+
+\subsection*{Note to system administrators}
+
+If you install a version of \LaTeX{} with a locally configured font
+set-up then this system is likely to produce documents that are no
+longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the use of different
+default fonts will most likely produce different line and page breaks.
+If you do install, on a multi-user system, a system that is configured
+in such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should
+consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable
+documents. A good way to provide for their needs is to make
+available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any
+`formatting incompatible' customisations.
+
+
+\section{Configuring compatibility mode}
+
+When processing documents that begin with |\documentstyle|, \LaTeXe{}
+tries to emulate the old \LaTeX~2.09 system as far as possible.
+
+\filesection{latex209.cfg}
+
+Whenever a \LaTeX{} document starts with |\documentstyle|, rather than
+with |\documentclass|, \LaTeX{} assumes that it is a \LaTeX~2.09
+document and therefore processes it in `compatibility mode'. This
+does the following:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item sets the flag |\@compatibilitytrue|;
+\item inputs the file |latex209.def|;
+\item inputs the file |latex209.cfg| if it exists.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \LaTeX~2.09 set-up allowed the format itself to be customised.
+When making the format with \iniTeX, the process ended with this
+request:
+\begin{quote}\tt
+ Input any local modifications here.
+\end{quote}
+
+If your site did input any modifications at that point then the
+\LaTeXe{} `compatibility mode' will not fully emulate \LaTeX~2.09
+\emph{as installed at your site}. In this case you should put all
+these `local modifications' into a file called |latex209.cfg| and put
+this file in the default input path at your site. These `local
+modifications', although not stored in the format, will then be loaded
+before any old-style document is processed. This should ensure that
+you can continue to process any old documents that made use of this
+local customisation.
+
+
+\section[Configuration files for standard packages and classes]%
+ {Configuration files for standard packages\\ and classes}
+
+Most of the packages in the distribution do not have any associated
+configuration files. The exceptions are listed here.
+
+\filesection{sfonts.cfg}
+
+The file |sfonts.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use of
+fonts in the slides class.
+If it exists, it is read instead of the file |sfonts.def|.
+
+Please note that use of this configuration file has the following
+consequences.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Since the font set-up for slides has not yet been revised to
+ fit modern usage, the content of this file should be completely
+ updated sometime. Thus anyone writing such a configuration
+ file must be prepared to update it for use with future releases.
+ \item Documents are portable only in the sense of being processable
+ at a different site---the actual formatting will not be the same
+ if different fonts are used.
+ \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in
+ diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format
+ that does not use this configuration file.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+
+\filesection{ltnews.cfg}
+
+The file |ltnews.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the
+behaviour of the \textsf{ltnews} class; this class is used to typeset
+the the one page newsletter accompanying every \LaTeX{} distribution.
+If this file is present then it is read in at the beginning of the
+file |ltnews.cls|.
+
+
+\filesection{ltxdoc.cfg}
+
+The file |ltxdoc.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the
+behaviour of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class; this class is used to typeset
+the documented code in the |.dtx| files. If this file is present then
+it is read in at the beginning of the file |ltxdoc.cls|.
+
+As this file is read before the \textsf{article} class is loaded, you
+may pass options to \textsf{article}. For example the following line
+might be added to |ltxdoc.cfg| to format the documentation for A4 paper
+instead of the default US letter paper size.
+\begin{quote}
+|\PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article}|
+\end{quote}
+You should note however, that even if paper size options are specified,
+the \textsf{ltxdoc} class always sets the |\textwidth| parameter to
+355\,pt, to enable 72 columns of text to appear in the verbatim code
+listings. If you really need to over-ride this you could use:
+\begin{quote}
+|\AtEndOfClass{\setlength{\textwidth}{ ...}}|
+\end{quote}
+To set the |\textwidth| to your desired value at the end of the
+\textsf{ltxdoc} class.
+
+By default, most of the |.dtx| documented code files in the
+distribution will produce a `description' section followed by full
+source listing of the package. If you wish to suppress the source
+listings you may add the following line to |ltxdoc.cfg|:
+\begin{quote}
+|\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}|
+\end{quote}
+
+The documentation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} package, which may be typeset
+from the file |ltxdoc.dtx|, contains more examples of the use of this
+configuration file.
+
+\filesection{ltxguide.cfg}
+
+The class \textsf{ltxguide} is used by the `guide' documents, such as
+this document, in the \LaTeX\ distribution. A configuration file
+|ltxguide.cfg| may be used with this class in a way very similar to
+the customisation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class described in the
+previous section.
+
+\section{Configuration for other supported packages}
+
+The `graphics' bundle of packages needs two configuration files,
+primarily to specify the driver used to process the |.dvi| file that
+\LaTeX{} produces. More documentation on these files comes with the
+graphics bundle but we mention them here for completeness.
+
+\filesection{graphics.cfg}
+ Normally this file just specifies a default option, by calling
+ |\ExecuteOptions|, for example |\ExecuteOptions{dvips}| or
+ |\ExecuteOptions{textures}|.
+
+ This file is read by the \textsf{graphics} package, and so affects
+ all the packages in the bundle that are based on \textsf{graphics}:
+ \textsf{graphicx}, \textsf{epsfig}, \textsf{lscape}.
+
+\filesection{color.cfg}
+ Normally this file is identical to |graphics.cfg|. It specifies the
+ default driver option for the \textsf{color} package.
+
+\section{Non-standard versions}
+
+If you feel the need to make a version of \LaTeX{} that differs from
+the standard version in ways that are not possible using the above
+configuration possibilities, then you should first read
+\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file |modguide.tex|; this
+will probably make you realise that you do not have any such need.
+
+Thus we are sure that you will never need to create a non-standard
+version and, even if you do create one, we hope that you will not
+distribute such a version. Nevertheless, you are permitted to do this
+provided you take great care to do the following:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+respect the conditions in legal.txt and individual files regarding
+modification of files and changing the name;
+
+\item
+change all the relevant `|\typeout| banners': i.e.~those produced by
+all the non-standard files in your version and by the format;
+
+\item
+ ensure that the method used to run your version is clearly
+ distinguished from that used to run standard \LaTeX{}; e.g.~by using
+ a command name or menu entry that is clearly different from
+ \texttt{latex} (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc).
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Examples}
+
+Since we have been prompted, despite our misgivings, to document how
+to do this by members of the League for Programming Freedom, it seems
+appropriate to describe here a possible modification of \LaTeX{} to
+produce a system called fsf\TeX.
+
+To do this, you should create a file called \texttt{fsftex.tex} and
+then run it using \iniTeX{} and the standard \LaTeX{} format.
+
+The contents of the file \texttt{fsftex.tex} should be as shown on
+page \pageref{fsfcode}. The particular changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel
+that you wish to make need to be added to the file at the position
+indicated. You can also choose the extensions you want to use for the
+class and package files in your system.
+
+\newpage
+\label{fsfcode}
+
+\begin{footnotesize}
+\begin{verbatim}
+% fsftex.tex
+%
+% iniTEX Source code to make a `fsftex' format.
+%
+% To make this format on Unix:
+%
+% initex \&latex fsftex
+%
+% Then to run the format on file.tex:
+%
+% tex &fsftex file
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% *** VERY IMPORTANT!!! ***
+% Change the typeout banner so users know that they
+% are NOT running Standard LaTeX.
+\everyjob{\typeout{fsfTeX 1.0 based on LaTeX2e \fmtversion}}
+\makeatletter
+
+% fsfTeX changes some LaTeX internals:
+% ... put what you like here ...
+\def \fsf@xxxx {Some arbitrary \emph{freely modifiable} code goes here}
+
+% fsfTeX class files have extension .fcl (this week):
+\def \@clsextension {fcl}
+
+% fsfTeX package files have extension .fsy:
+\def \@pkgextension {fsy}
+
+% Change the file handling so that when a fsfTeX package or class
+% is not available, the standard LaTeX file will be read.
+%
+% For example, \documentclass{article} will load article.fcl if such
+% a file exists, but article.cls otherwise. This allows arbitrary
+% processing on `article' documents without changing the standard
+% article.cls file.
+
+\let\fsf@missingfileerror\@missingfileerror
+
+\def\@missingfileerror#1#2{%
+ \ifx #2\@clsextension
+ \InputIfFileExists {#1.cls}%
+ {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.cls rather than #1.#2.}}%
+ {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}%
+ \else
+ \ifx #2\@pkgextension
+ \InputIfFileExists {#1.sty}%
+ {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.sty rather than #1.#2.}}%
+ {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}%
+ \else
+ \fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+
+\makeatother
+\dump
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{footnotesize}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..70a65970980
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8994 @@
+
+This lists changes to the LaTeX2e files in reverse chronological order.
+
+NOTE: This file is based on the developers' personal change-log files
+and is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to
+completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that
+are not part of the distribution.
+
+=======================================================================
+
+
+2004-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: added \loggingall and \loggingoutput as variant of
+ \tracingall and \showoutput (write only to transcript)
+
+ * manifest.txt: added lppl-1.2.txt to the distribution since we
+ are now at version 1.3
+
+2004-02-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: changed warning text for oldstyle digits
+
+2004-02-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: docu fix (pr/3620)
+
+2004-02-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (section*{\indexname}]): Moved setting of \columnsep and
+ \columnseprule later to avoid affecting the wrong page (pr/3616)
+
+2004-02-15 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltspace.dtx
+
+ Added better \nobreakdashes
+
+2004-02-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fixltx2e.dtx: fix for \@Esphack forgotten (pr/3498)
+
+2004-02-11 Rainer Schöpf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * pict2e.inx/.dtx: Removed.
+
+2004-02-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}):
+ environment names incorrectly sorted in index (pr/3615)
+
+2004-02-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * utf8ienc.dtx: no newlines in error messages allowed
+ (due to inputenc)
+ space in the wrong place "\count @64"
+ added commands already defined in the kernel (found by BG)
+ added test file pr/3480
+
+2004-02-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: coding change, to follow bug fix by DEK in
+ plain.tex in OT4 (pr/3469)
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added ISO 8859-16 Latin10 (pr/3568)
+
+2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx
+
+ Small fix for \enlargethispage, pr/3528
+
+2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx
+
+ Tidied up a bit more of the code
+
+2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx
+
+ Many math things made robust
+
+ Added two `bigtriangle synonyms' for compatibility with the
+ stmaryrd symbols package
+
+2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ Added \textbigcircle to OMS
+
+ Fixed bad bug in \DeclareTextSymbol as per Heiko
+ in pr/3563
+
+2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefiles
+
+ Lots of minor fixes
+
+2004-01-31 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx (section{Implementation}): internal kernel version
+ of \@ifnextchar used in some places, see next entry (pr/3501)
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: internal kernel version for \@ifnextchar added
+ to prevent the amsmath package to highjack this command in random
+ places, this is really a bug in amsmath which should finally be
+ fixed there (pr/3501)
+
+2004-01-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: warning for old latex 5 years grace (pr/3601)
+
+ * latexbug.tex: warning for old latex 5 years grace (pr/3601)
+
+2004-01-23 Rainer Schöpf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fixltx2e.dtx: Replace the double dangerous bend sign by a
+ huge double exclamation mark. This is to mark important
+ bits in the documentation.
+
+2004-01-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: Changed error message for \nocite
+
+2004-01-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \ooalign for \k (pr/3532)
+ Added \textogonekcentered (pr/3532)
+ Added composites \k{o} and \k{O} (pr/3532)
+
+2003-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: issue warning if circle size can't be met
+
+ * nfssfont.ins: support for nfssfont.dtx
+
+2003-12-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: fixing a typo in \DeclareInputText recently
+ introduced.
+
+2003-12-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Ensure that \@elt has a defined
+ state in \@makecol (pr/3586)
+
+2003-12-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: added support for \MakeShortVerb* as suggested by
+ Hubert Gaesslein <hubertjg@open.mind.de>
+
+2003-12-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: changed typeout message
+
+2003-11-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: docu changes for latin 4 (pr/3585)
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: docu fixes (pr/3584)
+
+2003-10-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Added extra \lccode for \- and \textcompwordmark
+ to allow hyphenation in the remainder of the word
+
+2003-10-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: docu fixes (pr/3575)
+
+2003-09-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fixltx2e.dtx: No hyphenation in first word after float
+ environmentb (pr/3498)
+ Allow \emph to produce small caps
+
+2003-09-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: removed surplus dot from error message
+
+2003-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx (section{Picture Mode}):
+ check for \cs{@linechar} being empty (pr/3570)
+ (subsection{Curves}): added missing displacement (pr/3566)
+
+2003-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: raise an error is \nocite is used before begin
+ document (until now it simply failed)
+
+2003-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: new implementation of textcomp with options and
+ subencodings
+
+2003-05-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fixltx2e.dtx: incorporated new definition for \@fnsymbol to use
+ text symbols if available (pr/3400)
+
+2003-04-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fixltx2e.dtx: incorporated fix-cm.sty by Walter Schmidt
+
+2003-02-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: added a number of options to textcomp to enable
+ only some characters since most of the chars are ont generally
+ available.
+
+2003-01-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * nfssfont.dtx: added interactive support to allow font spec via
+ nfss classification.
+
+2002-12-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx (section{Bibliography Generation}):
+ Added \leavevmode in case citation is at start of paragraph (pr/3486)
+
+2002-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added cp858 (cp850 with euro symbol) (pr/3464)
+
+2002-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: coding change for \r{A} in OT1 to follow bug fix
+ by DEK in plain.tex, but it is still a hack!
+ (better solution: do not use OT1 encoded fonts) (pr/3469)
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: Check for math mode when ending a list to
+ give a better error message than "perhaps a missing item" (pr/3437)
+ First change to this part of LaTeX since 1997!
+
+2002-10-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added cp1257 (Baltic)
+
+2002-10-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}): Adding
+ \LastDeclaredEncoding introduced a bug in
+ \DeclareFontSubstitution. Instead of the real encoding name the
+ token \LastDeclaredEncoding got into the internal lists causing
+ havoc. (pr/3459)
+
+2002-10-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Use braces around \itshape to keep font change
+ local in \thempfootnote; bug introduced 7 years earlier
+ (pr/3460)
+
+2002-07-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added code 128 (texteuro) for cp1250
+
+2002-07-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: added \texteuro for ansinew (pr/3423)
+
+2002-06-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: actually complained when format are older than 18
+ months (now we accept 30)
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: error message still talked about 1 year old sources
+ being too old (though in fact it is 30 months)
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Corrected \cs{c} for T1 (pr/3442)
+ Added \cs{textbardbl} (pr/3400)
+ Definition of \textexclamdown changed (pr/3368)
+ Definition of \textquestiondown changed (pr/3368)
+ Changed def for \textregistered to avoid small caps (pr/3420)
+
+2002-06-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: added macce (pr/3433)
+ added code points to 1252 (pr/3441)
+
+2002-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * oztex.txt: new version added
+
+2001-08-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: readded lost catcode setting for space in
+ ProvidesFile (pr/3353)
+
+2001-07-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx:
+
+ Added latin9.def (from Karsten Tinnefeld)
+
+2001-07-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews.cls:
+
+ Added eTeX logo
+
+2001-06-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: check for old format disabled --- perhaps we have
+ reached the last release of 2e already?
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added \textkra, \texttstroke and
+ \textTstroke to latin4 (pr/3336)
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Don't warn if \line or \vector command
+ has zero length argument pr/3318
+
+ * fontdef.dtx (subsubsection{Arrows}): Guard against math active
+ = and math active | in \Relbar and \models (pr/3333)
+
+2001-06-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * format.ins: added default cfg files that are simple
+ wrappers for fonttext.ltx, fontmath.ltx, and preload.ltx (pr/3264)
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: added default cfg files that are simple
+ wrappers for fonttext.ltx, fontmath.ltx, and preload.ltx (pr/3264)
+
+2001-06-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: some docu changes
+
+2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ Added \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2000/06/01] to .def
+ files, pr/3255
+
+ Made compatible T1 and OT1 accents (on i and \i), pr/3295
+
+2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Described short-form for guillemets in T1 encoding, pr/3192
+
+2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.cls:
+
+ Added some definitions
+
+2001-05-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: extended NEXT encoding (pr/3281)
+ suppress all spaces for horizontal mode (pr/3273)
+
+ * minimal.cls: added \pagenumbering{arabic} to define \thepage
+ (pr/3275)
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Added \AND, \OR and \NOT as boolean operators as
+ alternative to the lower case versions (pr/3297)
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Explicitly set \endlinechar to 10 (pr/3334)
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Explicitly set \endlinechar to 10 (pr/3334)
+
+ * classes.dtx: Replaced all tilde chars used with \nobreakspace
+ (pr/3310)
+
+2001-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: partly support docstrip's ``verbatim''
+ directive, at least ensure that it can be processed without and
+ error message (pr/3331)
+
+2001-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: added missing \section to docu
+
+2001-04-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (section*{\contentsname): initialize \@tempdima
+ within \l@part so that \numberline can be used pr/3327
+
+2001-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews14.tex: added
+
+2001-02-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxref.dtx (subsection{Cross Referencing}): Added an extra level
+ of grouping to \@newl@bel as suggested in PR3250 by
+ Harald Hanche-Olsen <hanche@math.ntnu.no>
+
+2001-01-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): reset @newlist flag in output
+ routine (pr/3286). This was done before (pr3231) but the code
+ ended up in the wrong place by mistake.
+
+2001-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx: Moved \@mkboth out of heading args for
+ thebibliography and \listof... command as this can fail with the
+ slightly strange definition for \chapter in twocolumn mode (pr/3285)
+
+2000-09-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fixltx2e.dtx: for some unknown reason the version of fix2col
+ integrated was not the latest one --- so a number of bugs already
+ corrected crept up again (1.1d fixes those)
+
+ Don't change \setlength if it isn't the kernel default any longer
+
+ \addpenalty fix proposed in 3073 was not sufficient if the command
+ was used when \prevdepth=-1000pt (ie after \nointerlineskip)
+
+2000-09-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: finally moved emptying \errhelp to a place
+ after its last use (pr/449)
+
+2000-08-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ Much editing but no code changes
+
+2000-08-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx:
+
+ Fixed typo in warning message
+
+2000-07-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ Changed handling of space above footnotes.
+
+2000-07-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: complain about old LaTeX only after 18 months
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: changed distribution check to yearly distribution
+
+2000-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: locally reset \if@newlist so that
+ list structures in head/foot don't interfere with
+ lists in the MVL. internal/3231
+
+2000-07-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews13.tex: update to ltnews13
+
+2000-07-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Ensure that rule between column is in \normalcolor
+ (it did depend on the color in the text at the column break!)
+
+2000-07-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: fix typo in warning message
+
+2000-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: ... and another fix for (pr/3170), sigh
+
+2000-07-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: incorporating latin4.def contributed by
+ Hana Skoumalov\'a
+
+ * inputenc.ins: incorporating latin4.def contributed by
+ Hana Skoumalov\'a
+
+2000-06-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): extending (or say
+ fixing?) change for (pr/3170)
+
+2000-06-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpage.dtx:
+
+ Changed grouping method in \markboth and \markright
+ (see also pr/3203)
+
+ Less expansion by using token register in \markboth
+ and \markright
+
+2000-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Declaration commands}):
+ reimplemented \UseTextSymbol and \UseTextAccent to support
+ reference over more than one level (pr/3160)
+
+2000-05-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx:
+
+ Less obscure wording at start of index? (pr/3202)
+
+ * inputenc.dtx:
+
+ Added latin2 option for textdegree (pr/3207)
+ Updated documantaion
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: reimplementation of \markboth and \markright to
+ avoid problem with expanion at wrong point in time in some cases
+ (pr/3203)
+
+2000-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): new implementation
+ for \meta command (pr/3170)
+
+2000-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Parts}): Only add empty page after
+ part if twoside and openright (pr/3155)
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Reset \AtEndDocument for latex/3060
+
+2000-04-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: ltnews13.tex added
+
+2000-01-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: added \hmode@bgroup as shorthand for
+ \leavevmode\bgroup use \hmode@bgroup...\egroup instead of
+ \leavevmode{...} where applicable in most cases \leavevmode was
+ missing before (pr/3160)
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx: use \hmode@bgroup...\egroup instead of \leavevmode{...}
+
+2000-01-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: allow \inputencoding also in hoizontal mode (or rather
+ make it do something there --- it was allowed before (pr/2888))
+
+2000-01-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: fix error message for undefined code points
+ (pr/3158)
+
+2000-01-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Disable hyphenation in verbatim even if the font
+ allows it.
+
+1999-12-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews12.tex: final adjustments
+
+1999-12-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews.cls: fixed a curious bug lurking in the class since its
+ beginning: putting a list directly after a paragraph would make the
+ paragraph before(!) the list justified (while the rest of the document
+ was set ragged right)
+
+ * ltnews12.tex: added fixltx2e section
+
+1999-12-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}):
+ Changed \cs{CYRRHOOK} and \cs{cyrrhook} to
+ \cs{CYRRHK} and \cs{cyrrhk} as name changed in the cyrillic
+ bundle for naming consistency with other ``hook'' glyphs.
+
+1999-12-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews12.tex (section{Outcome of TUG '99 (Vancouver)}):
+ added text on TUG 99 and other bits
+
+1999-11-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltx3info.tex: Typo corrected.
+
+ * emtex.txt: Correct name of file ltxcheck.tex.
+
+1999-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltx3info.tex: fixed typo
+
+1999-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Declaration commands}):
+ Give \accent@spacefactor a default definition to prevent horrible
+ death in case or incorrect input (pr/3084)
+
+1999-10-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fixltx2e.dtx: added first version
+
+ * manifest.txt: added draft ltnews12.tex
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: removed left over beta test message
+
+1999-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Reset definition of active math ' to
+ \active@math@prime within the output routine.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Introduce macro \active@math@prime for the active
+ prime character in math mode.
+
+1999-09-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex (subsection{Definitions}): show syntax of all
+ declaration commands (pr/3102)
+
+1999-09-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: removed extra change entry.
+
+ * classes.dtx: found two changes entries claiming to have been done
+ in 1955 (exactly 40 years too early :-)
+
+ * makeindx.dtx: fixed two changes entries (arg order wrong)
+
+ * syntonly.dtx: updated changes entry to have four digits years
+
+ * classes.dtx: update of label names in docu
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: make this a proper LaTeXable package
+
+ * pict2e.dtx: make this a proper LaTeXable package (even if not containing code)
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: also accept .fdd files in DocInclude (code by M Schroeder)
+
+1999-09-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx: renamed a few labels to support production of general docu
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: changed driver file
+
+1999-09-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: did some spellchecking of docu after noticing
+ a few glaring typos
+
+1999-09-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lppl-1-1.txt: added LPPL 1.1 under this name to the distribution.
+
+ * DEFAULT.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2
+
+ * DEFAULT.hea: updated for LPPL 1.2
+
+ * copyfd.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2
+
+ * copycfg.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2
+
+ * copyins.hea: updated for LPPL 1.2
+
+1999-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lppl.txt: fixed minor glitches found by Matt and Eberhard
+ This is probably going to be LPPL 1.2
+
+1999-07-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lppl.txt: final changes to LPPL 1.1
+
+1999-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * updated headers to reflect LPPL 1.1
+ updated legal.txt to say that use of LaTeX is unrestricted
+
+1999-06-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews11.tex (section{Fontenc package peculiarities}):
+ document the special behaviour of fontenc
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: document that fontenc pretends it wasn't loaded
+
+1999-06-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}):
+ ensure that \@uclclist is extended only once (if at all)
+
+1999-06-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: ensure that fontenc doesn't load encodings from
+ previous calls again (pr/2888)
+
+1999-05-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * bugs.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err.
+
+ * readme.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err.
+
+ * manifest.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err.
+
+1999-05-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * webcomp.err: file added
+
+1999-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews11.tex: updates
+
+1999-05-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.ins: removed "fd" guard since never used these days
+
+1999-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: docstrip `nowarn' guard was the wrong way around
+ for font OT1/cmr/bx/ui (pr/3036)
+
+1999-04-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: fixed typo in documentation (pr2973)
+
+1999-04-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx
+
+ Corrected cp852 for pr/2992
+
+ * ltboxex.dtx
+
+ Made robust the flag in \@iiiparbox: pr/2975}
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx
+
+ Fixed new version of \@yargdef: pr/3013
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Added to documentation of uc/lc list
+
+1999-03-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: Correct last change.
+
+1999-03-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Added to documentation of options
+
+ * cyrguide.tex:
+
+ Further editing
+
+1999-03-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cyrguide.tex: Use \URL command.
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Added \URL command.
+
+1999-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Refer to cyrguide.tex.
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Added \cyrguide.
+
+ * All copyright headers and preambles: updated for lppl.txt.
+
+ * 00readme.txt: Refer to lppl.txt, add new LaTeX books.
+
+1999-03-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.cls:
+
+ Added some definitions
+
+1999-03-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Remove change from 1999-01-08 internal/2967
+
+ * lppl.txt: minor rewordings after comments from
+ Arnoud Engelfriet and John Hasler.
+
+1999-03-01 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * handbuch.err: Added.
+
+ * install.txt: Add link to truetex.txt and vtex.txt. Remove
+ timings for slow computers.
+
+1999-02-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: temp fix for pr/2968
+
+1999-02-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}):
+
+ Corrected cyrillic uc/lc list
+
+1999-02-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews.cls:
+
+ Added some definitions
+
+1999-02-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * legal.txt: refer to LPPL
+
+ * lppl.txt: more fiddling
+
+1999-02-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: changed \oldstylenums to use \rmdefault instead of
+ cmm hardwired. This doesn't change much in standard cases but allows
+ other font sets to work without redefining \oldstylenums as long as
+ the right .fd files are available (pr/2954)
+
+ * truetex.txt: Updated version.
+
+1999-02-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: Reset footnote counter for every new letter (PR
+ 2957).
+
+1999-02-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cyrguide.tex:
+
+ Major editing (new file)
+
+ * usrguide.tex (section{Commands}):
+
+ Updated
+
+ * minimal.cls:
+
+ Small reordering to better support the documented method of use
+
+ * cfgguide.tex (section{System configuration}):
+
+ Clarification and emphasis changed re fontdef.dtx cfgs
+
+1999-02-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: catch \newcommand[10] or \newcommand[X]
+
+1999-02-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cyrguide.tex: small updates
+
+1999-01-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: new go faster \newcommand implementation /2942.
+
+1999-01-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex (subsection{Selection commands}): added documentation
+ for \linespread (pr/2891)
+
+ * ltnews10.tex: updates
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Simplified solution for pr/2930
+
+1999-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: two more \long in \@ifnextchar for latex/2902
+
+1999-01-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex (subsection{Encoding definition file commands}):
+ Added documentation about \LastDeclaredEncoding
+
+1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: \isundefined for /2824
+
+ * latexbug.tex: cyrillic
+
+ * latexbug.el: cyrillic
+
+1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: add extra braces and \long declartions so
+ [{]}] and [\par] work. latex/2896.
+
+1999-01-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * bugs.txt: Added description how to follow up a problem report.
+
+ * latexbugs.tex: Added description how to follow up a problem
+ report.
+
+ * classes.dtx: Added check of @noskipsec switch in \part for
+ article class.
+
+1999-01-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Hackery to support reading in fontenc.sty several
+ times (really the wrong interface and needs changing)
+
+ Hackery to support cyrillic uc/lc update --- that will definitely go
+ somewhere else in a later release
+
+1999-01-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * emtextds.txt: Added to distribution. Installation procedure for
+ Walter Schmidt's emTeX/TDS for OS/2.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Minor documentation fix (PR 2939).
+
+1999-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Added \LastDeclaredEncoding to support cyrillic
+ integration (pr/2988)
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Added negative vskip, as when processing outputbox
+ as suggested by Fred Bartlett pr/2892
+
+ * classes.dtx: Check \if@noskipsec in \part see pr/2889
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: New impl of \@text@composite and \@text@composite@x
+ (pr/2930)
+
+1999-01-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Need special protection for character
+ \texttt{\char62} in \cs{changes} entry, as this is the makeindex
+ actualchar.
+
+1998-12-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: The case-changing trick in the definition of
+ \short@macro didn't work, as the category code was changed inside
+ the macro replacement text, not during the definition.
+
+1998-12-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): Use
+ \string, not \protect in argument of \special@index.
+
+1998-12-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}):
+ Correctly handle second index entry for \SpecialMainEnvIndex
+ by using \special@index not \index (pr/2928)
+
+1998-12-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * nfssfont.dtx: cosmetic change: \documentstyle -> \documentclass
+ Program still would need a major user interface upgrade
+ ... one day (pr/2915)
+
+1998-11-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx: prevent an endless loop from incorrect input like
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l{11.5cm}} (pr/2884)
+
+1998-09-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: added \string to definition of \a so that \a'
+ works even if ' is active at that time (pr/2878)
+
+ * classes.dtx: redefine \thesection, \thechapter and \@chapapp
+ globally (using \gdef) in \appendix so that these redefinitions
+ survive even if \appendix is used within an environment such as
+ multicols
+
+1998-09-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cfgguide.tex (section Configuration files for
+ standard packages and classes]):
+ added info about ltnews.cfg (pr/2875)
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Explicitly set \spacefactor after \accent in
+ OT1 type accents like \`A (pr/2877)
+
+1998-08-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: Correction for PR 2563: doc.dtx produces incorrect
+ index entries for some single character control sequences
+ (like <).
+
+1998-08-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * (Various source files): Replaced old form `commandname by
+ \cs{commandname} in changes entries.
+
+ * (Various source files): Replaced \cmd{\commandname} by
+ \cs{commandname} in changes entries.
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry.
+
+ * latexsym.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry.
+
+1998-08-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx (section{Announcing the files}):
+
+ Corrected version number
+
+1998-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: give better error message if source document contains
+ a character which is not defined by current input encoding (pr/2845)
+
+1998-06-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex (subsection{Identification}): Explicitly warn that
+ the optional date argument of \Provides... must be in the format
+ yyyy/mm/dd and will produce low-level errors otherwise
+
+1998-06-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx:
+
+ Spanish ords changed to text chars, pr/2579
+
+ Fixed typo in `next'
+
+ * lttab.dtx:
+
+ Enhanced documentation
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx:
+
+ Fixed \textcircled
+ Fixed wrong code in \t
+ Added masc/fem ords defaults
+ Swapped acutedbl and gravedbl in TS1
+ Renamed macron in TS1
+
+ * pict2e.dtx:
+
+ Wording changed, and "documentation"
+
+1998-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slifonts.fdd: fix provides files for T1* (Bernard Gaulle)
+
+1998-06-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: support calc expressions in \rule command
+ (that one was forgotten or so it seems)
+
+1998-05-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx:
+
+ Set-up lccodes (and uccodes) before reading in
+ hyphenation files
+
+1998-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (section{The Description of Macros}):
+ reinit ^^A as comment char at beginning of document to allow use
+ of inputenc with doc since inputenc disables ^^A (pr2581)
+
+1998-05-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews09.tex more text
+
+1998-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}):
+ small change that defers freezing of \MacroFont until after the
+ preamble so that people can change its definition in the preamble.
+ As we have been on 1.9z this is now 2.0a but it isn't really
+ something exciting ... :-)
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: added documentation about extending the
+ \ref mechanism as suggested in pr2801
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx: small documentation updates
+
+1998-05-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltspace.dtx:
+
+ Documented lots of bugs and problems with the present code,
+ and even some solutions
+
+ * latex209.dtx:
+
+ Added experimental long typeout about abuse of
+ compatibility mode to possibly avoid prs like 2807
+
+1998-05-13 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx Use \setlength to set size of p-column and for
+ argument of tabular* environment, so that the benefits of the
+ calc package apply.
+
+1998-05-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: removed space at the right of address (pr2794)
+
+1998-05-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+
+ Reverted openany change to \mainmatter
+
+1998-04-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx (IMPORTANT NOTICE): renamed \orginaldefault to
+ \originaldefault
+
+1998-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: some fixes for pr2662
+
+1998-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex: explain new \DeclareMathDelimiter syntax (pr2662)
+
+1998-04-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: use new \DeclareMathDelimiter syntax (pr2662)
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: allow \DeclareMathDelimiter to always use 6 args
+ (pr2662)
+
+1998-04-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: added \mathring accent (pr2785)
+
+1998-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * distrib.txt: Update from 1994 version with a view to adding
+ to june release, better late than never.
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: CHANGE to default header placed on extracted
+ files, to allow extracted files to be distributed as long as
+ sources also distributed. This does not affect any .ins files that
+ explicitly set a preamble with the docstrip \preamble or
+ \usepreamble commands. If you currently distribute a package and
+ want to keep the old preamble, add \usepackage\originalpreamble
+ to your .ins files. Note that the old text forbids inclusion of
+ the package on `ready to run' TeX distributions such as TeXLive
+ or tetex.
+
+
+
+1998-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * distrib.txt: Update from 1994 version with a view to adding
+ to june release, better late than never.
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: CHANGE to default header placed on extracted
+ files, to allow extracted files to be distributed as long as
+ sources also distributed. This does not affect any .ins files that
+ explicitly set a preamble with the docstrip \preamble or
+ \usepreamble commands. If you currently distribute a package and
+ want to keep the old preamble, add \usepackage\originalpreamble
+ to your .ins files. Note that the old text forbids inclusion of
+ the package on `ready to run' TeX distributions such as TeXLive
+ or tetex.
+
+
+
+1998-03-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+1998-03-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+1998-03-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: added substiution for cmss/bx/sc to produce
+ cmr/m/sc; much better would be to have the real thing ---
+ anybody cares to contribute those to the ec fonts? (pr2586)
+
+1998-03-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * bugs.txt: say that reports have to be in English
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Documentation added about removing declaration
+ of encoding specific commands (pr/2783)
+ Command \UndeclareTextCommand added (pr/2783)
+ Added \UndeclareTextCommand declarations to textcomp.sty (pr/2783)
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: \@thirdofthree added for \UndeclareTextCommand
+
+1998-03-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added documentation about the best order of
+ declarations for encoding specific commands.
+ Also moved loading ofts1enc.def after declaring the defaults
+ for such reasons.
+
+1998-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * bugs.txt: added info about not changing established (mis)behavior
+
+1998-03-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * miktex.txt: Added to distribution.
+
+1998-02-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: fixed typo iso-8859-5 should have been iso-8859-9
+ (pr/2748)
+
+1998-01-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltx3info.tex:
+
+ Updated
+
+1998-01-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * install.txt: small updates such as isbn numbers
+
+1998-01-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: adding \nopreamble and \nopostamble
+ and making sure that \usepreamble\empty really doesn't write
+ anything to the stripped file (pr/2726)
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: make \& locally safe in \ProvidesFile /2702
+ fix up pkgindoc.sty which probably hasn't worked since
+ {v1.0p}{1995/05/25}{Delete \cs{filec@ntents} after preamble}
+
+1998-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Fix \t for latex/2734.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: make \& locally safe in \ProvidesFile /2702
+ fix up pkgindoc.sty which probably hasn't worked since
+ {v1.0p}{1995/05/25}{Delete \cs{filec@ntents} after preamble}
+
+1998-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Fix \t for latex/2734.
+
+1998-01-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * multitex.txt: New version from Markus Kohm latex/2721
+
+1998-01-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * multitex.txt: New version from Markus Kohm latex/2721
+
+1998-01-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd:
+
+ Added large sizes for ec fonts only
+ Removed long lines
+
+1998-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: added missing braces and \upshape for \textcircled
+
+1998-01-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * emtex.txt: small clarification as suggested by Heinz
+
+1997-12-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex:
+
+ Corrections to math font declarations
+ Tidying
+ Added new encoding information
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx:
+
+ Documentation correction
+
+1997-12-31 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * grphcomp.err: added further errate entries, updated cls file
+
+1997-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: fixed header info for textcomp.sty
+ (missing \ProvidesPackage)
+
+1997-12-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ Added textcomp package
+ Corrections and additions to documentation
+ Removed all octal and hex codes
+ Added \textperthousand and \textpertenthousand to T1
+ Added \leavevmode at start of \c in T1
+
+ * inputenc.dtx
+
+ Made next encoding consistent with others
+ Consistently used math-or-text command when
+ available: THIS MAY CHANGE
+ Changed \mathdegree to \textdegree
+ \inputencoding now works only in vmode
+ Temporarily fixed \IeC
+ Merged latin1 code with ansinew/cp1252
+ Changed `\k{}' to `\k\ '
+ Added textcomp package
+ Corrections and additions to documentation
+
+ * fontdef.dtx
+
+ Added documentation
+
+ * ltnews08.tex
+
+ Added stuff
+
+1997-12-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx: Fix small documentation glitch.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: Replace reference to ,,June'' release by ,,last''
+ release.
+
+1997-12-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: expl3
+
+ * latexbug.el (ltxbug-categories): expl3
+
+1997-12-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex: Removed obsolete \setbox construct.
+
+1997-12-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex (section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and
+ packages}): Added documentation for \if@compatibility switch
+ (supplied by Barbara Beeton).
+
+1997-12-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex (subsection{\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release}):
+ Improved the sentence about formerly separate formats.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Documentation fixes.
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: Documentation fix.
+
+1997-12-06 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}):
+
+ Removed incorrect error code in \output
+
+ * ltnews08.tex:
+
+ Revised text
+
+ * ltnews.cls:
+
+ Added definition environment
+
+1997-11-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Use \textperthousand not \textpermill. /2673
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \textperthousand, \textpertenthousand and
+ \textfractionsolidus not \textpermill, \textpertenmill and
+ \textfraction. /2673
+
+1997-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: inline \stepcounter /2669/2661
+
+1997-11-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: reindent \@xtryfc and friends (no code change).
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: missing percent in @footnotetext. /2670
+
+1997-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: ltnews08
+
+ * ltnews08.tex: first attempt.
+
+ * source2e.tex: ltcounts and ltlength before NFSS /2669/2661
+
+ * format.ins: ltcounts and ltlength before NFSS /2669/2661
+
+1997-11-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * compan.err: rewrote that file to be processable by LaTeX
+
+ * grphcomp.err: rewrote that file to be processable by LaTeX
+
+1997-11-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: Fix \DeclareSymbolFont so it updates \group@list
+ for latex/2661.
+ Remove duplicate (unused) definition of \stepcounter.
+ Add a few macro envs to the documentation.
+
+1997-11-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Documentation fix.
+
+1997-10-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Minor documentation fixes.
+
+1997-10-23 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.ins: Unpack ts1enc.def.
+
+1997-10-21 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Added \makeatletter to \nfss@catcodes (and removed
+ it from \try@load@font@shape).
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Change \renew@command to use \begingroup/\endgroup
+ for grouping, to avoid generation of empty math atoms.
+
+1997-10-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Removed \aa and \AA from \@uclclist as these are
+ macros.
+
+ * slifonts.fdd(ullasy.fd): Removed superfluous pair of braces at
+ end of \DeclareFontFamily command.
+
+1997-10-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx: Moved check for vertical mode from
+ \DeclareTextFontCommand to \check@nocorr@.
+
+1997-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: back out \today change.
+
+ * install.txt: --release--date--goes--here--
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: --release--date--goes--here--
+
+ * patches.txt: --release--date--goes--here--
+
+ * Makefile: install.txt patches.txt ltpatch.ltx
+ --release--date--goes--here--
+
+1997-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Check for text before or after \end{filecontents}
+ latex/2636
+
+1997-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx(\l@part): Removed setting of \@tempdima as
+ this macro does not use \numberline to set the toc line.
+
+1997-10-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: renamed \perthousand to \textpermill as this is the
+ TS1 name (and it wasn't available before) (pr/2622)
+ added code page 1250 (pr/2515)
+
+1997-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Move expansion of \today here from document class
+ files. latex/2620
+
+ * classes.dtx: use \def not \edef for \today. latex/2620
+
+1997-10-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: Simplified macro \LaTeX: use only \check@mathfonts
+ to force loading of fonts suitable for the letter `A'.
+
+1997-10-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx: Replaced \@Roman by a new version that is fully
+ expandable, so that the correct sequence of letters is written to
+ files.
+
+1997-09-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{Date}): Use \edef to define to
+ in order to save space; following change to classes.dtx, dated
+ 1995/08/16.
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsection{Date}): Use \edef to define to
+ in order to save space; following change to classes.dtx, dated
+ 1995/08/16.
+
+1997-09-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: warn if \line etc is too small to get printed.
+ (pr/2524)
+
+1997-09-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Use \begingroup \endgroup instead of { ... }
+ to avoid generating math ords if used in math mode. (pr/2573)
+
+1997-09-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: added decmulti input encoding for DEC Multinational
+ Character Set (pr/2599)
+
+1997-08-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx(latin2.def,cp852.def): Replaced \dh and \DH by \dj
+ and \DJ.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx(ansinew.def): Exchanged codes for \textendash and
+ \textemdash.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Enclosed all encoding definition files by
+ \makeatletter/\makeatother.
+
+1997-08-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx: Added initialization of \leftmargin to \@listi
+ (obviously forgotten and never noticed before).
+
+1997-08-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Corrected order of arguments in \UseTextSymbol
+ example (PR latex/2572).
+
+1997-07-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cfgguide.tex: Put braces around argument of \sffamily,
+ to keep latex2html happy.
+
+1997-07-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: support compiling docstrip without statistics
+ (pr/2429)
+
+ * fntguide.tex: documentation updates (pr/2550)
+
+1997-07-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.el: Use default name and address from user-...
+ and make current directory setting more robust.
+ Both fixes from Andreas Schwab, latex/2547.
+
+1997-07-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd.
+
+ * ec.ins: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd.
+
+ * slides.ins: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd.
+
+ * slides.fdd: Renamed to slifonts.fdd, there is a name clash with
+ slides.dtx when run through LaTeX.
+
+ * truetex.txt: New version by Richard Kinch.
+
+1997-07-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * doc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * exscale.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * latexsym.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * letter.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * makeindx.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * newlfont.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * slides.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * cmextra.ins: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * clsguide.tex: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * lablst.tex: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+1997-06-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex:
+
+ Changed information about fontname
+ .fd filenames to lowercase
+ Removed long lines, and a few typos
+
+1997-06-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * emtex.txt: Updated by Heinz Kusnier.
+
+ * web2ctex.txt: Updated by David Outteridge.
+
+ * manifest.txt: Added truetex.txt.
+
+ * truetex.txt: New file by Richard Kinch.
+
+1997-06-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{Introduction}): Documentation fix.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Documentation fixes.
+
+ * exscale.dtx: Documentation fix.
+
+ * classes.dtx: Documentation fixes.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Documentation fix.
+
+ * alltt.dtx: Documentation fixes.
+
+1997-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * readme.txt:
+
+ Added information re ltnews files
+
+ * usrguide.tex:
+
+ Updating information: fonts, addresses, CD-ROMs
+
+ * clsguide.tex:
+
+ Added information: normalsfcodes, policy on chnages
+ to standard styles
+
+1997-06-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxcheck.tex: Change texts referring to dc/ec fonts.
+ internal/2513
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Fix save stack problem, internal/2514, and
+ other minor improvements.
+
+1997-06-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: add bold sc fonts for latex/2497
+
+1997-05-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.fdd: Removed spaces in and around arguments to
+ \DeclareFontShape.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Removed spaces in and around arguments to
+ \DeclareFontShape and \EC@family.
+
+1997-05-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: Added \m@th to definition of \LaTeXe so that
+ the logo works with non-zero values of \mathsurround.
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx (section{Handling Options}): Replaced \\ by
+ \MessageBreak in Option `pausing' (suggested by Donald Arseneau).
+
+1997-05-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx:
+
+ Corrected typo in cp852.def
+
+1997-05-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.ins:
+
+ Split up \generate for PC
+
+1997-05-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx:
+
+ Added latin3.def
+ Some rearrangments
+ Removed long lines
+
+ * ltspace.dtx
+
+ Made \newline robust
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+1997-04-30 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.ins: Added generation of latin5.def.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Latin5 encoding added.
+
+1997-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: add \@empty to \@citex for latex/2432.
+
+1997-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmextra.ins: Remove concrete fd file generation.
+
+1997-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex: bm package.
+
+1997-04-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: remove hidden math from itemize labels latex/2419
+
+ * ltnews07.tex: first draft.
+
+1997-04-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * texpert.txt: default install uses ec.
+
+ * install.txt: default install uses ec.
+
+ * readme.txt: 1997/06/01
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: include ec.ins not newdc.ins by default.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: 1997/06/01
+
+ * patches.txt: 1997/06/01
+
+ * Makefile: 1997/06/01
+
+1997-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: normalsfcodes latex/2404 (from patch file)
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: \normalsfcodes latex/2404 (from patch file)
+
+1997-03-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * amiweb2c.txt: update from Andreas Scherer.
+
+1997-03-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx: Use \mathsection and \mathparagraph in \fnsymbol
+ latex/2445
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Use decimal rather than hex to avoid active
+ character problems. latex/2451
+
+1997-02-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: typo fixed in ot1cmvtt \ProvidesFile latex/2394
+
+ * slides.fdd: typo fixed in cccsc10 latex/2395
+
+1997-02-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt: patch level 1
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: /2414 fix.
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: Support \noindent after \item. latex/2414
+
+1997-02-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{GetFileInfo}): missing % latex/2404.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: had to happen.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: missing % in last g@addto@macro change.
+
+1997-01-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * install.txt: ec fonts.
+
+ * ltnews06.tex: ec fonts.
+
+ * ec.ins: add slitex fonts
+
+ * slides.fdd: ec fonts.
+ lowercase fd file \input.
+
+ * ltxcheck.tex: ec fonts.
+
+1997-01-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: ec.ins.
+
+ * Makefile: ec.ins.
+
+ * ec.ins: new file. Alternative to newdc.ins
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Add ec fonts
+
+1997-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Use \DeclareMathDelimiter and \DeclareMathSymbol
+ On remaining cases using primitive assignments.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: reset \deadcycles in \include for latex/2365.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Remove spurious space tokens from \root.
+ General cleanup of the docs, lots of macro envs added.
+
+1997-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: modify \\ in \startbreaks for /2341.
+
+1997-01-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews06.tex: minor edits.
+
+1996-12-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: \nobreak added to \@dottedtocline for latex/2343
+
+1996-12-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * modguide.tex: Fix spelling for latex/2345
+
+1996-12-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Use \begingroup so \g@addto@macro does not make
+ a \mathord.
+
+1996-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: Fix for /2340 (From Marcin).
+
+1996-12-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Call \@setminpage if needed. latex/2318.
+ General doc improvements (add macro envs, indent code, etc).
+
+1996-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: ***
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: ***
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: ***.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Remove *** from messages. internal/2338.
+
+1996-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: documentation changes.
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: Check for old format modified again. /2319
+
+1996-11-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews06.tex: document fd file change.
+
+1996-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: change documentation of release schedule /2319
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: Check for old format modified. /2319
+
+ * ltxcheck.tex: lowercase fd and *enc.def filenames. /1044
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: lowercase fd and *enc.def filenames. /1044
+
+ * slides.fdd: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * latexsym.dtx: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * latexsym.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * slides.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * cmextra.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * newdc.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * olddc.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * cmfonts.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044
+
+ * ltoutenc.ins: lowercase fd and *enc.def file names. /1044
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: lowercase fd and *enc.def file names. /1044
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: lowercase fd file names. internal/1044
+
+1996-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Reinstate \ensuremath as \long /2104.
+
+1996-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: resend patch from Sept 11
+
+ Added ts1enc.def (but it is not unpacked)
+ Changed copyright, underscore (\_) and registered
+ Added \leavevmode to compwordmark
+ Added hex index tabs (experimental)
+
+1996-11-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx
+
+ Added standard nobreak check to the write used for \nofiles case
+
+1996-11-04 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlists.dtx
+
+ Added test for no \item between an inner and
+ outer list
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+
+ Use \hbox to in \dotfill
+
+
+1996-11-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lterror.dtx (autoload version): Move \@nodocument into kernel,
+ so that it can be \let to \relax in \begin{document}.
+
+1996-11-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: Change MW address.
+
+ * cmfonts.ins: split up \generate (again) for PC.
+
+1996-10-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx
+
+ Added \lccode for \oe in OT1
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+
+ Changed numbering of figures, tables and equations outside chapters
+ in book and report (pr/2178)
+
+ Removed math-mode from itemize labels
+
+ * ltspace.dtx
+
+ Reimplemented \(no)linebreak
+ Reimplemented \\ and \newline
+
+ * ltsect.dtx:
+
+ Documentation changes
+
+1996-10-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ Removed defs of \aa \AA
+ Removed \@strip@args (no longer used)
+ Corrected documentation
+
+ * inputenc.dtx
+
+ Added cp865.def
+ Added \textasteriskcentered
+ Removed \aa \AA as internal forms
+ Other minor additions and corrections to .def files
+
+ * ltplain.dtx
+
+ Removed math from \dotfill
+ Added \aa and \AA
+ Updated and corrected documention
+
+1996-10-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlists.dtx:
+
+ Added explicit flag resetting to \endtrivlist
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx
+
+ Added documentation
+
+1996-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx:
+
+ Added local settings of flags in
+ \@arrayparboxrestore: dangerous!
+ Used \@setminipage in minipages
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx:
+
+ Prevent floats in preamble
+ \@setnobreak no longer used in resets (but see above)
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx
+
+ Changes when nobreak is true
+ Prevent \twocolumn in preamble
+ Added error code to \newpage
+
+1996-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Remove redefinion of \Ask and add \askonceonly
+ (which is the same thing, but looks nicer).
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: Change MDW's address. Add \askonceonly.
+
+1996-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlists.dtx
+
+ Use \setboz\z@ to remove parindent in \@item
+ Set \clubpenalty correctly in \@item
+ Do not reset \@nobreak unconditionally
+ Added documentation
+
+ * ltsect.dtx
+
+ Use \setboz\z@ to remove parindent in \@xsect
+ Added documentation
+
+1996-10-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: Delay setting the `current directory syntax'
+ commands so that a configuration file can reset them if
+ necessary.
+
+1996-10-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * autoload.ins: add \usedir
+
+1996-10-21 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx
+
+ Small change in tabbing to make the later change in items
+ (see pr/2211) work properly
+
+ Moved some code \@array, to make this environment more robust
+ (pr/2183), uncovering an interesting feature of the original
+ code; changed to use \set@typeset@protect
+
+ Made \multicolumn \long
+
+1996-10-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile (DSTS): add format.ins
+
+ * manifest.txt: add format.ins
+
+1996-10-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ds/docstrip.dtx: merge in Marcin's latest.
+ More DPC changes:
+ Make missing batchfile an error
+ Change name of config file to docstrip.cfg.
+ Add \endbatchfile.
+ Change all the .ins files for new style.
+
+1996-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ds/docstrip.dtx: Add initex support, and
+ auto setting of \batchfile from \jobname to the new
+ `TDS' version from Marcin.
+
+1996-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: Add ltxcheck.tex
+
+1996-10-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx
+
+ Fixed bug in \text.. commands (pr/2157)
+
+1996-10-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx
+
+ Added setting of \@clubpenalty
+
+ * classes.dtx (chapter*{\bibname):
+
+ Added setting of \@clubpenalty
+
+1996-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: remove testdist.dtx, add ltxcheck.tex
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Remove \testdistribution. internal/2251
+
+ * ltxcheck.tex: New version independent of ltdirchk
+ Add checking for files `unpacked; during LaTeX install.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Remove ltxcheck.tex. internal/2251
+
+ * Makefile: 1996/12/01.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Reset \@unprocessedoptions in
+ \RequirePackageWithOptions for internal/2269.
+
+1996-09-29 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltsect.dtx
+
+ Added documentation
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx
+
+ Added disabling of \@nodocument to \document
+ Tidied up documentation
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx
+
+ Checks for noskipsec and inlabel added to \newpage
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+
+ Moved \@xobeysp to ltspace.dtxx
+
+ * ltspace.dtx
+
+ Added \@xobeysp linked to \nobreakspace
+
+1996-09-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.ins: Added guard `nowarn' to generation of OT1cmtt.fd
+ file, to avoid annoying substitution messages if a bold typewriter
+ font is selected (as, for example, in section headings).
+
+ * newdc.ins: Added guard `nowarn' to generation of T1cmtt.fd file,
+ to avoid annoying substitution messages if a bold typewriter font
+ is selected (as, for example, in section headings).
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd (subsubsection{Computer Modern Typewriter}), Added
+ silent substitutions for T1 bold extended typewriter fonts (new
+ version).
+
+1996-09-21 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ Change to using \@parboxrestore in \@outputpage
+
+1996-09-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx: Quote > in changes entry (from 1994/10/29:-)
+ as it is special due to setting in gglo.ist.
+
+1996-09-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Fix loop for latex/2257
+
+1996-09-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx, letter.dtx, slides.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}):
+ replace \endash with \textendash (stupid typo)
+
+1996-08-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash
+ in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token)
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash
+ in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token)
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: Add the characters ', `, and " to \nfss@catcodes as
+ they might be active while LaTeX processes an .fd file.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): Added the
+ characters ', `, and " to \nfss@catcodes as they might be active
+ while LaTeX processes an .fd file.
+
+1996-08-24 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash
+ in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token)
+
+1996-08-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: swap mathordxxx in cp850. latex/2203
+
+1996-07-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx:
+ definition of if@inmath switch removed (see below)
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx:
+ removed if@inmath switch and replaced with inline code
+ \init@restore@glb@settings saving space macro names and
+ execution time
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx:
+ removed ifrestore@version switch and replaced with inline
+ code \init@restore@version
+
+1996-07-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ make third arg of \@reargdef implicit
+ replace {} args by \relax
+ use \noexpand instead of \string in error message
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+ set if@test always globally
+ add some missing percent signs in \clearpage
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx:
+ set if@minipage always globally
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ set if@ignore always globally
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ set if@ignore always globally
+ add user command \ignorespacesafterend to be used in env defs
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx:
+ set if@nobreak always globally
+ set if@minipage always globally
+
+ * ltspace.dtx:
+ fix typo in doc.
+ set if@nobreak always globally
+
+ * ltlists.dtx:
+ set if@nobreak always globally
+ set if@minipage always globally
+
+ * ltsect.dtx:
+ set if@nobreak always globally
+
+ * ltclass.dtx:
+ made \@classoptionslist and \@unusedoptionlist only preamble
+ to save space
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx:
+ removed unnecessary \relax (6 times) in \nfss@catcodes
+ use faster \if$#3$ test in \@DeclareMathsizes
+
+ * ltalloc.dtx:
+ don't set a default for @tempswa -- nobody can rely on that
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+ removed setting of \vsize and \hsize (done later)
+ changed \dimen\z@ to \dimen@ to save space (and time)
+
+1996-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt: latex/2197
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: Use char0 not @ for \lowercase trick: latex/2197
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Use char0 not @ for \lowercase trick: latex/2197
+
+ * patches.txt: add ltxcheck.tex to list of changed files.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: add ltxcheck.tex to list of changed files.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Check for unauthorised cmr10 changes.
+
+1996-07-18 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltspace.dtx:
+
+ Added commentary on some known problems
+
+1996-07-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: Add vtex.txt
+
+ * manifest.txt: Add vtex.txt
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: pl1
+
+ * patches.txt: pl1
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Free up token registers /2213
+
+1996-07-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * pastex.txt: Update (Lars Hecking/Christian Bauernfeind)
+
+1996-06-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Fix to give correct error with plain TeX.
+
+1996-06-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews05.tex: (Barbara Beeton) Wrong attribution for IPA fonts
+
+1996-06-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx: spelling... J"org Knappen /2176
+
+1996-06-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Change \hskip\z@skip to \hskip1sp in for /2160
+
+ * syntonly.dtx: Fix \GetFileInfo usage in documentation /2174
+
+1996-06-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex:
+
+ Updated for new release
+ General minor edits
+
+1996-06-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: doc improvements, mainly from /2174 again.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174
+
+ * ltalloc.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174
+
+1996-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Fix Checksum Ulrik Vieth /2171
+
+1996-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ Added resetting of \everypar in the output routine
+
+1996-06-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews04.tex: typo: \ProcessOptions not \ProcessOption.
+
+ * ltnews05.tex: Advertise Mainz copy of GNATS.
+
+ * ltnews.cls: Add extra line in lw35fonts option.
+ Make font scaling messages `s'.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: use \@@par not \endgraf.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: use \@@par not \endgraf.
+
+1996-06-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews05.tex:
+
+ Revised text
+
+ * ltnews.cls:
+
+ Changed fonts for lw35 option, for logical and aesthetic
+ reasons
+ Added support for T1 encoding with lw35 option
+ Corrected grammar in footer
+
+ * fntguide.tex:
+
+ Updated for new release
+
+1996-06-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltspace.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166
+
+ * latex209.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166
+
+ * bugs.txt: remove duplicate line J"org Knappen/2165
+
+1996-06-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: modify vms suggestion slightly (J"org Knappen)
+
+1996-06-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: \verbatim@noligs@list now processed after
+ \dospecials (PR 2138).
+
+1996-06-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * install.txt:
+
+ Changed reference from texpert.txt to cfgguide.tex
+
+1996-06-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Look for dcfonts release 1.3 in ltxcheck
+
+1996-05-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews05.tex: more changes.
+
+1996-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx : Make the commands \frontmatter, \mainmatter and
+ \part react to [openany] in the same way as \backmatter and
+ \chapter do. (PR 2106)
+
+1996-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Redid \(@)normalsize checks. internal/2153
+ Reinstated old definition of \nofiles. latex/2146
+
+1996-05-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ Extra documentation
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx
+
+ Changed test for a text page full of floats
+ Tidied documentation
+
+1996-05-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Preset accent arguments in a box to stop font
+ loading interfering with accent position. latex/2133.
+
+1996-05-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews05.tex: needs more work, but...
+
+1996-05-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: CHANGE: Allow commands with arguments (eg
+ \MakeUppercase) to be used in the `style' argument of
+ \@startsection. The section heading text including any number
+ etc will be supplied as the argument of this
+ command. internal/2148
+
+1996-05-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * minimal.cls: Documentation improvements.
+
+1996-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd:
+ Added Computer Modern Variable Typewriter family.
+
+1996-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx:
+ Produce better error message when encoding is misspelled. pr/2054
+
+1996-05-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx
+
+ Removed \@@sqrt
+
+ * slides.dtx
+
+ Removed \@@sqrt
+
+1996-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.fdd: Force \hyphenchar of OT1 fonts to 45, in case
+ \defaulthyphenchar has changed.
+ Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to \DeclareFontFamily
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Force \hyphenchar of OT1 fonts to 45, in case
+ \defaulthyphenchar has changed.
+ Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to \DeclareFontFamily
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Add \write\m@ne{} to \nofiles so that
+ \label (and other things) don't change the vertical spacing when
+ \nofiles is used. latex/2146
+
+1996-05-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx
+
+ Made more robust to errors
+
+ * slides.dtx
+
+ Made \include mechanism work
+
+1996-05-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Enable activation of codes below 32. latex/2071
+ Add warning if nothing defined by the encoding file latex/2136
+
+1996-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpacked.txt:
+ added cp852.def. pr/2081
+
+1996-05-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * legal.txt: Modify `rename changed files' clause to explicitly
+ forbid `double renaming' back to the original names.
+
+1996-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx:
+ Changed \begingroup to \bgroup to match a change to the kernel
+ done in 1994!!! It took a long time to find that one. pr/2100
+
+ * inputenc.dtx:
+ Added encoding definitions for cp852 contributed by Petr Sojka.
+ pr/2081
+
+1996-05-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews05.tex: make a start at this ....
+
+1996-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: reset \AtBeginDocument inside \begin{document}
+ for latex/1297. Small documentation improvements.
+
+1996-04-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Documentation improvements.
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx: Documentation improvements.
+
+1996-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: perl -p -e s#--release--date--goes--here--#1996/06/01#
+ spring is in the air....
+
+ * ltspace.dtx: documentation improvements.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: add extra \hskip to preserve tabcolsep in empty
+ l columns. latex/2122.
+ Small documentation improvements.
+
+1996-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: Minor documentation improvements.
+
+1996-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (section*{Index}%):
+ Definition of \printindex removed because no longer needed.
+ pr/2095
+
+1996-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: ansinew 09f is \"Y not \"y, latex/2119
+
+1996-03-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Modify \ensuremath for amslatex/2104
+
+1996-03-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: latex/2105 fix: dont leave mathord {} groups.
+
+1996-02-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * multitex.txt: Update from Markus Kohm, latex/2051
+
+1996-02-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Cedilla (\c\ ) rather than (\c{}) latex/2077
+ 0F0 corrected in cp850 latex/2080
+ 0B2 corrected in latin2 latex/2079
+
+1996-01-31 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx: fixed \cline which wasn't updated after internal
+ interface change pr/2067
+
+1996-01-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}):
+ support doc files also in compatibility mode (so far doc did typeset
+ the code in cmr instead of cmtt in compat mode)
+
+1996-01-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltidxglo.dtx:
+ turn \makeindex and \makeglossary into noops after use to avoid
+ problems with combinations of \PageIndex \makeindex etc. pr/2048
+
+ * letter.dtx:
+ Made redefinition of \vspace robust. pr/2049
+ Nevertheless, they syntax used in the pr is considered
+ incorrect!
+
+ * ltspace.dtx:
+ Made \vspace robust. Enhancement suggested by pr/2049
+
+1996-01-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx:
+ Changed default text preceding the index so that it depends on
+ the use of code line numbering.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx:
+ Removed \star since useless. pr/2039
+
+1996-01-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: latex/2024 ensure setting \input@path does not
+ change behaviour of ##1 in \IfFileExists.
+
+1996-01-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * bugs.txt:
+ Added a comment about where to send errata entries for the books.
+
+1995-12-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}):
+ Added \AlsoImplementation as a counterpart to \OnlyDescription
+ pr/2040.
+
+ * texpert.txt:
+ clarified info about warnings happening when using makeindex.
+
+ * doc.dtx (section*{Index}%):
+ Turn \PrintIndex into noop after use. pr/2038
+ (section*{{Change History}}%):
+ Turn \PrintChanges into noop after use. pr/2038
+
+1995-12-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx:
+ Corrected printout of index. pr/2028
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ Corrected printout of documentation. pr/2030
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+ Corrected changes entry. pr/2029
+
+1995-12-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Ulrik Vieth /2017: fix up T1cmfib.fd file.
+
+1995-12-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * copypre.txt
+
+ New version, removing long lines
+
+ * copyins.txt
+
+ New version, removing long lines
+
+ * copyhead.txt
+
+ New version, removing long lines
+
+ * bugs.txt
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * autoload.txt
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * texpert.txt
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * ltnews.cls
+
+ Removed long lines
+ Changed capitalisation
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd
+
+ Removed long lines
+
+ * slides.fdd
+
+ Removed long lines
+
+ * olddc.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * newdc.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * cmextra.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * cmfonts.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * latexsym.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * autoload.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * unpack2e.ins
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * slides.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * legal.txt
+
+ New version
+
+ * readme.txt
+
+ New version
+
+ * ltclass.dtx
+
+ Documentation added
+
+ * fontdef.dtx
+
+ Documentation added
+
+ * latex209.dst
+
+ Smaller batches for old emtex
+
+ * modguide.tex
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * cfgguide.tex
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * ltx3info.tex
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Additions, updates and corrections
+
+ * ltxguide.cls
+
+ Corrected cfg loading
+
+ * inputenc.dtx
+
+ Detailed corrections
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx
+
+ Added documentation
+
+1995-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * install.txt (NOTE): add info to run olddc.ins.
+
+1995-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Modify \IeC and add missing % in
+ \DeclareInputText.
+
+1995-12-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: (Bernd Raichle) Check for dcfonts 1.2 patch
+ level 1. Latest TeX is now 3.14159.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: TEMPORARY \copyright fixes.
+
+ * amiweb2c.txt: new version from Andreas Scherer.
+
+1995-12-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Switched off \@inmathwarn.
+
+1995-12-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Move \m@th out of \ensuremath in \textsuperscript
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: restore \G@refundefinedtrue
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: restore \G@refundefinedtrue
+
+ * ltnews04.tex: new input encodings.
+
+1995-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dst: Remove writing of \@currdir by .ins file.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: reset catcode of ^ in fd files.
+
+1995-12-06 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * encguide.tex: Added examples of new \text* commands.
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Added documentation for new \text* commands.
+
+1995-12-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cstex.txt: New file (from Markus Kohm)
+
+ * multitex.txt: New file (from Markus Kohm)
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: add \ignorespaces to \begin{document} latex/1933
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Remove \@unexpandable@noexpand (never used) /1733
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: \textsuperscript in math mode. latex/1984
+
+1995-12-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Changed text of \TextSymbolUnavailable.
+
+1995-12-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lthyphen.dtx: minor doc edits for /1989
+
+ * preload.dtx: 12pt OMS and OML preloads added /1989.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: minor doc edits for /1989
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: upright italic and tt small caps re-added. /1989.
+
+ * modguide.tex: edits for /1989
+
+1995-12-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Added cp437de.def.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added \@tabacckludge commands to the Next encoding.
+ Replaced ~ by \nobreakspace.
+ Added a `test version' to the \ProvidesFile.
+ Made <pounds> and <uumlaut> text char in cp437.
+ Made <fraction> a math char in Next.
+ Made <cdot> and <bullet> text chars in all encodings.
+ Added cp437de (cp437 but with ss rather than beta).
+
+1995-12-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Dont force \hyphenchar=127 on T1 fonts /1853
+ Documentation changes and some font shapes modified
+ Ulrik Vieth /1989,
+
+1995-12-01 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Removed extraneous {} from the <superior> glyphs.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Made \SS a default command rather than making the
+ OT1 definition the default.
+
+1995-11-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * proc.dtx, classes.dtx (section{Identification}): Added the date
+ of the LaTeX format to the optional argument of \NeedsTeXformat in
+ order to signal newer class files being used with an old format
+ (PR1971).
+
+1995-11-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cfgguide.tex: dont change uc lc tables...
+
+1995-11-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex: Minor edits.
+
+ * cfgguide.tex: minor edits.
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: modify verbatim slightly.
+
+ * cmextra.dst: Use concurrent features for speed (/1985 again)
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx: Remove duplicate driver code (/1985 again)
+
+ * newlfont.dtx: Remove duplicate driver code (/1985 again)
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: add \ProvidesFile to flafter.sty (/1985 again)
+
+1995-11-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \textless, \textgreater, et al.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \textsterling with \pounds.
+ Added default error-message definitions for \textyen et al.
+ Added a \NeedsTeXFormat line.
+ Tidied up the Next encoding.
+
+1995-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: 2 (not 3) column index and modified script
+ Allow control names to hyphenate in the ChangeLog.
+
+ * latexsym.dst: \input docstrip before using docstrip commands.
+
+ * latexsym.dtx: Stop rogue %% comments apearing in generated
+ files. Another one from Ulrik Vieth's /1985.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Increase left margin and marginpar width
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: minor improvements.
+
+ * ltnews04.tex: minor improvements.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Typo in autoload \ClassError version. /1985
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: doc fixes for /1979.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: doc fixes for /1985.
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx: doc fixes for /1985.
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: doc fixes for /1985.
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: doc fixes for /1985.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: doc fixes for /1985.
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx: doc fixes for /1985.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: doc fixes for /1985.
+
+1995-11-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added test for math mode to text commands.
+ Renamed \@changed@x@err to \TextSymbolUnavailable.
+
+1995-11-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: reset catcode of # in fd files internal/1982
+
+ * exscale.dtx: add \ProvideFile to fd file for latex/1987
+
+1995-11-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltspace.dtx
+
+ \nobreakspace added
+
+1995-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: typo ltxdoc.cls for ltxguide.cls
+
+1995-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * texpert.txt: describe updated ltxcheck
+
+ * manifest.txt: ltnews04
+
+ * Makefile (TEXS): ltnews04
+
+ * ltnews04.tex: New TUG Address, \LoadClassWithOptions
+
+ * doc.dtx: Make \MakeShortVerb use an \PackageInfo rather
+ than \tyepout. internal/1938
+
+1995-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: Minor documentation cleanups.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: add `symbol' to the message.
+
+1995-11-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: Merge in Marcin's new code restoring
+ \inFileName functionality.
+ Remove generation date/version number from generated files
+ Add \AddGenerationDate batchfile command to put them back.
+ Force whole file through ispell!!
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \@wrong@font@char in \UseTextSymbol. /1676
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Make missing fd file \typeout a Font Info
+ and add \@wrong@font@char for use in \UseTextSymbol. /1676
+ Clean up many \changes entries.
+
+1995-11-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: Exchange order of ltdefns and ltalloc
+ (Matches code change of 24th May.)
+ Modify \changes def to match doc.sty 1.9u
+
+1995-11-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Dont make a ! BAD typeout if just the old (or new)
+ dc fonts are installed.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Add \LoadClassWithOptions for latex/1556
+ Add \RequirePackageWithOptions to match.
+ Stop \@unprocessedoptions complaining about empty options
+ noticed whilest debugging the above change...
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: remove rogue \endinput. Wrap long lines.
+
+1995-11-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Check default font encoding/family etc.
+
+1995-11-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ Made code in-line to remove pseudo-hooks
+
+1995-11-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * autoload.dst: fix order of files in autoerr for new docstrip.
+
+ * ltnews04.tex: first draft
+
+1995-11-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{Definitions for the OT1 encoding}):
+ Changed \char32 to \@xxxii (two tokens less). Replaced octal
+ number 27 by decimal number 23 to protect against the quote
+ character being active. Added \leavevmode at start of \c,
+ otherwise the output routine might be invoked within the macro
+ (suggested by Donald Arseneau). Replaced some 0's by \z@
+ (faster).
+
+ * ltlists.dtx (\@doendpe): Enclosed \setbox0 assignment by a
+ group so that it leaves the contents of box $0$ intact.
+ Discovered by Donald Arseneau.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Use decimal rather than octal character
+ specification for \hyphenchar and \skewchar so that there is
+ no problem with an active quote character.
+
+1995-11-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack.ins: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * newdc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * olddc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * proc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * autoload.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * latex209.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * cmfonts.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * classes.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * slides.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * latexsym.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * makeindx.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * docstrip.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip.
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: New concurrent docstrip by Marcin Woli\'nski.
+
+1995-11-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx
+
+ Made \footnote always work in frontmatter
+
+1995-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Remove spurious space from NFSS font warning
+ latex/1676
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Add silent font substitutions.
+
+1995-11-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added code for fleqn.sty, leqno.sty,
+ openbib.sty.
+
+ * latex209.dst: Added generation of files fleqn.sty, leqno.sty,
+ openbib.sty for compatibility mode.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Changed internal name \a to \@tabacckludge to
+ protect against redefinition by malicicous users. Wrapped long
+ lines.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Changed internal name \a to \@tabacckludge to
+ protect against redefinition by malicicous users.
+
+1995-11-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Only list `configuration' input files.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only
+ non-standard (cfg) inputs listed.
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only
+ non-standard (cfg) inputs listed.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only
+ non-standard (cfg) inputs listed.
+
+ * Makefile: Add newdc/olddc
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Add newdc.ins.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Modify T1 and TS1 generation.
+
+ * cmfonts.dst: remove dc font generation.
+
+ * olddc.dst: NEW: Generate fd files for obsolete dcfonts 1.1
+ and earlier.
+
+ * newdc.dst: NEW: Generate fd files for dcfonts 1.2
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Wrap fd inputs in \nfss@catcodes. internal/1932
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Correct undefined font family test internal/1933
+
+1995-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: CHANGE: Add \nobreak to \@finalstrut to allow
+ hyphenation of the last word of a p-column (and footnotes).
+ internal/1931
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: more robust checking of dc fonts.
+
+1995-10-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.fdd: Added extra substitutions for shape `ui' to make
+ \pounds work properly in the slides class (mostly).
+
+1995-10-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxcheck.tex: Check that if you have the old dc fonts, then the
+ initex run loaded a suitable old fd file.
+
+ * fntguide.tex: Describe genb size function.
+
+ * clsguide.tex: Mention minimal.cls is now in the distribution.
+
+ * minimal.cls: Bring into line with version in clsguide.tex
+
+1995-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{The title}): empty \@date as well at the
+ end of \maketitle
+ (subsection{Paragraphing}): Added the setting of \...skipamount,
+ just a copy of the kernel values. (PR 1464)
+
+1995-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Initialise \@wholewidth in autoload kernel.
+ General doc cleanup.
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Describe minimal.cls
+
+1995-10-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * minimal.cls: A masterpiece of typographical design.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Disable autofss2 for now.
+
+1995-10-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx
+
+ Corrected bug in \end@dblfloat, made code more robust
+
+1995-10-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: modify docstrip guards so
+ \ProvidesFile{ltmath.dtx} seen by source2e.tex.
+
+ * ltidxglo.dtx: General doc cleanup.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: Initilalise mark commands using \let to save space
+
+ * ltalloc.dtx: General doc cleanup.
+
+1995-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx
+
+ Removed one-way switches from \endocument
+
+ * ltxref.dtx
+
+ Removed one-way switches from \endocument
+ Tidying.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx
+
+ Removed one-way switches from \endocument
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx
+
+ Removed one-way switches from \endocument
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx
+
+ Removed one-way switches from \endocument
+ Tidying.
+
+1995-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Make \@autoload files ignore EOL.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: modify autoload \@preamerr.
+ Add % to some lines as \@autoload files now ignore line ends.
+
+1995-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx
+
+ Made poptabs more robust
+ Tidied up documentation
+
+1995-10-23 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Abstract}): Added setting of
+ \cs{beginparpenalty} to discourage page break before abstract
+ heading.
+
+1995-10-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Added support for new (version 1.2) DC fonts and
+ text companion fonts in encoding TS1.
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Added generation of ansinew.def file.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added ansinew encoding (Windows 3.1 ANSI), as
+ contributed by Berthold K.P. Horn (bkph@ai.mit.edu).
+
+1995-10-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Clarify output format a bit.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: modify autoload support
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx: Keep autofss2 code in kernel until
+ \begin{document}.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Keep autofss2 code in kernel until
+ \begin{document}.
+ use \@undefined not \undefined
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: \@filelist zapped too early.
+
+1995-10-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \' \` \= by \a' \a` \a in order to get
+ correct accents in a tabbing environment.
+
+1995-10-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltspace.dtx (subsection{Horizontal space}): Moved \changes
+ from \@ to \hspace where it belongs.
+
+1995-10-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Reset \ProvidesFile, Preserve initex file list in
+ \reserved@a
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Remove \ProvidesFile redefinition to ltfinal.
+ Reset \CurrentOption in \ProcessOptions for graphics/1873
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Modify \ProvidesFile during initex to save
+ debugging info and not waste \ver@... csnames.
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Show initex file list.
+
+ * latexbug.el: use \@@input not \input
+
+ * latex209.dtx: \supereject, \mscount, old style \@imakepicbox
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Move \supereject to latex209
+
+ * lttab.dtx: move \mscount to latex209 use \@multicnt instead.
+
+1995-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: make \cite robust /1808
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Make \sqrt robust /1808
+ Use \@testopt in eqnarray's \\ /1911.
+
+ * ltspace.dtx: Use \@testopt in \[no]{line|page}preak (/1911)
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: new \@ifstar CHANGE: require ##1 in both arguments
+ not ####1 in one and ##1 in the other. (internal/1910)
+ Use \@testopt in \newcommand and \newenvironment (/1911)
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Clarify \makebox(,)[b] description.
+
+ * ltthm.dtx: Allow \newtheorem after \begin{document} again.
+ (LaTeX Book, page 57)
+
+1995-10-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: Added \relax at the end of the definition of
+ \normalfont to prevent it and \textnormal from eating up leading
+ spaces.
+
+1995-10-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx
+
+ New check in \clearpage.
+
+1995-10-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: autoload error message
+
+ * ltthm.dtx: Make \newtheorem and its internals `only preamble'
+ to save memory.
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: autoload tracing code
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Make \showhyphens colour safe and autoloadable.
+
+1995-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{The title}): In \maketitle, move \par
+ inside the scope of \Large, to get even line spacing.
+
+1995-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: use \@@input to load autoload files.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: more autoload mods.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Autoload \@changed@x@err (autoerr.sty)
+
+1995-10-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * autoload.dst: update autoerr generation.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: autoload missing file error command
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: autoload \new... error message.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx Use \aut@global in \DeclareRobustCommand
+
+1995-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature.
+
+1995-10-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: 1995/12/01 Christmas is nearly here...
+
+ * Makefile: 1995/12/01 Christmas is nearly here...
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Fix \@xtypein (from patch file)
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Define \@@sqrt (from patch file)
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature.
+
+ * autoload.dst: autoload module in ltdefns.dtx.
+
+1995-10-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Move \newif to ltdefns.dtx.
+ Use \sbox in \underbar (saves tokens, and works with colour)
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: \futurelet with \@let@token for internal/924
+ New implementation of \@xargdef in terms of the new
+ \@protected@testopt. Saves tokens and makes user defined
+ commands with optional arguments robust. internal/1733
+ Move \newif here from ltplain.
+ Autoload support. Add \aut@global and \@autoload. internal/1617.
+
+1995-09-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Check \filename parser in ltxcheck.tex
+ for latex/1624 latex/1754 and graphics/1336
+ Check for dc fonts in ltxcheck.tex
+
+1995-09-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx, slides.fdd: Globally replaced scale factor 19.91
+ by 19.907 in \DeclareFontShape, as this gives better rounded
+ font sizes at 600dpi (suggested by Denis Roegel).
+
+ * docstrip.dtx: Changed address of Johannes Braams.
+
+1995-09-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Declare 2 count registers previously used
+ in \cline. /1723
+
+1995-09-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * web2ctex.txt: Added some comments about using non-csh, index
+ style files and some other missing files.
+
+1995-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: \RequirePackage{shortvrb} for latex/1875
+
+ * latexbug.el (report-latex-bug): Rainer's fix for latex/1675
+
+1995-09-21 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Added generation of next.def file.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added next encoding, as contributed by
+ Stefan Ried <stef@theo-phys.uni-essen.de> and Holger Uhr
+ <huhr@uni-paderborn.de>.
+
+1995-09-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx: Fix \hline for latex/1871.
+
+1995-09-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmextra.dst: Added generation of OMLccm.fd file, which had
+ previsouly been removed from cmfonts.dst.
+
+ * slides.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. Wrap some long
+ lines and use \null instead of \hbox{} (by DPC).
+
+1995-09-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.fdd: Corrected names of .fd file names in argument to
+ \ProvidesFile commands.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Moved call to \@noligs macro after call to
+ \verbatim@font in \verb command, just as it is already in the
+ verbatim environment.
+
+1995-09-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: Modify TeX2 message.
+
+1995-09-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx: New \cline implementation. No longer declare
+ counters \@cla \@clb. More macro envs in documentation.
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Move \multispan to lttab.dtx. Loads more macro
+ environments in the documentation.
+
+1995-09-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tex2.txt: typos...
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Minor space savings. Add a few more macro envs.
+
+ * autoload.dst: add the l-terror.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Add autoload support.
+
+1995-08-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added 0 to the beginning of every number.
+ Changed the definition of "AD in latin1 and latin2 to be \-.
+ Swapped ordfeminine and ordmasculine around in latin1.
+
+1995-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+ Reimplemented openbib option to save space (hash and mem).
+ Disable \title \author \date \and after \maketitle.
+ Default for \newblock outside thebibliography env changed.
+
+1995-08-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+ Added autoload code for autoout1.sty (\enlargethispage).
+
+ * ltfsscmp.dtx:
+ Added \@preambleonly lines from ltfssdcl.dtx.
+ Moved compat code from ltfssbas.dtx to this file.
+
+ * autoload.dst:
+ Added new autoload files.
+
+1995-08-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx:
+ Moved most of the \@onlypreamble declarations to the right places.
+ Added forgotten \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@ to \@preambleonly
+ (400 useless tokens)!
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx:
+ Added to the documentation.
+
+1995-08-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx:
+ Added autoload code for autofss1.sty.
+ Added autoload code for autofss2.sty.
+
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx:
+ Macro \gobble@font@spec eliminated.
+ Added autoload code for autofss1.sty.
+ Added autoload code for autofss2.sty.
+
+1995-08-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * encguide.tex:
+ First draft.
+
+1995-08-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tex2.txt:
+
+ Clearer wordings
+
+ * ltcntrl.dtx:
+
+ Made most loop macros \long
+ Removed unnecessary \...noop macros
+ Tidied up documentation
+
+1995-08-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx:
+ set \@maxdepth at begin document not in class file
+ add a couple of \global's
+
+ * usrguide.tex:
+ typo corrections pr/1809
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ fixed mistake added with last update
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+ throw in a couple of forgotten percents
+ reprogram a couple of macros to save space or macro names
+ update the documentation
+
+1995-08-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlength.dtx: Fix doc typos for latex/753
+
+1995-08-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx:
+ updated \marg etc to use \meta, suggested by pr/1370
+ added missing braces in definition of \star
+
+1995-08-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd:
+ Fixed setup for OMScmr.fd as pointed out by Christian Spieler. pr/1804
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ Added code for leqno.clo and fleqn.clo
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+ Moved code for leqno and fleqn to kernel files.
+
+1995-08-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+ Implemented titlepage differently to support twoside,openight
+ options correctly. pr/1783.
+
+ * docstrip.dst:
+ Removed part that might add non-standard setting of \@currdir
+ into docstrip.tex so that unpacked distribution stays portable. pr/1765
+
+1995-08-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for the `documentation parts'}):
+ Fixed problem that \begin{macro}{\foo} doesn't suppress
+ index entries for \foo within its body. pr/343
+ (subsection[Dealing with the change history]):
+ \changes entries on top-level now preceed themselves with
+ the expansion of \generalname rather than producing the
+ fixed string "General".
+
+ * docstrip.dtx:
+ Clarified default "copying conditions" as suggested by
+ Richard Stallman
+
+1995-07-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex:
+
+ Added notices concerning use of `Standard LaTeX'
+
+ * cfgguide.tex:
+
+ Started major expansion and rewrite
+
+ * modguide.tex:
+
+ Rewrite adding section on modfying LaTeX
+
+ * legal.txt:
+
+ Further expansion and changes
+
+ * ltxguide.cls:
+
+ Changed configuration file messages
+
+1995-07-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx: reduce save stack usage for latex/1742
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: reduce save stack usage for latex/1742
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: Save a few tokens in \sloppy and \fussy
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Use \sbox in \@save(pic)box
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: Save a few tokens in logo defs.
+
+1995-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: tex2.txt
+
+ * tex2.txt: TeX2 installation instructions first draft.
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: Test for TeX2 before reading fonttext.???
+
+1995-07-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt: PL3 Add proc and latex209 fixes missed yesterday.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: PL3 Add proc and latex209 fixes missed yesterday.
+
+ * proc.dtx: fix \thanks for /1735
+
+1995-07-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt: patch level 2.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: Patch level 2 (accents)c ../mir
+
+1995-07-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ New version of \@outputpage
+
+1995-07-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: Remove \@onlypreamble from \bibcite
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: Remove \@onlypreamble from \newlabel
+
+1995-07-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltidxglo.dtx:
+ Added \@preambleonly statements
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation
+ Use macro rather than switch to flag default font
+ substitutions pr/1236
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ Removed surplus \@onlypreamble stuff
+ Updated documentation
+ Streamlined code in \enddocument
+ Streamlined code for \@xobeysp
+
+1995-07-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * autopict.sty: Allow 2e commands in the autoload file /1737
+
+1995-07-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * syntonly.dtx:
+ Fix incorrect checksum.
+
+1995-07-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltthm.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734)
+
+ * lttab.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734)
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734)
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation pr/1734
+
+ * ltlists.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734)
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation pr/1734
+
+ * lterror.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation pr/1734
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx:
+ Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734)
+
+1995-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltcntrl.dtx:
+ Reimplemented loop structures using Kabelschacht method.
+
+ * ltlists.dtx:
+ Some updates to the docu.
+ Shortend defs of enumerate and itemize by using \expandafter.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ Removed a couple of surplus tokens, updated docu.
+ (subsection{Command definitions}):
+ Make \CheckCommand preambly only to save valuable space.
+
+1995-07-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt: document /1722 fix.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Fudge \@textsuperscript for /1722.
+
+1995-07-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: documentation updates as suggested by Christian Spieler
+ pr/1721
+
+1995-07-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltspace.dtx (section{Spacing}):
+ Reimplementation of \[no]pagebreak to save space.
+ Cleanup parts of the docu.
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+ Use proper interface to jump out of \@tfor loop.
+ Some docu update.
+ Renamed \test@next to \t@st@ic.
+
+1995-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexsym.dtx:
+ Free space taking up by \not@base error message since
+ that one isn't any longer necessary.
+ Some documentation update.
+
+1995-07-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+ Small space changes in various places.
+
+1995-07-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Moved debugging code to ltplain.
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx:
+ Fixing a mistake in shortening lines.
+
+1995-06-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt: document patches.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: Oh well. I suppose it had to happen.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: \@fnsymbol added (without \ensuremath) for /1684
+
+1995-06-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: fix \changes entries for /1677
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: fix \changes entries for /1677
+
+1995-06-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+ Fixed the definition for footnotemarks in \maketitle for article
+ which got corrupted in the june release. pr/1683
+
+1995-06-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: Modify \bibcite so a repeated key produces
+ LaTeX Warning: Label `aaa' multiply defined.
+ ...
+ LaTeX Warning: There were multiply-defined labels.
+ instead of
+ LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed.
+ Rerun to get cross-references right.
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: Modify \newlabel so \bibcite can share code.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Stop \documentstyle re-enabling \usepackage
+ After it has been disabled by latex209.def (latex/1634)
+
+1995-06-18 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile:
+
+ Changed to use copypre.txt and copyhead.txt
+
+ * cfgguide.tex:
+
+ Configuration stuff transferred from texpert.txt
+
+ * autoload.txt:
+
+ Tidying, removed long lines
+
+ * cm*.dst, docstrip.dst,latex*.dst,exscale.dst
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * inputenc.dst,ltoutenc.dst,slides.dst:
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * unpack2e.ins:
+
+ New preambles
+
+ * copyright.txt:
+
+ No longer used
+
+ * copyins.txt:
+
+ New text
+
+ * copypre.txt:
+
+ New file
+
+ * copyhead.txt:
+
+ New file
+
+ * copydisf.txt:
+
+ New file
+
+ * copydisg.tex:
+
+ New file
+
+1995-06-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: Minor documentation edits.
+
+ * ltfsscmp.dtx: Minor documentation edits.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Minor documentation edits.
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx: Take \ProvidesFile out of \iffalse clause
+ so it shows up in \listfiles in source2e.tex.
+ Wrap some long lines to 72.
+
+1995-06-15 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews03.tex: Added pointer to autoload.txt.
+
+1995-06-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: modify printing of patch level on page 1.
+
+ * manifest.txt: autoload files.
+
+ * autoload.txt: initial version
+
+ * Makefile: add autoload files
+
+ * autoload.dst: initial version of .ins file for autoload.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Add \ProvidesFile to autoload file.
+
+1995-06-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Fixed typo cp850 -> cp437
+
+1995-06-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Fixed typo cp850 -> cp437
+
+1995-06-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Add \ProvidesFile to autoload file.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Moddify method of adding patchlevel banner
+ Force format to be in errorstopmode, even if an installer
+ scrolled past an error during initex run.
+
+1995-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: Add Auotoload banner
+ Check for old source files (older than a year).
+
+1995-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * legal.txt:
+
+ Major changes
+
+ * usrguide.tex:
+
+ Added ltx3info.tex info
+
+ * fntguide.tex:
+
+ Added note re using non-cmr fonts in T1
+
+ * clsguide.tex:
+
+ Hash marks in option declarations OK
+ Added Case cHANGING commands
+
+ * cfgguide.tex:
+
+ Configuration stuff transferred from texpert.txt
+
+ * lablst.tex:
+
+ Improved version: lists all bibitems separately
+ Changed internal commands
+
+ * Makefile:
+
+ Added modguide.tex
+
+ * manifest.txt:
+
+ Added ltnews03.tex and modguide.tex
+
+ * install.txt:
+
+ File name corrected
+ Added ltx3info.tex info
+
+ * emtex.txt:
+
+ Added info re batch file
+
+ * texpert.txt:
+
+ Configuration details transferred to cfgguide.tex
+
+ * readme.txt:
+
+ Added pointers to various other info files
+
+ * ltspace.dtx:
+
+ Added \relax to \obeycr
+
+1995-06-09 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Made composites declared with DeclareTextComposite
+ use no-argument macros rather than one-argument macros.
+
+ * ltnews03.tex: Changed modify.tex to modguide.tex, updated
+ figures for space savings.
+
+1995-06-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews03.tex: New issue of LaTeX News.
+
+1995-06-06 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Made \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase grab their
+ argument and brace it.
+
+1995-06-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: Removed patch for latex/1240 (now in ltoutenc.dtx).
+ Removed patch for tools/1296 (now in ltoutenc.dtx).
+ Removed patch for latex/1322 (now in ltoutenc.dtx).
+ We now have an empty patch file again!
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Moved math commands from ltoutenc.dtx.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Redid protection in DeclareTextCommand so that it
+ uses \noexpand rather than \protect. This should stop the
+ problems with \'\i putting the acute on a \protect rather than
+ on the \i. Commented out the defaults for textless and
+ textgreater. Allow \ProvideTextCommandDefault after
+ \begin{document} so it can be used in inputenc.def files.
+ Save some tokens in \textvisiblespace and \textunderscore.
+ Moved math commands to fontdef.dtx.
+
+ * classes.dtx: Replaced \uppercase with \MakeUppercase
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Added \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase.
+
+1995-05-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Made hex numbers safe against active ". Added
+ docstrip commands to applemac.def.
+
+1995-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx:
+ Made \filec@ntents preamble only to save space.
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx:
+ Added definition of \new@mathgroup again which got lost.
+ (should be moved to other file one day).
+
+1995-05-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}):
+
+ Made \loop long
+ Made \underbar use \box \tw@
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Command definitions}):
+
+ Made \@gobble commands \long
+
+1995-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * proc.dtx (subsection{The page style}): Removed \rmfamily from
+ definition of \@oddfoot (PR 1578)
+
+ * ltmath.dtx : Removed \rmfamily from definition of \@eqnnum
+ (PR 1578)
+
+ * ltpage.dtx : Removed \rmfamily from definition of \ps@plain
+ (PR 1578)
+
+1995-05-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: Remove generation of ltnfss.dtx
+
+ * unpack2e.ins Add new NFSS files
+
+ * manifest.txt: Add new NFSS files.
+
+ * source2e.tex: Include new NFSS files
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: Initial version (latint.dtx)
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: Initial version (lfonts.dtx)
+
+ * ltfsscmp.dtx: Initial version (fam.dtx)
+
+ * ltfsstrc.dtx: Initial version (tracefnt.dtx)
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Initial version (fam.dtx)
+
+1995-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}):
+ Removed \math@fontsfalse in \MacroFont and \AltMacroFont because
+ this isn't any longer correct with the new math font setup in NFSS2.
+ pr/1622 (and some earlier one)
+ Use \GetFileInfo.
+
+1995-05-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx:
+
+ Changed float reset hooks to empty
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx:
+
+ Moved new resettings into hooks so that they can be removed in
+ latex209.dtx
+
+ * ltspace.dtx/ltlists.dtx
+
+ Moved \endtrivlist and friends to ltlists.dtx
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx (section{File Handling}):
+
+ Added check for zero \topskip to \begin{document}
+ Added some \longs
+
+ * ltspace.dtx
+
+ Made \vspace and \vspace* more efficient and more robust
+
+ Commented out unused code
+
+1995-05-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): replace
+ \rmfamily with \normalfont (PR 1578)
+
+ * classes.dtx : Replace \reset@font by \normalfont
+ (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): Replace
+ \hskip 1em\relax with \quad
+ Removed \rmfamily from definition of \@eqnnum (PR 1578, leqno)
+
+1995-05-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: Documented form from Tobi.
+
+1995-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Exchange order of ltdefns and ltalloc
+ as latter now needs \@gobbletwo from former.
+
+ * usrguide.tex (subsection{Setting text susperscripts}):
+ \textsuperscript now access the current font (except for size
+ attribute)
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: redefine \textsuperscript in terms of
+ \@textsuperscript
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: new \typein implementation
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: New \newif implementation.
+
+1995-05-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Added applemac.def.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added applemac.def.
+ Added test for whether definition of a text character ends in a
+ macro.
+ Corrected \mathordfeminine and \mathordmasculine.
+
+ * inputenc.dst: Added applemac.def.
+
+1995-05-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Add code and docstrip modules to support
+ autoloading of tabbing.
+
+1995-05-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx/ltfloat.dtx: Moved definitions of \footins and
+ \footnoterule from ltplain to ltfloat.
+
+1995-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Fix \DeclareMathRadical so that it does work (never did :-)
+
+1995-05-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+ Updated \mathhexbox to use \mbox.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ Removed \mathhexbox from this file because it is essentially an
+ obsolete text command (despite the name). It is still in ltlain.dtx
+ Streamlined bits of code.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ coded \set@mathradical inline to save space.
+ Also fixed bug in \DeclareMathRadical.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: defined \sqrtsign to be the square root symbol not
+ \sqrt since this is later overwritten by the kernel anyway.
+
+ * fam.dtx: removed definition of \on@line since already in lterror.dtx
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx:
+ Allow \fnsymbol in text and math now (neccessary for pr/1503).
+ Streamlined code for \@definecounter and \@arabic and friends.
+
+ * latex209.dtx (subsection{Layout}):
+ Added old definition for \@makefnmark and \thempfootnote to
+ use math mode. pr/1503
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx:
+ Moved \normalfont to \textsuperscript.
+
+1995-05-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Add code and docstrip modules to support
+ autoloading feature.
+
+1995-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx:
+ Moved some code from ltplain to this file.
+
+ * ltspace.dtx:
+ Moved some code from ltplain to this file.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Added some commands from NFSS1 compat code to \@preambleonly
+ to save space.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Moved all compatibility code for NFSS1 interfaces to one place
+ to allow making them auto-loadable one day.
+
+ * usrguide.tex (subsection{Setting text susperscripts}):
+ Added a description of \textsuperscript. pr/1503
+
+1995-05-18 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all
+ constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi
+ Cleaned up the \changes entries
+ removed some unnecessary braces
+
+1995-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx:
+ Added \normalfont to the footnote mark (since it is now a text font).
+ For similar reason \thempfootnote needs \itshape to look like before.
+
+1995-05-17 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all
+ constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi
+ Cleaned up the \changes entries
+
+ * classes.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all
+ constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi
+ (subsection{Footnotes}): Use \@width instead of width
+ (subsection{The title}): Use \cs{\@makefnmark} in definition of
+ \cs{@makefntext}
+ Cleaned up the \changes entries
+
+1995-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: make \g@addto@macro \long for latex/1522
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Removed surplus { } in \@irsbox
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: Start of documented version from Tobi.
+ Removed surplus { } and used `\thr@@' not `3 ' to save tokens.
+
+1995-05-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Footnotes}):
+ Added command \textsuperscript to provide footnotes with digits
+ in the text font. pr/1503
+ Streamlined bits of the code.
+
+ * readme.txt: updated.
+
+1995-05-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx: removed lots of unnecessary braces
+
+1995-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: added tracefnt.sty generattion.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx:
+ Remove some surplus braces in \@startsection.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Streamline some of the compat code.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ Streamline code of \@typein slightly.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Documentation update.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Further documentation.
+
+1995-05-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Slightly re-word the `warning' in the\listfiles
+ description, for latex/1474.
+
+1995-05-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Updated the documentation.
+
+1995-05-13 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): TeX goes into an
+ infinite loop when the alltt environment contains a construct such
+ as \( x' \); this can be prevented by restoring the original
+ definition of ' *inside* math mode.
+ Brought the definition of the alltt environment up-to-date with
+ the current definition of the verbatim environment.
+
+1995-05-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Updated \DeclareOption declarations to reflect ##1 -> #1 change. pr/1557
+
+1995-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Use a token register in \DeclareOption(*)
+ So that # need not be written as ##
+ INCOMPATIBLE CHANGE: see latex/1557
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Modify \picture so a missing ( in the first
+ argument generates an error. latex/1355
+ Add a few more macro environments.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Restore old definition of \@footnotemark
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Add \nobreak to allow hyphenation before a
+ footnotemark.
+ Add loads of macro environments to the docs.
+
+1995-05-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+ Moved a number of commands to different files following suggestions by
+ Ulrik Vieth. pr/1180
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ Updates to \displ@y \displaylines \bmod to reflect changes in plain.tex.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx:
+ Upates to \skew \rightarrowfill \leftarrowfill \@vereq to reflect changes
+ in plain.tex.
+
+1995-05-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (\subsection{Bibliography}): Added a missing %-sign
+
+1995-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden.
+ * tracefnt.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden.
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden.
+
+1995-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx:
+ Updated definitions of \d and \b because of changes in plain.tex
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Use \hb@xt@.
+ * ltsect.dtx: Use \hb@xt@.
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Use \hb@xt@.
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Use \hb@xt@.
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \hb@xt@.
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Use \hb@xt@.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ Added \hb@xt@ as abbreviation for "\hbox to".
+
+ * manifest.txt:
+ Added ltx3info.tex. Rearranged some bits.
+
+ * ltx3info.tex:
+ Added this file. Information about the latex3 project.
+
+ * cmfonts.dst:
+ Removed generation of OMLccm.fd file.
+
+ * unpacked.txt:
+ Removed surplus OMLccm.fd file. All concrete font files are now in
+ mfnfss.
+
+1995-05-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltsect.dtx (paragraph{...}):
+ Use \quad instead of \hskip 1em in \@seccntformat. pr/1596
+ Add \relax to prevent `plus/minus' problem with improper redefinition
+ of \@seccntformat. pr/1596
+
+1995-05-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+* ltsect.dtx: Documented version from Tobias Oetiker.
+
+1995-05-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * idx.tex: Added missing curly brace in \setlength command.
+
+1995-05-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltsect.dtx:
+ Surround the . in \@dottedcontextline by \hbox to typeset it in the text
+ font. pr/1503
+ Don't reset to \rmfamily just to \normalfont in case the document font is
+ not the roman one. pr/1578
+
+1995-05-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpar.dtx: Documentation reworked by Tobias Oetiker.
+ (Thanks to Tobi for volunteering.)
+
+1995-04-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Robust commands and protect}):
+ Moved the initialisation of \protect to this file.
+
+ * ltcntrl.dtx:
+ Removed unused defs for \@setprotect and \@resetprotect.
+ Moved initialisation of \protect to ltdefns.dtx.
+
+ * ltpar.dtx (subsection{Implementation}):
+ Made \@par default to \@@par. (shorter)
+ Tobi kindly updated the documentation for this file.
+
+1995-04-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Move some \leavevmodes earlier, for graphics/1512
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Add \hang and \textindent
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Move \hang and \textindent to latex209.dtx
+ Remove some commands which are (re)defined later.
+
+1995-04-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx:
+ Add a number of \@onlypreamble commands to save space. pr/1240
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx (section{File Handling}):
+ Support for pr/1121. see below.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}):
+ Limited support for \AtBeginDocument{\begin{foo}}
+ \AtEndDocument{\end{foo}}.
+ Be careful to get the order right if you do it more than once. pr/1121
+
+ * unpacked.txt:
+ Added names of new encodings.
+
+1995-04-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: remove \the\every@math@size from \document
+ for latex/1407 + 1420 (from patch file)
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: From patch file: make \@check@c \long
+ (latex/1346) \newenvironment argument handling /1507.
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Fix `driver' docstrip guard. Reported by
+ Martin Schr"oder.
+
+1995-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: Reset \emergencystretch in \fussy latex /1344
+ (fom patch file). Clean up documentation slightly.
+
+ * ltcntrl.dtx: fix for /1317 (internal) \@for expanding its
+ argument incorectly
+
+ * ltxref.dtx:\newlabel \@onlypreamble for /1388 from patch file.
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: Add \mbox to \cite for latex/1239 from patch file.
+ Make \@onlypreamble\bibcite /1388 (from patch file)
+ Add some macro envs to documentation.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Modify docstrip guards to keep trace code out of
+ the kernel, unless `trace' specified.
+ 2 more fixes from patch file
+ latex/1451: newline command \\ in eqnarray and output routine
+ %%% latex/1392: AtBeginDvi broken
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Add \proclaim and \ttraggedright
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Make \new... non outer: /1405 (from patch file)
+ Move \proclaim and \ttragedright to latex209.dtx
+
+1995-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltsect.dtx (section or \caption command.):
+ Implement \addcontentsline with \addtocontents to save space.
+
+ * manifest.txt:
+ Added begleit.err (errata for the German translation of the
+ LaTeX Companion).
+
+ * inputenc.dtx (section{The ISO Latin-1 encoding}):
+ \textonequarter and friends incorrectly declared as math chars.
+ (section{Default definitions for characters}):
+ Default values moved to own section.
+ (section{The ISO Latin-2 encoding}):
+ latin2 added. pr/1447.
+ (section{The IBM code page 850}):
+ cp850 added. pr/1330.
+
+1995-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ Removed surplus definition of \@gobble. pr/1361
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx:
+ Allow blanks within \includeonly argument. pr/1514
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd:
+ Fixed typo in OMLcmr. pr/1485
+
+ * syntonly.dtx:
+ Removed surplus \typeout lines containing the now undefined commands
+ \filedate etc. pr/1471
+
+1995-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: add \null to \k for latex/1274 (from patch file)
+
+ * Makefile (cleanupsrc): set date to June 1995
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Fix filecontents and \DeclareOption
+ pr's 1487 and 1498 . (moved from patch file.)
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Modify to allow ltpatch.ltx (patch level 0)
+ For a full release. To solve problems of initial install picking
+ up old patch files.
+
+1995-04-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * makeindx.dtx:
+ Changed \see to use \emph as suggested by Mats Dahlgren.
+
+1995-04-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): Also take the
+ \marginparsep into account when calculating the width of the
+ margin paragraph.
+
+1995-04-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: Missing %%% identification.
+
+1995-04-03 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (Defining the page styles): Removed extra dot after
+ \thesection in article/twoside/headings case. (PR #1519)
+
+1995-04-02 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx: A slight documentation fix (PR #1517)
+
+ * alltt.dtx: A few documentation fixes (PR #1517)
+
+1995-04-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}):
+ Fixed problem with $...\it\mbox...$ in compat mode. pr/1275
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Fixed problem with $...\it\mbox...$ in compat mode. pr/1275
+
+ * newlfont.dtx: Corrected bad error message if math alphabet is
+ misused. pr/1440
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Corrected bad error message if math alphabet is misused. pr/1440
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Fixed problem with "\abovewithdelims(\rfloor 1pt"
+ pr/1329
+
+1995-03-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Fixes for latex/1460 (infinite looping on 2nd
+ \documentstyle command) and latex/1424 (\newcommand{\r}{})
+ Also wrap some long lines to 72.
+
+1995-03-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: patch level 2
+
+ * patches.txt: patch level 2
+
+ * slides.dtx: Modify framebox redefinition for : graphics/1335
+
+1995-03-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexsym.dtx (section{The Implementation}):
+ Fixed lhd and friends which are supposed to be binary ops and not
+ relations. pr/1459
+
+1995-03-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.el (report-latex-bug): Support transient mark mode
+ Also use shell-command so that shell variables are initialised.
+
+1995-03-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx : Various documentation changes
+ (subsection{Customizing the labels}): Changed the width of the
+ labels slightly to prevent LaTeX stuffing two on each line
+ (PR #1375)
+
+1995-01-31 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Description}): made \descriptionlabel
+ a short command (PR #1399)
+ * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Description}): made \descriptionlabel
+ a short command (PR #1399)
+
+1995-01-27 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Reset \dospecials to
+ its original value after the modified version has been
+ executed. This is to make \verb?\{}? work inside the altt
+ environment (PR 1369)
+
+1995-01-12 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{Left equation numbering}): Added
+ \normalcolor to defintion of \@eqnnum (PR 1351)
+
+1994-12-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews02.tex: Edited description of AMS-LaTeX to get everything
+ to fit onto one page.
+
+1994-12-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{Macros for font handling}): Added the
+ declaration of the lasy font family.
+ Use \newcommand* for commands with arguments instead of
+ \newcommand.
+ * latexsym.dtx: Removed the former change by outdating the last
+ version.
+
+1994-12-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.el: (Matt Swift) Support old emacs (tested with 18.57
+ in addition to 19.28)
+
+1994-12-14 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ Corrected typo
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Removed some commands
+
+ * cfgguide.tex
+
+ Tidying
+
+1994-12-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: add \par to verbatim redefinition.
+
+1994-12-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added braces to \copyright so it works unbraced in
+ subscripts.
+ Added \ifmmode check to \@changed@cmd so that redefinitions aren't
+ made in math mode (which can also foul up unbraced subscripts).
+ Commented out \textasciicircum,
+ \textasciitilde, \textbackslash, \textbar,
+ \textgreater, \texthyphenchar, \texthyphen and
+ \textless to save memory.
+
+1994-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cfgguide.tex: A bit more detail re ltxdoc.cfg.
+
+ * directex.txt: lthyphen.cfg now hyphen.cfg.
+
+ * decustex.txt: lthyphen.cfg now hyphen.cfg.
+
+1994-12-12 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexsym.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Introduced the cs
+ \@fam@lasy to hold the name of the font family; this will either
+ be lasy or llasy, depending on whether the main class is slides or
+ not. This new cs is now also used to prevent loading the package
+ twice.
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using
+ \DeclareRobustCommand
+ (subsubsection{Enumerate}): Handle \labelenumi cs. like in
+ classes.dtx; using \theenumi in its definition
+ (subsection{Macros for font handling}): Made \familydefault point
+ to \sfdefault in slides.def (PR #1020)
+
+1994-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.el: Add missing (defvar ltxbug-mail-headers
+ (Matt Swift: latex/1255)
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Stop \small in verbatim affecting previous para.
+
+ * manifest.txt: cfgguide.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: New version from Chris.
+
+1994-12-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Tidied up documentation.
+
+1994-12-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx
+
+ * cfgguide.tex
+
+ Major editing
+
+1994-12-11 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsection{Customizing the labels}): Redefined
+ \mlabel to use the new \parbox syntax instead of using the
+ \setbox primitive.
+ (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using
+ \DeclareRobustCommand
+ (subsection{The generic letter commands}): Use
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect instead of redefining it.
+
+1994-12-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}):
+ Make arguments to \@fontswitch implicit, needed for \select@group
+ change.
+ Use \space command in \text@command directly for comparison.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Surround \select@group with {} so that it can be used after _ and ^.
+
+ * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}):
+ Don't define \ifG@defaultsubs via \newif to save macro names
+
+1994-12-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Removed useless catcode setting of ~.
+ Made letters active and undefined by default, rather than illegal.
+ Added `beta test' message.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added documentation for the OML encoding, after
+ the last lot got lost by the server...
+ Replaced width with \@width in vrules.
+
+1994-12-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Captions}): Added the setting of
+ \if@minipage to false; floats now set it to true to prevent extra
+ white space from appearing when the float starts with a list; this
+ affected the spacing around a caption above a centered table.
+
+1994-12-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cfgguide.tex: Initial draft, Configuration docs.
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: Allow \bibliographystyle in the preamble.
+
+1994-12-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex: \arraynewline RIP.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Make \tabularnewline work in array.
+ \arraynewline deleted.
+
+ * latexbug.el: mention public database.
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Call category 0 LaTeX not base
+ Add >Confidential no field to all messages by default.
+ Add message about public database to final typeout.
+ Compress messages to fit on 25-line screen.
+
+ * usrguide.tex: mention list of packages in LaTeXBook.
+
+1994-12-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * bugs.txt: Added pointer to ltxbugs2html.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \null and \sh@ft to \b and \d.
+
+1994-12-07 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: corrected checksum (PR #1243)
+
+1994-12-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Document ltx3pub papers on ctan.
+ Other small corrections.
+
+1994-12-07 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tlb1042.lvt: Rewrote test file to avoid printing out internal
+ details of how \ENC-cmd is implemented.
+
+ * tlb0552.lvt: Rewrote test file to do a showbox on $\_$ rather
+ than a \tracingall.
+
+1994-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex fix dates.
+
+ * clsguide.tex: fix dates.
+
+ * usrguide.tex: fix dates.
+
+1994-12-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Added <tab> to the ignored chars in \nfss@catcodes. pr/1064
+ Use \nfss@catcodes in \DeclareFontEncoding.
+ (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}):
+ set \nfss@catcodes locally to \relax in \try@load@fontshape
+ so that it isn't executed several times when an .fd file is
+ read in.
+
+ * updated various test files.
+
+1994-12-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Add \pause so messages do not scroll off screen.
+ Suggested by Rosemary Bailey.
+
+ * lablst.tex: Print labels verbatim, and input packages.
+ Fixing problems reported via c.t.t.
+
+1994-12-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added braces round the \ooalign in \textcircled.
+
+ * tlb1233.lvt: Added test file for unbraced \ooalign's.
+
+1994-12-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Commented out \ldots.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx: Commented out \copyright.
+
+ * tlb1214.lvt: Test file for symbols like \pounds.
+
+ * tlb1217.lvt: Test file for \a.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed a bug with \a.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Added font substitutions for \pounds.
+
+1994-12-01 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx : Made the oneside option work for the book class
+ (PR #1195)
+ (section{Initial Code}): Moved the allocation of \if@mainmatter to
+ this section in order to let it be known when the pagestyles are
+ defined. The switch is used there and needs to be known then;
+ otherwise TeX finds the wrong \fi in an \if@twoside...\else...\fi
+ construct.
+ (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using
+ \DeclareRobustCommand
+ (the driver): use \newcommand* for shorthands with argument
+ (whole file): Use \newcommand* for commands with arguments
+
+1994-12-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg
+
+ * lthyphen.dtx: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg
+
+ * texpert.txt: Document ltxcheck font checks.
+ lthyphen.cfg now (or soon will be) hyphen.cfg
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: remove some {oldcomments} and other tidying up.
+
+1994-11-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Chapters}): Made chapter titles more
+ robust against pagebreaks in the middle of them. Added an extra
+ \nobreak and a \interlinepenalty\@M to \@makechapterhead and
+ \@makeschapterhead (PR #1016, #1135)
+
+1994-11-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Use new \@dofilelist.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Add new \@dofilelist to \enddocument
+ Move some of the warnings in \enddocument out of \if@filesw.
+
+ * Makefile (TEXTS): add latexbug.el
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: add pict2e and graphpap.
+
+1994-11-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx: Set \FOO-cmd to \@current@cmd rather than \relax when
+ entering encoding FOO.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Made text commands expand (almost) entirely in the
+ mouth.
+
+1994-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltcntrl.dtx: Doc improvements.
+
+1994-11-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Corrected \changes entries.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Corrected \changes entries.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Corrected \changes entries.
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: Corrected \changes entries.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: Corrected \changes entries.
+
+ * ltidxglo.dtx: Corrected \changes entries.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Corrected \changes entries (wrong format).
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added new definitions of \b, \c and \d.
+ Fixed bug with accents on commands which aren't allowed in
+ \csname.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Moved a docstrip option to it's correct home.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added hacks for space around floats.
+
+ * tlb1184.lvt: Added check file for default accent and symbol
+ definitions.
+
+1994-11-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Comment out lots of now obsolete code.
+
+ * source2e.tex: Add source2e.ist, and other small improvements.
+
+1994-11-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.dst: Correct the preamble written to generated files.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: modify \newenvironment so that a graf environment
+ is not allowed (Piet van Oostrum latex/1037). Previous attemt
+ to do this removed...
+
+1994-11-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: typos.. (Ulrik Vieth)
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Small updates, and typos. Add xr.sty.
+
+ * latexbug.el: Make completion case insensitive.
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Prompt for >Class if no test file given.
+
+1994-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex: typo in decls argument.
+
+ * latint.dtx: wrap long lines.
+
+ * source2e.tex: Make frontmatter \pagenumbering{roman}
+ So can be processed with only 2 latex runs. (Ulrik Vieth)
+ Add lthyphen.dtx.
+
+1994-11-22 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tlb0574.lvt: Added check file for empyt accents and accents in
+ tocs.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed `empty accent' bug.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Fixed typo A1 -> A0.
+
+1994-11-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed \dots so that it has no extra space in a
+ monowidth font.
+ Corrected typo in the definition of \mathunderscore.
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added \textregistered.
+ Added "A0 (nbs) to Latin-1.
+
+1994-11-20 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx
+
+ * ltxguide.cls
+
+ Tidied formatting
+
+ * patches.txt
+
+ Updated
+
+ * bugs.txt
+
+ Updated
+
+ * install.txt
+
+ Updated
+
+ * template.txt
+
+ Updated
+
+ * texpert.txt
+
+ Updated
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Major update
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Major update
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Major update
+
+1994-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: reallow 8-bit input.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Add \color@vbox
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx: \next renamed to \reserved@f
+
+ * fam.dtx: \next renamed to \reserved@f
+
+ * latint.dtx: use \expandafter instead of \next in
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter.
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: Remove \pt, now defined elsewhere.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx Use \expandafter trick instead of \next
+ in a' \phantom and \smash. Colour support to \phantom and \smash
+
+1994-11-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: remove \phantom (now in ltmath)
+
+ * fam.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * latint.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltcntlen.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltcntrl.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a.
+
+1994-11-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx
+
+ Restored 2e logo
+
+1994-11-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Remove \{ and \}
+
+1994-11-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Use \@unexpandable@protect and modify
+ \@setref to fix bug /946 (/1023) \pageref breaking tests.
+
+1994-11-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Add \tabularnewline and \arraynewline.
+
+ * ltspace.dtx: Make \\ robust
+
+1994-11-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx
+
+ Tidied \endtrivlists
+
+ * ltspace.dtx
+
+ Attempted to improve error messages
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx
+
+ Added line-break to error message
+
+ * lablst.tex
+
+ Simpler with better layout
+
+1994-11-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: replace sfcode settings. Remove \dag and friends.
+
+1994-11-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * makeindx.dtx: remove spurious \wlog.
+
+1994-11-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx
+
+ Patched \nocite{*}
+
+ * ltplain.dtx
+
+1994-11-10 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{Flush left equations}): Added the value
+ of \parskip to \abovedisplayskip to compensate for negative
+ \topsep settings. (PR #881)
+ (subsection{Single or double sided printing}): removed typo (PR
+ #881)
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): Removed two typos
+
+1994-11-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: use new definition of \loop
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: modify \protect setting.
+
+ * newlfont.dtx: modify \ProvidesFile usage.
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx: modify \ProvidesFile usage.
+
+1994-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lthyphen.dtx: Use \ProvidesFile.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx: Use \ProvidesFile.
+
+ * setsize.dtx: RIP
+
+ * fam.dtx: Add definitions of \@vpt (from setsize.dtx).
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Add \DeclareMathSizes (from setsize.dtx).
+
+ * Makefile: Generate new release date 1994/12/01
+ Remove setfile.dtx from generation of ltfss.dtx
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: Change to patch 1994/12/01 release.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: More colour changes.
+ Fix \@finalstrut (from ltpatch).
+
+ * source2e.tex: Move ltoutenc. Add fontdef and preload.
+
+1994-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Use GetFileInfo style doc header.
+
+ * preload.dtx: Use GetFileInfo style doc header.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Move \newwrite's to ltfiles.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Move \newwrite's here from ltdefns. Remove
+ duplcate decalaration of \@mainaux.
+
+1994-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx:
+ Added braces again that have been incorrectly removed.
+
+ * test files:
+ Updated a large number of test files that had changed
+ due to protect handling changes and bug fix in font selection.
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx:
+ Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize.
+
+ * newlfont.dtx:
+ Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize.
+
+ * exscale.dtx:
+ Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size.
+ Update \big@size globally (new \every@math@size concept).
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx:
+ Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size.
+ Allow several encoding changes before running \selectfont. pr/1042
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx (section{Scaled font extraction}):
+ Changed the font size substitution to really select
+ the nearest size available. pr/747
+ Fixed incorrect size selection if math fonts are not set up. pr/848
+ Start cleaning up documentation.
+ Fix bug that produced extra "No math setup" message if
+ tracefont was loaded with default options.
+
+ Patched \loop
+
+1994-11-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}):
+
+ Introduced \color@hbox
+ Changed colour resetting for footnotes (again)
+ Introduced a simulacrum of compatibility to old \@xfloat
+ Changed float setup
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}):
+
+ Introduced \color@hbox
+ Changed colour resetting for minipage footnotes
+ Added to documentation
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}):
+
+ Introduced \color@hbox
+ New style protect settings in shipout
+ Tidied shipout and added to documentation
+ Added begindvi stuff
+
+1994-11-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added setting of \@typeset@protect to \patterns
+ and \hyphenation.
+
+ * ltnews02.tex: First draft.
+
+1994-11-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Added \protected@xdef to \footnote, \@footnotetext,
+ and \footnotemark.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \_.
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: Added \@unexpandable@protect to \markboth and
+ \markright.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Added \set@typeset@protect to \@array and
+ \multicolumn.
+ Added \@unexpandable@protect to \@mkpream.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Added \protected@edef to \@mpfootnotetext.
+
+ * ltidxglo.dtx: Added \protected@write to \index and \glossary.
+ Removed \if@filesw from \makeindex and \makeglossary.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: Added \protected@write to \addtocontents and
+ \addcontentsline.
+ Added \protected@edef to \@sect.
+ Added \protected@xdef to \thanks.
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: Added \protected@write to \label.
+ Added \protected@edef to \refstepcounter.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Removed setting of \protect from \@writefile.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Added \set@display@protect to messages.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Added \protected@write and a new definition of
+ \nofiles.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Added \x@protect and a new mechanism for protecting
+ short commands.
+ Added commands for safely performing edefs.
+ Added \set@display@protect to \typeout
+
+1994-11-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Check that latex.ltx is used with an initex with
+ no format preloaded. (VMS initex defaults to loading
+ plain.fmt)
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: rename \long@def to \l@ngrel@x
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: move \@missingfileerror to ltfiles.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: add \@missingfileerror
+
+1994-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.el 2nd attempt.
+
+ * latexbug.tex: more alterations to work with .el file.
+
+1994-11-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Wrapped long lines.
+
+1994-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Add line count to discourage large test files.
+
+1994-10-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: Added inputenc.dst and ltoutenc.dst, and inputenc.dtx.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Added OMLenc.def.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Added inputenc.ins.
+
+ * unpacked.txt: Added inputenc.sty, font encoding and input
+ encoding files.
+
+ * fntguide.tex: Added documentation on the new text declaration
+ commands.
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Added documentation on the new text commands.
+
+1994-10-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}):
+
+ In float handling:
+ major changes to parameter parsing, setting of local
+ variables, etc;
+ two-column and one-column cases merged; space hacks moved;
+ colour support improved and corrected, including extra boxes.
+ In marginpars:
+ colour support improved and corrected, including extra boxes.
+ In footnotes:
+ colour support improved.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}):
+
+ Small changes to documentation
+ Added colour support to \@topnewpage
+ Added colour support for footnotes to \@makecol
+ Added warning to \@fpsadddefault
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Internal defining commands}):
+
+ Added \@onelevel@sanitize
+
+1994-10-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmfonts.dst: Added OMScmnr and OMLcmr.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Added OMScmr and OMLcmr.
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Added \NEWdescription, \NEWfeature and the
+ optional argument to desc.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dst: Added OMLenc.def.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: added encoding-specific commands from ltmath.
+ Added OML encoding.
+ Added \textcircled and removed \textregistered.
+ Added \DeclareTextCompositeCommand.
+ Added \t.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Removed encoding-specific commands to ltoutenc.
+
+1994-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: Added the alltt package.
+
+ * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Added a missing
+ \dospecials in the alltt environment code.
+
+ * classes.dtx (section{Cross Referencing}): Fixed a typo in the
+ documentation of \@tocrmarg. (PR #904)
+
+1994-10-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile (INSTS):
+ Added ltoutenc.ins.
+
+ * manifest.txt:
+ Added ltoutenc.ins.
+
+1994-10-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontsmpl.dtx: Added tests for \copyright, \dots and
+ \textregistered.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Added \mathellipsis, \mathparagraph, etc.
+ Removed all of the oldcomments and generally tidied up.
+ Added \DeclareMathOperator.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added copyright and textregistered.
+ Renamed the text versions of \P, \S, etc. to \textparagraph,
+ \textsection, etc.
+ Added the definitions of \dots etc. which work in math and text.
+
+1994-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Added a numer of \noexpand's to \err@rel@i. pr/1088
+
+1994-10-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Added OMSenc.def.
+
+ * fontsmpl.dtx: Added the text commands defined in ltoutenc.dtx.
+
+ * asajtest.ins: An installation file for asajtest.dtx.
+
+ * asajtest.tex: A test file for ltoutenc.dtx. This should become
+ part of the test suite eventually.
+
+ * asajtest.dtx: This is a scratch version of ltoutenc.dtx.
+ Rewrote the enc.def files to use the new default settings.
+
+1994-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.el: First attempt at emacs interface.
+
+1994-10-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed loading of enc.def files.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Added OMSenc.def.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dst: Added OMSenc.def.
+
+1994-10-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: Add ltmath.
+
+1994-10-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Add documentation of star form of \newcommand.
+ Remove all `oldcomments' environments.
+ Add lots of `macro' environments.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: missing % in \@isavepicbox (was in ltpatch.ltx)
+
+1994-10-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Added default encodings.
+ Added \ProvideTextCommand and \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
+ Added the OMS encoding.
+
+1994-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+
+ Removed a TAB
+
+1994-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Add inner braces to fbox to keep inner settings
+ of \fboxsep local (latex/1061)
+
+1994-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+
+ Added \normalcolor to \@eqnnum
+ Removed braces from \ensuremath
+
+1994-10-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Modify pkgindoc because of Tuesday's change.
+
+1994-10-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx:
+ Put \changes cmd behind % :-)
+
+1994-10-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Split characters into text-only and math-only.
+ Reded some of the \providecommand's in latin1.def.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Corrected a typo---\mark{}{} should have been
+ \mark{{}{}}.
+
+1994-10-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Added missing \relax to \DeclareFontEncoding so the args can
+ contain newlines. pr/1026
+
+1994-10-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Add *-forms to define non-long variants of
+ commands.
+ Add extra check so \newenvironment{graf} generates an error.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: move \listfiles and \@addtofilelist here.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: move \listfiles and \@addtofilelist to ltfiles.
+
+1994-10-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added empty initial mark.
+ New method of switching off 2e commands.
+ Allow \newcommand on 2e commands.
+
+1994-10-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltsect.dtx:
+
+ Added \normalcolor to page-numbers in toc
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+
+ Tidying, and typos fixed in documentation
+ Added check for empty text
+ Removed space from \nfss@text
+ Renamed \check@nocorr to \text@command:
+ to improve error messages
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}):
+
+ Added \long to \fbox, \mbox, \sbox (from ltpatch)
+ \leavevmode corrected for frame boxes (from ltpatch)
+ \@parboxto macro added to \@iiiparbox,
+ to remove misuse of \@empty
+
+1994-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: stop expansion occurring on synopsis and other
+ fields.
+
+1994-10-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * nfssfont.dtx:
+ Change \end to \stop in help message. pr/615
+
+1994-10-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Warn, if math alphabet is used outside math (from patch)
+
+ * fontdef.dtx (subsubsection{The log-like functions}):
+ Somehow lost \operator@font while moving code.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ Comment out definition of \, is defined earlier as robust
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Added [ and ] to the reset macro for .fd file loading pr/872
+
+1994-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Add latexbug.cfg system, so that personal
+ details do not need to be entered every time.
+
+1994-10-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx:
+ Separate text font and math font setup. Added a lot of math
+ font setup stuff from other files.
+
+ * ltmath.dtx:
+ File added to the distribution.
+
+ * manifest.txt:
+ Added new files.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ Moved math enviornments to ltmath.dtx
+
+ * unpack2e.ins:
+ Added fontmath.ltx and fonttext.ltx generation,
+ removed fontdef.ltx generation,
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}):
+ Added missing percent and use \ttfamily not \texttt
+
+1994-10-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}):
+ Moved math code to ltmath.dtx.
+ Removed old code that was commented out long time ago.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Moved log-like functions to ltmath.dtx.
+ Removed the unnecessary refernce to \tenex.
+
+1994-10-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Add more GNATS fields.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: remove < > from a \changes entry (upset makeindex)
+
+1994-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Redo ltxcheck: more friendly messages, check
+ for TeX3.14, and missing fonts.
+ Add automatic detection of TeX3.14 (previously in ltpatch.ltx)
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Modify to prompt for synopsis information.
+
+1994-10-07 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * pastex.txt: Installation guide for PasTeX on the Amiga.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Moved ogonek accent.
+
+1994-09-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * idx.tex:
+ Add missing brace in \setlength. pr/589
+
+1994-09-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexsym.dtx (subsection{\LaTeX{} symbols fonts}):
+ Use silent substitution for the bold lasy fonts below 10pt
+
+1994-09-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: Fix \newcount typo (which caused `4pt' to appear
+ in the change log and index)
+
+ * manifest.txt: added pctex.txt
+
+ * Makefile (TEXTS): added pctex.txt
+
+ * pctex.txt: New version from PCI
+
+1994-09-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx:
+ patch for pr872 ([] with catcode active)
+
+1994-09-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added spaces to \@halfmag and friends.
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Replaced \PassOptionsToPackage{article} by
+ \PassOptionsToClass{article}.
+
+1994-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: add graphpap.{ins|dtx}
+
+ * Makefile: add graphpap.{dst|ins|dtx}
+
+ * manifest.txt: Add textures.txt, pict2e.{ins|dtx}
+
+ * Makefile: Add textures.txt, pict2e.{dst|ins|dtx}
+
+ * pict2e.dtx: Wrote pict2e.dtx (It just generates an error
+ message, saying the package has not been written)
+
+1994-09-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Modify printing of \everyjob so babel formats
+ work correctly.
+
+1994-09-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Added \cs{DeclareInputComposite} and the
+ \cs{ProvidesCommand}s to the encoding files.
+ Removed the definition of the accent slots in Latin-1.
+
+1994-08-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * oztex.txt: Checked in revised version from Andrew.
+
+1994-08-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * yandytex.txt: Checked in revised version from Berthold.
+
+1994-08-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): changed documentation to
+ mention \DeclareOldFontCommand instead of @renewfontswitch (PR #812)
+
+ * letter.dtx (section{The documentation driver file}): added
+ missing comma in a \DoNotIndex entry (PR #857)
+ (subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}): Added the landscape option,
+ because Leslie Lamport wants to make landscape letters.
+
+1994-08-24 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tlb0143.lvt, tlb0162.lvt, tlb0380.lvt, tlb0498.lvt, tlb0642.lvt,
+ tlb0830.lvt: Checked in.
+
+1994-08-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * graphpap.dtx: add \leavevmode to \graphpaper.
+
+ * textures.txt: Added file. Mainly written by Blue Sky Research.
+
+1994-07-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Correct Checksum.
+
+1994-07-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews.cls: Replaced \PassOptionToClass by \PassOptionsToClass.
+
+1994-07-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * microtex.txt: Removed extraneous \dump.
+
+1994-07-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Add definition of \@secondoftwo, so latexbug
+ may once again be used with initex.
+
+1994-07-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * microtex.txt: Added installation guide for MicroTeX.
+
+1994-07-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \Dh by \DH and \Th by \TH.
+ Added \ensuremath to the math commands.
+ Added \inputencoding.
+
+1994-07-13 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): Moved the rounding of
+ \topmargin into native mode only (PR #93)
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsubsection{The dimension of text}): The setting
+ of \textwidth and \textheight to a fixed value should only happen
+ in comnpatibility mode. (PR #714)
+ (subsubsection{Margins}): Added fixed values for \oddsidemargin,
+ \evensidemargin and \marginparwidth to compatibility mode
+
+1994-07-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt:
+ Added description for additional patches.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx:
+ Added patches for:
+ \ensuremath
+ \LaTeXe not allowed in compat mode (exception)
+
+ * usrguide.tex (subsection{Ensuring math mode}):
+ Corrected the description of \ensuremath so that it really does nothing
+ other than producing its argument in math mode.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd:
+ Added additional font shapes for Concrete Roman Fonts
+
+1994-07-13 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontsmpl.dtx: Added an \upshape.
+
+1994-07-11 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): \labelitemiii was
+ mistakenly called \labelitemiiii (bug report # 711)
+
+1994-07-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: added patch for latex/667, minipage and \parbox
+ failing if used with height argument before math setup.
+
+1994-07-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx:
+ Added patches for:
+ empty p-column problem
+ figure* with color package problem
+ \^{\i} in toc problem (T1 encoding)
+
+ * patches.txt:
+ Added description for additional patches.
+
+1994-07-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx:
+ Extended patch for T1+german so that composite chars are used instead of
+ accents
+
+1994-07-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx:
+ Added patches for:
+ \mathit in text mode
+ \loop could do one iteration too much in certain situations
+ T1 breaks german 2.4a (this is a german.sty problem actually)
+
+ * patches.txt:
+ Added descritions of further patch level 3 patches.
+
+
+1994-06-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Warning about enc.def commands added
+ Stuff on font definition files and encoding definition files
+ changed
+ <cdp> removed, for consistency, use <encoding> throughout
+ Small edits
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Michael's amendments added
+
+1994-06-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Minor edits
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Added stuff
+ Changed usage of <>
+ Reordered update stuff
+ Added Summary sheet
+ Removed draft status
+
+ * ltxguide.cls
+
+1994-06-23 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsection{Global Declarations}): Removed a typo
+ (#[] instead of [1])
+ Ran letter.dtx through ispell.
+
+1994-06-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt:
+ Added descritions of patch level 3 patches.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx:
+ Added patches for:
+ inefficient text encoding handling
+ \"\i problem
+ \"{} problem
+ \dag \ddag \P \S lost sometimes
+ \t problem
+ \test..{} problem
+
+ Changed usage of <>
+ Changed definition of verbatim
+
+1994-06-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}):
+
+ Removed space from \DeclareTextCommand
+ Improved error messages from \DeclareTextCommand
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Changed usage of <>
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Added stuff
+ Changed usage of <>
+ Rationalised encoding stuff
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Rationalised usage of cdp, ENC, encoding
+ Changed usage of <>
+ Fixed overfull box and long lines
+
+1994-06-22 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{Flush left equations}): Defer the
+ setting of \mathindent to the end of the class instead of to
+ \begin{document}. This way it is possible for packages to change
+ its value (fixes bug report #577)
+ Refrased a few sentences to prevent overfull hbox messages.
+
+1994-06-19 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Added stuff on project, money etc.
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Corrcted largesymbols stuff.
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Major revision and additons.
+ Spell checked.
+ Removed \typeouts.
+ Removed overfull boxes.
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+
+ Experimental fixes to \nocorr stuff.
+
+1994-06-17 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): Added a
+ missing closing brace. Made a lot of small changes to the
+ documentation.
+
+1994-06-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * update.ins: modify for new distribution `ins' files.
+
+1994-06-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * template.txt
+
+ Changed 2e to new.
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Tidying.
+
+ * directex.txt
+
+ Corrected layout.
+
+1994-06-12 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: Split distrib directory into distrib/base and
+ distrib/unpacked.
+
+ * ltpatch.dtx: Don't set catcodes of upper 128 characters in
+ TeX2.
+
+ * manifest.txt: Added directex.txt.
+
+ * Makefile (TEXTS): Added directex.txt.
+
+1994-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Typography of tools list changed.
+ Added typeouts.
+ Added letter to list of standard packages.
+ Removed these typeouts:
+ \typeout{CONTENTS OF THE TOOLS BUNDLE: needs checking}
+ \typeout{Marion said: Perhaps the different uses of
+ `newcommand and `providecommand can be shown a bit clearer}
+ \typeout{List of stuff in mfnfss, psnfss, babel not done}
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Editorial changes.
+ Removed duplicated text.
+ Removed unwanted blank lines.
+
+ * emtex.txt
+
+ Added section on memory problems.
+
+ * directex.txt
+
+ New file added.
+
+ * install.txt
+
+ Added new file to list.
+
+ * readme.txt
+
+ Editorial changes.
+ Added patches.txt, etc.
+
+ * patches.txt
+
+ Editorial changes.
+ Removed references to lists.
+ Documented lack of lists.
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx
+
+ Corrected documentation, title etc.
+ Corrected dates in changes entries.
+
+1994-06-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * patches.txt:
+ Added descritions of patch level 2 patches.
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx:
+ Added patches for:
+ 8bit chars problem
+ \nocite{*} problem
+ \_ in math mode (T1 encoding)
+
+ * added tests for problem 549, 554, 557.
+
+
+1994-06-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: Added ltpatch.ltx and patches.txt.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Input encoding}): Do not set codes for
+ higher half of character table for TeX2.
+
+1994-06-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile (LATEXS): Added ltpatch.ltx.
+
+1994-06-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}):
+ Use new definitions for footnote macros within \maketitle.
+ Otherwise \thanks entries will overprint.
+
+ * docstrip.dtx:
+ Corrected typo in documentation
+
+1994-06-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpatch.ltx: New file fixing bugs in the major release.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Add new feature input ltpatch.ltx if the file
+ exists.
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Add babel.
+ Use \everyjob to print format info (for new patch system)
+
+1994-06-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Fix bug introduced last week. Add \leavevmode to
+ \fbox, and make \long. At the same time make \sbox and \mbox
+ \long even though they were not \long in 2.09.
+
+1994-06-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile.dist: Changed mv to cp, added installation of *.ist
+ files, added target `clean'.
+
+ * manifest.txt: Changed name of distributed Makefile from
+ Makefile to Makefile.unx.
+
+ * Makefile: Changed name of distributed Makefile from Makefile
+ to Makefile.unx.
+
+1994-06-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex
+
+ Changed preamble.
+
+ * fntguide.tex
+
+ Changed preamble.
+
+ * clsguide.tex
+
+ Changed preamble.
+
+1994-06-02 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (section{Identification}): Fixed bug in the driver,
+ the line with \ProvidesFile was not seen by LaTeX
+ (section{A driver for this document}): rearranged the \DoNotIndex
+ stuff
+
+1994-06-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * copyright.txt and others: Changed copyright message.
+
+1994-06-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Modify \framebox and \fbox so \width in the
+ optional argument of \framebox refers to the natural width
+ of the text,
+
+ * latexbug.tex: add amslatex category.
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: add $\m@th$ to \LaTeX to force math size
+ calculations.
+
+1994-06-01 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx: Corrected driver code.
+
+ * slides.dtx: Added definition of \SLiTeX.
+
+ * Makefile: Don't add extra copyright headers to *.txt and *.err
+ files.
+
+1994-06-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex:
+ Added description of \DeclareTextFontCommand.
+ Small updates and changes.
+
+ * clsguide.tex:
+ Updates and corrections.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Corrected help info for \newmathalphabet error
+ in compat mode.
+
+ * fntguide.tex:
+ Several small updates.
+
+1994-06-01 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews01.tex: Corrected grammar.
+
+1994-05-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ Removed overfull boxes.
+
+1994-05-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Switch to new latex-bugs@uni-mainz.de
+ address.
+
+1994-05-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * Makefile: Added clsguide.tex, fntguide.tex, usrguide.tex,
+ ltnews01.tex, ltxguide.cls, ltnews.cls.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*.
+
+ * unpacked.txt: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*.
+
+ * manifest.txt: Renamed lthyphen.dtx to lthyphen.dtx, added
+ clsguide.tex, fntguide.tex, usrguide.tex, ltnews01.tex,
+ ltxguide.cls, ltnews.cls, ltnews01.ps, manual.err, compan.err.
+
+1994-05-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added SLiTeX logo again.
+
+ * ltnews01.tex: Finished off.
+
+ * ltnews.cls: Added downloaded PS fonts options.
+ Removed angle brackets from <...> since these were the last
+ remaining bitmaps!
+ Added variants of the LaTeX logo.
+ Added the ltnews.cfg file.
+
+1994-05-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * texpert.txt: Added the section about configuring hyphenation.
+
+1994-05-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Add interactive request for a `category'
+ Also add non-interactive field showing \@TeXversion.
+
+1994-05-30 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript,
+ eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory..
+
+ * unpacked.txt: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript,
+ eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory..
+
+ * manifest.txt: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript,
+ eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory.
+ Removed features.tex from distribution.
+
+1994-05-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fntguide.tex:
+ Several updates and additions.
+
+1994-05-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Removed the description of mfnfss and tools
+ packages.
+ Removed sections that were commented out.
+ Removed typeouts.
+ Wrapped long lines.
+ Rewrote to remove overfull hboxes.
+ Moved the stuff on \newmathalphabet to the section on LaTeX
+ errors.
+ Rewrote the stuff on latex209.cfg, and replaced
+ \PassOptionsToClass (which requires you to list all the
+ known classes) with \ds@oldlfont.
+ Added the `LaTeX2e command in LaTeX 2.09 document' error.
+ Added the SLiTeX logo to the list of unsupported commands.
+ Added the full list of \text..., \...family, \...series, \...shape
+ and \math... commands.
+
+1994-05-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Captions}): Make \@makecaption colour
+ safe by using \sbox\@tempboxa rather than \setbox\@temboxa\hbox.
+
+1994-05-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex:
+ Small general updates.
+ Rewrote section on compatibility.
+
+ * Makefile:
+ Removed vmstex.txt and textures.txt since currently empty.
+
+ * copyins.txt:
+ Removed prelim message, say that files are mentioned in
+ manifest.txt.
+
+ * copyright.txt:
+ Removed prelim message, say that files are mentioned in
+ manifest.txt.
+
+ * manifest.txt:
+ Removed vmstex.txt and textures.txt since currently empty.
+
+1994-05-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Added italic correction to <...>.
+ Added \sourcecode.
+
+ * fntguide.tex: Corrected typos spotted by FMi.
+ Added the `math selection commands' section.
+ Replaced the notion of math font attributes with a description
+ closer to that in the Companion.
+ Moved stuff on declaring encodings into its own section
+ Moved stuff on font installation into its own section.
+ Moved stuff on initialization into its own section.
+ Moved stuff on naming conventions into its own section.
+ Moved DeclareFixedFont into text font selection.
+ Added text to the introduction.
+ Moved all of the enc.def file commands into one subsection.
+ Moved everything that's left without a home into the `miscellania'
+ section.
+ Generally tidied up.
+
+1994-05-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Made << and >> produce < and > inside verbatim.
+ Added ltxguide.cfg.
+
+ * fntguide.tex: Created file out of features.tex.
+ Redid document structure to fit with usrguide and clsguide.
+ Removed stuff on old style digits.
+ Moved text font stuff before math font stuff.
+ Removed `utilities' section.
+ Removed the author font commands (covered by usrguide).
+ Added description of the text font attributes.
+ Redid the description of the \f@... commands.
+ Redid the description of the \...default commands.
+ Added the section on the \DeclareTextWidget commands.
+ Added the section on math attributes.
+
+1994-05-27 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * proc.dtx (section{Implementation}): Added a missiing docstrip
+ guard.
+
+ * classes.dtx: Moved the identification and driver sections to
+ the beginning of the file.
+ (subsubsection{Table of Contents}): Wrapped a long line
+
+ * letter.dtx: Added \CharacterTable
+ Moved identification and driver to the front of the file.
+ Removed references to the book class from the documentation
+
+1994-05-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Use sequence a,..,z,A,..,Z not aa,..az,ba,..,bz
+ As Makeindex is not keen on the latter.
+
+ * source2e.tex: Modify printing of line numbers in index,
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Use new style error commands.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Add some more names in \author, so I don't get
+ all the blame.
+
+1994-05-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tlb0438.tlg: Line number change in exscale package.
+
+ * Makefile: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and latex2e.ltx
+ to latex.ltx, renamed format file to latex.fmt. Added test
+ tlb0483.
+
+ * manifest.txt: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and
+ latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx, rearranged a few lines.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and
+ latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx.
+
+ * unpacked.txt: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and
+ latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx: Changed copyright line.
+
+ * pandora.dtx: Updated for new driver format, changed \wlog to
+ \ProvidesFile and \ProvidesPackage.
+
+ * oldgerm.dtx: Updated for new driver format, changed \wlog to
+ \ProvidesFile and \ProvidesPackage.
+
+ * oldgerm.dst: Changed copyright line, removed generation of
+ documentation driver.
+
+ * pandora.dst: Changed copyright line, removed generation of
+ documentation driver.
+
+ * latexsym.dst: Changed copyright line.
+
+ * amsfonts.dst: Changed copyright line.
+
+ * latexsym.dtx: Added \ProvidesPackage and \ProvidesFile
+ declaration.
+
+ * euscript.dtx: Corrected \ProvidesPackage declaration.
+
+ * vtl2e02.tlg: Removed test for \SLiTeX command.
+
+ * vtl2e02.lvt: Removed test for \SLiTeX command.
+
+1994-05-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews01.tex: Corrected filenames of usrguie and clsguide.
+ Removed ltnews.cls from filecontents.
+
+ * ltnews.cls: Checked this in. Added angle brackets to <...>.
+ Added AMS and SliTeX logos.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added SliTeX logo.
+
+ * ltxguide.cls: Added SliTeX logo.
+
+1994-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsection{Single or double sided printing}):
+ wrapped a long line.
+
+ * slides.dtx:
+ (subsection{The class code}): Use \input instead of \@@input. This
+ way it also works when \input@path is being used. Also changed
+ \IfFileExists to \InputIfFileExists for the same reason
+
+ * slides.dtx: Wrapped two long lines
+ Moved the identification and driver to the front of the file.
+
+ * proc.dtx (subsection{Identification}):
+ The second argument to \cmd\ProvidesFile wasn't closed in the
+ driver and the style file
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Wrapped a long line
+ Added a \ProvidesFile command to the driver
+ Added \CharacterTable
+
+ * proc.dtx:
+ Added \CharacterTable
+ Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the
+ version number.
+ Moved the identification and driver sections to the front of the
+ file in order to make \GetFileInfo work.
+ (subsection{Identification}):
+ Removed \cmd\typeout from .sty file; changed description
+ (subsection{The page style}):
+ Changed \rm to \normalfont\rmfamily in the definition of
+ \@oddfoot.
+
+1994-05-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: remove \SLiTeX.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Modify format of \@missingfileerror message.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: remove \literal.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Add silent substitution for bold tt.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Fix bug in Mac parser. typo " should have been :
+ (reported by Andrew Trevorrow)
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+ * ltpageno.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+ * ltlength.dtx: Improve documetation.
+
+ * ltidxglo.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: Remove PRELIMINARY TEST RELEASE from
+ startup banner (spring is here)
+
+ * ltthm.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+ (long line added last night:-)
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Add initial documentation section.
+
+1994-05-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * pandora.dtx: Folded a long line.
+
+ * lablst.tex: Folded long lines.
+
+ * copyright.txt: Removed remark about this release being
+ preliminary.
+
+ * copyins.txt: Removed remark about this release being
+ preliminary.
+
+ * Makefile: No list of files at end of 00readme.txt, check for
+ long lines added, make sure that small2e.tex and sample2e.tex
+ don't get a standard header.
+
+ * testpage.tex: Folded long lines.
+
+ * manifest.txt: Shortened long lines.
+
+ * tnfss7.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log
+ file.
+
+ * tnfss4.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log
+ file.
+
+ * tnfss1.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log
+ file.
+
+1994-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * newlfont.dtx:
+ Wrapped long lines.
+
+ * docstrip.dtx:
+ Wrapped long lines.
+
+ * doc.dtx:
+ Wrapped long lines.
+
+1994-05-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+
+ Added task.
+
+ Corrected processing of \nocorr.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ Fixed typos and checksum.
+
+ Extra documentation.
+
+1994-05-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltthm.dtx: Move user level documentation earlier in the file.
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: Move user level documentation earlier in the file.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * fam.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Increase \marginparwidth for long command names,
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltxref.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: wrap long lines to 72.
+
+1994-05-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: Added changes.txt.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx (\@dottedtocline): Put braces around argument 4
+ (the actual toc entry) to avoid font (and possibly other)
+ changes leaking out to the leaders.
+
+ * vlatex01.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning
+ messages, removed trailing space in error help messages.
+ Change in strut for footnotes causes blank line to disappear.
+
+ * tnfss7.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, updated for new
+ values of \sfcode and correct \hbar accent.
+
+ * tnfss7.lvt: Added space after number to prevent too much
+ expansion.
+
+ * tlcs01b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tlcs07b2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tlxs01b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tlxs07b2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tltc001.tlg: Updated for extra lines around info and warning
+ messages, update for new \protect handling, update for change in
+ value of \errorcontextlines counter in tltc001.lvt.
+
+ * tl2e1.tlg: Updated for extra lines around info messages.
+
+ * vtl2e01.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning messages,
+ removed trailing space in error help messages.
+
+ * tlb0250.tlg: Omit printout from \documentclass command.
+
+ * tlb0250.lvt: Omit printout from \documentclass command.
+
+ * vlatex03.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning messages.
+
+1994-05-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex: Added introduction.
+ Added section on command naming.
+ Added section on docstrip.
+ Added details of option processing.
+ Added example of DeclareRobustCommand.
+ Checked the document in with the server.
+
+1994-05-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+
+ Tidied, fixed some typos in documentation.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}):
+
+ Changed outputpage.
+
+ Changed warnings etc to new commands.
+
+ Added \MessageBreak.
+
+1994-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Wrap long lines to 72.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Set \@TeXversion to `2' by default for TeX2. Add
+ info about setting \@TeXversion to ltxcheck.dtx.
+
+ * lterror.dtx Add \@latex@info@no@line, remove some obsolete
+ code.
+
+1994-05-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tltx003.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of message changes.
+
+ * usrguide.tex:
+ Updates and additions.
+
+ * tnfss5.lvt:
+ Updated because check for bug (40) no longer appropriate.
+
+ * tnfss5.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of .lvt change.
+
+ * vlatex07.tlg:
+ Regenerated to reflect new layout of error and warning messages.
+
+ * tltx001.lvt:
+ Set errorcontextlines to -1 for better high-level checks.
+
+ * tltx001.tlg:
+ Regenerated to reflect new layout of error and warning messages.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}):
+ Changed outer default of \@currenvline to \@empty to avoid
+ double braces.
+
+ * classes.dtx (section{Identification}):
+ Changed file information that appears in \listfiles.
+
+1994-05-24 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxguide.tex: Checked in document class.
+
+ * clsguide.tex: Added sections on 2e font commands, defining \rm
+ etc., and obsolete commands.
+ Added stuff about \normalsize, \textheight and \textwidth being the
+ only mandatory commands.
+ Implemented Frank's suggestions for additions to the `loading other
+ files' section (which is now a subsection of `upgrading').
+ Added stuff on why primitive \input is a bad idea.
+ Added stuff on boxes and colour.
+ Moved general style stuff to overview section rather than 2.09
+ section.
+ Added newsletter example.
+
+1994-05-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Add coments describing \@TeXversion which must
+ be defined if a TeX older than 3.141 is being used.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Modify the definition of \GenericError slightly.
+ Also add completely new definition, using \typeout rather than
+ \errmessage. Used with TeX's older than 3.141, which have a
+ bug such that ^^J appears literally rather than breaking the
+ line in messages.
+
+1994-05-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex:
+ Updates and additions.
+
+ * copyright.txt:
+ Point to bugs.txt for error reports.
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Changed info in \ProvidesPackage.
+
+ * latexsym.dtx:
+ Changed info in \ProvidesPackage.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ Removed \MessageQuote since not used otherwise.
+
+ * lterror.dtx:
+ Corrected documentation.
+ Removed definitions for \@font@... since they are defined
+ in tracefnt.dtx.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx:
+ Added missing percents in filecontents definition :-(
+ Corrected several typos.
+ Cleaned up help texts.
+ Don't stop completely if \NeedsTeXFormat finds the wrong format,
+ just end inputting the current file.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins:
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+
+ * install.txt:
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+
+ * othertex.txt:
+ Remove bug address; mention bugs.txt instead.
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+
+ * readme.txt:
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+ Removed test release info.
+
+ * texpert.txt:
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+ Correct LaTeX source file name.
+
+ * web2ctex.txt:
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+
+ * yandytex.txt:
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+
+ * manifest.txt:
+ Changed .l2e extension to .txt.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ Replaced ^^J by \MessageBreak.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx:
+ Replaced many ^^J by \MessageBreak.
+ Reworded several help texts.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx:
+ Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Removed definition of \f@warn@break.
+ Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak.
+
+ * tl2e5.lvt:
+ Changed test for bug (40) of NFSS1, old test no longer
+ appropriate.
+
+ * vtl2e07.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * vtl2e03.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tnfss3.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlxs03r.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlxs03b.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlxs03a.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlcs03r.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlcs03b.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlcs03a.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlb0202.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tlb0073.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+ * tl2e5.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of lvt file change.
+
+ * tl2e4.tlg:
+ Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings.
+
+1994-05-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * clsguide.tex: Redid document structure to be more like
+ usrguide.
+ Added section on class/package structure.
+ Restructured the commands list.
+
+1994-05-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ New \protect logic.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx:
+ Changed \@warning to \@latex@warning.
+
+ * doc.dtx:
+ Added \PackageError commands.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Complete new definitions for \@fontwarning and
+ \@font@info.
+
+ * lterror.dtx (subsection{Specific errors}):
+ Added \MessageBreak to various help messages.
+ Reset \protect to \relax for \@preamerr.
+
+ * lttab.dtx:
+ New \protect logic in \@mkpream.
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+ Use new warning message commands.
+
+ * slides.dtx:
+ Use new warning commands for classes.
+ twocolumn option will produce warning (not error).
+
+ * letter.dtx:
+ Use new warning and error commands. (we use \@latex@error
+ in compatibility mode)
+ Some documentation updates.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx:
+ Use new warning and error commands.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx:
+ Removed surplus \space in error message
+ Use new warning and error commands.
+
+ * proc.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr with \ClassError{proc}.
+ Replaced \@@warning with \ClassWarningNoLine{proc}.
+ Added \Finale in documentation.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx:
+ Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Use old spacing rules of font warnings so that test suite
+ isn't complaining.
+
+1994-05-22 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * usrguide.tex: Rewrote description of the new argument to
+ \newcommand.
+ Added section on classes and packages, on package options, and on
+ standard classes and packages.
+ Added some examples.
+ Added filecontents* and paragraph on what files can be sent.
+ Added section on latexsym in `old commands'.
+ Rewrote some stuff on 2.09 documents.
+ Added section on \frontmatter, \mainmatter and \backmatter.
+ Wrote `problems' section, including new error messages, stuff on
+ \tenrm and friends, old versions of files, and submitting a bug
+ report.
+ Added overview.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Replaced braces with begingroup, to stop mathords
+ from sneaking into math mode.
+ Replaced \@generic@message and \@generic@error by \GenericError,
+ \GenericWarning and \GenericInfo.
+ Made \GenericError, \GenericWarning and \GenericInfor robust.
+ Replaced \\ and ~ by \MessageBreak and \space.
+ Replaced \string by \protect in some messages.
+
+1994-05-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: new style \protect code in \changes.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Define \aalph as there are currently more than 26
+ files included into source2e.tex.
+ New style \cmd and \cs so Alan can go \cmd\{ in ltoutenc.
+
+1994-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * doc.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * ltxref.dtx:
+ Don't produce line number when warning about multiple labels
+ (would be the line number from the aux file).
+ Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning.
+
+ * ltbibl.dtx:
+ Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning.
+
+ * lttab.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+ Replaced \@@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+ Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line; again line numbers
+ do not make much sense in this file.
+
+ * ltlists.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * lhyphen.dtx:
+ Fixed checksum.
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{Font changing}):
+ Fixed wrong \changes entry.
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsection{Font changing}):
+ Fixed wrong \changes entry.
+
+1994-05-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltnews01.tex: Wrote 1st draft of LaTeX News #1.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Made \@generic@message robust.
+
+1994-05-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * vtl2e06.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, change in
+ format of error messages, change in glue for framed boxes.
+
+ * vlatex06.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, change in
+ format of error messages, change in glue for framed boxes.
+
+ * ltpage.dtx (\marboth, \markright): Changed setting for
+ \protect.
+
+ * tl2e7.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tl2e2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tlb0427.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tlb0027a.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tlb0027b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tlb0018.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vtl2e05.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vtl2e04.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vtl2e03.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vtl2e02.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vlatex05.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vlatex04.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vlatex03.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * vlatex02.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * tnfss2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx (\addtocontents): Correct setting of \protect.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx (\addcontentsline): Correct setting of \protect.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx (\@writefile): Added correct setting of \protect.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx (\@xfloat): Restore @nobreak switch inside float
+ to default value false.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx (\@outputpage): Added setting of \protect during
+ \shipout.
+
+1994-05-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx :
+ Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ Replaced \@@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line.
+ Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning.
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * newlfont.dtx:
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning.
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning.
+ Replaced \font@log by \@font@info.
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning.
+ Replaced \font@log by \@font@info.
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning.
+ Replaced \font@log by \@font@info.
+ Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error.
+ Use new generic error commands.
+
+1994-05-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Fixed a bug with \@inmatherr.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected checksum.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Added \@latex@info@no@line.
+ Added missing full stops.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Renamed @checkcommand to CheckCommand.
+
+ * latex209.dst: Added t1enc.sty.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Changed \@finalstrut.
+ Added t1enc.sty.
+
+1994-05-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: use \maxdimen not 9999p in \showoutput.
+
+ * test2e.tex: add test2e.cfg for customisation (suggested by
+ Rainer)
+
+1994-05-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tlb0109.tlg: Change in format of error messages.
+
+ * tlb0063.tlg: Change in format of error messages.
+
+ * vtl2e03.tlg: Change in format of error messages.
+
+ * vtl2e02.tlg: Change in definition of \TeX logo.
+
+ * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in format of error messages, change in
+ definition of \TeX logo.
+
+ * tltx002.tlg: Change in format of error messages.
+
+ * vlatex03.tlg: Change in format of error messages.
+
+ * vlatex02.tlg: Change in definition of \TeX logo.
+
+ * vlatex01.tlg: Change in format of error messages, change in
+ definition of \TeX logo.
+
+ * tltc002.tlg: Change in format of error messages.
+
+ * source2e.tex: Changed according to split in files.
+
+ * manifest.l2e: Changed according to split in files.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Changed according to split in files.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Added definitions for \@namedef and \@nameuse
+ again.
+
+ * ltcntlen.dtx: Split into ltcounts.dtx (counters), ltpageno.dtx
+ (page numbering), ltxref.dtx (cross referencing), ltlength.dtx
+ (lengths).
+
+ * ltidxbib.dtx: Split into ltidxglo.dtx (index and glossary) and
+ ltbibl.dtx (bibliography commands).
+
+ * tlb0268.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tlb0077.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tl2e1.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tlxs04a.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tlxs02.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tlxs01p.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tltx001.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * vlatex05.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for
+ compatibility mode.
+
+ * vlatex04.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for
+ compatibility mode.
+
+ * vlatex03.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for
+ compatibility mode.
+
+ * vlatex02.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for
+ compatibility mode.
+
+ * vlatex01.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tnfss1.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tlcs02.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tlcs01b.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear.
+
+ * tltc001.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to
+ reappear, strut in footnotes back to old version for
+ compatibility mode.
+
+1994-05-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tnfss4.tlg: With new handling of changes to font size and
+ \baselinestretch the tracefnt messages are slightly different.
+
+ * tl2e4.tlg: With new handling of changes to font size and
+ \baselinestretch the tracefnt messages are slightly different.
+
+ * vtl2e02.tlg: New definitions for LaTeX and SLiTeX logos now
+ active, change in writing of robust commands, change in glue for
+ framed boxes.
+
+ * vlatex02.tlg: New definitions for LaTeX and SLiTeX logos now
+ active, change in writing of robust commands, change in glue for
+ framed boxes.
+
+ * tl2e7.tlg: Updated for new values of \sfcode and correct
+ \hbar accent.
+
+ * tl2e7.lvt: Replace package t1enc by fontenc, added a space.
+ Added space after number to prevent too much expansion.
+
+ * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes causes blank
+ line to disappear.
+
+1994-05-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added \@finalstrut.
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: Added the TeX logo.
+ Made the LaTeX2e logo use the text font 2 rather than the math
+ font 2.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed a typo with fontenc.sty... it's
+ \encodingdefault, not \defaultencoding!
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected the lccode for d-bar.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Made \.i produce i.
+
+1994-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Modify \@use@option so Alan can use
+ \OptionNotUsed within the code for a declared option.
+
+1994-05-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tl2e7.lvt: Corrected: \documentstyle --> \documentclass.
+
+ * tlb0039.tlg: Removed \usepage{t1ot1}.
+
+ * tlb0039.lvt: Removed \usepage{t1ot1}.
+
+ * latint.dtx: Added missing \let in \@no@font@optfalse, added
+ \ProvidesFile and \GetFileInfo.
+
+ * tlb0438.tlg: Updated for \every@size now working correctly.
+
+ * vlatex07.tlg: Change in strut for array/tabular parboxes and
+ footnotes.
+
+ * vtl2e07.tlg: Change in strut for array/tabular parboxes and
+ footnotes.
+
+ * vlatex05.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in
+ writing of robust commands, change in glue for framed boxes.
+
+ * vtl2e05.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in
+ writing of robust commands, change in glue for framed boxes.
+
+ * vlatex03.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in glue
+ for framed boxes.
+
+ * vlatex04.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes.
+
+ * tltx001.tlg: Change in glue for framed boxes, change in args
+ to \@ifstar, change in colorendbox.
+
+ * tl2e3.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes.
+
+ * vtl2e03.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in glue
+ for framed boxes.
+
+ * vtl2e04.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes.
+
+ * tlb0202.tlg: Change in expansion of accent macros.
+
+ * tltc001.tlg: Change in glue for framed boxes, change in args
+ to \@ifstar, change in colorendbox.
+
+1994-05-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: An underscore character with catcode 12 in math
+ mode produced an error since the active underscore was \let to
+ \_ before the latter was defined. \global\let replaced by \gdef.
+
+1994-05-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Added extra braces to \copyright.
+ Added extra braces to \nfss@text (allow direct use in subscript).
+
+1994-05-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Moved error commands from ltdefns.dtx.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Added section on \protect. Moved error commands to
+ lterror.dtx.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed braces from \$ since they're now in
+ nfss@text.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with \ds@newlfont.
+ Removed extra spaces from the missing file error.
+ Commented out bezier with \iffalse...\fi rather than %% to avoid
+ bezier turning up in every file.
+ Corrected some documentation.
+
+1994-05-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Use \DeclareRobustCommand to define \ensuremath,
+ and add extra braces so a_\ensuremath{foo} works.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Add \color@begingroup to protect \normalcolor.
+ move \normalcolor out of the inner box.
+
+1994-05-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Added batch file ltoutenc.ins.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dst: Capitalize encoding names.
+
+1994-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for the user}):
+ Removed surplus braces from robust command \linespread.
+ Pass \baselinestretch not \f@linespread in \fontsize.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx:
+ \DeclareTextCommand now uses specified encoding again in
+ top-level part.
+ Encoding files now use mixed case names, eg OT1enc.def
+ (subsection{Definitions for the OT1 encoding}):
+ Added extra braces in def of \$.
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+ Changed \loop ...\repeat to use Kabelschacht method (TUB 8#2)
+ Comment out encoding specific commands which are defined by
+ ltoutenc.dtx.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+ Use \let to get original defs of accents back in output routine.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx:
+ Removed loading of ot1enc.sty (not longer available).
+ Moved definitions of \@acci and friends to lfonts.dtx.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx (subsection{Miscellaneous}):
+ Define saved versions of accents (\@acci and friends) here.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Encodings}):
+ Declare default encoding first.
+ Load encoding specific files for OT1 and T1.
+
+1994-05-16 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltcntrl.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * ltcounts.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * lterror.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * ltpar.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * ltspace.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed \P, since it's not in the T1 encoding.
+ Added \r and \k accents.
+ Added \NG, \ng, \TH, \th, \DH, \dh, \DJ and \dj.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with \mediumseries.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Redid fontenc.sty to use the new mixed-case
+ encoding files.
+ Fixed a bug with \pounds.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with the margid option.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Removed ot1enc.sty.
+
+1994-05-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ \$ and \pdollar removed since now part of encoding cmds.
+ \pounds and \ppounds ditto.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Names of encoding commands changed to \<enc>-cmd.
+
+1994-05-15 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added the nomargid and margid options.
+
+1994-05-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ifthen.dtx: Add \TE@repl, to make \or safe in \equal.
+
+1994-05-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Encodings}):
+ Don't input .def files in encoding declarations.
+
+ * fam.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}):
+ Init the encoding change macro only for new \DeclareFontEncoding.
+ Log redeclarations of font encodings.
+ (subsection{Macros for the user}):
+ Added missing \noexpand to \enc@update.
+ Initialise all \f@... macros with \@empty.
+ (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}):
+ Don't change \f@encoding in \DeclareErrorFont. Removed
+ definitions for \makeatletter and \@input etc. since they are not
+ longer necessary.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx (subsection{Miscellaneous}):
+ Removed surplus braces within \normalfont.
+ Added \DeclareErrorFont.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins (IMPORTANT NOTICE):
+ Moved ltoutenc.dtx before ltfss.dtx since ltfss needs parts of the
+ code.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx (section{Macros common to \texttt{fam.tex} and
+ \texttt{tracefnt.sty}}): Added \enc@update to selectfont.
+
+ * fam.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}):
+ Initialise \<enc>@cmd in \DeclareFontEncoding.
+ (subsection{Macros for the user}):
+ Added \enc@update to \fontencoding. Thus now encoding updates are
+ deferred until the following \selectfont (as they should). One
+ action of \enc@update is to update \<enc>@cmd for the old and the
+ new encoding.
+
+1994-05-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Renamed \ENC@cmd to \ENC-cmd, to avoid collisions
+ with commands like \U@cmd.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dst: Updated the dst file to match ltoutenc.dtx.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Redid the oldlfont and newlfont options to set the
+ \@no@font@optfalse flag.
+
+ * fontsmpl.dtx: Split font sample document and package out of
+ ltoutenc.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Stopped commands declared with DeclareTextWidget
+ from going into an infinite loop if f@encoding isn't the current
+ encoding.
+ Added fontenc package.
+ Made ot1enc.def and t1enc.def files rather than packages.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Changed how 2e commands are switched off.
+ Removed the date from the announcement of 2.09 mode.
+
+1994-05-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lfonts.dtx: remove file identification typeout.
+
+ * latint.dtx: remove file identification typeout.
+
+ * setsize.dtx: remove file identification typeout.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx: remove file identification typeout.
+
+ * fam.dtx: remove file identification typeout.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Remove definition of \a \a' etc. Now in
+ ltoutenc.dtx
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: New accent handling in parboxrestore.
+
+ * newlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand now
+ \DeclareRobustCommand
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand now
+ \DeclareRobustCommand
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Removed unnecessary braces from \@ifnextchar and
+ \@ifstar constructions.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Stop \listfiles being run twice, (A second
+ occurrence in the preamble is silently ignored)
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Add colour support to tabbing macros.
+ Use \@finalstrut in @endpbox.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: Add colour support (back again:-) to
+ \@footnotetext. Safe this time, using \normalcolor in an inner
+ group, leaving \reset@font\footnotesize in an outer group so
+ that \split... get set correctly. Also use \@finalstrut, and
+ remove some superfluous braces.
+ Add \normalcolor to \@xfloat, so floats do not pick up the
+ current colour.
+
+1994-05-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Use \@input@ for .fd files so that they show up with
+ \listfiles.
+
+ * ltfntcmd.dtx:
+ Replaced \@protecteddef by \DeclareRobustCommand.
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx:
+ File renamed to ltfntcmd.dtx.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins:
+ Added Welcome message.
+ Update kernel generation.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+
+ * ltcntlen.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+ Removed \@Ialph and \@ialph since they neither save space
+ nor execution time.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+ Execute \every@size hook at begin document.
+
+ * ltvers.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+ Added \endinput at the end. This is necessary for running
+ unpack2e.ins.
+ Use \fmtname in \everyjob and welcome message.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand.
+
+1994-05-13 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Added \@backslashchar.
+ Improved coding of \@ifdefinable.
+
+ * testdist.dtx: Improved documentation.
+
+ * emtex.l2e: Created this file.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Loaded package ot1enc, and defined \@acci and
+ friends.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Added logging to DeclareProtectedCommand.
+
+ * ltoutenc.dtx: Renamed accents.dtx to ltoutenc.dtx.
+ After all these months It's now a real bit of kernel! :-)
+
+ * accents.dtx: Replaces \space by ` ' in csname.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Replaced \space by ` ' in \csname
+
+ * accents.dtx: Added \{, \} and \$.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Renamed DeclareProtectedCommand to
+ DeclareRobustCommand.
+ Moved DeclareRobustCommand after @gobble.
+ Removed @if@short@command.
+ Removed \{ and \}.
+
+ * accents.dtx: Redid all the kernel commands. Made t1.def and
+ ot1.def into t1enc.sty and ot1enc.sty.
+
+1994-05-12 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx:
+ Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the
+ version number.
+ (section{A driver for this document}):
+ A missing \begin{macrocode} line caused LaTeX to loop and complain
+ about \begin{document} only being allowed in the preamble.
+ Wrapped a number of long lines to prevent overfull hbox messages
+ and fixed improper nesting of macro and macrocode environments.
+
+ * letter.dtx:
+ Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the
+ version number.
+ (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}):
+ Made running heads the same for odd and even pages in twoside
+ mode.
+
+1994-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsfonts.dst: Remove generation of the drv file.
+
+ * amsfonts.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files
+ generated.
+
+ * slides.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files
+ generated.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Add early definition of \ProvidesFile,
+ so fd files read at initex time work OK.
+ Add `v' to \changes entries.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files
+ generated.
+
+ * newlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand to define \em. Remove
+ the definitions of \prm and friends.
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx: use \DeclareProtectedCommand to define \rm and
+ friends. Also use \normalfont rather than \reset@font.
+
+1994-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Added \normalcolor to the output routine just
+ before the head and foot are placed. Needed now color.sty does
+ not redefine \reset@font.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: merged \fbox and \framebox.
+ Defined \@finalstrut (used in \@mpfootnotetext)
+ Defined \normalcolor (\let to \relax)
+
+1994-05-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ New \baselinestretch concept.
+ Added some tracing again that was incorrectly removed.
+ Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem
+ less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs.
+ Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand.
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem
+ less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs.
+ Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand.
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ New \baselinestretch concept.
+ Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem
+ less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs.
+ Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Allow commands to be \let to \relax in the argument of
+ \DeclareMathSymbol, etc. So far only undefined commands
+ or commands of the right type (eg mathchars) were
+ allowed.
+ Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem
+ less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs.
+
+1994-05-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Fixed a bug with DeclareProtectedCommand.
+
+1994-05-11 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx:
+ Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the
+ version number.
+
+1994-05-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Superfluous braces removed from several commands
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: modify filecontents environment so that ctrl-L
+ and ctrl-I are written as a blank line and space respectively.
+ A warning is given if either of these translations takes
+ place, using a devious use of \@ifundefined.
+
+1994-05-11 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Moved the logos to after \DeclareProtectedCommand.
+ Defined them using \DeclareProtectedCommand.
+ Made the SLiTeX logo use the TeX logo.
+ Made \, and \hspace use \DeclareProtectedCommand.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Added %%% ltfinal.dtx line.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Added %%% ltinit.dtx line.
+
+ * latex209.dst: Added dummy bezier.sty.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Added dummy bezier.sty.
+
+1994-05-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Slight change in text of error message for
+ \verb in command argument.
+
+1994-05-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Added documentation sent by DPC.
+ Moved \makeatletter and \maketother into ltinit.
+ Added extra ^^Js to \@latexerr.
+ Removed a couple of spurious braces.
+
+1994-05-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx: Temporary fix: Make sure that \next is not
+ dangerously \let to \relax.
+
+ * exscale.dtx:
+ Added code for scaling of \big... delimiters.
+
+1994-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+ Changed error message to fit linewidth.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+ Added test to \newmathalphabet to produce an error if
+ used in old 209 sources without explicit newlfont or oldlfont
+ option. (New compatibility concept)
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx (section{The Code}):
+ Setting of \math@bgroup and \math@egroup outside latex209
+ part. (New compatibility concept)
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx:
+ Replaced use of \next by \@let@token and undid temp fix 3.3e.
+
+1994-05-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx:
+
+1994-05-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * exscale.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation
+ standard.
+
+ * euscript.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation
+ standard.
+
+ * eufrak.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation
+ standard.
+
+ * eufrak.dst: Removed generation of .drv file.
+
+1994-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx:
+ Moved definition of \GetFileInfo to doc.dtx.
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{GetFileInfo}):
+ Moved definition of \GetFileInfo into this file.
+
+ * ltthm.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+
+1994-05-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * somedefs.dtx: Produced v0.01.
+
+ * rawfonts.dtx: Produced v0.01, using somedefs.dtx.
+
+1994-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx:
+ Added file identification string.
+ Changed \@firsttab and \@maxtab from counters to chardefs.
+ Removed surplus {} in \@ifnextchar and \@ifstar constructs.
+ Removed plain TeX definition of \+
+
+1994-05-06 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}):
+ Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in second level list label.
+ (subsubsection{Description}):
+ Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in \descriptionlabel
+ Modified the documentation to use doc's `environment' environment
+ when documenting new environments.
+ (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}):
+ Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth.
+
+ * slides.dtx:
+ Modified the documentation to use doc's `environment' environment
+ when documenting new environments.
+ (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}):
+ Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth.
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{The title}):
+ Now check whether we are in the first or second column in
+ twocolumn mode.
+ (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}):
+ Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth.
+ (subsubsection{Itemize}):
+ Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in second level list label.
+ (subsubsection{Description}):
+ Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in \descriptionlabel
+
+1994-05-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltidxbib.dtx: Do not write page number in \nocite warning
+ message. Set switch for warning and end of run.
+
+1994-05-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * preload.dtx:
+ Added some explanation about the need to have the encoding
+ predeclared as well.
+
+1994-05-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Added empty \errhelp.
+
+1994-05-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Changed the wording of the warning in
+ \NeedsTeXFormat.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: added patch (from Frank)
+ @badcrerr error message removed
+
+1994-05-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Renamed \@@DeclareMathDelimiter to \@xDeclareMathDelimiter
+
+1994-05-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: add \@break@tfor
+ Remove many superfluous braces around arguments of \@ifnextchar
+ and \@ifstar.
+
+ * source2e.tex: allow full indexing on \@latexerr \@warning, and
+ \@tempboxa and friends.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: add \@onlypreamble\@obsoletefile
+ remove some obsolete code which was previously commented out.
+ rename \@break@loop to \@break@tfor, and move its definition to
+ ltinit.
+
+ * tlb0203.lvt: new test file for \@tfor bug.
+
+1994-05-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltidxbib.dtx: Make \nocite issue a warning for an undefined
+ citation key.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected setting catcode for ctrl-j.
+
+ * amsfonts.fdd: Removed definitions for AMS-supplied cm fonts.
+
+ * cmfonts.fdd: Included definitions for AMS-supplied cm fonts.
+
+1994-05-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ \@badcrerr replaced by \@nolnerr.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx:
+ \@badcrerr error message removed.
+
+1994-05-03 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Set the catcode of ^^J to other.
+
+ Removed \@undefinedfonterror.
+
+1994-05-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx (subsubsection{Float control}):
+
+ Shortened code of \@resethfps.
+
+ Corrected info message code.
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx:
+
+1994-05-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Redid the method of switching off 2e commands.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Set all the catcodes before dumping. Made 127
+ illegal.
+
+ * install.l2e: Added yandytex.l2e
+
+ * accents.dtx: Rewrote almost everything from scratch.
+
+ * yandytex.l2e: Installed a file from Berthold
+
+ Corrected \@fontswitch.
+
+1994-05-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}):
+
+ Added \@largefloatcheck.
+
+ Removed unnecessary braces from arguments of \@ifnextchar.
+
+1994-05-01 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dst:
+ Removed line left over from the driver generation.
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{The class code}):
+ Removed the use of variables to store the version information.
+ Added \ProvidesFile to slides.def
+
+ * letter.dtx (section{Identification}):
+ Removed the use of variables to store the version information.
+
+ * classes.dtx (section{Identification}):
+ Removed the use of variables to store the version information.
+
+ * proc.dtx (subsection{Identification}):
+ Removed the use of variables to store the version information.
+
+ * makeindx.dtx (subsection{Identification}):
+ Removed the use of variables to store the version information.
+
+1994-04-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx:
+
+ Added latexinfo commands.
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx:
+
+ Changed prefix in \@protecteddef from frag@ to frag.
+ Changed warning therein to an info message.
+
+ Removed long lines.
+
+ Changed to, eg, v1.0l.
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx:
+
+ Rogue space removed.
+
+ Cut-off points for adding \@emptycol changed.
+
+ Empty column action added: \@emptycol.
+
+ Full of floats action improved.
+
+ Changed `active characters warning' to an info message.
+
+ (subsection{Floats}):
+
+ Changed wording of some error messages.
+
+ Changed 9* to 199* in dates.
+
+ Fixed bug from \dblfigrule with \@topnewpage.
+
+ Removed long lines.
+
+ Changed to, eg, v1.0l.
+1994-04-29 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * letter.dtx (section{Identification}):
+ Use the generic name LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in the arguments of
+ \ProvidesClass and removed typeout message.
+
+1994-04-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: use `v' in \changes entries.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Update the documentation. (source2e now has an
+ index by default.)
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: upgrade version to 1 (no other change, except
+ using `v' in \changes entries in to match the other kernel
+ files.)
+
+ * test2e.tex: reset the original \showbox parameters. (As
+ ltplain now sets them to -1)
+
+1994-04-28 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Table of Contents}):
+ Changed the definitions of \l@part, \l@chapter and \l@section
+ (article only) to check the value of tocdepth. :
+ (section{Identification}):
+ Use the generic name LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in the arguments of
+ \ProvidesClass and \ProvidesFile
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}):
+ Allow the twoside option in native mode; introduced oneside
+ option.
+ (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}):
+ Changed the definition of the pagestyles plain and empty to also
+ define the head and feet for even pages; Added different
+ definition for pagestyle headings when twoside is in effect.
+ (subsection{The generic letter commands}):
+ A letter has to start on a `right' page when in twosided mode.
+
+1994-04-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * graphpap.dtx: Leslie's \graphpaper macros, Converted to
+ ignore spaces between arguments, and documented using doc.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: add \parg for picture mode args.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx (subsection{Curves}): added \bezier and \qbezier
+ (section{Picture Mode}): Modified \picture \multiput and \bezier
+ so that they ignore spaces between arguments.
+ (section{Picture Mode}): made \circle use \@inmatherr
+
+1994-04-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}):
+ Turn off overrfull box tracing in trancript file.
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}):
+ Ignore \Finale without \StopEventually.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Removed \uppercase from all counter assignments dealing possibly
+ with hex numbers. That means that
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{m}{\mathord}{operators}{"6d}
+ doesn't work any longer (must be "6D now).
+ On the other hand
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{m}{\mathord}{operators}{`m}
+ although we would suggest to use at least `\m
+
+ * ltlists.dtx:
+ Replaced the warning \@ltxnomath by \@inmatherr.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx (section{Initex initialisations}):
+ Added error macro \@inmatherr#1 to be issued by commands
+ that will not work in math mode (like (\circle))
+
+ * doc.dtx (subsection{Redefining the \textsf{index} environment}):
+ Use \RequirePackage to input multicol.
+
+1994-04-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Remove extra full stops from the ends of some
+ error messages.
+
+1994-04-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ message changed to "\verb ended by end of line"
+
+1994-04-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpage.dtx:
+ Redefine \@leftmark and \@rightmark to use \@firstoftwo
+ and \@secondoftwo.
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{Font changing}):
+ We do warn now if \sl or \sc is found in math
+ (not that they should be used at all.
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx:
+ Removed surplus spaces after "\hbox to " in several cases.
+
+1994-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Font loading}):
+ Checked the value of \font@submax. If greater 0pt issue a
+ bold warning and reset it to 0pt.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx:
+ \verb error messages reworded.
+
+1994-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx:
+ Replaced width, height, depth by \@wifth, \@height, \@depth.
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Replace the use of \@leftmark with \@firstoftwo.
+ Moved \@tempdimc to ltinit.dtx.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx:
+ Moved all \@gobble... macros to this file.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}):
+ Messages generated by \enddocument reworded.
+
+1994-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}): add colour
+ support to minipage. add comments throughout the file.
+
+ * source2e.tex: modify to always print the index and change
+ history, no longer need to use ltxdoc.cfg to get the index.
+
+1994-04-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * newlfont.dtx:
+ Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode".
+
+ * lfonts.dtx:
+ Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode".
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode".
+ Changed \errmessage's to \@latexerr's.
+
+1994-04-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * install.l2e: Corrected the wording of the bug report.
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Added some documentation, incorporated ltcodes.dtx.
+ This now includes setting the catcodes of 128--255 to `illegal'.
+
+1994-04-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * features.tex: New name for dircheck.
+ Improve description of package option names. Modify
+ description of dtx extension (as they may now be directly
+ processed by LaTeX.
+ \@filename@parse typo corrected to \filename@parse.
+
+1994-04-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}):
+ Added the global flag \ifG@fontsubs. This will be set to true
+ when automatic font substitution happened.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}):
+ Moved the warning messages in \enddocument so that they will appear in
+ succession. Also ensure that the aux file is always read so that toc etc.
+ will be correctly produced even in case of multiple labels.
+ Query \ifG@fontsubs and issue a warning in \enddocument when set to true.
+ Also check if size substitution has happened and issue a warning if it
+ is greater than \fontsubfuzz.
+
+1994-04-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Redefined \verbatim@noligs@list.
+
+1994-04-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltpage.dtx Improve documentation.
+
+1994-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx: Use catcode15 not catcode13 for control chars.
+ Initialise \textwidth \textheight and page style.
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: removed colour support from \@footnotetext and
+ \@savemarbox. The `simple' extra groups that had been added
+ cause incorrect spacing. More complicated modifications
+ required for colour support will be done in color.sty.
+
+1994-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Removed surplus definition of \no@alphabet@error (see fam.dtx entry).
+ Corrected an error in \DeclareMathAlphabet M@#3 -> M@#2.
+ Added a missing % in \SetMathAlphabet@.
+ Changed two error message helps still containing \documentstyle. :-)
+ Changed all "Redeclaring something..." messages to log only infos.
+ Changed "Check substitution defaults ..." message to "Checking defaults ..."
+
+ * fam.dtx:
+ Changed message "Calculating math sizes ..." to appear only in
+ transcript file.
+ \no@alphabet@error reimplemented to be LaTeX err message.
+ \no@alphabet@help removed.
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx:
+ Changed line breaks and wording in some messages.
+ Removed surplus "." from some warning messages.
+ All warning/error messages changed to start "LaTeX Font Warning" etc.
+ Continuation lines are changed to "(Font)".
+
+ * tracefnt.dtx (section{Scaled font extraction}):
+ Removed dimen regs \fontsubfuzz and \fontsubmax and replaced them
+ by macros \fontsubfuzz and \font@submax.
+
+1994-04-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * web2ctex.l2e: Changed name from unixtex.l2e. Changed the
+ example shell script to look for a LATEX209INPUTS environment
+ variable.
+
+ * install.l2e: Changed name of unixtex.l2e to
+ web2ctex.l2e.
+
+ * latint.dtx: Changed \font@warning to \font@log for redefining
+ math alphabets and symbol fonts.
+
+1994-04-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltcntlen.dtx:
+ Use new std counter error message \@nocounterr.
+
+ * ltthm.dtx:
+ Use new std counter error message \@nocounterr.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx:
+ Defined \@nocounterr to be the LaTeX2e error command with one
+ argument that announces unknown counters. Changed \@nocnterr
+ back to no-arg syntax for compatibility with old styles making
+ use of that error message. \@nocnterr should not be used by
+ new LaTeX2e applications.
+
+1994-04-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * proc.dtx: Adding missing guard /class, this produced
+ incorrect proc.sty.
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Added missing % character in definition of
+ \@isavebox.
+
+1994-04-14 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}):
+ \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand
+
+ * letter.dtx (subsection{Font changing}):
+ \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsection{Fonts}):
+ The size changing commands are no longer defined in the
+ kernel. Use \newcommand instead of \renewcommand.
+ (subsection{Font changing}):
+ \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand
+
+ * oldgerm.dtx:
+ Renamed \@newtextcmd to \DeclareTextFontCommand
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx:
+ Renamed \@newtextcmd to \DeclareTextFontCommand and
+ \@newfontswitch to \DeclareOldFontCommand as agreed in Warwick.
+
+
+1994-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: fix to pagestyle in change log.
+
+1994-04-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexbug.tex: Changed the prompt for `a list of files' to a
+ prompt for a single filename. Made latexbug look to see if it
+ could find the file, and if it can, it includes the file and the
+ logfile in the latexbug.msg.
+
+1994-04-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Add definition of \@dischyph (was in ltboxes).
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Remove redefinition \@acci-iii. (now defined in
+ ltplain). Remove definition of \@dischyph (now in ltinit).
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: define \' \` \= in terms of \@acci-iii.
+ Use NFSS font commands in \ttraggedright and \proclaim.
+
+1994-04-12 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.l2e: Changes according to splitting of kernel.
+
+ * ltvers.dtx: Have Expansion of \fmtversion (version info)
+ generated automatically.
+
+ * accdefs.dtx: Removed definitions of accent macros \' \` \=
+ as these are in the kernel.
+
+1994-04-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * oztex.l2e: Added warning that lines are > 80 chars
+
+1994-04-11 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Titlepage}):
+ Removed bug introduced by inserting \cleardoublepage in the wrong
+ place.
+
+ Checked the file for long lines and wrapped them.
+
+ LL introduced options openright and openany fot the report and
+ book classes.
+
+ LL introduced commands \frontmatter, \mainmatter and \backmatter
+ to the book class.
+
+1994-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: add * form of filecontents environment.
+ Protect \ProvidesFile against space and / having strange
+ catcodes.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: remove setting of errorcontextlines in \@latexerr
+ remove old definition of the \LaTeX logo.
+
+ * source2e.tex: minor improvements (mainly to the comments)
+
+ * ltthm.dtx: use new style \@nocnterr (diff from Frank, dated
+ 1994/04/09)
+
+1994-04-11 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx: Added `defaultscriptratio and
+ `defaultscriptscriptratio.
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Switched off `enlargethispage and the `!' float
+ option.
+
+1994-04-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * install.l2e: Split the installation guide into install.l2e,
+ texpert.l2e, and system-specific oztex.l2e and unixtex.l2e files.
+
+ * template.l2e: Created a template for system.l2e files.
+
+1994-04-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltherest.dtx:
+ Use standard counter missing error message for \newtheorem.
+
+ * ltcntlen.dtx:
+ Use \setcounter in \stepcounter to have counter name checked.
+ Change usage of \@nocnterr to have counter name as argument.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx:
+ Change default err message to point to the LaTeX manual or
+ LaTeX companion.
+
+1994-04-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latex209.dtx: Switched off `lrbox, `width, `height and `depth in
+ 2.09 mode.
+
+ Removed optional arguments to `parbox, `minipage and `newcommand.
+
+ Made `ProvidesPackage and `ProvidesClass produce log entries
+ rather than warnings.
+
+ Removed `filedate.
+
+1994-03-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx: Minor improvements.
+
+ * manifest.l2e: update this file with all the new file names.
+
+ * source2e.tex: update this file with all the new file names.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: update this file with all the new file names.
+
+ * ltherest.dtx: The only thing left in this file is the old
+ definition of \documentstyle and \@options, which are
+ redefined in ltclass.dtx. This file is now removed.
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: Create file. Page style + \raggedbottom \sloppy
+ etc. Taken from ltherest.dtx.
+
+ * ltidxbib.dtx: create file. index and bibliography stuff from
+ ltherest.dtx.
+
+1994-03-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltcntlen.dtx: create file. Contains counter and length macros.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: remove counter macros.
+
+1994-03-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfloat.dtx: create file by removing sectioning commands from
+ ltherest.dtx
+ Use \normalsize in \@caption in place of \@normalsize.
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: create file by removing sectioning commands from
+ ltherest.dtx.
+
+ * ltthm.dtx: create file by removing theorem environment from
+ ltherest.dtx.
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that
+ \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'.
+
+ * ltlists.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that
+ \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'.
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that
+ \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: remove \@normalsize test from \document. Use
+ \normalsize instead of \@normalsize.
+
+ * ltinit.dtx: Remove redefinition of \newcount and friends as
+ version in ltplain.dtx is no longer \outer.
+ Comment out the experimental version of \@bsphack.
+
+ Remove test for \cs{inputlineno} undefined as it is
+ defined in ltplain.dtx
+
+ * ltplain.dtx: remove \outer from \newskip \newdimen \newwrite
+ and \newfam. Also comment out the definition of the `log like'
+ operators. (This does not alter the format, as they were
+ previously redefined by later files.)
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx: Improve documentation. (Removal of comments
+ refering to obsolete versions of the file.)
+
+1994-03-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * source2e.tex: fix date to be \fmtversion, and add authors.
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx (section{DocInclude}): Use \part to separate the
+ individual file sections.
+
+ * Started Keeping Change log in GNU format. All entries below
+ this point, have been converted from the LaTeX/doc \changes
+ log.
+
+1994-03-16 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * proc.dtx:
+ Removed the use of \wlog and included \fileversion in the optional
+ argument of \ProvidesClass
+
+ * slides.dtx:
+ Removed the \typeout lines since they are no longer needed.
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}):
+ Inserted missing hash mark in the code for the spanish option.
+
+1994-03-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx v1.0c \document (DPC) directly add file list
+ settings
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3f \listfiles Move this code directly into
+ \document
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3f "General" Add pkgindoc package
+
+1994-03-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0c "General" Add \NeedsTeXFormat
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3e \@missingfileerror Quit on x or X just like
+ a real error
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed defs of short-forms and
+ all sizes except \normalize
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed \@renewfontswitch
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Changed \/ to \@@italiccorr
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Adapted to mass formatting
+
+1994-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}):
+ Text added for spanish default (Julio Sanchez).
+ Changed all \extra... to \extras... that was a bug
+
+1994-03-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \end@float (DPC) Use \color@endgroup
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@xfloat (DPC) Use \color@begingroup
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@savemarbox (DPC) Use \color@begingroup
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@footnotetext (DPC) Use
+ \color@begingroup, add \endgraf
+
+ * ltherest.dtx 1.0c \@xympar (DPC) Use \color@begingroup
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \sbox Use \color@begingroup
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \lrbox Use \color@begingroup
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@endgroup macro added for colour
+ support
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@begingroup macro added for colour
+ support
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavepicbox Use \color@begingroup
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavebox Use \color@begingroup
+
+1994-03-14 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lablst.tex: Added.
+
+ * idx.tex: Added.
+
+1994-03-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}):
+ Shortened calculation for margins.
+
+1994-03-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltinit.dtx v1.0c \@tfor (DPC) Add \@tf@r so a single group is
+ correctly treated.
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx 0.3b \InputIfFileExists Use new cmd
+ \@addtofilelist
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \listfiles Reset \@addtofilelist at begin
+ document
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \@addtofilelist Macro added
+
+1994-03-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * docstrip.dtx:
+ Replaced \if!#2! by \if>#2> in \from to allow negated modules
+ appearing in this place.
+
+ * doc.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * eufrak.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * euscript.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * latexsym.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * exscale.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * oldgerm.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * pandora.dtx:
+ Removed \typeout's
+
+ * docstrip.dst:
+ Corrected unpacking for ltxdoc.cls (change of docstrip module).
+
+ * classes.dtx
+ (subsubsection{The dimension of text}):
+ Use same default values for native mode as in old styles.
+
+ (section{Identification}):
+ Added file versions to the \Provides... commands
+
+ (subsection{Footnotes}):
+ Use \@makefnmark rather than its expansion in the definition
+ of \@makefntext.
+
+1994-03-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx v1.0b "General" Name changed from lplain. The end
+ of an era
+
+ * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@yargdef Name changed from \XXX@Argdef
+
+ * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@reargdef New defn, in terms of \@yargdef
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@xympar (DPC) Extra bgroup for colour
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@savemarbox (DPC) Extra group for colour
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Minor edits to the typeouts in
+ ltxcheck
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Change name from dircheck.dtx
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage use \@gtempa
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage Add \wlog
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesFile Add \wlog
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3c "General" Change name from docclass to
+ ltclass
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \@fileswithoptions Do not use
+ \@pr@videpackage to avoid typeout
+
+1994-03-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * classes.dtx
+ (section{Identification}):
+ Removed \typeout statements since this is now handled by
+ \Provide...
+
+ (subsubsection{Margins}):
+ New algorithm for calculation \oddsidemargin.
+ New algorithm for calculating \marginparwidth.
+
+ * unpack2e.ins:
+ Changed kernel generation using new file names.
+
+1994-03-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx: Corrected \@oval, like previous change to
+ latex.dtx.
+
+ * latint.dtx: \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet: Added check against
+ use of alphabet switch outside of math mode.
+
+1994-03-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * newlfont.dtx: Changed \math@bgroup/\math@egroup to use
+ \bgroup/\egroup, to follow the change in fam.dtx.
+
+ * fam.dtx: Changed \math@bgroup/\math@egroup to use
+ \bgroup/\egroup rather than \begingroup/\endgroup to avoid
+ leaking out of style changes. Side effect: now always produce
+ mathord atoms.
+
+ * tlb0320.lvt: Added \showoutput and \scrollmode.
+
+ * manifest.l2e: Added syntonly.dtx, syntonly.ins and
+ nfssfont.tex.
+
+ * l2extra.dst: Added generation of syntonly package. Removed
+ generation of .drv file for varioref.
+
+ * syntonly.dst: Added to distribution.
+
+ * syntonly.dtx: Added to distribution.
+
+1994-03-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltplain.dtx v1.0a "General" Remove need for a driver file.
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0a "General" Reorganise driver module into `new
+ style'
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3b "General" Modify driver code into `new style'
+
+1994-03-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * slides.dtx: Changed \@makefnmark to call \@makefntext rather
+ that \@thefnmark directly.
+
+ * letter.dtx: Changed \@makefnmark to call \@makefntext rather
+ that \@thefnmark directly. Changed class to always write an
+ .aux file, so that, e.g., cross referencing commands work.
+
+ * tl2e4.tlg: Update for new versions of packages latexsym,
+ newlfont, euscript.
+
+ * tlxs05s.tlg: Update for removal of declared option `twoside'
+ in slides.dtx.
+
+ * tlcs05s.tlg: Update for removal of declared option `twoside'
+ in slides.dtx.
+
+ * tlcs01a.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs01b.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs01l.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs01p.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tltc001.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tltc002.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs01r.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs02.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs04a.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs04b.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs04r.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlcs08.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * slides.dtx: Corrected first argument of \IfFileExists for
+ reading sfonts.cfg: sfonts.def to sfonts.cfg.
+
+ * tnfss1.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tnfss2.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tnfss3.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tnfss4.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tnfss5.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tnfss6.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tl2e5.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlb0014.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * vlatex01.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * vlatex02.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * vlatex03.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * vlatex04.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * vlatex06.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * vlatex07.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tl2e1.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tl2e2.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tl2e3.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlb0057.tlg: Updated for new filedate (\docdate taken up
+ from some file).
+
+ * tlb0010.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlb0018.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlb0073.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * tlb0077.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a -->
+ v2.1b).
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx: Corrected typo in documentation.
+
+1994-03-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+ * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns
+
+ * ltinit.dtx v1.0a "General" (DPC) Removed input of nfsscode.ltx
+
+ * ltinit.dtx v1.0a \@@italiccorr Macro added
+
+ * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns
+
+ * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \end@float (DPC) Extra group for colour
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@xfloat (DPC) Extra group for colour
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@settodim (DPC) Extra group for colour
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@hangfrom (DPC)Extra groups for colour
+
+ * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@footnotetext (DPC) Extra group for colour
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Remove oldcomments environment
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" use \InputIfFileExists not
+ \IfFileExists
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" move code here from lhyphen.dtx
+
+ * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" Add code from the old dump.dtx
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx v1.0a "General" Unify format with other Kernel
+ files
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx v0.1a \@mpfootnotetext (DPC) Extra group for
+ colour
+
+1994-03-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * cmextra.dst: Corrected `cyrilic' --> `cyrillic'. Changed
+ 1993 to 1994.
+
+ * slides.dtx: Removed declared option `twoside' (Suggested by
+ Joachim Schrod).
+
+1994-03-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * makeindx.dtx (subsection{Makeidx}):
+ Changed \newcommand to \providecommand for \seename.
+
+1994-03-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latexsym.dtx:
+ Changed \typeout's to \wlog's
+
+ * newlfont.dtx (section{The Code}):
+ Define \cal and \mit to behave as in NFSS1
+
+1994-03-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltvers.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+ * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+ * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from
+ latex.dtx
+
+1994-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * testpage.tex: Changed question asking for paper type so that
+ the answer must now include `paper'. Added question for
+ doublesided printing.
+
+1994-03-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx 0.1f \@irsbox Replaced a missing \else
+
+1994-03-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxdoc.dtx:
+ Added driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+ Set counter StandardModuleDepth to 1, since all ltx documentation
+ needs that setting anyway.
+
+1994-03-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx 0.3a "General" Remove need for driver file
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Remove need for drv file
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Add 2ekernel module
+
+1994-03-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Added 2ekernel conditional to generation of
+ ltboxes.ltx from ltboxes.dtx since this is now necessary
+ (cf. last change to ltboxes.dtx).
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Added 2ekernel conditional to generation of
+ latex2e.ltx from docclass.dtx since this is now necessary
+ (cf. last change to docclass.dtx).
+
+ * unpack2e.ins: Removed generation of latex2e.drv and
+ dircheck.drv.
+
+ * slides.dst: Renamed sfontdef.* to sfonts.*.
+
+ * unpacked.l2e: Removed *.drv files (no longer generated)
+ Renamed slides .ltx files to .def.
+
+ * slides.fdd: Removed extra pair of curly braces after
+ DeclareFontFamily. Corrected Documentation to refer to
+ sfonts.*, not to sfontdef.*.
+
+ * slides.dtx: Renamed files sfontdef.* to sfonts.*.
+
+ * letter.dtx: Moved documentation driver further up, so that
+ "latex2e letter.dtx" works.
+
+ * letter.dst: Removed generation of .drv file, changed typeout
+ message that explains how to typeset the documentation.
+
+ * slides.dtx: Added forgotten changes entry for last change.
+
+ * slides.dtx: Renamed files slides.ltx and sfontdef.ltx to
+ slides.def and sfontdef.def.
+
+ * slides.fdd: Moved driver further up so that no extra .drv
+ file is needed, but "latex2e slides.fdd" works.
+
+ * slides.dst: Updated copyright message to show 1994. Removed
+ generation of .drv files. Renamed .ltx --> .def
+
+ * slides.dtx: Moved driver further up so that no extra .drv
+ file is needed, but "latex2e slides.dtx" works. Removed
+ makeidx class option, as it is now a proper package. Changed
+ leqno class option t oread leqno.clo. Added fleqn class
+ option (reads fleqn.clo).
+1994-03-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltdirchk.dtx 0.2k "General" Add unstripped module, so that
+ dircheck.dtx may be used with initex
+
+1994-03-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * unpack2e.ins:
+ Removed unnecessary .drv generation (some are still there)
+ Added the the WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY message to some preambles.
+
+ * oldgerm.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+ Removed extra pair of braces after \DeclareFontFamily which has
+ only three arguments not four.
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx:
+ Removed surplus \ShortVerb setting.
+
+ * lhyphen.dtx:
+ Corrected typo in documentation.
+
+1994-02-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+1994-02-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * latint.dtx:
+ Removed decl of \@unused since defined earlier.
+ Removed decl of \typeout.
+ Removed decl of \@tempdima \@tempdimb.
+
+1994-02-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * eufrak.dtx:
+ Changed driver code slightly.
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * euscript.dtx:
+ Changed driver code slightly.
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * exscale.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * nfssfont.dtx:
+ Added to the distribution.
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * docstrip.dtx (section{Producing the documentation}):
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * oldlfont.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * latexsym.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * newlfont.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * pandora.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * preload.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * lhyphen.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * fontdef.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * fontcmds.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+1994-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org>
+
+ * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}):
+ Removed catcode settings from \try@load@fontshape and
+ \DeclareFontShape and placed them into a separate macro called
+ \nfss@catcodes so that it is easier to maintain special
+ requirements for packages that make certain characters active.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fef1a8e6a28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4a926edf9cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1872 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: clsguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+
+\title{\LaTeXe~for class and package writers}
+
+\author{Copyright \copyright~1995--2003 The \LaTeX3 Project\\
+ All rights reserved}
+
+\date{9 December 2003}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This document is an introduction to writing classes and packages for
+\LaTeX{}, with special attention given to upgrading existing
+\LaTeX~2.09 packages to \LaTeXe{}. The latter subject is also
+covered in an article by Johannes Braams published in TUGboat~15.3.
+
+\subsection{Writing classes and packages for \LaTeXe}
+
+\LaTeX{} is a document preparation system that enables the document
+writer to concentrate on the contents of their text, without bothering
+too much about the formatting of it. For example, chapters are
+indicated by |\chapter{<title>}| rather than by selecting 18pt bold.
+
+The file that contains the information about how to turn logical
+structure (like `|\chapter|') into formatting (like `18pt bold ragged
+right') is a \emph{document class}. In addition, some features (such
+as colour or included graphics) are independent of the document class
+and these are contained in \emph{packages}.
+
+One of the largest differences between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in
+the commands used to write packages and classes. In \LaTeX~2.09,
+there was very little support for writing |.sty| files, and so writers
+had to resort to using low-level commands.
+
+\LaTeXe{} provides high-level commands for structuring packages.
+It is also much easier to build classes and packages on top of each
+other, for example writing a local technical report class |cetechr|
+(for the Chemical Engineering department) based on |article|.
+
+\subsection{Overview}
+
+This document contains an overview of how to write classes and
+packages for \LaTeX{}. It does \emph{not} introduce all of the
+commands necessary to write packages: these can be found in either
+\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. But it does describe the new
+commands for structuring classes and packages.
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:general}] contains some general advice about
+ writing classes and packages. It describes the difference between
+ classes and packages, the command naming conventions, the use of
+ |doc| and |docstrip|, how \TeX's primitive file and box commands
+ interact with \LaTeX{}. It also contains some hints about general
+ \LaTeX{} style.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:structure}] describes the structure of classes
+ and packages. This includes building classes and packages on top of
+ other classes and packages, declaring options and declaring
+ commands. It also contains example classes.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] lists the new class and package
+ commands.
+
+ \item[Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade}] gives detailed advice on how to
+ upgrade existing \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages to \LaTeXe{}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Further information}
+
+For a general introduction to \LaTeX{}, including the new features of
+\LaTeXe{}, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}
+by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}.
+
+A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX{}, and an
+overview of more than 150 packages, is to be found in
+\emph{\LaTeXcomp} by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
+Samarin~\cite{A-W:GMS94}.
+
+The \LaTeX{} system is based on \TeX{}, which is
+described in \emph{The \TeX book} by Donald E.~Knuth~\cite{A-W:DEK91}.
+
+There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy
+of \LaTeX{}. A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each
+six-monthly release of \LaTeX{}, and is found in the files
+|ltnews*.tex|. The author's guide \emph{\usrguide} describes the new
+\LaTeX{} document features; it is in |usrguide.tex|. The guide
+\emph{\fntguide} describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for
+class- and package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Configuring
+\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in
+\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on
+modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in
+\texttt{modguide.tex}.
+
+We are gradually turning the source code for \LaTeX{} into a \LaTeX{}
+document \emph{\sourcecode}. This document includes an index of
+\LaTeX{} commands and can be typeset from |source2e.tex|.
+
+For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your
+local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group.
+Here are some useful addresses.
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+ \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239, Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\
+ Fax:~+1~209~561~4584 \ Email: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org}
+
+ UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB, UK\\
+ Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\subsection{Policy on standard classes}
+
+Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes
+are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely,
+that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and
+asking us to modify them.
+
+There are several reasons why we should not make such changes to these
+files.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was
+ intended when these classes were designed.
+\item
+ It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes'
+ because many people will be relying on them.
+\end{itemize}
+
+We have therefore decided not to even consider making such
+modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision. This does
+not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the
+design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority
+than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{}
+cannot be changed.
+
+We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of
+packages that can be used to enhance these classes. So your first
+thought when you consider such a deficiency will, we hope, be ``what
+can I do to improve this?''
+
+Similar considerations apply to those parts of the kernel that are
+implementing design decisions, many of which should be left to the
+class file but are not in the current system. We realise that in such
+cases it is much more difficult for you to rectify the problem
+yourself but it is also the case that making such changes in the
+kernel would probably be a major project for us; therefore such
+enhancements will have to wait for \LaTeX3.
+
+\section{Writing classes and packages}
+\label{Sec:writing}
+
+This section covers some general points concerned with writing
+\LaTeX{} classes and packages.
+
+
+\subsection{Old versions}
+
+If you are upgrading an existing \LaTeX~2.09 style file then we
+recommend freezing the 2.09 version and no longer maintaining it.
+Experience with the various dialects of \LaTeX{} which existed in the
+early 1990's suggests that maintaining packages for different versions
+of \LaTeX{} is almost impossible. It will, of course, be necessary
+for some organisations to maintain both versions in parallel for some
+time but this is not essential for those packages and classes
+supported by individuals: they should support only the new standard
+\LaTeXe{}, not obsolete versions of \LaTeX{}.
+
+
+\subsection{Using `docstrip' and `doc'}
+
+If you are going to write a large class or package for \LaTeX{} then
+you should consider using the |doc| software which comes with
+\LaTeX{}.
+\LaTeX{} classes and packages written using this can be
+processed in two ways: they can be run through \LaTeX{}, to produce
+documentation; and they can be processed with |docstrip|, to produce
+the |.cls| or |.sty| file.
+
+The |doc| software can automatically generate indexes of definitions,
+indexes of command use, and change-log lists. It is very useful for
+maintaining and documenting large \TeX{} sources.
+
+The documented sources of the \LaTeX{} kernel itself, and of the
+standard classes, etc, are |doc| documents; they are in the |.dtx|
+files in the distribution. You can, in fact, typeset the source code
+of the kernel as one long document, complete with index, by running
+\LaTeX{} on |source2e.tex|.
+
+For more information on |doc| and |docstrip|, consult the files
+|docstrip.dtx|, |doc.dtx|, and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. For examples of its
+use, look at the |.dtx| files.
+
+\subsection{Is it a class or a package?}
+\label{Sec:classorpkg}
+
+The first thing to do when you want to put some new \LaTeX{} commands
+in a file is to decide whether it should be a \emph{document class} or a
+\emph{package}. The rule of thumb is:
+\begin{quote}
+ If the commands could be used with any document class, then make
+ them a package; and if not, then make them a class.
+\end{quote}
+
+There are two major types of class: those like |article|, |report| or
+|letter|, which are free-standing; and those which are extensions or
+variations of other classes---for example, the |proc| document class,
+which is built on the |article| document class.
+
+Thus, a company might have a local |ownlet| class for printing letters
+with their own headed note-paper. Such a class would build on top of
+the existing |letter| class but it cannot be used with any other
+document class, so we have |ownlet.cls| rather than |ownlet.sty|.
+
+The |graphics| package, in contrast, provides commands for including
+images into a \LaTeX{} document. Since these commands can be used
+with any document class, we have |graphics.sty| rather than
+|graphics.cls|.
+
+
+\subsection{Command names}
+
+\LaTeX{} has three types of command.
+
+There are the author commands, such as |\section|, |\emph| and
+|\times|: most of these have short names, all in lower case.
+
+There are also the class and package writer commands:
+most of these have long mixed-case names such as the following.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \InputIfFileExists \RequirePackage \PassOptionsToClass
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Finally, there are the internal commands used in the \LaTeX{}
+implementation, such as |\@tempcnta|, |\@ifnextchar| and |\@eha|:
+most of these commands contain |@| in their name, which means they
+cannot be used in documents, only in class and package files.
+
+Unfortunately, for historical reasons the distinction between these
+commands is often blurred. For example, |\hbox| is an internal
+command which should only be used in the \LaTeX{} kernel, whereas
+|\m@ne| is the constant $-1$ and could have been |\MinusOne|.
+
+However, this rule of thumb is still useful: if a command has |@| in
+its name then it is not part of the supported \LaTeX{} language---and
+its behaviour may change in future releases! If a command is
+mixed-case, or is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}, then you can rely on
+future releases of \LaTeXe{} supporting the command.
+
+\subsection{Box commands and colour}
+\label{Sec:colour}
+
+Even if you do not intend to use colour in your own documents, by
+taking note of the points in this section you can ensure that your
+class or package is compatible with the |color| package. This may
+benefit people using your class or package who have access to colour
+printers.
+
+The simplest way to ensure `colour safety' is to always use \LaTeX{}
+box commands rather than \TeX{} primitives, that is use |\sbox| rather
+than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox| and |\parbox| or
+the |minipage| environment rather than |\vbox|.
+The \LaTeX{} box commands have new options which mean that they are now
+as powerful as the \TeX{} primitives.
+
+As an example of what can go wrong, consider that in
+|{\ttfamily <text>}|
+the font is restored just \emph{before} the |}|, whereas in the
+similar looking construction
+|{\color{green} <text>}|
+the colour is restored just \emph{after} the final |}|. Normally this
+distinction does not matter at all; but consider a primitive \TeX{}
+box assignment such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\color{green} <text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+Now the colour-restore occurs after the |}| and so is \emph{not}
+stored in the box. Exactly what bad effects this can have depends on
+how colour is implemented: it can range from getting the wrong
+colours in the rest of the document, to causing errors in the
+dvi-driver used to print the document.
+
+Also of interest is the command |\normalcolor|. This is
+normally just |\relax| (i.e., does nothing)
+but you can use it rather like |\normalfont| to
+set regions of the page such as captions or section headings to the
+`main document colour'.
+
+
+\subsection{Defining text and math characters}
+\label{Sec:chars}
+
+Because \LaTeXe{} supports different encodings, definitions of commands
+for producing symbols, accents, composite glyphs, etc.\ must be
+defined using the commands provided for this purpose and described in
+\emph{\fntguide}. This part of the system is still under development
+so such tasks should be undertaken with great caution.
+
+Also, |\DeclareRobustCommand| should be used for encoding-independent
+commands of this type.
+
+Note that it is no longer possible to refer to the math font set-up
+outside math mode: for example, neither |\textfont 1| nor
+|\scriptfont 2| are guaranteed to be defined in other modes.
+
+
+\subsection{General style}
+\label{Sec:general}
+
+The new system provides many commands designed to help you produce
+well-structured class and package files that are both robust and
+portable. This section outlines some ways to make intelligent use of
+these.
+
+\subsubsection{Loading other files}
+\label{Sec:loading}
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+\LaTeX{} provides these commands:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClass \LoadClassWithOptions
+ \RequirePackage \RequirePackageWithOptions
+\end{verbatim}
+for using classes or packages inside other classes or packages. We
+recommend strongly that you use them, rather than the primitive
+|\input| command, for a number of reasons.
+
+Files loaded with |\input <filename>| will not be listed in the
+|\listfiles| list.
+
+If a package is always loaded with |\RequirePackage...| or |\usepackage|
+then, even if its loading is requested several times, it will be
+loaded only once. By contrast, if it is loaded with |\input| then it
+can be loaded more than once; such an extra loading may waste time and
+memory and it may produce strange results.
+
+If a package provides option-processing then, again, strange results
+are possible if the package is |\input| rather than loaded by means of
+|\usepackage| or |\RequirePackage...|.
+
+If the package |foo.sty| loads the package |baz.sty| by use of
+|\input baz.sty| then the user will get a warning:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ LaTeX Warning: You have requested package `foo',
+ but the package provides `baz'.
+\end{verbatim}
+Thus, for several reasons, using |\input| to load packages is not a
+good idea.
+
+Unfortunately, if you are upgrading the file |myclass.sty| to a class
+file then you have to make sure that any old files which contain
+|\input myclass.sty| still work.
+
+This was also true for the standard classes (|article|, |book| and
+|report|), since a lot of existing \LaTeX~2.09 document styles contain
+|\input article.sty|. The approach which we use to solve this is
+to provide minimal files |article.sty|, |book.sty| and |report.sty|,
+which simply load the appropriate class files.
+
+For example, |article.sty| contains just the following lines:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \@obsoletefile{article.cls}{article.sty}
+ \LoadClass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+You may wish to do the same or, if you think that it is safe to do so,
+you may decide to just remove |myclass.sty|.
+
+\subsubsection{Make it robust}
+
+We consider it good practice, when writing packages and classes, to use
+\LaTeX{} commands as much as possible.
+
+Thus, instead of using |\def...| we recommend using one of
+|\newcommand|, |\renewcommand| or |\providecommand|; |\CheckCommand| is
+also useful. Doing this makes
+it less likely that you will inadvertently redefine a command, giving
+unexpected results.
+
+When you define an environment, use |\newenvironment| or
+|\renewenvironment| instead |\def\foo{...}| and |\def\endfoo{...}|.
+
+If you need to set or change the value of a \m{dimen} or \m{skip}
+register, use |\setlength|.
+
+To manipulate boxes, use \LaTeX{} commands such as |\sbox|,
+|\mbox| and |\parbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\hbox| and |\vbox|.
+
+Use |\PackageError|, |\PackageWarning| or |\PackageInfo| (or the
+equivalent class commands) rather than |\@latexerr|, |\@warning| or
+|\wlog|.
+
+It is still possible to declare options by defining |\ds@<option>| and
+calling |\@options|; but we recommend the |\DeclareOption| and
+|\ProcessOptions| commands instead. These are more powerful and use
+less memory. So rather than using:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5pt}
+ \@options
+\end{verbatim}
+you should use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{5pt}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The advantage of this kind of practice is that your code is more
+readable and, more important, that it is less likely to break when
+used with future versions of \LaTeX{}.
+
+\subsubsection{Make it portable}
+
+It is also sensible to make your files are as portable as possible. To
+ensure this; they should contain only visible 7-bit text; and the
+filenames should contain at most eight characters (plus the three
+letter extension). Also, of course, it \textbf{must not} have the
+same name as a file in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution, however
+similar its contents may be to one of these files.
+
+It is also useful if local classes or packages have a common prefix,
+for example the University of Nowhere classes might begin with |unw|.
+This helps to avoid every University having its own thesis class, all
+called |thesis.cls|.
+
+If you rely on some features of the \LaTeX{} kernel, or on a package,
+please specify the release-date you need. For example, the package
+error commands were introduced in the June 1994 release so, if you use
+them then you should put:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Useful hooks}
+
+Some packages and document styles had to redefine the command
+|\document| or |\enddocument| to achieve their goal. This is no
+longer necessary. You can now use the `hooks' |\AtBeginDocument| and
+|\AtEndDocument| (see Section~\ref{Sec:delays}). Again, using these
+hooks makes it less likely that your code breaks with future versions
+of \LaTeX{}. It also makes it more likely that your package can work
+together with someone else's.
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/12/01}
+However, note that code in the |\AtBeginDocument| hook is part of the
+preamble. Thus there are restrictions on what can be put there; in
+particular, no typesetting can be done.
+
+\section{The structure of a class or package}
+\label{Sec:structure}
+
+\LaTeXe{} classes and packages have more structure than \LaTeX~2.09
+style files did. The outline of a class or package file is:
+\begin{description}
+\item[Identification] The file says that it is a \LaTeXe{} package or
+ class, and gives a short description of itself.
+\item[Preliminary declarations]
+ Here the file declares some commands and can also load
+ other files. Usually these commands will be just those needed for
+ the code used in the declared options.
+\item[Options] The file declares and processes its options.
+\item[More declarations] This is where the file does most of its work:
+ declaring new variables, commands and fonts; and loading other files.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Identification}
+
+The first thing a class or package file does is identify itself.
+Package files do this as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesPackage{<package>}[<date> <other information>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesPackage{latexsym}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX package]
+\end{verbatim}
+Class files do this as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{<class-name>}[<date> <other information>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX class]
+\end{verbatim}
+\NEWdescription{1998/06/19}
+The \m{date} should be given in the form `\textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}' and
+must be present if the optional argument is used (this is also true
+for the |\NeedsTeXFormat| command).
+Any derivation from this syntax will result in low-level \TeX{}
+errors---the commands expect a valid syntax to speed up the daily
+usage of the package or class and make no provision for the case that
+the developer made a mistake!
+
+This date is checked whenever a user specifies a date in their
+|\documentclass| or |\usepackage| command. For example, if you wrote:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass{article}[1995/12/23]
+\end{verbatim}
+then users at a different location
+would get a warning that their copy of |article| was out of
+date.
+
+The description of a class is displayed when the class is used. The
+description of a package is put into the log file. These descriptions
+are also displayed by the |\listfiles| command. The phrase
+\texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used in the identification
+banner of any file other than those in the standard \LaTeX{}
+distribution.
+
+
+\subsection{Using classes and packages}
+
+The first major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 style files and
+\LaTeXe{} packages and classes is that \LaTeXe{} supports
+\emph{modularity}, in the sense of building files from small
+building-blocks rather than using large single files.
+
+A \LaTeX{} package or class can load a package as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \RequirePackage[<options>]{<package>}[<date>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+This command has the same syntax as the author command |\usepackage|.
+It allows packages or classes to use features provided by other
+packages. For example, by loading the |ifthen| package, a package
+writer can use the `if\dots then\dots else\dots' commands provided
+by that package.
+
+A \LaTeX{} class can load one other class as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClass[<options>]{<class-name>}[<date>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+This command has the same syntax as the author command |\documentclass|.
+It allows classes to be based on the syntax and appearance of another
+class. For example, by loading the |article| class, a class writer
+only has to change the bits of |article| they don't like, rather than
+writing a new class from scratch.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+The following commands can be used in the common case that you want to
+simply load a class or package file with exactly those options that
+are being used by the current class.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClassWithOptions{<class-name>}[<date>]
+ \RequirePackageWithOptions{<package>}[<date>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+ \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Declaring options}
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+The other major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 styles and \LaTeXe{}
+packages and classes is in option handling. Packages and classes can
+now declare options and these can be specified by authors; for
+example, the |twocolumn| option is declared by the |article| class.
+Note that the name of an option should contain only those characters
+allowed in a `\LaTeX{} name'; in particular it must not contain any
+control sequences.
+
+An option is declared as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{<option>}{<code>}
+\end{verbatim}
+For example, the |dvips| option (slightly simplified)
+to the |graphics| package is implemented as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{dvips}{\input{dvips.def}}
+\end{verbatim}
+This means that when an author writes |\usepackage[dvips]{graphics}|,
+the file |dvips.def| is loaded. As another example, the |a4paper|
+option is declared in the |article| class to set the |\paperheight|
+and |\paperwidth| lengths:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{a4paper}{%
+ \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
+ \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+Sometimes a user will request an option which the class
+or package has not explicitly declared. By default this will produce
+a warning (for classes) or error (for packages); this behaviour
+can be altered as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption*{<code>}
+\end{verbatim}
+For example, to make the package |fred| produce a warning rather than
+an error for unknown options, you could specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption*{%
+ \PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown option `\CurrentOption'}%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+Then, if an author writes |\usepackage[foo]{fred}|, they will get a
+warning \texttt{Package fred Warning: Unknown option `foo'.} As
+another example, the |fontenc| package tries to load a file
+|<ENC>enc.def| whenever the \m{ENC} option is used. This
+can be done by writing:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption*{%
+ \input{\CurrentOption enc.def}%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+It is possible to pass options on to another package or class, using
+the command |\PassOptionsToPackage| or |\PassOptionsToClass| (note
+that this is a specialised operation that works only for option
+names). For example, to pass every unknown option on to the |article|
+class, you can use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption*{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+If you do this then you should make sure you load the class at some
+later point, otherwise the options will never be processed!
+
+So far, we have explained only how to declare options, not how to
+execute them. To process the options with which the file was called,
+you should use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+This executes the \m{code} for each option that was both specified and
+declared (see Section~\ref{Sec:commands.options} for details of how
+this is done).
+
+For example, if the |jane| package file contains:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{foo}{\typeout{Saw foo.}}
+ \DeclareOption{baz}{\typeout{Saw baz.}}
+ \DeclareOption*{\typeout{What's \CurrentOption?}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+and an author writes |\usepackage[foo,bar]{jane}|, then they will see
+the messages \texttt{Saw foo.} and \texttt{What's bar?}
+
+\subsection{A minimal class file}
+
+Most of the work of a class or package is in defining new commands, or
+changing the appearance of documents. This is done in the body of the
+package, using commands such as |\newcommand| or |\setlength|.
+
+\LaTeXe{} provides several new commands to help class and package
+writers; these are described in detail in Section~\ref{Sec:commands}.
+
+There are four things that every class file \emph{must} contain: these
+are a definition of |\normalsize|, values for |\textwidth| and
+|\textheight| and a specification for page-numbering. So a minimal
+document class file\footnote {This class is now in the standard
+distribution, as \texttt{minimal.cls}.} looks like this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{minimal}[1995/10/30 Standard LaTeX minimal class]
+ \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}\selectfont}
+ \setlength{\textwidth}{6.5in}
+ \setlength{\textheight}{8in}
+ \pagenumbering{arabic} % needed even though this class will
+ % not show page numbers
+\end{verbatim}
+However, this class file will not support footnotes, marginals,
+floats, etc., nor will it provide any of the 2-letter font commands
+such as |\rm|; thus most classes will contain more than this minimum!
+
+\subsection{Example: a local letter class}
+
+A company may have its own letter class, for setting letters in the
+company style. This section shows a simple implementation of such a
+class, although a real class would need more structure.
+
+The class begins by announcing itself as |neplet.cls|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{neplet}[1995/04/01 NonExistent Press letter class]
+\end{verbatim}
+Then this next bit passes any options on to the |letter| class, which
+is loaded with the |a4paper| option.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{letter}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+ \LoadClass[a4paper]{letter}
+\end{verbatim}
+In order to use the company letter head, it redefines the
+|firstpage| page style: this is the page style that is used on
+the first page of letters.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\ps@firstpage}{%
+ \renewcommand{\@oddhead}{<letterhead goes here>}%
+ \renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{<letterfoot goes here>}%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+And that's it!
+
+\subsection{Example: a newsletter class}
+
+A simple newsletter can be typeset with \LaTeX{}, using a variant of the
+|article| class.
+The class begins by announcing itself as |smplnews.cls|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{smplnews}[1995/04/01 The Simple News newsletter class]
+
+ \newcommand{\headlinecolor}{\normalcolor}
+\end{verbatim}
+It passes most specified options on to the |article| class: apart from
+the |onecolumn| option, which is switched off, and the |green| option,
+which sets the headline in green.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\OptionNotUsed}
+ \DeclareOption{green}{\renewcommand{\headlinecolor}{\color{green}}}
+
+ \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+It then loads the class |article| with the option |twocolumn|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+Since the newsletter is to be printed in colour, it now loads the
+|color| package. The class does not specify a device driver option
+since this should be specified by the user of the |smplnews| class.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \RequirePackage{color}
+\end{verbatim}
+The class then redefines |\maketitle| to produce the title in 72pt
+Helvetica bold oblique, in the appropriate colour.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\maketitle}{%
+ \twocolumn[%
+ \fontsize{72}{80}\fontfamily{phv}\fontseries{b}%
+ \fontshape{sl}\selectfont\headlinecolor
+ \@title
+ ]%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+It redefines |\section| and switches off section numbering.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\section}{%
+ \@startsection
+ {section}{1}{0pt}{-1.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}%
+ {1ex plus .2ex}{\large\sffamily\slshape\headlinecolor}%
+ }
+
+ \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
+\end{verbatim}
+It also sets the three essential things.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{9}{10}\selectfont}
+ \setlength{\textwidth}{17.5cm}
+ \setlength{\textheight}{25cm}
+\end{verbatim}
+In practice, a class would need more than this: it would provide
+commands for issue numbers, authors of articles, page styles and so
+on; but this skeleton gives a start. The |ltnews| class file is not
+much more complex than this one.
+
+\section{Commands for class and package writers}
+\label{Sec:commands}
+
+This section describes briefly each of the new commands for class and
+package writers. To find out about other aspects of the new system,
+you should also read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and
+\emph{\usrguide}.
+
+\subsection{Identification}
+
+The first group of commands discussed here are those used
+to identify your class or package file.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\NeedsTeXFormat| \arg{format-name} \oarg{release-date}
+\end{decl}
+This command tells \TeX{} that this file should be processed using a
+format with name \m{format-name}. You can use the optional argument
+\m{release-date} to further specify the earliest release date of the
+format that is needed. When the release date of the format is older
+than the one specified a warning will be generated. The standard
+\m{format-name} is \texttt{LaTeX2e}. The date, if present, must be in
+the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\ProvidesClass| \arg{class-name} \oarg{release-info} \\
+|\ProvidesPackage| \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+This declares that the current file contains the definitions for the
+document class \m{class-name} or package \m{package-name}.
+
+The optional \m{release-info}, if used, must contain:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item the release date of
+ this version of the file, in the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd};
+\item optionally followed by a space and a short description, possibly
+ including a version number.
+\end{itemize}
+The above syntax must be followed exactly so that this information
+can be used by |\LoadClass| or |\documentclass| (for classes) or
+|\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| (for packages) to test that the
+release is not too old.
+
+The whole of this \m{release-info} information is displayed by
+|\listfiles| and should therefore not be too long.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX class]
+ \ProvidesPackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX package]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ProvidesFile| \arg{file-name} \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+This is similar to the two previous commands except that here the full
+filename, including the extension, must be given. It is used for
+declaring any files other than main class and package files.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \ProvidesFile{T1enc.def}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX file]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note that the phrase \texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used
+in the identification banner of any file other than those in the
+standard \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+\subsection{Loading files}
+\label{Sec:loadf}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+This group of commands can be used to create your own document class or
+package by building on existing classes or packages.
+\begin{decl}
+ |\RequirePackage| \oarg{options-list} \arg{package-name}
+ \oarg{release-info}\\
+ |\RequirePackageWithOptions| \arg{package-name}
+ \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+Packages and classes should use these commands to load other packages.
+
+The use of |\RequirePackage| is the same as the author command
+|\usepackage|.
+
+Examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01]
+ \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\LoadClass| \oarg{options-list} \arg{class-name}
+ \oarg{release-info}\\
+ |\LoadClassWithOptions| \arg{class-name}
+ \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+These commands are for use \emph{only} in class files, they cannot be
+used in packages files;
+they can be used at most once within a class file.
+
+The use of|\LoadClass| is the same as
+the use of |\documentclass| to load a class file.
+
+Examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClass{article}[1994/06/01]
+ \LoadClassWithOptions{article}[1995/12/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+The two |WithOptions| versions simply load the class (or package) file
+with exactly those options that are being used by the current file
+(class or package). See below, in \ref{Sec:opmove}, for further
+discussion of their use.
+
+
+\subsection{Option declaration}
+\label{Sec:commands.options.dec}
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+The following commands deal with the declaration and handling of
+options to document classes and packages. Every option name must be a
+`\LaTeX{} name'.
+
+There are some commands designed especially for use within the
+\m{code} argument of these commands (see below).
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareOption| \arg{option-name} \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+This makes \m{option-name} a `declared option' of the class or package
+in which it is put.
+
+The \m{code} argument contains the code to be executed if that option
+is specified for the class or package; it can contain any valid
+\LaTeXe{} construct.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareOption*| \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+This declares the \m{code} to be executed for every option which is
+specified for, but otherwise not explicitly declared by, the class or
+package; this code is called the `default option code' and it can
+contain any valid \LaTeXe{} construct.
+
+If a class file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, all
+specified but undeclared options for that class will be silently
+passed to all packages (as will the specified and declared options for
+that class).
+
+If a package file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, each
+specified but undeclared option for that package will produce an error.
+
+
+\subsection{Commands within option code}
+\label{Sec:within.code}
+
+These two commands can be used only within the \m{code} argument of
+either |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|. Other commands commonly
+used within these arguments can be found in the next few subsections.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\CurrentOption|
+\end{decl}
+This expands to the name of the current option.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\OptionNotUsed|
+\end{decl}
+This causes the current option to
+be added to the list of `unused options'.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
+ You can now include hash marks (\texttt{\#}) within these \m{code}
+ arguments without special treatment (formerly, it had been
+ necessary to double them).
+
+\subsection{Moving options around}
+\label{Sec:opmove}
+
+These two commands are also very useful within the \m{code} argument
+of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|:
+\begin{decl}
+ |\PassOptionsToPackage| \arg{options-list} \arg{package-name}\\
+ |\PassOptionsToClass| \arg{options-list} \arg{class-name}
+\end{decl}
+The command |\PassOptionsToPackage| passes the option names in
+\m{options-list} to package \m{package-name}.
+This means that it adds the \m{option-list} to the
+list of options used by any future |\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage|
+command for package \m{package-name}.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{foo,bar}{fred}
+ \RequirePackage[baz]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+is the same as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \RequirePackage[foo,bar,baz]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Similarly, |\PassOptionsToClass| may be used in a class file to pass
+options to another class to be loaded with |\LoadClass|.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+The effects and use of these two commands should be contrasted with
+those of the following two (documented above, in \ref{Sec:loadf}):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClassWithOptions
+ \RequirePackageWithOptions
+\end{verbatim}
+The command|\RequirePackageWithOptions| is similar to
+|\RequirePackage|, but it always loads the required package with
+exactly the same option list as that being used by the current class
+or package, rather than with any option explicitly supplied or passed
+on by |\PassOptionsToPackage|.
+
+The main purpose of |\LoadClassWithOptions| is to allow one class to
+simply build on another, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+This should be compared with the slightly different construction
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+ \LoadClass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+As used above, the effects are more or less the same, but the first is
+a lot less to type; also the |\LoadClassWithOptions| method runs
+slightly quicker.
+
+If, however, the class declares options of its own then
+the two constructions are different. Compare, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+ \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue}
+ \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+ \LoadClass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+In the first example, the \textsf{article} class will be loaded with
+option |landscape| precisely when the current class is called with
+this option. By contrast, in the second example it will never be
+called with option \texttt{landscape} as in that case \textsf{article}
+is passed options only by the default option handler, but this handler
+is not used for |landscape| because that option is explicitly
+declared.
+
+\subsection{Delaying code}
+\label{Sec:delays}
+
+These first two commands are also intended primarily for use within
+the \m{code} argument of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\AtEndOfClass| \arg{code}\\
+ |\AtEndOfPackage| \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+These commands declare \m{code} that is saved away internally and then
+executed after processing the whole of the current class or package
+file.
+
+Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the
+arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their
+declarations.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\AtBeginDocument| \arg{code}\\
+ |\AtEndDocument| \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+These commands declare \m{code} to be saved internally and executed
+while \LaTeX{} is executing |\begin{document}| or |\end{document}|.
+
+The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtBeginDocument| is
+executed near the end of the |\begin{document}| code, \emph{after} the
+font selection tables have been set up. It is therefore a useful
+place to put code which needs to be executed after everything has been
+prepared for typesetting and when the normal font for the document is
+the current font.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+The |\AtBeginDocument| hook should not be used for code that does any
+typesetting since the typeset result would be unpredictable.
+
+The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtEndDocument| is
+executed at the beginning of the |\end{document}| code,
+\emph{before} the final page is finished and before any leftover
+floating environments are processed. If some of the \m{code} is to be
+executed after these two processes, you should include a |\clearpage|
+at the appropriate point in \m{code}.
+
+Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the
+arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their
+declarations.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\AtBeginDvi| \arg{specials}
+\end{decl}
+These commands save in a box register things which are written to the
+|.dvi| file at the beginning of the `shipout' of the first page of the
+document.
+
+This should not be used for anything that will add any typeset
+material to the |.dvi| file.
+
+Repeated use of this command is permitted.
+
+
+\subsection{Option processing}
+\label{Sec:commands.options}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ProcessOptions|
+\end{decl}
+This command executes the \m{code} for each selected option.
+
+We shall first describe how |\ProcessOptions| works in a package file,
+and then how this differs in a class file.
+
+To understand in detail what |\ProcessOptions| does in a package file,
+you have to know the difference between \emph{local} and \emph{global}
+options.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Local options} are those which have been explicitly
+ specified for this particular package in the \m{options} argument of
+ any of these:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\PassOptionsToPackage{<options>}| \ |\usepackage[<options>]|\\
+ |\RequirePackage[<options>]|
+\end{quote}
+\item \textbf{Global options} are any other options that are specified
+ by the author in the \m{options} argument of
+ |\documentclass[<options>]|.
+\end{itemize}
+For example, suppose that a document begins:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[german,twocolumn]{article}
+ \usepackage{gerhardt}
+\end{verbatim}
+whilst package |gerhardt| calls package |fred| with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{german,dvips,a4paper}{fred}
+ \RequirePackage[errorshow]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+then:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item |fred|'s local options are |german|, |dvips|, |a4paper|
+ and |errorshow|;
+\item |fred|'s only global option is |twocolumn|.
+\end{itemize}
+
+When |\ProcessOptions| is called, the following happen.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \emph{First}, for each option so far declared in |fred.sty|
+ by |\DeclareOption|, it looks to see if that option is either a
+ global or a local option for |fred|: if it is then the corresponding
+ code is executed.
+
+ This is done in the order in which these options
+ were declared in |fred.sty|.
+\item \emph{Then}, for each remaining \emph{local} option, the command
+ |\ds@<option>| is executed if it has been defined somewhere (other
+ than by a |\DeclareOption|); otherwise, the `default option code' is
+ executed. If no default option code has been declared then an error
+ message is produced.
+
+ This is done in the order in which these
+ options were specified.
+\end{itemize}
+Throughout this process, the system ensures that the code declared for
+an option is executed at most once.
+
+Returning to the example, if |fred.sty| contains:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOption{dvips}{\typeout{DVIPS}}
+ \DeclareOption{german}{\typeout{GERMAN}}
+ \DeclareOption{french}{\typeout{FRENCH}}
+ \DeclareOption*{\PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown `\CurrentOption'}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+then the result of processing this document will be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ DVIPS
+ GERMAN
+ Package fred Warning: Unknown `a4paper'.
+ Package fred Warning: Unknown `errorshow'.
+\end{verbatim}
+Note the following:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the code for the |dvips| option is executed before that for the
+ |german| option, because that is the order in which they are declared
+ in |fred.sty|;
+\item the code for the |german| option is executed only once, when the
+ declared options are being processed;
+\item the |a4paper| and |errorshow| options produce the warning from
+ the code declared by |\DeclareOption*| (in the order in which they
+ were specified), whilst the |twocolumn| option does not: this is
+ because |twocolumn| is a global option.
+\end{itemize}
+
+In a class file, |\ProcessOptions| works in the same way, except
+that: \emph{all} options are local; and the default value for
+|\DeclareOption*| is |\OptionNotUsed| rather than an error.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+Note that, because |\ProcessOptions| has a |*|-form, it is wise to
+follow the non-star form with |\relax|, as in the previous examples,
+since this prevents unnecessary look ahead and possibly misleading
+error messages being issued.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ProcessOptions*|
+ |\@options|
+\end{decl}
+This is like |\ProcessOptions| but it executes the options in the
+order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order of
+declaration in the class or package. For a package this means that the
+global options are processed first.
+
+The |\@options| command from \LaTeX~2.09 has been made equivalent to
+this in order to ease the task of updating old document styles to
+\LaTeXe{} class files.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ExecuteOptions| \arg{options-list}
+\end{decl}
+
+For each option in the \m{options-list}, in order,
+this command simply executes the command
+|\ds@<option>| (if this command is not defined, then that option is
+silently ignored).
+
+It can be used to provide a `default option list' just before
+|\ProcessOptions|. For example, suppose that in a class file you want
+to set up the default design to be: two-sided printing; 11pt fonts;
+in two columns. Then it could specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \ExecuteOptions{11pt,twoside,twocolumn}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Safe file commands}
+
+These commands deal with file input; they ensure that the non-existence
+of a requested file can be handled in a user-friendly way.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\IfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false}
+\end{decl}
+If the file exists then the code specified in \m{true} is
+executed.
+
+If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is
+executed.
+
+This command does \emph{not} input the file.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\InputIfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false}
+\end{decl}
+This inputs the file \m{file-name} if it exists and, immediately
+before the input, the code specified in \m{true} is executed.
+
+If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is
+executed.
+
+It is implemented using |\IfFileExists|.
+
+
+\subsection{Reporting errors, etc}
+
+These commands should be used by third party classes and packages to
+report errors, or to provide information to authors.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ClassError| \arg{class-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text}\\
+ |\PackageError| \arg{package-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text}
+\end{decl}
+These produce an error message. The \m{error-text} is displayed and the
+|?| error prompt is shown. If the user types |h|, they will be shown
+the \m{help-text}.
+
+Within the \m{error-text} and \m{help-text}: |\protect| can be used to
+stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break;
+and |\space| prints a space.
+
+Note that the \m{error-text} will have a full stop added to it, so do
+not put one into the argument.
+
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\foo}{FOO}
+ \PackageError{ethel}{%
+ Your hovercraft is full of eels,\MessageBreak
+ and \protect\foo\space is \foo
+ }{%
+ Oh dear! Something's gone wrong.\MessageBreak
+ \space \space Try typing \space <<return>>
+ \space to proceed, ignoring \protect\foo.
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+produces this display:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ! Package ethel Error: Your hovercraft is full of eels,
+ (ethel) and \foo is FOO.
+
+ See the ethel package documentation for explanation.
+\end{verbatim}
+If the user types |h|, this will be shown:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Oh dear! Something's gone wrong.
+ Try typing <<return>> to proceed, ignoring \foo.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ClassWarning| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+ |\PackageWarning| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+ |\ClassWarningNoLine| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+ |\PackageWarningNoLine| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+ |\ClassInfo| \arg{class-name} \arg{info-text}\\
+ |\PackageInfo| \arg{package-name} \arg{info-text}
+\end{decl}
+The four |Warning| commands are similar to the error commands, except
+that they produce only a warning on the screen, with no error prompt.
+
+The first two, |Warning| versions, also show the line number where the
+warning occurred, whilst the second two, |WarningNoLine| versions, do
+not.
+
+The two |Info| commands are similar except that they log the
+information only in the transcript file, including the line number.
+There are no |NoLine| versions of these two.
+
+Within the \m{warning-text} and \m{info-text}: |\protect| can be used to
+stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break;
+and |\space| prints a space.
+Also, these should not end with a full stop as one is
+automatically added.
+
+
+\subsection{Defining commands}
+\label{Sec:commands.define}
+
+\LaTeXe{} provides some extra methods of (re)defining commands that are
+intended for use in class and package files.
+
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+The \texttt{*}-forms of these commands should be used to define
+commands that are not, in \TeX{} terms, long. This can be useful for
+error-trapping with commands whose arguments are not intended to
+contain whole paragraphs of text.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareRobustCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+ \arg{definition}\\
+ |\DeclareRobustCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+ \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but it declares
+a robust command, even if some code within the\m{definition} is
+fragile. You can use this command to define new robust commands, or
+to redefine existing commands and make them robust. A log is put into
+the transcript file if a command is redefined.
+
+For example, if |\seq| is defined as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\seq}[2][n]{%
+ \ifmmode
+ #1_{1}\ldots#1_{#2}%
+ \else
+ \PackageWarning{fred}{You can't use \protect\seq\space in text}%
+ \fi
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+Then the command |\seq| can be used in moving arguments, even though
+|\ifmmode| cannot, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \section{Stuff about sequences $\seq{x}$}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note also that there is no need to put a |\relax| before the
+|\ifmmode| at the beginning of the definition; this is because the
+protection given by this |\relax| against expansion at the wrong time
+will be provided internally.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\CheckCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+ \arg{definition}\\
+ |\CheckCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+ \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but, rather than define
+\m{cmd}, it just checks that the current definition of \m{cmd} is
+exactly as given by \m{definition}. An error is raised if these
+definitions differ.
+
+This command is useful for checking the state of the system before
+your package starts altering the definitions of commands. It allows
+you to check, in particular, that no other package has redefined the
+same command.
+
+\subsection{Moving arguments}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+The setting of protect whilst processing (i.e.~moving) moving arguments
+has been reimplemented, as has the method of writing information from
+the |.aux| file to other files such as the |.toc| file. Details can
+be found in the file |ltdefns.dtx|.
+
+We hope that these changes will not affect many packages.
+
+\section{Miscellaneous commands, etc}
+\label{Sec:commands.misc}
+
+\subsection{Layout parameters}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\paperheight|\\
+|\paperwidth|
+\end{decl}
+These two parameters are usually set by the class to be the size of
+the paper being used. This should be actual paper size, unlike
+|\textwidth| and |\textheight| which are the size of the main text
+body within the margins.
+
+
+\subsection{Case changing}
+\label{sec:case}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\
+ |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
+\TeX{} provides two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for
+changing the case of text. These are sometimes used in document
+classes, for example to set information in running heads in all
+capitals.
+
+Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do not change the case of
+characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or |\aa|. To overcome this
+problem, \LaTeX{} provides two new commands |\MakeUppercase| and
+|\MakeLowercase| to do this.
+
+For example:
+\begin{quotation}
+\begin{tabular}{rl}
+ |\uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\
+ |\lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\
+ |\MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| &
+ \MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\
+ |\MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quotation}
+
+The commands |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| themselves are
+robust, but they have moving arguments.
+
+The commands use the \TeX{} primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase|,
+and so have a number of unexpected `features'. In particular, they
+change the case of everything (except characters in the names of
+control-sequences) in their text argument: this includes mathematics,
+environment names, and label names.
+
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \MakeUppercase{$x+y$ in \ref{foo}}
+\end{verbatim}
+produces $X+Y$ and the warning:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ LaTeX Warning: Reference `FOO' on page ... undefined on ...
+\end{verbatim}
+In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any
+command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment
+because such fonts do not exist.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in
+order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use,
+throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case.
+The table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well
+with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause
+problems when using other alphabets.
+
+\subsection{The `openany' option in the `book' class}
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/06/01}
+The |openany| option allows chapter and similar openings to
+occur on left hand pages. Previously this option affected only
+|\chapter| and |\backmatter|. It now also affects
+|\part|, |\frontmatter| and |\mainmatter|.
+
+\subsection{Better user-defined math display environments}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ignorespacesafterend|
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1996/12/01}
+\NEWdescription{2003/12/01}
+Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text
+that is numbered as an equation. A straightforward way to do this is
+as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newenvironment{texteqn}
+ {\begin{equation}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+ {\end{minipage}
+ \end{equation}}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed
+that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph
+because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first
+line after the environment.
+
+There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that
+you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newenvironment{texteqn}
+ {\begin{equation}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+ {\end{minipage}
+ \end{equation}
+ \ignorespacesafterend}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This command may also have other uses.
+
+\subsection{Normalising spacing}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\normalsfcodes|
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1997/06/01}
+This command should be used to restore the normal settings of the
+parameters that affect spacing between words, sentences, etc.
+
+An important use of this feature is to correct a problem, reported by
+Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has always (in all
+known \TeX{} formats) been potentially wrong whenever a page break
+happens while a local setting of the space codes is in effect. These
+space codes are changed by, for example, the command
+\verb|\frenchspacing|) and the \textsf{verbatim} environment.
+
+It is normally given the correct definition automatically in
+|\begin{document}| and so need not be explicitly set; however, if it
+is explicitly made nonempty in a class file then automatic
+default setting will be over-ridden.
+
+
+\section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages}
+\label{Sec:upgrade}
+
+This section describes the changes you may need to make when you
+upgrade an existing \LaTeX{} style to a package or class but we shall
+start in optimistic mode.
+
+Many existing style files will run with \LaTeXe{} without any
+modification to the file itself. When everything is running OK,
+please put a note in the newly created package or class file to record
+that it runs with the new standard \LaTeX{}; then distribute it to
+your users.
+
+\subsection{Try it first!}
+\label{Sec:try-it}
+
+The first thing you should do is to test your style in `compatibility
+mode'. The only change you need to make in order to do this is,
+possibly, to change the extension of the file to |.cls|: you should
+make this change only if your file was used as a main document style.
+Now, without any other modifications, run \LaTeXe{} on a document that
+uses your file. This assumes that you have a suitable collection of
+files that tests all the functionality provided by your style file.
+(If you haven't, now is the time to make one!)
+
+You now need to change the test document files so that they are
+\LaTeXe{} documents: see \emph{\usrguide} for details of how to do
+this and then try them again. You have now tried the test documents
+in both \LaTeXe{} native mode and \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+\subsection{Troubleshooting}
+\label{Sec:trouble}
+
+If your file does not work with \LaTeXe{}, there are two likely
+reasons.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \LaTeX{} now has a robust, well-defined designer's interface for
+ selecting fonts, which is very different from the \LaTeX~2.09
+ internals.
+\item Your style file may have used some \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands
+ which have changed, or which have been removed.
+\end{itemize}
+
+When you are debugging your file, you will probably need more
+information than is normally displayed by \LaTeXe. This is achieved
+by resetting the counter |errorcontextlines| from its default value of
+$-1$ to a much higher value, e.g.~999.
+
+\subsection{Accommodating compatibility mode}
+
+Sometimes an existing collection of \LaTeX~2.09 documents makes it
+inconvenient or impossible to abandon the old commands entirely.
+If this is the case, then it is possible to accommodate both conventions
+by making special provision for documents processed in compatibility
+mode.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\if@compatibility|
+\end{decl}
+This switch is set when a document begins with |\documentstyle| rather
+than |\documentclass|. Appropriate code can be supplied for either
+condition, as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \if@compatibility
+ <code emulating LaTeX 2.09 behavior>
+ \else
+ <code suitable for LaTeX2e>
+ \fi
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Font commands}
+
+Some font and size commands are now defined by the document class
+rather than by the \LaTeX{} kernel. If you are upgrading a
+\LaTeX~2.09 document style to a class that does not load one of the
+standard classes, then you will probably need to add definitions for
+these commands.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\rm| |\sf| |\tt| |\bf| |\it| |\sl| |\sc|
+\end{decl}
+None of these short-form font selection commands are defined in the
+\LaTeXe{} kernel. They are defined by all the standard class files.
+
+If you want to define them in your class file, there are several
+reasonable ways to do this.
+
+One possible definition is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\rm}{\rmfamily}
+ ...
+ \newcommand{\sc}{\scshape}
+\end{verbatim}
+This would make the font commands orthogonal; for example
+|{\bf\it text}| would produce bold italic, thus: \textbf{\textit{text}}.
+It will also make them produce an error if used in math mode.
+
+Another possible definition is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+ ...
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\scshape}{\mathsc}
+\end{verbatim}
+This will make |\rm| act like |\rmfamily| in text mode (see above) and
+it will make |\rm| select the |\mathrm| math alphabet in math mode.
+
+Thus |${\rm math} = X + 1$| will produce `${\rm math} = X + 1$'.
+
+If you do not want font selection to be orthogonal then you can
+follow the standard classes and define:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+ ...
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\mathsc}
+\end{verbatim}
+This means, for example, that |{\bf\it text}| will produce medium
+weight (rather than bold) italic, thus: \textit{text}.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\normalsize| \\
+ |\@normalsize|
+\end{decl}
+The command |\@normalsize| is retained for compatibility with
+\LaTeX~2.09 packages which may have used its value; but redefining it
+in a class file will have no effect since it is always reset to have
+the same meaning as |\normalsize|.
+
+This means that classes \emph{must} now redefine |\normalsize| rather
+than redefining |\@normalsize|; for example (a rather incomplete one):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that |\normalsize| is defined by the \LaTeX{} kernel to be an
+error message.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\tiny| |\footnotesize| |\small| |\large|\\
+ |\Large| |\LARGE| |\huge| |\Huge|
+\end{decl}
+None of these other `standard' size-changing commands are defined in
+the kernel: each needs to be defined in a class file if you need it.
+They are all defined by the standard classes.
+
+This means you should use |\renewcommand| for |\normalsize| and
+|\newcommand| for the other size-changing commands.
+
+
+\subsection{Obsolete commands}
+
+Some packages will not work with \LaTeXe{}, normally because they relied
+on an internal \LaTeX{} command which was never supported and has now
+changed, or been removed.
+
+In many cases there will now be a robust, high-level means of
+achieving what previously required low-level commands. Please consult
+Section~\ref{Sec:commands} to see if you can now use the \LaTeXe{}
+class and package writers commands.
+
+Also, of course, if your package or class redefined any of the kernel
+commands (i.e.~those defined in the files |latex.tex|, |slitex.tex|,
+|lfonts.tex|, |sfonts.tex|) then you will need to check it very
+carefully against the new kernel in case the implementation has
+changed or the command no longer exists in the \LaTeX2e{} kernel.
+
+Too many of the internal commands of \LaTeX~2.09 have been
+re-implemented or removed to be able to list them all here. You must
+check any that you have used or changed.
+
+We shall, however, list some of the more important commands which are
+no longer supported.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\
+ |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\
+ |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\
+ \qquad$\vdots$
+\end{decl}
+The (approximately) seventy internal commands of this form are no longer
+defined. If your class or package uses them then \emph{please}
+replace them with new font commands described in \emph{\fntguide}.
+
+For example, the command |\twlsf| should be replaced by:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fontsize{12}{14}\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Another possibility is to use the |rawfonts| package, described in
+\emph{\usrguide}.
+
+Also, remember that many of the fonts preloaded by \LaTeX~2.09
+are no longer preloaded.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\vpt| |\vipt| |\viipt| \dots
+\end{decl}
+These were the internal size-selecting commands in \LaTeX~2.09.
+(They can still be used in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.)
+Please use the command |\fontsize| instead: see \emph{\fntguide} for
+details.
+
+For example, |\vpt| should be replaced by:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fontsize{5}{6}\normalfont\selectfont
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\prm|, |\pbf|, |\ppounds|, |\pLaTeX| \dots
+\end{decl}
+\LaTeX~2.09 used several commands beginning with |\p| in order to
+provide `protected' commands. For example, |\LaTeX| was defined to be
+|\protect\pLaTeX|, and |\pLaTeX| was defined to produce the \LaTeX{}
+logo. This made |\LaTeX| robust, even though |\pLaTeX| was not.
+
+These commands have now been reimplemented using
+|\DeclareRobustCommand|
+(described in Section~\ref{Sec:commands.define}).
+If your package redefined one of the |\p|-commands then you must
+remove the redefinition and use |\DeclareRobustCommand| to redefine the
+non-|\p| command.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\footheight|\\
+|\@maxsep|\\
+|\@dblmaxsep|
+\end{decl}
+These parameters are not used by \LaTeXe{} so they have been removed,
+except in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. Classes should no longer
+set them.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+
+\bibitem{A-W:GMS94}
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
+
+\bibitem{A-W:DEK91}
+Donald~E. Knuth.
+\newblock {\em The \TeX book}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986.
+\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991.
+
+\bibitem{A-W:LLa94}
+Leslie Lamport.
+\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\newpage
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\section*{\LaTeXe{} Summary sheet: updating old styles}
+
+Section references below are to \emph{\clsguide}.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item Should it become a class or a package?
+ See Section~\ref{Sec:classorpkg} for how to answer this question.
+
+\item If it uses another style file, then you will need to obtain an
+ updated version of this other file. Look at Section~\ref{Sec:loading}
+ for information on how to load other class and package files.
+
+\item Try it: see Section~\ref{Sec:try-it}.
+
+\item It worked? Excellent, but there are probably still some things
+ you should change in order to make your file into a well-structured
+ \LaTeXe{} file that is both robust and portable. So you should now
+ read Section~\ref{Sec:writing}, especially~\ref{Sec:general}. You
+ will also find some useful examples in Section~\ref{Sec:structure}.
+
+ If your file sets up new fonts, font-changing commands or symbols,
+ you should also read \emph{\fntguide}.
+
+\item It did not work? There are three possibilities here:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item error messages are produced whilst reading your file;
+ \item error messages are produced whilst processing test documents;
+ \item there are no errors but the output is not as it should be.
+ \end{itemize}
+ Don't forget to check carefully for this last possibility.
+
+ If you have got to this stage then you will need to read
+ Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade} to find the solutions that will make your
+ file work.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/compan.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/compan.err
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9f7ddee0d57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/compan.err
@@ -0,0 +1,2975 @@
+\newcommand\erratafiledate{2001/04/06}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
+% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
+% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
+% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
+% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
+% .cfg file.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls}
+% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach
+
+\ProvidesClass{errata}
+ [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)]
+
+\LoadClass{article}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
+\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
+
+\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
+
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+
+
+\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
+\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
+
+
+\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ \let\endgobble\egroup
+ \let\hideamp\relax
+ \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
+
+\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
+
+\let\endgobble\relax
+
+
+\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
+\newcommand\myprinting{}
+
+
+\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
+ \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi
+ \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
+ \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+
+\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
+\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
+
+\newcommand\showallerrors{%
+ \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
+ \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
+ \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
+
+
+\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
+ \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
+
+\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
+ \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
+
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
+ {
+ \input{\jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
+ \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
+ \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
+ \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Current settings are:}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ }
+ {}
+
+%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
+
+\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
+ \endgobble
+ \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \expandafter\gobbleerrata
+ \fi
+ \hideamp \\%
+ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
+ \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
+}
+
+\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
+ &\\[4pt]%
+ \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
+
+\newenvironment{erratalist}
+ {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
+ {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
+
+\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
+ {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
+ Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
+ \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2
+ \end{center}%
+ \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \vspace{20pt}}
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\small}
+
+\setlength\parindent{0pt}
+\setlength\parskip{2pt}
+
+\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
+
+% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
+
+\let\u\underline
+\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
+
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
+%
+%
+% Configuration file for the errata listing of
+%
+% The LaTeX Companion
+%
+%
+% \erratastartdate
+%
+% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed.
+%
+% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all entries are typeset.
+%
+
+\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1994/05/01}
+
+
+%
+% \myprinting
+%
+% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you
+% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already
+% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata
+% listing.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the second
+% printing are typeset. (first printing are not included so don't
+% try, and a third printing does not exist although some extries
+% claim they are which means i have corrected the source :-)
+%
+% If you really own a first printing (which is something like a
+% collectors item i'm sure :-) you will find an ascii version of
+% its errors corrected after \end{document} in the errata file.
+%
+%
+
+\renewcommand\myprinting{2}
+
+%
+% \norevisionnumbers
+%
+% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
+% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
+% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
+% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. Since the
+% Companion has only one revision which is not included in the
+% errata we turn this feature off.
+
+\norevisionnumbers
+
+%
+% \showallerrors
+%
+% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
+% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
+% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
+% default.
+%
+%
+\endinput
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+
+\documentclass{errata}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Companion}{\erratafiledate}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@book(A-W:GMS94,
+ author = {Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and
+ Alexander Samarin},
+ title = {The {\LaTeX} Companion},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ address = {Reading, Massachusetts},
+ year = 1994,
+ pagenums = {530 + 30},
+ bibliography = {yes},
+ index = {yes},
+ isbn = {0-201-54199-8},
+)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}}
+\item[]
+The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found
+as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata
+entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed
+revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives
+the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the
+bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the
+problem.
+\end{list}
+
+\begin{erratalist}
+
+\CHAPTER{General }
+
+\erroronpage{i}{last line}{KSe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``Signapore'' with ``Singapore''.
+
+\erroronpage{iii}{copyright notice}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ True copyright symbol provided by Lucida Bright should be used.
+
+\erroronpage{xi}{}{FMi} {1997/06/01}{}
+ Add a section entitled ``Using the examples'' and describe the need
+ for a) |\makeatletter| ... for commands with |@| in their name, i.e.,
+ something like the explanation on page 15 and b) that people have
+ to watch out for the packages they need, something that might be
+ explained a little earlier on in the same section.
+
+\CHAPTER{Front matter}
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 1}
+
+\erroronpage{1}{last line}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``the \TeX{} book'' by ``The \TeX book'' (capitalized ``The'' and
+ close up).
+ (The same for page 23 footnote).
+
+\erroronpage{2}{para 3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``in the public domain'' with ``free of charge''
+ as \TeX{} is copyrighted by Donald E. Knuth and *NOT* public domain.
+
+\erroronpage{2}{para 4}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In the book title `\TeX{} and METAFONT ...', the METAFONT logo should
+ be in italic.
+
+\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``LaTeX'' should be typeset ``\LaTeX''.
+
+\erroronpage{6}{l -8 }{MOs}{1997/06/01}{}
+ |Y\&Y| should by typeset |Y\&Y\@|.
+
+\erroronpage{7}{last line}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``International Standards Organization'' should be
+ ``International Organization for Standardization''.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 2}
+
+\erroronpage{12}{two lines of white space}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ This is not a mistake, only a bad design (perhaps). What you see on
+ this page is a looooong caption and the line
+ ``need different logical ...''
+ is the rest of the sentence that was started on the previous page.
+
+\erroronpage{14}{l.8}{CKr}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add missing ``be'': ``it will \u{be} assumed to be...''.
+
+\erroronpage{14}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace last para with:
+ ``Finally, when the |\begin{document}| is reached, all global options are
+ checked to see whether each of them has been used by any package; if
+ not, you will get a warning message. It is usually a spelling mistake
+ if your option name is never used; another possibility is the removal
+ of a |\Lmcs{usepackage}| command loading a package that used this
+ option.''
+
+\erroronpage{17}{}{JSa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Last sentence of 2.1.2 is unclear.
+ MGo: Replace with:
+
+ ``If a document is too large to process in a single run,
+ it can be sub-divided into sub-parts that can be run separately.
+ However, in this case, they must be processed
+ \emph{in the correct sequence} to ensure that the
+ cross-references and page numbers are correct.''
+
+\erroronpage{17}{sec 2.1.3}{FMi}{1998/05/23}{}
+ The |\end{filecontents}| should be on a line by itself without
+ any text or spaces on either side. If this is not the case a
+ warning is produced. Also mention that this environment has a star
+ form which does not write any comentary into the file.
+
+\erroronpage{18}{para 2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In the front matter the so-called \emph{starred form} of the
+sectioning commands is normally used.
+
+\erroronpage{20}{table 2.1}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``-1'' by ``$-1$'' (minus sign not hyphen).
+
+\erroronpage{23}{the footnote}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ There is a spurious space between ``\TeX'' and ``book''.
+
+\erroronpage{24}{description of ``name'' argument}{BRa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add something like:
+ ``The \emph{name} must be non-empty. |\@startsection| internally
+ calls the command \emph{name}mark with one argument to produce
+ the running head if necessary, see pages 93ff. For this reason one
+ has to define such a command for completely new sectioning
+ commands. Similarily, a command with two arguments (title and
+ page number) and the name |\l@|\emph{name} must exist to format any
+ table of contents entries properly, see pages 34ff.''
+
+\erroronpage{25}{description of ``afterskip''}{CRo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Boundary condition is wrong.
+ Replace: ``afterskip $\geq 0$'' by ``afterskip $> 0$''
+ and
+ replace: ``afterskip $< 0$'' by ``afterskip $\leq 0$''.
+
+\erroronpage{31}{sec 2.4}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ First sentence of sec 2.4 is awkward. Sounds like the titles specify
+ the page numbers!
+
+\erroronpage{31}{Table 2.3}{GSa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ |\refname| (default ``References'') should appear in the table.
+
+\erroronpage{35}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Explanation of |\addtocontents| and |addcontentsline| arguments: file
+ argument contains |toc|, |lof|, or |lot| (i.e., without ``.'' in front)!
+
+\erroronpage{35}{ }{MDa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The last example with |\addcontentsline| is set with a different font
+ for the braces than all other examples. Very minor ``error''.
+
+\erroronpage{36}{ }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Reword first para to make it clearer that files with arbitrary extensions
+ can be used and that ``|.xmp|'' is just one example
+ (done already in German edition).
+
+\erroronpage{37}{last line in table 2.4}{IAN}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add missing parenthesis:
+ ``(The default definition is a small roman font.\u{)}''.
+
+\erroronpage{37}{l.6 below Table}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The latest versions of the package now support ``short''
+ extensions for use with operating systems like DOS.
+
+\erroronpage{41}{ }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove the ``|\label{before}|'' in the example since it does not serve
+ any purpose.
+
+\erroronpage{41}{ }{JSa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Last paragraph starting with ``|vref| will produce a |ref| only
+ when...'' is ambiguous or misleading.
+ MGo: Replace with:
+ ``The command |\vref| is like |\ref| when reference and
+ |\label| are on the same page. If label and reference differ by
+ one, |\vref| creates one of the strings: ``on the facing page,''
+ ``on the preceding page,'' or ``on the following page''; the word
+ ``facing'' is used when label and reference both fall onto a double
+ spread. When the difference is larger than one page, |\vref|
+ produces both |\ref| and |\pageref|.''
+
+\erroronpage{42}{footnote}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``flafter'' is a package not an option!
+
+\erroronpage{43}{before: Language Support}{FMi,JAd}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add:
+ ``If the space added by |\vpageref| turns out to be wrong, as in
+ |(\vpageref[here]{ex:foo})|
+ use the variant with two optional arguments and put all text up to
+ the preceding blank (in this case just the open parentheses) into both
+ optional arguments, ie
+ |\vpageref[(here][(]{ex:foo})|.''
+
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 3}
+
+\erroronpage{48}{para 3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add the following sentence:
+ ``Note, that accented characters have to be
+ surrounded by braces like this: \verb={\"a}=.''
+
+\erroronpage{50}{para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove this sentence ``They are optional features ...'' since
+ the new version of ulem activates them automatically.
+
+\erroronpage{50}{example}{RBa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``The |\USA| has 50 states.'' by ``|\GB| was unified in 1707.''
+
+\erroronpage{53ff}{ }{PvO}{1997/06/01}{}
+ An alternative to picinpar is the pickins package which provides
+ sophisticated picture inclusion (with and without caption, with
+ frames etc.) into a paragraph. Main drawback perhaps: the
+ documentation is very good but right now only available in German.
+
+\erroronpage{54}{l.2}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add a right parenthesis ``)'' after ``|tabwindow|\u{)}.''.
+
+\erroronpage{54}{last line}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``are very specific'' by ``are intricate''.
+
+\erroronpage{61}{first example}{FMi} {1997/06/01}{3}
+ Finish line with a percent:
+ ``|\setlength{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}}%|''.
+
+\erroronpage{64}{last l.}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``(forcing a new line)'' by
+ ``followed by a forced line break''.
+
+\erroronpage{64}{code \string\Lentrylabel}{FMi}{1998/01/10}{}
+ Change the line
+\begin{verbatim}
+ {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\}}%
+\end{verbatim}
+to
+\begin{verbatim}
+ {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\\mbox{}}}%
+\end{verbatim}
+to avoid an underfull hbox message.
+
+\erroronpage{68}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``|\verbatiminput|'' should be ``|\verbatimtabinput|'' (in the box).
+
+\erroronpage{69}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ |\begin{listing}|: I find that confusing, although I guess it is just
+ the way the package works. The problem is that the required
+ argument is NOT the first number that you see, but the first number
+ you see = req.arg+opt.arg-1. Maybe the description can include a
+ warning about this.
+ MGo proposes the following text:
+
+ ``An optional argument ``step'' specifies
+ the step between numbered lines (its default value is 1,
+ and it corresponds to all lines being numbered), while
+ the required argument ``firstline''
+ is the number of the first line.
+ If ``step'' is different from |1|, then the first number
+ shown will be ``\emph{step}$+$\emph{firstline}$-1$,'' for instance
+ if the \texttt{listing} environment is invoked by the command
+ \verb!\begin{listing}[2]{3}!, each second line
+ will be numbered, starting with the number $2+3-1$, i.e., $4$.''
+
+\erroronpage{71}{figure 3.7}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``|\skip\footins|'' is missing in the figure.
+
+
+\erroronpage{72}{l -2}{OBa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``|\renewcommand{footnoterule}|'' should be
+ ``|\renewcommand{\footnoterule}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{73}{l 3}{GGr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``|\renewcommand{footnoterule}|'' should be
+ ``|\renewcommand{\footnoterule}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{74}{l.11}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``may not match'' by ``will not match''.
+
+\erroronpage{74}{last para of 3.4.2}{GGr,FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Change to:
+ ``There are three parameters to define the style of marginal notes:
+ |\marginparwidth|, |\marginparsep|, and |\marginparpush|. Their
+ default values are shown in table 4.2 on page 87.''
+
+\erroronpage{75}{para 2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``accumulated in memory'' by ``accumulated in the external file''.
+
+\erroronpage{75}{para 3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Drop ``in memory'' since the text is stored externally.
+
+\erroronpage{80}{last two paras from 3.5.5}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Since ftnright.sty is now updated for \LaTeX2e the last two paragraphs
+ can be dropped.
+
+\erroronpage{82}{2nd paragraph after
+ boxed\texttt{\textbackslash excludeversion}}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``\emph{tag} is a name...'' should read ``\emph{tagname} is a name...''.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 4}
+
+\erroronpage{87}{table 4.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The table shows the value for the document styles of \LaTeX\
+ 2.09. The class files of \LaTeXe\ have slightly different values:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ two-sided one-sided
+ 10pt 11pt 12pt 10pt 11pt 12pt
+\oddsidemargin 35pt 29pt 17pt 62pt 55pt 39pt
+\evensidemargin 89pt 80pt 62pt -- -- --
+\marginparwidth 121pt 113pt 95pt 94pt 88pt 73pt
+\topmargin 16pt 21pt 17pt 16pt 21pt 17pt
+\textheight 46 40 38 46 40 38 (in lines)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{89}{l 6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The vpage.sty package is now available under a new name with extended
+ functionality, vmargin.sty.
+
+\erroronpage{89}{l.10}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Portrait and landscape should be in typewriter font since they are actual
+ keywords for the optional ``orient'' argument of |\setpapersize|.
+
+\erroronpage{92}{l.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The first three are used ...
+
+\erroronpage{92}{l.2}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The word ``empty'' is set in a different font.
+
+\erroronpage{92}{l.5}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``pagestyle{empty}'' by ``|\pagestyle{empty}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{92}{para 4, l.4}{CKr}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``styles is concerned'' by ``styles are concerned''.
+
+\erroronpage{92}{l.8}{EPi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``thispagestyle{empty}'' by ``|\thispagestyle{empty}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{93}{last line}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``... the commands |\chaptermark|, |\sectionmark|, ...''
+ FMi add:
+
+ ``These commands are executed automatically by the corresponding
+ heading commands. They have one argument in which they receive the
+ heading text or its short form from the optional argument of the
+ heading command.''
+
+\erroronpage{95}{l.9}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``by defining the commands |\markboth| ...''
+ by: ``by using the commands |\mathboth| ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{97}{para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace last sentence by:
+ ``Note that in this case the length |\headheight| and perhaps
+ |\footskip| might have to be increased.''.
+
+\erroronpage{100}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add a warning that |\enlargethispage| only modifies the
+ main part of the page: running headers and footers stay
+ unchanged. This means that it is possible to overprint
+ information in the footer if the main text gets too large.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 5}
+
+\erroronpage{103}{para 4, l.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``previous tabstop'' by ``following tabstop''.
+
+\erroronpage{104}{ }{JPe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The example actually shows an ALGOL68 program (not a Pascal one).
+
+\erroronpage{106}{ }{TMa,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Last line before footnote, in the |>| command:
+ The 4th ``|{|'' should be a ``|}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{106}{footnote}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``... in case of |p|, |m|, or |b|, the ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{108}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace first sentence by:
+ ``When you have a narrow column, you must not only make sure that the
+ first word can be hyphenated (see page 65) but consider that short
+ texts are easier to typeset in ragged right mode (without being
+ aligned at the right margin).''.
+
+\erroronpage{108}{l.5}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``environment'' by ``command''.
+
+\erroronpage{108}{example}{FGo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``superconciousness'' by ``superconsciousness''.
+
+\erroronpage{108}{example}{UMu}{1998/07/15}{}
+ Hyphenate ``Pos-si-bi-li-t\'es'' correctly.
+
+\erroronpage{109}{l.3 of text}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``vertical column separator'' by ``column separator''.
+
+\erroronpage{110}{\texttt{\textbackslash doublerulesep}}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``The width of the space between lines created by two successive
+ \verb=|= characters in the environment preamble,...''.
+
+\erroronpage{ 111}{para 2}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Why not to give a formula instead the description?
+
+\erroronpage{112 }{}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ ``LR-mode'' not defined before
+
+\erroronpage{113}{very end of paragraph 5.3.4}{UJa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ A closing curly brace is missing, i.e., ``|...\fill}}}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{115}{example}{FGo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``superconciousness'' by ``superconsciousness''.
+
+\erroronpage{115}{l.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Replace ``above'' by ``below''
+
+\erroronpage{116}{l.3 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``\,`c' type columns'' by ``\,`c', `r', or `l' type columns''.
+
+\erroronpage{117}{l.4}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace by:
+ ``For instance, in the case of the example on page 115 we got the
+ following output.''.
+
+\erroronpage{120}{following}{FPo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Shouldn't Table 5.3, 5.4, 5.5 and 5.7 (and perhaps others) better be
+ Figures, like a lot of other examples presenting tabulated \LaTeX\ output?
+
+ MGo: We have renamed all example ``tables'', namely 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5,
+ and 5.7 to become figures.
+
+\erroronpage{121}{Table 5.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Right column of each page, the space between Nb and name of Surat must be
+ larger.
+
+\erroronpage{122}{5.4.2, para2, l.4}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It could be helpful to explicitly mention that one shouldn't use |\nofiles|
+ together with longtable since longtable needs to write to the |aux| file.
+ It would be even better if longtable would detect this problem.
+
+MGo: add a footnote at the end of the sentence ``...table in question'':
+
+ ``This means that the |\nofiles| command, that suppresses
+ writing of all but the \texttt{dvi} and \texttt{log} files,
+ should not be used together with the \texttt{longtable} package.''.
+
+
+\erroronpage{122}{5.4.2., para 2, l.5 following}{DKa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ With version 4 of longtable the |\setlongtables| command
+ is no longer necessary. For this reason the documentation
+ starting with
+ ``This feature has to be activated ...''
+ up to the end of page 122 can be removed.
+ In addition |\setlongtables| should be removed from the table
+ on page 124 and the description on page 125.
+
+ David's suggestion for a new description:
+
+ ``longtable breaks the table into several chunks which are typeset one
+ after the other. As later chunks are only able to influence the width
+ of earlier chunks by writing information to the .aux file it might
+ take several \LaTeX\ runs until the column widths converge. (If
+ additional runs are necessary \LaTeX\ will output a warning). Earlier
+ releases of the package needed the |\setlongtables| command to trigger
+ this mechanism. Starting with version~4 this works automatically.''
+
+ Also starting with the 1996/12/01 release longtable has additional
+ commands like |\pagebreak| and also distinguishes |\\| and |\\*| (which
+ are the same in ordinary tabulars).
+
+\erroronpage{124}{table 5.6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In line ``|\LTchunksize|'' replace ``(\TeX\ counter)'' by
+ ``(\LaTeX\ counter)''.
+ Both are correct but why mention the \TeX\ version?
+
+\erroronpage{127}{inside the tables}{JKn}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``su sudanese'' should read ``su sundanese'' (twice),
+ ``te tegulu'' should read ``te telugu'' (twice).
+
+\erroronpage{129}{text l.4 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``output file'' by ``output''
+
+\erroronpage{133}{5.6.3, l.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``in narrow'' by ``between narrow''
+
+\erroronpage{133}{Threeparttable}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Perhaps one of the notes could be longer to show that they are
+indeed formatted to the same width as the table.
+
+
+\erroronpage{ 135}{para 1, l.-1}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Remove the word ``fixup''
+
+\erroronpage{135}{para 1 of multirow section}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The author of the multirow package is no longer unknown; it is
+ Jerry Leichter.
+
+\erroronpage{136}{second example}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Using this input, it gives an output without the white space on the top of
+ last row.
+
+ FMi: looks wrong to me what is shown in the book, but i can't check
+ the outcome right now.
+
+
+\erroronpage{137}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ |\firsthline| and |\lasthline| will be part of array.sty with the next
+ release.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 6}
+
+\erroronpage{143}{l.20}{GGr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``between'' by ``among''.
+
+\erroronpage{143}{l7-8 from bottom}{MOh}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``you can prevents'' by ``you can prevent''.
+
+\erroronpage{143}{description of dbltextfloatsep}{EMS,FMi}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Replace the sentence in parentheses with:
+ (The default is the same as |\textfloatsep|.)
+
+
+
+
+\erroronpage{144}{example}{UJa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Better use |\renewcommand{\section}|, since |\newcommand{\section}|
+ is only correct if you design a class file from scratch.
+
+\erroronpage{145}{l.11}{TMa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``ignoreed'' by ``ignored''.
+
+\erroronpage{148}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Fig 6.1: The left and right sides do not correspond in detail.
+
+\erroronpage{149}{last para to page 150}{FVi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace this para by:
+ ``Newer releases of the \textsf{float} package (v1.2 and higher)
+ integrate the functionality of the package \textsf{here} by David
+ Carlisle completely. With older versions one had to first issue
+ |\restylefloat{table}| and/or |\restylefloat{figure}| to be able to use
+ the |H| specifier with the standard \LaTeX\ environments.''
+
+\erroronpage{150}{}{BFr}{1997/12/17}{}
+ The successor of the ``floatfig'' package for \LaTeXe{} is called
+ ``floatflt'' offering somewhat extended capabilities.
+
+\erroronpage{152}{}{ADu}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In the wrapfig example the ``boxit'' environment is used but never
+ explained. Better use |\begin{fminipage}[3in]|.
+
+\erroronpage{152}{figure 6.3}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The word ``wrapfigure'' in the caption should be set in |\normalfont|
+ rather than |\ttfamily|.
+
+\erroronpage{153}{para 1, l.3}{DBo}{2001/04/06}{}
+ The space after the figure is now set by |\subfigbottomskip|.
+
+ As a general warning those skips are actually defined via
+ |\newcommand| so can't be modified with |\setlength| as one would
+ expect.
+
+\erroronpage{153}{para 2, l.3}{CKr}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``(defined by default as |(\alph{subfigure})\space},|''
+ by: ``(defined by default as |(\alph{subfigure})\space}),|''.
+
+\erroronpage{153}{para 3}{TBo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Line 2/3 says a ``tabular'' environment is used in
+ Fig. 6.4 to align the subfigures. This is not true.
+
+\erroronpage{155}{\texttt{\textbackslash @makecaption}
+ and \texttt{\textbackslash @isucaption} example}{JvM,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In both cases is a closing brace missing. It should read:
+ ``|\ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\wd\tempbox > \linewidth}}%|''.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 7}
+
+\erroronpage{ 163}{ Font size l.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Replace ``less then'' by ``less than''
+
+\erroronpage{164}{Figure 7.6}{TMa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The 10pt font is actually Lucida Bright and the magnified
+ one Computer Modern 5 pt, so it whould be better to use CMR twice.
+
+\erroronpage{166}{l.12}{TRa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``end of the next environment'' by ``the end of the current
+ environment''.
+
+\erroronpage{166}{l.13}{TRa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add ``r'': ``To change the fonts for individual words or
+ short ph\u{r}ases''.
+
+\erroronpage{167}{}{PAp}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``If you used ...'' by: ``If you use ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{169}{l.9}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace: ``|\lowercase|'' by ``|\MakeLowercase|''.
+
+\erroronpage{169}{l.10}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace: ``makes use of the \TeX\ primitive |\lowercase|''
+ by: ``makes use of the \LaTeXe\ command |\MakeLowercase|''.
+
+\erroronpage{170}{table 7.1}{BBe,FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Rename the caption to:
+ ``The standard size-changing declarations''.
+
+\erroronpage{171}{footnote}{GRo,FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add word:
+ ``Any package that changes the |\catcode| of a character \u{used} inside
+ |\nocorrlist| ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{174}{para 3}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Computer Modern Typewriter has no bold extended series only medium.
+
+\erroronpage{174}{para 4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace by:
+ An example in which some default values are changed can be found in
+ the chapter about PostScript (section 11.9.6 on page 339).
+
+\erroronpage{179}{para 3, l.5}{BBe, FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add ``upright bold'' in:
+ ``Instead, you should use the |\mathbf| alphabet identifier for
+ \u{upright bold} characters and/or use the command ...''
+
+\erroronpage{180}{7.5.1, para 2}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{}
+ Rewrite the whole section on DC fonts to take into account the
+ existence of the EC fonts since the beginning of 1997.
+
+\erroronpage{181}{table 7.5}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Table 7.5 is not referenced on the page or in the neighboring pages.
+
+ MGo: Probably best to add reference at the third line of Section
+ 7.5.1: ``Besides the Computer Modern families \u{(see Figure 7.5)}...''.
+
+\erroronpage{182}{}{FJe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Table 7.6 is incomplete. Nowadays there is the following set of fonts
+ available from labrea.stanford.edu:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Concrete Roman medium: ccr5 ccr6 ccr7 ccr8 ccr9 ccr10
+Concrete Roman medium italic: ccti10
+Concrete Roman medium slanted: ccsl9 ccsl10
+Concrete Roman medium caps and small caps: cccsc10
+Concrete Roman condensed slanted: ccslc9
+Concrete Math medium italic: ccmi10
+Concrete Math condensed italic: ccmic9
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{182}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Table 7.7: Examples of Pandora fonts are incorrect:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Pandora Roman bold is typeset in (again) Pandora Roman medium
+Pandora Sans is typeset in Pandora Roman slanted
+Pandora Sans bold is typeset in Pandora Roman bold
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{182}{para 2}{UMu}{1998/07/15}{}
+ ``Gothisch'' should read ``Gotisch'' (twice).
+
+\erroronpage{183}{end of para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add:
+ ``Umlaut-accents and \ss{} are produced in these fonts via
+ ligatures with the character |"|, e.g., |"s|, |"a|, etc. This looks like
+ the way the german and babel packages operate but is functionally
+ different so that those fonts cannot be used currently with these
+ packages.''
+
+\erroronpage{184}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The packages euscript and eufrak have been moved into the amsfonts
+ distribution. euscript is now considered obsolete (but available)
+ and the following is provided:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{eufrak} defines \mathfrak (and \EuFrak for compatibility)
+\usepackage{eucal} or
+\usepackage[mathcal]{eucal} changes \mathcal to use euler script fonts
+\usepackage[mathscr]{eucal} defines \mathscr to use euler script fonts
+ and leaves \mathcal alone
+\usepackage{euscript} defines \EuScript (considered obsolete)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{184}{last sentence}{NBe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Remove sentence: ``Alternatively, these symbols ...''
+ because this is no longer true.
+
+\erroronpage{185}{l.4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``chose'' by ``choose''.
+
+\erroronpage{187}{description of debugshow}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add: ``This option might change the typesetting of material in
+ certain circumstances. For this reason it should not be turned
+ on when producing camera ready copy.''.
+
+\erroronpage{187}{description of pausing}{VBr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace: ``to help detecting the detection of problems''
+ by: ``to help in the detection of font problems''.
+
+\erroronpage{191}{example}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace: ``po russki'' by ``po-russki''.
+
+\erroronpage{196}{second para from bottom}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Since a size function can have both an optional and a mandatory argument
+ this para should speak about arguments in plural (two occasions).
+
+\erroronpage{198}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ There is now also a genb function that generates names for the ec
+ font naming conventions e.g., |<10.95> genb * ecmr| results in |ecmr1095|
+ and there is, of course, a silent variant sgenb.
+
+\erroronpage{200}{l 8.}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``... with a font family as a whole.''.
+
+\erroronpage{201}{l 1}{PBL}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``|{dcmr}|'' by ``|{cmr}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{203}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``The starting letters T, O, M, \u{and S} are reserved for standard
+ encodings...''.
+
+\erroronpage{205}{top}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ NFSS now doesn't load math fonts unless it encounters a formula
+ in the new size. So the first para must be modified.
+
+\erroronpage{206}{top}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace the sentence: ``In fact, only the |\DeclareFontEncoding| ....''
+ by: ``If the encoding of the font is unknown to NFSS it must be first
+ declared with |\DeclareFontEncoding| inside the package file. The
+ other two declarations can, in fact, alternatively be placed
+ into an |.fd| file.''
+
+\erroronpage{208}{l.6}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace: ``you can define them'' by ``you can define it''
+ since the math alphabet and not the letters are defined.
+
+\erroronpage{209}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add the following declaration to the default setup:
+ ``|\SetSymbolFont{symbols}{bold}{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{211}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In explanation for ``Checking defaults for |<cdp>/<font shape>|''
+ replace |\DeclareFontEncoding| by |\DeclareFontSubstitution|.
+
+\erroronpage{214}{4th error message}{LLa}{2000/07/01}{}
+ occured \> occur\u{r}ed
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 8 --- book version (online version below)}
+
+\erroronpage{215}{}{MGo,FMi}{1998/02/04}{}
+ This whole chapter has been adapted to version 1.2 of amslatex
+ and is available as a PDF or PS file from
+ \texttt{http://www.awl.com/...} or from CTAN at
+ \texttt{CTAN:/tex-archive/info/companion-rev/}.
+
+\erroronpage{215}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove second reference to Graetzer's book ([95]).
+
+\erroronpage{216}{last line of 8.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``you should load the amstex package''
+ by ``you should load the amsmath package''
+
+ Note that 1.2 release of amslatex introduced amsmath as the
+ successor to amstex. Starting with this release the package amstex
+ should only be used in compatibility mode, i.e., in old documents
+ using |\documentstyle|. Nearly all documentation in this chapter is
+ nevertheless still valid (if amsmath is used). Exceptions are
+ hopefully all documented in the errata by now. Sorry for the
+ inconvenience but this incompatible change happened after the \LaTeX{}
+ Companion was printed and making a second edition for that reason
+ would look silly in my eyes. A PDF file with a new version of
+ chapter 8 is available on CTAN see above.
+
+\erroronpage{216}{first two paragraphs of 8.2.1}{BBe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``amstex'' by ``amsmath''
+
+ Replace the first sentence of the second paragraph by
+ ``In the amsmath package, |\boldsymbol| is to be used for individual
+ bold math symbols and bold Greek letters---everything in math
+ except for bold upright letters (where one would use |\mathbf|).''
+
+ To the list of examples in the second sentence, after ``pi'', add
+ a bold italic A, and insert ``|\boldsymbol{A}|,'' in the appropriate
+ place in the code list.
+
+\erroronpage{217}{}{GSa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Note that the Companion uses Lucida math fonts which contain the
+ standard \LaTeX\ and AmS symbols but with different shapes compared
+ to the Computer Modern math fonts.
+
+\erroronpage{218}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ |\Bbb|, |\frak| are OBSOLETE. Use |\mathbb|, |\mathfrak|.
+
+\erroronpage{219}{table 8.5}{JPe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Put a comma between |\leq| and |\le|.
+ Also show that the ``greater equal sign'' can be produced
+ by |\geq| and |\ge|.
+
+\erroronpage{219}{table 8.5}{UMu}{1998/07/15}{}
+ Add |\ne| as synonym for |\neq|.
+
+\erroronpage{219}{table 8.5}{KSi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ |\simeq| shows a wrong symbol. The correct one should look like a tilde
+ on top of a minus. The symbol shown seems to be only available in the
+ Lucida fonts where it is call ``lessmuch''.
+
+\erroronpage{221}{Table 8.15}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Remove the |\dashleftarrow| and |\dashrightarrow| entries, because they
+ do not belong to the AMS-Fonts. (only in the lucida fonts).
+ Add a |\Rrightarrow| entry.
+ Remove one of the two |\rightrightarrows| entries.
+ Add an entry for |\restriction| as synonym for |\upharpoonright|.
+
+\erroronpage{221}{table 8.15}{FMi,PNu}{1997/06/01}{}
+ |\rightleftarrows| are shown twice at entries (7,1) and (7,3).
+
+\erroronpage{221}{Table 8.17}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add an entry for |\llless| as synonym for |\lll|.
+ Add an entry for |\gggtr| as synonym for |\ggg|.
+ Add an entry for |\Doteq| as synonym for |\doteqdot|.
+
+\erroronpage{222}{Table 8.19}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add an entry for |\doublecap| as synonym for |\Cap|.
+ Add an entry for |\doublecup| as synonym for |\Cup|.
+
+\erroronpage{222}{Table 8.20}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Remove footnote.
+
+\erroronpage{224}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ |\accentedsymbol| was moved to package amsxtra.
+
+\erroronpage{225}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ All superscripted accents |\sphat|, etc. were moved to package amsxtra.
+
+\erroronpage{228}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ |\operatornamewithlimits| is OBSOLETE: new name is |\operatorname*|.
+
+\erroronpage{229}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ We should add a line with |\bmod| to the first example.
+
+\erroronpage{229}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ |\fracwithdelims| was moved to package amsxtra.
+
+\erroronpage{230}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ |\lcfrac|, |\rcfrac| are OBSOLETE. New syntax is |\cfrac{...}{...}| or
+ |\cfrac[l]{...}{...}| to get left-positioned numerators or |\cfrac[r]|...
+
+\erroronpage{231}{l.4 and first example of 8.4.2}{DEl}{1998/08/08}{}
+ Add matrix environment \texttt{Bmatrix}
+
+\erroronpage{???}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ New subequations environment, for example
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{subequations}{a}
+ ...
+ \end{subequations}
+\end{verbatim}
+ causes all numbered equation environments within that scope to be
+ numbered (4.9a) (4.9b) (4.9c) etc. if the preceding numbered
+ equation was 4.8. The argument can be a,A,i,I,1,f for the standard
+ \LaTeX\ numbering types: |\alph|, |\Alph|, |\roman|, |\Roman|, |\arabic|,
+ |\fnsymbol|. A |\label| command immediately after
+ |\begin{subequations}{...}| will produce a |\ref| of the parent number
+ ``4.9'', not ``4.9a''. The counters used by the subequations environment
+ are ``parentequation'' and ``equation'' and standard uses of
+ |\addtocounter|, |\setcounter|, etc. are possible with these counter
+ names.
+
+\erroronpage{233}{example on top}{GRo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``|\dots|'' should be replaced by ``|\hdotsfor 2|'' in the first two rows
+ of the matrix (lines 2 and 4 of the input) to align the last column
+ of the matrix.
+
+\erroronpage{233}{Section 8.4.3 The Sb and Sp Environments}{MMu}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amsmath.sty the these environments no longer exist.
+ Use |\substack| instead as in
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \sum_{\substack{0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n}} P(i,j)
+\end{verbatim}
+ Note, that there is also slightly more general environment
+ subarray, which allows for greater control over horizontal
+ positioning.
+
+\erroronpage{236}{l.2 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Start a new sentence at: ``Each one is ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{238}{section 8.5.5, para 2}{PNu}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``ctagsplt'' by ``centertags''
+ as ``|ctagsplt|'' is only valid in compatibility mode.
+
+\erroronpage{241}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Say that righttag is an option to the amsmath package.
+
+\erroronpage{241}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The errata above is probably already obsolete again, option is now
+ reqno/leqno and default is no longer on the left.
+
+\erroronpage{242}{}{GZi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The commands |@,| and |@!| (supposedly they yield 1/10 of |\,| and |\!|)
+ are no longer supported by the amsmath package.
+
+\erroronpage{243}{}{GGr,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ To the entries for amscd and amssymb add:
+ ``This package is not automatically included by the amsmath package.''.
+
+\erroronpage{243}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In amslatex release 1.2:
+ See also errata for page 216 about amstex \> amsmath!
+ New packages have been added:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ amsxtra for seldom used commands
+ amsthm theorem code for classes
+ amsintsm special integral syntax
+ New options have been added to classes:
+ 8pt,9pt sizes
+ fleqn is now supported
+ nomath don't load amsmath package
+ New options to amsmath package:
+ psamsfonts (also amsfonts package)
+ load different .fd file set for PostScript
+ Type 1 versions of amsfonts
+ intlimits/nointlimits put (no) limits on \int signs
+ sumlimits/nosumlimits put (no) limits on \sum signs
+ namelimits/nonamelimits put (no) limits on operator names
+ leqno/reqno tags on the left (right)
+ centertags/tbtags tags centered on split
+ Obsolete options:
+ ctagsplt only available in compatibilty mode
+ use centertags instead
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{246}{l.3 of code}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should be: ``|g(\xi,t)|'' not ``|g(x\i,t)|''
+ (that typo was now caught by the recent \LaTeX\ release which detected
+ the |\i| in math mode (where |\imath| should be used))
+
+\erroronpage{250}{}{TMa}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Just before Section 8.7.6: ``|align*|'' should be ``|align|'',
+ like it says in the text.
+
+\erroronpage{250}{Equation 8.58 and unnumbered version}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``kerning'' for subscript ``j'' too big (compare $U_ju_j$)
+ distance between ``U'' and ``j'' and ``u'' not acceptable.
+
+FMi: looks like a font problem
+
+\erroronpage{255}{two last lines}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Unindent last two lines (cosmetics)
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{gather}
+ :
+ :
+ \begin{align*}
+ :
+ ...\end{align*}
+ ...\end{gather}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{256}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Since AMSLaTeX 1.2 will place the formula number now by default to the
+ right the last paragraph needs correction.
+
+\erroronpage{256}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``All these parameters are expressed as lengths ...''
+ by: ``All these are length parameters ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{257}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add (somehow):
+ ``the parameters |\abovedisplay|... and |\belowdisplay|...
+ depend on the current font size. For this reason one can't modify them
+ in the preamble of a document using |\setlength| but one needs to change
+ the definition of |\normalsize|, etc.''
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 8 --- updated online version}
+
+\erroronpage{every page}{footer}{KRa}{1998/06/22}{}
+ ``The LaTeX Companion'' and ``AMS-LaTeX'' \> ``The
+ \LaTeX{} Companion'' and ``AMS-\LaTeX''.
+
+\erroronpage{235}{8.3.11, para 2}{KRa}{1998/06/22}{}
+ Replace ``baove'' with ``above''.
+
+\erroronpage{240}{l.4 and first example of 8.4.2}{DEl}{1998/08/08}{}
+ Add matrix environment \texttt{Bmatrix}
+
+\erroronpage{254}{last sentence in 8.6.6}{HAs}{1998/07/28}{}
+ free available \> freely available.
+
+\erroronpage{254}{all examples}{BBe}{1998/08/07}{}
+ The command |\Lenv| should be |\texttt|. |\Lenv| is in fact an
+ internal command of the class that was used to produce the
+ Companion and denotes a \LaTeX{} environment name that also
+ appears in the index of the book.
+
+\erroronpage{258}{last sentence}{HAs}{1998/07/28}{}
+ ``first'' and ``second'' should be interchanged.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 9}
+
+\erroronpage{260}{}{RPo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ A truly international \TeX\ also needs support for different
+ typesetting directions, i.e., TeX-XeT.
+ MGo adds: TeX-Xet has been replaced by e\TeX\ and $\Omega$ also might
+ be helpful in multi-language environments.
+
+\erroronpage{261}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``to the 256-bit DC-font glyphs'' should better read:
+ ``to the 256 glyphs of an EC-font''.
+ MGo: change also other references from ``DC'' to ``EC''.
+
+\erroronpage{262}{l.3}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{3}
+ Replace ``ISO-10646 encoding'' to ``Unicode/ISO-10646 encoding''.
+
+\erroronpage{264}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Bottom of page: The example at the end ``Drucker bzw. Druk-ker'', etc.
+ is not very useful, since it does not show the commands.
+
+\erroronpage{264}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The footnote text is confusing (I have to read it twice to
+ understand). I suggest to say: ``Note that the \u{original} package
+ is incompatible...''.
+
+\erroronpage{265}{l.8}{RWa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``Inhaltverzeichnis'' by ``Inhalt\u{s}verzeichnis''.
+
+\erroronpage{265}{l.3 from bottom of 9.2.2}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``\textsf{francais}'' by ``\textsf{french}''.
+
+ MGo adds: nor really true, since Babel will load B. Gaulle's
+ french package when ``french'' is specified as its option. On the other
+ hand with the option ``francais'' the standard code in Babel is activated.
+ There is also an option ``frenchb'' (by Daniel Flipo) which loads
+ a mini-version of ``french'' but one which still has most of french's
+ features.
+
+\erroronpage{265}{section 9.2.3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The command |\adddialect| has two arguments:
+ ``|\adddialect{dialect-name}{language}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{267}{table 9.2}{JBr}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Macro ``|\alsoseename|'' is actually called ``|\alsoname|'' in Babel.
+
+\erroronpage{267}{table 9.2}{RdB}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Macro ``|\headpagename|'' is actually called ``|\pagename|'' in Babel.
+
+\erroronpage{270}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ My version of epsfig doesn't support textures with eps files,
+ so i guess that example is not correct (but i may not have latest
+ graphics).
+
+\erroronpage{270}{caption}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Example using babel's option french (output on the facing page)
+ MGo: we have to change to ``|\usepackage[francais]{babel}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{271}{}{PKr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The caption of tableau 1 reads:
+ ``Quelques commandes du pacquet \texttt{francais}''
+ However, in the ``Liste des tableaux'' it reads:
+ ``Quelques commandes du style \texttt{francais}''.
+
+ MGo: In the next edition we should write ``extension'', the
+ equivalent (chosen by GUTenberg) of the word ``package'' in French.
+
+\erroronpage{273}{}{JPe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The ``,'' after ``|\begin{order}|'' should be replaced by a blank.
+
+\erroronpage{274}{Table 9.4}{DMa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Entries in the column ``French input'' should be set in verbatim mode,
+ instead of ttfamily, in order to properly illustrate the user input.
+ I.e., the spaces (indicated by |_| below) should be removed:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ point-virgule_;
+ Il dit_: oui
+ Mon Dieu_!
+ Pourquoi pas_?
+\end{verbatim}
+ MGo: not true, since the package ``french'' will transform that space
+ into a small space (before double punctuation, i.e., ;, :, ?, and !).
+
+\erroronpage{274}{l.6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``...associated with their names.''
+ by: ``...associated with them.''.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 10}
+
+\erroronpage{275}{footnote}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove the colon in the citation text.
+
+\erroronpage{275}{para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add a footnote like this:
+ ``In certain situations it is possible for the |\special| command to
+ change the formatting because it can produce an additional break point
+ and it might prevent \LaTeX\ from noticing spaces.''
+
+\erroronpage{277}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Better use ``|\setlength{\sdim}{1.5\sboxsep}|''.
+ Also show in the example that you do not use the default of 10pt.
+
+\erroronpage{277}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In the first printing we used some modified version of the shadow
+ package (with an unofficial name). In the second printing we somehow
+ got it wrong again (the last shadow box is supposed to have a
+ larger shadow), sigh. It should read:
+ ``|\setlength{\sdim}{3\fboxsep}|''
+ in the example.
+
+\erroronpage{278}{description of \texttt{\textbackslash ovalbox}}
+ {FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace with:
+ ``The width of the frame is defined by the |\thinlines| command. The
+ diameter of the corner arcs is set with a |\cornersize| command.
+ The form |\cornersize{num}| sets the diameter to \emph{num}
+ $\times$ minimum(width of box, height of box); the form
+ |\cornersize*{len}| sets the diameter to \emph{len}. The
+ default is |\cornersize{0.5}|.''
+
+\erroronpage{282}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In the syntax box for ``|\root(x-|...'' show the space following the ``)''
+ explicitly, since it is mandatory.
+
+\erroronpage{284}{}{MDa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add to the description of |\legend| that this command is to be used
+ outside the actual barenv environment.
+
+\erroronpage{285}{}{MDa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In the description of the command ``|\setyname|'' the argument ``x-label''
+ should become ``y-label'' (cf. the command |\setxname|).
+
+\erroronpage{293}{10.2.7}{MGo} {1997/10/20}{3}
+ Add reference to ``\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion'' for more on Feynman,
+ electronics, etc. diagrams.
+
+\erroronpage{293}{10.2.7, para 3}{MGo} {1997/06/01}{3}
+ Clarification:
+ A set of electronic circuit symbols developed by
+ Adrian Johnstone is available (on CTAN) as part of his
+ \texttt{lcircuit} system to be used with the \TeX{}cad program
+ (see figure 10.5).
+
+\erroronpage{294}{bottom}{JPe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Logically items 3 and 4 should be interchanged.
+
+ MGo: I do not think so, since the final coordinates |(x,y)| should
+ be specified only for the final version.
+
+\erroronpage{295}{l.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``shortest line'' by ``shortest available line''.
+
+\erroronpage{296}{l.6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``than the equivalent $n_1$ |\multiput| statements.''
+ by: ``than multiple |\multiput| statements.''.
+
+\erroronpage{301}{l.1}{RHa}{1998/01/06}{}
+ Last argument of |\oval| is optional and should therefore be
+ surrounded by |[...]|
+
+\erroronpage{302}{l.7}{MGo, SKo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace: ``must lie within the interval $[0,\pi/2]$ ...''
+ by: ``must lie within the interval $[0,2\pi]$ ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{306}{l.3 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``for subsequent |\draw| commands''
+ by: ``for subsequent |\match| commands''.
+
+\erroronpage{307}{def. of \texttt{\textbackslash drawwith}}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Argument should be named ``draw-command'' since it can contain only
+ a single command.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 11}
+
+\erroronpage{311}{all}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{}
+ A lot of material in this chapter has been discussed in more detail
+ in the ``\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion''.
+
+\erroronpage{312}{and probably elsewhere as well}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``Bezier'' with ``B\'ezier''.
+
+\erroronpage{313}{last bullet line}{OBa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Eliminate the space in front of the comma.
+
+\erroronpage{313}{11.1.2, l.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Which appendix is in [2] and which one is in [87]?
+
+ FMi: see appendices G and H in [2], or [87]
+
+\erroronpage{316}{table 11.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Mention the dvips options:
+ ``-pp\# (single page)'' and ``-pp\#$_1$:\#$_2$ (page range)''.
+
+\erroronpage{318}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove the double quotes around ``clip='' and the quotes around ``='' in
+ the explanation of the clip parameter.
+ MGo: Add note that epsfig is now superseded by \LaTeX's graphics package.
+
+\erroronpage{319}{l.4 from bottom of 11.3}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace ``third column'' by ``first column''.
+
+\erroronpage{319}{l.4 from bottom of 11.3}{PvG}{1998/01/26}{}
+ Replace ``are given in the third column of table 11.2 on page 317''
+with ``are given by those values in the first column that correspond to
+the X's in the third column''.
+
+\erroronpage{320}{l.2 from bottom}{PvG}{1998/01/26}{}
+ Replace ``are given in the fourth column of table 11.2 on page 317''
+with ``are given by those values in the first column that correspond
+to the X's in the fourth column''.
+
+\erroronpage{321}{}{FPo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The caption for figure 11.4 could use some negative space between
+ ``Pre-'' and ``1991''.
+
+\erroronpage{321}{}{RSt}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Perhaps we should learn about history better: make the caption
+ of figure 11.4: ``Pre-1990 Europe''.
+
+\erroronpage{321}{code for figure 11-x}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The nineth line should be unindented:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ 6 \begin{minipage}
+ 7 \centering\epsfig
+ 8 \caption{Central
+ 9 ...\end{minipage}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{321}{}{PKr}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It would be better to show that the example is coded as a figure by
+ surrounding the code with |\begin{figure}| ... |\end{figure}|.
+
+\erroronpage{328}{description of \texttt{\textbackslash cbstart}}
+ {MOh}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove comma:
+ ``...the beginning of the region\u{,} which has to be flagged...''
+
+\erroronpage{328}{l.2 of 11.5.1}{PvG}{1998/01/26}{}
+ Replace ``are given in the fifth column of table 11.2 on page 317''
+with ``are given by those values in the first column that correspond to
+the X's in the fifth column''.
+
+\erroronpage{331}{}{BBe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ First figure using |\psboxit|, the dashes formed by
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ...--%
+ -- ...
+\end{verbatim}
+ segment into an emdash and a hyphen; just a tad peculiar looking.
+ MGo: We could use |---| (three dashes).
+
+\erroronpage{333}{table 11.6 last line}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Zapf Chancery is only available in italic thus the shape column
+ should show ``it'' and not ``n''.
+
+\erroronpage{335}{last line of 11.9.2}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``Symbols'' by ``Symbol'' since that is the name of the font.
+
+\erroronpage{335}{last line of 11.9.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove forward reference since it is to the next(!) section.
+
+\erroronpage{337}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``Style'' by ``Package'' in heading.
+
+\erroronpage{338}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Greek example, why not better use ``... ALFA\quad ...''?
+ MGo: Because I wanted to show that for some letters their is NO
+ simple correspondence, so that an ``unused'' Latin letter was chosen to
+ represent the Greek.
+
+\erroronpage{340}{l -8 in 11.9.7}{BBe}{1997/08/25}{}
+ The name is Kris Holmes, not Chris.
+
+\erroronpage{340}{l -3 in 11.9.7}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Use plural:
+ ``... typesetting your complete document with these font families.''.
+
+\erroronpage{340}{section 10.10}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{3}
+ This complete section should be rewritten to replace the references
+ to ``DC'' by ``EC'' and to reflect present situation with PSNFSS. Also
+ see section 10.5 (TeXBase 1 encoding) of ``\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion''.
+
+\erroronpage{341}{table 11.12}{UMu,FMi}{1998/07/15}{}
+ Codepoint 0x18 should contain ``perthousandzero'', not
+ ``perthousand''. However, note that nearly no PS font will have a
+ perthousandzero glyph thus with PS fonts the slot would need to
+ stay unused. For this reason some people place in this position the
+ perthousand and add the ligature ``percent'' ``perthousand'' $\to$
+ ``perthousand'' so that macros assuming perthousandzero in this
+ slot will work.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 12}
+
+\erroronpage{349}{section 12.1.4}{MSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Not explicitly said but important. The ``|key@visual|'' can be used on
+ any level i.e.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \indexentry{aa@\textit{aa}!bb@\textit{bb}!cc@\textit{cc}}{10}
+\end{verbatim}
+ will result in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \item \textit{aa}
+ \subitem \textit{bb}
+ \subsubitem \textit{cc}, 10
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{350}{first examples}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The last line of the first examples should read
+ ``\verb=\index{tabbing|)textit}='',
+ otherwise MakeIndex would complain about it.
+
+\erroronpage{350}{l.4 from bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``|{\it rose}|'' by ``|\textit{rose}|''. Not wrong but better.
+
+\erroronpage{351}{l.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``of the definition of the |\Prog| program.''
+ by: ``of the definition of the |\Prog| command.''.
+
+\erroronpage{351}{l.21}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{}
+ Replace: ``(see also the example on page 348)''
+ to: ``(see also the example at the bottom of page 347)''.
+
+\erroronpage{352}{l.2+3 }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace:
+ ``For example, you can define the command |\Index|, whose argument enters
+ its argument at the same time in the text and in the index.''
+ by:
+ ``For example, you can define the command |\Index|, whose argument is
+ entered at the same time in the text and in the index.''
+
+\erroronpage{352}{l.11 }{MDa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The example definition
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\Indextt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1@\texttt{#1}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ lacks a further closing brace.
+
+\erroronpage{353-354}{}{FMi,MGo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The figures shown in the makeindex processing example are not
+ reflecting what is in the source on p354 (one index entry was dropped
+ there).
+ Correction: Add in section ``Printing the Index'' an index
+ entry ``|\index{include index}|'' as follows:
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ \section{Printing the Index}
+ \index{Final production run}
+ During the final production run of a document the
+ index can be included\index{include index} by putting
+ a \Com{printindex} command at the position in the text
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{354}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The example should show a ``|\makeindex|'' command.
+
+\erroronpage{354}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The lefthand side of the example should use the verbatim environment
+ not the verbatimcmd environment which is only defined when the moreverb
+ package is used. Also the example should show
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}{..}{..}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{355}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should say (in one line):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ makeindex [-ciglqr]
+ [-o \emph{ind}] [-p \emph{no}] [-s \emph{sty}] [-t \emph{log}]
+ [\emph{idx0} \emph{idx1} ...]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{355}{ description of -g}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Not an error in the book but in the program: works correctly only in
+ version 2.13 of Makeindex (2.12 dies with larger files).
+ Also with 2.13 quote is set to `+' with the |-g| option.
+
+\erroronpage{355}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ -o \emph{ind} Take the file \emph{ind} as the output index file.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{355}{ description of -p n}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``\emph{no}'' should always be in italics not typewriter.
+ the words ``|any|'', ``|odd|'', and ``|even|'' should be always
+ in typewriter.
+
+\erroronpage{356}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ -s \emph{sty} Take the file \emph{sty} as the index style file.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{356}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ -t \emph{log} Use \emph{log} as the transcript file.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{356}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Extra `@' at position ...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{357}{Inconsistent page ..}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``\verb=\index{cat|iv}=''
+ by: ``\verb=\index{cat|see{animals}}=''.
+
+\erroronpage{358}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The description of escape is very confusing.
+ (FMi:) agreed, what about (FMi, MGo):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ quote symbol that escapes the character following it.
+ escape symbol without special meaning unless followed by
+ the quote character in which case that character
+ looses its special function and both will be printed.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{358}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace
+ ``(s) signals an attribute of type string, (c) of type char''
+ by:
+ ``(s) attribute of type string, (c) of type char (surrounded by single or
+ double quotes, respectively)''.
+
+\erroronpage{358}{end of para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add: Makeindex uses Unix string syntax in the style file. For this
+ reason one has to enter ``|\\|'' to get a single ``|\|'' in the output.
+
+\erroronpage{359}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Description of |delim_t| is missing.
+
+\erroronpage{359}{table}{WMr}{1998/08/14}{}
+ A description of the .ist-keywords
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ symhead_positive "Symbols"
+ symhead_negative "symbols"
+ numhead_positive "Numbers"
+ numhead_negative "numbers"
+ \end{verbatim}
+ is missing. They are obviously quite helpful if your document is
+ not in English.
+
+\erroronpage{359}{delim\_0}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``entry-page number delimiter at level 0''
+ by: ``delimiter between entry and first page number at level 0''.
+ (because the original is not understandable).
+
+\erroronpage{359}{}{FMi}{1998/01/18}{}
+ Description of |suffix_2p|, |suffix_3p|, and |suffix_mp| are
+ missing. If non-empty they replace a page range of length 2, 3, or
+ (m)any by the first page number followed by respective suffix.
+
+\erroronpage{359}{encap\_suffix}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Remove surplus dot in default: ``|}|''
+
+\erroronpage{359}{}{SMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In Makeindex 2.12 and later versions the value of
+ ``|page_precedence(s)|'' is ``rnaRA''.
+ Therefore the examples on page 363 should be the other way around.
+
+\erroronpage{359}{}{FMi}{1998/01/18}{}
+ Add an example for |suffix_2p|, |suffix_3p|, and |suffix_mp|.
+
+\erroronpage{362}{fig 12.7}{WMr}{1999/01/14}{}
+ That's actually just a suggestion:
+ If you take a close look at the leaders in the index, you'll find
+ that they don't line up horizontally, probably because |\dotfill| uses
+ |\cleaders| instead of |\leaders|. By defining something like
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\indexdotsep}{2.24}
+ \newcommand{\indexdotfill}{%
+ \leaders\hbox{$\m@th
+ \mkern\indexdotsep mu\hbox{.}%
+ \mkern\indexdotsep mu$}\hfill}
+\end{verbatim}
+ (stolen from the definition of |\@dottedtocline|) in a \texttt{.sty} and a
+ redefinition in the \texttt{.ist} file (the \texttt{preamble} declaration
+ might need to be placed on a single line though):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ preamble "\\begin{theindex}\n
+ \\providecommand{\\indexdotfill}{\\dotfill}\n"
+ delim_0 "\\ \\indexdotfill\\ "
+ ...
+\end{verbatim}
+ they come out better (I think).
+
+\erroronpage{363}{l.7}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{}
+ Replace ``rRnaA'' by ``rnaRA''
+
+\erroronpage{364}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Remind the reader how to use a file with an extension
+ different from |.idx| with Makeindex.
+
+\erroronpage{364+365}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The redefinition of theindex environment should set |\parindent| to zero
+ otherwise one ends up with all entries except the first being indented.
+
+\erroronpage{365}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ According to the text on page 365, the index in the example should
+ have three columns instead of two.
+
+FMi: change this sentence to something like this:
+ ``... we have used a redefined theindex environment similar to the one
+ shown in section 12.5 but with two columns and without the |\newpage|.''.
+
+\erroronpage{366}{fig 12.8}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ This looks like the spot the ten differences in the picture:
+ Replace: ``|\renewcommand[2]{\printindex}{%|''
+ by : the correct order of arguments :-(.
+ MGo: I see nothing wrong with the definition as it is written.
+
+ Add a ``|\|'' in front of |textbf| in definition of ``|\printindex|''.
+
+ Add a proper definition of ``|\Prog|'' and ``|\Com|'', they are not
+ the same as in fig 12.8.
+
+ Outline that ``|\renewenvironment{theindex}{...}{...}|''.
+
+ Indent |\input{#1.ind}| (this is cosmetics)
+ and don't use |\begin{center}| use |\section*| (cosmetics too).
+
+\erroronpage{367}{item 5}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``|\renewcommand{\indexproofstyle}{\footnotesize\itshape}|''
+ by: ``|\indexproofstyle{\footnotesize\itshape}|''.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 13}
+
+\erroronpage{373}{code middle of the page}{GGr,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ First example is missing a closing brace:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{%
+ [{#1\ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}]}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Second example would nowadays be better done with |\textsuperscript|:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{%
+ {\textsuperscript{#1}%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{373}{}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Nowadays the cite and overcite packages will sort the list of citations.
+
+\erroronpage{373}{l.-2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace the incorrect sentence by:
+ ``The punctuation characters (.,;:) will be moved in front of the
+ superscript, but not in front of quotation marks, if present, e.g.,
+ \verb=``The {\TeX}book'' \cite{Knuth}.= gives ``The
+ {\TeX}book''.$^8$, which may not be the desired format.''
+
+\erroronpage{375}{l.3 of 13.2}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{}
+ Replace: ``\textit{key}'' by ``\textit{cite\_key}''.
+
+\erroronpage{378}{}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The table of |.bst| files lists some styles named |phxxx.bst|, where
+ |xxx| stands for abbreviations like |aip|, |nf|, |pf|, |ppcf|, etc.
+ On CTAN these styles are now located in a subdirectory |phy-bstyles|
+ and they no longer carry the prefix |ph| in their name. It would
+ be a good idea to update this in the Companion, because otherwise
+ people looking for the names with the famous ``|quote site index|''
+ might not find them.
+
+ MGo: In fact I found them on CTAN under both names.
+ FMi: I'm right now reluctant to change anything since i wonder
+ whether those names will stay. It seems wrong to me that the names
+ (prefix) have changed.
+
+\erroronpage{378}{}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ |(ph)ppcf.bst| is described as ``a physics version of the apalike
+ BibTeX style''. This might be true somehow, but a better
+ describtion would be ``BibTeX style for Plasma Physics and
+ Controlled Fusion'', since that is the name of the journal the
+ abbreviation ppcf stands for (see |physjabb|).
+ |(ph)report.bst| is described as ``BibTeX style for internal
+ reports''. It might be a good idea to add some hint that this
+ probably refers to the Princeton Plasma Physics Lab or Princeton
+ University.
+ MGo: We could update that part in a future edition.
+
+\erroronpage{381}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Extend the source of example to include |abstract| and |keyword|
+ field which then can be shown in output of printbib on page 396.
+
+\erroronpage{381}{l.1 in Figure 13.4}{LFe}{2000/03/29}{}
+ ``\texttt{BiBTeX}'' should be ``\texttt{BibTeX}''.
+
+\erroronpage{385}{l.7}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``only works without modifications on UNIX'' is probably a bit too
+ harsh: It is meant that modifications are necessary for systems
+ such as MS-DOS that have file names with strict length limits.
+ By the way should UNIX not be typeset with small capitals?
+ MGo: No, ATT (and most publishers) spell it all uppercase.
+
+\erroronpage{385}{l.-18}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``combines two different'' by ``uses two different''
+ (the styles aren't really combined.)
+
+\erroronpage{386}{l.3 of 13.3.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``style'' by ``package''.
+
+\erroronpage{386}{4}{EFe}{1998/09/03}
+ ``Fernandez'' should be typed ``|Fern{\'a}ndez|''.
+
+\erroronpage{387}{l.1 }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The root file should be called |chapterbibexa.tex| (as in the
+ formatting example on page 385).
+
+\erroronpage{388}{caption}{RSt}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ For ``advisable precedure'' read ``advisable procedure''.
+
+\erroronpage{392}{start of para 4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``The argument of the |\bibliography| command must ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{392}{after example}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add: ``... after the BibTeX run unless the bibliography entries
+ themselves contain citations to other entries
+ (e.g., |note = {reviewed in \cite{..}}|).''
+
+\erroronpage{393}{bibextract}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The regular expression must (!) contain only lowercase characters
+ (even when looking for words like ``Adobe''), otherwise nothing
+ will be found. Thus our examples should read:
+\begin{verbatim}
+bibextract "" "postscript" bibfile(s) > new-bibfile
+bibextract "author|organization" "adobe" bibfile(s) > new-bibfile
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{393}{bibextract}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Another restriction:
+ ``You might have to clean the |.bib| files using
+ bibclean before bibextract finds correct entries.''
+
+\erroronpage{393}{l.6. bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ While the next command will only extract those entries containing
+ ``Adobe'' in the |author| or |organization| field.
+
+\erroronpage{393}{last para, 394 first para}{FMi,MGo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``citefind.sh'' by ``citefind''.
+ Replace ``citetags.sh'' by ``citetags''.
+
+\erroronpage{394}{l.4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``styles'' by ``files''.
+
+\erroronpage{394}{23}{EFe}{1998/09/03}{}
+ Add: \ldots and book\u{s} about\ldots
+
+\erroronpage{398}{para 3}{PVi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Say explicitly that quotes or braces *must* be omitted around
+ abbreviations like the name of the months.
+
+\erroronpage{399}{14}{EFe}{1998/09/03}
+ ``Lopez Fernandez'' should be typed ``|L{\'o}pez Fern{\'a}ndez|''.
+
+\erroronpage{400}{4,5,7}{EFe}{1998/09/03}
+ ``Lopez Fernandez'' should be typed ``|L{\'o}pez Fern{\'a}ndez|''.
+
+\erroronpage{400}{9 from bottom}{EFe}{1998/09/03}
+ ``Maria'' should be typed ``|Mar{\'i}a|''.
+
+\erroronpage{401}{l.1}{PVi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Remove comma in ``and others,''.
+
+\erroronpage{403}{}{???}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ A comma is missing after: ``@article(tub-87,''
+
+\erroronpage{403}{para 1}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace all ``.bib style'' with ``.bib file''.
+
+\erroronpage{404}{1st example}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Use |\providecommand| instead of |\newcommand|.
+
+\erroronpage{413}{add.period}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Should read: ``adds dot to string unless that string ends with `.',
+ `?', or `!'\,''.
+
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 14}
+
+\erroronpage{424}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add ``|\Finale|'' to the box with ``|\StopEventually{final text}|''
+ since they belong together.
+
+\erroronpage{425}{para 3 (explanation of
+ \texttt{\textbackslash MakeShortVerb})}{SBe}{1997/06/01}{}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ change ... (the character |"| is often ... may prefer \verb="|"=).
+ to ... (the character |"| is often ... may prefer \verb=|=).
+
+ change ... just type |\DeleteShortVerb {\c}|.
+ to ... just type |\DeleteShortVerb{\c}|.
+
+ change ... the abbreviated cform, ...
+ to ... the abbreviation form, ...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{426}{figure 14.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should be |\DocInput{docexam.doc}| because .dtx is reserved for
+ files whose documentation can be produced by simply running them
+ through \LaTeX.
+
+\erroronpage{426}{l.4 of section 14.2.7.}{PAp}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``You should run the file thought ...''
+ by ``You should run the file through ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{427}{figure 14.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Better use ``|\ProvidesPackage|'' instead of ``|\typeout|'' messages.
+
+\erroronpage{427}{figure 14.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The |\item| in the definition of ``docsampleenv'' should be removed.
+ Also: the documentation of ``docsampleenv'' is incorrect.
+
+\erroronpage{429}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace the heading: ``Document structure and validation support''
+ by: ``Document structure commands''.
+
+\erroronpage{429}{Table 14.1, item: \texttt{\textbackslash DeleteShortVerb}}
+ {VSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add argument: ``|\DeleteShortVerb{\char}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{430}{Table 14.1, item: \texttt{\textbackslash MakeShortVerb}}
+ {VSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add backslash: ``|\MakeShortVerb{\char}|''.
+
+\erroronpage{432}{ table 14.1}{MDa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ In the last section of this table, ``Layout and typesetting parameters'',
+ the commands ``|\tt|'' and ``|\sl|'' appear (cf. your own remark in the
+ errata file regarding page 350).
+
+\erroronpage{432}{table 14.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ We should also describe the \LaTeX\ counters IndexColumns (number of
+ columns in the index) and GlossaryColumns (number of columns in the
+ history listing).
+
+\erroronpage{432ff}{chapter 14.3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Since \LaTeX\ 95/12/01 docstrip is able to generate more than one file
+ in a single run. This extended functionality is currently described
+ only in the documented source code, i.e., in the file |docstrip.dtx|.
+
+\erroronpage{433}{para 6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Not only NFSS2 but the whole \LaTeX\ (2e) is now distributed using
+ the doc system.
+
+\erroronpage{433}{para 1 of 14.3.1}{SBe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Change font of \% in:
+ ``... but preceded with two \% characters.''.
+
+\erroronpage{433}{Section 14.3.1}{MSc,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Mention that |\preamble| ...|\endpreamble| is meant for straight text and
+ that nearly no command will work between. One can use |\string||\foo| to
+ put out a command name literally.
+
+\erroronpage{434}{l.10}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace: ``|\batchfile| Batch file commands can be ...''
+ by: ``Batch file commands, like |\generateFile|, can be ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{434}{l.-9}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace the sentence: ``Note that these tags must ...''
+ by: ``The tags must be placed at the beginning of the line
+ preceded by a |%|, e.g.,''.
+
+\erroronpage{434}{l.-2}{SBe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Change space after ``!'' from inter-sentence to inter-word space.
+
+\erroronpage{437+438}{}{ASc}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In the second last code line the |\@@end| should be replaced by
+ |\csname @@end\endcsname| since otherwise |\@@end| isn't recognised
+ in most situations. This also means that the checksum changes to 15.
+
+\CHAPTER{Appendix A}
+
+\erroronpage{440}{second example}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ It should better be: ``|\newcommand{\PsI}{\Ps\index{\Ps}}|''
+
+\erroronpage{440}{second example}{FMi}{1999/04/30}{}
+ second line of |\EPsI| has one closing brace too many, i.e., should be
+ |\index{\PS!Encapsulated}\index{EPS}}|
+
+\erroronpage{440}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ As a general comment we should remark that when nesting command
+ definitions, e.g., a |\renewcommand| inside a |\newenvironment| one has to
+ double the |#| characters denoting the arguments when referring to the
+ arguments of the inner definition, for instance,
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newenvironment{foo}[1]
+ { ... #1 % argument of environment foo
+ \renewcommand\bar[2]{ ...
+ ##1 % argument of command \bar
+ #1 % argument of environment foo
+ ##2 % argument of command \bar
+ }%
+ ... #1 % argument of environment foo
+ }{...}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{440}{following}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ |\newcommand| and |\renewcommand| now support a starred form which
+ makes it illegal to use |\par| (or an empty line) in the argument(s)
+ of the command being defined. This can be helpful for tracking
+ down errors of missing closing argument braces and can be used if
+ a command is intended to be used only within paragraphs.
+
+\erroronpage{440}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Use the same formula in the last two examples to show the advantage
+ of |\ensuremath| better.
+
+\erroronpage{442}{last line of A.1.1}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{}
+Add the reference (see section 13.5.4 on page 404) at the end of the
+line.
+
+\erroronpage{446}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add to the description of |\newcounter|:
+ ``It also defines |\thenewctr| to be |\arabic{newctr}|.''.
+
+\erroronpage{447}{}{MSc}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ A counter cannot be larger than 9 if used with |\fnsymbol|.
+
+\erroronpage{447}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ All the |\the...| commands in the examples should be defined with
+ |\renewcommand|.
+
+\erroronpage{449}{Table A.1}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{}
+For consistency with the previous definition of pt and the following
+definition of dd change: (72 bp = 1 in) \> $= \frac{1}{72}$in .
+FMi: or perhaps the other way around?
+
+\erroronpage{449}{table A.1}{MSe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The cicero length in millimetres is wrong:
+ Replace: ``4.531 mm'' by ``4.513 mm''.
+
+\erroronpage{449}{l.4}{EPi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Remove accent from Did\^ot.
+
+\erroronpage{450}{table A.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ |\hfill| is better described as a ``rubber space'' not a ``rubber length''.
+
+\erroronpage{454}{l.7}{UGo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The optional arguments to |\raisebox| are exchanged: ``height'' comes
+ before ``depth''.
+
+\erroronpage{454}{para 2, l.3}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{}
+ Replace: ``by specifying a height and depth ...''
+ by: ``by specifying a \textit{height} and \textit{depth} ...''.
+
+\erroronpage{456}{last para}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Replace: ``In the case below'' by ``In the next case'' since the next
+ example is on the following page.
+
+\erroronpage{459}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add ``x333x'' after both |\usebox{\myboxb}| commands in the example
+ (cosmetics!).
+
+\erroronpage{461}{table A.4}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ For ``|\Requirepackage|'' read ``|\RequirePackage|'' in the explanation of
+ |\LoadClass|.
+
+\erroronpage{470}{text l.5 from bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Replace ``(real or integer)'' by ``integer''. They can't be real!
+
+\erroronpage{470}{text l.3 from bottom}{RCr}{1997/08/21}{}
+ Replace ``more that twenty'' by ``more than twenty''.
+
+\erroronpage{470}{A.5}{CRo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ In the description of the ifthen package, no clear distinction is
+ made between those commands which can be used only in a
+ {test}-argument, and those which are for other uses.
+
+\erroronpage{472}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The index entries in the |.idx| file would actually look like this
+ (remove the surplus ``page:AAAA1'' in the middle of them):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \indexentry{AAAA!both}{472}
+ \indexentry{AAAA!indexentry}{472}
+ \indexentry{AAAA!indexonly}{472}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{474}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add a remark that one can't use |\isodd| to directly test |\value{page}|
+ and expect correct information because the value of this counter
+ isn't always correct due to \TeX's asynchronous output routine.
+
+\CHAPTER{Appendix B}
+
+\erroronpage{475}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Maybe rename the heading to ``\TeX\ Software and User Group information''.
+
+\erroronpage{475}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add information about the possibility to get the CTAN software on
+ CD:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \bibitem{primetime:VBr94}
+ Vicki Brown, editor.
+ \newblock {\em Prime Time {\TeX}cetera}, volume~1.
+ \newblock Prime Time Freeware, Sunnyvale, CA, 1994.
+ \newblock Contains CD with CTAN software.
+\end{verbatim}
+ MGo: Now (end of 1997) there are various other CD's which offer
+ (parts of) CTAN and/or ready-to-run \TeX\ environments for UNIX,
+ Windows, DOS, Mac, etc.
+
+\erroronpage{477}{l 13}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Should read: ``contents of the morebin \u{zip} archive on \u{y}our
+ local node.''.
+
+\erroronpage{479}{under b.2 mail servers}{BBe} {1997/06/01}{3}
+ I am irked by the difference in the depth of the underline under
+ ``end'' right after ``send help'';
+ maybe you could be persuaded to use a strut?
+
+\CHAPTER{Bibliography}
+
+\erroronpage{481}{[1], l.10}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Addison\u{-}Wesley, 1992
+
+\erroronpage{491}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ The name is Peter Vollenweider; somebody inverted the `w'.
+
+\CHAPTER{Index}
+
+\erroronpage{}{}{JKn}{1997/06/01}{}
+ I suggest to index the table 5.7 (page 127) under ``Language''
+ and the table on top of page 140 under ``S''.
+
+\erroronpage{}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ There should be entries for all encodings, |OT1|, |T1|, |OML|,
+ |OMS|, |OMX|, pointing at least to page 192, perhaps to others.
+
+\erroronpage{493}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ The two funny looking entries of the form ``|\, 220|'' actually should
+ be ``|\{, 220|''
+ ``|\}, 220|''.
+
+\erroronpage{497}{}{GGr}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add entry for ``Blackboard bold'' pointing to page 218.
+ Also add one pointing to page 208 (MPi).
+ And add a similar entry for |\Bbb| (MPi).
+
+\erroronpage{500}{}{JBa}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``Commutative Diagrams'' should point to 233-235.
+
+\erroronpage{500}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ |\cornersize| is incorrectly indexed as ``rigid length''.
+
+\erroronpage{500}{dd}{MCl}{1997/11/06}{}
+ Did\^{o}t \> Didot
+
+\erroronpage{501}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ |\DeclareFontSubstitution| should have bold entry to page 203.
+
+\erroronpage{501}{}{MCl}{1997/11/19}{}
+ Did\^{o}t \> Didot
+
+\erroronpage{506}{}{CRo}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Add index entry for ``Fragile command'' and ``Commands, fragile''
+ to point to 246 and 471.
+
+\erroronpage{507}{}{BBe}{1997/08/25}{}
+ The name is Kris Holmes, not Chris.
+
+\erroronpage{508}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Index entry for |\IndexMin| should be a ``rigid length''.
+
+\erroronpage{509}{}{PvO,FMi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Reference 249 for |\left| should be 248. (This is probably true for
+ other entries pointing to the example section of chapter 8, because
+ index entries to the examples are placed after the example.)
+
+\erroronpage{517}{}{OBo}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Entries for ``Page header'', ``Header of page'', ``Page footer'', and
+ ``Footer of page'' should also point to pages 91 and 96 and perhaps
+ also to page 20 where table 2.2 describes how sectioning commands
+ relate to page headers.
+
+\erroronpage{519}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ Environment supertabular is incorrectly indexed under |\supertabular|.
+
+\erroronpage{520}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Reference 249 for |\right| should be 248.
+
+\erroronpage{525-527}{}{BBe}{1997/06/01}{}
+ I was a little surprised to find the listing for ``\TeX\ users group''
+ where one would expect to find ``TUG'' in the index, although ``TUG''
+ doesn't appear in the entry. I also would have expected to see
+ p.260 listed with that entry, considering the reference there to
+ the TWGMLC and the Portland meeting.
+
+ The people who were acknowledged in the preface don't show up in
+ the index. Although it's not necessary, of course, Knuth did
+ include his acknowledgees and sources of quotes in the \TeX book
+ index, so there's a precedent.
+
+\erroronpage{526}{}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{}
+ Add index entry ``Title page'' to point to 452.
+
+\erroronpage{527}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3}
+ ``|\unitlength|'' is incorrectly indexed as a command.
+
+\CHAPTER{Production Notes}
+
+\end{erratalist}
+
+
+
+\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or
+ omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.]
+\contributor{ADu}{Alain Dupuis}
+\contributor{ASc}{Andreas Schwab}
+\contributor{BBe}{Barbara Beeton}
+\contributor{BDe}{Bernard Desruisseaux}
+\contributor{BFr}{Bert Frederiks}
+\contributor{BGa}{Bernard Gaulle}
+\contributor{BNa}{Blaise Nkwenti-Azeh}
+\contributor{BRa}{Bernd Raichle}
+\contributor{CKr}{Claudia Kraft}
+\contributor{CMi}{Christel Mittelbach}
+\contributor{CRo}{Chris Rowley}
+\contributor{DAr}{Donald Arseneau}
+\contributor{DBo}{David Boersma}
+\contributor{DCa}{David Carlisle}
+\contributor{DEl}{Daniel Elvin}
+\contributor{DKa}{David Kastrup}
+\contributor{DKra}{Dieter Kraft}
+\contributor{DKre}{Dieter Kreft}
+\contributor{DKu}{David Kustrin}
+\contributor{DMa}{Daniel Mainz}
+\contributor{DOs}{David Osborne}
+\contributor{DRo}{Denis Roegel}
+\contributor{EFe}{Eduardo Fern\'andez}
+\contributor{EPi}{Eric Picheral}
+\contributor{EMS}{SOUIDI EL Mamoun}
+\contributor{FGo}{Frans Goddijn}
+\contributor{FJe}{Frank Jensen}
+\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach}
+\contributor{FPo}{Frank Poppe}
+\contributor{FVi}{Frode Viste}
+\contributor{GFe}{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio}
+\contributor{GGr}{George Graetzer}
+\contributor{GRo}{Guenter Rote}
+\contributor{GSa}{Gernot Salzer}
+\contributor{GZi}{Georg Zimmermann}
+\contributor{HAs}{Helmer Aslaksen}
+\contributor{IAN}{Ignacio Arenaza Nuno}
+\contributor{JAd}{Jeff Adler}
+\contributor{JBa}{Jonas Barklund}
+\contributor{JBr}{Johannes Braams}
+\contributor{JHa}{Jay Hammond}
+\contributor{JKn}{J\"org Knappen}
+\contributor{JPe}{Joachim Pense}
+\contributor{JSa}{Julio Sanchez}
+\contributor{JvM}{Jan Van Mieghem}
+\contributor{JWe}{Jon Wells}
+\contributor{KML}{Kathleen M. Lyle}
+\contributor{KRa}{Kalle Rato}
+\contributor{KSe}{Karl Seybold}
+\contributor{KSi}{Kimmo Sipila}
+\contributor{LFe}{Luca Ferrante}
+\contributor{LLa}{Leslie Lamport}
+\contributor{LWi}{Linda Wilson}
+\contributor{MCl}{Matthias Clasen}
+\contributor{MDa}{Mats Dahlgren}
+\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens}
+\contributor{MMu}{Martin C M\"uller}
+\contributor{MPi}{Mike Piff}
+\contributor{MOh}{Marcus W. Ohlhaut}
+\contributor{MOs}{Martin J. Osborne}
+\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr\"oder}
+\contributor{MSe}{Michael R. Semple}
+\contributor{NBe}{Nelson Beebe}
+\contributor{NPo}{Nico Poppelier}
+\contributor{OBa}{Oeyvind Bakke}
+\contributor{OBo}{Oscar Bosman}
+\contributor{PAp}{Pedro Aphalo}
+\contributor{PvG}{Philip von Guggenberg}
+\contributor{PHa}{Paul Hafner}
+\contributor{PKr}{Peter Kruijt}
+\contributor{PBL}{Peter Busk Laursen}
+\contributor{PNu}{Peter N\"uchter}
+\contributor{PVi}{Philip A. Viton}
+\contributor{PvO}{Piet van Oostrum}
+\contributor{RBa}{Rosemary Bailey}
+\contributor{RCr}{Robert Cristel}
+\contributor{RdB}{Rob den Braasem}
+\contributor{RHa}{Ralph Hangleiter}
+\contributor{RPo}{Rama Porrat}
+\contributor{RSa}{Robert Sakic}
+\contributor{RSt}{Rebecca Stiels}
+\contributor{RWa}{Richard Walker}
+\contributor{RWo}{Reinhard Wonneberger}
+\contributor{SBe}{Stephan Bergmann}
+\contributor{SKi}{Steve King}
+\contributor{SKo}{Siegfried K\"olbig}
+\contributor{SMi}{Stefan Mintert}
+\contributor{TBo}{Tilmann B\"o\ss}
+\contributor{TMa}{Torsten Martinsen}
+\contributor{TRa}{T.V. Raman}
+\contributor{UGo}{Ulrich Goldschmitt}
+\contributor{UJa}{Ulrich Jahnz}
+\contributor{UMu}{Ulrich M\"uller}
+\contributor{UVi}{Ulrik Vieth}
+\contributor{VBr}{Volker Brandt}
+\contributor{VSc}{Volker RW Schaa}
+\contributor{War}{Warwick Conference (March 21-22 1994)}
+\contributor{WLe}{Werner Lemberg}
+\contributor{WMr}{Wilhelm M\"uller}
+\end{multicols}
+
+Many other people send us corrections for errors already found.
+Thanks to all of you!
+
+If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+ frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org
+ goossens@cern.ch \\
+\end{quote}
+preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e.,
+\begin{flushleft}
+|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|%
+ \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\
+ \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata}
+\end{flushleft}
+Here is an example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{1997/06/01}{}
+ ``LaTeX" should be typeset ``\LaTeX".
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+
+**********************************
+* *
+* Errors in first printing *
+* *
+**********************************
+
+
+
+========== General ===========
+
+* Some source files in the LaTeX2e distribution have got new names,
+for example latex.tex -> lt....dtx (many files). The final
+distribution is still under construction.
+
+
+========== Front matter ===========
+
+-* Title Page
+ Drop IPS, from affiliation of Samarin (just leave ISO)
+
+-* Copyright page
+ Add second printing
+
+-* Table of Contents, Page xviii
+ 10.5 should read "Packages Based on epic
+
+-* Table of Contents, Page xxi
+ Page number of Bibliography should be 481
+
+-* Table of Contents, Page xxiii
+ 5.8 A comparison (not A Comparison)
+
+
+========== Chapter 1 ===========
+
+-* Page 3 last para (SKi)
+ files containing the structures and layout definitions (extension
+ .sty) should also include extension .cls
+
+-* Page 4 (JSa)
+ Add clo to LaTeX layout & structure file extensions
+
+-* Page 5 third par (GGr)
+ In Textures, the transcript file has no extension.
+
+
+========== Chapter 2 ===========
+
+-* Page 13 (PHa)
+ 4th bullet item: define your own (not OUR own)
+
+-* Page 15 (JSa)
+ 1994/08/02 should also be 1994/08/01
+
+-* Page 29 (NPo)
+ fig 2.9: braces round argument `title' and `toc_entry' missing.
+ (very strange this)
+
+-* Page 37, l.6 below Table (GGr)
+ Extension .mtc<N> will not work in DOS (Windows).
+
+-* Page 44 (JSa,FMi)
+ The default for \reftextfaraway was missing.
+ Also changed the local adaption example to use \RequirePackage
+with a reference to Appendix A.
+
+========== Chapter 3 ===========
+
+-* Page 48 (LLa)
+ The paragraph above the example unfortunately doesn't describe the
+example any longer, it describes an old version of it.
+
+-* Page 52 (OBa)
+ \fuzzy should be \fussy (3 lines above title 3.1.5...)
+
+-* Page 52 (SKi)
+ The multispace package was written by Stephen (not Stephan) Page.
+
+-* Page 59 (FMi)
+ The representation of \labelitemiv is missing. This seems to be
+a``correction'' of the printer people since the dot is in the
+PostScript file!
+
+-* Page 62 (MGo)
+ More general (and more correct) description of general list
+parameters. Especially the relation between the \labelwidth and
+\itemindent lengths are made clearer.
+
+-* Page 65 (DCa)
+ The labels in the Mentry env are aligned on the top of their *boxes*
+not on their first baselines. (A buggy \parbox[t] implementation on
+the way to LaTeX2e)
+
+-* Page 67 (NPo)
+ \begin{verbatimtab}[...] instead of \verbatimtab[...] since we
+describe an environment
+
+-* Page 70 (FMi)
+ verbatimwrite is incorrectly mentioned as a command but it is an
+environment. Also correct index entry.
+
+-* Page 71 (DCa)
+ stepping the mpfootnote counter
+should be
+ stepping the footnote counter
+
+
+========== Chapter 4 ===========
+
+-* Page 86 (FMi)
+ testpage.tex in LaTeX2e now asks interactively for the paper your
+printer uses so there isn't any need to use testa4.tex any longer.
+
+-* Page 94-95 (FMi)
+ Replace para starting at the bottom with:
+The marking commands work reasonably well for right markers ``numbered
+within'' left markers (for example, when the left marker is changed by
+a \Lcs{chapter} command and the right marker is changed by a
+\Lcs{section} command). However, it produces somewhat anomalous
+results if a \Lcs{markboth} command is preceded by some other mark
+command on the same page---see the page receiving \texttt{L5 R3.2} in
+Figure~\vref{fig:pagemarkers}. This figure shows schematically which
+left and right markers are generated for pages being shipped out.
+
+-* Page 95 (FMi)
+ Replace the last four lines in figure 4.3 with the following five
+ lines:
+\markboth{L4}{} {L4}{}
+\markboth{L5}{} {L5}{}
+\newpage% ----page break ---- L5 R3.2
+\markright{R5.1} {L5}{R5.1}
+\end{document} L5 R5.1
+
+
+
+-* Page 97 (GGr,FMi)
+ Replace begin of second para with:
+
+Some \LaTeX{} commands, like \Lcs{chapter}, use a \Lcs{thispagestyle}
+command to automatically switch to the \Psty{plain} page style, thus
+overriding the page style currently in effect. To customize such
+pages use the \Pmsty{fancyplain} page style. This page style sets up
+\Psty{fancy} for normal pages and in addition ...
+
+-* Page 98 (EPi)
+ \usestylefile{fancyheadings} (in bottom example)
+should be
+ \usepackage{fancyheadings}
+
+-* Page 99 (EPi)
+ \usestylefile{fancyheadings} (in figure 4.6)
+should be
+ \usepackage{fancyheadings}
+
+-* Page 99 (FMi)
+ \samepage is considered obsolete in LaTeX2e and will not be
+documented by Leslie Lamport in his book; the relevant paragraph has
+been rephrased.
+
+
+========== Chapter 5 ===========
+
+-* Page 111 (OBa)
+ "substracting" should be "subtracting" (12th line from top)
+
+-* Page 120 (DKre,FPo)
+ Bring Example text and table 5.3 in synch
+
+-* Page 121 (DKre,FPo)
+ Bring Example text and table 5.4 in synch
+
+-* Page 123 (FMi,FPo)
+ Bring Example text and table 5.5 in synch
+
+-* Page 127 (FPo)
+ The bottom left figure seems to have a quote before Tsonga
+This is a printing artefact.
+
+-* Page 127 (PvO)
+ Bottom left figure, there is also some spurious ink before
+ Croatian.
+
+-* Page 127 Table 5.7 (FPo)
+ In the last `page' the code for Tsonga appears as 'ts, with a quote
+in front of it. It might be a blob of ink, but it looks very much like
+a quote. (It is a blob of extra ink, and this was missed by the
+printer, compare p59. FMi:-)
+
+-* Page 128 (FMi)
+ Lowercase word "comparison" in caption for table 5.8
+ Also correct lot entry page xxiii.
+
+-* Page 133 (MGo)
+ In table 5.9 URW is misspelled as URM
+
+
+========== Chapter 6 ===========
+
+-* Page 151 (MGo)
+ Figure 6.2, the vertical lines of the box surrounding the map
+ are partly invisible (printing problem)
+
+
+========== Chapter 7 ===========
+
+-* Page 170 l. 9, f.b. (GGr)
+ Change sentence to: Font metric files (i.e., .tfm files) are loaded
+for all intermediate typefaces, even if these fonts are never used.
+
+-* Page 171 caption (GGr)
+ Change
+ easy memorable
+ to
+ easily memorizable
+
+-* Page 171 (FMi,LLa)
+ The default for \nocorrlist was changed to
+\newcommand{\nocorrlist}{,.}
+ in the LaTeX distribution because :; do not look right with the
+default LaTeX fonts from the Computer Modern families.
+
+-* Page 177 (FMi,LLa)
+ The example shows that \mathnormal produces italic numbers. This is
+only true for the Lucida Math Fonts used in the Companion. Thus, the
+following footnote should be added to the expanation:
+ \footnote{With the default setup of \LaTeXe{} using Computer Modern
+math fonts, \Lmcs{mathnormal} will produce old style numerals, not the
+italic ones shown in the example, where Lucida is used.}
+
+-* Page 180 in 7.5, l. 3 (GGr)
+ section B should be Appendix B
+
+-* Page 180 l. 3 f.b. (GGr,FMi)
+ `Consequentially' should be `Consequently';
+ in the same sentence change `used' to `uses'.
+
+-* Page 186 l. 8 f.b. (GGr)
+ Add space before `This'
+
+-* Page 187 last line (GGr)
+ Captialize: new font selection scheme
+
+-* Page 191 last line (FMi)
+ Add: For this to work the encoding OT2 must be declared in the
+preamble or a package file.
+
+-* Page 194 (FMi)
+ \cmdunh10.tfm
+should be
+ cmdunh10.tfm
+
+-* Page 195, 197 (FMi)
+ Again all .tfm files shouldn't have \ in front of their names
+
+-* Page 201 (MGo)
+ substract should be subtract on second line explaining \fontdimen4
+
+-* Page 202 (FMi)
+ For peamble read preamble
+
+-* Page 204 (GGr)
+ fontdef.tex was renamed to fontdef.ltx in the final distribution
+ (also correct index entry)
+
+-* Page 205, last para (SMi)
+ [...], you first have make the typeface [...]
+should be
+ [...], you first have to make the typeface [...]
+
+-* Page 211 (FMi)
+ Warning message "Check substitution defaults for ..." was changed to
+"Checking defaults for ...". Also change \DeclareFontEncoding to
+\DeclareFontSubstitution in last sentence of explanation for this
+message.
+
+-* Page 211 (FMi)
+ The message "Don't use ..." was changed to "Command ... invalid in
+math mode".
+
+-* Page 211 (FMi)
+ The message "Encoding scheme <name> changed to <new name> in ..."
+has changed to "Encoding <name> has changed to <new name> for ..."
+
+-* Page 213 (FMi)
+ New message added:
+
+\erritem{Overwriting \m{something} in version \m{name} ...}
+
+A declaration, like \Lcs{SetSymbolFont} or \Lcs{DeclareMathAlphabet},
+has changed the assignment of font shapes to \m{something} (a symbol
+font or a math alphabet) in the math version \m{name}.
+
+-* Page 214 (FMi)
+ New message added:
+
+\erritem{Size substitutions with differences up to \m{size} have occured}
+
+This message will appear at the end of the run in case \NFSS{}
+selected at least one significantly different size because the
+requested size was not available. The \m{size} is the maximum
+deviation that was needed.
+
+-* Page 214 (FMi)
+ New message added:
+
+\erritem{Some font shapes were not available, defaults substituted}
+
+This message will appear at the end of the run in case \NFSS{}
+had to use automatic font substitution for some font shapes.
+
+
+========== Chapter 8 ===========
+
+-* Page 215 (FMi,MGo)
+ Added a reference to George~Gr\"atzer's book on AmSLaTeX.
+ Also add bibliography [95] (see bibliography section later)
+
+-* Page 218 (DCa)
+ \o
+ should be
+ o
+
+-* Page 219 (DCa)
+ `blank' \rown
+ should be
+ /-\ \frown (didnt this one create a TeX error :-)
+ (FMi no because of TeX's \csname bug :-( )
+
+
+-* Page 219, 222 (DRo,FMi)
+ The \varnothing and \emptyset do show the wrong
+character, ie need exchanging.
+
+-* Page 220 (DCa)
+ { should be \{
+ } should be \}
+
+-* Page 220, Table 8.13. (LLa)
+ Is that \digamma right? It looks an awful lot like a slanted
+ F to me.
+This is unfortunately true. The Lucida Fonts do not contain that
+character and we overlooked that the font setup simply points to the
+slanted F.
+
+-* Page 222, Table 8.20 (FMi)
+ The characters \Game \Finv \Bbbk \diagdown \diagup are now part of
+amssymb.sty
+
+-* Page 231 (DCa)
+ The \biggl( in the scope of \begin{large} is *smaller* than the
+normalsize one!
+
+-* Page 238 (DCa)
+ The examples of split environment with and without the ctagsplt
+option do not work as the linewidth is too narrow, so in both cases
+the tag apears on the line before the display.
+
+-* Page 241 (PHa)
+ The typeset equation just before (8.41') should have a tag: '
+ (This is once more a printer problem. the tag ' is in the PS file
+and must have been removed by somebody manually)
+To avoid this problem the example was changed to show $*$ twice.
+
+ * Page 243 (FMi)
+Replace fist sentence of 8.6.5 with:
+ A few options are recognized by the amsmath package and the class
+ files coming with AmS-LaTeX.
+
+-* Page 244 ... 251 (FMi)
+ The vertical lines in the examples (mentioned on this page) are all
+missing on the final printout. Another printing problem.
+
+-* Page 250 (MGo)
+ section 8.7.6: some space (\thinspace) should be inserted in
+ front of the semicolon (;) at the end of formula 8.57 and its
+ unnumbered equivalent (fourth line from bottom).
+
+========== Chapter 9 ===========
+
+-* Page 270 (BNa)
+ 8th line of example should read
+ \\\today\end{center} instead of \\\today{center}
+
+-* Pages 272 and 274 (BGa, MGo)
+ Use correct (Lucida, not poor man's) guillemets
+ \symb{13}, \symb{14} for French
+
+========== Chapter 10 ===========
+
+-* Several pages have index entries added (MGo)
+
+-* Page 277 (LWi)
+ In CTAN version of shadow.sty \shadowbox is called \shadox
+ In example replace also \shadowdim by \sdim. (Unfortunately we used
+ one of the many variants of this package.)
+
+-* Page 278 (DCa)
+ This is a ovalbox
+should be
+ This is an ovalbox
+
+-* Page 280-281 (MGo,FMi)
+ Describe new command \qbezier, and replace old bezier
+ style and command with \qbezier commands in examples.
+
+-* Page 303 (FMi)
+ Change section heading 10.5 to "Packages Based on epic"
+ Change also table of contents on page xviii
+
+-* Page 305 (FMi)
+ The lower picture should be turned 180 degrees.
+
+-* Page 307 (DCa)
+ A tree graph ican bedrawn
+ should be
+ A tree graph can be drawn
+
+========== Chapter 11 ===========
+
+-* Page 314 (MGo)
+ Figure 11.1: some of the dotted vertical and horizontal lines
+ indicating the coordinate system are part invisible
+ (printing problem)
+
+-* Page 318 (DKu)
+ first line of boxed description of \epsfig command,
+ rotate=angle,% should be angle=degrees,%
+
+-* Page 321 (MGo)
+ Figure 11.5 The vertical lines at the right-hand side of the
+ is invisible (printing problem)
+
+-* Page 333 (PHa)
+ Footnote in Table 11.6: ZapfChancery (not ZaptChancery)
+ Tag entries for Sans Serif fonts as sl (slanted) instead
+ of it (italic) (FPo)
+
+-* Page 333 last line (GGr)
+ Change to: The mapping between the layout in a PostScript font and
+the font encoding needed by TeX ...
+
+-* Page 340 (PHa)
+ 6th line before the end of 11.9.7: Hyphen missing in AMS-TeX
+
+-* Page 340 (DKra,FMi)
+ para 4, line 5: ... (see tables 8.2 to 8.20 beginning in page 218)
+
+========== Chapter 12 ===========
+
+-* Page 359 (DCa)
+ postamble command preceeding the index
+ should be
+ postamble command following the index
+
+-* Page 360 (PHa)
+ last line of 12.4.2: the correct page reference is 355, not 353.
+
+========== Chapter 13 ===========
+
+-* Page 393, middle of page (KML)
+ Utah Univeristy should read Utah University
+
+-* Page 401, 5th line from bottom (SMi}
+ left braces missing in {G{\"o}}del}, should be {G{\"{o}}del}
+
+========== Chapter 14 ===========
+
+-* Pages 435-438 (FMi)
+ By convention .dtx files are files that can be directly processed by
+LaTeX (by making the `driver code' the first docstrip module)
+
+========== Appendix A ===========
+
+-* Page 446 (DCa)
+(\stepcounter description)
+ oldcr
+should be
+ oldctr
+
+-* Pages 448 and 449 (MGo)
+ All occurrences of the string "\cmd", representing the LaTeX
+ lengths parameters should not have the \ (backslash) to
+ be compatible with the syntax used in Lamport and the rest
+ of the Companion (Lamport assumes that cmd implicitly implies
+ the backslash).
+
+-* Page 458, 2 para (MGo)
+ innner-pos should be inner-pos
+
+-* Page 459 (DCa, MGo)
+You use `cmd' for \sbox, but `\cmd' for lrbox.
+Should be 'cmd' throughout to be compatible with Lamport's syntax.
+
+-* Page 461 (FMi)
+ Add \ProvidesFile to table.
+ \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{release} should read
+ \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{class}
+
+-* Page 462 (FMi)
+ Describe \ProvidesFile. This is like \ProvidesPackage but you need
+ to give the full file name including extension. It is meant for
+ files that are neither packages nor classes but want to identify
+ themselves too.
+
+-* Page 467 (War)
+ \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{release} should read
+ \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{class}
+
+-* Page 468, second line of example (DOs)
+ \NeedsTeXformat{LaTeX2e} should read \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+-* Page 474 (DCa)
+ \ifodd
+should be
+ \isodd
+also correct index entries
+
+========== Appendix B ===========
+
+-* Page 475 (PHa)
+ line -3: where Jones' TeX-index
+ ^ (insert apostrophe)
+
+-* Page 476 (NPo)
+ - CTAN host in Germany has changed to ftp.dante.de
+ - correct location of TeX-index file on ftp.dante.de (MGo)
+
+ * Page 476 (ASc)
+ The host pit-manager.mit.edu has changed its name to rtfm.mit.edu.
+
+-* Page 479 (MGo) update for Dante
+ - their mail server is at ftpmail@dante.de,
+ - send a message containing the word "help" to get instructions.
+
+-* Page 480 (EPi,MGo)
+ UKTeX gets Chair instead of Chairman
+ Group francophone should read Groupe francophone
+ Email address for Dante is now dante@dante.de (MGo)
+
+========== Bibliography ===========
+
+-* Pages 482 and following (BBe)
+ TUGboat should have a small "b"; occurs about a zillion times in
+ both references and text. why don't you just use \TUB for it:
+ \def\TUB{{\tubfont TUGboat\/}}
+
+-* Page 482, [11] last line (BBe)
+ "bowles" should be "bowls"
+
+-* Page 485, (BBe) [31] last line (BBe)
+ "Script Mathematical Formula Processor -- SMFF"
+ maybe that should be "SMFP"?, No, it should be (MGo) :+{
+ "Script Mathematical Formula Formatter -- SMFF"
+
+-* Page 485, [33]--[35] (BBe)
+ omit "Technical Report" from before the ISO numbers.
+ the ISO document system also has technical reports, which have "TR"
+ in their number designations; these are quite different from the
+ standards, which is what is being referred to here.
+ also in [35] you should refer to "ISO/IEC 10646, ISO Geneva, 1993."
+ this was approved as a formal standard last year, so the "draft" is
+ no longer appropriate. and it's joint with the International
+ Electrotechnical Commission, no longer just ISO.
+
+-* Page 486, [37] (BBe)
+ publication location is not Stanford, but Bedford, MA.
+
+-* Page 491, [85] (BBe)
+ reference should be to ISO/IEC 10646, not "ISO-10656".
+ (you can leave out the "iec" in this context, but do fix the number.)
+
+-* Page 492, [88] (BBe)
+ not sure where crc press is located, but "Ann Horbor" isn't likely it.
+ possibly "Ann Arbor"? Yes, it is (MGo)
+
+-* Page 492, [90] (BBe)
+ is there a reason why in "\LaTeX{} Kompaktf"uhrer"
+ the latex part is italic and the kompaktf"uhrer is upright? i'd
+ have made both italic, and knowing leslie's predilection about the
+ latex logo, ...
+-* Page 492, (MGo)
+ Add new reference [95]
+ George Gr"atzer.
+ Math into TeX: A Simple Introduction to AmSLaTeX.
+ Birkh"auser, Boston, 1993.
+ The first part of the book provides the novice user of
+ AmSLaTeX with a simple approach, based on many examples,
+ a formula gallery, sample files, and templates.
+ The second part contains a systematic discussion with
+ detailed examples and rules of all aspects of AmSLaTeX,
+ while the final part looks at more advanced customization issues.
+
+
+
+========== Index ===========
+
+-* Page 493ff (FMi)
+ all font-size functions need to be indexed under their names pointing
+to Size-function
+
+-* Page 495-6 (FMi)
+ \baselineskip is indexed once as command (not rubber length)
+
+-* Page 501 (LLa)
+ The main entry for DOCSTRIP (page 432ff) is missing.
+
+-* Page 505 (LLa)
+ Add entry:
+Font substitution
+ defaults 193,210-211 (and perhaps other places)
+
+-* Page 508 (PHa,FMi)
+ the page range for the entries
+ index package and Index
+ should only be 367-370 and 345-370
+
+-* Page 517 (DCa)
+ All the page number styles are double printed, eg AlphAlph
+
+-* Page 519 (FPo)
+ Double entry for pt (Point)
+
+========== Production Notes ===========
+
+-* Page 529 (FMi)
+ State that cover art of Companion was done by Toni Saint-Regis.
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cstex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cstex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1ebde3928d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cstex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+ LaTeX installation instructions for CS-TeX
+
+ 10 November 1995
+
+
+You may also use the installation instructions for MultiTeX
+(MULTITEX.TXT) with some differences.
+The menu entries at CTEX.PRG are named:
+
+ "Parameter|Environment" instead of "Parameter|... TeX"
+ "Parameter|Formatvorgabe" instead of "TeX-Projekt|Einstellungen"
+ "Finden|TeX" instead of "Parameter|... TeX"
+ "Finden|IniTeX" instead of "Parameter|... TeX"
+ "Finden|HauptDatei" instead of "TeX-Projekt|Hauptdatei"
+ "Arbeiten|Erzeugen" instead of "TeX-Projekt|Erzeugen"
+
+That's all.
+
+Copyright 1995 Markus Kohm and the LaTeX3 project.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..16730d796bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c1cbf10032a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1999/02/28]
+
+\title{Cyrillic languages support in \LaTeX}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998--1999,\\ Vladimir Volovich,
+ Werner Lemberg and \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{12 March 1999}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{abstract}
+ This document contains basic information on the Cyrillic setup for
+ \LaTeX{}: how to get the fonts, how to set them up, how to use
+ the interface, its interaction with \babel{}, etc. This is only a first
+ draft of the document and it will probably be modified in future; so
+ please send in comments on it via the \texttt{latexbug} system
+ (see below).
+\end{abstract}
+
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+Most Latin-based European languages were supported in \LaTeX{} by
+introducing the~|T1|~font encoding and by using the \textsf{fontenc}
+and \textsf{inputenc} packages; these use only standard \TeX{} means
+to support any \mbox{8-bit} input encoding and this one standard font
+encoding. The restriction to a single font encoding guarantees that
+multiple languages can happily coexist in one document (\eg
+hyphenation will be correct for all languages).
+
+Starting with the December~1998 Release, \LaTeX{} finally supports
+Cyrillic languages. This support is based on the new standard
+Cyrillic \TeX{} font encodings---|T2A|, |T2B|, |T2C|, and~|X2|. The
+first three of these satisfy some basic requirements for
+\LaTeX{}~|T*|~encodings, and thus can be used in multi-lingual documents
+with other languages based on standard font encodings.
+
+The reason why we need four different Cyrillic font encodings is that
+these font encodings support \emph{all} the Cyrillic languages that
+have been used during the twentieth century (see
+Section~\ref{fontencs})! The number of Cyrillic glyphs is large, so
+they cannot be represented with 128~character slots; the other (lower)
+128~slots are reserved for Latin letters and other invariant symbols
+that are needed for the encoding to be a conformant
+\LaTeX{}~\texttt{T}~encoding.
+
+There are some glyphs in the |T2*|~encodings which do not yet have
+associated characters in \emph{Unicode}, the world-wide character
+standard. Also, one more font encoding, |T2D|,~is planned for a
+forthcoming release of \LaTeX{}. A lot of Cyrillic input encodings
+are already supported (see Section~\ref{inputencs}), and additional
+encodings could be added easily.
+
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+\label{sec:acks}
+
+The work on |T2*|~encodings was carried out by the T2~Team, led by
+Alexander Berdnikov (other members are Mikhail Kolodin and Andrew
+Janishewskii). The LH~fonts were produced by Olga Lapko (with
+A.~Khodulev). The \textsf{T2} bundle and \textsf{ruhyphen} package
+were written by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich (except that the
+concrete hyphenation patterns which are part of \textsf{ruhyphen} came
+from individual authors). The support for the Ukrainian language was
+prepared by Andrij Shvaika.
+
+
+\section{Installation}
+
+The \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages are installed
+automatically in every base \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+All the necessary extra files to use with these packages for Cyrillic
+are in the \textsf{cyrillic} bundle, which at present contains the
+following: four font encoding definition files (|t2aenc.def|,
+|t2benc.def|, |t2cenc.def|, |x2enc.def|); several input encoding
+definition files (all the other |*.def| files), and font definition
+files (|*.fd|).
+The installation of these is described here.
+
+\subsection{Fonts}
+
+The default font families in \LaTeX{} are the Computer Modern
+families, namely the CM~fonts (|OT1|~encoded) and the EC~fonts
+(|T1|~encoded). The LH~fonts, which are now available, provide
+Computer Modern fonts for all Cyrillic font encodings. They are
+designed to be compatible with the EC~fonts, and they provide the same
+font shapes and sizes; they are available at |CTAN:fonts/cyrillic/lh|
+(the latest version is 3.20). The installation instructions for the
+fonts are in the file |INSTALL| in the font distribution.
+
+Other fonts, including Type~1 fonts, can also be used, provided that
+their encoding (for \TeX{}) is \mbox{|T2|-compatible}. Some
+ready-to-use packages supporting such fonts are also available, \eg at
+\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex} (they should soon be on \ctan). Currently,
+you will find two packages there: \textsf{PsCyr}, which contains some
+freely distributable Cyrillic Type~1 fonts with support for \LaTeX{};
+and \textsf{c1fonts}, which contains virtual fonts similar to the
+\textsf{AE}~fonts package using the BlueSky and BaKoMa fonts
+available from \ctan{} (see the |README| file in that package for
+detailed information). Further font packages are expected soon.
+
+\subsection{Hyphenation patterns}
+
+You can find a collection of hyphenation patterns for the Russian
+language in the \textsf{ruhyphen} package at
+|CTAN:language/hyphenation/ruhyphen|. These patterns support the
+|T2*|~encodings, as well as other popular font encodings used for
+Russian typesetting (including the Omega internal encoding).
+Patterns for other Cyrillic languages should be adapted to work with
+the |T2*|~encodings.
+
+\subsection{\babel{} support for Russian and Ukrainian}
+\label{bblrus}
+
+Version~3.6k of \babel{} includes support for the |T2*|~encodings and
+for typesetting both Russian and Ukrainian texts using the Cyrillic
+letters. The temporary fontencoding |LWN|, which was used in earlier
+releases of \babel{}, will be withdrawn in the near future and replaced
+by the |OT2| encoding.
+
+\subsection{Getting pre-built packages}
+
+Many of the major \TeX{} distributions, such as te\TeX{}, fp\TeX{} and
+\TeX{}live, contain (or soon will) everything that is needed,
+including the LH~fonts, \textsf{ruhyphen} and the latest version of
+\babel{}. We hope that all \TeX{} distributions will soon include all
+of these, so that the chances are that you will not need to install
+this by yourself (but it is not difficult).
+
+If you are using em\TeX, Mik\TeX, or fp\TeX, you
+can download the \textsf{ruemtex} package from
+\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex}.
+
+\section{Usage}
+
+Support for Cyrillic is based on these standard \LaTeX{} mechanisms:
+the \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages (and on \babel{}).
+Thus the basic principles for its use are similar to those for other
+European languages: you simply add, to your document preamble, lines
+like the following.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[T2A]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Here you can put any desired input encoding instead of
+\mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}}: for example, it would be \texttt{cp866} if you are
+using a MS-DOS text editor with this Cyrillic code page to prepare your
+documents, or \texttt{cp1251} if you are a MS~Windows user with Cyrillic
+support. A full list of the available Cyrillic encodings can be found in
+Section~\ref{inputencs} and in the file |cyinpenc.dtx|.
+
+Documents are, naturally, not restricted to a single font encoding;
+this is essential for multi-lingual journals or documents. Such
+changes can be made by using the |\fontencoding| command as part of a
+font-change. However, it is best to access these font encodings via a
+higher-level interface.
+
+Since such changes are often closely related to other
+language-dependent settings, it is often sensible to use the \babel{}
+system, which provides further useful `localisation' and standardised
+multi-lingual interfaces (for further details, see
+Section~\ref{bblrus}). Then you can use lines like the following in
+your document:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[russian]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will automatically choose the default font encoding for Russian,
+which is |T2A|, if available. Documentation of the complete set of
+font-encoding selection rules can be found in |cyrillic.dtx| which is
+part of |rusbabel|.
+
+These \LaTeX{} interfaces are very convenient because they make your
+documents completely portable, being based solely on standard \TeX{}
+features. This will mean that your documents can be processed on any
+\TeX{} system without any need for re-encoding to the `native'
+encoding used on each platform; this is because the encoding of the
+document is specified in the document itself.
+
+Moreover, if necessary, more than one input encoding can be used
+within a document; this could be useful if, for example, you need to
+combine articles prepared by authors on different machines. Each part
+of the document is then identified by a |\inputencoding| command,
+which can therefore only be used between paragraphs.
+
+Please note that you must always use the two standard \LaTeX{}
+commands, |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| to produce uppercase
+or lowercase text in your documents. This is because |\uppercase| and
+|\lowercase| will not work at all for Cyrillic (note that these latter
+two commands are not, and never have been, available for use directly
+in \LaTeX{} documents).
+
+
+\section{Font encodings for Cyrillic languages}
+\label{fontencs}
+
+The Cyrillic font encodings support the following languages. Note
+that some languages can be properly typeset with more than one
+encoding.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\raggedright
+\item[|T2A|:]
+ Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Azerbaijani, Altai, Balkar, Bashkir,
+ Bulgarian, Buryat, Byelorussian, Gagauz, Dargin, Dungan, Ingush,
+ Kabardino-Cherkess, Kazakh, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii,
+ Karelian, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Kumyk, Lak, Lezghin,
+ Macedonian, Mari-Mountain, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian,
+ Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nogai, Oroch, Osetin, Russian, Rutul,
+ Serbian, Tabasaran, Tadzhik, Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva,
+ Turkmen, Udmurt, Uzbek, Ukrainian, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut,
+ Gipsi, Chechen, Chuvash, Crimean-Tatar.
+\item[|T2B|:]
+ Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Aleut, Altai, Balkar, Byelorussian,
+ Bulgarian, Buryat, Gagauz, Dargin, Dolgan, Dungan, Ingush, Itelmen,
+ Kabardino-Cherkess, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii, Karelian,
+ Ketskii, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Koryak, Kumyk, Kurdian,
+ Lak, Lezghin, Mansi, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian,
+ Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai, Nganasan, Negidal, Nenets,
+ Nivh, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Rutul, Selkup, Tabasaran, Tadzhik,
+ Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva, Turkmen, Udyghei, Uigur, Ulch,
+ Khakass, Hanty-Vahovskii, Hanty-Kazymskii, Hanty-Obskii,
+ Hanty-Surgut, Hanty-Shurysharskii, Gipsi, Chechen, Chukcha, Shor,
+ Evenk, Even, Enets, Eskimo, Yukagir, Crimean Tatar, Yakut.
+\item[|T2C|:]
+ Abkhazian, Bulgarian, Gagauz, Karelian, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak,
+ Kumyk, Mansi, Moldavian, Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai,
+ Orok (Uilta), Negidal, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Saam, Old-Bulgarian,
+ Old-Russian, Tati, Teleut, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut, Evenk,
+ Crimean Tatar.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The |X2|~encoding was designed to support all the above languages.
+Its name does not start with |T| because, for example, it contains no
+Latin letters (it is purely a Cyrillic glyph container); it therefore
+cannot be used in mixed-script documents along with the other |T*|
+encodings. Please consult Section~6.4 \textit{Naming conventions} of
+the file |fntguide.tex| in the base \LaTeX{} distribution for details
+of the differences between \LaTeX{} font encodings and how they are
+named.
+
+There are two other \LaTeX{} Cyrillic font encodings, |OT2| and |LCY|,
+that are not included in the base \LaTeX{} distribution. The first is
+a \mbox{7-bit} encoding (hence the |O|) developed by the AMS; it is
+useful for typesetting relatively small fragments of text in Cyrillic,
+using a Latin transliteration scheme. The other, |LCY|, is an
+\mbox{8-bit} Cyrillic encoding which is not compatible with the
+requirements for \LaTeX{} |T*|~encodings (hence the |L|); thus it is not
+suitable for typesetting multi-lingual documents, but it can be used in
+Plain \TeX{}-based macro packages because it is an extension of |OT1|.
+These two encodings are supported by \babel{} and by \textsf{ot2cyr}.
+
+
+\section{Input encodings}
+\label{inputencs}
+
+Several Cyrillic code-pages are widely used. Currently, \LaTeX{}
+contains support for 20~Cyrillic input encodings (some of which are
+variants of each other).
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item |cp855| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Cyrillic code-page.
+
+\item |cp866| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Russian code-page.
+ Several code-pages very similar to this are also supported
+ (the differences are all in the range 242--254).
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item |cp866av| -- the `Cyrillic Alternative' code-page (an
+ alternative variant of cp866);
+ \item |cp866mav| -- the `Modified Alternative Variant';
+ \item |cp866nav| -- the `New Alternative Variant';
+ \item |cp866tat| -- an experimental Tatarian code-page.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+\item |cp1251| --- the standard MS Windows Cyrillic code-page.
+
+\item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} --- a standard Cyrillic code-page widely
+ used in UNIX-like systems for Russian language support that is
+ specified in RFC~1489. The situation with \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} is
+ somewhat similar to that for |cp866|: there are several similar
+ code-pages which coincide for all Russian letters but add some other
+ Cyrillic letters. The following are supported:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-u}} -- for Ukrainian;
+ \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-ru}} -- this is described in a draft RFC
+ document specifying a widely used character set for mail and news
+ exchange in the Ukrainian internet community, as well as for
+ presenting WWW information resources in the Ukrainian language;
+ \item |isoir111| -- the \mbox{ISO-IR-111 ECMA} Cyrillic Code Page.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+\item |iso88595| --- the \mbox{ISO 8859-5} Cyrillic code-page (also called
+ \mbox{ISO-IR-144}).
+
+\item |maccyr| --- the Apple Macintosh Cyrillic code-page (also known
+ as Microsoft cp10007) and |macukr|, the Apple Macintosh Ukrainian
+ code-page, very similar to the Cyrillic code-page.
+
+\item The Mongolian code-pages: |ctt| |dbk| |mnk| |mos| |ncc| |mls|.
+ These code-pages were taken from Oliver Corff's `Mon\TeX' package
+ (available at |CTAN:language/mongolian/montex|). Since the |T2*|
+ encodings support the Mongolian Cyrillic script, it is convenient to
+ have support for Mongolian input encodings as well. Pointers to
+ documentation for these code-pages will be much appreciated.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\section{Reporting bugs}
+
+In case you find a bug and want to report it, please follow the
+guidelines given in the file |bugs.txt| in the base \LaTeX{}
+distributions. Note that there is a category specifically for
+reporting any bugs that occur only when using Cyrillic fonts or
+support packages.
+
+
+\section{Miscellanea in the \textsf{T2} bundle}
+\label{t2m}
+
+The \textsf{T2}~bundle at |CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2|
+contains some other useful files, including support for Plain
+\TeX{}-based macro packages, support for Bib\TeX{} and MakeIndex (see
+also the \textsf{xindy} program and package---highly recommended for
+making indices with Cyrillic), support for the \textsf{fontinst}
+package, mapping tables relating these Cyrillic font encodings (and
+input encodings) to the Unicode character names and slots (these are
+in the subdirectory |enc-maps|), and more!
+
+To produce documented source listings of the \textsf{T2}~package, run
+\LaTeX{} on the |*.dtx| and |*.fdd| files therein.
+
+When typesetting Cyrillic texts, there is a tradition of using
+Cyrillic letters (in some situations) within math formul\ae, in
+exactly the same way as most of the world uses Latin letters.
+By default this does not work, because symbols declared with
+|\DeclareTextSymbol| may not be used in math.
+
+If you need within math to `transparently' typeset glyphs declared in
+font encoding definition files, then you could try using the
+experimental \textsf{mathtext} package, which is also in the
+\textsf{T2}~bundle. Note that this package uses up at least one
+additional math alphabet per font encoding. For this and other
+reasons, The \LaTeX3 Project Team considers that this experimental
+extension to \LaTeX{}'s glyph-handling mechanisms should be used with
+caution; but please try it out and send us your opinions and ideas.
+Note that it is not included in the core of \LaTeX{} because both the
+coding and the interfaces are likely to change at some point in the
+future.
+
+Finally, here are some pointers to further information:
+
+\begin{quote}
+ \URL{http://www.cemi.rssi.ru/cyrtug}\\
+ \URL{http://xtalk.price.ru/tex}
+\end{quote}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/decustex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/decustex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..323d00f1b03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/decustex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,373 @@
+ LaTeX installation instructions for DECUS TeX (OpenVMS)
+
+ 15 August 1994
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for
+DECUS TeX on OpenVMS. Before reading this file, you should read
+install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to configure LaTeX.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * How to check the LaTeX installation.
+
+ * Post Installation Tasks.
+
+ * Running LaTeX with old versions (PD V3.4 and earlier) of DECUS TeX
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+===============================
+
+If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish
+to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX.
+
+a) The old LaTeX 2.09 version will be kept in a subdirectory [.LATEX209]
+ in your TeXinputs tree (normally TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS]).
+
+ When your LaTeX distribution was already installed in a subdirectory
+ (e.g. [.LATEX]), simply execute a rename:
+ RENAME TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS]LATEX.DIR LATEX209.DIR
+ (You may have to modify the file protection of the directory file.0
+
+ Otherwise, create a new subdirectory TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX209]
+ All style files (.STY) as well as LATEX.TEX, LPLAIN.TEX, LFONTS.TEX,
+ SLITEX.TEX, SPLAIN.TEX, SFONTS.TEX, LHYPHEN.TEX, IDX.TEX, LABLST.TEX,
+ MAKEINDEX.TEX, SAMPLE.TEX, SMALL.TEX, TRYFONTS.TEX, TESTPAGE.TEX and
+ TESTA4.TEX should be moved into this directory.
+
+b) You need to set up a separate logical name for the LaTeX-2.09 search
+ list; to prevent interference with the new LaTeX release:
+ Edit the command procedure that is used to initialize the TeX system:
+ This is probably the file STARTTEX.COM, located in TEX_ROOT:[000000].
+ Search for the definition of the TEX_INPUTS search list. Add a similar
+ definition using another name (.e.g. LTX_INPUTS) by duplicating the
+ search list in STARTTEX.COM. Change this new definition by adding
+ an entry "TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX209]" at the top of the list, so
+ that the files from the old LaTeX-2.09 are accessed before the new files
+ from LaTeX2e.
+
+c) To use the old LaTeX 2.09 format, you have to define a new command
+ which uses the new logical name LTX_INPUTS as TeXinputs search path.
+ This is archived by adding the following line to STARTTEX.COM (best
+ place: just after the INITEX command definition):
+
+ "$ OLATEX :== TEX/FORMAT=TEX_FORMATS:LPLAIN/TEXINPUTS=LTX_INPUTS:"
+
+d) There is no need to rename the old format file LPLAIN.FMT. The new LaTeX
+ format uses a different name (LATEX.FMT) per default.
+ But if there is a command procedure to generate the format files, you
+ might want to update it to reflect the changed location of the LaTeX-2.09
+ sources.
+
+To install the recent changes, you have to reexecute the TeX initialization
+procedure. To enshure that all logical names are properly redefined, you
+should delete the logical name TEX_ROOT by
+ "DEASSIGN TEX_ROOT"
+(or simply log out and start a new session).
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+It is recommended that you keep the new LaTeX distributions an a
+separate subdirectory. This simplifys later maintance work.
+To unpack the sources, you should create a new directory, e.g:
+TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC].
+Copy the hole LaTeX distribution into this directory, and change
+your working directory to this location with a SET DEFAULT command.
+Now simply type
+ "INITEX UNPACK.INS"
+(after you have initialized the TeX system). The unpack procedure
+should then proceed without errors.
+The time needed for Unpacking depends on your hardware equipment.
+On an Alpha AXP machine (DEC 3000/400), this will last less than 5 minutes;
+on an older VAX, you will probably need an order of magnitude more time.
+(But I have never tested it on a VAX...)
+
+
+
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+A) The TEXSYS.CFG file:
+-----------------------
+If you have a recent version of DECUS TeX (3.1415, PD V3.5 or later), no
+special texsys.cfg file is needed. DECUS TeX is now fully compatible with
+the extended input checking techniques used in the new LaTeX (LaTeX2e).
+For a usable texsys.cfg setup with older (outdated) versions of DECUS TeX,
+see the section
+"Running LaTeX with old versions (PD 3.4 and earlier) of DECUS TeX"
+below.
+
+B) Setting up multilingual hyphenation patterns:
+------------------------------------------------
+If you want to use non USenglish hyphenation patterns (in addition
+or as a replacement), you need to create a configuration file
+"HYPHEN.CFG" to override the LaTeX defaults.
+Your HYPHEN.CFG file should load all required hyphenation patterns.
+At the end, the default language should be switched on and the appropiate
+values of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin for this language should be
+set.
+It is strongly recommended to load the USenglish hyphenation patterns
+as language 0 and to use this language as default to maintain compatibility
+with other installations. This setup is needed to allow correct processing
+of the delivered (english) LaTeX documentation files!
+As an example for a HYPHEN.CFG file, a bilingual setup for german
+and US english (can be used together with the babel package or german.sty)
+is shown:
+%%
+%% This is file `hyphen.cfg',
+%%
+%% Modified for dual language support by Christian Spieler, 20. June 1994.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX2e system.
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%%
+
+\message{Loading hyphenation patterns for US english and German.}
+
+% PREPARING A FOREIGN LANGUAGE VERSION:
+%
+% This file loads hyphenation patterns for US english.
+% If you want to load additional or other hyphenation patterns,
+% you have to change this file, which is hereby allowed explicitly,
+% under the restriction that if you do so, you MUST also change the
+% message above.
+%
+
+\message{US-English hyphenation}
+ \language=0
+ \chardef\l@USenglish=\language
+ \input ushyphen \input ushyphen.upd
+
+\message{German hyphenation}
+ \newlanguage\l@german
+ \language=\l@german
+ \input ghyphen
+
+\language=\l@USenglish % USenglish as Default
+\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 % disallow x- or -xx breaks
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `hyphen.cfg'.
+
+For a nongerman country, the needed modifications are obvious.
+Further information can be found in "texpert.txt" and "lthyphen.dtx".
+
+C) Memory requirements:
+-----------------------
+LaTeX2e needs more main memory, string memory and hash space to
+store its macros than previous versions of LaTeX.
+Since DECUS TeX is compiled as (64 bit) BigTeX with large memory arrays,
+this should not impose any problems.
+When you have got a newer version of DECUS TeX (3.1415 PD 3.3a or later)
+there should be enough pattern memory to load at least hyphenation patterns
+for three different languages. The sizes of the current version (PD 3.5)
+are:
+ trie size: 45000
+ trie op size: 1000
+ trie op size per language: 511
+
+The bad news:
+Up to now, DECUS TeX does not allow to adjust its internal arrays at
+run time. Therefore, if you really need more space somewhere, you
+have to recompile TeX -- the program -- with the appropiate changes,
+sorry.
+
+
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+Be sure that all hyphenation pattern sources requested by HYPHEN.CFG
+are accessible through the TEX_INPUTS search list. When you did not
+create a HYPHEN.CFG file, at least the US english hyphenation pattern
+must be found this way under the name HYPHEN.TEX.
+
+To create the LaTeX format the first time, you should apply
+the command:
+
+ initex latex.ltx
+
+in the directory where you have unpacked the distribution.
+This will create a file LATEX.FMT in this directory without
+further interaction.
+
+This file has to be moved to the formats directory to be accessible
+by the LATEX command. This can be archived by
+
+ RENAME LATEX.FMT TEX_FORMATS:
+ SET FILE/PROTECTION=(W:RE) TEX_FORMATS:LATEX.FMT
+
+(If TEX_FORMATS: is located on a different disk in your installation,
+you have to use the COPY command, instead. The protection setting enables
+all users to use the new format.)
+
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+The LaTeX class and style files as well as some auxiliary .TEX files
+need to be put in a directory of the TEX_INPUTS search path. In the
+suggested setup, this is simply the parent directory of the location
+where you have unpacked the distribution.
+You should apply:
+
+ RENAME latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, docstrip.tex, -
+ lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex, small2e.tex, sample2e.tex, -
+ *.cls, *.clo, *.sty, *.fd, *.def, *.ist [-]
+
+
+
+FINAL INSTALLATION STEPS
+========================
+
+To use LaTeX, some preparations need to be done:
+
+1.) You have to enshure that TeX looks into the right directories when
+ searching for LaTeX styles and classes. In the suggested setup,
+ the LaTeX core classes and styles have been put into the directory
+ TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX]. This directory needs to be part of the
+ Texinputs search list, which is (normally) defined by the logical
+ name TEX_INPUTS (without colon!). Check the TeX startup command file
+ STARTTEX.COM (should be found in TEX_ROOT:[000000]). The list of
+ equivalences in the definition of "TEX_INPUTS" should contain the
+ directory where you intend to place the LaTeX2e classes. For correct
+ operation, it is ABSOLUTELY neccessary that this directory is listed
+ before any location of old LaTeX-2.09 files!
+ (For efficiency, it might be best to place directories with frequently
+ used packages/styles/classes near the top of the search list.)
+
+2.) You have to modify (or add) the LATEX command definition in the TeX
+ initialization procedure. The proposed setup is to use a "LATEX" DCL
+ command, which gets defined in the DECUS-TEX.CLD command definition
+ file.
+ You have to edit the file TEX_ROOT:[EXE]DECUS-TEX.CLD. If there is no
+ entry for a verb LATEX, add one by duplicating the definition for
+ the verb TEX (and changing the verb name into LATEX).
+ a) Modify the default value of the qualifier "FORMAT" into
+ "TEX_FORMATS:LATEX" (if you had LaTeX-2.09, the old value
+ was TEX_FORMATS:LPLAIN).
+ b) Check, if the default value of the TEXINPUTS qualifier is
+ the logical name you chose for the LaTeX2e input path. Normally
+ this should be "TEX_INPUTS:" (WITH trailing colon!).
+
+Now you should rerun the command file TEX_ROOT:STARTTEX.COM to get the
+changes to the TeX system setup into effect.
+To trigger the redefinition of all TeX related logical names, you have
+to delete the logical name TEX_ROOT by
+ "DEASSIGN TEX_ROOT"
+(or to log out and start a new session).
+
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To check that the installation is working:
+
+* Be shure you have executed the STARTTEX.COM command file
+ (found in the root directory of the TeX directory tree).
+
+* Set your current directory to TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]
+ (or the location you used to unpack the LaTeX distribution).
+
+* Check that there is no file ARTICLE.CLS in this directory.
+ If you have found one, rename or remove it.
+
+* Execute the command
+
+ LATEX LTXCHECK
+
+ This will run a test on the LaTeX installation and should produce
+ 'OK!' to a number of test. If it does not, then see the `PROBLEMS'
+ section in install.txt.
+
+ You have now installed LaTeX!
+
+
+
+POST INSTALLATION TASKS
+=======================
+
+In the DECUS TeX distribution, there is a command procedure FMTBUILD.COM
+in the TEX_FORMATS: location to simplify recreation of all TeX formats
+after a change or an update to the TeX program. You might want to
+integrate the new LaTeX format into this procedure. The strategy of this
+procedure is to copy all needed sources into the TEX_FORMATS: location and
+building the format files right there.
+To include the LaTeX format in this procecure, you have to add a section
+looking similar to:
+======================= start here ========================
+$
+$LATEX:
+$LaTeX_STD:
+$!LaTeX (LaTeX2e release), standard configuration:
+$ copy TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]*.ltx *.*;
+$ copy TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]texsys.cfg *.cfg
+$ copy TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]hyphen.cfg *.cfg
+$ initex "latex.ltx"
+$ dele *.ltx;* /log
+$ dele texsys.aux;* /log
+$ dele texsys.cfg;* /log
+$ dele hyphen.cfg;* /log
+$
+====================== end here ===========================
+
+When you have decided to keep the LaTeX-2.09 system, you should
+modify the corresponding section in FMTBUILD.COM to reflect the
+changes described in the section "SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX"!!
+
+
+
+RUNNING LaTeX WITH OLD VERSIONS (PD V3.4 AND EARLIER) OF DECUS TeX
+==================================================================
+
+These version of DECUS TeX do no use the TEXINPUTS search path when
+trying to open a file via \openin. This behaviour breaks the
+enhance input file checking techniques implemented in LaTeX (LaTeX2e)
+without further precautions.
+To get around this problem, LaTeX allows an alternate way to specify the
+TEXINPUTS search path to the file checking macros. This is done
+through a special macro definition which has to be supplied by the
+user (= LaTeX installer) via the file TEXSYS.CFG.
+The following example shows a TEXSYS.CFG file which is known to work
+when your LaTeX system files are accessed through the logical name
+"TEX_INPUTS":
+
+%% texsys.cfg for DECUS TeX (VMS)
+%%
+% \subsection{VMS (???)}
+% Some VMS implementations have different paths
+% for |\openin| and |\input|. For these one could use definitions like
+% the following:
+%
+\def\@currdir{[]}
+\def\input@path{%
+ {SYS$DISK:[]}%
+ {TEX_INPUTS:}%
+}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% end of texsys.cfg for DECUS TeX
+
+For further details, see dircheck.dtx and texpert.txt.
+
+
+--- Copyright 1994 Christian Spieler and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/directex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/directex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f20a0028bff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/directex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+Abstract: LaTeX installation guide for DirectTeX v2.0, 2nd version
+=====================================================================
+
+ Wilfried Ricken
+ Blumenfeldstrasse 4
+ 44795 Bochum
+ Germany
+ +49-234-450400
+ wilfr@hadron.tp2.ruhr-uni-bochum.de
+
+=====================================================================
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for DirectTeX
+ =============================================
+
+ 6 June 1994
+
+
+NOTE: LaTeX is installed and ready to use in DirectTeX 2.0 and later.
+If you have an older version of DirectTeX then please upgrade. Don't
+expect any support if you decide to merge this release of LaTeX with
+an older version of DirectTeX! If you have DirectTeX 2.0 or later
+then you will only need to read the following instructions if you
+decide to update the version of LaTeX distributed with DirectTeX.
+
+NOTE: All folder names are relative to your global TeX folder, e.g.
+`TeX-Inputs:LaTeX' refers to the folder `{dt_TeXFolder}TeX-Inputs:LaTeX'.
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for DirectTeX.
+Before reading this file you should read install.txt, which explains
+how the LaTeX installation works in more detail.
+
+The following sections describe:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to check that the installation worked.
+
+ * Removing unnecessary files.
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX
+===============================
+
+If you have DirectTeX 2.0, you do not have to do anything do save the
+old LaTeX 2.09 because it is already located in a folder `LaTeX-2.09'
+and not within the `TeX-Inputs' folder, which is normally searched by
+TeX.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+To unpack the LaTeX distribution:
+
+ * Delete all files from the `TeX-Inputs:LaTeX' folder.
+
+ * Move all files in the distribution to this folder.
+
+ * Start up DirectTeX and set the current directory to this folder.
+
+ * Execute the following commands:
+
+ Set dt_TeXLogFiles ''
+ TeX -i unpack.ins
+
+This will start the unpacking process. This may take some time:
+about 7 minutes on a Quadra 840. Now move the files `gind.ist'
+and `gglo.ist' to the folder `Aux-Inputs:MakeIndex'.
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+To create the LaTeX format:
+
+ * Select `Initialize Formats...' from the `Formats' menu.
+
+ * Select `LaTeX' or `BigLaTeX' and click OK.
+
+If you want to create the format manually, simply execute the command
+
+ TeX -i latex.ltx
+
+NOTE: DirectTeX v2.0 does not contain a hyphen.tex file. Instead it
+contains a folder `TeX-Inputs:Hyphenation' which contains some files
+`hyphen-??.tex' and a file `hyphen.cfg'. The latter one may be
+used to specify the hyphenation patterns to use. It is configured to
+include the German and the US English hyphenation patterns and to set
+the default language to US English.
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To check that the installation worked:
+
+ * Set the current directory to the `TeX-LogFiles' folder.
+
+ * Execute the command
+
+ LaTeX ltxcheck.tex
+
+This will run a test of the LaTeX installation and should produce
+`OK!' to a number of tests. If it does not then see `PROBLEMS'
+in install.txt.
+
+You have now installed LaTeX!
+
+
+REMOVING UNNECESSARY FILES
+==========================
+
+After LaTeX has been successfully installed, you might want to delete
+some non-essential files (after making backup copies) to free up space
+on your hard disk. From the `TeX-Inputs:LaTeX' folder, delete all
+files ending in:
+
+ .ins .drv .dtx .fdd .log .aux .txt .err .ps
+
+You may also look at the files *guide.tex, typeset and print them and
+then delete them to save more space. These files contain some
+information about certain characteristics of LaTeX.
+
+
+--- Copyright 1994 Wilfried Ricken and the LaTeX3 project. ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ae1f5353b6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+
+LaTeX installation instructions for emTeX
+
+31 December 1997
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for emTeX on
+DOS; users of emTeX on OS/2 have to make the standard small
+changes, e. g. using `.cmd' instead of `.bat'.
+
+Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which explains
+how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+These instructions assume you are using the current release of the
+emTeX distribution with its standard directory setup. If your systems
+setup is different from the emTeX standard, we hope you are familiar
+enough with your system to deviate from these instructions where
+necessary.
+
+
+This file describes:
+
+* How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+* How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+* How to create the LaTeX format file.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+To unpack the LaTeX distribution, change to a directory created for
+installation use
+(e. g. c:\install, c:\latexnew).
+
+Run iniTeX on the file unpack.ins, which - using emTeX - means to
+use the /i option. So at the command line type:
+
+tex /i unpack.ins
+or (if you use big versions like tex386.exe)
+tex386 /i unpack.ins
+
+PUTTING THE UNPACKED FILES TO WHERE LATEX FINDS THEM
+====================================================
+
+Move the unpacked files to a directory, where LaTeX can find them,
+which in the standard emTeX directory structure is
+
+emTeX\texinput\latex2e
+
+The files to be moved are
+
+latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex
+
+and all files with the extensions
+
+*.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg
+
+If you use the Makeindex program, move the *.ist files to the makeindex
+input directory, usually emtex\idxstyle.
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT FILE
+==============================
+
+To create the LaTeX format file, change to the directory
+emtex\texfmts
+or
+emtex\btexfmts (respectively)
+
+and run iniTeX, e. g.
+
+tex /i
+or
+tex386 /i (respectively)
+
+on the file latex.ltx to create the format file latex.fmt.
+
+
+HINTS AND TIPS
+==============
+
+To ease creation of a format file, the emTeX distribution now
+contains the program makefmt. Please, refer to the emTeX
+distribution documentation for information about how to
+use makefmt.
+
+To check, if the latex installation works, run laTeX on the
+file ltxcheck.tex. This should produce a number of `OK' messages.
+If it produces any warnings, please consult the `problems'
+section of the file install.txt.
+
+
+MEMORY PROBLEMS
+===============
+
+If you still use an old release of emTeX or a PC with a CPU lower than 80386,
+you will have to increase the part of memory known as `string characters' or
+as `pool size'.
+
+Set it to its maximum value by using the option
+
+/mp:65550
+
+either on the command line or in the EMTEXOPT variable.
+
+You may be able to compensate this increase by reducing the
+amount of memory needed for `font info', using the option
+
+/mf: '.
+
+When using several packages, or when processing complex documents,
+especially when they contain lots of cross references, citations etc.,
+you may run out of the part of memory known as `multiletter
+control sequences' or as `hash table'.
+
+The only real cure for this problem is to get a recent version of emTeX.
+
+---Contributed by: Heinz Kusznier <kusznier@ping.at>
+---Copyright 1997 by Heinz Kusznier and the LaTeX3 project---
+--- All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtextds.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtextds.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..31263d9c02d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtextds.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+ LaTeX installation instructions for
+ emTeX/TDS (OS/2), version 0.4 and above
+
+ 2001-09-04
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for emTeX/TDS,
+version 0.4 and above. Before reading this file, you should read
+install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+These installation instructions assume that you have installed the
+emTeX/TDS system already and want to upgrade LaTeX to a newer version.
+
+The contents of the directories texmf\source\latex\base and
+texmf\tex\latex\base should be deleted before installing a new LaTeX
+version.
+
+
+
+SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+================================
+
+Instead of deleting the contents of the above directories you may
+alternatively move the files to directories outside the texmf tree.
+
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+Copy all the files from the CTAN directory macros/latex/base to the
+directory texmf\source\latex\base on your HD.
+
+Open an OS/2 window (aka command line) and make the above directory
+the current one, e.g., if the texmf tree resides on drive c:
+
+ c:
+ cd \texmf\source\latex\base
+
+Unpack the distribution by executing the command:
+
+ htex386 -i unpack.ins
+
+
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+Now execute the command
+
+ makelatex
+
+to create the LaTeX format file.
+
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+The next step in the installation of LaTeX is to move the files needed
+to run the system into the correct directories (or folders).
+
+You should move to the LaTeX input directory \texmf\tex\latex\base
+
+ * latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex
+ small2e.tex, sample2e.tex, docstrip.tex and texsys.cfg
+
+and any files whose name ends with:
+
+ * .cls, document class files.
+
+ * .clo, document class options files.
+
+ * .sty, package files.
+
+ * .fd, font definition files.
+
+ * .def, files of definitions which may be read by LaTeX while
+ processing documents.
+
+ * .ltx, the files from which the format can be rebuilt.
+
+You should move to the MakeIndex input directory \texmf\makeindex
+all files whose name ends with:
+
+ * .ist, MakeIndex style files.
+
+Please, note that any files existing already in the target directories
+must be overwritten!
+
+Caution: Do NOT move the files preload.cfg, fonttext.cfg and
+fontmath.cfg to \texmf\tex\latex\base !
+
+The makelatex script has already moved the format file to the
+directory where it belongs.
+
+You have now installed LaTeX!
+
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To make sure that the installation has worked, you should run the new
+LaTeX on the document `ltxcheck.tex'. Just type
+
+ latex ltxcheck
+
+This will produce a number of messages, each of which should be `OK'.
+If any of them are `BAD', then read the `PROBLEMS' section below.
+
+If all the messages are `OK' then you are finished!
+
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+The installation should proceed smoothly. However, you may get some
+errors.
+
+`File missing': Some of the files from the LaTeX distribution are
+ missing. There are a number of possible reasons for this:
+
+ * The files really are missing.
+ You should get the missing files from the same place you got the
+ rest of the distribution. If you cannot do this then you should
+ complain to whoever gave you this distribution.
+
+ * The files are present, but in the wrong directory. See the
+ section above "Putting the files where LaTeX can read them"
+
+ * The files are present, and in the right directory. Did you alter
+ the REXX scripts makelatex.cmd or latex.cmd? Did you alter the
+ environment variable TEXMACROS?
+
+
+`Font missing': Some of the fonts (.tfm files) required by LaTeX are
+ missing. As above, either you have not got the required files,
+ they have been deleted or TeX is not able to find them. As long as
+ you did not alter the environment variable TEXTFM, this should not
+ happen.
+
+
+`Out of memory': In the file texmf\tex\latex\local\hyphen.cfg you may
+ have defined too many languages to be included. Try to increase
+ the value of the -mt option in the REXX scripts makelatex.cmd
+ and/or latex.cmd. If, however, TeX reports the "trie op size" to
+ have been exceeded, the number of languages loaded must be reduced.
+
+
+If you have any problems installing LaTeX, you should:
+
+ * read the Technical Manual texmf\doc\emtexTDS\manual.eng and the
+ description of the TeX program, texmf\emtex\book\english\tex.inf;
+
+ * if this fails, try asking the emTeX mailing list or a general TeX
+ mailing list;
+
+ * if this fails, send a bug report via email to the author of
+ emTeX/TDS; see the section "Support" in the file readme.eng or
+ install.eng.
+
+
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files in
+the directory texmf\source\latex\base that are not needed to run
+LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of personal taste and
+availability of disk space but here is some guidance.
+
+ * The files ltnews<xx>.tex contain the LaTeX newsletters. You should
+ run the latest one through LaTeX and nove the resulting dvi file to
+ the directory texmf\doc\latex\base
+
+ * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference
+ information covering (amongst other things) those features new to
+ this version of LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user
+ guide or a complete reference for the system. You should run them
+ through LaTeX and move the resulting dvi files to the directory
+ texmf\doc\latex\base, thus replacing the previous versions.
+
+ * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex,
+ can be used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt
+ for further information).
+
+ * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for
+ the font definition files.
+
+ * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project
+ and how you can support it.
+
+ * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst
+ other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports; and
+ those with extension .err contain errata lists for various
+ publications: see 00readme.txt for further details.
+
+ * The file ltxcheck.tex is used to test the format; therefore you
+ should keep it if you expect to remake the format before getting
+ the next full distribution.
+
+ * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the
+ .dtx and .fdd files.
+
+ * We recommend that you keep, in the formats directory
+ texmf\emtex\htexfmts, the transcript file that was produced whilst
+ creating the format; this file is called latex.log.
+
+
+ --- Copyright 1999--2001 Walter Schmidt and the LaTeX3 project ---
+
+ --- All rights reserved. ---
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..16522753020
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d64b4804697
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1830 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: fntguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+
+\title{\LaTeXe{} font selection}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2004, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+ All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{10 February 2004}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This document describes the new font selection features of the \LaTeX{}
+Document Preparation System. It is intended for package writers who
+want to write font-loading packages similar to |times| or |latexsym|.
+
+This document is only a brief introduction to the new facilities and
+is intended for package writers who are familiar with \TeX{} fonts and
+\LaTeX{} packages. It is \emph{neither} a user-guide \emph{nor} a
+reference manual for fonts in \LaTeXe.
+
+\subsection{\LaTeXe~fonts}
+
+The most important difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is the
+way that fonts are selected. In \LaTeX~2.09, the Computer Modern fonts
+were built into the \LaTeX~format, and so customizing \LaTeX{} to use
+other fonts was a major effort.
+
+In \LaTeXe, very few fonts are built into the format, and there are
+commands to load new text and math fonts. Packages such as |times| or
+|latexsym| allow authors to access these fonts.
+This document describes how to write similar font-loading packages.
+
+The \LaTeXe{} font selection system was first released as the `New Font
+Selection Scheme' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993.
+\LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard.
+
+\subsection{Overview}
+
+This document contains an overview of the new font commands
+of \LaTeX.
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:text}] describes the commands for selecting fonts
+ in classes and packages. It lists the five \LaTeX{} font
+ attributes, and lists the commands for selecting fonts. It also
+ describes how to customize the author commands such as |\textrm| and
+ |\textit| to suit your document design.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:math}] explains the commands for controlling
+ \LaTeX{} math fonts. It describes how to specify new math fonts and
+ new math symbols.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:install}] explains how to install new fonts into
+ \LaTeX. It shows how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{}
+ font names, and how to specify your own fonts using font definition
+ files.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:encode}] discusses text font encodings.
+ It describes how to declare a new encoding and how to define
+ commands, such as |\AE| or |\"|, which have different definitions in
+ different encodings, depending on whether ligatures, etc.\ are
+ available in the encoding.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:misc}] covers font miscellanea. It describes how
+ \LaTeX{} performs font substitution, how to customize fonts that are
+ preloaded in the \LaTeX{} format, and the naming conventions used in
+ \LaTeX{} font selection.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Further information}
+
+For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of
+\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook},
+Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994.
+
+A more detailed description of the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is to
+be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison
+Wesley, 1994.
+
+The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described
+by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison
+Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3.
+
+Sebastian Rahtz's |psnfss| software contains the software for using a
+large number of Type~1 fonts (including the Adobe Laser Writer 35 and
+the Monotype CD-ROM fonts) in \LaTeX. It should be available from the
+same source as your copy of \LaTeX.
+
+The |psnfss| software uses fonts generated by Alan Jeffrey's
+|fontinst| software. This can convert fonts from Adobe Font Metric
+format into a format readable by \LaTeX, including the generation of
+the font definition files described in Section~\ref{Sec:install}. The
+|fontinst| software should be available from the same source as your
+copy of \LaTeX.
+
+Whenever practical, \LaTeX{} uses the font naming scheme called
+`fontname'; this was described in \emph{Filenames for fonts},%
+\footnote{An up-to-date electronic version
+of this document can be found on any CTAN server, in the directory
+\texttt{info/fontname}.}
+\emph{TUGboat}~11(4),~1990.
+
+The class-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} describes
+the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes and packages
+and is kept in |clsguide.tex|. Configuring
+\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in
+\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on
+modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in
+\texttt{modguide.tex}.
+
+We are gradually turning the source code for \LaTeX{} into a \LaTeX{}
+document \emph{\sourcecode}. This document includes an index of
+\LaTeX{} commands and can be typeset from |source2e.tex|.
+
+For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your
+local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group.
+Here are some useful addresses.
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+ \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239, Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\
+ Fax:~+1~209~561~4584 \ Email: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org}
+
+ UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB, UK\\
+ Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\section{Text fonts}
+\label{Sec:text}
+
+This section describes the commands available to class and package
+writers for specifying and selecting fonts.
+
+\subsection{Text font attributes}
+
+Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}:
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the
+ font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are
+ Knuth's `\TeX{} text' encoding, and the `\TeX{} text extended'
+ encoding developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{}
+ Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name `Cork encoding').
+
+\item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under
+ a common name by the font foundry. For example, `Adobe Times', `ITC
+ Garamond', and Knuth's `Computer Modern Roman' are all font families.
+
+\item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is. For example, `medium
+ weight', `narrow' and `bold extended' are all series.
+
+\item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For
+ example, `italic', `oblique' and `upright' (sometimes called
+ `roman') are all font shapes.
+
+\item[size] The design size of the font, for example `10pt'. If no
+ dimension is specified, `pt' is assumed.
+
+\end{description}
+The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by
+\LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ |OT1| & \TeX{} text \\
+ |T1| & \TeX{} extended text \\
+ |OML| & \TeX{} math italic \\
+ |OMS| & \TeX{} math symbols \\
+ |OMX| & \TeX{} math large symbols \\
+ |U| & Unknown \\
+ |L<xx>| & A local encoding
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The `local' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only
+locally available, for example a font containing an organisation's
+logo in various sizes.
+
+There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common
+ones are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ |cmr| & Computer Modern Roman \\
+ |cmss| & Computer Modern Sans \\
+ |cmtt| & Computer Modern Typewriter \\
+ |cmm| & Computer Modern Math Italic \\
+ |cmsy| & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\
+ |cmex| & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\
+ |ptm| & Adobe Times \\
+ |phv| & Adobe Helvetica \\
+ |pcr| & Adobe Courier
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The most common values for the font series are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ |m| & Medium \\
+ |b| & Bold \\
+ |bx| & Bold extended \\
+ |sb| & Semi-bold \\
+ |c| & Condensed
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The most common values for the font shape are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ |n| & Normal (that is `upright' or `roman') \\
+ |it| & Italic \\
+ |sl| & Slanted (or `oblique') \\
+ |sc| & Caps and small caps
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The font size is specified as a dimension, for example |10pt| or
+|1.5in| or |3mm|; if no unit is specified, |pt| is assumed. These five
+parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, for example:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}r@{\,}l@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}cc@{}r@{}}
+ \multicolumn{5}{@{}c}{\emph{\LaTeX{} specification}} &
+ \emph{Font} &
+ \emph{\TeX{} font name} \\
+ |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| & |10| &
+ Computer Modern Roman 10 point &
+ |cmr10| \\
+ |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |sl| & |1pc| &
+ Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica &
+ |cmssi12| \\
+ |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| & |10pt| &
+ Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point &
+ |cmmi10| \\
+ |T1| & |ptm| & |b| & |it| & |1in| &
+ Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch &
+ |ptmb8t at 1in|
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull
+box warning, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Overfull \hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314--318
+ []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,
+\end{verbatim}
+The author commands for fonts set the five attributes:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rcl}
+ \emph{Author command} &
+ \emph{Attribute} &
+ \emph{Value in} |article| \emph{class} \\
+ |\textrm{..}| or |\rmfamily| & family & |cmr| \\
+ |\textsf{..}| or |\sffamily| & family & |cmss| \\
+ |\texttt{..}| or |\ttfamily| & family & |cmtt| \\
+ |\textmd{..}| or |\mdseries| & series & |m| \\
+ |\textbf{..}| or |\bfseries| & series & |bx| \\
+ |\textup{..}| or |\upshape| & shape & |n| \\
+ |\textit{..}| or |\itshape| & shape & |it| \\
+ |\textsl{..}| or |\slshape| & shape & |sl| \\
+ |\textsc{..}| or |\scshape| & shape & |sc| \\
+ |\tiny| & size & |5pt| \\
+ |\scriptsize| & size & |7pt| \\
+ |\footnotesize| & size & |8pt| \\
+ |\small| & size & |9pt| \\
+ |\normalsize| & size & |10pt| \\
+ |\large| & size & |12pt| \\
+ |\Large| & size & |14.4pt| \\
+ |\LARGE| & size & |17.28pt| \\
+ |\huge| & size & |20.74pt| \\
+ |\Huge| & size & |24.88pt|
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The values used by these commands are determined by the document class,
+using the parameters defined in Section~\ref{Sec:text.param}.
+
+Note that there are no author commands for selecting new encodings.
+These should be provided by packages, such as the |fontenc| package.
+
+This section does not explain how \LaTeX{} font specifications are
+turned into \TeX{} font names. This is described in
+Section~\ref{Sec:install}.
+
+\subsection{Selection commands}
+
+The low-level commands used to select a text font are as follows.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\fontencoding| \arg{encoding} \\
+|\fontfamily| \arg{family}\\
+|\fontseries| \arg{series}\\
+|\fontshape| \arg{shape}\\
+|\fontsize| \arg{size} \arg{baselineskip}\\
+|\linespread| \arg{factor}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+Each of the commands starting with |\font...| sets one of the font
+attributes; |\fontsize| also sets |\baselineskip|. The |\linespread|
+command prepares to multiply the current (or newly defined)
+|\baselineskip| with \m{factor} (e.g., spreads the lines apart for
+values greater one).
+
+The actual font in use is not altered by these commands, but the
+current attributes are used to determine which font and baseline skip
+to use after the next |\selectfont| command.
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\selectfont|
+\end{decl}
+Selects a text font, based on the current values of the font attributes.
+
+\emph{Warning}: There \emph{must} be a |\selectfont| command
+immediately after any settings of the font parameters by (some of)
+the six commands above, before any following text.
+For example, it is legal to say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fontfamily{ptm}\fontseries{b}\selectfont Some text.
+\end{verbatim}
+but it is \emph{not} legal to say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fontfamily{ptm} Some \fontseries{b}\selectfont text.
+\end{verbatim}
+You may get unexpected results if you put text between a
+|\font<parameter>| command (or |\linespread|) and a |\selectfont|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\usefont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+A short hand for the equivalent |\font...| commands followed by a
+call to |\selectfont|.
+
+
+\subsection{Internals}
+
+The current values of the font attributes are held in internal macros.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\f@encoding| \\
+ |\f@family| \\
+ |\f@series| \\
+ |\f@shape| \\
+ |\f@size| \\
+ |\f@baselineskip| \\
+ |\tf@size| \\
+ |\sf@size| \\
+ |\ssf@size|
+\end{decl}
+
+These hold the current values of the encoding, the family, the series,
+the shape, the size, the baseline skip, the main math size, the
+`script' math size and the `scriptscript' math size. The last three
+are accessible only within a formula; outside of math they may contain
+arbitrary values.
+
+For example, to set the size to 12 without
+changing the baseline skip:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fontsize{12}{\f@baselineskip}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, you should \emph{never} alter the values of the internal
+commands directly; they must only be modified using the low-level
+commands like |\fontfamily|, |\fontseries|, etc. If you disobey this
+warning you might produce code that loops.
+
+\subsection{Parameters for author commands}
+\label{Sec:text.param}
+
+The parameter values set by author commands such as |\textrm| and
+|\rmfamily|, etc.\ are not hard-wired into \LaTeX; instead these
+commands use the values of a number of parameters set by the document
+class and packages. For example, |\rmdefault| is the name of the
+default family selected by |\textrm| and |\rmfamily|. Thus to set a
+document in Adobe Times, Helvetica and Courier, the document designer
+specifies:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\encodingdefault| \\
+ |\familydefault| \\
+ |\seriesdefault| \\
+ |\shapedefault|
+\end{decl}
+The encoding, family, series and shape of the main body font. By
+default these are |OT1|, |\rmdefault|, |m| and |n|. Note that since
+the default family is |\rmdefault|, this means that changing
+|\rmdefault| will change the main body font of the document.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\rmdefault| \\
+ |\sfdefault| \\
+ |\ttdefault|
+\end{decl}
+The families selected by |\textrm|, |\rmfamily|, |\textsf|,
+|\sffamily|, |\texttt| and |\ttfamily|. By default these are |cmr|,
+|cmss| and |cmtt|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\bfdefault| \\
+ |\mddefault|
+\end{decl}
+The series selected by |\textbf|, |\bfseries|, |\textmd| and
+|\mdseries|. By default these are |bx| and |m|.
+These values are suitable for the default families used. If other
+fonts are used as standard document fonts (for example, certain
+PostScript fonts) it might be necessary to adjust the value of
+|\bfdefault| to |b| since only a few such families have a `bold
+extended' series. An alternative (taken for the fonts provided by
+|psnfss|) is to define silent substitutions from |bx| series to |b|
+series with special |\DeclareFontShape| declarations and the |ssub|
+size function, see Section~\ref{sec:sizefunct}.
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\itdefault| \\
+ |\sldefault| \\
+ |\scdefault| \\
+ |\updefault|
+\end{decl}
+The shapes selected by |\textit|, |\itshape|, |\textsl|, |\slshape|,
+|\textsc|, |\scshape|, |\textup| and |\upshape|. By default these are
+|it|, |sl|, |sc| and |n|.
+
+Note that there are no parameters for the size commands. These should
+be defined directly in class files, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+More elaborate examples (setting additional parameters when the text
+size is changed) can be found in |classes.dtx| the source
+documentation for the classes |article|, |report|, and |book|.
+
+
+\subsection{Special font declaration commands}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFixedFont| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+ \arg{shape} \arg{size}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch which selects the font
+that is specified by the attributes \m{encoding}, \m{family},
+\m{series}, \m{shape}, and \m{size}.
+
+The font is selected without any adjustments to baselineskip and other
+surrounding conditions.
+
+This example makes |{\picturechar .}| select a small dot very quickly:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareFixedFont{\picturechar}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{5}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareTextFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{font-switches}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font command with one argument.
+The current font attributes are locally modified by \m{font-switches}
+and then the argument of \m{cmd} is typeset in the resulting new font.
+
+Commands defined by |\DeclareTextFontCommand| automatically take care
+of any necessary italic correction (on either side).
+
+The following example shows how |\textrm| is defined by the kernel.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textrm}{\rmfamily}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To define a command that always typeset its argument in the italic
+shape of the main document font you could declare:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextFontCommand{\normalit}{\normalfont\itshape}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if
+\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined
+is put in the transcript file.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareOldFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{text-switch}
+ \arg{math-switch}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch (i.e.~used with the
+syntax |{<cmd>...}|) having the definition \m{text-switch}
+when used in text and the definition \m{math-switch} when used in a
+formula.
+Math alphabet commands, like |\mathit|, when used within \m{math-switch}
+should not have an argument. Their use in this argument causes their
+semantics to change so that they here act as a font switch, as
+required by the usage of the \m{cmd}.
+
+This declaration is useful for setting up commands like |\rm| to behave
+as they did in \LaTeX~2.09. We strongly urge you \emph{not} to misuse
+this declaration to invent new font commands.
+
+The following example defines |\it| to produce the italic shape of the
+main document font if used in text and to switch to the font that would
+normally be produced by the math alphabet |\mathit| if used in a
+formula.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if
+\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined
+is put in the transcript file.
+
+
+\section{Math fonts}
+\label{Sec:math}
+
+This section describes the commands available to class and package
+writers for specifying math fonts and math commands.
+
+\subsection{Math font attributes}
+
+The selection of fonts within math mode is quite different to that of
+text fonts.
+
+Some math fonts are selected explicitly by one-argument commands such
+as |\mathsf{max}| or |\mathbf{vec}|; such fonts are called \emph{math
+alphabets}. These math alphabet commands affect only the font used
+for letters and symbols of type |\mathalpha| (see
+Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands}); other symbols within the argument
+will be left unchanged. The predefined math alphabets are:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+ \emph{Alphabet} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\
+ |\mathnormal| & default & $abcXYZ$ \\
+ |\mathrm| & roman & $\mathrm{abcXYZ}$ \\
+ |\mathbf| & bold roman & $\mathbf{abcXYZ}$ \\
+ |\mathsf| & sans serif & $\mathsf{abcXYZ}$ \\
+ |\mathit| & text italic & $\mathit{abcXYZ}$ \\
+ |\mathtt| & typewriter & $\mathtt{abcXYZ}$ \\
+ |\mathcal| & calligraphic & $\mathcal{XYZ}$
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Other math fonts are selected implicitly by \TeX{} for symbols, with
+commands such as |\oplus| (producing $\oplus$) or with straight
+characters like |>>| or |+|. Fonts containing such math symbols are
+called \emph{math symbol fonts}. The predefined math symbol fonts
+are:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+ \emph{Symbol font} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\
+ |operators| & symbols from |\mathrm| & $[\;+\;]$ \\
+ |letters| & symbols from |\mathnormal| & $<<\star>>$ \\
+ |symbols| & most \LaTeX{} symbols & $\leq*\geq$ \\
+ |largesymbols| & large symbols & $\sum\prod\int$
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Some math fonts are both \emph{math alphabets} and \emph{math symbol
+fonts}, for example |\mathrm| and |operators| are the same font, and
+|\mathnormal| and |letters| are the same font.
+
+Math fonts in \LaTeX{} have the same five attributes as text fonts:
+encoding, family, series, shape and size. However, there are no
+commands that allow the attributes to be individually changed.
+Instead, the conversion from math fonts to these five attributes is
+controlled by the \emph{math version}. For example, the |normal| math
+version maps:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rlc@{ }c@{ }c@{ }c}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{\emph{Math font}} &
+ \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{External font}} \\
+ \emph{Alphabets} & \emph{Symbol fonts} &
+ \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{Attributes}} \\
+ |\mathnormal| & |letters| & |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| \\
+ |\mathrm| & |operators| & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| \\
+ |\mathcal| & |symbols| & |OMS| & |cmsy| & |m| & |n| \\
+ & |largesymbols| & |OMX| & |cmex| & |m| & |n| \\
+ |\mathbf| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |bx| & |n| \\
+ |\mathsf| & & |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |n| \\
+ |\mathit| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |it| \\
+ |\mathtt| & & |OT1| & |cmtt| & |m| & |n|
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The |bold| math version is similar except that it contains bold fonts.
+The command |\boldmath| selects the |bold| math version.
+
+Math versions can only be changed outside of math mode.
+
+The two predefined math versions are:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ |normal| & the default math version \\
+ |bold| & the bold math version
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Packages may define new math alphabets, math symbol fonts, and math
+versions. This section describes the commands for writing such
+packages.
+
+\subsection{Selection commands}
+
+There are no commands for selecting symbol fonts. Instead, these are
+selected indirectly through symbol commands like |\oplus|.
+Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands} explains how to define symbol commands.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\mathnormal{<math>}|\\
+ |\mathcal{<math>}|\\
+ |\mathrm{<math>}|\\
+ |\mathbf{<math>}|\\
+ |\mathsf{<math>}|\\
+ |\mathit{<math>}|\\
+ |\mathtt{<math>}|
+\end{decl}
+Each math alphabet is a command which can only be used inside math
+mode. For example, |$x + \mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$| produces $x +
+\mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\mathversion{<version>}|
+\end{decl}
+This command selects a math version; it can only be used outside math
+mode. For example, |\boldmath| is defined to be |\mathversion{bold}|.
+
+\subsection{Declaring math versions}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathVersion| \arg{version}
+\end{decl}
+
+Defines \m{version} to be a math version.
+
+The newly declared version is initialised with the defaults for all
+symbol fonts and math alphabets declared so far (see the commands
+|\DeclareSymbolFont| and |\DeclareMathAlphabet|).
+
+If used on an already existing version, an information message is
+written to the transcript file and all previous |\SetSymbolFont| or
+|\SetMathAlphabet| declarations for this version are overwritten by
+the math alphabet and symbol font defaults, i.e.~one ends up with a
+virgin math version.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareMathVersion{normal}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Declaring math alphabets}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{encoding} \arg{family}
+ \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+If this is the first declaration for \m{math-alph} then a new math
+alphabet with this as its command name is created.
+
+The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to
+set, or reset, the default values for this math alphabet in all math
+versions; if required, these must be further reset later for a
+particular math version by a |\SetMathAlphabet| command.
+
+If \m{shape} is empty then this \m{math-alph} is declared to be invalid
+in all versions, unless it is set by a later |\SetMathAlphabet|
+command for a particular math version.
+
+Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math
+alphabet command or is undefined; and that \m{encoding} is a known
+encoding scheme, i.e., has been previously declared.
+
+
+In these examples, |\foo| is defined for all math versions but |\baz|,
+by default, is defined nowhere.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareMathAlphabet{\foo}{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
+ \DeclareMathAlphabet{\baz}{OT1}{}{}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\SetMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{version}\\
+ \null\hfill\arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+
+Changes, or sets, the font for the math alphabet \m{math-alph} in math
+version \m{version} to \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}.
+
+Checks that \m{math-alph} has been declared as a math alphabet,
+\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a known
+encoding scheme.
+
+
+This example defines |\baz| for the `normal' math version only:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \SetMathAlphabet{\baz}{normal}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note that this declaration is not used for all math alphabets:
+Section~\ref{sec:symalph} describes |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|,
+which is used to set up math alphabets contained in fonts which have
+been declared as symbol fonts.
+
+
+\subsection{Declaring symbol fonts}
+\label{sec:symalph}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{encoding} \arg{family}
+ \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+If this is the first declaration for \m{sym-font} then a new
+symbol font with this name is created (i.e.~this identifier is assigned
+to a new \TeX{} math group).
+
+The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to
+set, or reset. the default values for this symbol font in \emph{all}
+math versions; if required, these must be further reset later for
+a particular math version by a |\SetSymbolFont| command.
+
+Checks that \m{encoding} is a declared encoding scheme.
+
+
+For example, the following sets up the first four standard math symbol
+fonts:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareSymbolFont{operators}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+ \DeclareSymbolFont{letters}{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}
+ \DeclareSymbolFont{symbols}{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+ \DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\SetSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{version}\\
+ \null\hfill \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+
+Changes the symbol font \m{sym-font} for math version \m{version}
+to \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape}.
+
+Checks that \m{sym-font} has been declared as a symbol font,
+\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a
+declared encoding scheme.
+
+
+For example, the following come from the set up of the `bold'
+math version:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters}{bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{sym-font}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+Allows the previously declared symbol font \m{sym-font} to be the
+math alphabet with command \m{math-alph} in \emph{all} math versions.
+
+Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math alphabet
+command or is undefined; and that \m{sym-font} is a symbol font.
+
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathrm}{operators}
+ \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathcal}{symbols}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This declaration should be used in preference to
+|\DeclareMathAlphabet| and |\SetMathAlphabet| when a math alphabet is
+the same as a symbol font; this is because it makes better use of the
+limited number (only 16) of \TeX's math groups.
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+Note that, whereas a \TeX{} math group is allocated to each symbol font
+when it is first declared, a math alphabet uses a \TeX{} math group
+only when its command is used within a math formula.
+
+
+\subsection{Declaring math symbols}
+\label{Sec:math.commands}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathSymbol| \arg{symbol} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font}
+ \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+
+The \m{symbol} can be either a single character such as `|>>|', or a
+macro name, such as |\sum|.
+
+Defines the \m{symbol} to be a math symbol of type
+\m{type} in slot \m{slot} of symbol font \m{sym-font}. The
+\m{type} can be given as a number or as a command:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+ \emph{Type} & \emph{Meaning} & \emph{Example} \\
+ |0| or |\mathord | & Ordinary & $\alpha$ \\
+ |1| or |\mathop | & Large operator & $\sum$ \\
+ |2| or |\mathbin | & Binary operation & $\times$ \\
+ |3| or |\mathrel | & Relation & $\leq$ \\
+ |4| or |\mathopen | & Opening & $\langle$ \\
+ |5| or |\mathclose| & Closing & $\rangle$ \\
+ |6| or |\mathpunct| & Punctuation & $;$ \\
+ |7| or |\mathalpha| & Alphabet character & $A$
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Only symbols of type |\mathalpha| will be affected by math alphabet
+commands: within the argument of a math alphabet command they will
+produce the character in slot \m{slot} of that math alphabet's font.
+Symbols of other types will always produce the same symbol
+(within one math version).
+
+|\DeclareMathSymbol| allows a macro \m{symbol} to be redefined only if
+it was previously defined to be a math symbol. It also checks that
+the \m{sym-font} is a declared symbol font.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\alpha}{0}{letters}{"0B}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\lessdot}{\mathbin}{AMSb}{"0C}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\alphld}{\mathalpha}{AMSb}{"0C}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareMathDelimiter| \arg{cmd} \arg{type}
+ \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\
+ \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2}
+\end{decl}
+Defines \m{cmd} to be a math delimiter where the small variant is in
+slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the large
+variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font \m{sym-font-2}.
+Both symbol fonts must have been declared previously.
+
+Checks that \m{sym-font-i} are both declared symbol fonts.
+
+If \TeX{} is not looking for a delimiter, \m{cmd} is treated just as
+if it had been defined with |\DeclareMathSymbol| using
+\m{type}, \m{sym-font-1} and \m{slot-1}. In other words, if a
+command is defined as a delimiter then this automatically defines it
+as a math symbol.
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/06/01}
+In case \m{cmd} is a single character such as `|[|', the same syntax is
+used. Previously the \arg{type} argument was not present (and thus the
+corresponding math symbol declaration had to be provided seperately).
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\langle}{\mathopen}{symbols}{"68}
+ {largesymbols}{"0A}
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{(} {\mathopen}{operators}{"28}
+ {largesymbols}{"00}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+
+Defines \m{cmd} to act as a math accent.
+
+The accent character comes from slot \m{slot} in
+\m{sym-font}. The \m{type} can be either
+|\mathord| or |\mathalpha|; in the latter case the accent character
+changes font when used in a math alphabet.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareMathAccent{\acute}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"13}
+ \DeclareMathAccent{\vec}{\mathord}{letters}{"7E}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathRadical| \arg{cmd}
+ \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\
+ \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2}
+\end{decl}
+
+Defines \m{cmd} to be a radical where the small variant is in
+slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the
+large variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font
+\m{sym-font-2}. Both symbol fonts must have been declared
+previously.
+
+Example (probably the only use for it!):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareMathRadical{\sqrt}{symbols}{"70}{largesymbols}{"70}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Declaring math sizes}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathSizes| \arg{t-size} \arg{mt-size} \arg{s-size}
+ \arg{ss-size}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares that \m{mt-size} is the (main) math text size, \m{s-size} is
+the `script' size and \m{ss-size} the `scriptscript' size to be used
+in math, when \m{t-size} is the current text size. For text sizes for
+which no such declaration is given the `script' and `scriptscript'
+size will be calculated and then fonts are loaded for the calculated
+sizes or the best approximation (this may result in a warning
+message).
+
+Normally, \m{t-size} and \m{mt-size} will be identical; however, if,
+for example, PostScript text fonts are mixed with bit-map math fonts
+then you may not have available a \m{mt-size} for every \m{t-size}.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{13.82}{14.4}{10}{7}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Font installation}
+\label{Sec:install}
+
+This section explains how \LaTeX's font attributes are turned into
+\TeX{} font specifications.
+
+\subsection{Font definition files}
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+The description of how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{}
+fonts is usually kept in a \emph{font definition file} (|.fd|). The
+file for family \m{family} in encoding \m{ENC} must be
+called |<enc><family>.fd|: for example, |ot1cmr.fd| for Computer
+Modern Roman with encoding |OT1| or |t1ptm.fd| for Adobe Times with
+encoding |T1|. Note that encoding names are converted to lowercase
+when used as part of file names.
+
+Whenever \LaTeX{} encounters an encoding/family combination that it
+does not know (e.g.~if the document designer says
+|\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont|) then \LaTeX{} attempts to load the
+appropriate |.fd| file. ``Not known'' means: there was no
+|\DeclareFontFamily| declaration issued for this encoding/family
+combination. If the |.fd| file could not be found, a warning is
+issued and font substitutions are made.
+
+The declarations in the font definition file are responsible for
+telling \LaTeX{} how to load fonts for that encoding/family
+combination.
+
+\subsection{Font definition file commands}
+
+\emph{Note}: A font definition file should contain only commands
+from this subsection.
+
+Note that these commands can also be used outside a font definition
+file: they can be put in package or class files, or even in the
+preamble of a document.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]|
+\end{decl}
+The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| command,
+as described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \ProvidesFile{t1ptm.fd}[1994/06/01 Adobe Times font definitions]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Spaces within the arguments specific to font definition files are
+ignored to avoid surplus spaces in the document. If a real space is
+necessary use |\space|.
+\NEWdescription{2004/02/10}However, note that this is only true if the
+declaration is made at top level! If used within the definition of
+another command, within |\AtBeginDocument|, option code or in similar
+places, then spaces within the argument will remain and may result in
+incorrect table entries.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontFamily| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{loading-settings}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares a font family \m{family} to be available in encoding scheme
+\m{encoding}.
+
+The \m{loading-settings} are executed immediately after loading any
+font with this encoding and family.
+
+Checks that \m{encoding} was previously declared.
+
+This example refers to the Computer Modern Typewriter font family in
+the Cork encoding:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font=-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Each |.fd| file should contain exactly one |\DeclareFontFamily|
+command, and it should be for the appropriate encoding/family
+combination.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontShape| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+ \arg{shape}\\
+ \null\hfill \arg{loading-info} \arg{loading-settings}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares a font shape combination; here \m{loading-info} contains the
+information that combines sizes with external fonts. The syntax is
+complex and is described in Section~\ref{sec:loadinfo} below.
+
+The \m{loading-settings} are executed after loading any font with this
+font shape. They are executed immediately after the
+`loading-settings' which were declared by |\DeclareFontFamily| and so
+they can be used to overwrite the settings made at the family level.
+
+Checks that the combination \m{encoding}\m{family} was previously
+declared via |\DeclareFontFamily|.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{%
+ <<5-8>> sub * cmr/m/n
+ <<8>> cmsl8
+ <<9>> cmsl9
+ <<10>> <<10.95>> cmsl10
+ <<12>> <<14.4>> <<17.28>> <<20.74>> <<24.88>> cmsl12
+ }{}
+\end{verbatim}
+The file can contain any number of |\DeclareFontShape| commands,
+which should be for the appropriate \m{encoding} and \m{family}.
+
+\NEWfeature{1996/06/01}
+The font family declarations for the |OT1|-encoded fonts now all
+contain:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \hyphenchar\font=`\-
+\end{verbatim}
+This enables the use of an alternative |\hyphenchar| in other encodings
+whilst maintaining the correct value for all fonts.
+
+\subsection{Font file loading information}
+\label{sec:loadinfo}
+
+The information which tells \LaTeX{} exactly which font ({\tt .tfm})
+files to load is contained in the \m{loading-info} part of a
+|\DeclareFontShape| declaration. This part consists of one or more
+\m{fontshape-decl}s, each of which has the following form:
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{r@{ $::=$ }l}
+ \m{fontshape-decl} & \m{size-infos} \m{font-info} \\
+ \m{size-infos} & \m{size-infos} \m{size-info} $\mid$
+ \m{size-info} \\
+ \m{size-info} & ``|<<|'' \m{number-or-range} ``|>>|'' \\
+ \m{font-info} & $[$ \m{size-function} ``|*|'' $]$
+ $[$ ``|[|'' \m{optarg} ``|]|'' $]$ \m{fontarg} \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The \m{number-or-range} denotes the size or size-range
+for which this entry applies.
+
+If it contains a hyphen it is a
+range: lower bound on the left (if missing, zero implied), upper bound
+on the right (if missing, $\infty$ implied). For ranges, the
+upper bound is \emph{not} included in the range and the lower bound is.
+
+Examples:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+ |<<10>>| & simple size& 10pt only\\
+ |<<-8>>| & range& all sizes less than 8pt\\
+ |<<8-14.4>>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal to 8pt\\
+ & & \ but less than 14.4pt\\
+ |<<14.4->>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal 14.4pt
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If more than one \m{size-info} entry follows without any
+intervening \m{font-info}, they all share the next \m{font-info}.
+
+The \m{size-function}, if present, handles the use of \m{font-info}.
+If not present, the `empty' \m{size-function} is assumed.
+
+All the \m{size-info}s are inspected in the order in which they appear
+in the font shape declaration. If a \m{size-info} matches the
+requested size, its \m{size-function} is executed. If |\external@font|
+is non-empty afterwards this process stops, otherwise the next
+\m{size-info} is inspected. (See also |\DeclareSizeFunction|.)
+
+If this process does not lead to a non-empty |\external@font|,
+\LaTeX{} tries the nearest simple size. If the entry contains only
+ranges an error is returned.
+
+
+\subsection{Size functions}
+\label{sec:sizefunct}
+
+
+\LaTeX{} provides the following size functions, whose `inputs' are
+\m{fontarg} and \m{optarg} (when present).
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[`' (empty)]
+Load the external font \m{fontarg} at the user-requested size. If
+\m{optarg} is present, it is used as the scale-factor.
+
+\item[s]
+Like the empty function but without terminal warnings, only
+loggings.
+
+\item[gen]
+Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by
+the user-requested size, e.g.~|<<8>> <<9>> <<10>> gen * cmtt|
+
+\item[sgen]
+Like the `gen' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings.
+
+\item[genb]
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by
+the user-requested size, using the conventions of the `ec' fonts.
+e.g.~|<<10.98>> genb * dctt| produces |dctt1098|.
+
+\item[sgenb]
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+Like the `genb' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings.
+
+\item[sub]
+Tries to load a font from a different font shape declaration given by
+\m{fontarg} in the form \m{family}|/|\m{series}|/|\m{shape}.
+
+\item[ssub]
+Silent variant of `sub', only loggings.
+
+\item[subf]
+Like the empty function but issues a warning that it has to substitute
+the external font \m{fontarg} because the desired font shape was not
+available in the requested size.
+
+\item[ssubf]
+Silent variant of `subf', only loggings.
+
+\item[fixed]
+Load font \m{fontarg} as is, disregarding the user-requested size.
+If present, \m{optarg} gives the ``at \ldots pt'' size to be used.
+
+\item[sfixed]
+Silent variant of `fixed', only loggings.
+
+\end{description}
+
+Examples for the use of most of the above size functions can be found
+in the file |cmfonts.fdd|---the source for the standard |.fd| files
+describing the Computer Modern fonts by Donald Knuth.
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareSizeFunction| \arg{name} \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares a size-function \m{name} for use in |\DeclareFontShape|
+commands. The interface is still under development but there should be
+no real need to a define new size functions.
+
+The \m{code} is executed when the size or size-range in
+|\DeclareFontShape| matches the user-requested size.
+
+The arguments of the size-function are automatically parsed and placed
+into |\mandatory@arg| and |\optional@arg| for use in \m{code}. Also
+available, of course, is |\f@size|, which is the user-requested size.
+
+To signal success \m{code} must define the command |\external@font|
+to contain the external name and any scaling options (if present) for
+the font to be loaded.
+
+This example sets up the `empty' size function (simplified):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareSizeFunction{}
+ {\edef\external@font{\mandatory@arg\space at\f@size}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\section{Encodings}
+\label{Sec:encode}
+
+This section explains how to declare and use new font encodings and
+how to declare commands for use with particular encodings.
+
+\subsection{The \textsf{fontenc} package}
+
+Users can select new font encodings using the |fontenc| package. The
+|fontenc| package has options for encodings; the last option becomes
+the default encoding. For example, to use the |OT2| (Washington
+University Cyrillic encoding) and |T1| encodings, with |T1| as the
+default, an author types:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+For each font encoding \m{ENC} given as an option, this package loads
+the \emph{encoding definition} (|<enc>enc.def|, with an all
+lower-case name) file; it also sets |\encodingdefault| to be the last
+encoding in the option list.
+
+The declarations in the encoding definition file |<enc>enc.def| for
+encoding \m{ENC} are responsible for declaring this encoding and
+telling \LaTeX{} how to produce characters in this encoding; this file
+should contain nothing else (see Section~\ref{Sec:encode.def}.
+
+The standard \LaTeX{} format declares the |OT1| and |T1| text
+encodings by inputting the files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def|; it also
+sets up various defaults which require that |OT1|-encoded fonts are
+available.
+Other encoding set-ups might be added to the distribution at a
+later stage.
+
+Thus the example above loads the files |ot2enc.def| and |t1enc.def|
+and sets |\encodingdefault| to |T1|.
+
+\emph{Warning}: If you wish to use |T1|-encoded fonts other than the `cmr'
+family then you may need to load the package (e.g.~\texttt{times})
+that selects the fonts \emph{before} loading \texttt{fontenc} (this
+prevents the system from attempting to load any |T1|-encoded fonts from
+the `cmr' family).
+
+\subsection{Encoding definition file commands}
+\label{Sec:encode.def}
+
+\emph{Note}: An encoding definition file should contain only commands
+from this subsection.
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+As with the font definition file commands, it is also possible
+(although normally not necessary) to use these declarations directly
+within a class or package file.
+
+\emph{Warning}: Some aspects of the contents of font definition files
+are still under development. Therefore, the current versions of the
+files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def| are temporary versions and should
+not be used as models for producing further such files. For further
+information you should read the documentation in |ltoutenc.dtx|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]|
+\end{decl}
+The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile|
+command, described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \ProvidesFile{ot2enc.def}
+ [1994/06/01 Washington University Cyrillic encoding]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontEncoding| \arg{encoding} \arg{text-settings}
+ \arg{math-settings}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares a new encoding scheme \m{encoding}.
+
+The \m{text-settings} are
+declarations which are executed every time |\selectfont| changes the
+encoding to be \m{encoding}.
+
+The \m{math-settings} are similar but are for math alphabets. They
+are executed whenever a math alphabet with this encoding is
+called.
+
+\NEWfeature{1998/12/01}
+It also saves the value of \m{encoding} in the macro
+|\LastDeclaredEncoding|.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareFontEncoding{OT1}{}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Some author commands need to change their definition depending on
+which encoding is currently in use. For example, in the |OT1|
+encoding, the letter `\AE' is in slot |"1D|, whereas in the |T1|
+encoding it is in slot |"C6|. So the definition of |\AE| has to
+change depending on whether the current encoding is |OT1| or |T1|.
+The following commands allow this to happen.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding}
+ \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command is like |\newcommand|, except that it defines a
+command which is specific to one encoding. For example, the
+definition of |\k| in the |T1| encoding is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1]
+ {\oalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}}
+\end{verbatim}
+|\DeclareTextCommand| takes the same optional arguments as
+|\newcommand|.
+
+The resulting command is
+robust, even if the code in \m{definition} is fragile.
+
+It does not produce an error if the command has already
+been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\ProvideTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding}
+ \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommand|, except that
+if \m{cmd} is already defined in encoding \m{encoding}, then the
+definition is ignored.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareTextSymbol| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+This command defines a text symbol with slot \m{slot} in the
+encoding. For example, the definition of |\ss| in the |OT1| encoding
+is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT1}{25}
+\end{verbatim}
+It does not produce an error if the command has already
+been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareTextAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+This command declares a text accent, with the accent taken from slot
+\m{slot} in the encoding. For example, the definition of |\"| in
+the |OT1| encoding is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127}
+\end{verbatim}
+It does not produce an error if the command has already
+been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareTextComposite| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter}
+ \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+This command declares that the composite letter formed from applying
+\m{cmd} to \m{letter} is defined to be simply slot \m{slot} in the
+encoding. The \m{letter} should be a single letter (such as |a|) or
+a single command (such as |\i|).
+
+
+For example, the definition of |\'{a}|
+in the |T1| encoding could be declared like this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{a}{225}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \m{cmd} will normally have been previously declared
+for this encoding, either by using
+|\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument |\DeclareTextCommand|.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter}
+ \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This is a more general form of |\DeclareTextComposite|, which allows
+for an arbitrary \m{definition}, not just a \m{slot}. The main use
+for this is to allow accents on |i| to act like accents on |\i|, for
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
+\end{verbatim}
+It has the same restrictions as |\DeclareTextComposite|.
+
+
+\begin{decl}[1998/12/01]
+ |\LastDeclaredEncoding|
+\end{decl}
+This holds the name of the last encoding declared via
+|\DeclareFontEncoding| (this should also be the currently most
+efficient encoding). It can be used in the \m{encoding} argument
+of the above declarations in place of explicitly mentioning the
+encoding, e.g.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
+ \DeclareTextAccent{\`}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0}
+ \DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{1}
+\end{verbatim}
+This can be useful in cases where encoding files sharing common code
+are generated from one source.
+
+
+\subsection{Default definitions}
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+The declarations used in encoding definition files define
+encoding-specific commands but they do not allow those commands to be
+used without explicitly changing the encoding. For some commands,
+such as symbols, this is not enough. For example, the~|OMS| encoding
+contains the symbol~`\S', but we need to be able to use the
+command~|\S| whatever the current encoding may be, without explicitly
+selecting the encoding~|OMS|.
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+To allow this, \LaTeX{} has commands that declare default definitions
+for commands; these defaults are used when the command is not defined
+in the current encoding. For example, the default encoding for~|\S|
+is~|OMS|, and so in an encoding (such as |OT1|) which does not
+contain~|\S|, the~|OMS| encoding is selected in order to access this
+glyph. But in an encoding (such as~|T1|) which does contain~|\S|, the
+glyph in that encoding is used. The standard \LaTeXe{} format sets
+up several such defaults using the following encodings: |OT1|,~|OMS|
+and~|OML|.
+
+\emph{Warning}: These commands should \emph{not} occur in encoding
+definition files, since those files should declare only commands for use
+when that encoding has been selected. They should instead be placed
+in packages; they must, of course, always refer to encodings that are
+known to be available.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\DeclareTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command allows an encoding-specific command to be given a default
+definition. For example, the default definition for |\copyright| is
+defined be be a circled `c' with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \\
+ |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding}
+\end{decl}
+These commands allow an encoding-specific command to be given a
+default encoding. For example, the default encoding for |\"| and
+|\ae| is set to be |OT1| by:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1}
+ \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ae}{OT1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| can be used on any one-argument
+encoding-specific command, not just those defined with
+|\DeclareTextAccent|. Similarly, |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| can be
+used on any encoding-specific command with no arguments, not just
+those defined with |\DeclareTextSymbol|.
+
+For more examples of these definitions, see |ltoutenc.dtx|.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\ProvideTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommandDefault|, except that
+if the command already has a default definition, then the definition
+is ignored. This is useful to give `faked' definitions of symbols
+which may be given `real' definitions by other packages. For example,
+a package might give a fake definition of |\textonequarter| by saying:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{$\m@th\frac14$}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ \subsection{Encoding defaults}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults| \arg{text-settings} \arg{math-settings}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares \m{text-settings} and \m{math-settings} for all encoding
+schemes. These are executed before the encoding scheme dependent ones
+are executed so that one can use the defaults for the major cases and
+overwrite them if necessary using |\DeclareFontEncoding|.
+
+If |\relax| is used as an argument, the current setting of this default
+is left unchanged.
+
+This example is used by amsfonts.sty for accent positioning; it changes
+only the math settings:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{\relax}{\def\accentclass@{7}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontSubstitution| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+ \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares the default values for font substitution which will be used
+when a font with encoding \m{encoding}
+should be loaded but no font can be found with the current
+attributes.
+
+These substitutions are local to the encoding scheme because the
+encoding scheme is never substituted! They are tried in the order
+\m{shape} then \m{series} and finally \m{family}.
+
+If no defaults are set up for an encoding, the values given by
+|\DeclareErrorFont| are used.
+
+The font specification for
+\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}
+must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape|
+before the |\begin{document}| is reached.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Case changing}
+\label{sec:case}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\
+ |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
+\TeX{} provides the two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for
+changing the case of text. Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do
+not change the case of characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or
+|\aa|. To overcome this problem, \LaTeX{} provides these two commands.
+
+In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any
+command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment
+because such fonts do not exist.
+
+For further details, see \texttt{clsguide.tex}.
+
+\NEWdescription{1999/04/23}
+In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in
+order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use,
+throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case. The
+table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well
+with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause
+problems when using other alphabets. As an experiment, it has now
+been extended for use with some Cyrillic encodings.
+
+
+\section{Miscellanea}
+\label{Sec:misc}
+
+This section covers the remaining font commands in \LaTeX{} and some
+other issues.
+
+\subsection{Font substitution}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareErrorFont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+ \arg{shape} \arg{size}
+\end{decl}
+
+Declares \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} to be the font shape
+used in cases where the standard substitution mechanism fails
+(i.e.~would loop). For the standard mechanism see the command
+|\DeclareFontSubstitution| above.
+
+The font specification for
+\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}
+must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape|
+before the |\begin{document}| is reached.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\fontsubfuzz|
+\end{decl}
+
+This parameter is used to decide whether or not to produce a terminal
+warning if a font size substitution takes place. If the difference
+between the requested and the chosen size is less than |\fontsubfuzz|
+the warning is only written to the transcript file. The default value
+is |0.4pt|. This can be redefined with |\renewcommand|, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\fontsubfuzz}{0pt} % always warn
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Preloading}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclarePreloadSizes| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+ \arg{shape}
+\arg{size-list}
+\end{decl}
+
+
+Specifies the fonts that should be preloaded by the format. These
+commands should be put in a |preload.cfg| file, which is read in when
+the \LaTeX{} format is being built.
+Read |preload.dtx| for more information on how to built such a
+configuration file.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{10,10.95,12}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Accented characters}
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/06/01}
+Accented characters in \LaTeX{} can be produced using commands such as
+|\"a| etc. The precise effect of such commands depends on the font
+encoding being used. When using a font encoding that contains the
+accented characters as individual glyphs (such as the |T1| encoding,
+in the case of |\"a|) words that contain such accented characters can
+be automatically hyphenated. For font encodings that do not contain
+the requested individual glyph (such as the |OT1| encoding) such a
+command invokes typesetting instructions that produce the accented
+character as a combination of character glyphs and diacritical marks
+in the font. In most cases this involves a call to the \TeX{}
+primitive |\accent|. Glyphs constructed as composites in this way
+inhibit hyphenation of the current word; this is one reason why the
+|T1| encoding is preferable to the original \TeX{} font encoding
+|OT1|.
+
+It is important to understand that commands like |\"a| in \LaTeXe{}
+represent just a name for a single glyph (in this case `umlaut a') and
+contain no information about how to typeset that glyph---thus it does
+\emph{not} mean `put two dots on top of the character a'. The
+decision as to what typesetting routine to use will depend on the
+encoding of the current font and so this decision is taken at the last
+minute. Indeed, it is possible that the same input will be typeset in
+more than one way in the same document; for example, text in section
+headings may also appear in table of contents and in running heads; and
+each of these may use a font with a different encoding.
+
+For this reason the notation |\"a| is \emph{not} equivalent to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand \chara {a} \"\chara
+\end{verbatim}
+In the latter case, \LaTeX{} does not expand the macro |\chara| but
+simply compares the notation (the string |\"\chara|) to its list of
+known composite notations in the current encoding; when it fails to
+find |\"\chara| it does the best it can and invokes the typesetting
+instructions that put the umlaut accent on top of the expansion of
+|\chara|. Thus, even if the font actually contains `\"a' as an
+individual glyph, it will not be used.
+
+The low-level accent commands in \LaTeX{} are defined in such a way
+that it is possible to combine a diacritical mark from one font with a
+glyph from another font; for example, |\"\textparagraph| will produce
+\"\textparagraph. The umlaut here
+is taken from the |OT1| encoded font |cmr10| whilst the paragraph sign
+is from the |OMS| encoded font |cmsy10|. (This example may be
+typographically silly but better ones would involve font encodings
+like |OT2| (Cyrillic) that might not be available at every
+site.)
+
+There are, however, restrictions on the font-changing commands that
+will work within the argument to such an accent command. These are
+\TeX{}nical in the sense that they follow from the way that \TeX{}'s
+|\accent| primitive works, allowing only a special class of commands
+between the accent and the accented character.
+
+The following are examples of commands that will not work correctly as
+the accent will appear above a space: the font commands with text
+arguments (|\textbf{...}| and friends); all the font size declarations
+(|\fontsize| and |\Large|, etc.); |\usefont| and declarations that
+depend on it, such as |\normalfont|; box commands (e.g.~|\mbox{...}|).
+
+The lower-level font declarations that set the attributes family,
+series and shape (such as |\fontshape{sl}\selectfont|) will produce
+correct typesetting, as will the default declarations such as
+|\bfseries|.
+
+
+\subsection{Naming conventions}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+Math alphabet commands all start with |\math...|: examples are
+|\mathbf|, |\mathcal|, etc.
+
+\item
+The text font changing commands with arguments all start with
+|\text...|: e.g.~|\textbf| and |\textrm|. The exception to this is
+|\emph|, since it occurs very commonly in author documents and so
+deserves a shorter name.
+
+\item
+Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all
+upper case) plus digits.
+
+The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encodings starting with the
+following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS|
+(symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding),
+|X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for
+|T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long math encodings), |S| (other
+symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard
+128-long text encodings) and |OM| (standard 128-long math encodings).
+
+Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable
+encodings. If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in
+a later release of \LaTeX.
+
+Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start
+with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will
+start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings..
+
+\item
+Font family names should contain up to five lower case letters.
+Where possible, these should conform to the \emph{Filenames for fonts}
+font naming scheme.
+
+\item
+Font series names should contain up to four lower case letters.
+
+\item
+Font shapes should contain up to two letters lower case.
+
+\item
+Names for symbol fonts are built from lower and upper case letters
+with no restriction.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Whenever possible, you should use the series and shape names suggested
+in \emph{\LaTeXcomp} since this will make it easier to combine new
+fonts with existing fonts.
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+ Where possible, text symbols should be named as |\text| followed by
+ the Adobe glyph name: for example |\textonequarter| or
+ |\textsterling|. Similarly, math symbols should be named as
+ |\math| followed by the glyph name, for example |\mathonequarter|
+ or |\mathsterling|. Commands which can be used in text or math can
+ then be defined using |\ifmmode|, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\pounds}{%
+ \ifmmode \mathsterling \else \textsterling \fi
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+ Note that commands defined in this way must be robust, in case they
+ get put into a section title or other moving argument.
+
+\section{If you need to know more \ldots}
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/06/01}
+The |tracefnt| package provides for tracing the actions concerned with
+loading, substituting and using fonts.
+The package accepts the following options:
+\begin{description}
+\item[errorshow] Write all information about font changes, etc.\ but
+ only to the transcript file unless an error occurs. This means that
+ information about font substitution will not be shown on the
+ terminal.
+
+\item[warningshow] Show all font warnings on the terminal. This
+ setting corresponds to the default behaviour when this
+ \texttt{tracefnt} package is \emph{not} used!
+
+\item[infoshow] Show all font warnings and all font info messages
+ (that are normally only written to the transcript file) also on the
+ terminal. This is the default when this \texttt{tracefnt} package is
+ loaded.
+
+\item[debugshow] In addition to what is shown by \texttt{infoshow},
+ show also changes of math fonts (as far as possible): beware, this
+ option can produce a large amount of output.
+
+\item[loading] Show the names of external font files when they are
+ loaded. This option shows only `newly loaded' fonts, not those
+ already preloaded in the format or the class file before this
+ \texttt{tracefnt} package becomes active.
+
+\item[pausing]
+ Turn all font warnings into errors so that \LaTeX{} will stop.
+\end{description}
+
+\emph{Warning}: The actions of this package can change the layout of a
+document and even, in rare cases, produce clearly wrong output, so
+it should not be used in the final formatting of `real documents'.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+
+\bibitem{A-W:GMS94}
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
+
+\bibitem{tub:DKn89}
+Donald~E. Knuth.
+\newblock Typesetting concrete mathematics.
+\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 10(1):31--36, April 1989.
+
+\bibitem{A-W:LLa94}
+Leslie Lamport.
+\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/grphcomp.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/grphcomp.err
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0db15e4f807
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/grphcomp.err
@@ -0,0 +1,1135 @@
+\newcommand\erratafiledate{2002/02/25}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
+% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
+% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
+% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
+% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
+% .cfg file.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls}
+% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach
+
+\ProvidesClass{errata}
+ [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)]
+
+\LoadClass{article}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
+\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
+
+\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
+
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+
+
+\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
+\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
+
+
+\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ \let\endgobble\egroup
+ \let\hideamp\relax
+ \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
+
+\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
+
+\let\endgobble\relax
+
+
+\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
+\newcommand\myprinting{}
+
+
+\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
+ \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi
+ \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
+ \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+
+\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
+\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
+
+\newcommand\showallerrors{%
+ \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
+ \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
+ \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
+
+
+\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
+ \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
+
+\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
+ \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
+
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
+ {
+ \input{\jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
+ \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
+ \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
+ \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Current settings are:}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ }
+ {}
+
+%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
+
+\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
+ \endgobble
+ \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \expandafter\gobbleerrata
+ \fi
+ \hideamp \\%
+ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
+ \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
+}
+
+\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
+ &\\[4pt]%
+ \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
+
+\newenvironment{erratalist}
+ {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
+ {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
+
+\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
+ {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
+ Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
+ \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2
+ \end{center}%
+ \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \vspace{20pt}}
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\small}
+
+\setlength\parindent{0pt}
+\setlength\parskip{2pt}
+
+\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
+
+% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
+
+\let\u\underline
+\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
+
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
+%
+%
+% Configuration file for the errata listing of
+%
+% The LaTeX Graphics Companion
+%
+%
+% \erratastartdate
+%
+% Specifies the date from which on
+% errata entries should be listed.
+%
+% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all
+% entries are typeset.
+%
+\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1997/03/01}
+
+%
+% \myprinting
+%
+% Specifies which (revised) printing you
+% own. For example, if you have the second
+% printing set this to 2 so that errors
+% already corrected in that printing will not
+% appear in your errata listing.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all
+% entries are typeset.
+%
+\renewcommand\myprinting{1}
+%
+%
+% \norevisionnumbers
+%
+% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
+% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
+% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
+% italic and add the revision number as a superscript.
+%
+%
+% \showallerrors
+%
+% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
+% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
+% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
+% default.
+%
+%
+\endinput
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+
+\documentclass{errata}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion}{\erratafiledate}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@book(A-W:GMR97,
+ author = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and
+ Frank Mittelbach},
+ title = {The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion},
+ substitle = {Illustrating Documents with {\TeX} and PostScript},
+ series = "Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting",
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ address = {Reading, Massachusetts},
+ year = 1997,
+ ISBN = "0-201-85469-4",
+ LCCN = "Z253.4.L38G663 1997",
+ pagenums = {xxv + 554},
+ source-infos = {yes},
+ bibliography = {yes},
+ index = {yes},
+ price = "US\$39.75",
+)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}}
+\item[]
+The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found
+as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata
+entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed
+revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives
+the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the
+bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the
+problem.
+
+\end{list}
+
+
+\begin{erratalist}
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{General }
+
+\erroronpage{}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{}
+ We should give back references from plates to pages with the
+ original examples
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Front matter }
+
+\erroronpage{xxiii}{l.8}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ that can't be the correct hyphenation, can it? unpara-lleled?
+ American english: un-par-al-leled
+ British english: un-pa-ral-lelled
+
+\erroronpage{}{}{FMi,SPQR}{1999/03/11}{}
+ Add the following information:
+
+In order to save space on the pages, and make the example
+code look less cluttered, we do not print self-contained code.
+This means that you can not simply type in what you read, and feed it
+to \LaTeX, or the other programs. In particular, we omit:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\documentclass...| (\LaTeX) \\
+ |\begin{document}| and |\end{document}| (\LaTeX) \\
+ |beginfig...| and |endfig| (Metapost) \\
+ |input graph| (Metapost \S3.3.1) \\
+ |input boxes| (Metapost \S3.3.2)
+\end{quote}
+
+However, we do always show \LaTeX{} |\usepackage| declarations as it
+is not always obvious which packages have to be loaded.
+
+If you have trouble reproducing one of the examples you should get
+the example files from CTAN, which are all self-contained runnable
+examples.
+
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 1 }
+
+\erroronpage{4}{l.2 of bulleted item}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ in form \> in the form
+
+\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ surprisingly \> surprising
+
+\erroronpage{5}{last para, l.2}{VSc}{1997/06/12}{2}
+ Delete second "the" in: is perhaps the the most flexible one
+
+\erroronpage{18}{l.-7}{AMM}{1998/11/11}{}
+ to define an specialized \> to define a specialized
+
+\erroronpage{20}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ PSTricks packages most of \> PSTricks packages offer most of
+
+\erroronpage{20}{l.16}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ Hewlett Package \> Hewlett-Packard
+
+\erroronpage{21}{fig. 1.19}{AMM}{1998/11/11}{}
+ The explanation of plot lines ('decade.*') are awfully positioned
+ over the plot (this is the default positioning, perhaps a different
+ set of data sould be selected).
+
+\erroronpage{22}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ delete second `with' in ``with with the troff program.''
+
+\erroronpage{22}{l.16}{PMcJ}{1998/06/13}{}
+ \texttt{.PE} statement \> a \texttt{.PE} command
+
+\erroronpage{25}{l.-10}{AMM}{1998/11/11}{}
+ AutoCAD for archaeologists \> AutoCAD for designers
+ (archaeologists are very very special users of AutoCAD, which is
+ much more popular among architects or engineers)
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 2 }
+
+\erroronpage{29}{l.-2}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ add comma: TIFF\u{,} PCX
+
+\erroronpage{33}{keepaspectratio}{JOl}{1997/10/31}{}
+ Replace ``the values'' by ``the value''.
+ suggestion: Replace ``above for defaults'' by ``above for the default''.
+
+\erroronpage{39}{line 5}{DCa}{1997/06/18}{2}
+ orient key should be origin key (as shown on previous line;-)
+
+\erroronpage{39}{2.2.4, 2 para}{JUl}{2000/10/18}{}
+ Add the following sentence:
+ The syntax for specifying directories is system dependent but
+ Windows and Unix implementations allow the use of |/| as a
+ directory separator, i.e., the above example should work on both
+ platforms.
+
+
+\erroronpage{41}{table 2.2}{DCa}{1997/06/18}{2}
+ All the entries in the `ext' and `read-file' columns
+ ought to start with a `.', e.g., .ps .eps ...
+
+\erroronpage{41}{middle}{DCa}{1997/06/24}{2}
+ Example should read:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareGraphicsRule{.ps.gz}{eps}{.ps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{43--44}{ex. 2-3-6 and 2-3-8}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ \verb|K\"oln| and \verb|Rh\^one| should be 8-bit markup
+ (the 7 bits syntax make TeX appear paleothic)
+
+\erroronpage{46}{fig 2.2}{JOl}{1997/10/31}{}
+ Replace ``centre'' by ``center'' to be consistent with the other two
+ ``center's'' in the figure.
+
+\erroronpage{49}{bottom}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ The definition of |\Bpara| doesn't show everything, add in front
+ |\newcommand\Bpara[4]{%|
+ and a closing |}| after |\end{picture}|
+
+\erroronpage{51}{bottom}{FMi} {1997/04/01}{2}
+ Add a comment about \texttt{clockwise} and \texttt{counterclockwise}
+ options to define the direction of rotation.
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 3 }
+
+\erroronpage{55}{l.13}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ Missing space before 0
+
+\erroronpage{56}{l.2}{PMcJ}{1998/06/13}{}
+ a object \> an object
+
+\erroronpage{60}{l.8}{PMcJ}{1998/06/13}{}
+ an METAFONT \> a METAFONT
+
+\erroronpage{64}{l.6}{PMcJ,FMi}{1998/06/13}{}
+ is three real numbers between 0 and 1 for each read, green and blue,
+ \> \u{consists of} three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+ \u{corresponding to} red, green\u{,} and blue,
+
+\erroronpage{65}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ delete second `the' in ``to apply the the bbox command''
+
+\erroronpage{75}{ex.3-3-9}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{}
+ Why is the first peak rotated to the left? printing problem?
+ MP problem? or what? --- actually seems to be a data problem
+
+\erroronpage{93}{l.7}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ Marek Ry{\'c}ko Jackowski (1995) \>
+ Marek Ry{\'c}ko (Jackowski 1995)
+
+\erroronpage{93}{l.12}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ METAFONT code, , and \>
+ METAFONT code, \texttt{mftops.mf}, and
+
+\erroronpage{94}{l.7}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ Second ref to Fig.~3.3 should reference Fig.~3.4 instead
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 4 }
+
+\erroronpage{97}{l.-15}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ replace term ``curly brackets'' by ``braces'' (Commonwealth usage)
+
+\erroronpage{97}{l.-3}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ replace term ``curly brackets'' by ``braces'' (Commonwealth usage)
+
+\erroronpage{99}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ ``so that you can use polar coordinates \ldots''
+ \> ``so that you can use several other powerful systems of coordinate
+ specification, such as polar coordinates \ldots''
+
+\erroronpage{100}{ex. 4-2-5}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+\begin{verbatim}\psset{dimen=inner}
+ \psframe
+ (1,1)(4,4)
+\end{verbatim}
+would be better expressed as \verb|\psframe[dimen=inner](1,1)(4,4)|
+
+\erroronpage{100}{middle}{AMM}{1998/4/17}{}
+ Avoid line breaking after Chapter: ``\verb+Chapter~2+''.
+
+\erroronpage{100}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ ``we recommend that \LaTeX{} users stick with the color package''
+--- note that `color' is available with `plain' also.
+
+\erroronpage{100--101}{ex 4-3-1}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+The \verb|\psclip ... \endpsclip|
+syntax is not coherent with the choice made for pspicture on page 97.
+It should be \verb|\begin{psclip}|
+\ldots \verb|\end{psclip}|, with a note
+ like ``The special \LaTeX{} environment (plain \TeX{} users must code
+ \verb|\Environment_name| ... \verb|\endEnvironment_name|)''
+
+\erroronpage{101}{4}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+analagous \> analogous
+
+\erroronpage{102}{l.4}{UMu,FMi}{1997/07/18}{2}
+ Replace para by:
+ This places \textit{stuff} in the direction \textit{refangle} at a
+ distance of \textit{labelsep} from $(x,y)$. If \textit{labelsep}
+ is not specified the current value of |\labelsep| (defaults to 5pt
+ in standard \LaTeX) is used. Since angles are \ldots
+
+\erroronpage{104}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+replace first `each' with `at' in ``print a dot each each of the''
+
+\erroronpage{104}{ex.4-4-4 to 4-4-7}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{}
+ Missing refs to plates IIa-d
+
+\erroronpage{106}{Table 4.4}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ diamond and diamond* results are the wrong way around
+ (it was an old bug corrected by DGi March 18, 1997)
+
+\erroronpage{107}{ex.4-5-2}{PGu}{1999/01/28}{}
+ |\usepackage{pstricks}| \> |\usepackage{pstcol}|
+
+\erroronpage{110}{ex.4-5-13}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ Missing |\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}| |\usepackage{ps-text}|
+ declaration on top of example
+
+\erroronpage{114--120}{ex.4-6-1 up to 4-6-23}{UMu}{1997/07/18}{2}
+ Change |\usepackage {pstricks}| to |\usepackage {pstricks,pst-node}|
+
+\erroronpage{115}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ ``describing the matrix and tree package' can be confusing as the reader
+ may believe that there is a `matrix' package---perhaps
+ ``describing the matrix environment and tree package''
+
+\erroronpage{124}{ex.4-6-32}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ Missing ref to plate VIb
+
+\erroronpage{125}{l.2}{TRa}{1997/04/28}{2}
+ replace: successive columns to overlap
+
+\erroronpage{128}{ex. 4-6-39}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+Avoid 7-bit coding, use 8-bit
+
+\erroronpage{133}{l.2}{RFa}{1997/04/14}{2}
+ Narrative says that the curves are $\sin(x)$, $\sin(x^2)$ and $\cos(x)$.
+ Code says |<x dup sin exch cos mul>|, which isn't $\sin(x^2)$, it's
+ $\sin(x)\cos(x)$ (aka $0.5 \sin(2x)$)
+
+\erroronpage{134}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ ``(written in sh and awk, it is called pie-chart.sh and can be found in
+ the PSTricks distribution.)''
+Note that it will be soon be reissued as \> PstChart, written in Perl.
+
+\erroronpage{137}{ex.4-8-4}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{}
+ Missing ref to plate IVa
+
+\erroronpage{145}{l.-7}{DCa}{1997/09/01}{2}
+ pstpoly \> pst-poly
+
+\erroronpage{146}{l.2}{DCa}{1997/09/01}{2}
+ pstpoly \> pst-poly
+
+\erroronpage{146}{ex. 4-10-7}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ \verb|\PstRegularPolygon| \> \verb|\PstPolygon|,
+ \verb|\RPolyCurves| \> \verb|\PolyCurves|,
+ \verb|\RPolyIntermediatePoint| \> \verb|IntermediatePoint|,
+ \verb|\RPolyNbSides| \> \verb|\PolyNbSides|, and
+ \verb|\RPolyOffet| \> \verb|\PolyOffet|. (changes in package)
+
+\erroronpage{154}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ pstVerb \> \verb|\pstVerb|
+
+\erroronpage{154}{l.-9}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ fi you need \>
+ if you need
+
+\erroronpage{155}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ delete \texttt{(x1,y1)} from end of psline entry
+
+\erroronpage{157}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+For gradbegin and gradend, note defaults of
+0.0 0.1 0.95 and 0 1 1 (rbg values); default of gradlines would be 300 not 500
+
+\erroronpage{157}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+add ``arrows==style''
+
+\erroronpage{158}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+arrowlength default is 1.4
+
+\erroronpage{158}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+arrowinset default is 0.4;
+tbarsize default is 2pt 5;
+bracketlength default is 0.15;
+rbracketlength default is 0.15;
+arrowscale default is 0.1.
+
+\erroronpage{159--160}{}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ \verb|{text}| is very restrictive. In fact it can be a lot of other things.
+ \verb|stuff| in the PSTricks manual was clearer.
+
+\erroronpage{159}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+\verb|\Rnode(x,y){name}{text}| \>
+\verb|\Rnode*[settings]{name}{text}|
+(the syntax had changed in 1994)
+
+\erroronpage{160}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+ncdiag \verb|`rrows| \> `arrows'
+
+\erroronpage{163}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+insert:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pcangles*[settings]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+\pcdiagg*[settings]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{164}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+default for edge is \verb|\ncline|
+
+\erroronpage{165}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+treenodes \> treenodesize
+
+
+\erroronpage{165}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+psxlabel \> pshlabel (twice)
+
+\erroronpage{165}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+psylabel \> psvlabel
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 5 }
+
+\erroronpage{170}{l.8}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ substract \>
+ subtract
+
+\erroronpage{181}{exa 5-5-4}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ The line from $L$ to $\Sigma^L$ in the upper left corner is too
+ long, and overlaps the first $L$.
+
+%\erroronpage{181}{exa 5-5-4}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2}
+% Top-left: The edge starts from coordinate (-1,-1)
+% relative to L, instead of coordinate (?,1).
+% Edges that go upward or leftward have arrows at
+% their end, but not the edges that go downward
+% or rightward. Is this purposely so?
+% Bottom right: Dotted arrow touches the H
+
+\erroronpage{183}{exa 5-5-6}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2}
+ The C / saved d[3] should be framed as well
+
+\erroronpage{188}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{}
+assocated \> associated
+
+\erroronpage{202}{exa 3-3-33}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2}
+ The labels can be better spaced within the
+ windows they get from the curves
+
+\erroronpage{203}{exa 3-3-34}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2}
+ The labels can be better spaced within the
+ windows they get from the curves
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 6 }
+
+\erroronpage{206}{l.4}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+ On the subject of typesetting rules for scientific texts, consider
+ adding a reference to Beccari (1997), TUGboat 18\#1, pp. 39--48,
+ which was published after the LGC, but should be a good reference
+ anyway.
+
+\erroronpage{206}{l.21}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ texts packages \> texts, packages
+
+\erroronpage{208}{l.-14}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ set of macros are needed \>
+ set of macros is needed
+
+\erroronpage{244}{table}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+ The voltmeter symbol looks the same as that of the current source
+ one line above, so you probably got the wrong symbol.
+
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 7 }
+
+\erroronpage{254}{l.7}{BLu}{1998/01/15}{}
+ missing space between `MuTeX' and `to'
+
+\erroronpage{257}{}{AMi}{1997/05/06}{2}
+ The clefs on the left of the staves and a few other symbols like
+ |\allabreve| are positioned too high on the staves. How that could
+ have happened is beyond me---on my last printout before the actual
+ printing it is correct (FMi)
+
+\erroronpage{259}{l.12}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ into an \texttt{music} \>
+ into a \texttt{music}
+
+\erroronpage{259}{-4}{JKr}{1998/08/26}{}
+ delete second ``with'' in ``with with
+ \texttt{\textbackslash r\ldots\ or \textbackslash l\ldots}''
+
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 8 }
+
+\erroronpage{278ff}{11}{MWa}{1998/03/26}{}
+ The chessfont used (chessf10) is not correct. The knight-character used
+in the notation (not for the board) is supposed to look to the right, not
+to the left. If one uses the font chess10f from the bdfchess-package and
+renames it, that font is correct.
+
+\erroronpage{299}{l.-4}{JKr}{1998/08/31}{}
+ In the command description for |\whitepoint| and |\blackpoint| the position
+ and number of stones are reversed. Replace
+ \texttt{\{\textit{n}\}\{\textit{p}\}} with
+ \texttt{\{\textit{p}\}\{\textit{n}\}} twice.
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Color Plates }
+
+\erroronpage{Ic}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ $\approx$ sign missing in print
+
+\erroronpage{IIb}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ that plate doesn't correspond to original!
+ what kind of pink is this by the way?
+
+\erroronpage{IIc}{}{SPQR}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ the triangle has no fill
+
+\erroronpage{IIf}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{}
+ this plate does not correspond to any earlier example. seems
+ to be a combination of two examples in fact
+
+\erroronpage{IIIa}{}{SPQR}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ the circle has no fill
+
+\erroronpage{VIb}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{}
+ what kind of pink is that?
+
+\erroronpage{IX}{}{TJe}{1997/08/26}{}
+ "white" column, "Egypt" row: joie \> joy
+
+\erroronpage{XVII}{}{MGo}{1997/08/31}{}
+ the horizontal lines should be normal width (.4pt)
+
+\erroronpage{XXI}{}{SPQR}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ This is nonsense, all the pics are the same!! they are
+ supposed to show progressive CMYK printing --- somebody thinking
+ very hard during the printing process?
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 9 }
+
+\erroronpage{312}{9.1.1, para 1, l.3 bottom}{MGo}{1997/07/02}{2}
+ ``Isacc Newton'' should be ``Isaac Newton''
+
+\erroronpage{312}{9.1.1, para 2, l.4}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ Thomas Young, a\u{n} English doctor
+
+\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, l.2}{JRi}{1998/04/28}{}
+ ``sub\u{s}tractive'' should be ``subtractive''
+
+\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 1, l.2}{MGo}{1997/07/02}{2}
+ ``output devide'' should be ``output device''
+
+\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 1, l.3}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ \textbf{Y}ellow, \u{B}lac\u{\textbf{k}}
+
+\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 1, l.4}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ \textbf{B}rightness or \u{\textbf{V}}alue
+
+\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 2, l.2}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ colo\u{rm}etric
+
+\erroronpage{313}{l.-2}{MGo}{1997/07/02}{2}
+ ``phosphoros'' should be ``phosphorous''
+
+\erroronpage{340}{fig}{NBe,FMi}{1997/07/11}{2}
+The difference between these 3 pagestyle examples are nearly
+invisible (plain has a number at the bottom and align has a page
+number on the top-left corner and position marks on the three others.
+
+\erroronpage{341}{l.-9}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ can contains \>
+ can contain
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 10 }
+
+%\erroronpage{354}{table}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+% Replace \textsf{lucbr} by \textsf{lucidabr} for latest PSNFSS?
+%
+% SPQR: not necessarily. they do different things. leave as is
+
+\erroronpage{355}{l.-5}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+ Computer Modern, Euler Math, MathTime, and Lucida New Math.
+ \> Computer Modern, Concrete Math, Euler Math, MathTime,
+ and Lucida New Math. (See CTAN:fonts/concmath and
+ CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/concmath)
+
+\erroronpage{355}{l.-2}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ none of Computer Modern, Euler Math or Lucida work \>
+ none of Computer Modern, Euler Math\u{,} or Lucida work\u{s}
+
+\erroronpage{359}{l.18}{AMM}{1998/11/30}{}
+ package file times.sty [the same typeface should be used]
+
+\erroronpage{362}{l.15}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ download \>
+ downloaded
+
+\erroronpage{362}{l.18}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ organized up \>
+ organized
+
+\erroronpage{362}{l.-10}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ (named \texttt{config.}\textit{Short Family Name} (e.g., \>
+ (named \texttt{config.}\textit{Short Family Name}, e.g.,
+
+\erroronpage{362}{l.-10}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+ Adobe Garamond's short name is \texttt{pag} \> \texttt{pgm}
+ (3 times) (\texttt{pag} is AvantGarde!)
+
+\erroronpage{362}{l.-3}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ discusses of how \>
+ discusses how
+
+\erroronpage{366}{l.24}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ 0.0777779 \>
+ 0.077779
+
+\erroronpage{367}{l.14}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ Add `might': \ldots\ if any of them is zero it might be omitted.
+
+\erroronpage{368}{l.21}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ CHECKSUM \>
+ FONTCHECKSUM
+
+\erroronpage{382}{l.7}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ ``V\ldots'' should be italic not bold
+
+\erroronpage{382}{l.-11}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ an old distribution of \texttt{dvips}\u{).}
+
+\erroronpage{387}{l.17}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ are left undefined are for use \>
+ are left undefined for use
+
+\erroronpage{392}{para 5, l.10}{DCa,FMi}{1997/06/24}{2}
+ Add \verb=|= twice: \verb!one one |=:|>> exclam ;!
+
+\erroronpage{395}{l.-4}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ creates a \texttt{mtx} \>
+ creates an \texttt{mtx}
+
+\erroronpage{399}{l.-8}{DCa}{1997/06/30}{2}
+ Delete line as it is the same as code line nr 7.
+
+\erroronpage{400}{l.7}{DCa}{1997/06/30}{2}
+ Delete line as it is the same as code line nr 13.
+
+\erroronpage{401}{l.17}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ line numbering should continue with 10
+
+\erroronpage{403}{l.5}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ line numbering should continue with 13
+
+\erroronpage{405}{l.2}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+ Is the overfull hbox in ``bold-face math italic'' intentional?
+
+\erroronpage{407}{l.8}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ applies \>
+ apply
+
+\erroronpage{411}{table 10.8}{SPQR}{1998/05/15}{}
+ Fontname code for ``hairline'' should be ``a'' not ``h''.
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 11 }
+
+\erroronpage{426}{table}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+ The closing brace in the example about inserting literal
+ PostScript is misplaced. It probably should be:
+ |\special{"newpath 0 0 moveto 100 100 lineto stroke}|
+
+\erroronpage{429}{l.2}{WaS}{2000/09/19}{}
+ Slanting was forgotten; the complete example should read:
+\begin{verbatim}
+mbbbo8r Bembo-Bold " .167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont " <8r.enc <mbbb8a.pfb
+\end{verbatim}
+ Replace \texttt{mbbb8r} with \texttt{mbbbo8r} accordingly in line~4.
+
+\erroronpage{434}{11.3, l.5}{BDr}{1997/06/26}{2}
+ to-to-bottom \> top-to-bottom
+
+\erroronpage{442}{11.4, l.3}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ a very few PostScript\u{ }Level 2 features
+
+\erroronpage{446}{l.-17}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ to these. so that \>
+ to these, so that
+
+\erroronpage{446}{l.-14}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ brackets \>
+ parentheses
+
+\erroronpage{448}{l.-4}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ \verb=doc\%02d.tif= \>
+ \verb=doc%02d.tif=
+
+\erroronpage{450}{l.8}{PKa}{1997/09/15}{}
+ \verb=-sShingling= \>
+ \verb=-dShingling=
+
+\erroronpage{450}{sec. 11.4.4}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{}
+ Mention the existance of \textsf{gv} by Johannes Plass, a recent
+ development derived from \textsf{GhostView} by Tim Theissen?
+
+\erroronpage{452}{l.-2}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ Use sans font throughout: \textsf{Adobe Illustrator 3}
+
+\erroronpage{454}{l.9}{AMM}{1998/12/09}{}
+ -Eextension \> -Eexpansion
+
+\erroronpage{461}{l.10}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ preceed \>
+ precede
+
+
+\erroronpage{462}{}{DSe}{1998/12/18}{}
+
+Daniel Sebald suggested to explain in some detail how to use xfig with
+\LaTeX. (So far we haven't checked this method.) He wrote:
+
+The following is a description of how to use xfig to generate
+quality postscript pictures then incorporate \LaTeX{} text. It
+is a bit of a round-about method, but not too bad given the
+flexibility and quality of output. Furthermore, because in
+this method basically the only \LaTeX{} picture element used
+is text (lines, etc. are PostScript) \LaTeX{} runs more efficiently
+than if only \LaTeX{} picture elements are used.
+
+\erroronpage{462}{continued}{DSe}{1998/12/18}{}
+1. Draw the picture in xfig and change the font types to
+ "LaTeX fonts". Use the xfig export feature that will
+ output the nice quality lines, circles, etc. to a PostScript
+ file and export the \LaTeX{} fonts and locations to a
+ separate \LaTeX{} file. The option is called "Combined PS/LaTeX
+ (both parts)". (Remember you must edit the font type
+ to be \LaTeX{} font.) The \LaTeX{} file includes the PostScript
+ file via the |\special| command.
+
+ A neat little trick is to type math using the \LaTeX{}
+ syntax directly on the xfig figure, e.g., |$\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}$|
+ then select "special" under the special flag in the
+ text edit box so that xfig doesn't add extra backslashes to generate
+ such things as |\$|, |\_|, etc. Then when compiling in the next step
+ the result is nicely formatted math text. Granted, the text
+ doesn't look right in xfig, but with only a bit of guessing
+ and using |left/center/right| alignment properly this is
+ no big problem.
+
+ Positioning can be done using the justification in the
+ text edit box to prevent extra white space appearing in
+ the final figure because xfig treats the whole text string
+ when computing figure borders. (If a long string of text
+ obstructs the figure in xfig the hidden flag can be selected
+ in the text edit box to hide the text string from the screen.)
+
+2. Create a simple file such as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{epsfig}
+ \begin{document}
+ \pagestyle{empty}
+ \input{filename.pstex_t}
+ \end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ then compile it under \LaTeX{}. Now use dvips to turn this
+ into an encapsulated PostScript file. That is
+\begin{verbatim}
+ > dvips filename -E -o filename.eps
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\erroronpage{462}{continued}{DSe}{1998/12/18}{}
+
+3. In your final document simply treat the generated eps
+ file just as you would any eps file. There are \LaTeX{}
+ packages that allow scaling of such figures. Because
+ the text is now in the eps file it gets scaled accordingly.
+
+ An alternate method instead of step 2 is simply to input
+ |filename.pstex_t| into the final \LaTeX{} document. This works
+ fine but the flexibility of scaling text may not exist.
+
+4. Use your imagination! xfig allows importing PostScript
+ documents. So you can bring in pictures generated by
+ other programs, e.g., Matlab, and add annotation with the
+ method described above.
+
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Appendix A }
+
+\erroronpage{465}{l.-6}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2}
+ this requires \ldots{} are given \>
+ this requires \ldots{} be given
+
+ [Subjunctive, rather than indicative, is called for here,
+ because ``require'' is a condition.]
+
+%\erroronpage{471}{column 2, l.10}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{}
+% \texttt{b3} (braggado) Braggadocio WHAT IS WRONG?????
+
+\erroronpage{471}{column 4, l.8}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ u:N\u{i}mbusMonL
+
+\erroronpage{472}{column 3, l.17}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ u:N\u{i}mbusSanL
+
+\erroronpage{473}{column 4, l.21}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ \texttt{rw} (rockwell) Rockwel\u{lS}late
+
+\erroronpage{475ff}{table heading}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ Use uppercase: \u{ISO} Latin
+
+\erroronpage{480}{perthousand}{PGu}{2002/02/24}{}
+ Glyph for perthousand is a small 0 \> should be like 0/00
+
+ Actually, the glyph is a small 0 in in several fonts (the
+ perthousand is then generated internally as a ligature with \%)
+
+\erroronpage{482--487}{Table~A.4}{WaS}{2000/09/26}{}
+ Table~A.4 is lacking the entries for the slots 38 and 139,
+ and slot 89 is listed twice.
+
+ 38 is ampersand throughout.
+
+ 139 is Nacute, guilsinglleft, empty, empty, guilsinglleft, atilde,
+ perthousand in the encodings from left to right.
+
+ The above errors have been added to second (corrected) printing and
+ are not present in the first printing.
+
+\erroronpage{482}{caption}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ the characters ``Table A.4:'' are set in the wrong size (too small)
+
+\erroronpage{484}{l.-3,-4}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ guilsingleft and guilsingright \>
+ guilsinglleft and guilsinglright
+
+\erroronpage{489}{l.8}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ \ldots\verb=}{=\textit{de\u{p}th}\verb=}{=\ldots
+
+\erroronpage{491}{l.20}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ you can use expressions such as \verb=\width{=\u{\textit{glyph}}\verb=}=
+
+%\erroronpage{491}{l.20}{FMi}{1997/08/01}{}
+% add extra space in front of this line (and in similar places in
+% that section)
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Appendix B }
+
+\erroronpage{498}{}{AOg}{1999/02/27}{}
+ Add \texttt{ctan.tug.org} to the list of CTAN sites (others may
+ need update as well
+
+\erroronpage{498}{l.10}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ it \> is
+
+\erroronpage{506}{l.-8}{SPQR}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ fonts/psfonts/adobe/garamond \>
+ \texttt{CTAN:fonts/psfonts/adobe/garamond}
+
+\erroronpage{506}{l.-11}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ see\u{ }\texttt{http//www.adobe.com./prodindex/framemaker/main.html}
+
+\erroronpage{507}{l.17}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ remove surplus \verb=%=
+
+\erroronpage{507}{l.17}{MGo}{1998/01/16}{}
+ The old URL is obsolete, a new one is
+ \texttt{http://www.imsisoft.com/hijaak/index.html}
+
+\erroronpage{507}{l.-3}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ \texttt{CTAN\u{:f}onts/utils/mm}
+
+\erroronpage{508}{l.5}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ \texttt{http:\u{//}www.mathworks.com}
+
+\erroronpage{508}{l.11}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ \texttt{CTAN\u{:f}onts/utils/mm}
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Bibliography }
+
+\erroronpage{516}{l.12}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2}
+ Do not use typewriter for ``seminar.sty'' or
+ use typewriter also with next item.
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Index }
+
+\erroronpage{523}{graphicx depth key}{PMcJ,FMi}{1998/06/13}{}
+ Spurious entry, depth is no keyword for graphicx package
+
+\erroronpage{529}{pspicture}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ Add reference to p.48
+
+\erroronpage{535}{Document classes}{FMi}{1998/04/31}{}
+ Document classes \> Document \u{C}lasses
+
+\erroronpage{543}{graphicx depth key}{FMi}{1998/06/21}{}
+ Spurious entry, depth is no keyword for graphicx package
+
+\erroronpage{546}{\texttt{\textbackslash heat}}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2}
+ Typo: remove and add p.302 to |\heart| instead
+
+\end{erratalist}
+
+
+
+%==========================================================================
+
+\bigskip
+
+
+\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or
+ omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.]
+\contributor{AMi}{Arno Mittelbach}
+\contributor{AMM}{Alberto Maria Marchetti}
+\contributor{AOg}{Arthur Ogawa}
+\contributor{BBe}{Barbara Beeton}
+\contributor{BDr}{Bernard Drapeau}
+\contributor{BLu}{Ben Lukoschus}
+\contributor{DCa}{David Carlisle}
+\contributor{DGi}{Denis Girou}
+\contributor{DSe}{Daniel Sebald}
+\contributor{EGu}{Eitan Gurari}
+\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach}
+\contributor{JKr}{J\"urgen Kr\"amer}
+\contributor{JOl}{Jeffrey D. Oldham}
+\contributor{JRi}{Jonathan Rich}
+\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens}
+\contributor{MWa}{Michael Wanko}
+\contributor{NBe}{Nelson H. F. Beebe}
+\contributor{PGu}{Patrick Gundlach}
+\contributor{PKa}{Peter Kabal}
+\contributor{PMcJ}{Paul McJones}
+\contributor{RFa}{Robin Fairbairns}
+\contributor{SPQR}{Sebastian Rahtz}
+\contributor{TJe}{Tarjei T. Jensen}
+\contributor{TRa}{T.V. Raman}
+\contributor{UMu}{Uwe M\"unch}
+\contributor{UVi}{Ulrik Vieth}
+\contributor{VSc}{Volker RW Schaa}
+\contributor{WaS}{Walter Schmidt}
+\contributor{JUl}{Julian Ullmann}
+\end{multicols}
+
+
+If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+ frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org\\
+ sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk\\
+ goossens@cern.ch
+\end{quote}
+preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e.,
+\begin{flushleft}
+|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|%
+ \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\
+ \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata}
+\end{flushleft}
+Here is an example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ surprisingly \> surprising
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/handbuch.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/handbuch.err
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d0b7f2e2b68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/handbuch.err
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+\newcommand\erratafiledate{1999/04/21}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
+% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
+% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
+% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
+% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
+% .cfg file.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls}
+% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach
+
+\ProvidesClass{errata}
+ [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)]
+
+\LoadClass{article}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
+\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
+
+\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
+
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+
+
+\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
+\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
+
+
+\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ \let\endgobble\egroup
+ \let\hideamp\relax
+ \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
+
+\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
+
+\let\endgobble\relax
+
+
+\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
+\newcommand\myprinting{}
+
+
+\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
+ \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi
+ \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
+ \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+
+\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
+\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
+
+\newcommand\showallerrors{%
+ \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
+ \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
+ \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
+
+
+\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
+ \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
+
+\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
+ \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
+
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
+ {
+ \input{\jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
+ \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
+ \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
+ \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Current settings are:}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ }
+ {}
+
+%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
+
+\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
+ \endgobble
+ \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \expandafter\gobbleerrata
+ \fi
+ \hideamp \\%
+ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
+ \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
+}
+
+\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
+ &\\[4pt]%
+ \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
+
+\newenvironment{erratalist}
+ {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
+ {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
+
+\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
+ {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
+ Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
+ \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2
+ \end{center}%
+ \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \vspace{20pt}}
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\small}
+
+\setlength\parindent{0pt}
+\setlength\parskip{2pt}
+
+\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
+
+% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
+
+\let\u\underline
+\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
+
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
+%
+%
+% Configuration file for the errata listing of
+%
+% Das LaTeX-Handbuch
+%
+%
+% \erratastartdate
+%
+% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed.
+%
+% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all entries are typeset.
+%
+
+\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1995/05/16}
+
+
+%
+% \myprinting
+%
+% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. Currently there is
+% only the first printing.
+%
+%
+
+\renewcommand\myprinting{1}
+
+%
+% \norevisionnumbers
+%
+% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
+% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
+% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
+% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. Since the
+% Handbuch no revision we turn this feature off.
+
+\norevisionnumbers
+
+%
+% \showallerrors
+%
+% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
+% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
+% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
+% default.
+%
+%
+\endinput
+\end{filecontents}
+
+\providecommand{\BibTeX}{%
+ B\kern-.05em{\scshape i\kern-.025emb}\kern-.08em\TeX}
+\providecommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}}
+
+\documentclass[german]{errata}
+
+\usepackage{german}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\erratatitle{Das \LaTeX-Handbuch}{\erratafiledate}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@book(A-W:Lamport95,
+ author = "Leslie Lamport",
+ title = "Das \LaTeX-Handbuch",
+ publisher = Addison-Wesley,
+ address = Bonn: Paris; Reading, Mass.,
+ year = 1995,
+ pagenums = {325 + 20},
+ bibliography = {yes},
+ index = {yes},
+ isbn = {3-89319-826-1}
+ }
+)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}}
+\item[]
+Die jeweils letzte Version dieser Datei (\texttt{\jobname.err}) ist Teil der
+\LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+Die erste Spalte der Tabelle enth"alt die Seitenzahl des Fehlereintrags.
+Die zweite Spalte gibt den genauen Ort an; negative Zeilennummern sind vom
+Seitenende gerechnet.
+In der dritten Spalte steht der Entdecker des Fehlers.
+\end{list}
+
+\begin{erratalist}
+
+\CHAPTER{Zur deutschen Ausgabe}
+
+\erroronpage{xix}{letzte Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{}
+ seinen Schiedsspr"uchen \> seine Schiedsspr"uche
+
+\CHAPTER{Darf ich vorstellen}
+
+\erroronpage{7}{Zitat}{ILe}{1999/04/21}{}
+ Das Zitat Kroneckers lautet korrekt:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Die ganzen Zahlen hat der liebe Gott gemacht,\\
+ alles andere ist Menschenwerk.
+ \end{quote}
+ Im darauf"|folgenden Absatz mu"s das Zitat "`Gott schuf\dots"' durch
+ "`Die ganzen Zahlen\dots"' ersetzt werden.
+
+\CHAPTER{Im Anfang war die Tat}
+
+\CHAPTER{Zu neuen Ufern}
+
+\erroronpage{66}{zweites Beispiel, rechte Spalte, 2. Zeile}{ILe}{1999/03/29}{}
+|\texit| \> |\textit|
+
+\CHAPTER{Auf den Weg gebracht}
+
+\CHAPTER{W"ahlt mir eine Klasse}
+
+\CHAPTER{Formvollendet}
+
+\CHAPTER{Ins Bild gesetzt}
+
+\CHAPTER{Auf den Weg gebracht}
+
+\CHAPTER{Per aspera ad astra}
+
+\CHAPTER{\MakeIndex}
+
+\CHAPTER{\BibTeX}
+
+\CHAPTER{Referenz}
+
+\erroronpage{252}{erste Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{}
+ |\sbox{|\emph{text}|}| \> |\sbox{|\emph{bf"|l\/}|}{|\emph{text}|}|
+
+\CHAPTER{Deutsch \&{} andere Mysterien}
+
+\erroronpage{272}{letzter Absatz, erste Zeile}{RSt}{1995/06/01}{}
+ werden diese \> wird dieses
+
+\erroronpage{275}{zweiter Punkt, erste Zeile}{JSk}{1995/06/01}{}
+ Wor-tabk"urzungen \> Wort-abk"urzungen
+
+\erroronpage{277}{letzte Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{}
+ Streiche "`Norm"'
+
+\CHAPTER{Index}
+
+\erroronpage{305}{Kronecker, Leopold}{MSc}{1999/04/21}{}
+ Verweis auf Seite 7 einf"ugen.
+
+\end{erratalist}
+
+
+\begin{multicols}{3}[Dank an alle, die Fehler oder Auslassungen
+ gefunden haben. Aufgef"uhrt sind die Entdecker der Fehler.]
+\contributor{ILe}{Ingo Lepper}
+\contributor{JSk}{Jochen Skupin}
+\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr"oder}
+\contributor{RSt}{Rebecca Stiels}
+\end{multicols}
+
+Viele andere haben mir Korrekturen f"ur schon bekannte Fehler
+geschickt. Vielen Dank an euch alle!
+
+Wenn Sie noch mehr Fehler finden, schicken Sie bitte eine Notiz an
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+ martin.schroeder@acm.org
+\end{quote}
+am besten in einer Form, die in diese Datei eingebaut werden kann,
+d.\,h.
+\begin{flushleft}
+|\erroronpage{|\textit{Seitenzahl-Nummer}|}{|\textit{Zeile-Position}|}{|%
+ \textit{Ihr-K"urzel}|}{|\textit{Datum}|}{}| \\
+ \hspace*{2em}\textit{Beschreibung des Druckfehlers}
+\end{flushleft}
+Ein Beispiel:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\erroronpage{xix}{letzte Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{}
+ seinen Schiedsspr"uchen \> seine Schiedsspr"uche
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/install.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/install.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..578f7159605
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/install.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+ LaTeX Installation Guide
+
+ 2003/12/01
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains the installation instructions for the latest
+version of the LaTeX document preparation system.
+
+The rest of this document describes:
+
+ * How to find out about installing LaTeX for your version of TeX.
+
+ * How the installation works.
+
+ * What to do if anything goes wrong.
+
+TeX experts who want to know more about how the LaTeX installation
+works and how it can be customized should read texpert.txt.
+
+
+DOCUMENTATION
+=============
+
+Brief introductions to various aspects of the new LaTeX release can be
+found in the distributed files with names <xxx>guide.tex. You will
+need to install the new version before you can typeset these files.
+
+A full description of the new LaTeX release (and of more than 100
+packages that can be used with LaTeX) can be found in:
+
+ * The LaTeX Companion, Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin,
+ Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-54199-8.
+
+The new release is also described in the second edition of:
+
+ * LaTeX A Document Preparation System, Leslie Lamport,
+ Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-52983-1
+
+Also possibly of interest (describing package and programs related to
+graphical applications, Postscript font usage, etc.):
+
+ * The LaTeX Graphics Companion, Goossens, Rathz and Mittelbach,
+ Addison-Wesley ISBN 0-201-85469-4.
+
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the
+following:
+
+ * a TeX system, including iniTeX (see `Your Version of TeX', below);
+
+ * the file `hyphen.tex', or some other hyphenation files (see `Creating
+ the LaTeX Format', below);
+
+ * the font files (normally .tfm files) for the Computer Modern fonts,
+ including some non-standard ones (see `Fonts needed', below);
+
+ * about 6.5MB of spare disk space for use during the installation.
+
+
+YOUR VERSION OF TEX
+===================
+
+LaTeX is based upon Donald Knuth's TeX typesetting system. This is
+available for almost every make of computer, from microcomputers
+through workstations to large main-frames.
+
+Further details about how to install LaTeX for your version of TeX may
+be available in a file called <system>.txt. At present the following
+such files exist (at least):
+
+ * amiweb2c.txt for Amiga web2c TeX on the Amiga.
+
+ * cstex.txt for CS-TeX on the Atari.
+
+ * decustex.txt for TeX from DECUS on VAX/VMS.
+
+ * directex.txt for DirectTeX on the Macintosh.
+
+ * emtex.txt for emTeX on IBM PC compatibles.
+
+ * emtextds.txt for Schmidt's emTeX/TDS for OS/2.
+
+ * lindner.txt for Lindner's TeX on the Atari.
+
+ * microtex.txt for MicroTeX (uTeX) on IBM PC compatibles.
+
+ * multitex.txt for MultiTeX on the Atari.
+
+ * oztex.txt for OzTeX on the Macintosh.
+
+ * pastex.txt for PasTeX on the Amiga.
+
+ * pctex.txt for PCTeX on IBM PC compatibles.
+
+ * textures.txt for Textures on the Macintosh.
+
+ * truetex.txt for TrueTeX for Windows 95/98/NT.
+
+ * vtex.txt for MicroPress's VTeX.
+
+ * vtexfree.txt for MicroPress's VTeX/Free for Linux-x86 (VTeX/Lnx)
+ and OS/2 (VTeX/2).
+
+ * web2ctex.txt for web2c TeX on Unix platforms.
+
+ * yandytex.txt for Y&YTeX on IBM PC compatibles.
+
+You should finish reading this file before reading the <system>.txt
+file for your version. If there is no such file then this file alone is
+your installation guide.
+
+If you have bought a commercial version of TeX/LaTeX and there is no
+file for your system then you could ask the company which sells your
+version of TeX to supply one.
+
+Note to TeX implementors/suppliers:
+----------------------------------
+If you can supply us with a <system>.txt file for your implementation
+we shall be very grateful and we shall add it to our distribution.
+
+
+
+HOW THE INSTALLATION WORKS
+==========================
+
+The LaTeX installation is in five stages:
+
+ * Saving any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * Unpacking the distribution (this may not be necessary).
+
+ * Creating the LaTeX format.
+
+ * Putting the files where LaTeX can read them.
+
+ * Checking the installation.
+
+
+SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+================================
+
+If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish
+to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX.
+
+If it exists, the <system>.txt file will describe in detail how to do
+this; in some of these files, the new version is referred to as
+LaTeX2e in order to clearly distinguish it from the old version.
+
+The details of how to do everything in this section will depend to a
+very large extent on your TeX implementation.
+
+First you should find the LaTeX format file on your system
+(usually called `latex.fmt' or `lplain.fmt') and rename it to
+`latex209.fmt'.
+
+You should then save a copy of the current LaTeX system files. These
+may be kept in a TeX inputs directory or folder, which is usually
+called something like one of these:
+
+ tex\texinput tex/inputs TeX-inputs
+
+or they may be kept in a separate LaTeX inputs location, possibly a
+subdirectory or subfolder of the TeX inputs location, called `latex'.
+
+There are thus two possibilities, depending on whether the LaTeX
+inputs have been kept separate from the other TeX inputs or not.
+
+ * If the LaTeX inputs are separated from the other TeX inputs, then
+ you should make a new directory that is a copy of the whole of the
+ LaTeX inputs directory, and call it `latex209'.
+
+ * If the LaTeX inputs are kept with the other TeX inputs, then you
+ should create a new directory called `latex209' and then copy to it
+ any file ending with .sty from the LaTeX inputs directory.
+
+It may be possible to run both the new LaTeX and LaTeX 2.09 in
+parallel. To do this, you should create a `latex209' command,
+or menu entry, that is similar to `latex' except that:
+
+ * The `latex209' format is used rather than `latex'.
+
+ * The `latex209' directory is searched before the LaTeX inputs
+ directory.
+
+The details of how to do this vary according to your system so you
+may find more information in a <system>.txt file.
+
+
+BEFORE UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+=================================
+
+Latex needs a number of files to run, for example `article.cls'
+contains the `article' document class. However, these files are NOT
+themselves the source files produced by the LaTeX3 Project Team. We
+write documented sources in `docstrip archive files' which can be
+unpacked to produce the files that LaTeX needs. For example,
+classes.dtx contains the documented sources for all the LaTeX
+document classes, including article.cls.
+
+The FIRST thing to do is to check whether you need to unpack these
+archive files, as follows.
+
+Before reading any further, you should check to see whether the LaTeX
+distribution you have contains the unpacked files. You can do this by
+looking to see if you have got the file latex.ltx. If you do, then
+you should have all the unpacked files and so you can move on to the
+section entitled `Creating the LaTeX format'.
+
+The unpacking will create and write files only into the current
+directory (or current folder, or default directory). This helps to
+prevent it overwriting existing files or causing problems with your
+system files. It is therefore sensible to carry out the installation
+in a directory reserved for this purpose; on a multi-user system you
+should ensure that you have read and write permissions for files in
+this directory.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+The archive files are unpacked by running iniTeX on the file
+unpack.ins.
+
+NOTE: On relatively slow computers, this unpacking can take a long
+time.
+
+NOTE: Using LaTeX with old DC Fonts.
+------------------------------------
+
+By default LaTeX uses the `ec' font collection for its T1 (Cork) encoded
+fonts.
+
+If you are using the pre-release versions of the ec fonts known as `dc'
+then you could update your fonts to ec, or unpack suitable fd files
+for the dc fonts at this point.
+
+For versions of the dc fonts older than release 1.2 (issued
+during 1995) then at this point you should unpack the fd files for
+the old dc fonts by running plain TeX or LaTeX on the file
+olddc.ins
+
+For release 1.3 of the dc fonts you should unpack fd files by running
+plain TeX or LaTeX on the file newdc.ins
+
+You need to do this even if you have obtained the `unpacked'
+distribution and so have not processed the unpack.ins file described
+above.
+
+If this is your first installation, so you do not yet have a format,
+or if you are unsure of which release of the T1 encoded fonts you
+have, ignore this step and build the LaTeX format as described below.
+This will build a format using the current ec font names.
+The test document ltxcheck.tex will report any problems with the ec
+or dc fonts and report whether you need to unpack either
+olddc.ins or newdc.ins.
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+To create the LaTeX format, you should run iniTeX on the file
+`latex.ltx'.
+
+A hyphenation file such as `hyphen.tex' is read by this run so it
+should be accessible by iniTeX. It also needs to be able to read the
+`.tfm' font files for the basic fonts. These font files and
+hyphenation file(s) should be part of your TeX system.
+
+You should save the resulting format file `latex.fmt' in the TeX
+formats directory. You may also have to create and/or install a
+program called `latex', a `LaTeX' option to your TeX implementation,
+or a batch file or shell script. The details of this stage will
+depend on your TeX implementation; note that the name of the format
+file differs from that normally used in LaTeX 2.09.
+
+Note: TeX experts may wish to customize LaTeX (for example, to allow
+non-American hyphenation). They should read cfgguide.tex to find out
+how to do this.
+
+If you are still using a very old version of TeX (pre 1990) then you
+must now read tex2.txt.
+
+Note that the experimental variant of LaTeX described in autoload.txt
+is no longer supported.
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+The next step in the installation of LaTeX is to move the files needed
+to run the system into the correct directories (or folders).
+These are:
+
+ * the directory containing the format files.
+
+ * the LaTeX inputs directory, which contains LaTeX system files.
+
+ * the MakeIndex inputs directory, which contains MakeIndex files.
+
+You should move to the formats directory:
+
+ * latex.fmt.
+
+You should move to the LaTeX input directory the files:
+
+ * latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex
+ small2e.tex, sample2e.tex and docstrip.tex.
+
+and any files whose name ends with:
+
+ * .cls, document class files.
+
+ * .clo, document class options files.
+
+ * .sty, package files.
+
+ * .fd, font definition files.
+
+ * .def, files of definitions which may be read by LaTeX while
+ processing documents.
+
+ * .cfg, TeX expert configuration files.
+
+You should move to the MakeIndex input directory all files
+whose name ends with:
+
+ * .ist, MakeIndex style files.
+
+You have now installed LaTeX!
+
+
+GETTING A WORKING LaTeX
+=======================
+
+You may now need to set up your system to use the new version of
+LaTeX; e.g. by configuring the environment, adding menu items, writing
+batch files or shell scripts. Details may be found in a <system>.txt
+file for your system.
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To make sure that the installation has worked, you should run the new
+LaTeX on the document `ltxcheck.tex'.
+
+How this is done varies according to your system; you may find the
+necessary detailed instructions in a <system>.txt file.
+
+This will produce a number of messages, each of which should be `OK'.
+If any of them are `BAD', then read the `PROBLEMS' section below.
+
+If all the messages are `OK' then you are finished!
+
+Fonts needed
+------------
+
+One thing that is checked by running ltxcheck.tex is the existence of
+certain fonts on your system.
+
+The new LaTeX format assumes that you have on your system more font
+files from the Computer Modern families than did previous versions.
+
+It is not essential to get all these fonts immediately but, if you do
+not have the .tfm files for some of them then you will get several
+error messages when you try to typeset any of the documentation files,
+such as `usrguide.tex'.
+
+Here are some examples:
+
+ ! Font OML/cmm/b/it/8=cmmib8 at 8.0pt not loadable:
+ Metric (TFM) file not found
+
+ ! Font OMS/cmsy/b/n/8=cmbsy8 at 8.0pt not loadable:
+ Metric (TFM) file not found
+
+You can, in fact, ignore all these messages (however awful they may
+sound) as far as typesetting the file is concerned: the results,
+whilst not perfect, will be little different to what was intended.
+
+However, you should install these fonts as soon as possible (they are
+in the sub-directory `fonts/tfm' of the LaTeX directory on CTAN).
+They are:
+
+ cmmib5 cmmib6 cmmib7 cmmib8 cmmib9
+ cmbsy5 cmbsy6 cmbsy7 cmbsy8 cmbsy9
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+On most systems the installation should proceed smoothly. However, you
+may get some errors.
+
+
+`texsys.cfg': While running iniTeX on latex.ltx you may get an error
+ message that reports a problem with texsys.cfg.
+
+ If this happens then you have obtained (or produced) a texsys.cfg
+ file that is not suitable for your system.
+
+ First, if it exists read the <system>.txt file. This may tell you
+ how to customize the file texsys.cfg.
+
+ If the <system>.txt file does not mention texsys.cfg then you should
+ not need a texsys.cfg file. Try deleting texsys.cfg and building the
+ LaTeX format again.
+
+ If you still get errors, try using LaTeX to typeset ltdirchk.dtx and
+ then read this document.
+
+ The details of how to do this vary according to your system so you
+may find more details in a <system>.txt file.
+
+
+`File missing': Some of the files from the LaTeX distribution are
+ missing. There are a number of possible reasons for this:
+
+ * The files really are missing.
+ You should get the missing files from the same place you got the
+ rest of the distribution. If you cannot do this then you should
+ complain to whoever gave you this distribution.
+
+ * The files are present, but in the wrong directory.
+ You should move the files to a directory that iniTeX can read.
+
+ * The files are present, and in the right directory.
+ Your iniTeX may have been set up incorrectly. You may be able to
+ correct this, depending on your TeX implementation. See the
+ documentation of your TeX implementation for more details.
+
+
+`Font missing': Some of the fonts (.tfm files) required by LaTeX are
+ missing. As above, either you have not got the required files, or
+ iniTeX is not able to find them. So you may need to move them or to
+ configure iniTeX to look in the correct places. See the
+ documentation of your TeX implementation for more details.
+
+
+`Out of memory': On TeX implementations with small memory, you may
+ exhaust iniTeX's memory whilst installing LaTeX.
+
+ You may be able to correct this:
+
+ * Some TeX implementations allow the amount of memory allocated
+ to TeX to be increased. See the documentation of your TeX
+ implementation for more details.
+
+ * Some iniTeX implementations allow more memory than others; so
+ you may be able to run iniTeX on a larger machine and then move
+ the files across to the smaller machine.
+
+ * If the error happens during the unpacking of the distribution
+ (i.e. when you run iniTeX on unpack.ins) then try running this
+ file with normal TeX, for example plain TeX or an old version
+ of LaTeX.
+
+
+If you have any problems installing LaTeX, you should:
+
+ * read the <system>.txt file, if one exists;
+
+ * if this does not help, ask your local TeX guru;
+
+ * if this fails, try asking a local TeX mailing list;
+
+ * if this fails, run iniTeX on the file latexbug.tex, fill in the
+ resulting bug report form, and send it to the address given in that
+ file.
+
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files
+that are not needed to run LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of
+personal taste and availability of disk space but here is some
+guidance.
+
+ * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex,
+ can be used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt
+ for further information).
+
+ * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for
+ the font definition files.
+
+ * The files ltnews<xx>.tex and ltnews<xx>.ps both contain the latest
+ LaTeX newsletter.
+
+ * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project
+ and how you can support it.
+
+ * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst
+ other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports; and
+ those with extension .err contain errata lists for various
+ publications: see 00readme.txt for further details.
+
+ * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference
+ information covering only those features new to this version of
+ LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user guide or a
+ complete reference for the system.
+
+ * The files with extension .ltx, together with ltxcheck.tex, are
+ used to create and test the format; therefore you should keep these
+ if you expect to remake the format before getting the next full
+ distribution.
+
+ * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the
+ .dtx and .fdd files.
+
+ * We recommend that you keep, in the formats directory, the
+ transcript file that was produced whilst creating the format;
+ this file is called latex.log or latex.lis.
+
+
+FINALLY
+=======
+
+Once you have installed LaTeX for your TeX implementation, you might
+like to write a <system>.txt file explaining how you did it. If you
+want to do this, you should edit the file template.txt.
+
+If you would like your <system>.txt file to be included with the LaTeX
+distribution, please mail it to the project at the address given in
+the file bugs.txt and latexbug.tex.
+
+
+--- Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996
+ The LaTeX3 Project. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexbug.el b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexbug.el
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..492f0d18f67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexbug.el
@@ -0,0 +1,502 @@
+;;; latexbug.el
+;;;
+;;; Version 0: `test of concept'
+;;; Don't look to closely at my lisp coding style...
+;;;
+;;; David Carlisle
+;;; Version 0.1 1994/11/23
+;;; Version 0.2 1994/12/12
+;;; Version 0.3 1995/03/17
+;;; Version 0.4 1995/09/21
+;;; Version 0.5 1995/10/17
+;;; Version 0.6 1997/07/16
+;;; Version 0.7 1997/12/17
+;;; Version 0.8 1999/01/07
+;;;
+;;;
+;;; LOADING
+;;;;;;;;;;;
+;;;
+;;; To use this code, place the file in a directory searched by lisp
+;;; Add
+;;;
+;;; (autoload 'report-latex-bug "latexbug"
+;;; "LaTeX bug report generator" t)
+;;;
+;;; to your .emacs file (without the ;;;).
+;;;
+;;; Then if the impossible happens and you discover a bug in LaTeX,
+;;; or wish to suggest a change to LaTeX, type
+;;; M-x report-latex-bug
+;;;
+;;; and follow the instructions.
+;;;
+;;; A file latexbug.cfg can be used to customise
+;;; latexbug.tex as described in the comments in latexbug.tex.
+;;; or you can customise in your .emacs, as shown below.
+;;;
+;;; CUSTOMISATION
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;;;
+;;; The following variables may be set in your .emacs to customise this
+;;; file.
+;;;
+;;; (setq ltxbug-name "David Carlisle") ; your name
+;;; (setq ltxbug-address "dpc@,,,") ; your email address
+;;; If these two are not set here, or in the latexbug.cfg
+;;; file. emacs will prompt for the values. The prompt
+;;; will suggest default values based on standard emacs variables
+;;; user-full-name and user-mail-address.
+;;;
+;;; (setq ltxbug-mail-headers "...") ; additional mail headers.
+;;; For example (setq ltxbug-mail-headers "FCC: ~/Mail/sent")
+;;; To log outgoing mail in a `sent' file.
+;;;
+;;; (setq ltxbug-latex-command "...") ; latex command
+;;; Set this if LaTeX is not called latex, eg it may be latex2e.
+;;;
+;;;
+;;; Perhaps I should have based this on gnat's send-pr.el but it seemed
+;;; easier to write it from scratch to work in latexbug.tex at the
+;;; required points.
+;;;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+(require 'sendmail)
+
+(defvar ltxbug-latex-command "latex"
+ "Command name for Standard LaTeX (LaTeX2e)")
+
+(defvar ltxbug-directory nil
+"Directory in which to run LaTeX, should end with slash.
+Default, nil, means inherit directory from current buffer.")
+
+(defvar user-full-name nil); just needed on ancient emacs
+(defvar ltxbug-name nil
+"Your name.
+If this is nil, will be prompted if not set in latexbug.cfg.")
+
+(defvar user-mail-address nil); just needed on ancient emacs
+(defvar ltxbug-address nil
+"Your email-address.
+If this is nil, will be prompted if not set in latexbug.cfg.")
+
+(defvar ltxbug-mail-headers ""
+"Extra mail headers that will be added to the mail message.
+This is in addition to `To' and `Subject'.")
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+(defvar ltxbug-categories
+'(("latex") ("tools") ("graphics")
+ ("mfnfss") ("psnfss") ("amslatex") ("babel") ("expl3") ("cyrillic"))
+"Valid GNATS categories")
+
+
+(defun report-latex-bug ()
+"LaTeX bug report generator"
+ (interactive)
+;;
+;; Locally turn off transient mark mode.
+ (let ((transient-mark-mode nil)
+ (current-default-directory default-directory))
+;;
+;; First produce one large window for the main message
+;; and a smaller help window below.
+ (delete-other-windows)
+;; (setq ltxbug-msg (switch-to-buffer "*latex-bugs*")); not emacs18
+ (switch-to-buffer
+ (setq ltxbug-msg (get-buffer-create "*latex-bugs*")))
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (setq default-directory
+ (or ltxbug-directory current-default-directory))
+ (setq major-mode 'ltxbug)
+ (setq mode-name "LaTeX Bug Report")
+ (use-local-map ltxbug-map)
+ (message "Running latex on latexbug.tex ....")
+ (split-window-vertically
+;; -13 ;; old emacs's can't do this
+ (- (window-height) 13))
+ (switch-to-buffer-other-window
+ (setq ltxbug-help (get-buffer-create "latexbugs help")))
+;;
+;; Initially fill the message buffer with the output from running
+;; latexbug.tex.
+ (erase-buffer)
+;;
+;; Use shell-command not start-process here so shell variables are
+;; initialised before calling LaTeX.
+;; Hope that is enough \\ to keep all the different shells happy...
+;; {} replaced by \\{\\} in version 0.4 (fix for latex/1675)
+;; Use \@@input (v0.5)
+ (shell-command (concat
+ ltxbug-latex-command
+ " \\\\nonstopmode\\\\makeatletter\
+ \\\\def\\\\batch\\{\\}\\\\@@input latexbug ") t)
+ (switch-to-buffer-other-window ltxbug-msg)
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+;;
+;; Change header to mention this latexbug.el file.
+ (if (re-search-forward "!" (point-max) t)
+ (ltxbug-error)
+;; else
+ (ltxbug-do-report))))
+
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-do-report ()
+ (erase-buffer)
+;;
+;; Grab the template produced by latexbug.tex
+ (insert-file "latexbug.msg")
+;;
+;; Change header to mention this latexbug.el file.
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (re-search-forward "\\(by latexbug.\\)\\(tex\\)" (point-max) t)
+ (replace-match "\\1el")
+;;
+;; Grab email address into mail field.
+ (re-search-forward "Re.*email to \\(.*\\)[^Z]*=$" (point-max) t)
+;;
+;; Put the synopsis template into the Subject field.
+;; Add the delimiter used by the mail-send function.
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (let ((temp
+ (concat "To: "
+ (buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1)) "
+Subject: < SYNOPSIS >
+"
+ ltxbug-mail-headers
+ (if (not (equal "" ltxbug-mail-headers)) "
+")
+ "--text follows this line--
+" )))
+;;
+;; Remove the rest of the banner from latexbug.tex
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (delete-region (match-beginning 0) (match-end 0))
+;;
+;; insert the mail headers
+ (insert temp))
+;;
+;;
+;; Get the required category using minibuffer completion.
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+Several categories of files are supported,
+corresponding to directories in the standard LaTeX distribution:
+
+ latex: The `base' format, and standard classes only (base).
+ tools: Packages supported by the LaTeX3 project team (tools).
+ graphics: The color and graphics packages (graphics).
+ mfnfss: Packages for using some MetaFont fonts (mfnfss).
+ psnfss: Packages for using PostScript fonts LaTeX (psnfss).
+ amslatex: AMS supported Classes and Packages (amsfonts and amslatex).
+ babel: Packages supporting many different languages (babel).
+ expl3: Experimental packages for TeX programmers (expl3).
+ cyrillic: Packages for using Cyrillic fonts (cyrillic).
+")
+ (let* ((completion-ignore-case t)
+ (cat (completing-read "Which Category ? "
+ ltxbug-categories nil t )))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< CATEGORY >" (if (equal cat "") "latex" cat)))
+;;
+;; Get the synopsis, make sure it is non empty, and not too long.
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ Please enter a One line Synopsis of the report.
+ This should be < 50 characters.
+
+ This text will be used as the mail header on all
+ subsequent correspondence. Please use informative strings.
+ For example: \\mathit generates error in foobar environmenent
+ rather than just `LaTeX Bug' or similar strings.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((syn (read-from-minibuffer "Synopsis ? " )))
+ (while (or (equal syn "") (> (length syn) 50))
+ (setq syn
+ (read-from-minibuffer "Synopsis (0 < length < 50) ? " syn)))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< SYNOPSIS >" syn))
+;;
+;; If latexbug.cfg has not already defined the name
+;; grab it from minibuffer
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (if (re-search-forward "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" (point-max) t)
+ (if ltxbug-name
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" ltxbug-name)
+;; else
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ Please enter Your Name
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((temp (read-from-minibuffer "Your Name ? " user-full-name)))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" temp))))
+;;
+;; If latexbug.cfg has not already defined the email address
+;; grab it from minibuffer
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (if (re-search-forward "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" (point-max) t)
+ (if ltxbug-address
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" ltxbug-address)
+;; else
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ Please enter Your email address.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((temp (read-from-minibuffer "Your email address ? "
+ user-mail-address)))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" temp))))
+;;
+;; Grab file name.
+;; If this is empty, suggest changing the >Class
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+A bug report should be accompanied by a test file
+and a the log that the test generates.
+
+If a test file is not appropriate for this report
+Just hit <return>
+
+Otherwise please specify the file to include.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((temp (read-file-name "Test file ? " nil "" t)))
+ (if (equal temp "")
+ (progn
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Class"
+ '(("sw-bug")("doc-bug")("change-request"))
+ "
+You have not offered a test file.
+
+Perhaps that this is not a bug report.
+The default class for messages is sw-bug.
+
+Possible classes of messages are:
+ sw-bug: Message reporting a Bug in the software.
+ doc-bug: Message reporting an error in the documentation.
+ change-request: Message requesting a change to some LaTeX feature.")
+ (re-search-forward ">How-to-repeat")
+ (delete-region (match-beginning 0) (point-max)))
+;; else
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (ltxbug-replace " < TEST FILE HERE " "")
+ (insert-file temp)
+ (let ((lines 0))
+ (while (re-search-forward "\n" (mark) t)
+ (setq lines (+ lines 1)))
+ (if (> lines 60)
+ (progn
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert
+(format "%s%d%s" "
+!!!!
+Your test file is " lines " lines long!!!
+
+Test files should be as short as possible, while still showing
+the behaviour. Please try to keep the file below 60 lines.
+"))
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg))))
+ (let* ((log1
+ (concat
+ (substring temp 0 (string-match "\\.[^\\.]*$" temp))
+ ".log"))
+ (log (read-file-name "Log file ? " "" log1 t log1)))
+ (if (equal log "")
+ (message "WHY NO LOG ???")
+ (ltxbug-replace " < LOG FROM TEST FILE HERE >" "")
+ (insert-file log)))))
+;;
+;; Prompt for the message text.
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+Complete your bug report by giving the full descripition
+below the `Description of bug:' header.
+
+There are other database fields you may wish to add,
+type C-c C-f to change or add an additional field.
+
+Once the report is complete, type C-c C-c to send the message.
+
+A saved copy of the report will be in the file
+latexbug.msg.
+")
+ (switch-to-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (ltxbug-replace " < ENTER BUG REPORT HERE >" "")
+ (auto-fill-mode 1)
+ (setq fill-column 72))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-error ()
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+LaTeX did not succesfully produce a bug report template."))
+
+(defun ltxbug-save-and-send ()
+ (interactive)
+ (write-file "latexbug.msg")
+ (mail-send-and-exit nil))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-replace (a b)
+ "Replace the regexp a by the string b everywhere in the current buffer"
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (while (re-search-forward a (point-max) t)
+ (replace-match b t t)))
+
+(defvar ltxbug-map (make-sparse-keymap)
+ "Local keymap used in LaTeX bug buffer.")
+
+(define-key ltxbug-map "\C-c\C-c" 'ltxbug-save-and-send)
+(define-key ltxbug-map "\C-c\C-f" 'ltxbug-oneline-field)
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-update-field (field values help)
+"Update FIELD using completion list VALUES and help text HELP.
+ First entry in VALUES is the default."
+ (interactive)
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert help)
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (let ((temp ""))
+ (if (re-search-forward
+ (concat"\n>" field ":\\( *\\)\\(.*\\)$") (point-max) t)
+;; if field already there
+ (progn
+ (setq temp (buffer-substring (match-beginning 2) (match-end 2)))
+ (delete-region (match-beginning 1) (match-end 2)))
+;; else
+ (re-search-forward ">Category:.*$")
+ (insert (concat "\n>" field ":")))
+ (insert " ")
+ (let ((temp2
+ (completing-read (concat field " ? ") values nil t temp)))
+ (insert (if (equal temp2 "")
+ (car(car values)) temp2)))))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-responsible ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Responsible"
+;; Alphabetical order, which makes Alan the default...
+ '(("alan")("chris")("david")("frank")("johannes")
+ ("michael")("rainer"))
+"
+ You may set the >Responsible field to a particular person.
+ **Do not do this unless you have very good reason.**
+ We may not appreciate having jobs allocated to us in this way:-)
+ The possible values are:
+ alan (Alan Jeffrey)
+ chris (Chris Rowley)
+ david (David Carlisle)
+ frank (Frank Mittelbach)
+ johannes (Johannes Braams)
+ michael (Michael Downes)
+ rainer (Rainer Schoepf)
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-confidential ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Confidential"
+ '(("no")("yes"))
+"
+ You may set the >Confidential field to yes.
+
+ The report database is publicly searchable.
+ See bugs.txt for details.
+ Reports marked Confidential will not be made public.
+ Possible values:
+ no The default. Report may be made public.
+ yes Report should only be seen by LaTeX maintainers.
+"))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-priority ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Priority"
+ '(("low")("medium")("high"))
+"
+ Change the priority of the report from `high'
+ Possible values:
+ low
+ medium
+ high
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-severity ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Severity"
+ '(("non-critical")("serious")("critical"))
+"
+ Classify the severity of the problem.'
+ Possible values:
+ non-critical
+ serious
+ critical
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-class ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Class"
+ '(("sw-bug")("doc-bug")("change-request"))
+"
+ Classify the type of report.
+ Possible values:
+ sw-bug: Message reporting a bug in the software.
+ doc-bug: Message reporting an error in the documentation.
+ change-request: Message requesting a change to some LaTeX feature.
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-window-setup ()
+ (interactive)
+ (delete-other-windows)
+ (split-window-vertically -13)
+ (switch-to-buffer-other-window ltxbug-help))
+
+(defun ltxbug-oneline-field ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-window-setup)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ You may wish to add or alter the following fields:
+ Class Class of this report.
+ Confidential Confidential (or not).
+ Responsible Assign to a member of the LaTeX maintenance team
+ Severity Severity of the bug.
+ Priority Priority of the report.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let* ((completion-ignore-case t)
+ (field (completing-read "Which field ? "
+ '(("Class")("Confidential")("Priority")("Severity")
+ ("Responsible"))
+ nil t)))
+ (cond
+ ((equal field "Class") (ltxbug-class))
+ ((equal field "Confidential") (ltxbug-confidential))
+ ((equal field "Responsible") (ltxbug-responsible))
+ ((equal field "Severity") (ltxbug-severity))
+ ((equal field "Priority") (ltxbug-priority)))))
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6b92aba4591
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+ LaTeX Copyright, Warranty and Distribution Restrictions
+
+ 20 December 2003
+
+
+COPYRIGHT
+=========
+
+This distribution is
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and the individual authors:
+
+ Leslie Lamport
+ Johannes Braams
+ David Carlisle
+ Alan Jeffrey
+ Frank Mittelbach
+ Chris Rowley
+ Rainer Schoepf
+
+License
+=======
+
+LaTeX is free software that can be redistributed and/or modified
+under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License as specified
+in the file lppl.txt.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+The use of LaTeX is unrestricted.
+
+This Work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution
+is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
+
+Files generated by means of unpacking the distribution (using, for
+example, the docstrip program) may be distributed at the distributor's
+discretion. However if they are distributed then a copy of the base
+system must be distributed together with them.
+
+The list of all derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is given in the file unpacked.txt.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lindner.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lindner.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..99fce1c96e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lindner.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+ LaTeX installation instructions for Lindner-TeX (Atari)
+
+ 1995 June 25
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for
+Lindner-TeX. Before reading this file, you should read
+install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to configure LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the
+following:
+
+ * the file `hyphen.tex', or some other hyphenation files (see `Creating
+ the LaTeX Format', below); we recommend to use the `babel' system by
+ Johannes Braams, which can be found probably where you got your copy
+ of LaTeX, e.g. the CTAN archive ftp-servers;
+
+ * the font files (normally .tfm files) for the Computer Modern fonts,
+ including some non-standard ones (see `Fonts needed', below).
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+===============================
+
+ If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish
+ to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX.
+
+
+ If you want to use the new LaTeX2e, which is also the new standard, instead
+ of your old version, you can delete all files in your /texinput/stdinput
+ directory, except for the two plain TeX format files named PLAIN.FMT and
+ PLAING.FMT, which can usually be found in the directory /texinput/formats.
+ If you want to keep the old 2.09 version of LaTeX, move all the input files
+ to a directory named (e.g.) stdinput.209 and create a new directory
+ stdinput.2e for the new files.
+
+
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+ LaTeX2e uses more memory than the former versions. To use it, you need an
+ ATARI ST/TT/Falcon with at least 2Mb of RAM, so that you can use the BigTeX
+ version of Lindner-TeX. The files are available on the CTAN archive servers
+ in the directory tex/systems/atari/lindner-tex-packed-disks.
+
+ No specially adapted TEXSYS.CFG file is needed for the Lindner
+implementation
+ of TeX. If you want to configure your system, you should edit the TEXSETUP
+ file with your favourite ASCII editor. This file contents the main
+in-/output
+ paths for the system. CAUTION: Some paths are saved directly to the code of
+ the TEXSHELL.PRG. These can be edited from the shell only!
+
+ VERY IMPORTANT NOTICE: If you want to use the Lindner-TeX-System in a multi-
+ tasking environment like MagiC or MTOS, you should rename TEXSHELL.PRG to
+ TEXSHELL.TOS (unless your Desktop allows to determine the type of executa-
+ bles to certain types, like e.g. GEMINI). This will cause the TEXSHELL to
+re-
+ direct all output to the VT52-Window, so the .TTP executables will not write
+ directly to the screen.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+ To unpack the distribution, run INITEX on the file unpack.ins. (If you can,
+ get the already unpacked distribution from CTAN, because the unpacking
+ might take an awfully long time on an 8Mhz ST).
+
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+ To create the new LaTeX format, you have to run IniTeX on the file
+ latex.ltx. Make sure, that this file (and the hyphenation files) are in
+ a directory searched by TeX. To configure the hyphenation read the file
+ TEXPERT.TEX. A new LaTeX format named LATEX.BFM will be created and dumped
+ to the directory where your other formats already are (environment variable
+ DUMPPATH in the TEXSETUP file). There is no need to rename this file to
+ LATEX.FMT. To install the new format file in the TEXSHELL.PRG, doubleclick
+ into the lower field of the formats section in the TeX-window, choose
+ LATEX.BFM in the file selector, ignore the error message about the file ex-
+ tensions and save the TEXSHELL options.
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+ We suggest the following configuration for your /stdinput.2e directory:
+ - create a new folder CLASSES and copy all *.CLS and *.CLO files into it;
+ - copy all *.STY files to a new folder PACKAGES;
+ - copy all *.FD and *.ENC files to a new folder FONTDEFS;
+ - copy all other files to a folder OTHERS.
+
+ You might delete all *.DTX, *.INS and *.TXT files (after reading or
+ processing them to get the documentations) in order to save disk space. Note
+ that the *.DTX files can be processed by the new LaTeX version only.
+CAUTION:
+ you should, of course, keep a backup copy of all these files somewhere so
+you
+ can can reinstall them if necessary.
+
+
+GETTING A WORKING LaTeX
+=======================
+
+ All you have to do now is writing the new paths to the TEXSETUP file so
+ that TeX can find the files when running.
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+ To check the installation select LTXCHECK.LTX in the TeXShell and run the
+ new LaTeX on it. Make sure that you copy LTXCHECK.LTX to the document input
+ directory, usually /texinput/document, before you proceed it. It's going to
+ produce some `OK' messages, and perhaps some `BAD' warnings.
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+ If any problems occur, check the LindnerTeX users guide. Note that you need
+ some special fonts to process the XXXGUIDE.TEX files that come with the
+ LaTeX distribution. These fonts are available on CTAN also. If you use a
+ previewer like ASCREEN v3.2 or DVI v2.3x the missing fonts will be substi-
+ tuted and can be produced with METAFONT later.
+
+ If you have any other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the
+ `PROBLEMS' section in install.txt.
+
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+ See section `PUTTING FILES...' for details.
+
+
+GETTING IN TOUCH WITH THE AUTHOR
+================================
+
+ If you have any problems, comments or proposals for changes or extensions to
+ this text, you can send your questions to the author by email.
+ The probably best address to use is Thomas_Cloer@s4.maus.de (only mails
+ <16kb). You can also try tcloer@tyrell.s.bawue.de or tcloer1@gwdg.de.
+
+
+
+
+--- Copyright 1995 Thomas Cloer and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9425aab83cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+LaTeX Project Public License
+============================
+
+LPPL Version 1.0 1999-03-01
+
+Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but modification is not allowed.
+
+
+Preamble
+========
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the
+base LaTeX distribution is distributed. As described below you may use
+this licence for any software that you wish to distribute.
+
+It may be particularly suitable if your software is TeX related (such
+as a LaTeX package file) but it may be used for any software, even if
+it is unrelated to TeX.
+
+To use this license, the files of your distribution should have an
+explicit copyright notice giving your name and the year, together
+with a reference to this license.
+
+A typical example would be
+
+ %% pig.sty
+ %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name
+
+ % This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+Given such a notice in the file, the conditions of this document would
+apply, with:
+
+`The Program' referring to the software `pig.sty' and
+`The Copyright Holder' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'.
+
+To see a real example, see the file legal.txt which carries the
+copyright notice for the base latex distribution.
+
+This license gives terms under which files of The Program may be
+distributed and modified. Individual files may have specific further
+constraints on modification, but no file should have restrictions on
+distribution other than those specified below.
+This is to ensure that a distributor wishing to distribute a complete
+unmodified copy of The Program need only check the conditions in this
+file, and does not need to check every file in The Program for extra
+restrictions. If you do need to modify the distribution terms of some
+files, do not refer to this license, instead distribute The Program
+under a different license. You may use the parts of the text of LPPL as
+a model for your own license, but your license should not directly refer
+to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that The Program is
+distributed under the LPPL.
+
+
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License
+================================
+Terms And Conditions For Copying, Distribution And Modification
+===============================================================
+
+
+WARRANTY
+========
+
+There is no warranty for The Program, to the extent permitted by
+applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing, The
+Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is' without warranty of any
+kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
+implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
+purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the
+program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you assume
+the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction.
+
+In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing
+will The Copyright Holder, or any of the individual authors named in
+the source for The Program, be liable to you for damages, including
+any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising out
+of any use of The Program or out of inability to use The Program
+(including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered
+inaccurate or losses sustained by you or by third parties as a result
+of a failure of The Program to operate with any other programs), even
+if such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of
+such damages.
+
+
+DISTRIBUTION
+============
+
+Redistribution of unchanged files is allowed provided that all files
+that make up the distribution of The Program are distributed.
+In particular this means that The Program has to be distributed
+including its documentation if documentation was part of the original
+distribution.
+
+The distribution of The Program will contain a prominent file
+listing all the files covered by this license.
+
+If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain!
+
+The distribution of changed versions of certain files included in the
+The Program, and the reuse of code from The Program, are allowed
+under the following restrictions:
+
+ * It is allowed only if the legal notice in the file does not
+ expressly forbid it.
+ See note below, under "Conditions on individual files".
+
+ * You rename the file before you make any changes to it, unless the
+ file explicitly says that renaming is not required. Any such changed
+ files must be distributed under a license that forbids distribution
+ of those files, and any files derived from them, under the names used
+ by the original files in the distribution of The Program.
+
+ * You change any `identification string' in The Program to clearly
+ indicate that the file is not part of the standard system.
+
+ * If The Program includes an `error report address' so that errors
+ may be reported to The Copyright Holder, or other specified
+ addresses, this address must be changed in any modified versions of
+ The Program, so that reports for files not maintained by the
+ original program maintainers are directed to the maintainers of the
+ changed files.
+
+ * You acknowledge the source and authorship of the original version
+ in the modified file.
+
+ * You also distribute the unmodified version of the file or
+ alternatively provide sufficient information so that the
+ user of your modified file can be reasonably expected to be
+ able to obtain an original, unmodified copy of The Program.
+ For example, you may specify a URL to a site that you expect
+ will freely provide the user with a copy of The Program (either
+ the version on which your modification is based, or perhaps a
+ later version).
+
+ * If The Program is intended to be used with, or is based on, LaTeX,
+ then files with the following file extensions which have special
+ meaning in LaTeX Software, have special modification rules under the
+ license:
+
+ - Files with extension `.ins' (installation files): these files may
+ not be modified at all because they contain the legal notices
+ that are placed in the generated files.
+
+ - Files with extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definitions files): these
+ files are allowed to be modified without changing the name, but
+ only to enable use of all available fonts and to prevent attempts
+ to access unavailable fonts. However, modified files are not
+ allowed to be distributed in place of original files.
+
+ - Files with extension `.cfg' (configuration files): these files
+ can be created or modified to enable easy configuration of the
+ system. The documentation in cfgguide.tex in the base LaTeX
+ distribution describes when it makes sense to modify or generate
+ such files.
+
+
+The above restrictions are not intended to prohibit, and hence do
+not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it
+becomes identical to the latest version of that file in The Program.
+
+========================================================================
+
+NOTES
+=====
+
+We believe that these requirements give you the freedom you to make
+modifications that conform with whatever technical specifications you
+wish, whilst maintaining the availability, integrity and reliability of
+The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal whilst
+adhering to these requirements then read the document cfgguide.tex
+in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions.
+
+Because of the portability and exchangeability aspects of systems
+like LaTeX, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of
+non-standard versions of components of LaTeX or of generally available
+contributed code for them but such distributions are permitted under the
+above restrictions.
+
+The document modguide.tex in the base LaTeX distribution details
+the reasons for the legal requirements detailed above.
+Even if The Program is unrelated to LaTeX, the argument in
+modguide.tex may still apply, and should be read before
+a modified version of The Program is distributed.
+
+
+Conditions on individual files
+==============================
+
+The individual files may bear additional conditions which supersede
+the general conditions on distribution and modification contained in
+this file. If there are any such files, the distribution of The
+Program will contain a prominent file that lists all the exceptional
+files.
+
+Typical examples of files with more restrictive modification
+conditions would be files that contain the text of copyright notices.
+
+ * The conditions on individual files differ only in the
+ extent of *modification* that is allowed.
+
+ * The conditions on *distribution* are the same for all the files.
+ Thus a (re)distributor of a complete, unchanged copy of The Program
+ need meet only the conditions in this file; it is not necessary to
+ check the header of every file in the distribution to check that a
+ distribution meets these requirements.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..52100607d17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License
+=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+
+LPPL Version 1.1 1999-07-10
+
+Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project
+ Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this
+ license document, but modification of it is not allowed.
+
+
+PREAMBLE
+========
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the
+base LaTeX distribution is distributed.
+
+You may use this license for any program that you have written and wish
+to distribute. This license may be particularly suitable if your
+program is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but you may use it
+even if your program is unrelated to TeX. The section `WHETHER AND HOW
+TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE', below, gives instructions,
+examples, and recommendations for authors who are considering
+distributing their programs under this license.
+
+In this license document, `The Program' refers to any program
+distributed under this license.
+
+This license gives conditions under which The Program may be distributed
+and conditions under which modified versions of The Program may be
+distributed. Individual files of The Program may bear supplementary
+and/or superseding conditions on modification of themselves and on the
+distribution of modified versions of themselves, but *no* file of The
+Program may bear supplementary or superseding conditions on the
+distribution of an unmodified copy of the file. A distributor wishing
+to distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program therefore
+needs to check the conditions only in this license and nowhere else.
+
+Activities other than distribution and/or modification of The Program
+are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In
+particular, the act of running The Program is not restricted.
+
+We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you
+the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program
+that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while
+maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of
+The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while
+meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex'
+in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions.
+
+
+CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+===========================================
+
+You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program.
+Distribution of only part of The Program is not allowed.
+
+You may not modify in any way a file of The Program that bears a legal
+notice forbidding modification of that file.
+
+You may distribute a modified file of The Program if, and only if, the
+following eight conditions are met:
+
+ 1. You must meet any additional conditions borne by the file on the
+ distribution of a modified version of the file as described below
+ in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of
+ The Program'.
+
+ 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any
+ applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified
+ version of the file that are described below in the subsection
+ `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'.
+
+ 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the
+ original file.
+
+ 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and
+ name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program
+ which contains it.
+
+ 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate
+ clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program.
+
+ 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the
+ reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to
+ ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original
+ maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified
+ files.
+
+ 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids
+ distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived
+ from the modified file with the filename of the original file.
+
+ 8. You must do either (A) or (B):
+
+ (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete,
+ unmodified copy of The Program) together with the modified
+ file; if your distribution of the modified file is made by
+ offering access to copy the modified file from a designated
+ place, then offering equivalent access to copy The Program
+ from the same place meets this condition, even though third
+ parties are not compelled to copy The Program along with the
+ modified file;
+
+ (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information
+ that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program;
+ for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
+ for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of
+ The Program free of charge (either the version from which
+ your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version).
+
+Note that in the above, `distribution' of a file means making the
+file available to others by any means. This includes, for instance,
+installing the file on any machine in such a way that the file is
+accessible by users other than yourself. `Modification' of a file
+means any procedure that produces a derivative file under any
+applicable law -- that is, a file containing the original file or
+a significant portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
+and/or translated into another language.
+
+Changing the name of a file is considered to be a modification of
+the file.
+
+The distribution conditions in this license do not have to be
+applied to files that have been modified in accordance with the
+above conditions. Note, however, that Condition 7. does apply to
+any such modified file.
+
+The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not
+apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes
+identical to the latest version of that file of The Program.
+
+
+
+A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+It is wise never to modify a file of The Program, even for your own
+personal use, without also meeting the above eight conditions for
+distributing the modified file. While you might intend that such
+modified files will never be distributed, often this will happen by
+accident -- you may forget that you have modified the file; or it may
+not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified file
+that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions of
+this license. It is usually in your best interest to keep your copy
+of The Program identical with the public one. Many programs provide
+ways to control the behavior of that program without altering its
+licensed files.
+
+
+Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+An individual file of The Program may bear additional conditions that
+supplement and/or supersede the conditions in this license if, and only
+if, such additional conditions exclusively concern modification of the
+file or distribution of a modified version of the file. The conditions
+on individual files of The Program therefore may differ only with
+respect to the kind and extent of modification of those files that
+is allowed, and with respect to the distribution of modified versions
+of those files.
+
+
+Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files
+---------------------------------------------
+
+If a file of The Program is intended to be used with LaTeX (that is,
+if it is a LaTeX software file), then the following additional
+conditions, which supplement and/or supersede the conditions
+above, apply to the file according to its filename extension:
+
+ - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since
+ these are installation files containing the legal notices that are
+ placed in the files they generate.
+
+ - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename
+ extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard
+ conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute
+ such modified LaTeX font definition files with their original names
+ provided that:
+ (1) the only changes to the original files either enable use of
+ available fonts or prevent attempts to access unavailable fonts;
+ (2) you also distribute the original, unmodified files (TeX input
+ paths can be used to control which set of LaTeX font definition
+ files is actually used by TeX).
+
+ - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename
+ extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names.
+ The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands
+ that are allowed in a particular configuration file.
+
+Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software,
+The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of
+components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them,
+but such distribution can meet the conditions of this license.
+
+
+NO WARRANTY
+===========
+
+There is no warranty for The Program. Except when otherwise stated in
+writing, The Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is', without
+warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not
+limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
+a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance
+of The Program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you
+assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.
+
+In no event unless agreed to in writing will The Copyright Holder, or
+any author named in the files of The Program, or any other party who may
+distribute and/or modify The Program as permitted below, be liable to
+you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or
+consequential damages arising out of any use of The Program or out of
+inability to use The Program (including, but not limited to, loss of
+data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as
+a result of any failure of The Program to operate with any other
+programs), even if The Copyright Holder or said author or said other
+party has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
+
+
+WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE
+=========================================================
+
+This section contains important instructions, examples, and
+recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their
+programs under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in
+this section.
+
+
+Choosing This License or Another License
+----------------------------------------
+
+If for any part of your program you want or need to use *distribution*
+conditions that differ from those in this license, then do not refer to
+this license anywhere in your program but instead distribute your
+program under a different license. You may use the text of this license
+as a model for your own license, but your license should not refer to
+the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that your program is
+distributed under the LPPL.
+
+The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains
+the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains,
+for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public
+License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your program is
+unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be
+relevant, and authors intending to distribute their programs under any
+license are encouraged to read it.
+
+
+How to Use This License
+-----------------------
+
+To use this license, place in each of the files of your program both
+an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year and also
+a statement that the distribution and/or modification of the file is
+constrained by the conditions in this license.
+
+Here is an example of such a notice and statement:
+
+ %% pig.dtx
+ %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name
+ %
+ % This program may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.1
+ % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+ % The latest version of this license is in
+ % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ % and version 1.1 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+ % version 1999/06/01 or later.
+ %
+ % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins
+
+Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in
+this license document would apply, with `The Program' referring to the
+two files `pig.dtx' and `pig.ins', and `The Copyright Holder' referring
+to the person `M. Y. Name'.
+
+
+Important Recommendations
+-------------------------
+
+ Defining What Constitutes The Program
+
+ The LPPL requires that distributions of The Program contain all the
+ files of The Program. It is therefore important that you provide a
+ way for the licensee to determine which files constitute The Program.
+ This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the
+ files of The Program near the copyright notice of each file or by
+ using a line like
+
+ % This program consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
+
+ in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be
+ impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you
+ to comprise The Program.
+
+ Noting Exceptional Files
+
+ If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on
+ modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those
+ files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX
+ Software Files'), then it is recommended that The Program contain a
+ prominent file that defines the exceptional conditions, and either
+ lists the exceptional files or defines one or more categories of
+ exceptional files.
+
+ Files containing the text of a license (such as this file) are
+ often examples of files bearing more restrictive conditions on
+ modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension
+ `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions
+ on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The
+ additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples
+ of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional
+ conditions.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5b05fe86893
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,318 @@
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License
+=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+
+LPPL Version 1.2 1999-09-03
+
+Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project
+ Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this
+ license document, but modification of it is not allowed.
+
+
+PREAMBLE
+========
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the
+base LaTeX distribution is distributed.
+
+You may use this license for any program that you have written and wish
+to distribute. This license may be particularly suitable if your
+program is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but you may use it
+even if your program is unrelated to TeX. The section `WHETHER AND HOW
+TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE', below, gives instructions,
+examples, and recommendations for authors who are considering
+distributing their programs under this license.
+
+In this license document, `The Program' refers to any program
+distributed under this license.
+
+This license gives conditions under which The Program may be distributed
+and conditions under which modified versions of The Program may be
+distributed. Individual files of The Program may bear supplementary
+and/or superseding conditions on modification of themselves and on the
+distribution of modified versions of themselves, but *no* file of The
+Program may bear supplementary or superseding conditions on the
+distribution of an unmodified copy of the file. A distributor wishing
+to distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program therefore
+needs to check the conditions only in this license and nowhere else.
+
+Activities other than distribution and/or modification of The Program
+are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In
+particular, the act of running The Program is not restricted.
+
+We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you
+the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program
+that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while
+maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of
+The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while
+meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex'
+in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions.
+
+
+CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+===========================================
+
+You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program.
+Distribution of only part of The Program is not allowed.
+
+You may not modify in any way a file of The Program that bears a legal
+notice forbidding modification of that file.
+
+You may distribute a modified file of The Program if, and only if, the
+following eight conditions are met:
+
+ 1. You must meet any additional conditions borne by the file on the
+ distribution of a modified version of the file as described below
+ in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of
+ The Program'.
+
+ 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any
+ applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified
+ version of the file that are described below in the subsection
+ `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'.
+
+ 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the
+ original file.
+
+ 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and
+ name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program
+ which contains it.
+
+ 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate
+ clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program.
+
+ 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the
+ reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to
+ ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original
+ maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified
+ files.
+
+ 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids
+ distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived
+ from the modified file with the filename of the original file.
+
+ 8. You must do either (A) or (B):
+
+ (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete,
+ unmodified copy of The Program) together with the modified
+ file; if your distribution of the modified file is made by
+ offering access to copy the modified file from a designated
+ place, then offering equivalent access to copy The Program
+ from the same place meets this condition, even though third
+ parties are not compelled to copy The Program along with the
+ modified file;
+
+ (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information
+ that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program;
+ for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
+ for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of
+ The Program free of charge (either the version from which
+ your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version).
+
+Note that in the above, `distribution' of a file means making the
+file available to others by any means. This includes, for instance,
+installing the file on any machine in such a way that the file is
+accessible by users other than yourself. `Modification' of a file
+means any procedure that produces a derivative file under any
+applicable law -- that is, a file containing the original file or
+a significant portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
+and/or translated into another language.
+
+Changing the name of a file (other than as necessitated by the file
+conventions of the target file systems) is considered to be a
+modification of the file.
+
+The distribution conditions in this license do not have to be
+applied to files that have been modified in accordance with the
+above conditions. Note, however, that Condition 7. does apply to
+any such modified file.
+
+The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not
+apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes
+identical to the latest version of that file of The Program.
+
+
+
+A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+It is wise never to modify a file of The Program, even for your own
+personal use, without also meeting the above eight conditions for
+distributing the modified file. While you might intend that such
+modified files will never be distributed, often this will happen by
+accident -- you may forget that you have modified the file; or it may
+not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified file
+that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions of
+this license. It is usually in your best interest to keep your copy
+of The Program identical with the public one. Many programs provide
+ways to control the behavior of that program without altering its
+licensed files.
+
+
+Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+An individual file of The Program may bear additional conditions that
+supplement and/or supersede the conditions in this license if, and only
+if, such additional conditions exclusively concern modification of the
+file or distribution of a modified version of the file. The conditions
+on individual files of The Program therefore may differ only with
+respect to the kind and extent of modification of those files that
+is allowed, and with respect to the distribution of modified versions
+of those files.
+
+
+Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files
+---------------------------------------------
+
+If a file of The Program is intended to be used with LaTeX (that is,
+if it is a LaTeX software file), then the following additional
+conditions, which supplement and/or supersede the conditions
+above, apply to the file according to its filename extension:
+
+ - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since
+ these are installation files containing the legal notices that are
+ placed in the files they generate.
+
+ - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename
+ extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard
+ conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute
+ such modified LaTeX font definition files with their original names
+ provided that:
+ (1) the only changes to the original files either enable use of
+ available fonts or prevent attempts to access unavailable fonts;
+ (2) you also distribute the original, unmodified files (TeX input
+ paths can be used to control which set of LaTeX font definition
+ files is actually used by TeX).
+
+ - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename
+ extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names.
+ The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands
+ that are allowed in a particular configuration file.
+
+Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software,
+The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of
+components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them,
+but such distribution can meet the conditions of this license.
+
+
+NO WARRANTY
+===========
+
+There is no warranty for The Program. Except when otherwise stated in
+writing, The Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is', without
+warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not
+limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
+a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance
+of The Program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you
+assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.
+
+In no event unless agreed to in writing will The Copyright Holder, or
+any author named in the files of The Program, or any other party who may
+distribute and/or modify The Program as permitted above, be liable to
+you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or
+consequential damages arising out of any use of The Program or out of
+inability to use The Program (including, but not limited to, loss of
+data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as
+a result of any failure of The Program to operate with any other
+programs), even if The Copyright Holder or said author or said other
+party has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
+
+
+WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE
+=========================================================
+
+This section contains important instructions, examples, and
+recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their
+programs under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in
+this section.
+
+
+Choosing This License or Another License
+----------------------------------------
+
+If for any part of your program you want or need to use *distribution*
+conditions that differ from those in this license, then do not refer to
+this license anywhere in your program but instead distribute your
+program under a different license. You may use the text of this license
+as a model for your own license, but your license should not refer to
+the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that your program is
+distributed under the LPPL.
+
+The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains
+the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains,
+for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public
+License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your program is
+unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be
+relevant, and authors intending to distribute their programs under any
+license are encouraged to read it.
+
+
+How to Use This License
+-----------------------
+
+To use this license, place in each of the files of your program both
+an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year and also
+a statement that the distribution and/or modification of the file is
+constrained by the conditions in this license.
+
+Here is an example of such a notice and statement:
+
+ %% pig.dtx
+ %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name
+ %
+ % This program may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2
+ % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+ % The latest version of this license is in
+ % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ % and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+ % version 1999/12/01 or later.
+ %
+ % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins
+
+Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in
+this license document would apply, with `The Program' referring to the
+two files `pig.dtx' and `pig.ins', and `The Copyright Holder' referring
+to the person `M. Y. Name'.
+
+
+Important Recommendations
+-------------------------
+
+ Defining What Constitutes The Program
+
+ The LPPL requires that distributions of The Program contain all the
+ files of The Program. It is therefore important that you provide a
+ way for the licensee to determine which files constitute The Program.
+ This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the
+ files of The Program near the copyright notice of each file or by
+ using a line like
+
+ % This program consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
+
+ in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be
+ impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you
+ to comprise The Program.
+
+ Noting Exceptional Files
+
+ If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on
+ modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those
+ files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX
+ Software Files'), then it is recommended that The Program contain a
+ prominent file that defines the exceptional conditions, and either
+ lists the exceptional files or defines one or more categories of
+ exceptional files.
+
+ Files containing the text of a license (such as this file) are
+ often examples of files bearing more restrictive conditions on
+ modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension
+ `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions
+ on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The
+ additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples
+ of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional
+ conditions.
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f721587db1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,401 @@
+The LaTeX Project Public License
+=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+
+LPPL Version 1.3 2003-12-01
+
+Copyright 1999 2002-03 LaTeX3 Project
+ Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this
+ license document, but modification of it is not allowed.
+
+
+PREAMBLE
+========
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under
+which the the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed.
+
+You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright
+and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly
+suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but
+you may use it with small modifications even if your work is unrelated
+to TeX.
+
+The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE',
+below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors
+who are considering distributing their works under this license.
+
+This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed
+and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of
+that work may be distributed.
+
+We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you
+the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work
+that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while
+maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of
+that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while
+meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex'
+and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions.
+
+
+DEFINITIONS
+===========
+
+In this license document the following terms are used:
+
+ `Work'
+ Any work being distributed under this License.
+
+ `Derived Work'
+ Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work.
+
+ `Modification'
+ Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable
+ law -- for example, the production of a file containing an
+ original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of
+ such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
+ translated into another language.
+
+ `Modify'
+ To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any
+ applicable law.
+
+ `Distribution'
+ Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in
+ whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to)
+ making any electronic components of the Work accessible by
+ file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file
+ systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS).
+
+ `Compiled Work'
+ A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it
+ is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may
+ include using installation facilities provided by the Work,
+ transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or
+ other activities. Note that modification of any installation
+ facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work.
+
+ `Current Maintainer'
+ A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is
+ no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under
+ any applicable law.
+
+ `Base Interpreter'
+ A program or process that is normally needed for running or
+ interpreting a part or the whole of the Work.
+ A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these
+ are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each
+ external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used
+ interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the
+ license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a
+ "LaTeX-Format".
+
+
+
+CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+===========================================
+
+1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work
+are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In
+particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no
+requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work.
+
+2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you
+received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered
+modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived
+Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause.
+
+3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a
+complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2
+above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that
+the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly
+as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work
+directly from the Work.
+
+4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without
+restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may
+also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including
+Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works
+distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to
+be updated versions of the Work.
+
+5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify
+your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work,
+and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on
+the Derived Work.
+
+6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
+distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met
+for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states
+in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only
+the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption
+to a component of the Work.
+
+ a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement
+ for a component of the Work when that component is used with the
+ Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work
+ identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that
+ Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work
+ clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version
+ of this component to the user when used interactively with that
+ Base Interpreter.
+
+ b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices
+ detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a
+ prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part
+ of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log
+ of the changes.
+
+ c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons,
+ including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version
+ of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to)
+ the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the
+ Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that
+ they do provide such support for the Derived Work.
+
+ d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work:
+
+ 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work;
+ if your distribution of a modified component is made by
+ offering access to copy the modified component from a
+ designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
+ the Work from the same or some similar place meets this
+ condition, even though third parties are not compelled to
+ copy the Work along with the modified component;
+
+ 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete, unmodified
+ copy of the Work.
+
+7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
+distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as
+the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled
+Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with
+regard to the Derived Work.
+
+8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do
+not apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it
+becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as
+it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above.
+
+9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative
+format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is
+then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or
+nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of
+applying that process.
+
+10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license
+ provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in
+ Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have
+ to honor the rest of the conditions in this license.
+
+ b. If a Derived Work is distributed under this license, that
+ Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of
+ itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the
+ restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work.
+
+11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to
+the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating
+such works with the Work by any means.
+
+12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent
+complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws.
+
+
+NO WARRANTY
+===========
+
+There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in
+writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without
+warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not
+limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
+a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance
+of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you
+assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.
+
+In no event unless agreed to in writing will the Copyright Holder, or
+any author named in the components of the Work, or any other party who
+may distribute and/or modify the Work as permitted above, be liable to
+you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or
+consequential damages arising out of any use of the Work or out of
+inability to use the Work (including, but not limited to, loss of
+data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as
+a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other
+programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other
+party has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
+
+
+MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK
+=======================
+
+The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder
+explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in
+the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder
+or simply that is `author-maintained'.
+
+The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer
+who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error
+reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail
+address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge
+or act upon these error reports.
+
+The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there
+is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current
+Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means
+of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other
+significant signs of active maintenance.
+
+You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with
+any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role.
+
+If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of
+the Work through the following steps:
+
+ 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and
+ the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of
+ an Internet or similar search.
+
+ 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work
+ is still maintained.
+
+ a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer
+ to update their communication data within one month.
+
+ b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active
+ maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce
+ within the pertinent community your intention to take over
+ maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be
+ done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.)
+
+ 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass
+ maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect
+ immediately upon announcement.
+
+ b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright
+ Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you,
+ then this takes effect immediately upon announcement.
+
+ 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above
+ and after three months your intention is challenged neither by
+ the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other
+ people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as
+ to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer.
+
+ 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes
+ reachable once more within three months of a change completed
+ under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must
+ become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided
+ they then update their communication data within one month.
+
+A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact
+that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license.
+
+If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should
+immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous
+statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also
+announce your new status to the same pertinent community as
+in 2b) above.
+
+
+WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE
+======================================================
+
+This section contains important instructions, examples, and
+recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their
+works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in
+this section.
+
+Choosing This License or Another License
+----------------------------------------
+
+If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution*
+conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then
+do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead,
+distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text
+of this license as a model for your own license, but your license
+should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that
+your work is distributed under the LPPL.
+
+The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains
+the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains,
+for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public
+License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is
+unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be
+relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any
+license are encouraged to read it.
+
+A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own
+personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for
+distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such
+modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by
+accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or
+it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified
+version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions
+of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse,
+cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your
+best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public
+one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work
+without altering any of its licensed components.
+
+How to Use This License
+-----------------------
+
+To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both
+an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work
+was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a
+statement that the distribution and/or modification of that
+component is constrained by the conditions in this license.
+
+Here is an example of such a notice and statement:
+
+ %% pig.dtx
+ %% Copyright 2003 M. Y. Name
+ %
+ % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+ % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+ % The latest version of this license is in
+ % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+ % version 2003/12/01 or later.
+ %
+ % This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+ %
+ % This Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name.
+ %
+ % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins
+ % and the derived file pig.sty.
+
+Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions
+given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring
+to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being
+generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter'
+referring to any "LaTeX-Format", and both `Copyright Holder' and
+`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'.
+
+To prevent the Maintenance section of LPPL from allowing someone else
+to become the Current Maintainer without your agreement, you could
+change "maintained" above into "author-maintained".
+
+
+Important Recommendations
+-------------------------
+
+ Defining What Constitutes the Work
+
+ The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the
+ files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a
+ way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work.
+ This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the
+ files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by
+ using a line such as:
+
+ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
+
+ in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be
+ impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you
+ to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be
+ entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise
+ the Work.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..67f7a3b184a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2bea531b802
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews01.tex
+
+% This is issue 1 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [type1fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1994}
+\publicationissue{1}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{\LaTeXe---the new \LaTeX{} release}
+
+The most important news is the release of \LaTeXe, the new version of
+the \LaTeX{} software. This version has better support for fonts,
+graphics and colour, and will be actively maintained by the \LaTeX3
+project team. Upgrades will be issued every six months, in June and
+December.
+
+\section{Why a new \LaTeX?}
+
+Over the years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This
+is, of course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had
+one unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at
+different sites. Thus, to process documents from various places, a
+site maintainer was forced to keep \LaTeX{} (with and without \NFSS),
+\SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX, and so on. In addition, when looking at a source
+file it was not always clear for which format the document was written.
+
+To put an end to this unsatisfactory
+situation a new release of \LaTeX{} was produced.
+It brings all such extensions back under a single format and thus
+prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of
+\LaTeX~2.09. The new release was available for several months as a
+test version, and the final release of 1~June officially
+replaces the old version.
+
+\section{Processing documents with \LaTeXe}
+
+Documents written for \LaTeX~2.09 will
+still be read by \LaTeXe. Any such document is run in
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}.
+
+Unfortunately, compatibility mode comes with a price: it can run
+up to 50\% slower than \LaTeX~2.09 did. If you want to run your document
+in the faster \emph{native mode}, you should try replacing the line:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentstyle[<options>,<packages>]{<class>}
+\end{verbatim}
+with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[<options>]{<class>}
+ \usepackage{latexsym,<packages>}
+\end{verbatim}
+Unfortunately, this will not always work, because some \LaTeX~2.09
+packages will only work in \LaTeXe{} compatibility mode. You should find
+out if there is a \LaTeXe{} version of the package available.
+
+\LaTeXe{} native mode also gives access to the new features of \LaTeXe,
+described in \emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors}.
+
+\section{New packages}
+
+\LaTeXe{} has much better support for graphics, colour, fonts, and
+multi-lingual typesetting. The following software should be available
+from the distributor who brought you \LaTeXe:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[babel] for typesetting in many languages.
+\item[color] for colour support.
+\item[graphics] for including images.
+\item[mfnfss] for using bitmap fonts.
+\item[psnfss] for using Type~1 fonts.
+\item[tools] other packages by the \LaTeX3 team.
+\end{citations}
+The packages come with full documentation, and are also described in
+\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Processing System} or
+\emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+More information about \LaTeXe{} is to be found in:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System]
+ Leslie Lamport, \AW, 2nd ed, 1994.
+\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion]
+ Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, \AW, 1994.
+\end{citations}
+The \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on the new features of
+\LaTeX:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents,
+ in the file \verb|usrguide.tex|.
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} classes and packages,
+ in the file \verb|clsguide.tex|.
+\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for
+ class and package writers,
+ in the file \verb|fntguide.tex|.
+\end{citations}
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..98bc7f18ea0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..91cf742de9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews02.tex
+
+% This is issue 2 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1994}
+\publicationissue{2}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~2}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{December 1994 release of \LaTeX}
+
+December 1994 sees the second release of \LaTeXe. We are on schedule
+to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and
+June.
+
+This release has seen quite a lot of activity, which is not too
+surprising as it's only been a year since the first test release of
+\LaTeXe. We don't expect so much activity in the next six months.
+
+Many of the changes are minor improvements and bug-fixes---see
+\emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors} (\verb|usrguide.tex|), \emph{\LaTeXe{}
+font selection} (\verb|fntguide.tex|) and our change log
+(\verb|changes.txt|) for more details.
+
+However, there are two important new packages available for \LaTeX:
+\texttt{inputenc} and AMS-\LaTeX.
+
+\section{Accented input}
+
+One of the problems with writing non-English documents in \LaTeX{} is
+the accent commands. Reading documents containing text like
+\verb|na\"\i ve| is frustrating, especially if your keyboard allows
+you to type \texttt{na\"\i ve}.
+
+In the past, \LaTeX{} has not supported input containing accented
+characters such as \texttt{\"\i}, because Windows, Macintosh and Unix
+all have different ways of dealing with accented input, called
+\emph{input encodings}.
+
+However, the \verb|inputenc| package allows you to specify which input
+encoding your document is written with, for example to use the ISO
+Latin-1 encoding, you type:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+At the moment, \verb|inputenc| supports the \verb|ascii| and
+\verb|latin1| input encodings, but more will be added with future
+releases.
+
+The \verb|inputenc| package is
+currently a test release. The user interface for the full release will
+be upwardly compatible with the test version.
+
+\section{AMS-\LaTeX{}}
+
+ AMS-\LaTeX{} is a set of miscellaneous extensions for \LaTeX{}
+ distributed by the American Mathematical Society. They provide superior
+ information structure and superior printed output for mathematical
+ documents.
+
+ There are far too many features of AMS-\LaTeX{} to list here.
+ AMS-\LaTeX{} is described in the accompanying documentation,
+ and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+ Version 1.2beta of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released for testing by intrepid
+ users in October 1994. The full release of AMS-\LaTeX{}~1.2 is expected
+ in early January 1995.
+
+ It will be divided into two bundles:
+ \begin{itemize}
+
+ \item the \verb|amsfonts| packages, which give access to
+ hundreds of new mathematical symbols, and new math fonts
+ such as blackboard bold and fraktur.
+
+ \item the \verb|amsmath| packages, which provide finer control over
+ mathematical typesetting, such as multi-line subscripts,
+ enhanced theorem and proof environments,
+ and improved displayed equations,
+
+ \end{itemize}
+ For compatibility with older documents, an \verb|amstex| package will be
+ provided.
+
+\section{\LaTeX{} on the internet}
+
+\LaTeX{} has its own home page on the World Wide Web, with the URL:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/latex/
+\end{verbatim}
+This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains
+pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the
+\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database.
+
+The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive
+\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN). This is a network of cooperating ftp
+sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/
+ ftp://ftp.shsu.edu/tex-archive/
+ ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/
+\end{verbatim}
+For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ac4faee1438
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4cecadbf161
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews03.tex
+
+% This is issue 3 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1995}
+\publicationissue{3}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~3}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{June 1995 release of \LaTeX}
+
+June 1995 sees the third release of \LaTeXe. We are on schedule
+to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and
+June.
+
+In the last \emph{\LaTeXNews}, we said ``we don't expect so much
+activity in the next six months,'' which has turned out not to be
+true!
+
+\section{Additional input encodings}
+
+In the last release of \LaTeX{} we distributed a test version of the
+\texttt{inputenc} package which allows the use of input characters
+other than just a--z and A--Z. The package has proved to be robust,
+so we are now distributing an expanded version.
+The new release comes with a number of input encodings:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{ascii} the standard encoding,
+\item \texttt{latin1} the ISO Western European alphabet,
+\item \texttt{latin2} the ISO Eastern European alphabet,
+\item \texttt{cp437} the IBM codepage 437,
+\item \texttt{cp850} the IBM codepage 850, and
+\item \texttt{applemac} the Apple Macintosh encoding.
+\end{itemize}
+These can be used by specifying an option to the \texttt{inputenc}
+package, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+The new input encodings are currently being tested, but we don't
+expect any major changes.
+
+\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller}
+
+In the past releases of \LaTeXe, the amount of memory \LaTeX{}
+requires has increased, but we are pleased to say that this trend has
+been reversed. We hope that future releases of \LaTeX{} will continue
+to get smaller.
+
+For example, on this document, the December 1994 release used 52,622
+words of memory, and the June 1995 release uses 51,216 words of
+memory, which is a 2.7\% reduction.
+
+We are currently experimenting with other ways of reducing the size of
+\LaTeX. For example, we are experimenting with an option to remove
+the \texttt{picture} and \texttt{tabbing} environments from the
+\LaTeX{} kernel, and to load them from a file the first time they are
+used. This should help \LaTeX{} to run on machines with limited
+memory. See \texttt{autoload.txt} for details.
+
+\section{Distribution and modification}
+
+One topic of discussion that has kept us busy is the distribution and
+modification conditions of \LaTeX. We are committed to keeping
+\LaTeX{} as free reliable software, and ensuring that (as far as
+possible) \LaTeX{} documents will produce the same results on all
+systems.
+
+The modification conditions are currently under discussion, and we
+would like to hear from anyone interested. Please read
+\texttt{modguide.tex} for more information.
+
+\section{AMS-\LaTeX\ full release}
+
+The AMS-\LaTeX\ packages were still in beta test in the December 1994
+release of \LaTeX, and the full release came out in January 1995.
+
+AMS-\LaTeX\ is described in the \emph{User's Guide}
+(\texttt{amsldoc.tex}) and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+\section{PostScript fonts}
+
+There is a new test release of the PSNFSS packages for accessing
+PostScript fonts in \LaTeXe. This includes an update to all of the
+fonts, to remove many of the underfull and overfull \verb|\hbox|
+warnings, and improve the setting of non-English languages.
+
+The new release of \LaTeX{} removes all of the `hidden' uses of
+Computer Modern mathematics. For example, the footnote markers used
+to use math mode, so always used Computer Modern digits rather than
+ones from the current text font. This has now been fixed.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+
+The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/|
+and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ec90da3780a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ea81f7d5320
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews04.tex
+
+% This is issue 4 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1995}
+\publicationissue{4}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~4}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+This issue accompanies the fourth release of \LaTeXe.
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller}
+
+The last release in June started a trend of \LaTeX\ becoming
+smaller, we are pleased to announce that this has continued with this
+release. In particular the experimental `autoload' version described in
+\texttt{autoload.txt} is much smaller as more parts of \LaTeX\ are
+autoloaded.
+
+\section{New `concurrent' docstrip}
+
+The time taken to `unpack' this release from the documented sources
+should be much reduced (roughly half the time, depending on
+installation conditions). This is due to an improved version of the
+docstrip program that has been contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski.
+This can write up to 16 files at once. The
+previous version could only write one file at a time which meant that
+it was very slow when producing many small files from the same source
+file as the source needed to be re-read for each file written.
+
+\section{New T1 encoded fonts}
+
+This year J\"org Knappen has completed a new release of the `Cork'
+(T1) encoded Computer Modern fonts: the dc fonts release 1.2.
+
+This release of the dc fonts fixes many bugs (including the missing
+\verb|?`| (?`) and \verb|!`| (!`) ligatures) and improves the fonts in
+many other ways. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade as soon as
+possible if currently you are using the old dc fonts, release 1.1 or
+earlier. The new fonts are available from the CTAN archives, in
+\texttt{tex-archive/fonts/dc}.
+
+The names of the font files are \emph{different}. This does not affect
+\LaTeX\ documents but \emph{does} affect the installation procedure as
+it assumes that you have the \emph{new} fonts, and will write suitable
+`fd' files for those fonts. If you have not yet upgraded your dc fonts
+then, after unpacking the distribution, you \emph{must}
+\verb|latex olddc.ins| to produce `fd' files for the old dc fonts.
+This must be done \emph{before} the format is made. Running the test
+document at \texttt{ltxcheck.tex} the end of the installation will
+inform you if the wrong set of `fd' files has been installed.
+
+Note that this change does not affect the standard `OT1' Computer
+Modern fonts that \LaTeX\ uses by default.
+
+\section{More robust commands}
+
+The commands \verb|\cite| and \verb|\sqrt| are now robust.
+
+Although most commands with optional arguments are fragile, as
+documented, such commands defined using the second optional argument
+of \verb|\newcommand| and its derivatives are now \emph{robust}.
+
+\section{New Interface to building `extension' classes}
+
+The mechanism provided by \verb|\DeclareOption|, \verb|\ProcessOptions|
+and \verb|\LoadClass| has proved to be a powerful and expressive means
+of defining one class in terms of another `base' class. However there
+have been some requests to simplify the declaration of the common case
+where you want the `base' class to be called with \emph{all} the
+options that were specified to the extension class. This is now
+provided by the new command \verb|\LoadClassWithOptions|. A similar
+command \verb|\RequirePackageWithOptions| is provided for package use.
+More details of this feature are provided in \texttt{clsguide.tex} and
+\texttt{ltclass.dtx}.
+
+\section{More Input Encodings}
+
+The experimental \texttt{inputenc} package allows a more natural style
+of input of accented and other characters.
+
+Three new input encodings are now supported.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{ansinew} the Windows ansi encoding,
+ as used in Microsoft Windows 3.x.
+\item \texttt{cp437de} a variant of \texttt{cp437}, which uses \ss\
+ rather than $\beta$ in the appropriate slot.
+\item \texttt{next} the encoding used on Next computers.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+1850 Union Street, \#1637, San Francisco, CA~94123, USA,
+Fax:~+1~415~982~8559,
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/|
+and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..92f4aeb1c06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e346484c11b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews05.tex
+
+% This is issue 5 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1996}
+\publicationissue{5}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~5}
+This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the fifth release of the
+new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe.
+
+\section{Extra possibilities for section headings}
+Most \LaTeX\ sectioning commands are defined using
+\verb|\@startsection|.
+For example, the \textsf{article} class defines:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand\section{\@startsection
+ {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+The last argument specifies the style in which the section heading is
+to be typeset.
+
+The new feature added at this release is that at the \emph{end} of
+this argument you may specify a command that \emph{takes an argument}.
+This command will be applied to the section number and heading.
+For example, one could use the \verb|\MakeUppercase| command to
+produce uppercase headings. A package or class file could contain:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection
+ {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\MakeUppercase}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+to produce section headings using uppercase medium weight text, rather
+than the bold text used by \textsf{article}. Note that, like the font
+choice, the uppercasing applies only to the actual heading (including
+any automatically generated section number), not to the text as it may
+appear in the running head or table of contents.
+
+\section{The `openany' option in the `book' class}
+The \textsf{openany} option allows chapter and similar openings to
+occur on left hand pages. Previously this option only affected
+\verb|\chapter| and \verb|\backmatter|. It now also affects
+\verb|\part|, \verb|\frontmatter| and \verb|\mainmatter|.
+
+\section{More font (output) encodings}
+The font encoding name \texttt{T3} has been allocated to the encoding
+used in the new 256-character \textsc{IPA} fonts (for the phonetic
+alphabet) produced by Rei Fukui. His package, \textsf{tipa},
+gives access to these fonts and should soon be available. (The
+encoding named \texttt{OT3} is the 128-character encoding used in the
+\textsc{IPA} fonts produced by Washington State University.)
+
+
+
+\section{More input encodings supported}
+The \textsf{inputenc} package now supports the IBM codepage~852 used
+in Eastern Europe, with the option~\texttt{[cp852]} contributed by
+Petr~Sojka.
+
+Also, the \textsf{inputenc} package now activates most `control codes'
+with \textsc{ascii} values below 32.
+Currently none of the encodings in the standard distribution makes use
+of these positions.
+
+\section{Fixes and improvements}
+The \LaTeX\ kernel has only had minor changes, apart from
+\verb|\@startsection| mentioned above.
+However, some small fixes have been incorporated removing the
+following problems:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ In tabular and array, previous versions of \LaTeX\ `lost' the
+ inter-column space from an `\texttt{l}'-column, when that column
+ was completely empty.
+
+\item
+ Previously, the use of the \verb|\nofiles| command could change
+ the \emph{vertical spacing} in a document.\\ A side effect of fixing
+ this is that when \verb|\nofiles| is used, \verb|\label| puts a
+ blank line in the log file.
+
+\item
+ \LaTeX~often loads fonts `on demand'. Previously, this could
+ happen inside the argument of an accent command and this would
+ cause the accent to appear in the wrong place.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Changes to the `tools' packages}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ The \textsf{longtable} package now uses a modified algorithm,
+ contributed by David Kastrup, to align the `chunks' of a table.
+ It is now unnecessary to edit the document to add
+ \verb|\setlongtables| before the final run of \LaTeX.
+ In certain cases of overlapping \verb|\multicolumn| entries, the new
+ algorithm will produce better column widths than the old (at the
+ price of extra passes through \LaTeX).
+
+\item
+ The \textsf{dcolumn} package now has the extra possibility of
+ specifying the number of digits both \emph{before} and after the
+ `decimal point'. This makes it easy to centre the column of numbers
+ under a wide heading.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{New copy of the \LaTeX\ bug database}
+\verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/bugs.html| will soon have links
+to a copy of the searchable \LaTeX\ bugs database at Mainz (Germany)
+as well as the original copy at Sussex (England).
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0396c273659
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..20b9c7d6b09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews06.tex
+
+% This is issue 6 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1996}
+\publicationissue{6}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~6}
+This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the sixth release of the
+new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe.
+
+\section{Mono-case file names}
+Previously \LaTeX\ has used some files with `mixed-case' file names
+such as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} and \texttt{T1enc.def}.
+
+These file names cause problems on some systems (in particular they
+are illegal on the ISO 9660 CDROM format) and so in this release
+all file names have been made lowercase (for example
+\texttt{t1cmr.fd} and \texttt{t1enc.def}).
+
+This change should \emph{not} affect any document. Within \LaTeX,
+encodings still have the usual uppercase names in uses such as
+\verb|\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}| and \verb|\fontencoding{T1}|.
+\LaTeX\ will automatically convert to the lowercase form while
+constructing the file name.
+\LaTeX\ will input the `fd' file under the old name if it fails to
+find the file with the new name, so existing collections of fd files
+should still work with this new release.
+
+The change \emph{does} affect the configuration files that may be used
+to make the \LaTeX\ format with initex. For example, the file
+\texttt{fonttext.ltx} previously specified \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|.
+It now has \verb|\input{t1cmr.fd}|.
+If you use a local file \texttt{fonttext.cfg}
+you will need to make similar changes, as \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|
+will not work as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} is no longer in the distribution.
+
+The files affected by this change all have names of the form
+\verb|*.fd| or \verb|*enc.def|.
+
+\section{Another input encoding}
+Thanks to work by S\o ren Sandmann, the \textsf{inputenc} package now
+supports the IBM codepage~865 used in Scandinavia.
+
+\section{Better user-defined math display environments}
+Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text
+that is numbered as an equation. A straightforward way to do this is
+as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newenvironment{texteqn}
+ {\begin{equation}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+ {\end{minipage}
+ \end{equation}}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed
+that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph
+because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first
+line after the environment.
+
+There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that
+you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newenvironment{texteqn}
+ {\begin{equation}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+ {\end{minipage}
+ \end{equation}
+ \ignorespacesafterend}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Docstrip improvements}
+The \textsf{docstrip} program that is used to unpack the \LaTeX\
+sources has undergone further development. The new version should be
+able to process all old `batchfiles' but it allows a simpler syntax in
+new `batchfiles' (no need to define \verb|\def\batchfile{|\ldots).
+
+It also allows `target' directories to be specified when writing
+files. This directory support is disabled by default unless activated
+in a local \texttt{docstrip.cfg} configuration file.
+See \texttt{docstrip.dtx} for details.
+
+\section{AMS \LaTeX\ update}
+Since the last \LaTeX\ release in June, the American Mathematical
+Society have re-issued the `AMS\LaTeX' classes and packages, fixing
+several reported problems.
+
+\section{Graphics package update}
+The \LaTeX\ color and graphics packages have been updated slightly,
+principally to support more dvi drivers, see the readme file in the
+\textsf{graphics} distribution.
+
+\section{EC Fonts released}
+The first release of the Extended Computer Modern fonts has just been
+made. (In January 1997.)
+
+This release of \LaTeX\ does \emph{not} default to these `ec' fonts
+as its T1 encoded fonts. By default it will
+use the `dc' fonts if the T1 encoding is requested.
+
+As noted in \texttt{install.txt} you may run \TeX\ on the install file
+\texttt{ec.ins} \emph{after} unpacking the base distribution but
+\emph{before} making the \LaTeX\ format. This will produce
+suitable `fd' files making \LaTeX\ (including, for the first time, the
+\textsf{slides} class) use the `ec' fonts as the default T1 encoded
+font set.
+
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ee5da998e97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e9f8cec1483
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews07.tex
+
+% This is issue 7 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1997}
+\publicationissue{7}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{T1 encoded Computer Modern fonts}
+As in the last release the base \LaTeX\ distribution contains
+three different sets of `fd' files for T1 encoded fonts.
+
+In this release the default installation uses \texttt{ec.ins}
+and so installs files suitable for the current `EC fonts'
+distribution. If you have still not updated to the EC fonts and
+are using the earlier test versions, known as DC then you should
+unpack \texttt{newdc.ins} (for DC release 1.2 or later) or
+\texttt{olddc.ins} (for the original releases of the DC fonts).
+This should be done after unpacking \texttt{unpack.ins} but
+before making the format by running ini\TeX{} on \texttt{latex.ltx}.
+There are further details in \texttt{install.txt}.
+
+
+\section{T1 encoded Concrete fonts}
+The Metafont sources for T1 encoded `Concrete' fonts have been
+removed from the \textsf{mfnss} distribution as they were based
+on the now obsolete DC fonts release 1.1. Similarly the
+\textsf{cmextra.ins} install file in the \textsf{base} distribution no
+longer generates fd files for the `Concrete' fonts.
+To use these fonts in either T1 or OT1 encoding it is
+recommended that you obtain Walter Schmidt's \textsf{ccfonts} package
+and fonts from CTAN \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/ccfonts}.
+
+
+\section{Further input encodings}
+Two more \textsf{inputenc} packages have been added: for latin5,
+thanks to H. Turgut Uyar; and for latin3, thanks to J\"org Knappen.
+
+
+\section{Normalising spacing after punctuation}
+The command \verb|\normalsfcodes| was introduced at the last patch
+release. This is normally given the correct definition automatically
+and so need not be explicitly set. It is used to correct a problem,
+reported by Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has
+always (in all known \TeX\ formats) been potentially incorrect if the
+page break happens while a local setting of the space codes (for
+instance by the command \verb|\frenchspacing|) is in effect. A common
+example of this happening in \LaTeX\ is in the \textsf{verbatim}
+environment.
+
+
+\section{Accessing Bold Math Symbols}
+The \textsf{tools} distribution contains a new package, \textsf{bm},
+which defines a command \verb|\bm| that allows individual bold symbols
+to be accessed within a math expression (in contrast to
+\verb|\boldmath| which makes whole math expressions default to bold
+fonts). It is more general than the existing \textsf{amsbsy} package;
+however, to ease the translation of documents between these two
+packages, \textsf{bm} makes \verb|\boldsymbol| an alias for
+\verb|\bm|.
+
+This package was previously made available from the `contrib' area of
+the CTAN archives, and as part of Y\&Y's \LaTeX\ support for the
+MathTime fonts.
+
+
+\section{Policy on standard classes}
+
+Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes
+are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely,
+that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and
+asking us to modify them.
+
+There are several reasons why we have decided not to make such changes
+to these files.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was
+ intended when these classes were designed.
+\item
+ It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes'
+ because many people will be relying on them.
+\end{itemize}
+
+We have therefore decided not to even consider making such
+modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision. This does
+not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the
+design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority
+than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{}
+cannot be changed.
+
+We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of
+packages that can be used to enhance these classes.
+
+
+\section{New addresses for TUG}
+For information about joining the \TeX{} Users Group, and about lots
+of other \LaTeX-related matters, please contact
+them at their new address:
+\begin{quote}\small
+ \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239,\\
+ Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\
+ Fax:~+1~209~561~4584\\
+ E-mail: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org}\\
+ URL: \texttt{http://www.tug.org/}
+\end{quote}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ff24fa69654
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2de84c6ef17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews08.tex
+
+% This is issue 8 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1997}
+\publicationissue{8}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{New supported font encodings}
+
+Two new font encodings are supported as options to the \textsf{fontenc}
+package:
+\begin{description}
+\item [OT4]
+This is a seven-bit encoding designed for Polish. The \LaTeX\ support
+was developed by Mariusz Olko.
+\item [TS1] This is the `Text Companion Encoding'; it contains symbols
+designed to be used in text, as opposed to mathematical formulas, and
+some accents designed for uppercase letters. It is currently
+supported by the `tc' fonts, which match the T1 encoded `ec' text
+fonts. A subset of the glyphs in this encoding is supported by
+virtual fonts distributed with the PostScript font metrics on the
+\textsc{ctan} archives. (This is the `8c' encoding in Karl Berry's
+fontname scheme.) The \textsf{textcomp} package provides access to
+this encoding but here is a warning to current users of that package:
+some of the internal names for the characters have changed.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\section{New input encodings}
+
+These additions to the \textsf{inputenc} package are
+\texttt{decmulti} (the DEC Multinational
+Character Set, contributed by M.~Y.~Chartoire)
+and \texttt{cp1250} (an MS-Windows encoding for Central and Eastern
+Europe, contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski). There is also a
+\texttt{cp1252} encoding that is identical to \texttt{ansinew}.
+
+
+\section{Tools}
+
+The \textsf{calc} package (used in many examples in \emph{The \LaTeX\
+Companion}) has been contributed to this distribution by Kresten Krab
+Thorup and Frank Jensen. This is essentially the same as the version
+that has been available from the \textsc{ctan} archives for some time,
+with one minor change: to use \LaTeX-style error messages. It enables
+the use of arithmetic expressions within arguments to standard
+\LaTeX{} commands where a length or a counter value is required. For
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \setcounter {page} { \value{page} * 2 + 1 }
+ \parbox { 3in - ( 2mm + \textwidth / 9 ) }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+There have also been some improvements to several other packages in
+this collection. In particular, \textsf{bm} now works correctly with
+constructions such as \verb|\bm{f'}| involving \texttt{'} or other
+characters which use \TeX's special ``\verb|\mathcode"8000|''
+feature. Also, \textsf{multicol} sets the length \verb|\columnwidth|
+to an appropriate value; this enables it to work with classes that
+support two-column setting, e.g.,~the AMS classes.
+
+
+\section{Graphics}
+
+The special \verb|oztex.def| driver file has been removed, and Oz\TeX\
+support has been merged with dvips, following advice from
+Andrew Trevorrow about Oz\TeX~3.x.
+
+The \textsf{keyval} package has had some internal improvements: to
+use \LaTeX\ format error messages; and to avoid `\verb|#| doubling'.
+This latter change means that the \verb|command| key for the
+\textsf{graphicx} version of \verb|\includegraphics| should now be used
+with one \verb|#| rather than two. For example, \verb|command = `gunzip #1|.
+Fortunately this key is almost never used in practice, so few if any
+documents should be affected by this change.
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX3 experimental programming conventions}
+
+As announced at the \TeX\ Users Group meeting (Summer 1997), a group of
+highly experimental packages will soon be released to allow experienced\\
+\TeX\ programmers to experiment with, and comment on, a proposed set
+of syntax conventions and basic data-types that might form
+the basis for programming large scale projects in \TeX.
+They will be located in\\
+this CTAN directory:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ CTAN:macros/latex/packages/expl3
+\end{verbatim}
+The documentation of this material is as follows: individual package
+files provide outline, draft documentation; there is an article that
+gives an overview of the syntax and related concepts; there is a
+\texttt{readme.txt} file containing a brief description of the
+collection.
+
+All aspects of these packages are liable, indeed likely, to change.
+They should not be used at this stage for anything
+that requires a stable system. However, we do encourage people to
+experiment with these packages, and to send comments on them to the
+\texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list.
+To subscribe to this list, mail to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ listserv@urz.uni-heidelberg.de
+\end{verbatim}
+the following one line message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ subscribe LATEX-L <<first-name>> <<second-name>>
+\end{verbatim}
+
+% Revert to this if gets too full.
+% See \texttt{modguide.tex} for
+% information on how to subscribe to \texttt{LaTeX-L}.
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fcd68e60678
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bf6099ca8e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews09.tex
+
+% This is issue 9 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}[1999/02/23]
+
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1998}
+\publicationissue{9}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+
+\section{New math font encodings}
+
+A joint working group of the \TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3
+Project is developing a new 8-bit math font encoding for \TeX{}.
+It is designed to overcome several limitations and implementation
+problems of the old math font encodings and to simplify switching
+between different sets of math fonts, much as the \LaTeX{} font
+selection interface has simplified switching between text fonts.
+
+Since the work on this project relies entirely on volunteer work, we
+cannot give a specific release date yet. However, a prototype
+implementation already exists. This contains several sets of virtual
+fonts, some \LaTeX{} packages and a kernel module; we hope to
+integrate it into the main \LaTeX{} distribution for the next
+release.
+
+Documents using only standard \LaTeX{} commands for math symbols
+should not be affected by switching to the new math font encodings
+However, documents, classes or packages making specific assumptions
+about the encoding of math symbol fonts are likely to break.
+
+Further information about the Math Font Group may be found on
+the World Wide Web at \texttt{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}.
+
+
+\section{A new math accent}
+
+A new math accent, \verb|\mathring|, has been added. This is a math mode
+version of the ring accent (\r{}) which is available in text
+mode with the command \verb|\r|.
+
+\section{Extended \cs{DeclareMathDelimiter}}
+
+The command \verb|\DeclareMathDelimiter| has been extended.
+Normally this command takes six arguments. Previously, when being used
+to declare a character (such as \texttt{[}) as a delimiter, a variant
+form was used with only five arguments. The argument specifying the
+default `math class' was omitted. Now the full six-argument form may be
+used in this case. The extra information is used to implicitly declare
+the character via \verb|\DeclareMathSymbol| for use when the symbol is
+not used with \verb|\left| or \verb|\right|.
+
+The old five-argument form is detected and will work as before.
+
+\newpage
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \texttt{multicol} package now supports the production of multiple
+columns without balancing the last page. To get this effect use the
+\texttt{multicols*} environment.
+
+The \texttt{layout} package was partly recoded by Hideo Umeki to
+display page layout effects in a better way.
+
+As suggested by Donald Arseneau, the \texttt{calc} package was extended
+to support the new commands \verb|\widthof{<text>}|,
+\verb|\heightof{<text>}|, and \verb|\depthof{<text>}| within a
+\texttt{calc}-expression. At the same time we modified a few kernel
+commands so that \texttt{calc}-expressions can now be used in various
+useful places such as the dimension arguments to the \texttt{tabular}
+environment and the \verb|\rule| command. For many other standard
+\LaTeX{} commands this was already possible.
+
+
+\section{Support for Cyrillic encodings}
+
+We are very pleased that, after a lengthy period of development, a set
+of fonts, encodings and support files for using \LaTeX\ with Cyrillic
+characters will soon be available.
+
+Test versions of the `LH' fonts for these Cyrillic encodings, based on
+the Computer Modern design, are available from CTAN archives in the
+directory \texttt{fonts/cyrillic/lh-test}. The \LaTeX\ support files
+(by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich) are also available from CTAN
+archives in\\
+ \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2}
+
+
+\section{Default docstrip header}
+
+Many \LaTeX\ users now distribute packages in documented source form
+using the \textsf{docstrip} system. Docstrip allows a header to be
+placed on generated package files, suitable for giving copyright
+information, or distribution conditions.
+
+We have changed the default version of this header so that it allows
+stripped files to be distributed in ready-to-run installations such as
+the \TeX{}Live CD\@. If you use the default header for distributing
+your files you should check that the new copyright text is acceptable
+to you. The file \texttt{docstrip.dtx} explains how to produce your own
+header if you wish to do so.
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bf879f9cdaf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bdaef0d9193
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews10.tex 12/01/1998
+
+% This is issue 10 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}[1999/02/23]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1998}
+\publicationissue{10}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+
+\section{Five years of \LaTeXe}
+
+Since this is the 10th edition of \LaTeX{} News, the (no longer) New
+Standard \LaTeX{} must have hit the streets almost this long ago. In
+fact it was only the beta-version that some people got just in time for
+Christmas~1993, and since then there has been a lot of tidying-up and
+smoothing of rough edges (not to mention a few bug fixes!).
+
+Maybe it is time for something more radically different to emerge and
+be hungrily adopted by the world; but don't panic, we shall be
+maintaining what you have now for a long time yet. Amongst the more
+polite things that have been written about our efforts, we found that this
+quote (somewhat censored to protect the guilty) well reflects some of
+our feelings about working on \LaTeX{} over the years: \textit{the mere
+existence of \LaTeXe{} is a great miracle}.
+
+
+ \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} distribution}
+
+ Since the (once) `new' standard \LaTeX{} has reached such a venerable
+ age, we are reviewing the way in which the system is presented to the
+ world.
+
+ An early intention is to define, given the wide variety of good
+ packages now available, what now constitutes a useful installation of
+ \LaTeX{}. We also hope that such a definition will help document
+ portability if it leads to a future in which a \LaTeX{} class
+ designer can reasonably assume that a known list of
+ facilities will be there for all users (so that each class
+ need not supply them).
+
+ As a first small step towards this definition, we shall replace the
+ \texttt{latex/packages} subdirectory on \ctan{}.
+ This directory was a curious mixture of the important, such as the
+ \LaTeX{} \texttt{tools}, that any self-respecting \LaTeX{}
+ installation ought to have, and the esoteric or experimental.
+
+ The esoterica from \texttt{packages} will be moved to
+ new locations, as follows:
+ \begin{quote}
+ \texttt{expl3} to \texttt{latex/exptl/project}\\
+ \texttt{mfnfss} to \texttt{latex/contrib/supported/mfnfss}
+ \end{quote}
+
+ The subdirectory that replaces \texttt{packages} will be called
+ \texttt{latex/required}; all the other sub-directories of
+ \texttt{packages} will be moved there.
+
+\vspace{17pt}
+\pagebreak
+
+ \section{\LaTeX\ Project on the Internet}
+A new \texttt{latex-project.org} domain has been registered.
+The web site is not yet fully functional but the old \LaTeX\ pages from
+\ctan\ are available at \texttt{http://www.latex-project.org/} and the
+\LaTeX\ bug reporting address has been changed to
+\texttt{latex-bugs@latex-project.org}.
+
+ \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} package licenses}
+
+Several people have requested an easy mechanism for the distribution
+of \LaTeX\ packages and other software ``under the same conditions as
+\LaTeX''. The old \texttt{legal.txt} file was unsuitable as a general
+licence as it referred to specific \LaTeX\ authors, and to specific
+files.
+
+Therefore, in this release \texttt{legal.txt} contains just the
+copyright notice and a reference to the new \emph{\LaTeX\ Project
+Public License} (LPPL) for the distribution and modification
+conditions. The \texttt{tools}, \texttt{graphics}, and \texttt{mfnfss}
+packages also now refer to this license in their distribution notices.
+
+ \section{Support for Cyrillic encodings}
+
+Basic Cyrillic support, as announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, is now
+finally an official part of \LaTeX{}. It includes support for the
+following standard Cyrillic font encodings (this list may
+grow):~\mbox{\texttt{T2A T2B T2C X2}}.
+
+It also includes various Cyrillic input encodings (20~in total,
+including commonly used variants and Mongolian Cyrillic
+encodings). This provides platform independent and
+sophisticated basic support for high-quality typesetting in various
+Cyrillic-based languages.
+
+For further information see the file \texttt{cyrguide.tex}.
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \texttt{varioref} package has been extended to support textual
+page references to a range of objects: e.g.,~if \texttt{eq-first}
+and \texttt{eq-last} are the label names for the first and last
+equation in a sequence, then you can now write
+\begin{verbatim}
+ see~\vrefrange{eq-first}{eq-last}
+\end{verbatim}
+This results in different text depending on whether both
+labels fall on the same page.
+
+Some additional user commands, as well as building-blocks for writing
+private extensions, are described in the accompanying documentation.
+
+
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c6adabf630c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f809795ce96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews11.tex 01/06/1999
+% This is issue 11 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Times
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1999}
+\publicationissue{11}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Back in sync}
+
+The last release of \LaTeX{} was delayed even longer than you have
+come to expect. We hope that it proved worth waiting for. It
+required a major integration of the code from several people and,
+independently, the introduction of the LPPL (see \LaTeX{} News~10) plus
+several related changes to our internal systems. It therefore seemed
+sensible to wait until everything was complete rather than do things
+in too much hurry.
+
+This seem to have been a successful strategy as
+the recent patch release was related to an isolated change that was
+done many months previously. If this release does not appear a lot
+closer to its nominal date then \ldots~well, you will not be reading
+this sentence!
+
+\section{Yearly release cycles}
+
+With the year 2000 rapidly approaching, we intend to switch to a
+release frequency of just one per year (with patches if necessary) for
+the core of \LaTeXe{}. These days the system is sufficiently stable
+that the original update policy is costing everybody more time than is
+now warranted.
+
+\section{LPPL update}
+
+Thanks to extensive and valuable input from Matt Swift
+(\email{swift@alum.mit.edu}) we now have a clearer and more detailed
+form of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence. This release contains
+both the original version (in \file{lppl-1-0.txt}) and the updated
+version, LPPL~1.1.
+
+\section{The future of Sli\TeX{}}
+
+We still get a very small trickle of reports about this part of the
+system (if you are no longer able to recall \LaTeX~2.09 then you will
+know it as the \class{slides} class). We have not classified them (in
+our minds at least) as bugs since we have always known that there are
+many problems with this class. It is clear to us that the only
+sensible action would be to redesign the system completely; in
+particular, to remove much of its complexity whose purpose is to
+support 10-year-old overlay technology. However, this would take a
+lot too much time and would be completely out of proportion to its
+current usage.
+
+We are therefore planning to make the \class{slides} class
+unsupported in the sense that any problem related to the use of
+invisible fonts is considered to be a feature (The \LaTeXe{} manual by
+Leslie Lamport doesn't even describe this part of the class any more).
+Of course, if it still has its enthusiasts then we are happy to cede
+it to their loving care (somewhat like a preserved steam locomotive,
+in some parts of the world).
+
+\section{Fontenc package peculiarities}
+
+The \verb=\usepackage= interface normally ensures that a package is
+loaded only once. The \pkg{fontenc} package has become an
+exception to this rule: it can be loaded several times using different
+options, e.g., allowing the user to add a font encoding in the
+preamble. This comes at a price for package writers: the low-level
+commands (see \file{ltclass.dtx}) used to check if a package was
+loaded, and with which options, do not work for the \pkg{fontenc}
+package.
+
+\section{New math font encodings}
+
+As we announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, a joint working group of the
+\TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3 Project has developed a new
+\mbox{8-bit} math font encoding for \TeX{}.
+The reason why this work is not yet released is because of other
+exciting developments in the world of math fonts and math characters.
+It is obviously wise to ensure that the encoding work is fully
+integrated with the available fonts.
+
+Those interested are reminded that further information about the Math
+Font Group may be found on the World Wide Web at:\\
+\url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}.
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \pkg{multicol} package has now got a small but useful extension
+which allows you to force a column break where this is really
+necessary. This is done with the command \verb=\columnbreak=, which
+can be used like \verb=\pagebreak= (e.g.,~within paragraphs) except
+that it cannot have an optional argument and thus it always forces a
+new column.
+
+\section{Coming soon}
+
+Major work on a new class file structure to support flexible
+designs is well under way; some of this work will be presented at the
+TUG'99 conference in Vancouver, Canada. With a bit of luck much of
+this work could be ready for integration into the next release---so
+watch this space!
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..25c454e2915
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6f9ecc20b24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews12.tex
+%
+% This is issue 12 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Times
+ {ltnews}[1999/12/01]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1999}
+\publicationissue{12}
+
+% Should go to .cls:
+\newcommand{\acro}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{LPPL update}
+
+Since the release of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence version~1.1,
+we have received a small number of queries which resulted in some
+minor changes to improve the wording or explain the intentions better.
+As a consequence this release now contains LPPL~1.2 in the file
+\file{lppl.txt} and the previous versions as \file{lppl-1-0.txt} and
+\file{lppl-1-1.txt}.
+
+\section{fixltx2e package}
+
+ This package provides fixes to \LaTeXe{} which are desirable but
+ cannot be integrated into the \LaTeXe{} kernel directly as they
+ would produce a version incompatible to earlier releases (either
+ in formatting or functionality).
+
+ By having these fixes in the form of a package, users can benefit
+ from them without the danger that their documents will fail, or
+ produce unexpected results, at other sites; this works because a
+ document will contain a clear indication (the \verb=\usepackage=
+ line, preferably with a required date) that at least some of these
+ fixes are required to format it.
+
+\section{Outcome of TUG '99 (Vancouver)}
+
+The slides from the \acro{TUG}'99 presentation we gave on \emph{a
+new interface for \LaTeX\ class designers} are available from the
+\LaTeX\ Project website; look for the file \verb|tug99.pdf| at:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.latex-project.org/talks/}
+\end{quote}
+
+Please note that this document was intended only to be informal
+``speaker's notes'' for our own use. We decided to make them available (the
+speaker's notes as well as the slides that were presented) because several
+people requested copies after the talk. However, they are \emph{not} in
+a polished copy-edited form and are not intended for publication.
+
+Prototype implementations of parts of this interface are now available from:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}
+\end{quote}
+
+We are continuing to add new material at this location so as to
+stimulate further discussion of the underlying concepts. As of
+December 1, 1999
+the following parts can be downloaded.
+\begin{description}
+
+ \item[xparse] Prototype implementation of the interface for declaring
+ document command syntax. See the \texttt{.dtx} files for
+ documentation.
+
+ \item[template] Prototype implementation of the template interface
+ (needs parts of \texttt{xparse}).
+
+ The file \texttt{template.dtx} in that directory has a large section
+ of documentation at the front describing the commands in the
+ interface and giving a `worked example' building up some templates
+ for caption formatting.
+
+ \item[xcontents] Interface description for table of contents data (no
+ code yet). Coding examples have been thoroughly discussed on the
+ \texttt{latex-l} list.
+
+ \item[xfootnote] Working examples for generating footnotes,
+ etc. Needs \texttt{xparse} and \texttt{template}.
+
+ \end{description}
+All examples are organised in subdirectories and additionally
+ available as \texttt{gzip} \texttt{tar} files.
+
+ Please remember
+that this material is intended only for experimentation and comments;
+thus any aspect of it, e.g., the user interface or the functionality,
+may change and, in fact, is very likely to change.
+For this reason it is explicitly forbidden to place this material on
+\acro{CD-ROM} distributions or public servers.
+
+These concepts, as well as their implementation, are under discussion
+on the list \texttt{LATEX-L}. You can join this list, which is
+intended solely for discussing ideas and concepts for future versions
+of \LaTeX, by sending mail to
+%\begin{quote}
+ \email{listserv@URZ.UNI-HEIDELBERG.DE}
+%\end{quote}
+containing the line
+ \begin{quote}
+ \texttt{SUBSCRIBE LATEX-L} \textit{Your Name}
+ \end{quote}
+
+This list is archived and, after subscription, you can retrieve older
+posts to it by sending mail to the above address, containing a command
+such as:
+\begin{quote}
+\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOGyymm}
+\end{quote}
+where \texttt{yy}=Year and \texttt{mm}=Month, e.g.
+\begin{quote}
+\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOG9910}
+\end{quote}
+for all messages sent in October 1999.
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..140ae9107be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f81ff6d1927
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews13.tex
+%
+% This is issue 13 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2000/07/21]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{2000}
+\publicationissue{13}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\raisefirstsection
+\section{Yearly release cycle}
+
+We announced in \textit{\LaTeX{} News~11} that we intended to switch
+to a 12-monthly release schedule. With the present (June~2000)
+release, this switch is being made: thus the next release of \LaTeX{}
+will be dated June~2001. We shall of course continue, as in the past,
+to release patches as needed to fix significant bugs.
+
+
+\section{PSNFSS: \small Quote of the Month}
+
+\begin{quote}
+ You should say in the \LaTeX{} News that Walter Schmidt has taken over
+ \PSNFSS{} from me. It gives me a certain pleasure to be able to draw a
+ line under that part of my life\ldots
+
+ \begin{latexonly}
+ \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+ \end{latexonly}
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ Sebastian Rahtz
+ \end{flushright}
+\end{quote}
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\noindent
+The \PSNFSS{} material, which supports the use\latex{\\}
+of common PostScript fonts with \LaTeX{}, has been thoroughly updated.
+Most noticeably, the \package{mathpple} package, which used to be
+distributed separately, is now part of the basic \PSNFSS{} bundle;
+this package provides mathematical typesetting with the Palatino
+typeface family. In addition, numerous bugs and flaws have been fixed
+and the distribution has been `cleaned up'. The file
+\file{changes.txt} contains a detailed list of these changes.
+\latex{\looseness=-1} %%!!!!! It worked!
+
+The documentation (in \file{psnfss2e.pdf}) has been completely
+rewritten to provide a comprehensive introduction to the use
+of PostScript fonts.
+
+Notice that the new \PSNFSS{} needs updated files for font metrics,
+virtual fonts and font definitions. If you received the new
+version~(8.1) as part of a complete \TeX{} system then these new font
+files should also have been installed. However, if you intend to
+install or update \PSNFSS{} yourself, please read the instructions in
+the file \file{00readme.txt} of the new \PSNFSS{} distribution.
+
+Support for commercial PostScript fonts, such as
+Lucida~Bright, has been removed from the basic distribution;
+it is now available from \ctan{}:
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\
+ contrib/supported/psnfssx}.
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/psnfssx}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+\section{New AMS-\LaTeX{}}
+
+Version 2.0 of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released on December 1, 1999. It can
+be obtained via \url{ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/} or
+\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html}, as well from \ctan{}:
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\
+ required/amslatex}.
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amslatex}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+This release consists chiefly of bug fixes and consolidation of the
+existing features. The division of AMS-\LaTeX{} into two main parts
+(the math packages;\latex{\\}
+the AMS document classes) has been made more pronounced.
+The files \file{diffs-m.txt}, \file{diffs-c.txt},
+\file{amsmath.faq}, and \file{amsclass.faq} describe the\latex{\\}
+changes and address some common questions.
+
+The primary documentation files remain \file{amsldoc.tex}, for the
+\package{amsmath} package, and \file{instr-l.tex}, for the AMS
+document classes.\latex{\\}
+The documentation for the \package{amsthm} package,\latex{\\}
+however, has been moved from \file{amsldoc.tex}\latex{\\}
+to a separate document \file{amsthdoc.tex}.
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \vfill
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\section{New input encoding \package{latin4}}
+
+The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Hana Skoumalov\'a,
+been extended to cover the \package{latin4} input encoding; this
+covers Baltic and Scandinavian languages as well as Greenland
+Inuit and Lappish.
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \vfill
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\section{New experimental code}
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a
+`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results
+thereof. Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in
+Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of
+handling vertical mode material between paragraphs. In combination
+these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote
+ {The stress here is on automated!}
+page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\}
+for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}!
+
+A paper describing the new output routine is
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf%
+ \hspace*{-16pt}}\\
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+All code examples and documentation are available
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/%
+ \latex{\hspace*{-5pt}}}.\\[3pt]
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}.
+
+\end{htmlonly}
+This directory has been extended to contain
+\begin{description}
+ \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for manipulating vertical material in galleys.
+ \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package.
+ \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template}
+ package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments.
+ \item[xoutput] A prototype implementation of the new output routine
+ as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper. Expected
+ availability: at or shortly after\latex{\\}
+ the TUG\,2000 conference.
+\end{description}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7853707e18d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cb37ba193b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews14.tex
+%
+% This is issue 14 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2001/07/12]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{2001}
+\publicationissue{14}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\raisefirstsection
+\section{Future releases}
+
+We are currently exploring how to best support the very large
+community of individuals, organisations and enterprises that depend on
+the robustness and availability of the current standard \LaTeX{}
+distribution. The results of this may lead to some changes in the
+regular release schedule and the handling of bug reports during the
+next year.
+
+\section{New release of \textsf{Babel} (required)}
+
+Earlier this year a new release of \textsf{Babel} (3.7) became
+available. You can read about its new features in
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \file{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/}\\
+ \hspace*{4em}\file{latex/required/babel/announce.txt}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ \url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/announce.txt}
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+One of the bugs that got fixed in this release deals with how labels
+are handled by \LaTeX{}. Because this part of the kernel is modified
+by \textsf{babel}, the relevant changes need to be coordinated.
+Therefore to use \textsf{Babel} with this release of \LaTeX{} you will
+need to update your version of \textsf{babel} to at least 3.7.
+
+\section{New input encoding \package{latin9}}
+
+The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Karsten Tinnefeld, been
+extended to cover the \package{latin9} input encoding. The
+ISO-Latin~9 encoding is a useful modern replacement for ISO-Latin~1
+that contains a few characters needed for French and Finnish. Of wider
+interest, it also contains the euro currency sign; this could be the
+killer argument for many 8-bit texts to use Latin-9 in the future.
+
+According to a Linux manpage, ISO~Latin-9 supports Albanian, Basque,
+Breton, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian, Faroese, Finnish,
+French, Frisian, Galician, German, Greenlandic, Icelandic, Irish
+Gaelic, Italian, Latin, Luxemburgish, Norwegian, Portuguese,
+Rhaeto-Romanic, Scottish Gaelic, Spanish and Swedish.\\
+The characters added in \package{latin9} are (in \LaTeX{} notation):\\
+\begin{small}
+\verb| \texteuro \v S \v s \v Z \v z \OE \oe \" Y |
+\end{small}\\
+They displace the following characters from \package{latin1}:\\
+\begin{small}
+\verb| \textcurrency \textbrokenbar \"{} \'{} \c{} |\\
+\verb| \textonequarter \textonehalf \textthreequarters |
+\end{small}
+
+
+\section{New tools}
+
+The new package \package{trace} provides many commands to control
+\LaTeX{}'s tracing and debugging output, including the excellent new
+information available with \eTeX{} such as the extremely useful
+tracing of local assignments. You will find it in the tools
+distribution.
+
+It offers the command \verb|\traceon|, which is similar to
+\verb|\tracingall| but suppresses uninteresting stuff such as font
+loading by NFSS (which can go on for pages if you are unlucky). It
+also offers \verb|\traceoff| to \ldots\ guess what! Full details are
+in the documented source file, \file{trace.dtx}.
+
+In the base \package{ifthen} package we have added
+the uppercase synonyms \verb|\NOT| \verb|\AND| and \verb|\OR|.
+
+\section{New experimental code}
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a
+`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results
+thereof. Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in
+Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of
+handling vertical mode material between paragraphs. In combination
+these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote
+ {The stress here is on automated!}
+page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\}
+for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}!
+
+More recently we have added material to handle the complex front
+matter requirements of journal articles; this was presented at
+Gutenberg\,2001 in Metz.
+
+A paper describing the new output routine is
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+\begin{small}
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}\\
+\end{small}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+All code examples and documentation are available
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+\begin{small}
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental}
+\end{small}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+This directory has been extended to contain the following.
+\begin{description}
+ \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for manipulating vertical material in galleys.
+ \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package).
+ \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template}
+ package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments.
+ \item[xor] A prototype implementation of the new output routine
+ as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper.
+ \item[xfrontm] A prototype version of
+ the new font matter interface.
+\end{description}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5f0d72bd3ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2f2a9f2cb09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews15.tex
+%
+% This is issue 15 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2003}
+\publicationissue{15}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+%\raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Anniversary release}
+
+Yes, it's now 10~years since the first release in this series and, for
+Knuthists, this release also contains \textit{Issue 16}\,!
+
+Meanwhile this \textit{Issue~15} describes the major new features in
+the current release whilst \textit{Issue~16} looks\newline
+a little way into the future of \LaTeX{}.
+
+
+\section{LPPL -- new version}
+
+Most importantly, there is now a new version, 1.3, of the \LaTeX{}
+Project Public Licence. Many of you will\newline
+be thrilled to know that, following the exchange of over 1600 e-mail
+messages dissecting various aspects of its philosophy such as `how
+many angels can appear in the name of a file before it becomes
+non-free', this version\newline
+is now officially a DFSG (Debian Free Software Guidelines) approved license.
+The discussions start at
+\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2002/debian-legal-200207/threads.html}
+with high traffic throughout August to October~2002 and further
+heated discussions starting in April~2003 and concluding
+around June at
+\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2003/debian-legal-200306/msg00206.html}.
+
+The important features of the new version are useful clarifications in
+the wording, and revised procedures\newline
+for making a change to the Current Maintainer of a package. Special
+thanks to all those people from\newline Debian Legal who worked
+constructively with us\newline
+on this onerous task, especially but not exclusively\newline
+Jeff Licquia and Branden Robinson.
+
+
+\section{Small updates to varioref}
+
+The English has been corrected in \verb|\reftextbefore|
+(an incompatible change). There are other extensions
+such as \verb|\labelformat|, \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| and \verb|\vpagerefnum|.
+Some Dutch text has also been changed and two\newline
+new options added: \package{slovak} and \package{slovene}.
+
+
+\section{New and more robust commands}
+
+Many of the math mode commands for compound symbols have been made
+robust and a new robust command has been added: \verb|\nobreakdashes|.
+This last is a low-level command, borrowed from the \package{amsmath}
+package, for use only before hyphens or dashes. It prevents the line
+break that is normally allowed\newline
+after the following sequence of dashes.
+
+
+\section{Fixing font sizes}
+
+The new \package{fix-cm} package, by Walter Schmidt, changes the CM font
+definition (\texttt{.fd}) files so that similar design sizes are used
+in both the \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1} encodings.
+
+
+\section{Font encodings}
+
+A number of options have been added to the \package{textcomp} package,
+enabling only available glyphs to be used.
+Also, the `NFSS font families' are now divided into five different groups
+according to the subset of glyphs each provides from the full
+collection of symbols in the TS1 encoding.
+Given sufficient information about a font family
+\package{textcomp} will use this in order to limit the\newline
+typesetting to those glyphs that are available.
+
+Use of this mechanism has also enhanced \verb|\oldstylenums|
+to use the current font if possible.
+
+
+\section{Displaying font tables}
+
+With the \package{nfssfont} package you can now
+specify the font to display by giving its `NFSS classification',
+rather than needing to know its external font file's name.
+It is also now possible to generate large collections of font
+tables in batch mode by providing a suitable input file.
+
+
+\section{New input encodings}
+
+The \package{inputenc} package has been extended as follows:
+\package{macce} input encoding
+(Apple Central European),
+thanks to Radek Tryc and Marcin Wolinski; \package{cp1257}\newline
+for Baltic languages; \package{latin10},
+thanks to Ionel Ciob\^{i}c\u{a}.\newline
+The euro symbol has by
+now been added to several encodings:
+\package{ansinew}, \package{cp1250}
+and \package{cp1252} (which also\newline
+has another addition), whilst \package{cp858}
+adds it to \package{cp850}.
+
+
+\section{Unicode input}
+
+Partial, experimental support for text files that use the Unicode
+encoding form UTF-8 is now provided by the option \package{utf8} for
+the \package{inputenc} package.
+
+The only Unicode text file characters supported by the current version
+are those based on the most common inputs for glyphs from the small
+collection\newline
+of standard \LaTeX{} Latin encodings.
+
+
+\section{And finally \ldots\ pict2e}
+
+The old, non-functional version of this package has been removed
+ as there is now a fully working version from Hubert G\"a{\ss}lein
+ and Rolf Niepraschk. It is described
+ in \textit{The \LaTeX{} Manual}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5213f4f29c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6fcf0564f64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews16.tex
+%
+% This is issue 16 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2003}
+\publicationissue{16}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+%\raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Anniversary news}
+
+This anniversary \textit{Issue~16} takes a brief look into the future work of
+the \LaTeX3 Project Team, both short and and longer range. Please let
+us know if you want %\newline
+to get involved with us in any of this work (see below).
+
+An overview of the 10th Anniversary Release, dated 2003/12/01, is
+can be found in \textit{Issue~15}.
+
+
+\section{TLC2: The \LaTeX{} Companion -- 2nd edition!}
+
+Since you are reading this newsletter, there is a good chance that
+you, or a friend, has already bought this encyclopedic volume: the
+incomparable Second\newline
+Edition of this work that is every \LaTeX{}ie's\newline
+ultimate lucky charm.
+
+If by some chance you have not yet purchased your own copy then get
+into training, get shopping, and get flexing your muscles (both
+physical---it's $1100+$~pages,\newline
+and intellectual) by using it to discover
+masses of invaluable `insider information' about:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the latest release of Standard \LaTeX{};
+\item over~200~extension packages;
+\item plus related software and systems.
+\end{itemize}
+For more information on this all new (??\ldots OK,\newline
+not \emph{all}, but over 90\%!!),
+all accurate (we hope!)\newline
+10th~Anniversary Edition, check out\newline
+ \mbox{\url{http://www.awprofessional.com/titles/0201362996}}.
+
+
+\section{Future maintenance}
+
+We are currently exploring how best to support the very large and
+rapidly growing community of individuals, organisations and
+enterprises that depend on the robustness and availability of the
+current standard \LaTeX{} distribution. Although we remain firmly\newline
+resolved not to make changes in the base distribution (the kernel) of
+Standard \LaTeX{}, there is still much that needs doing to maintain
+its reliability and utility and to keep up the necessary level of
+communication with users and supporters. Also, as with all advanced
+software systems, bugs are still turning up occasionally so %\newline
+some fixes are still essential.
+
+One major impediment to providing adequate service levels in this area
+is, of course, the difficulties inherent in obtaining the time and
+commitment of skilled minds---hence the appeal above to anyone
+interested %\newline
+in getting involved.
+
+
+\section{LPPL certification}
+
+There are still some outstanding diplomatic tasks around the
+\LaTeX{} Project Public Licence: these include
+e.g.,~getting it `OSF certified' and ensuring that it gains
+more support and wider use, even in the FSF world\newline
+where it has long been tolerated.
+
+
+\section{Use of \eTeX/pdf\TeX}
+
+We expect that within the next two years, releases of \LaTeX{} will
+change modestly in order to run best under an extended \TeX{} engine
+that contains the \eTeX{} primitives, e.g., \eTeX{} or pdf\TeX{}.
+The details of this possible upgrade need further work so we are not
+making a definite announcement yet.
+
+Although the current release does not \emph{require} \eTeX{} features,
+we certainly recommend using an extended \TeX{}, especially if you
+need to debug macros.
+
+
+\section{End of `autoload' support}
+
+As computer systems generally grow in capacity, requirements change
+and so we believe that the \package{autoload} variant of \LaTeX{} is
+no longer required. Thus, although the code remains it is no longer
+supported. We hope this does not cause any problems.
+
+
+\section{New models, new code}
+
+In the period 1999--2001 we published many results of our work over
+the previous decade on the development of new concepts and models
+for automated typesetting based on \TeX{} as the underlying platform.
+These can be found at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/}
+and
+\mbox{\url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}}.
+
+Since then a very large proportion of the The Team's efforts have been
+diverted to provide the core author team for TLC2, which provides
+over 1000 pages of carefully researched and tested documentation of
+many aspects of the vast world of \LaTeX{} related software that
+was developed over that same time period and that continues
+to grow and improve prodigiously.
+
+Completion of that task \ldots\ until TLC3!! \ldots\ presents the
+possibility of getting back to this more exciting development work,
+or even to more radical work on non-\TeX{}-based models and
+implementations.
+
+Of course, any such ideas are predicated on our ability to organise
+(with you, we hope) an efficient\newline
+but responsive maintenance and support system\newline
+for Standard \LaTeX{}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltpictur.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltpictur.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..16023ba3ae7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltpictur.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..58d698cbd36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6a7eb8c2f23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,474 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+
+% Commands and environments:
+
+\newcommand{\eg}{e.g.~}
+\newcommand{\ie}{i.e.~}
+
+
+\newenvironment{citations}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{\normalfont\itshape ##1}%
+ }%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}
+
+% Some logos:
+
+\newcommand{\NFSS}{NFSS}
+
+\newcommand{\LaTeXNews}{\LaTeX~News}
+
+\newcommand{\AW}{Addison Wesley}
+
+\newcommand{\SGML}{{\sc SGML}}
+\newcommand{\DSSSL}{{\sc DSSSL}}
+\newcommand{\HTML}{{\sc HTML}}
+\newcommand{\XML}{{\sc XML}}
+\newcommand{\PDF}{{\sc PDF}}
+
+\newcommand{\PS}{{\sc Post\-Script}}
+
+\newcommand{\AmSTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal
+ M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\TeX}
+\newcommand{\AmSLaTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal
+ M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\LaTeX}
+\newcommand{\MF}{{\sc Meta\-font}}
+
+% sections
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-2}
+
+% Front matter:
+
+\title{\Large The \LaTeX3 Project}
+
+\author{\copyright 1995--1999 \
+Frank Mittelbach and
+Chris Rowley}
+
+\date{12 January 1999}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+ This article describes the motivation, achievements and future of
+ the \LaTeX3 Project, which was established to produce a new version
+ of \LaTeX{}, the widely-used and highly-acclaimed document
+ preparation system. It also describes how you can help us to
+ achieve our aims.\\[2pt]
+ \textbf{For Archive maintainers, Authors, Publishers and
+ Distributors:}\\
+ The project team request that, whenever possible, you include this
+ article in any of the following:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Books about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}.
+ \item Instructions for authors on using \LaTeX{}.
+ \item The printed documentation of CD-ROM collections that contain
+ \LaTeX.
+ \item On-line collections that include a significant proportion of
+ documents encoded in \LaTeX.
+\end{itemize}
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Outline}
+
+The purposes of the \LaTeX3 system can be summarized thus: it will
+greatly increase the range of documents which can be processed; and it
+will provide a flexible interface for typographic designers to easily
+specify the formatting of a class of documents.
+
+The \LaTeX3 Project Team is a small group of volunteers whose aim is
+to produce this major new document processing system based on the
+principles pioneered by Leslie Lamport in the current \LaTeX.
+
+The major visible work of the team before 1997 was the development of
+the current \emph{standard} version of \LaTeX{}. This was first
+released in 1994 and has since then been actively maintained and
+enhanced by extensions to that core system. They will continue to
+develop and maintain this system, releasing updated versions every six
+months and recording these activities in the \LaTeX{} bugs database
+(see below).
+
+Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and
+maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large
+sums of money. The \LaTeX3 Project Fund has therefore been set up to
+channel money into this work. We know that some users are
+aware of this fund as they have already contributed to it---many
+thanks to all of them! If you want to know more about how you can
+help the project, see Page \pageref{fund}---and thanks in advance for
+your generosity in the future.
+
+
+\section{Background}
+
+With \TeX{}, Knuth designed a formatting system that is able to
+produce a large range of documents typeset to extremely high quality
+standards. For various reasons (\eg quality, portability, stability
+and availability) \TeX{} spread very rapidly and can nowadays be best
+described as a world-wide de facto standard for high quality
+typesetting. Its use is particularly common in specialized areas, such
+as technical documents of various kinds, and for multi-lingual
+requirements.
+
+The \TeX{} system is fully programmable. This allows the development
+of high-level user interfaces whose input is processed by \TeX{}'s
+interpreter to produce low-level typesetting instructions; these are
+input to \TeX{}'s typesetting engine which outputs the format of each
+page in a device-independent page-description language. The \LaTeX{}
+system is such an interface; it was designed to support the needs of
+long documents such as textbooks and manuals. It separates content and
+form as much as possible by providing the user with a generic (\ie
+logical rather than visual) mark-up interface; this is combined with
+style sheets which specify the formatting.
+
+Recent years have shown that the concepts and approach of \LaTeX{} are
+now widely accepted. Indeed, \LaTeX{} has become the standard method
+of communicating and publishing documents in many academic
+disciplines. This has led to many publishers accepting \LaTeX{}
+source for articles and books; and the American Mathematical Society
+now provides a \LaTeX{} package making the features of \AmSTeX{}
+available to all users of \LaTeX{}. Its use has also spread into many
+other commercial and industrial environments, where the technical
+qualities of \TeX{} together with the concepts of \LaTeX{} are
+considered a powerful combination of great importance to such areas as
+corporate documentation and publishing. This has also extended to
+on-line publishing using, for example, \PDF{} output incorporating
+hypertext and other active areas.
+
+With the spreading use of \SGML{}-compliant systems (\eg Web-based
+publishing using \HTML{} or \XML{}) \TeX{} again is a common choice as
+the formatting engine for high quality typeset output: a widely used
+such system is {\em The Publisher\/} from ArborText, whilst a more
+recent development is the object-oriented document editor Grif. The
+latter is used for document processing in a wide range of industrial
+applications; it has also been adopted by the Euromath consortium as
+the basis of their mathematician's workbench, one of the most advanced
+of the emerging project-oriented user environments. Typeset output
+from \SGML{}-coded documents in these systems is obtained by
+translation into \LaTeX{}, which will therefore soon also be a natural
+choice for the output of \DSSSL-compliant systems.
+
+Because a typical \SGML{} Document Type Definition (DTD) uses concepts
+similar to those of \LaTeX{}, the formatting is often implemented by
+simply mapping document elements to \LaTeX{} constructs rather than
+directly to `raw \TeX'.
+This enables the
+sophisticated analytical techniques built into the \LaTeX{}
+software to be exploited; and it avoids the need to program in \TeX{}.
+
+\section{Motivation}
+
+This increase in the range of applications of \LaTeX{} has highlighted
+certain limitations of the current system, both for authors of
+documents and for designers of formatting styles.
+
+In addition to the need to extend the variety of classes of document
+which can be processed by \LaTeX{}, substantial enhancements are
+necessary in, at least, the following areas:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ the command syntax (attributes, short references, etc);
+ \item
+ the layout specification interface (style design);
+ \item
+ the level of robustness (error recovery, omitted tags);
+ \item
+ the extendibility (package interface);
+ \item
+ the layout specification of tabular material;
+ \item
+ the specification and inclusion of graphical material;
+ \item
+ the positioning of floating material, and other aspects of page
+ layout;
+ \item
+ the requirements of hypertext systems.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Further analysis of these deficiencies has shown that some of the
+ problems are to be found in \LaTeX{}'s internal concepts and design.
+ This project to produce a new version therefore involves thorough
+ research into the challenges posed by new applications and by the use
+ of \LaTeX{} as a formatter for a wide range of documents, \eg \SGML{}
+ documents; on-line \PDF{} documents with hypertext links.
+
+ This will result in a major re-implementation of large parts of the
+ system. Some of the results of such rethinking of the fundamentals
+ are already available in Standard \LaTeX{}, notably in the following
+ areas:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Font declaration and selection;
+\item Font and glyph handling within mathematical formulas;
+\item Handling multiple font glyph encodings within a document;
+\item Allowing multiple input character encodings within a document;
+\item A uniform interface for graphics inclusion;
+\item Support for coloured text;
+\item Building and interfacing new classes and extension packages.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\section{Description}
+
+The strengths of the present version of \LaTeX{} are
+as follows:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item excellent standard of typesetting for text, technical
+formulas\\
+and tabular material;
+ \item separation of generic mark-up from visual formatting;
+ \item ease of use for authors;
+ \item portability of documents over a wide range of platforms;
+ \item adaptability to many languages;
+ \item widespread and free availability;
+ \item reliable support and maintenance by the \LaTeX3 project team.
+ \end{itemize}
+ These will be preserved and in many cases greatly enhanced by the new
+ version which is being developed to fulfill the following requirements.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ It will provide a syntax that allows highly automated translation
+ from popular \SGML{} DTDs into \LaTeX{} document classes (these
+ will be provided as standard with the new version).
+
+ The syntax of the new \LaTeX{} user-interface will, for example,
+ support the \SGML{} concepts of `entity', `attribute' and `short
+ reference' in such a way that these can be directly linked to the
+ corresponding \SGML{} features.
+
+ \item
+ It will support hypertext links and other features required for
+ on-line structured documents using, for example, \HTML{} and \XML{}.
+
+\item
+ It will provide a straightforward style-designer interface to support
+ both the specification of a wide variety of typographic requirements
+ and the linking of entities in the generic mark-up of a document to
+ the desired formatting. These two parts of the design process will
+ be clearly separated so that it is possible to specify different
+ layouts for the same DTD.
+
+ The language and syntax of this interface will be as natural as
+ possible for a typographic designer. As a result, this language
+ could easily be interfaced to a visually-oriented, menu-driven
+ specification system.
+
+ This interface will also support \DSSSL{} specifications and
+ style-sheet concepts such as those used with \HTML{} and \XML{}.
+
+ \item
+ It will provide an enhanced user-interface that allows expression of
+ the typesetting requirements from a large range of subject areas. Some
+ examples are listed here.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The requirements of technical documentation (\eg offset layout,\\
+ change bars, etc).
+ \item The requirements of academic publishing in the humanities\\
+ (critical text editions, etc).
+ \item The requirements of structural formulas in chemistry.
+ \item Advanced use of the mathematical-typesetting features of \TeX{}.
+ \item The integration of graphical features, such as shading,
+ within text.
+ \item the integration of hypertext and other links in on-line
+ documents using systems such as \HTML{}, \XML{} and \PDF{}.
+
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Special care will be taken to ensure that this interface is
+ extensible: this will be achieved by use of modular designs.
+
+
+ \item
+ It will provide a more robust author-interface. For example,
+ artificial restrictions on the nesting of commands will be removed.
+ Error handling will be improved by adding
+ a more effective, interactive help system.
+
+ \item
+ It will provide access to arbitrary fonts from any family (such as
+ the \PS{} and TrueType fonts) including a wide range of fonts for
+ multi-lingual documents and the specialist glyphs required by
+ documents in various technical and academic areas.
+
+ \item
+ The new interfaces will be documented in detail and the
+ system will provide extensive catalogues of examples, carefully
+ designed to make the learning time for new users (both designers and
+ authors) as short as possible.
+
+ \item
+ The code itself will be thoroughly documented and it will be
+ designed on modular principles. Thus the system will be easy to
+ maintain and to enhance.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The resulting new \LaTeX{} will, like the present version, be usable
+with any standard \TeX{} system (or whatever replaces it) and so will
+be freely available on a wide range of platforms.
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX{} documentation}
+
+\begingroup
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+
+A complete description of Standard \LaTeX{} can be found in:
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System]
+ Leslie Lamport,\\ \AW, 2nd ed, 1994.
+\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion]
+ Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin,\\ \AW, 1994.
+\end{citations}
+
+A recent addition to the publications closely associated with the
+project is:
+\begin{citations}
+\item[The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion]
+ Goossens, Mittelbach and Rahtz,\\ \AW, 1997.
+\end{citations}
+
+This \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on several aspects
+of of the system. The newer features of the system are described in
+the following documents:
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents,
+ in the file \texttt{usrguide.tex};
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers]
+ describes how to produce \LaTeX{} classes and packages,
+ in the file \texttt{clsguide.tex};
+\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for
+ class and package writers,
+ in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}.
+\end{citations}
+
+For further contacts and sources of information on \TeX{} and
+\LaTeX{}, see the addresses on Page~\pageref{contacts}.
+
+\endgroup
+\pagebreak
+
+
+\section{The \LaTeX3 Project Fund}
+\label{fund}
+
+Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and
+maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large
+sums of money. There are many necessities that need substantial
+financing: examples are new or enhanced computing equipment and travel
+to team meetings (the volunteers come from many different countries,
+so getting together occasionally is a non-trivial exercise).
+
+This is why we are appealing to you for contributions to the fund.
+Any sum will be much appreciated; the amount need not be large as
+small contributions add up to very useful amounts. Contributions of
+suitable equipment and software will also be of great value. This
+appeal is both to you as an individual author and to you as a member
+of a group or as an employee: please encourage your department or your
+employer to contribute towards sustaining our work.
+
+We should like to see funded projects that make considerable use of
+\LaTeX{} (\eg conferences and research teams who use it to publish
+their work, and electronic research archives using it) include
+contributions to this fund in their budgets. %% e-print systems
+
+We are also asking commercial organisations to assess the benefits
+they gain from using, or distributing, a well-supported \LaTeX{} and
+to make appropriate contributions to the fund in order that we can
+continue to maintain and improve the product. If you work for, or do
+business with, such an organisation, please bring to the attention of
+the relevant people the existence and needs of the project.
+
+In particular, we ask that all the large number of organisations and
+businesses that distribute \LaTeX{}, within other software or as part
+of a CD-ROM collection, should consider pricing all products containing
+\LaTeX{} at a level that enables them to make regular donations to the
+fund from the profit on these items. We also ask all authors and
+publishers of books about \LaTeX{} to consider donating part of the
+royalties to the fund.
+
+Contributions should be sent to one of the following addresses:
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+ \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 2311, Portland, OR~97208-2311 USA\\
+ Fax:~+1~503~223~3960 \ Email: \texttt{tug@tug.org}
+
+ \noindent
+ UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB UK\\
+ Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk}
+\end{quote}
+
+Cheques should be payable to the user group (TUG or UKTUG) and be
+clearly marked as contributions to the \LaTeX3 fund.
+Many thanks to all of you who have contributed in the past and thanks
+in advance for your generosity in the future.
+
+\section{Contacts and information}
+\label{contacts}
+
+In addition to the sources mentioned above, \LaTeX{} has its home page
+on the World Wide Web at:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ http://www.latex-project.org/
+\end{verbatim}
+This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains
+pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the
+\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database.
+
+More general information, including contacts for local User Groups,
+can be accessed via:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ http://www.tug.org/
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive
+\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN). This is a network of cooperating ftp
+sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ftp://cam.ctan.org/tex-archive/
+ ftp://dante.ctan.org/tex-archive/
+ ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page.
+
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cdb2b05c244
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,974 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%% File `ltxcheck.tex'.
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-1997 LaTeX3 project, David Carlisle
+%%
+% LaTeX Test File.
+% ================
+%
+% Processing this file with a newly installed LaTeX
+% will test various aspects of the installation.
+%
+% To typeset the comments in this file, create a small
+% file ltxcheck.drv that looks like the following (without the %)
+%
+% \documentclass{ltxdoc}
+% \begin{document}
+% \DocInput{ltxcheck.tex}
+% \end{document}
+%
+% and process `latex ltxcheck.drv'.
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/06/01]
+% \fi
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \CheckSum{643}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/15}
+% {Add \cmd{\NeedsTeXFormat}}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1996/09/25}
+% {Move ltxcheck to separate file}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1996/11/20}
+% {lowercase filenames /1044}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2004/02/11}
+% {Remove pict2e.sty}
+%
+\ProvidesFile{ltxcheck.tex}[2004/02/11 v1.1d LaTeX check file (DPC)]
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxcheck.tex}
+% \title{\textsf{ltxcheck}: The \LaTeX\ test program\thanks
+% {version~\fileversion, dated \filedate}}
+% \author{David Carlisle}
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% This file, |ltxcheck.tex| should be run after \LaTeX\ has been
+% installed. It Checks some system dependent parts of \LaTeX\ are set up
+% correctly for your system, and checks that the main input files and
+% fonts that \LaTeX\ uses are present and can be found by \LaTeX.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+LaTeX2e installation check file^^J%
+===============================}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+ Before running this file through LaTeX2e you should have installed^^J%
+ the Standard LaTeX files in their final `system' directories.^^J%
+ This file should *not* be run in a directory that contains article.cls}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |\pause| just slows things down so that not too much appears on the
+% screen at once, or scrolls off the top.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pause{%
+ \typeout{}%
+ \message{** Hit return to continue: }%
+ \read -1 to \xxx
+ \typeout{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+ After certain tests, LaTeX will pause so that you can read the^^J%
+ output without it scrolling off the screen.^^J%
+ When you are ready just hit <return> and LaTeX will continue.^^J%
+ When LaTeX pauses, you will see a prompt like the one below.^^J^^J%
+ If a test fails, a message will be displayed followed by^^J%
+ an error message starting `! BAD'.^^J%
+ LaTeX will quit if you try to scroll past some error messages.}
+\pause
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Check that the system has defined |\@currdir| correctly
+% by writing an |.aux| file and then trying to find it again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+ Checking the current directory syntax^^J%
+ =====================================}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftest\testfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@currdir\@undefined
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ \noexpand\@currdir is undefined !!^^J%
+ Something is seriously wrong with the LaTeX2e initialisation.^^J%
+ Either you have corrupted files or this is a LaTeX bug.}
+ \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!}
+ \expandafter\@@end
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@currdir\@empty
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ \noexpand\@currdir is defined to be empty.^^J%
+ This means that LaTeX can not distinguish between a file^^J%
+ aaaaa.tex^^J%
+ that exists in the current directory, and a file aaaaa.tex^^J%
+ in another directory.^^J%
+ It may be that this Operating System has no concept of `directory'^^J%
+ in which case the setting is correct. If however it is possible to^^J%
+ uniquely refer to a file then a suitable definition of
+ \noexpand\@currdir^^J%
+ should be added to texsys.cfg, and the format remade.}
+ \pause
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+\noexpand\@currdir is defined as
+ \expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@currdir^^J%
+ (Testing...)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\endlinechar=-1
+\count@\time
+\divide\count@ 60
+\count2=-\count@
+\multiply\count2 60
+\advance\count2 \time
+\edef\today{%
+ \the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day}:%
+ \two@digits{\the\count@}:\two@digits{\the\count2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \immediate\openout15=ltxcheck.aux
+ \immediate\write15{\today^^J}
+ \immediate\closeout15 %
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \openin\@inputcheck\@currdir ltxcheck.aux %
+ \ifeof\@inputcheck
+ \typeout{\@currdir ltxcheck.aux not found}%
+ \else
+ \read\@inputcheck to \reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@a\today
+ \typeout{\@currdir ltxcheck.aux found}
+ \testtrue
+ \else
+ \typeout{BAD: old file \reserved@a(should be \today)}%
+ \testfalse
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \closein\@inputcheck
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \iftest
+ \endgroup
+ \typeout{\noexpand \@currdir OK!}
+ \else
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ The LaTeX2e installation has defined \noexpand\@currdir^^J%
+ to be \expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@currdir.^^J%
+ This appears to be incorrect.^^J%
+ You should add a correct definition to texsys.cfg^^J%
+ and rebuild the format.}
+ \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!}
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@@end
+ \fi
+ \pause
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1995/09/27}
+% {Check filename parser}
+% Check the filename parser can at least cope with a simple
+% name + extension, |article.cls|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+ Checking the filename parser^^J%
+ ============================}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filename@parse{article.cls}
+\def\reserved@a{article}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\testtrue
+\ifx\filename@base\reserved@a
+ \ifx\filename@ext\@clsextension
+ \else
+ \testfalse
+ \fi
+\else
+ \testfalse
+\fi
+\iftest
+ \typeout{filename parser OK!}\pause
+\else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ The LaTeX2e installation has defined \noexpand\filename@parse.^^J%
+ This appears to be incorrect.^^J%
+ You should remove the incorrect definition from texsys.cfg^^J%
+ and rebuild the format.}
+ \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!}
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@@end
+\fi
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Check the input path by looking for |article.cls|. If |article.cls|
+% is in the current directory it would be found anyway, so first check
+% it is not there.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+ Checking the input path^^J%
+ =======================^^J}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\let\input@path\@undefined
+\ifx\@currdir\@empty\else
+ \IfFileExists{\@currdir article.cls}
+ {\typeout{%
+ article.cls appears to be in current directory!^^J^^J%
+ If this is the case, install article.cls into a^^J%
+ `standard input directory'^^J%
+ and copy ltxcheck.tex to another directory before^^J%
+ processing with LaTeX.^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ If article.cls is not in the current directory,^^J%
+ then you need to edit texsys.cfg.^^J%
+ Read the comments in that file. If nothing else works, add:^^J%
+ \string\let\string\@currdir\string\@empty^^J}%
+ \errhelp{Move files, or edit texsys.cfg}
+ \def\ArticleClassFoundInCurrentDirectory{%
+ This file should not be run in a `standard input directory'}
+ \errmessage{BAD: \ArticleClassFoundInCurrentDirectory}}
+ {}
+\fi
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\IfFileExists{article.cls}
+ {\typeout{input path OK!}}
+ {\typeout{^^J%
+ LaTeX claims that article.cls is not on the system.^^J%
+ Either LaTeX has been incorrectly installed, or the
+ \noexpand\input@path^^J%
+ is incorrect. A correct definition should be added to^^J%
+ texsys.cfg, and the format remade.}
+ \pause
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ Typical definitions of \noexpand\input@path include:^^J^^J%
+ \string\let\string\input@path=\noexpand\@undefined
+ (the default definition)^^J^^J%
+ \string\def\string\input@path{\@percentchar^^J
+ {/usr/lib/tex/inputs/} {/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/} }^^J^^J%
+ \string\def\string\input@path{\@percentchar^^J
+ {c:/tex/inputs/} {a:/} }^^J^^J%
+ \string\def\string\input@path{\@percentchar^^J
+ {tex_inputs:} {SOMEDISK:[SOMEWHERE.TEX.INPUTS]} }^^J}%
+ \pause
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ Note that \noexpand\input@path should be undefined
+ unless your^^J%
+ TeX installation does not make
+ \noexpand\openin and \noexpand\input^^J%
+ search the same directories.^^J%
+ If \noexpand\input@path is defined, entries should be^^J%
+ in the same syntax as \noexpand\@currdir^^J%
+ ie full directory names that may be concatenated with the^^J%
+ basename (note the final / and ] in the above examples).^^J%
+ Some systems may need more complicated settings.^^J%
+ See texsys.cfg for more examples.^^J%
+ ! BAD \noexpand\input@path!!}
+ \@@end}%
+\pause
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For versions prior to \TeX3 complain to the installer. (Although
+% \LaTeX\ will work with these old \TeX\ versions).
+% For versions between 3 and 3.14 check that \LaTeX\ is using the
+% work-around for the |^^J| in |\message| bug.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+ Checking the TeX version^^J%
+ ========================}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.2j}{1994/02/25}
+% {\cs{noboundary} is \cs{relax} not undef in TeX2 (initialised
+% in 2e format)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\dimen@\ifx\@TeXversion\@undefined4\else\@TeXversion\fi\p@%
+\ifx\noboundary\relax
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ This is TeX 2. You will not be able to use all the new features^^J%
+ of LaTeX2e with such an old TeX.^^J%
+ The current version (1995/12/11) is TeX 3.14159.^^J%
+ Consider upgrading your TeX.}
+ \ifdim\dimen@<3\p@\else
+ \errhelp{Check that texsys.cfg has not defined \@TeXversion}
+ \def\OldTeX{%
+ BAD: \noexpand\@TeXversion is incorrect: \meaning\@TeXversion}
+ \errmessage{\OldTeX}
+ \fi
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/10/11}
+% {Check for TeX3.141}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\dimen@>3.14\p@
+ \typeout{This appears to be a recent version of TeX!^^J%
+ If the following `lines' all appear on the same line,^^J%
+ separated by \string^\string^J %
+ then there has been an incorrect installation.}
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ This appears to be a TeX between 3.0 and 3.14^^J%
+ but the current version (1995/12/11) is TeX 3.14159^^J%
+ consider upgrading your TeX.^^J%
+ The following `lines' will appear on the same line,^^J%
+ separated by \string^\string^J;^^J%
+ the same problem may affect other messages from LaTeX.}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{line1^^Jline2^^Jline3}
+\pause
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% To check that the \LaTeX\ fonts have been installed, the well known
+% trick of going into |\batchmode|, and testing for |\nullfont| is used.
+% Not all fonts are tested, just a representative sample.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J%
+ Checking fonts^^J%
+ =====================================}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/10/11}
+% {Check for fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkfont#1{%
+ \batchmode
+ \font\test=#1\relax
+ \errorstopmode
+ \ifx\test\nullfont
+ \typeout{\@spaces! BAD: #1.tfm not found!}
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \typeout{\@spaces OK: #1.tfm found}
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^JChecking Standard TeX fonts...}
+\@tempswafalse
+\checkfont{cmr10}
+\checkfont{cmr12}
+\checkfont{cmmi10}
+\if@tempswa
+ \errhelp{Obtain a complete standard TeX font distribution.}
+ \errmessage{BAD: Missing Standard Fonts}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1996/07/19}
+% {Check for bad cm fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \font\testcm=cmr10
+ \testcm
+ \setbox0\hbox{h{}o}
+ \setbox2=\hbox{ho}
+ \ifdim\wd0=\wd2
+ \typeout{^^J%
+OK: correct Computer Modern fonts installed.}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+An unauthorised and incompatible release of the^^J%
+Computer Modern fonts has been installed on your system.^^J%
+The official fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives in:^^J%
+tex-archive/fonts/cm^^J%
+For further details see Donald Knuth's Home page:^^J%
+http://www-cs-faculty.stanford.edu/\protect~knuth/cm.html}%
+ \errhelp{Re-install Computer Modern fonts, and then rebuild LaTeX}
+ \errmessage{BAD Standard fonts!!}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \pause
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^JChecking LaTeX Picture Mode fonts...}
+\@tempswafalse
+\checkfont{lcircle10}
+\checkfont{lcirclew10}
+\if@tempswa
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \checkfont{circle10}
+ \checkfont{circlew10}
+ \if@tempswa
+ \typeout{^^J! BAD: You do not have the picture mode fonts:^^J%
+ lcircle10 and lcirclew10}
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J! BAD:%
+ You have the picture mode fonts with their old names:^^J%
+ circle10 and circlew10 have been renamed to^^J%
+ lcircle10 and lcirclew10}
+ \fi
+ \errhelp{Obtain a complete standard LaTeX font distribution.}
+ \errmessage{BAD: Missing LaTeX Fonts}
+\else
+ \pause
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^JChecking Extra LaTeX Computer Modern fonts...}
+\@tempswafalse
+\checkfont{cmmib5}
+\checkfont{cmmib7}
+\checkfont{cmex7}
+\if@tempswa
+\typeout{! BAD:^^J%
+ LaTeX2e uses a few `extra' Computer Modern fonts produced by^^J%
+ The American Mathematical Society.^^J%
+ If you install The AMSFONTS font collection, then these, and other,^^J%
+ fonts will be available to LaTeX.^^J%
+ Although installing AMSFONTS is recommended, LaTeX does not require^^J%
+ The full collection; you may obtain a minimal set of extra LaTeX^^J%
+ fonts from any CTAN archive, in: tex-archive/macros/latex/fonts/}
+\errhelp{Obtain LaTeX fonts or the AMSFONTS collection.}
+\errmessage{BAD: Missing LaTeX Fonts}
+\else
+ \pause
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1995/09/27}
+% {Check for dc and tc fonts}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1997/01/14}
+% {Check for ec fonts}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1997/06/10}
+% {Modify messages now ec released}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^JChecking T1 encoded Computer Modern (dc & ec) fonts...}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1995/10/31}
+% {Check the T1 fd files match the dc release.}
+% This command looks for the string |dcr17<| in the font tables for
+% T1/cmr. If it is there, then the T1 fd files match the old dc fonts,
+% for dc release 1.1 or earlier. If not then presumably new fd files
+% are being used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dcrseventeen{%
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar-1
+ \xdef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\in@
+ {\expandafter\string\csname dcr17\endcsname<}%
+ {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \string\csname T1/cmr/m/n\endcsname<}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly this command looks for the string |ecrm| in the font tables
+% for T1/cmr. If it is there, then the T1 fd files match the ec fonts,
+% for ec release 1.0 or later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ecrm{%
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar-1
+ \xdef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\in@
+ {\expandafter\string\csname ecrm\endcsname}%
+ {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \string\csname T1/cmr/m/n\endcsname}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1995/11/14}
+% {dont produce a BAD message if just one set of dc fonts is missing}
+% Remove the ``! BAD'' typeout while checking for dc fonts so
+% as not to worry sites with just the new ones.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkfont#1{%
+ \batchmode
+ \font\test=#1\relax
+ \errorstopmode
+ \ifx\test\nullfont
+ \typeout{\@spaces\@spaces #1.tfm not found}
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \typeout{\@spaces OK: #1.tfm found}
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@tempswafalse
+\checkfont{ecrm1000}
+\if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No ec fonts. Check the state of the dc fonts.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{No EC fonts found, checking DC fonts...}
+\@tempswafalse
+\checkfont{dcr10}
+\if@tempswa
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \checkfont{tcr1000}
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No dc fonts at all.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^J%
+! BAD: No ec fonts found!!^^J%
+LaTeX does not require the use of ec fonts^^J%
+however they are strongly recommended.^^J%
+The ec fonts are available in a more natural range of sizes^^J%
+and allow better hyphenation and kerning than the^^J%
+old fonts such as cmr10.^^J%
+These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J%
+tex-archive/fonts/ec}
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No old dc fonts, but new ones installed.
+% First check whether the latest patch has been applied.
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1995/12/11}
+% {Check for dc fonts 1.2 patch level 1 (Bernd Raichle) /2003}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1996/06/03}
+% {Check for dc fonts 1.3}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1997/01/24}
+% {extra closing brace removed from this branch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \font\testdc=dcr1000
+ \testdc
+ \setbox0\hbox{A{}y}
+ \setbox2=\hbox{Ay}
+ \ifdim\wd0>\wd2
+ \typeout{^^J%
+! BAD: dc fonts release 1.3 installed^^J%
+The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J%
+These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J%
+tex-archive/fonts/ec.}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+! BAD dc fonts 1.2 or older installed.^^J%
+The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J%
+These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J%
+tex-archive/fonts/ec.}%
+ \fi
+ \dcrseventeen
+ \ifin@
+ \typeout{^^J%
+The fd files for the obsolete release 1.1 of the^^J%
+dc fonts have been loaded into the LaTeX format.^^J%
+However, you appear to have at least release 1.2 of the dc fonts.^^J%
+You should generate suitable fd files by running:^^J%
+latex newdc.ins^^J%
+and then rebuild the format by rerunning:^^J%
+initex latex.ltx}
+ \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!}
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ DC fonts OK!}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+\else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \checkfont{tcr1000}
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Old DC fonts, but no new ones.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^J%
+Old dc fonts found!!^^J%
+Only the original dc fonts are on your system.^^J%
+Later releases of the dc/ec fonts introduced^^J%
+many improvements and are strongly recommended.^^J%
+They may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J%
+tex-archive/fonts/ec.}
+ \pause
+ \dcrseventeen
+ \ifin@\else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+The LaTeX2e installation has installed fd files for^^J%
+release 1.2 (or later) of the dc fonts.^^J%
+However, you appear to have only release 1.1 of these fonts.^^J%
+You must now generate the correct fd files by running:^^J%
+latex olddc.ins^^J%
+and then rebuild the format by rerunning:^^J%
+initex latex.ltx}
+ \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!}
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Both old and new DC fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \font\testdc=dcr1000
+ \testdc
+ \setbox0\hbox{A{}y}
+ \setbox2=\hbox{Ay}
+ \ifdim\wd0>\wd2
+ \typeout{^^J%
+! BAD: dc fonts release 1.3 installed^^J%
+The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J%
+These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J%
+tex-archive/fonts/ec.}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+! BAD dc fonts 1.2 or older installed.^^J%
+The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J%
+These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J%
+tex-archive/fonts/ec.}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dcrseventeen
+ \ifin@
+ \typeout{^^J%
+The fd files for the obsolete release 1.1 of the^^J%
+dc fonts have been loaded into the LaTeX format.^^J%
+However, you appear to have at least release 1.2 of the dcfonts.^^J%
+You should use generate suitable fd files by running:^^J%
+latex newdc.ins^^J%
+and then rebuild the format by running:^^J%
+initex latex.ltx^^J%
+Otherwise LaTeX will always use the older fonts.}
+ \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!}
+ \else
+ \ecrm
+ \ifin@
+ \typeout{^^J%
+The fd files for the new EC fonts have been loaded into^^J%
+the LaTeX format.^^J%
+However, these fonts are not found by LaTeX.^^J%
+You should either install the ec fonts, or generate suitable^^J%
+fd files for the dc fonts by running: \space latex newdc.ins^^J%
+and then rebuild the format by running: \space initex latex.ltx}
+ \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!}
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+DC fonts OK!^^J%
+(Both old and new dc font releases are installed.)^^J%
+Note that the dc fonts are expected to be replaced by ec^^J%
+in January 1997.}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Else EC fonts are found, so check whether LaTeX is going to use them.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ecrm
+ \ifin@
+ \typeout{EC fonts OK!}
+ \else
+ \typeout{%
+EC fonts installed but LaTeX is still using dc fonts.^^J%
+You may want to run ec.ins and remake the LaTeX format}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+\pause
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% The following files will be unpacked by running iniTeX on
+% |unpack.ins|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^JChecking LaTeX input files...^^J}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If the specified file is not there, add it to the list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkfile#1{%
+ \IfFileExists{#1}{}{\edef\missingfile{\missingfile#1, }}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Report any missing files in the last batch tested.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\filereport#1#2{%
+\ifx\missingfile\@empty
+ \typeout{^^J%
+OK: The #1 files such as #2^^J%
+are accessible to LaTeX.}
+\pause
+\expandafter\@gobbletwo
+\else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+! BAD: The #1 files:^^J%
+\missingfile^^J%
+are not accessible to LaTeX.}
+\errhelp{Check the installation!}
+\let\missingfile\@empty
+\fi
+\errmessage{Missing LaTeX files}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Kernel files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\missingfile\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\checkfile{hyphen.ltx}
+\checkfile{fontmath.ltx}
+\checkfile{fonttext.ltx}
+\checkfile{preload.ltx}
+\checkfile{texsys.cfg}
+\checkfile{latex.ltx}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Don't use |\filereport| here as the message is rather different
+% as the |.ltx| files don't really need to be available to \LaTeX\
+% once the format is made.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\missingfile\@empty
+ \typeout{^^J%
+OK: The files such as latex.ltx that are used to make^^J%
+the format are accessible to LaTeX.}
+\else
+ \typeout{^^J%
+The files:^^J%
+\missingfile^^J%
+that are used to make the format are not accessible to LaTeX.^^J%
+This is OK, but you will need those files if you need to remake the^^J%
+the format later.}
+\fi
+\pause
+\let\missingfile\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Class files and class options:
+% \begin{macrocode}}
+\checkfile{article.cls}
+\checkfile{report.cls}
+\checkfile{book.cls}
+\checkfile{letter.cls}
+\checkfile{ltxdoc.cls}
+\checkfile{proc.cls}
+\checkfile{slides.cls}
+\checkfile{bk10.clo}
+\checkfile{bk11.clo}
+\checkfile{bk12.clo}
+\checkfile{size10.clo}
+\checkfile{size11.clo}
+\checkfile{size12.clo}
+\checkfile{fleqn.clo}
+\checkfile{leqno.clo}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filereport{main class}{article.cls}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\checkfile{alltt.sty}
+\checkfile{doc.sty}
+\checkfile{exscale.sty}
+\checkfile{flafter.sty}
+\checkfile{fontenc.sty}
+\checkfile{graphpap.sty}
+\checkfile{ifthen.sty}
+\checkfile{inputenc.sty}
+\checkfile{latexsym.sty}
+\checkfile{makeidx.sty}
+\checkfile{newlfont.sty}
+\checkfile{oldlfont.sty}
+\checkfile{shortvrb.sty}
+\checkfile{showidx.sty}
+\checkfile{slides.sty}
+\checkfile{syntonly.sty}
+\checkfile{tracefnt.sty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filereport{main package}{ifthen.sty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Font definition (.fd) files:
+% \begin{macrocode}}
+\checkfile{omlcmm.fd}
+\checkfile{omlcmr.fd}
+\checkfile{omllcmm.fd}
+\checkfile{omscmr.fd}
+\checkfile{omscmsy.fd}
+\checkfile{omslcmsy.fd}
+\checkfile{omxcmex.fd}
+\checkfile{omxlcmex.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1cmdh.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1cmfib.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1cmfr.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1cmr.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1cmss.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1cmtt.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1cmvtt.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1lcmss.fd}
+\checkfile{ot1lcmtt.fd}
+\checkfile{t1cmdh.fd}
+\checkfile{t1cmfib.fd}
+\checkfile{t1cmfr.fd}
+\checkfile{t1cmr.fd}
+\checkfile{t1cmss.fd}
+\checkfile{t1cmtt.fd}
+\checkfile{t1cmvtt.fd}
+\checkfile{ts1cmr.fd}
+\checkfile{ts1cmss.fd}
+\checkfile{ts1cmtt.fd}
+\checkfile{ts1cmvtt.fd}
+\checkfile{ucmr.fd}
+\checkfile{ucmss.fd}
+\checkfile{ucmtt.fd}
+\checkfile{ullasy.fd}
+\checkfile{ulasy.fd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filereport{font definition}{t1cmr.fd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Font encoding files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\checkfile{t1enc.def}
+\checkfile{ot1enc.def}
+\checkfile{omsenc.def}
+\checkfile{omlenc.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filereport{font encoding}{t1enc.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Input encoding files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\checkfile{ascii.def}
+\checkfile{latin1.def}
+\checkfile{latin2.def}
+\checkfile{latin3.def}
+\checkfile{latin5.def}
+\checkfile{cp850.def}
+\checkfile{cp852.def}
+\checkfile{cp865.def}
+\checkfile{cp437.def}
+\checkfile{cp437de.def}
+\checkfile{applemac.def}
+\checkfile{next.def}
+\checkfile{ansinew.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filereport{input encoding}{latin1.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Compatibility files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\checkfile{article.sty}
+\checkfile{book.sty}
+\checkfile{letter.sty}
+\checkfile{proc.sty}
+\checkfile{report.sty}
+\checkfile{fleqn.sty}
+\checkfile{leqno.sty}
+\checkfile{openbib.sty}
+\checkfile{latex209.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filereport{compatibility mode}{article.sty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Other files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\checkfile{bezier.sty}
+\checkfile{docstrip.tex}
+\checkfile{slides.def}
+\checkfile{sfonts.def}
+\checkfile{t1enc.sty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\filereport{remaining}{sfonts.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@@end
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..44bc337d211
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,410 @@
+%
+% The following files form the LaTeX2e distribution of 2004/03/02
+%
+%
+% CONTENTS OF THE LaTeX DISTRIBUTION
+% ==================================
+%
+% Documentation:
+% --------------
+%
+% 00readme.txt -- The distribution guide. START BY READING THIS FILE
+% manifest.txt -- This file.
+%
+% install.txt -- How to install LaTeX (overview).
+% tex2.txt -- Extras for installing LaTeX on TeX2.
+% autoload.txt -- About the `autoload' LaTeX variant: no longer supported.
+%
+% amiweb2c.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Amiga WEB2C.
+% cstex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Atari CS-TeX.
+% decustex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with VAX/VMS DECUS TeX.
+% directex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Mac DirectTeX.
+% emtex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC emTeX.
+% emtextds.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Schmidt's emTeX/TDS (OS/2).
+% lindner.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Lindner's Atari TeX.
+% microtex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC MicroTeX.
+% miktex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with MikTeX for Windows 95 and NT.
+% multitex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Atari MultiTeX.
+% oztex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Mac OzTeX.
+% pastex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Amiga PasTeX.
+% pctex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC PCTeX.
+% textures.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Mac Textures.
+% truetex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with TrueTeX for Windows 95 and NT.
+% vtex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC VTeX.
+% vtexfree.txt -- How to install LaTeX with VTeX/Free (VTeX/Lnx, VTeX/2).
+% web2ctex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Unix web2c TeX.
+% yandytex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC Y&Y TeX.
+%
+% template.txt -- A template for writing installation guides.
+% texpert.txt -- Documentation for TeX experts.
+% patches.txt -- Explains the patch mechanism.
+%
+% legal.txt -- Copyright notice; warranty; copying conditions.
+% lppl.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (current version).
+% lppl-1-0.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.0).
+% lppl-1-1.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.1).
+% lppl-1-2.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.1).
+%
+% bugs.txt -- How to submit a bug report for LaTeX.
+% latexbug.tex -- File to generate a bug report.
+% latexbug.el -- File to generate a bug report with emacs.
+%
+% source2e.tex -- File to produce kernel documentation.
+% changes.txt -- List of changes in reverse chronological order.
+%
+% sample2e.tex -- Sample LaTeX input file.
+% small2e.tex -- Small sample LaTeX input file.
+%
+% clsguide.tex -- How to write class files.
+% cfgguide.tex -- Guide to using `.cfg' files to configure LaTeX.
+% cyrguide.tex -- Guide to using cyrillic languages in LaTeX.
+% fntguide.tex -- Guide to font selection.
+% modguide.tex -- Guide to modifying and distributing LaTeX.
+% usrguide.tex -- User guide for this release.
+%
+% ltnews01.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1994/06.
+% ltnews02.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1994/12.
+% ltnews03.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1995/06.
+% ltnews04.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1995/12.
+% ltnews05.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1996/06.
+% ltnews06.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1996/12.
+% ltnews07.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1997/06.
+% ltnews08.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1997/12.
+% ltnews09.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1998/06.
+% ltnews10.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1998/12.
+% ltnews11.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1999/06.
+% ltnews12.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1999/12.
+% ltnews13.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2000/06.
+% ltnews14.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2001/06.
+% ltnews15.tex -- What was new in the latest release dated 2003/12.
+% ltnews16.tex -- What may happen in 2004 and beyond.
+%
+% ltx3info.tex -- Information about the LaTeX3 project.
+%
+% manual.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Manual.
+% compan.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Companion.
+% begleit.err -- Errata for the LaTeX-Begleiter (German).
+% grphcomp.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Graphics Companion.
+% handbuch.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Manual (German).
+% webcomp.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Web Companion.
+% webcompg.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Web Companion (German).
+%
+%
+% Kernel files:
+% -------------
+%
+% cmfonts.fdd -- Font definitions for Computer modern fonts.
+% fontdef.dtx -- Code for font definitions.
+% lthyphen.dtx -- Hyphenation support.
+% ltboxes.dtx -- Code for making boxes.
+% ltclass.dtx -- Class and option handling.
+% ltcounts.dtx -- Counters.
+% ltpageno.dtx -- Page numbering.
+% ltxref.dtx -- Cross referencing.
+% ltlength.dtx -- Lengths.
+% ltdirchk.dtx -- Support for search in current directory.
+% ltfiles.dtx -- File handling.
+% ltfinal.dtx -- Code for debugging and final initialisations.
+% ltfloat.dtx -- Float handling.
+% ltfntcmd.dtx -- Various font switching commands.
+% ltfssbas.dtx -- NFSS Base macros
+% ltfsstrc.dtx -- NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty)
+% ltfssdcl.dtx -- NFSS Declarative interface
+% ltfssini.dtx -- NFSS Initialisation
+% ltfsscmp.dtx -- NFSS1 compatibility
+% ltidxglo.dtx -- Index and glossary.
+% ltbibl.dtx -- Bibliography commands.
+% ltalloc.dtx -- Allocation of counters and others.
+% ltdefns.dtx -- Initial definitions.
+% ltcntrl.dtx -- Program control macros.
+% lterror.dtx -- Error handling.
+% ltpar.dtx -- Paragraphs.
+% ltspace.dtx -- Spacing, line and page breaking.
+% ltlogos.dtx -- Logos.
+% ltlists.dtx -- Code for lists and related environments.
+% ltmath.dtx -- Code for math.
+% ltmiscen.dtx -- Code for miscellaneous environments.
+% ltoutenc.dtx -- Code for output encoding commands.
+% ltoutput.dtx -- LaTeX page makeup (output routine).
+% ltpictur.dtx -- The picture environment.
+% ltpage.dtx -- Page styles and related commands.
+% ltplain.dtx -- Things borrowed from the plain format.
+% lttab.dtx -- The tabbing, tabular and array environments.
+% ltthm.dtx -- The theorem-like environments.
+% ltsect.dtx -- Sectioning and title commands.
+% ltvers.dtx -- Version identification code.
+% preload.dtx -- Code for preloading fonts.
+% ltpatch.ltx -- Patches to current kernel.
+%
+%
+% Standard Classes:
+% -----------------
+%
+% classes.dtx -- Standard document classes article/book/report.
+% letter.dtx -- Standard document class letter.
+% proc.dtx -- Proc class: modifies the article class.
+% slides.dtx -- Slides class, etc based on SLiTeX.
+% slifonts.fdd -- Font declarations for slides class.
+%
+%
+% LaTeX2.09 compatibility:
+% ------------------------
+%
+% latex209.dtx -- Implements LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode.
+%
+%
+% Standard packages:
+% ------------------
+%
+% alltt.dtx -- Implements the alltt environment.
+% fixltx2e.dtx -- Implements non-gratuitous fixes to LaTeX.
+% graphpap.dtx -- Implements programming \graphpaper command..
+% inputenc.dtx -- Implements eight-bit input.
+% utf8ienc.dtx -- Supplement for inputenc to implement UTF8 encoding.
+% ifthen.dtx -- Implements programming control structures.
+% makeindx.dtx -- Implements support for generating an index.
+%
+%
+% Font selection files:
+% ---------------------
+%
+% exscale.dtx -- Scaling the math extension font.
+% latexsym.dtx -- Definitions for LaTeX symbol fonts.
+% newlfont.dtx -- New semantics of font switching commands.
+% nfssfont.dtx -- program for testing a font and generating glyph tables.
+% oldlfont.dtx -- Old semantics of font switching commands.
+% syntonly.dtx -- Syntonly package for running in syntax check mode.
+%
+%
+% The doc package:
+% ----------------
+%
+% doc.dtx -- Package for self documenting code.
+% docstrip.dtx -- Module for removing comments.
+% ltxdoc.dtx -- Class file for printing documentation.
+%
+%
+% Installation scripts for the various parts:
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% unpack.ins -- LaTeX main installation script (see below).
+%
+%
+% Installation scripts used by unpack.ins:
+% ------------------------------------------
+%
+% alltt.ins -- Installation script for the alltt package.
+% classes.ins -- Installation script for standard classes.
+% cmfonts.ins -- Installation script for OT* Computer Modern fonts.
+% newdc.ins -- Installation script for T* Computer Modern fonts.
+% docstrip.ins -- Installation script for docstrip.
+% exscale.ins -- Installation script for scaling the cmex font.
+% fixltx2e.ins -- Installation script for the fixltx2e package.
+% format.ins -- Installation script for latex.ltx.
+% graphpap.ins -- Installation script for graphpap.dtx.
+% inputenc.ins -- Installation script for inputenc.dtx.
+% ifthen.ins -- Installation script for ifthen.dtx.
+% latex209.ins -- Installation script for compatibility mode.
+% latexsym.ins -- Installation script for latexsym.dtx.
+% letter.ins -- Installation script for document class letter.
+% ltoutenc.ins -- Installation script for output encoding files.
+% makeindx.ins -- Installation script for makeindx.dtx.
+% nfssfont.ins -- Installation script for nfssfont.dtx.
+% proc.ins -- Installation script for the proc package.
+% slides.ins -- Installation script for SLiTeX.
+% syntonly.ins -- Installation script for the syntonly package.
+%
+%
+% Installation scripts to be used by themselves:
+% ----------------------------------------------
+%
+% cmextra.ins -- Installation script for additional CM fonts.
+% autoload.ins -- For the `autoload' LaTeX variant: no longer supported.
+% ec.ins -- Installation script for T1 and TS1 EC fonts.
+% olddc.ins -- Installation script for obsolete dc fonts (v1.1).
+%
+%
+% Support files:
+% --------------
+%
+% ltxguide.cls -- Document class used by the guides.
+% ltnews.cls -- Document class for `news' document.
+% minimal.cls -- Minimal document class for debugging and testing.
+% idx.tex -- Print out index entries in your document.
+% lablst.tex -- Generate list of labels used in a document.
+% testpage.tex -- Test file for checking the accuracy of a printer.
+% ltxcheck.tex -- Test file for checking the LaTeX installation.
+%
+%
+% ======================================================================
+%
+% The following file list is read in during the installation procedure
+% to check that all the files are present. The file names should be
+% separated by white space, and this file should end with |\endinput|.
+%
+00readme.txt
+alltt.dtx
+alltt.ins
+amiweb2c.txt
+autoload.ins
+autoload.txt
+begleit.err
+bugs.txt
+cfgguide.tex
+changes.txt
+classes.dtx
+classes.ins
+clsguide.tex
+cmextra.ins
+cmfonts.fdd
+cmfonts.ins
+compan.err
+cstex.txt
+cyrguide.tex
+decustex.txt
+directex.txt
+doc.dtx
+docstrip.dtx
+docstrip.ins
+ec.ins
+emtex.txt
+emtextds.txt
+exscale.dtx
+exscale.ins
+fixltx2e.dtx
+fixltx2e.ins
+fntguide.tex
+fontdef.dtx
+format.ins
+graphpap.dtx
+graphpap.ins
+grphcomp.err
+handbuch.err
+idx.tex
+ifthen.dtx
+ifthen.ins
+inputenc.dtx
+inputenc.ins
+install.txt
+lablst.tex
+latex209.dtx
+latex209.ins
+latexbug.el
+latexbug.tex
+latexsym.dtx
+latexsym.ins
+legal.txt
+letter.dtx
+letter.ins
+lindner.txt
+lppl-1-0.txt
+lppl-1-1.txt
+lppl-1-2.txt
+lppl.txt
+ltalloc.dtx
+ltbibl.dtx
+ltboxes.dtx
+ltclass.dtx
+ltcntrl.dtx
+ltcounts.dtx
+ltdefns.dtx
+ltdirchk.dtx
+lterror.dtx
+ltfiles.dtx
+ltfinal.dtx
+ltfloat.dtx
+ltfntcmd.dtx
+ltfssbas.dtx
+ltfsscmp.dtx
+ltfssdcl.dtx
+ltfssini.dtx
+ltfsstrc.dtx
+lthyphen.dtx
+ltidxglo.dtx
+ltlength.dtx
+ltlists.dtx
+ltlogos.dtx
+ltmath.dtx
+ltmiscen.dtx
+ltnews.cls
+ltnews01.tex
+ltnews02.tex
+ltnews03.tex
+ltnews04.tex
+ltnews05.tex
+ltnews06.tex
+ltnews07.tex
+ltnews08.tex
+ltnews09.tex
+ltnews10.tex
+ltnews11.tex
+ltnews12.tex
+ltnews13.tex
+ltnews14.tex
+ltnews15.tex
+ltnews16.tex
+ltoutenc.dtx
+ltoutenc.ins
+ltoutput.dtx
+ltpage.dtx
+ltpageno.dtx
+ltpar.dtx
+ltpatch.ltx
+ltpictur.dtx
+ltplain.dtx
+ltsect.dtx
+ltspace.dtx
+lttab.dtx
+ltthm.dtx
+ltvers.dtx
+ltx3info.tex
+ltxcheck.tex
+ltxdoc.dtx
+ltxguide.cls
+ltxref.dtx
+makeindx.dtx
+makeindx.ins
+manifest.txt
+manual.err
+microtex.txt
+miktex.txt
+minimal.cls
+modguide.tex
+multitex.txt
+newdc.ins
+newlfont.dtx
+nfssfont.dtx
+nfssfont.ins
+olddc.ins
+oldlfont.dtx
+oztex.txt
+pastex.txt
+patches.txt
+pctex.txt
+preload.dtx
+proc.dtx
+proc.ins
+sample2e.tex
+slides.dtx
+slides.ins
+slifonts.fdd
+small2e.tex
+source2e.tex
+syntonly.dtx
+syntonly.ins
+template.txt
+testpage.tex
+tex2.txt
+texpert.txt
+textures.txt
+truetex.txt
+unpack.ins
+usrguide.tex
+utf8ienc.dtx
+vtex.txt
+vtexfree.txt
+web2ctex.txt
+webcomp.err
+webcompg.err
+yandytex.txt
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..804665c7872
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err
@@ -0,0 +1,330 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\newcommand{\reportedby}[2]{{\small [First reported by #1 on \mbox{#2}.]}}
+\newcommand{\erratum}[1]{\subsubsection*{#1}}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% MODIFICATION DATE %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %
+% Defines \moddate to expand to modification date such as %
+% %
+% 5 Aug 1991 %
+% %
+% and \prdate to print it in a large box. Assumes editor %
+% updates modification date in standard SRC Gnu Emacs style. %
+% (should work for any user name). %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\ypmd{% %
+% %
+% %
+ Last modified on Wed Sep 17 10:55:19 PT 2003 by lamport %
+ endypmd} %
+% %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\moddate}{\expandafter\xpmd\ypmd} %
+\def\xpmd Last modified %
+on #1 #2 #3 #4:#5:#6 #7 #8 by #9 endypmd{#3 #2 #8} %
+\newcommand{\prdate}{\noindent\fbox{\Large\moddate}} %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newcommand{\mytt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}
+\newcommand{\cindex}{\index}
+\newcommand\bs{\char '134 } % A backslash character for \tt font
+
+\title{Errata to the Second Edition of the \LaTeX\ Manual}
+\author{Leslie Lamport}
+\date{\moddate}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\noindent These are all the errors and omissions to the manual,
+\LaTeX: {\em A Document Preparation System}, second edition, published
+by Addison-Wesley, reported as of \moddate. Positions in the book are
+indicated by page and line number, where the top line of a page is
+number 1 and the bottom line is number $-1$. A running head and a
+page number are not considered to be lines, but all other lines are.
+Please report any additional errors to {\tt lamport@pa.dec.com}.
+
+
+\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the First Printing}
+
+\erratum{page 25, example of \texttt{verse} environment}
+Replace \verb|{\em all\/}| by \verb|\emph{all}|.
+ \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 28, first paragraph}
+Not an error, but it would be
+helpful to add the following sentence to the end of that paragraph:
+ ``(If a declaration has arguments, they become additional
+arguments of the corresponding environment's \verb|\begin| command.)''
+
+
+\erratum{page 33, line 10}
+Add \verb|\]| to the list of fragile commands.
+ \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 43, table 3.5}
+Add an entry for \verb|\notin| ($\notin$).
+ \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 72, two examples}
+Change \verb|{\em ...}| to \verb|\emph{...}|
+ \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 101}
+This is not an error, but some readers will find it helpful if, in the
+descriptions of \verb|\setlength| and \verb|\addtolength|,
+\verb|\gnat| were replaced by \verb|\parskip|.
+ \reportedby{Ellen Gilkerson}{9 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 108, lines 7 and 10}
+This is not an error, but it might be easier to understand
+the example if \verb|\len| were replaced by something like \verb|\saved|.
+ \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 139, lines $-8$ and $-9$}
+
+The funny break between these two lines should be eliminated.
+\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 177, line $-12$}
+
+The \verb|twocolumn| option cannot be used with the \verb|letters|
+class.
+
+\erratum{page 197, lines 7 and 9}
+
+The \verb|figure*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{figure*}|, and
+the \verb|table*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{table*}|.
+\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 228}
+
+Add a note that, before running a LaTeX2.09 file in compatibility mode
+in LaTeX2e, you should delete the old versions of the auxiliary files.
+
+\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Second Printing}
+
+\erratum{page xv, line 10}
+``Chris Rowley'' should come after ``Sebastian Rahtz''.
+\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{24 April 1995}
+
+
+
+\erratum{page 29, line $-10$}
+Change ``error indicator line'' to ``error locator line''.
+\reportedby{Xavier Perramon}{2 Jan 1995}
+
+\erratum{page 37, lines 26--28}
+Change the two sentences ``None of these \ldots formula.'' to:
+\begin{quote}
+These text-producing commands can be used in math mode to put ordinary
+text in a formula. (When the command is used in math mode, its
+argument is processed in LR mode.) The declarations cannot be used in
+math mode. Section 3.3.8 explains how to change the type style of a
+formula's math-mode symbols.
+\end{quote}
+\reportedby{Mike Piff}{7 Mar 1995}
+
+\erratum{page 39, line 6}
+Replace ``any mode'' with ``paragraph and LR mode''. Also,
+after line 8, add:
+\begin{quote}
+The commands \verb|\dag|, \verb|\ddag|, \verb|\S|, and \verb|\P|
+can also be used in math mode.
+\end{quote}
+
+\erratum{page 53, line 24}
+Change ``are needed in the'' to ``are used in the''
+\reportedby{Mike Piff}{21 Oct 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 80, line 1}
+The section heading should not be outdented.
+\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{23 Jan 1995}
+
+\erratum{page 83, line $-8$}
+Change ``\verb|\resettime|'' to ``\verb|\settime|''.
+
+\erratum{page 84, after line $11$} Add the following sentence: ``The
+\hbox{\verb|\onlyslides|} and \hbox{\verb|\onlynotes|} commands may
+not work right if a \texttt{slide}, \texttt{overlay}, or \texttt{note}
+environment appears in the argument of any command.''
+\reportedby{Eike Ritter}{May 1996}
+
+\erratum{page 153, line 1}
+Add ``or subentry'' after ``entry''.
+\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{22 Feb 1995}
+
+\erratum{page 171}
+Add the following before line $-4$:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\mytt \bs columnwidth]
+Normal width
+ \cindex{columnwidth}%
+of a column;
+% \index{column!width}%
+ \index{width!of column}%
+equals \verb|\textwidth| except for multiple-column styles.
+Its value should not be changed with the length-setting commands.
+\end{description}
+Also, in line $-4$, change \verb|\textwidth| to \verb|\columnwidth|.
+%\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmav}{20 Jan 1995}
+\reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{9 Sep 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 180, lines 15--19}
+%
+Replace these five lines (which begin ``These commands are overriden'')
+with:
+\begin{itemize} \item[]
+To override a heading on a right-hand page (any page for one-sided
+printing), put a \verb|\markright| after the sectioning command and in
+its mandatory argument, and add an optional argument without the
+\verb|markright|, as in
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[]
+ \verb|\chapter[Gnu Scents]{Gnu Scents\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}}|\\
+ \verb|\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}|
+\end{itemize}
+To change the heading on a left-hand page, put a \verb|\markboth|
+command immediately after the sectioning command.
+\end{itemize}
+\reportedby{Jerome Breitenbach}{14 Dec 1995}
+
+\erratum{page 182}
+The dimensions
+\verb|\pageheight| and \verb|\pagewidth|
+should be \verb|\paperheight| and \verb|\paperwidth|,
+respectively. (The index entries on page 260 should also be changed.)
+\reportedby{Alan Jeffrey, on behalf of a user}{12 Sep 1995}
+\erratum{page 192, line 19}
+Change ``\emph{cmd}'' to ``\emph{def}''.
+\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{9 Mar 1995}
+
+
+\erratum{page 195, line 14}
+Change ``numbered `within' it'' to ``numbered directly `within' it''.
+\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{5 Dec 1994}
+
+\erratum{page 197, line 14}
+After ``\verb|\textwidth|'' add ``or \verb|\columnwidth|''
+\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmann}{22 Jan 1995}
+
+\erratum{page 226}
+
+After line 7, add
+\begin{quote}
+These declarations may not be used in math mode.
+\end{quote}
+Replace lines 16-19 (beginning ``None of these commands'') with
+\begin{quote}
+When these commands are used in math mode, the \emph{text}
+argument is processed in LR mode.
+
+These commands and declarations are robust. Words typeset in
+typewriter style are not hyphenated except where permitted by \verb|\-|
+commands.
+\end{quote}
+\reportedby{Marc Lavine}{22 Aug 1995}
+
+\erratum{page 228}
+To the section ``Type Styles and Sizes'', add the following sentence:
+A few mathematical symbols now require the \texttt{latexsym} package---see
+Tables 3.4--3.7.
+
+\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Sixteenth Printing}
+
+\erratum{page 42, line 14}
+Change ``through a symbol'' by ``through a relation symbol''.
+\reportedby{Frank Mittelbach}{15 Nov 1996}
+
+\erratum{page 42, Table 3.4}
+\verb|\land| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\wedge|, and
+\verb|\lor| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\vee|.
+\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{28 Oct 1998}
+
+\erratum{page 43, Table 3.7}
+\verb|\lnot| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\neg|.
+\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998}
+
+\erratum{page 51, line 8}
+Change ``The \verb|\,| command'' to ``The \verb|\,| and \verb*|\ | commands''.
+\reportedby{Phillip J Shelton}{2 Jul 1999}
+
+\erratum{page 61, second examaple (middle of page)}
+Remove the \verb|\mbox{}| following the \texttt{tabbing} environment.
+\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003}
+
+\erratum{page 137} This is not an error, but it would be better to
+change lines 23 and 24 to:
+\begin{quote}
+\LaTeX\
+ \index{file!not found error}%
+ \index{file!nonexistent}%
+is trying to read a file that apparently doesn't exist. If the missing
+file has the extension \texttt{tex}, then \LaTeX\ is trying to
+ \index{input)@\verb+\input+!of nonexistent file}%
+ \index{include)@\verb+\include+!of nonexistent file}%
+\verb|\input| or \verb|\include| it; if it
+\end{quote}
+
+\erratum{page 171, line 19}
+Change the description of \verb|\indent| to:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\mytt \bs indent]
+Produces a
+% \cindex{indent}%
+% \index{paragraph!indentation}%
+horizontal space whose width equals the width of the
+paragraph indentation. It can be used to add a paragraph indentation
+where one would otherwise be suppressed. (If it doesn't work,
+try typing \verb|\indent\indent|.) Robust.
+\end{description}
+\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998}
+
+\erratum{page 179, line 19}
+%
+Change to:
+\begin{quote}
+page style for the \texttt{article} and \texttt{report} document classes.
+\end{quote}
+\reportedby{Stephen J. Alter}{17 Sep 1997}
+
+\erratum{page 195, line 28}
+Replace ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_1$ are numbers''
+with ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_2$ are numbers''.
+\reportedby{Magnus Lewis-Smith}{14 Jan 1999}
+
+\erratum{page 196, line $-5$}
+Change \verb|\newboolean{|\emph{name}\verb|}| to
+\verb|\newboolean{|\emph{nam}\verb|}|.
+\reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000}
+
+
+\erratum{page 198, line 14}
+Change ``it will not be printed'' to ``it will usually not be printed''.
+
+\erratum{page 210, line 20}
+Add a space after ``bibliography''.
+\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003}
+
+
+\erratum{page 218, line $-14$}
+Change ``\texttt{tabular}'' to ``\texttt{tabbing}''.
+\reportedby{Carlos Pita}{27 Aug 2001}
+
+\erratum{foldout, column 3, line 3}
+Replace \emph{style} with \emph{class}. \reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000}
+
+% \subsection*{Errors in all Printings}
+
+
+
+
+
+\end{document}
+
+%try
+%try
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/microtex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/microtex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..01d800508e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/microtex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for MicroTeX
+
+ 15 July 1994
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for MicroTeX
+(uTeX).
+
+Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which will
+explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to create latex.exe
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+These instructions assume that you are using the standard directory set
+up supplied by the MicroTeX distribution. We hope that, if your system's
+set up differs from this then you will be sufficiently familiar with
+your system to make the necessary amendments to these instructions.
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX
+===============================
+
+If you have a copy of LaTeX 2.09, you may wish to save it before
+installing the new LaTeX.
+
+You should make a subdirectory called latex209 in the MicroTeX directory.
+Then copy any files called *.sty from the TeX inputs directory
+(normally arbortxt\inputs) into this latex209 subdirectory. You should
+also rename the LaTeX format file which you use for LaTeX 2.09, usually
+lplain.fmt, to latex209.fmt. Finally, rename the current executable
+version of latex in \arborxt\bin to latex209.exe
+
+You should then create a batch file latex209.bat, which temporarily
+resets the TEXINPUT environment variable to a path which includes the
+latex209 subdirectory before the TeX inputs directory, and then calls
+latex209.exe. Check that this batch file works before proceeding.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+To unpack the LaTeX distribution, you should change to the directory
+reserved for the installation and run iniTeX on the file unpack.ins
+by typing:
+
+ initex unpack.ins
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+To create the LaTeX format, you should run iniTeX on the file
+latex.ltx by typing:
+
+ initex latex.ltx
+
+This will create a file latex.fmt.
+
+You should copy this to the directory where TeX looks for its format
+files, normally the formats subdirectory of arbortxt.
+
+CREATING THE LATEX PROGRAM
+
+Finally, create latex.exe by typing:
+
+ preload < mklatex.dat
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LATEX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+You should move the following files to the TeX inputs directory
+(usually arbortxt\inputs):
+
+ latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex
+ *.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg
+
+If you use the MakeIndex program (called makeindx.exe) then you should
+also move the *.ist files into the inputs directory.
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+You should now run LaTeX on ltxcheck.tex. This should produce a
+number of `OK' messages. If it produces any warnings, please consult
+the `Problems' section of the file install.txt.
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+initex requires more conventional memory than does plain tex or latex.
+If either of the two steps above that use initex fail, try temporarily
+unloading any TSR programs or unnecessary device drivers until you have
+created the .fmt file.
+
+
+--- Copyright 1994 Micro Programs Inc and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/miktex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/miktex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..85f680a0695
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/miktex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+LaTeX installation guide for MiKTeX
+
+3 March 1998
+
+SUMMARY
+=========
+
+This file contains instructions how to install LaTeX for
+MiKTeX for Windows95 and WindowsNT
+Before reading this text, please have a look at the file
+install.txt, which explains the LaTeX installation.
+
+This guide assumes you are using the current MiKTeX release
+with it's standard directory setup. If your system's setup
+is different from the MiKTeX standard, we hope you are
+familiar enough with your system to deviate from these
+instructions where it's necessary.
+
+We also assume the use of a shell/editor (e.g. WinEdt)
+which you can use for starting different latex-related
+programs
+
+
+This file describes:
+
+* how to prepare the LaTeX installation
+
+* how to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+* how to install the LaTeX files.
+
+* how to create the LaTeX format file.
+
+
+PREPARING THE INSTALLATION
+==========================
+
+Move (do not copy!) the complete directory BASE from
+C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE to somewhere out of C:\TEXMF
+
+Create a new folder in the root-directory of your hard disc,
+e.g. C:\UPDATE
+
+Copy the file BASE.ZIP from floppy into this directory
+(in case of FTP transfer save it directly in there)
+
+Double-click on BASE.ZIP and WinZip will start automatically.
+Choose EXTRACT and select C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\ as
+extracting-directory
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+Start your editor and load C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE\UNPACK.INS
+
+Start IniTeX (in case IniTeX isn't installed properly in your
+editor, try http://www.gap.baynet.de/members/werdenfels.gym/tex/)
+
+[Alternative way:
+
+Open DOS-box, change prompt to C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE\
+and type: INITEX UNPACK.INS (--> press RETURN)]
+
+Delete the file TEXSYS.CFG in C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE\
+
+Move the folder LOCAL from the removed BASE-directory
+into your new BASE-directory
+
+Delete (or rename if you're anxious) the file LATEX.LTX
+in the old BASE-directory. Instead you can also delete
+the entire old BASE-directory
+
+
+PUTTING THE UNPACKED FILES TO WHERE LATEX FINDS THEM
+=====================================================
+
+(not really necessary)
+
+You can move the files not needed for LaTeX-processes
+into C:\TEXMF\DOCS\GENERAL\LATEX.
+These are all the files not fitting to following rules:
+
+latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex
+
+and all files having the extensions
+
+*.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg
+
+
+(also not necessary)
+
+If you make use of the Makeindex program, move the *.ist files
+into the Makeindex input directory, usually
+C:\TEXMF\MAKEINDEX\BASE\
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT FILE
+==============================
+
+push START (at the TASKBAR) --> choose RUN... -->
+type: MAKETEXFMT LATEX (--> press RETURN)
+
+push START (at the TASKBAR) --> choose RUN... -->
+type: C:\TEXMF\MIKTX\CONFIG\CONFIGURE --update-fndb
+(--> press RETURN)
+
+
+HINTS AND TIPS
+==============
+
+Running IniTeX, MiKTeX will complain about updating the
+font-name-database. Don't worry --- will be completed
+after the installation.
+
+To check whether the latex installation works properly,
+run LaTeX on the file LTXCHECK.LTX. A number of `OK'
+messages should be produced. If it produces any warnings,
+please consult the `problems' section of the file install.txt.
+
+
+MEMORY PROBLEMS
+===============
+
+no problems known
+
+
+
+
+Contributed by:
+Andreas Hirsch <afj@gap.baynet.de>
+Dominicus Heinzeller <heinzi@gap.baynet.de>
+Stefan Koller <stefan.koller@garmisch-partenkirchen.com>
+
+Copyright 1998 by Werdenfels-Gymnasium and the LaTeX3 project
+
+
+ --- All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e4a4ef53ea0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bada6fa49a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,412 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: modguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+
+\newcommand{\reasonsection}[1]{\subsubsection*{\it #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\nstex}{\textsf{NS-TeX}}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
+
+\title{Modifying \LaTeX}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+ All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{12 December 1995}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{abstract}
+ This document was produced in response to suggestions that the
+ modification and distribution conditions for the files constituting
+ the New Standard \LaTeX{} system should be similar to those implied
+ by Version~2 of the \textsc{GNU} General Public Licence, as
+ published by the Free Software Foundation.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\label{sec:intro}
+
+This article describes the principles underlying our policy on
+distribution and modification of the files comprising the \LaTeX{}
+system. It has been produced as a result of detailed discussions of
+the issues involved in the support and maintenance of a widely
+distributed document processing system used by diverse people for many
+applications. These discussions have involved users, maintainers of
+installations that support \LaTeX{} and various types of organisations
+that distribute it. The discussions are continuing and we hope that
+the ideas in this article will make a useful contribution to the
+debate.
+
+Our aim is that \LaTeX{} should be a system which can be trusted by
+users of all types to fulfill their needs. Such a system must be
+stable and well-maintained. This implies that it must be reasonably
+easy to maintain (otherwise it will simply not get maintained at
+all). So here is a summary of our basic philosophy:
+\begin{quote}
+ We believe that the freedom to rely on a widely-used standard for
+ document interchange and formatting is as important as the freedom to
+ experiment with the contents of files.
+
+ We are therefore adopting a policy similar to that which Donald
+ Knuth applies to modifications of the underlying \TeX{} system: that
+ certain files, together with their names, are part of the system and
+ therefore the contents of these files should not be changed unless
+ the following conditions are met:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item they are clearly marked as being no longer part of the
+ standard system;
+ \item the name of the file is changed.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\section{The system}
+\label{sec:sys}
+
+In developing this philosophy, and the consequent limitations on how
+modifications of the system should be carried out, we were heavily
+influenced by the following facts concerning the current widespread
+and wide-ranging uses of the \LaTeX{} system.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \LaTeX{} is not just a document processing system;
+ it also defines a language for document exchange.
+
+\item The standard document class files, and some other files, also
+ define a particular formatting of a document.
+
+\item The packages that we maintain define a particular document
+ interface and, in some cases, particular formatting of parts of a
+ document.
+
+\item The interfaces between different parts of the \LaTeX{} system
+ are very complex and it is therefore very difficult to check that a
+ change to one file does not affect the functionality of both that
+ file and also other parts of the system not obviously connected to
+ the file that has been changed.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+This leads us to the general principle that:
+\begin{quote}
+ with certain special exceptions, if you change the contents of a
+ file then the changed version should have a different file name.
+\end{quote}
+
+We certainly do not wish to prevent people from experimenting with the
+code in different ways and adapting it to their purposes. However, we
+are concerned that any distribution of modifications to the code
+should be very clearly identified as not being a part of the standard
+distribution. The exact wording and form of the distribution
+conditions is thus something that is flexible, but only within the
+constraint of keeping \LaTeX{} as a standardised, reliable product for
+the purposes described above: the exchange and formatting of
+documents.
+
+
+\section{Some examples}
+\label{sec:expl}
+
+Here we elaborate the arguments that have led us to the above
+conclusion.
+
+
+\reasonsection{Separate development considered harmful!}
+\label{sec:ja}
+
+In many fields, the use of \LaTeX{} as a language for communication
+is just as important as its capacity for fine typesetting; this is a
+very important consideration for a large population of authors,
+journal editors, archivists, etc.
+
+Related to this issue of portability is the fact that the file names
+are part of the end-user syntax.
+
+As a real example, the \LaTeX{} `tools' collection contains the
+package `array.sty'. A new user-level feature was added to this file
+at the end of 1994 and a document using this feature can contain the
+line:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{array}[1994/10/16]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+By supplying the optional argument, the document author is indicating
+that a version of the file \texttt{array.sty} dated no earlier than
+that date is required to run this document without error.
+
+This feature would be totally worthless if we were to allow an
+alternative version of the array package to be distributed under the
+same name since it would mean that there would be in circulation files
+of a later date, but without the new feature. If the document
+were processed using this `alternative array' then it would certainly
+produce `undefined command' errors and would probably not be
+processable at all.
+
+
+\reasonsection{What's in a file-name?}
+\label{sec:jb}
+
+In a pure markup language, such as SGML, it is reasonably clear that
+control over the final presentation lies with the receiver of a
+document and not with the author.
+
+However, the way that \LaTeX{} is often used in practice means that
+most people (at least when using the standard classes and packages)
+expect the formatting to be preserved when they send the document to
+another site.
+
+For example, suppose, as is still the most common use of \LaTeX{} in
+publishing, you produce a document for `camera-ready-copy' using the
+class `article' and that you carefully tune the formatting by, for
+example, adding some explicit line breaks etc, to ensure that it fits
+the 8 page limit set by the editor a journal or proceedings.
+
+It then gets sent to the editor or a referee who, without anyone
+knowing, has a non-standard version of the class file `article' and so
+it then runs to 9 pages. The consequence of this will, at the least,
+be a lot of wasted time whilst everyone involved works out what has
+gone wrong; it will probably also lead to everyone blaming each other
+for something which was in fact caused by a misguided distribution
+policy.
+
+It should also be noted that, for most people, the version of the
+class file `article' that gets used is decided by a site maintainer
+or the compilers of a CD-ROM distribution. To most users,
+the symbols \texttt{a\,r\,t\,i\,c\,l\,e} in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+are just as much part of \LaTeX{}'s syntax as are the symbols
+\texttt{1\,2\,p\,t} in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \hspace{12pt}
+\end{verbatim}
+Thus they should both define a standard formatting rather than
+sometimes producing 1 more page or a 5pt larger space.
+
+Users rely on the fact that the command (or menu item) `LaTeX'
+produces a completely standard \LaTeX, including the fact that
+`article' is the `standard article'. They would not be at all happy
+if the person who installed and maintains \LaTeX{} for them were
+allowed to customise `article' every second day so as (in her or his
+opinion) to improve the layout; or because another user wanted to write
+a document in a different language or typeset one with different fonts.
+
+\reasonsection{\TeX{} itself}
+\label{sec:tex}
+
+We have modelled our policies on those of the \TeX{} system since this
+has for some time now been widely acknowledged as a very stable and
+high quality typesetting system.
+
+The distribution policy set up by Donald Knuth for \TeX{} has the
+following features:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item There is a clearly specified method for changing parts of the
+ software by the use of `change files'.
+\item Although arbitrary changes are allowed, the resulting program
+ can be called \TeX{} only if its functionality is precisely the same
+ as that of \TeX{} (i.e.~neither less nor more) in all important
+ areas.
+\item There are many files in the system that cannot be changed at all
+ (without changing the name): examples are the file
+ \texttt{plain.tex} and the files associated with fonts, including
+ the Metafont source files.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\reasonsection{Maintaining complexity}
+\label{sec:compl}
+
+Our experience of maintaining \LaTeX{} has shown us just how complex
+are the interactions between different parts of the system.
+
+We have therefore, with lots of help from the bug reports you send in,
+developed a large suite of test files which we run to check the
+effects of every change we make. A non-negligible percentage of these
+test runs give unexpected results and hence show up some unexpected
+dependency in the system.
+
+
+\section{Some assurances}
+\label{sec:conc}
+
+We are certainly not attempting to stop people reformatting \LaTeX{}
+documents in any way they wish. There are many ways of customising
+incoming documents to your personal style that do not involve changing
+the contents of \LaTeX{}'s standard files; indeed, this freedom is one
+of the system's many advantages.
+The simplest way to achieve this is to replace
+\begin{quote}
+\verb|\documentclass{article}|\quad by\quad
+\verb|\documentclass{myart}|
+\end{quote}
+
+Nor do we wish to discourage the production of new packages improving
+on the functionality or implementation of those we distribute. All we
+ask is that, in the best interests of all \LaTeX{} users, you give
+your superbly improved class or package file some other name.
+
+\section{Configuration possibilities}
+\label{sec:conposs}
+
+The standard \LaTeX{} system format can be configured in several ways
+to suit the needs and resources of an installation. For example, the
+loading of fonts and font tables can be customised to match the font
+shapes, families and encodings normally used in text mode. Also, by
+producing the appropriate font definition files, the font tables
+themselves can be set up to take advantage of the available fonts and
+sizes. The loading of hyphenation patterns can be adjusted to cover
+the languages used; this has to be done as part of making the format
+since this is the only stage at which patterns can be loaded.
+
+A complete list of these configuration possibilities can be found in
+the distributed guide \emph{Configuration options for} \LaTeXe{}
+(\texttt{cfgguide.tex}). However, as it says there, the number of
+configuration possibilities is strictly limited; we hope that having
+read this far you will appreciate the reasons for this decision. One
+consequence of this is that there is no provision for a general
+purpose configuration file, or for adding extra code just before the
+|\dump| of the format file.
+
+This was a deliberate decision and we hope that everyone (yes, that
+includes you!) will support its intent. Otherwise there will be a
+rapid return to the very situation, of several incompatible versions
+of \LaTeX~2.09, that originally prompted us to produce \LaTeXe{}: the
+new, and \emph{only}, `Standard \LaTeX'. This will make \LaTeX{}
+unmaintainable and, hence, unmaintained (by us, at least).
+
+\begin{quote}
+ Therefore you should not misuse the configuration files or other
+ parts of the distribution to produce non-standard versions of
+ \LaTeX{}.
+\end{quote}
+
+Some of the allowed configurations can result in a system that can produce
+documents that are no longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the
+use of different default fonts will most likely produce different line
+and page breaks. If you do produce a system that is configured in
+such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should
+consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable
+documents. A good way to provide for their needs is to make
+available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any
+`formatting incompatible' customisations.
+
+
+\section{Modification conditions}
+\label{sec:modcon}
+
+It is possible that you need to produce a document processing system
+based on standard \LaTeX{} but with functionality that cannot be
+implemented by using the approved configuration files and complying
+with the restriction on the code that is allowed in them. In other
+words, you may need a system which is sufficiently distinct from
+Standard \LaTeX{} that it is not feasible to do this simply by using
+the configuration options we provide or by producing new classes and
+packages.
+
+If you do produce such a system then, for the reasons described
+above, you should ensure that your system is clearly distinguished
+from Standard \LaTeX{} in every possible way, including the following.
+
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+ Give your system a distinguished name, such as \nstex, which clearly
+ distinguishes it from \LaTeX{}.
+
+\item
+ Ensure that it contains no file with a name the same as that of
+ a file in the standard distribution but with different contents.
+ (If this is not possible then you must:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ ensure that files from the non-\LaTeX{} system cannot be
+ accidentally accessed whilst using a standard \LaTeX{};
+ \item ensure that each file from the non-\LaTeX{} system clearly
+ identifies itself as a non-\LaTeX{} file on the terminal and in the
+ log file.)
+ \end{itemize}
+
+\item
+ Ensure that the method used to run your system is clearly
+\label{mcon:command}
+ distinct from that used to run Standard \LaTeX; e.g.~by using a
+ command name or menu entry that is clearly not \texttt{latex}
+ (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc).
+
+\item
+ Ensure that, when a file is being processed by your system, the
+ use of non-standard \LaTeX{} is clearly proclaimed to the user by
+ whatever means is appropriate.
+
+\item Ensure that what is written at the beginning of the log file
+ clearly shows that your system has been used, and that it is
+ not Standard \LaTeX{}.
+ See the file \texttt{cfgguide.tex} for how to achieve this.
+
+\item
+ Clearly explain to users that bug reports concerning your
+ system should not be sent to the maintainers of Standard
+ \LaTeX{}.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection*{Note to system administrators}
+
+If you install a non-standard (modified) version of \LaTeX{} on a
+multi-user site then please, in addition, install Standard \LaTeX{}
+and observe the conditions enumerated above, particularly
+\ref{mcon:command}.
+
+
+\section{What do you think?}
+\label{sec:you}
+
+We are interested in your views on the issues raised in this document.
+The best way to let us know what you think, and to discuss your ideas
+with others, is to join the \texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list and send your
+comments there.
+To subscribe to this list, mail to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ listserv@urz.uni-heidelberg.de
+\end{verbatim}
+the following one line message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ subscribe LATEX-L <your-first-name> <your-second-name>
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/multitex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/multitex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9bfa5e33612
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/multitex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+ LaTeX installation instructions for MultiTeX
+
+ 10 January 1998
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for MultiTeX on
+TOS, MiNT or MagiC.
+
+Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which will
+explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * What do you need.
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+These instructions assume that you are using the standard directory set
+up supplied by the MultiTeX distribution. We hope that, if your system's
+set up differs from this then you will be sufficiently familiar with
+your system to make the necessary amendments to these instructions.
+
+
+WHAT DO YOU NEED
+================
+
+You need MultiTeX with a TeX version 3.141. If you don't know the version
+doubleclick TEX_L.TTP and INITEX_L.TTP. This will show you the version.
+
+If the version is 3.14 or less, you should update TeX. You can find version
+3.141 at the CSTEX bundle on CTAN (systems/atari).
+
+Only use filenames at the 8+3 scheme, sometimes MultiTeX produces nice errors
+using long or case sensitive filenames! If you are using a case sensitive
+filesystem, use only lowercase, because MultiTeX-programs do some changes to
+lowercase! I use uppercase in this documentation because Atari does so
+traditionally.
+
+
+SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+================================
+
+If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish
+to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX.
+
+You should make a subdirectory calles latex209 in the MultiTeX directory
+(e.g. ...\TEX\LATEX209). Then copy the subdirectories with the styles
+and with other input files (normaly STYLES, INPUTS and INITEX) into this
+latex209 subdirectory. You should also rename the LaTeX format file
+which you use for LaTeX 2.09 (usually latex.fmt into latex209.fmt,
+latex.fml into latex209.fml, latexg.fmt into latxg209.fmt and
+latexg.fml into latxg209.fml).
+
+
+BEFORE UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+=================================
+
+You should create some new subdirectories:
+ ...\TEX\LATEX
+ ...\TEX\LATEX\BASE
+ ...\TEX\LATEX\UNPACKED
+
+Latex needs a number of files to run, for example `article.cls'
+contains the `article' document class. However, these files are NOT
+themselves the source files produced by the LaTeX3 Project Team. We
+write documented sources in `docstrip archive files' which can be
+unpacked to produce the files that LaTeX needs. For example,
+classes.dtx contains the documented sources for all the LaTeX
+document classes, including article.cls.
+
+The FIRST thing to do is to check whether you need to unpack these
+archive files, as follows.
+
+Before reading any further, you should check to see whether the LaTeX
+distribution you have contains the unpacked files. You can do this by
+looking to see if you have got the file latex.ltx. If you do, then
+you should have all the unpacked files and so you can move on to the
+section entitled `Creating the LaTeX format'.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+The unpacking will create and write files into the current TEXOUTPUTS
+directory. This helps to prevent it overwriting existing files or
+causing problems with your system files. You should set TEXOUTPUTS at
+the TeX-Shell (TSH) to ...\TEX\LATEX\UNPACKED (menu entry "Parameter|... TeX").
+Set TEXINPUTS to ".;...\TEX\LATEX\BASE" (iff you find UNPACK.INS at another
+directory add this instead of "...\TEX\LATEX\BASE" to ".;" or copy all files at
+the directory of UNPACK.INS to ...\TEX\LATEX\BASE).
+
+The archive files are unpacked by running iniTeX (INITEX.TTP) on the
+file unpack.ins. To do this select menu entry "TeX-Projekt|Erzeugen"
+and select UNPACK.INS at the file-selector (you have to change "*.INI" at the
+file-selector-mask to "*.INS" or "*.*").
+
+Note: Using an ATARI ST with 8Mhz this will take about 3-4 hours!
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+You should edit the file TEX_L.OPT at the ...\TEX\FORMATS subdirectory.
+Setup the variables to following values:
+ mem_max=100000
+ pool_size=65000
+ trie_size=18000
+ font_mem_size=34000
+If you have more than 2MB, you may set mem_max to an greater value (e.g. 120000
+or 204800. If you only use english hyphenation pattern, you may set trie_size
+to 16000 only. If you use many hyphanation pattern, you should set trie_size to
+a value greater than 18000.
+
+Setup the Shell to use TEX_L.TTP instead of TEX.TTP and INITEX_L.TTP
+instead of INITEX.TTP (menu entry "Parameter|... TeX") or the TT-Versions of
+these programms.
+
+Set TEXINPUTS to ".;...\TEX\LATEX\*" (iff you find LATEX.LTX at another
+directory add this to TEXINPUTS too, or copy all files at the directory of
+LATEX.LTX to ...\TEX\LATEX\UNPACKED).
+
+To create the LaTeX format, you should run iniTeX on the file
+`latex.ltx'. Call menu entry "TeX-Projekt|Erzeugen" and select
+LATEX.LTX.
+
+A hyphenation file such as `hyphen.tex' is read by this run so it
+should be accessible by iniTeX. It also needs to be able to read the
+`.tfm' font files for the basic fonts. These font files and
+hyphenation file(s) should be part of your TeX system (see also INSTALL.TXT)
+
+If you want e.g. german-hyphenation-pattern read the documentation of
+german or babel package (you should put hyphen.cfg, ghyph31.tex and for babel
+language.dat to ...\TEX\LATEX or a subdirectory).
+
+As result you will get a format file `latex.fml' in the
+FORMATS-directory. Enter menu entry "Tex-Projekt|Einstellungen" and set
+"Format-Vorgabe:" to "latex" or "LATEX".
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+Setup the TEXINPUTS-Variable at menu entry "Parameter|... TeX" to
+".;...\TEX\LATEX\*" (don't write "...\TEX", write the hole name of your
+own TeX-directory, e.g. ".;F:\TEX\LATEX\*"). Setup the additional
+TEXINPUTS-Path (after "+") to the directory, you saved your old
+LaTeX2.09 to (if you have done).
+
+If LATEX.LTX and/or TEXSYS.CFG not at ...\TEX\LATEX or a subdirectory of this,
+add there directory to TEXINPUTS.
+
+Setup the TEXOUTPUS-Variable at menu entry "Parameter|... TeX" to your
+TeX-output-directory (e.g. "F:\TEX\OUTPUTS" or simply ".").
+
+You have now installed LaTeX!
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To make sure that the installation has worked, you should run the new
+LaTeX on the document `ltxcheck.tex'.
+
+Copy LTXCHECK.TEX to your TEXOUTPUTS-directory. Select LTXCHECK.TEX at
+your TEXOUTPUTS-directory as main-document (menu entry
+"TeX-Projekt|Hauptdatei") and call TeX (menu entry "Arbeiten|TeX").
+
+This will produce a number of messages, each of which should be `OK'.
+If any of them are `BAD', then read the notes in texpert.txt.
+
+If all the messages are `OK' then you are finished!
+
+Note: If you run LTXCHECK.TEX at another directory than TEXOUTPUTS,
+ ltxcheck will report not existing errors.
+
+FINALLY
+=======
+
+Note: If you want to process a *.dtx-file. You have to select it as
+ main-file and call TeX. Unfortunately the shell deletes the
+ extension "dtx". So TeX searches for a *.tex-file, cannot find
+ it and asks for the correct filename. You have to type in the
+ filename (with extension "dtx") once more.
+ If you want to call (La)TeX with doubleclick to a *.tex- or
+ *.dtx-file (without typing in the name twice), you may use the
+ calltex-program.
+
+
+Copyright 1998 Markus Kohm and the LaTeX3 project.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/oztex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/oztex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9a78c38249b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/oztex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for OzTeX
+ =========================================
+
+ March 2002
+
+NOTE: LaTeX is installed and ready to use in OzTeX 5.0 or later.
+If you have an older version of OzTeX then please upgrade; you can find
+download links at OzTeX's web site:
+
+http://www.trevorrow.com/oztex/
+
+This document assumes you have OzTeX 5.0 or later and wish to update
+the supplied version of LaTeX.
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+Before reading this file, you should read install.txt which explains
+how the LaTeX installation works in more detail.
+
+The following sections describe:
+
+ * How to override the old version of LaTeX.
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+ * How to check that the installation worked.
+ * Removing unnecessary files.
+
+
+OVERRIDING THE OLD VERSION OF LATEX
+===================================
+
+All LaTeX-related files are stored inside :TeX:Inputs:LaTeX: but it is
+best not to change anything in that folder because your changes will be
+clobbered if you upgrade to a new version of OzTeX. Instead, you can
+override the supplied version of LaTeX very easily by creating a new
+folder called something like "mylatex" and then adding a line like this
+in the OzTeX-only section of your Local config file:
+
+ input_folders = hd:mylatex:* $c
+
+This tells OzTeX to search your folder before the supplied folders.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+To unpack the LaTeX distribution:
+
+ * Put the files downloaded from tex-archive/macros/latex/base into
+ a base subfolder inside your new LaTeX folder.
+
+ * Start up OzTeX.
+
+ * Select "TeX..." from the TeX menu and use the open dialog to find
+ unpack.ins in the base folder, but do NOT open the file. Instead,
+ select Cancel. This sets OzTeX's current folder.
+
+ * Select INITEX from the TeX menu.
+
+ * Type "unpack.ins" in response to the ** prompt and hit Return.
+ This will start the unpacking process -- it shouldn't take too long.
+
+If you also downloaded new versions of tools, graphics, psnfss, etc.,
+you can easily unpack the various *.ins files by ticking the LaTeX
+format in the TeX menu and simply dropping a .ins file onto the
+OzTeX application.
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+To create a new LaTeX format:
+
+ * Select INITEX from the TeX menu.
+
+ * Type "latex.ltx" in response to the ** prompt and hit Return.
+
+ * After a short while you will be asked to save the LaTeX format.
+ Save it as latex.fmt in a suitable location inside your new LaTeX
+ folder and make sure OzTeX searches that location before the Default
+ format folder by adding a line like this in your Local file:
+
+ format_folders = hd:mylatex:formats: $c
+
+You might discover at a later date that one or more TeX parameters need
+to be increased to typeset your documents. If so, make the parameter
+changes in your Local file. Depending on which parameters (see the notes
+in the Default file) you might also need to build a new format file.
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To check that the installation worked:
+
+ * Move the file ltxcheck.ltx out of the base folder.
+ (It doesn't matter where you move it, just so long as it is not in the
+ same folder as the file article.cls. If this file is in the same
+ folder then LaTeX will definitely be able to read it and so cannot check
+ if it is possible to read files that are NOT in the current folder.)
+
+ * Tick the LaTeX format in the TeX menu.
+
+ * Drop the ltxcheck.ltx file onto the OzTeX application.
+ This will run a test of the LaTeX installation, and should produce "OK!"
+ to a number of tests. If it does not, see PROBLEMS in install.txt.
+
+ * Delete the .log and .aux files created (and move ltxcheck.ltx back to
+ the base folder if you like).
+
+You have now installed LaTeX.
+
+
+REMOVING UNNECESSARY FILES
+==========================
+
+After LaTeX has been successfully installed, you might want to delete some
+non-essential files to free up space on your hard disk. You can safely
+delete all files ending in:
+
+ .ins .dtx .fdd
+
+
+--- Copyright 2002 Andrew Trevorrow and the LaTeX3 project. ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pastex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pastex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bfc28ff70af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pastex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for PasTeX
+
+ 9 July 1996
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for
+PasTeX on the Amiga. Before reading this file, you should read
+install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to configure LaTeX.
+ (You can skip this part if you`re new to this.)
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+
+
+PRELIMINARIES
+=============
+
+Most of the installation procedure is concerned with creating a so
+called format file. This file contains essentially all the macros
+that make up the LaTeX package in a format that can be read in very
+quickly by virtex.
+
+This guide assumes that you have an unmodified installation of PasTeX
+release 1.3 or higher. If you have made any changes you should be able
+to figure out yourself where to deviate from this introduction.
+
+If you are using PasTeX 1.3 you should install the binaries from
+TeX:Bigbin to TeX:bin now. The normal binaries cannot be used with
+LaTeX2e. Alternatively you might want to install PasTeX release 1.4.
+A "light" version is available on aminet as text/tex/pt14l.lha,
+the full release is on the Meeting Pearls III CD-ROM.
+As of writing (July 1996), the CD is online at
+<URL:ftp://ftp.rz.uni-wuerzburg.de/pub/amiga/mpearls3/index.html>.
+
+First of all move all of the files that accompanied this document to
+a directory that should be outside the TeX: hierarchy. DO NOT copy
+them directly to TeX:macros! Most of the installation will take place
+in this directory. If the installation was successful you can delete
+this directory afterwards.
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+===============================
+
+If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish
+to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX.
+
+The format file is located in the directory TeX:formats and is named
+something like lplain.fmt or latex.fmt. If the name is latex.fmt you
+should rename it to latex209.fmt. This installation procedure will
+create a new file called latex.fmt that would overwrite the old one.
+
+Now you should save your old style files. Make a subdirectory latex209
+in the directory TeX:macros and copy all files #?.sty from TeX:macros
+into this directory.
+
+If you want use LaTeX 2.09 again for some reason, set the environment
+variable TEXINPUTS with something like
+
+setenv TEXINPUTS .,TeX:macros/latex209,TeX:macros
+
+Make sure that TeX:macros/latex209 comes before TeX:macros so that
+the old style files are used. (The "." refers to the current directory.
+If you omit it, files in the current directory will not be found!)
+Then call LaTeX with "virtex &latex209" (or "virtex &lplain", if that
+was the name of the old format file).
+
+
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+If you have PasTeX release 1.3, you may wish to edit the file
+texsys.cfg to have LaTeX work around some quirks in the version
+of virtex that comes with it. First find out the actual version
+of virtex with the command "version TeX:bin/virtex".
+Then edit the file texsys.cfg and insert a line right at the top
+containing
+
+\def\@TeXversion{3.14}
+
+and, of course, insert your actual version number if it differs.
+This change is however purely cosmetical and only affects the
+format of warning messages.
+
+
+If at some point TeX runs out of memory it will stop with an error
+message.
+You can try and make more memory available to TeX by editing the file
+TeX:config/tex.cnf. Try to figure out which parameter might have caused
+TeX to run out of memory. If the error message said e.g
+"Font <foobar> not loaded: Not enough room left", you should look at
+the parameter fontmax and/or fontmemsize. A good place to start is
+always the pair memmax and memtop. Read the comment in the file for more
+information.
+
+From TeX version 3.0 on you have the possibility to have more than one
+set of hyphenation atterns available in a format file. See the file
+texpert.txt for more details of how this can be achieved.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+Cd to the directory that contains the distribution files. Check if
+there is a file called "latex.ltx". If there is you probably have
+got a distribution that already has been unpacked and can skip this
+part. If there is a problem with a missing file at some point during
+the installation, try unpacking it again anyway.
+
+If latex.ltx does not exist, the command "initex unpack.ins" will
+unpack the distribution. If you have an 68000 based Amiga, now is
+the time to go and make some coffee.
+
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+When the unpacking procedure is complete type "initex latex.ltx".
+This will create the format file. When this is finished, copy it to
+TeX:formats. Make sure you do not overwrite an old latex.fmt,
+especially if there have been any problems.
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+Now you need to install the new style files and everything else LaTeX
+needs. Copy the following files to TeX:macros:
+
+ latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex lablst.tex
+ idx.tex nfssfont.tex small2e.tex sample2e.tex
+ #?.cls #?.clo #?.sty #?.fd #?.def #?.cfg
+
+If you have MakeIndex installed, copy #?.ist to the MakeIndex inputs
+directory.
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+Now you can check if the installation worked. First cd to another
+directory that does not contain any of the distribution files.
+Copy the file ltxcheck.tex here and type "virtex &latex ltxcheck"
+to the shell prompt. TeX will report that it cannot find a syntax
+for the current directory, but that is OK. (If you figure out a way
+to refer to the current directory, like UNIX ./, please tell us.)
+
+It will then check if it can find the file article.cls in the current
+directory and issue an error because it will find the file in
+TeX:macros. This is actually a good sign. Simply press return to the
+question mark.
+
+It will then check for the version of TeX currently installed. If
+you have PasTeX release 1.3, which contained virtex version 3.14,
+there will probably be some ^^Js cluttering up the output.
+
+You can edit texsys.cfg (in the distribution directory) and rebuild
+the format file as suggested by the warning text (see the section on
+configuring LaTeX). PasTeX release 1.4 cures this problem. See the
+`PRELIMINARIES' section for information on availability.
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+If there is any problem during installation, read the section on
+configuring LaTeX in this document. Some of the problems that may
+occur are covered there. Carefully reread the rest of the document,
+then read the document install.txt, especially the `PROBLEMS' section.
+
+If none of these can solve your problem, try to get some human help.
+
+--- Copyright 1994-1996 Christian Bauernfeind and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/patches.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/patches.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dc5f12d98eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/patches.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+ LaTeX Patches Guide
+
+ 2003/12/01
+
+
+This document describes the procedure by which changes to the LaTeX
+distribution in between the six-monthly releases will be made.
+
+Such changes will be made only when major problems are discovered and
+fixed. Other changes will only be made twice a year, in June and
+December.
+
+Changes which affect the file latex.ltx, and hence the format, are
+called `patches to the LaTeX kernel': this concept is described in
+detail below. The changes of this type are described briefly at the
+end of this file, in chronological order.
+
+All changes to all files should be listed, in reverse-time order, in
+the files called changes.txt: there is one in each distribution
+subdirectory.
+
+
+Patches to the LaTeX kernel dated <2003/12/01>
+==============================================
+
+New releases of LaTeX will occur at six-monthly intervals, in June and
+December. Between these releases it may be necessary to make small
+updates to fix major problems.
+
+We have made it relatively easy to install updates that affect only
+the format---by placing all these changes in one file, called
+ltpatch.ltx.
+
+In order to update your LaTeX format you should put
+ltpatch.ltx where it can be read by iniTeX and then run iniTeX on
+latex.ltx. You do not need to unpack the latex sources again.
+
+In this run of iniTeX, the file ltpatch.ltx (if it exists) will be
+read just before the format file is `dumped'. This will correct any
+bugs and it will modify the opening banner of LaTeX: for example,
+from:
+
+LaTeX2e <2003/12/01>
+
+to:
+
+LaTeX2e <2003/12/01> patch level 1
+
+
+(The ltpatch.ltx distributed with this `full' release of LaTeX
+ is `patch level 0' which does not change the banner.)
+
+
+--- Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997
+ The LaTeX3 Project. All rights reserved ---
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pctex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pctex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cdf86379d25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pctex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+
+ LaTeX Installation Instructions for PCTeX
+
+ 1994 August 10
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+(Note: LaTeX2e is also available directly from Personal TeX, Inc. with the
+purchase of any new PCTeX System or PCTeX Upgrade. To find out how to
+contact Personal TeX, see the end of this file.)
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX2e for PCTeX
+(either PCTeX for Windows or MS-DOS) from Personal TeX, Inc.
+
+Before reading this file, you should read `install.txt', which will explain
+how the LaTeX2e installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to configure LaTeX.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to check the LaTeX installation.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+===============================
+
+The installation of LaTeX2e is designed to *preserve* the existing LaTeX 2.09
+files. Two versions of LaTeX should be able to coexist on the same computer.
+LaTeX 2.09 will typically still stay in the `<drive>:\pctex\latex'
+subdirectory, and LaTeX2e will be installed into `<drive>:\pctex\latex2e'.
+Later, when you feel comfortable switching completely to LaTeX2e, you can
+delete the `<drive>:\pctex\latex' subdirectory to save hard disk space.
+
+The format file for LaTeX 2.09 is named `lplain.fmt', residing in either
+the `<drive>:\pctex\texfmts' or `<drive>:\pctex\texfmts.386' subdirectory.
+The format file for LaTeX2e will have the name `latex.fmt', so it will not
+write over your existing lplain.fmt file.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+These instructions assume you have already installed PCTeX for Windows or
+PCTeX for MS-DOS.
+
+It is recommended that you create a new subdirectory `<drive>:\pctex\latex2e'
+in which to put the LaTeX2e distribution files. IMPORTANT: Do NOT mix the
+LaTeX2e files with your existing LaTeX 2.09 files. To create the `\latex2e'
+subdirectory, enter at the DOS prompt:
+
+ md <drive>:\pctex\latex2e
+
+Then change to the `<drive>:\pctex\latex2e' subdirectory and copy the LaTeX2e
+distribution files into it.
+
+You will also need a file with hyphenation patterns. You can copy the one
+in your `<drive>:\pctex\texinput' subdirectory. To do this, enter:
+
+ copy <drive>:\pctex\texinput\hyphen.tex <drive>:\pctex\latex2e\.
+
+Then you need to unpack the LaTeX2e distribution files using Big PCTeX/386.
+From within the <drive>:\pctex\latex2e subdirectory, at the DOS prompt,
+enter:
+
+ tex386b unpack.ins /i
+
+If you do not have Big PCTeX/386, you may use PCTeX (tex.exe) or PCTeX/386
+(tex386.exe), but these versions will take much longer to unpack the file.
+If you use PCTeX, substitute `tex386b' with `tex' in the line above. If you
+use PCTeX/386, substitute `tex386b' with `tex386'. Note: You may want to
+consider upgrading to Big PCTeX/386 if you plan on using LaTeX2e.
+
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+After unpacking the `unpack.ins' file, you will need to modify the system
+configuration file, `texsys.cfg', which is used to tell LaTeX2e where to
+find input and .tfm files.
+
+To modify this file, use a text editor to open the file. As you will
+find out, by default, all the lines in the file are commented out.
+
+(1) Search for the text string `\subsection{MSDOS (other)}'.
+
+(2) Replace `(other)' with `(PCTeX)'.
+
+(3) A few lines below this, look for the following lines:
+
+ % \def\@currdir{./}
+ % \def\input@path{%
+ % {c:/tex/inputs/distrib/}%
+ % {c:/tex/inputs/contrib/}%
+ % {c:/tex/inputs/local/}%
+ % }
+
+(4) Uncomment these lines by deleting the `%' signs at the beginning of each
+one. Then make the modifications as shown below. After modification, these
+lines should look like the following:
+
+ \def\@currdir{./}
+ \def\input@path{%
+ {c:/pctex/latex2e/}%
+ {c:/pctex/texinput/}%
+ {c:/pctex/amstex/}%
+ }
+
+IMPORTANT: Do NOT delete the `%' sign in front of `\begin{macrocode}'
+and `\end{macrocode}'.
+
+(5) Now save the changes you have made to `texsys.cfg'.
+
+IMPORTANT: If you have installed PCTeX on a hard drive other than C:, please
+modify the paths in the `texsys.cfg' accordingly.
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+PCTeX for Windows:
+
+If you are using PCTeX for Windows, you can run INITeX and assign the
+LaTeX2e format file to one of the two custom format Toolbar icons, `FMT1' or
+`FMT2'. Follow the 3 steps below to do this:
+
+(1) Copy the file `latex.ltx' to `latex.tex'.
+
+(2) Then run PCTeX for Windows. Select `Typeset' and `INITeX'.
+
+(3) In the `INITeX' dialog box, check `Format1' or `Format2'.
+Under `Macro file name', enter `latex'; in `Path to input files', enter
+`<drive>:\pctex\latex2e'; in `Path to tfm files', you can keep the default
+paths. Then click `OK' to create the LaTeX2e format file.
+
+PCTeX for MS-DOS:
+
+If you are using PCTeX for MS-DOS, you can create the LaTeX2e format
+file by entering the following at the DOS prompt from your \pctex directory:
+
+tex386b latex.ltx "\dump" /i /pi=c:\pctex\latex2e;c: /pt=c:\pctex\amstfms;c:
+
+If you are using PCTeX (tex.exe), replace `tex386b' with `tex'.
+If you are using PCTeX/386 (tex386.exe), replace `tex386b' with `tex386'.
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To check that the LaTeX2e installation worked correctly, copy the file
+`ltxcheck.tex' from your `\pctex\latex2e' subdirectory into another
+directory, for example `<drive>:\temp'. Then from within this directory,
+follow the instructions below:
+
+If you are using PCTeX for Windows, run LaTeX2e on `ltxcheck.tex' by clicking
+on the `FMT1' or `FMT2' Toolbar icon, depending on which one you assigned to
+LaTeX2e.
+
+If you are using PCTeX for MS-DOS, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
+
+ tex386b &latex ltxcheck.tex
+
+After this, you may wish to typeset `usrguide.tex' with LaTeX2e and print
+the result. This file documents many of the new commands available in
+LaTeX2e. (Remember to typeset the file twice.)
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+The names of the basic files in LaTeX2e have been changed since the beta
+version. For example, `unpack.ins' is now used instead of `unpack2e.ins'.
+For creating the LaTeX2e format file, `latex.ltx' rather than `latex2e.ltx'
+is now used. Be sure to use these new file names when unpacking files or
+creating the format file.
+
+If you have other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the `PROBLEMS'
+section in `install.txt'.
+
+If `ltxcheck' produces a `BAD' message, you will typically be able to
+figure out from the message what is wrong. If it is not obvious what
+caused the `BAD' message, then please consult the section on `ltxcheck'
+in `texpert.txt'.
+
+If you have any problem not resolved by the above, please contact
+Personal TeX technical support at:
+
+pti@crl.com (email)
+(415)388-8865 (fax)
+(415)388-8853 (voice)
+
+Personal TeX, Inc.
+12 Madrona Street
+Mill Valley, CA 94941
+
+--- Copyright 1994 (c) Personal TeX, Inc. and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2cbca0a93cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,483 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+
+% This document will typeset the LaTeX sources as a single document.
+% This will produce quite a large file (roughly 555 pages) and may
+% take a long time.
+%
+% Some notes on processing this document are contained at the end
+% of this document, after \end{document}
+%
+% DPC 1997/11/17
+%
+% First a special index style for makeindex
+%
+
+\begin{filecontents}{source2e.ist}
+actual '='
+quote '!'
+level '>'
+preamble
+"\n \\begin{theindex} \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+postamble
+"\n\n \\end{theindex}\n"
+item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem "
+item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem "
+delim_0 "\\pfill "
+delim_1 "\\pfill "
+delim_2 "\\pfill "
+% The next lines will produce some warnings when
+% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different
+% versions of the program:
+lethead_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil "
+lethead_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+lethead_flag 1
+heading_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil "
+heading_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+headings_flag 1
+
+% and just for source2e:
+% Remove R so I is treated in sequence I J K not I II III
+page_precedence "rnaA"
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+
+\listfiles
+
+% Do not index some TeX primitives, and some common plain TeX commands.
+
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\long,\edef,\xdef,\gdef,\let,\global}
+\DoNotIndex{\if,\ifnum,\ifdim,\ifcat,\ifmmode,\ifvmode,\ifhmode,%
+ \iftrue,\iffalse,\ifvoid,\ifx,\ifeof,\ifcase,\else,\or,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\box,\copy,\setbox,\unvbox,\unhbox,\hbox,%
+ \vbox,\vtop,\vcenter}
+\DoNotIndex{\@empty,\immediate,\write}
+\DoNotIndex{\egroup,\bgroup,\expandafter,\begingroup,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\divide,\advance,\multiply,\count,\dimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\relax,\space,\string}
+\DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\@spaces,\openin,\openout,%
+ \closein,\closeout}
+\DoNotIndex{\catcode,\endinput}
+\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\message,\read,\the,\m@ne,\noexpand}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\vsize,\hskip,\vskip,\kern,\hfil,\hfill,\hss}
+\DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\z@,\z@skip,\@ne,\tw@,\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\dp,\wd,\ht,\vss,\unskip}
+
+% Set up the Index and Change History to use \part
+\IndexPrologue{\part*{Index}%
+ \markboth{Index}{Index}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Index}%
+ The italic numbers denote the pages where the
+ corresponding entry is described,
+ numbers underlined point to the definition,
+ all others indicate the places where it is used.}
+
+\GlossaryPrologue{\part*{Change History}%
+% Allow control names to be hyphenated here...
+ {\GlossaryParms\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font=`\-}%
+ \markboth{Change History}{Change History}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Change History}}
+
+% The standard \changes command modified slightly to better cope with
+% this multiple file document.
+\makeatletter
+\def\changes@#1#2#3{%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#2\space\currentfile\space#1\levelchar
+ \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty
+ \space
+ \actualchar
+ \generalname
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \saved@macroname
+ \actualchar
+ \string\verb\quotechar*%
+ \verbatimchar\saved@macroname
+ \verbatimchar
+ \fi
+ :\levelchar #3}}%
+ \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack}
+\makeatother
+
+% Produce a Change Log and (2 column) Index.
+\RecordChanges
+\CodelineIndex
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+
+% Needed for documentation in ltoutenc.dtx
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+
+\begin{document}
+ \title{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\\
+ David Carlisle\\
+ Alan Jeffrey\\
+ Leslie Lamport\\
+ Frank Mittelbach\\
+ Chris Rowley\\
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+% This command will be used to input the patch file
+% if that file exists.
+\newcommand{\includeltpatch}{%
+ \def\currentfile{ltpatch.ltx}
+ \part{ltpatch}
+ {\let\ttfamily\relax
+ \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}%
+ Things we did wrong\ldots
+ \IndexInput{ltpatch.ltx}}
+
+
+
+% Get the date from ltvers.dtx
+\makeatletter
+\let\patchdate=\@empty
+\begingroup
+ \def\ProvidesFile#1\fmtversion#2{\date{#2}\endinput}
+ \input{ltvers.dtx}
+\global\let\X@date=\@date
+
+% Add the patch version if available.
+ \long\def\Xdef#1#2#3\def#4#5{%
+ \xdef\X@date{#2}%
+ \xdef\patchdate{#5}%
+ \endinput}%
+ \InputIfFileExists{ltpatch.ltx}
+ {\let\def\Xdef}{\global\let\includeltpatch\relax}
+\endgroup
+
+\ifx\@date\X@date
+ \def\Xpatch{0}
+ \ifx\patchdate\Xpatch\else
+ \edef\@date{\@date\space Patch level \patchdate}
+ \fi
+\else
+ \@warning{ltpatch.ltx does not match ltvers.dtx!}
+ \let\includeltpatch\relax
+\fi
+\makeatother
+
+ \pagenumbering{roman}
+ \maketitle
+ \renewcommand\maketitle{}
+
+ \tableofcontents
+
+ \clearpage
+
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Each of the following \DocInclude lines includes a file with extension
+% .dtx. Each of these files may be typeset separately. For instance
+% latex ltboxes.dtx
+% will typeset the source of the LaTeX box commands.
+%
+% If this file is processed, each of these separate dtx files will be
+% contained as a part of a single document. Using ltxdoc.cfg you can
+% then optionally produce a combined index and/or change history for
+% the entire source of the format file. Note that such a document will
+% be quite large (about 555 pages).
+%
+
+ \DocInclude{ltdirchk} % System dependant initialisation
+
+ \DocInclude{ltplain} % LaTeX version of Knuth's plain.tex
+
+ \DocInclude{ltvers} % Current version date
+
+ \DocInclude{ltdefns} % Initial definitions.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltalloc} % Allocation of counters and others.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltcntrl} % Program control macros.
+
+ \DocInclude{lterror} % Error handling.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpar} % Paragraphs.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltspace} % Spacing, line and page breaking.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltlogos} % Logos.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfiles} % \input files and related commands
+
+ \DocInclude{ltoutenc} % Output encoding interface
+
+ \DocInclude{ltcounts} % Counters
+
+ \DocInclude{ltlength} % Lengths
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfssbas} % NFSS Base macros
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfsstrc} % NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty)
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfsscmp} % NFSS1 Compatibility
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfssdcl} % NFSS Declarative interface
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfssini} % NFSS Initialisation
+
+ \DocInclude{fontdef} % fonttext.ltx/fontmath.ltx
+
+ \DocInclude{preload} % preload.ltx
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfntcmd} % \textrm etc
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpageno} % Page numbering
+
+ \DocInclude{ltxref} % Cross referencing
+
+ \DocInclude{ltmiscen} % Miscellaneous environment definitions.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltmath} % Mathematics set up.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltlists} % List and related environments
+
+ \DocInclude{ltboxes} % Parbox and friends
+
+ \DocInclude{lttab} % Tabbing tabular and array
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpictur} % Picture mode
+
+ \DocInclude{ltthm} % Theorem environments
+
+ \DocInclude{ltsect} % Sectioning
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfloat} % Floats
+
+ \DocInclude{ltidxglo} % Index and Glossary
+
+ \DocInclude{ltbibl} % Bibliography
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpage} % \pagestyle \raggedbottom \sloppy
+
+ \DocInclude{ltoutput} % Output routine
+
+ \DocInclude{ltclass} % Package & Class interface
+
+ \DocInclude{lthyphen} % Hyphenation (hyphen.ltx).
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfinal} % Last minute initialisations and dump
+
+ \includeltpatch % Corrections distributed after the full release
+
+% Stop here if ltxdoc.cfg says \AtEndOfClass{\OnlyDescription}
+\StopEventually{\end{document}}
+
+\clearpage
+\pagestyle{headings}
+
+% Make TeX shut up.
+\hbadness=10000
+\newcount\hbadness
+\hfuzz=\maxdimen
+
+\typeout{%
+ \string # Produce change log with^^J%
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo}
+
+
+\PrintChanges
+
+\clearpage
+
+% makeindex needs a symbol between the parts of composite page numbers
+% but we dont want one, so:
+\typeout{%
+ \string # Produce index with^^J%
+ makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx}
+
+\begingroup
+\def\endash{--}
+\catcode`\-\active
+\def-{\futurelet\temp\indexdash}
+\def\indexdash{\ifx\temp-\endash\fi}
+
+\PrintIndex
+\endgroup
+
+% Make sure that the index is not printed twice
+% (ltxdoc.cfg might have a second \PrintIndex command)
+\let\PrintChanges\relax
+\let\PrintIndex\relax
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+To use this file to produce a fully indexed source code
+you need to execute the following (or equivalent) commands:
+
+ latex source2e.tex
+
+ makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo
+
+ latex source2e.tex
+ latex source2e.tex
+
+
+The makeindex style source2e.ist is used in place of the usual
+doc gind.ist to ensure that I is used in the sequence I J K
+not I II II, which would be the default makeindex behaviour.
+
+The third run with latex is only required to get the table of
+contents entries for the change log and index. You may speed things up
+by using the \includeonly mechanism so as not to typeset the source
+files on the second run. This involves changing the file
+ltxdoc.cfg
+between the latex runs.
+
+The following unix script automates this.
+ (It could easily be ported to scripts for DOS or VMS,
+ rm is ReMove a file, and echo "..." > file writes ... to "file".)
+
+
+After this script (after the second ==============) is a similar script
+that will produce the documentation for all the files in the base
+distribution that are *not* included in source2e.dvi. This second script
+was requested, but before using it, beware it will take a long time!
+It may however be modified as required, eg to not typeset the fdd files
+or whatever...
+
+==============
+#!/bin/sh
+
+rm -f source2e.gls source2e.ind source2e.toc
+
+# First run:
+# Create new standard ltxdoc.cfg file
+# Pass the (possibly empty) list of arguments supplied on the
+# command line to article class.
+#
+# If you use A4 paper, running this script with argument
+# a4paper
+# may save about 30 pages.
+#
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg
+
+
+# Now LaTeX the file with this cfg file.
+#
+latex source2e.tex
+
+
+# Make the Change log and Glossary.
+#
+makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx
+makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo
+
+
+# Second run: append \includeonly{} to ltxdoc.cfg to speed up things
+# (this run needed only to get changes and index listed in .toc file)
+#
+# Note that the index will not be made incorrect by the insertion
+# of the table of contents as the front matter uses a diferent page
+# numbering scheme.
+#
+echo "\includeonly{}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+latex source2e.tex
+
+
+# Third and final run, to put everything together.
+# First restore the cfg file:
+#
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg
+latex source2e.tex
+
+
+==============
+#!/bin/sh
+
+# Running this script will process all the dtx fdd and *guide.tex
+# and ltnews*.tex files in the LaTeX distribution, except the dtx
+# files included in source2e.tex.
+# (The shell first script in the comments of source2e.tex will
+# process those.)
+
+# Any command line arguments (eg a4paper) are taken as options to the
+# article class.
+
+# This script is likely to take ages!
+
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\batchmode" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+# The next four lines produce full indexes and change logs
+# you may not want those.
+echo "\AtBeginDocument{\RecordChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+# If you do not want any code listings, just documentation, then instead
+# of the above four lines, uncomment the following:
+# echo "\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxguide.cfg
+echo "\batchmode" >> ltxguide.cfg
+
+cp ltxguide.cfg ltnews.cfg
+
+
+for i in *dtx *fdd *guide.tex ltnews*.tex
+do
+B=`basename $i .dtx`
+
+if (grep "Include{$B}" source2e.tex >/dev/null ; )
+then
+echo In source2e: $i
+else
+echo latex $i
+ if (latex $i > /dev/null)
+ then
+ echo latex $i
+ latex $i > /dev/null
+ echo makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx
+ makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx > /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+ echo makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo > /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+ echo latex $i
+ latex $i > /dev/null
+ else
+ echo "!!! LaTeX ERROR: $i. (See $B.log.)"
+ fi
+fi
+
+done
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/template.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/template.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1e80002a2bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/template.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+<COMMENT>
+
+ This file contains a template for system.txt files. If you want to
+ write a system.txt file for your TeX implementation, then this is a
+ good place to start!
+
+ All of the places where you can add customization are indicated by a
+ tag like <THIS>. The tags are:
+
+ <COMMENT> ... </COMMENT> This material is intended for the author of
+ a system.txt file. Please delete it before showing it to users!
+
+ <OPTIONAL> ... </OPTIONAL> You may delete this material if you wish.
+
+ <DESCRIPTION> ... </DESCRIPTION> Please write a description here.
+
+ <TEX-IMPLEMENTATION> Replace this with the name of your TeX
+ implementation, e.g. `FooTeX v1.4'.
+
+ <DATE> Replace this with today's date, e.g. `1 April 1994'.
+
+ <YEAR> Replace this with the current year, e.g. `1994'.
+
+ <AUTHOR> Replace this with your name, e.g. `Jane Doe'.
+
+ Remember, a lot of users will not bother reading install.txt,
+ they will just be reading your file!
+
+ If you would like to distribute this file to other users of your
+ TeX implementation, please send it to the project team at the
+ bugs address given in bugs.txt.
+
+</COMMENT>
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for <TEX-IMPLEMENTATION>
+
+ <DATE>
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for
+<TEX-IMPLEMENTATION>. Before reading this file, you should read
+install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+<OPTIONAL>
+ * How to configure LaTeX.
+</OPTIONAL>
+
+<OPTIONAL>
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+</OPTIONAL>
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+<OPTIONAL><DESCRIPTION>
+ Name any system-specific sections, e.g. `Running LaTeX with FooTeX v
+ 1.2 or older'. These should appear as sections below!
+</DESCRIPTION></OPTIONAL>
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the
+following:
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe what is needed in addition to the distributed LaTeX files.
+ Don't forget the following, if pertinent.
+
+* the file `hyphen.tex', or some other hyphenation files (see `Creating
+ the LaTeX Format', below);
+
+ * the font files (normally .tfm files) for the Computer Modern fonts,
+ including some non-standard ones (see `Fonts needed', below).
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+===============================
+
+If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish
+to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX.
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe how to save the old format as `latex209.fmt' and the old
+ inputs in a directory called `latex209'. You might also describe
+ how to run the new LaTeX and LaTeX 2.09 in parallel.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+<OPTIONAL>
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe any configuration which has do be done. For example,
+ LaTeX2e uses more memory than LaTeX 2.09, so you may need to tell
+ users to increase one of TeX's memory parameters.
+
+ If your TeX implementation requires a texsys.cfg file, you should
+ describe a sample one, and tell users to cut it out, edit it as
+ appropriate, and save it as texsys.cfg. For example, under
+ OzTeX 1.5, an appropriate example texsys.cfg file would be:
+
+ \def\@currdir{:}
+ \def\input@path{%
+ {Hard-Disk:TeX:My-inputs}%
+ {Hard-Disk:TeX:TeX-inputs}%
+ }
+
+ See ltdirchk.dtx and texpert.txt for more details about texsys.cfg.
+</DESCRIPTION></OPTIONAL>
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe how to run iniTeX on unpack.ins. This will not generate
+ a format file.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe how to run iniTeX on latex.ltx. This will generate the
+ format file latex.fmt so you should tell users to install this file
+ and make it available to the system.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe how to move the various files into the appropriate places
+ (folders, directories, etc) necessary to produce a working LaTeX.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+ GETTING A WORKING LaTeX
+=======================
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe what else needs to be done to get the new version running.
+ You may also want to give a sample texsys.cfg file.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe how to run LaTeX (yes, some users may not have run LaTeX
+ before!) on ltxcheck.tex. Say that it's going to produce some `OK'
+ messages, and perhaps some `BAD' warnings.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe any problems users may come across in this TeX
+ implementation, and clues on how to cure them! Try copying the
+ style of the `PROBLEMS' section in install.txt.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+<OPTIONAL>
+ If you have any other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the
+ `PROBLEMS' section in install.txt.
+</OPTIONAL>
+
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Describe how to move the various files still remaining into the
+ appropriate places (folders, directories, etc) and which files can
+ be safely deleted.
+</DESCRIPTION>
+
+<OPTIONAL>
+SYSTEM-SPECIFIC SECTIONS
+========================
+
+<DESCRIPTION>
+ Put any other system-specific material here, e.g. `How to install
+ LaTeX with versions of FooTeX older than 1.2'.
+</DESCRIPTION></OPTIONAL>
+
+
+--- Copyright <YEAR> <AUTHOR> and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tex2.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tex2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..09cd388cde5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tex2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+ LaTeX installation TeX2 information
+
+ 16 September 1995
+
+
+In order to make a LaTeX format and use it you need, in addition to
+the LaTeX source files, a TeX implementation.
+
+If your TeX is very old, prior to version TeX3, then certain features
+will be missing from your system. In particular, you will probably
+have no support for `8-bit' input and hyphenation of words with
+accented characters.
+
+Most (perhaps all) TeX implementations are available in versions that
+are at least as recent as TeX3 (released in 1989) so the best course
+of action is to update your TeX installation before building LaTeX.
+
+However, if you must for some reason make the LaTeX format by running
+the old TeX2 then it is necessary to have a `configuration file' named
+fonttext.cfg. The existence of this file will prevent LaTeX trying to
+access 8-bit characters, which is not allowed in the old TeX2 version
+of TeX.
+
+If you fail to use such a configuration file, LaTeX will detect that it
+is running under TeX2 and stop with the following message (without
+making a format file):
+
+*************************************
+*
+* You MUST use a fonttext.cfg file!
+* As you are still using TeX2!!!!!!
+*
+* See the documentation file tex2.txt
+*
+*************************************
+
+
+There is more information about the file fonttext.cfg in the file
+cfgguide.tex; but for a minimal configuration that allows LaTeX to
+be built on TeX2, just do the following:
+
+ * Copy the standard fonttext.ltx file to fonttext.cfg
+ * Then edit the file fonttext.cfg as follows:
+ -- Change the \ProvidesFile call (see below).
+ -- Comment out all the lines referring to the `T1' encoding (but not
+ those referring to the `OT1' encoding).
+
+Thus the resulting file will look something like the following.
+
+%%% File: fonttext.cfg
+\ProvidesFile{fonttext.cfg}
+ [1995/06/05 v1.0 TeX2 text font setup]
+
+\input {OMLenc.def}
+%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \input {T1enc.def}
+\input {OT1enc.def} % <- should come after T1 for speed
+\input {OMSenc.def}
+\fontencoding{OT1}
+\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{}{}
+%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \input {T1cmr.fd}
+\input {OT1cmr.fd}
+\input {OT1cmss.fd}
+\input {OT1cmtt.fd}
+\DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
+\newcommand\rmdefault{cmr}
+\newcommand\sfdefault{cmss}
+\newcommand\ttdefault{cmtt}
+
+\newcommand\bfdefault{bx}
+\newcommand\mddefault{m}
+
+\newcommand\itdefault{it}
+\newcommand\sldefault{sl}
+\newcommand\scdefault{sc}
+\newcommand\updefault{n}
+
+\newcommand\encodingdefault{OT1}
+\newcommand\familydefault{\rmdefault}
+\newcommand\seriesdefault{\mddefault}
+\newcommand\shapedefault{\updefault}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..144db463eb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+ LaTeX installation TeX expert information
+
+ 1 June 1997
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This document contains information about the LaTeX installation for
+TeX experts. In particular it describes:
+
+ * The checks performed by ltxcheck.tex
+
+ * How to print the LaTeX source.
+
+For more general information, see install.txt.
+
+For information on configuring LaTeX see cfgguide.tex.
+
+
+THE LTXCHECK.TEX CHECKS
+=======================
+
+Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck.
+
+1) The \@currdir check.
+
+ It is useful for LaTeX to know the syntax for the `current directory
+ (or folder)', or `default directory', if the operating system has
+ such a concept.
+
+ For example, file abc.tex in this directory, or folder, is specified
+ by:
+ ./abc.tex on Unix and most DOS/OS2 TeX's,
+ []abc.tex on VMS
+ :abc.tex on a Macintosh.
+ The above possibilities will be found automatically during the
+ installation. However, if none of these syntaxes works on your
+ system then the internal macro \@currdir will be set to be empty
+ and ltxcheck will report this.
+
+ If your system does have a notion of a current directory, you can
+ define \@currdir in the file texsys.cfg.
+
+ You could also report this to the latex-bug address, so that
+ later releases can automatically cope with your system.
+
+2) The file name parser check.
+ \filename@parse may be defined in texsys.cfg if the default
+ installation does not define a suitable parser. (In fact no widely
+ used TeX system should need such a re-definition as the standard
+ installation should correctly define this command for unix, dos,
+ atari, VMS, and Macintosh, at least.)
+ Because of differences in directory syntax, most features of this
+ command can not be checked in a portable way, however ltxcheck does
+ check that at least {article.cls} is correctly parsed as base name
+ article and extension cls.
+
+3) The \input@path check.
+
+ On some systems TeX cannot check whether a file exists before
+ trying to input it, unless the filename is expressed as a full path
+ name, including the directory. On these systems LaTeX needs to be
+ given a list of directories in which to look for files; the
+ internal macro \input@path holds this information.
+
+ When run, ltxcheck will try to locate the file article.cls.
+ If it fails to find this file (and you have placed it in the
+ `standard input directory') then you must define \input@path in
+ the file texsys.cfg.
+
+ The files texsys.cfg and ltdirchk.dtx contain examples of how to do
+ this but only you know the directories and syntax that should be used
+ for your installation.
+
+ We hope to build up a better collection of examples in future
+ releases of LaTeX, as it is tested on more TeX systems.
+
+4) TeX version check.
+
+ The next check tests that you are running a recent version of TeX.
+ If ltxcheck reports that you have TeX2, then you should try to
+ upgrade TeX (and rebuild LaTeX) as soon as possible. LaTeX may be
+ used with TeX2, but certain features will be missing and you will
+ not be able to use the new (8-bit) font families that are now
+ available. If you must stick with TeX2, please read the extra
+ information in the file tex2.txt.
+
+ If ltxcheck reports that your TeX version is older than 3.141, you
+ will see some strange messages during the installation. This is
+ because earlier versions of TeX printed certain line-breaks in
+ messages on the terminal as `^^J' rather than starting a new line.
+
+ LaTeX will work round this bug and thus avoid `^^J' appearing in
+ error messages, but you should upgrade your TeX as soon as
+ possible, as other bugs have been fixed, not just line breaks in
+ messages.
+
+ At the present time (1997) the current TeX version is 3.14159.
+
+5) Fonts check.
+
+ Finally ltxcheck.tex tests to see if it can find a `representative
+ sample' of the fonts used by LaTeX.
+
+ Fonts that may cause problems are:
+ a) The circle fonts. These were renamed some years ago from circle*
+ to lcircle*, although some sites still have them under the old
+ name. Also the names are longer than 8 letters which may cause
+ some problems.
+ b) The `extra Computer Modern' fonts. The American Mathematical
+ Society has extended the range of sizes available in the
+ Computer Modern fonts. LaTeX now assumes that these extra cm
+ fonts are available.
+ The fonts are available from a CTAN archive, in the directory
+ tex-archive/macros/latex/fonts or alternatively as part of the
+ AMS fonts collection, which also includes many useful
+ mathematical fonts.
+ c) The `T1 encoded Computer Modern' fonts. This is the ec or dc font
+ collection. The new (1995) release 1.2 of the dc fonts changed
+ most of the file names. For this reason the fd files such as
+ t1cmr.fd cannot be written to work with the dc fonts of different
+ releases. LaTeX by default unpacks the fd files for the ec
+ dc fonts.
+ If you have an older release of the dc fonts and do not wish to
+ upgrade then you should unpack the necessary fd files by running
+ LaTeX on the file olddc.ins (dc older than version 1.2) or
+ newdc.ins (version 1.2 and 1.3).
+ As the T1 fd files will have been used when making the format,
+ you must re-run initex latex.ltx to remake the format if you
+ update the fd files in this way.
+ Running ltxcheck will produce a ! BAD LaTeX2e system!! error
+ message if it detects that the `new' fd files are loaded into
+ the format, but only the old dc fonts are available, and vice
+ versa.
+ If the old fonts are detected, and the `old' fd files are loaded
+ then no error is generated, but a message suggesting that you
+ upgrade is produced.
+ The ec fonts are available from a CTAN archive, in the directory
+ tex-archive/fonts/ec .
+
+
+6) Files check.
+
+ Finally ltxcheck checks that the main TeX input files that LaTeX
+ will use when running documents (such as the article class file,
+ fd files, and main packages such as fontenc) are all available.
+
+
+DOCUMENTATION OF THE CODE
+=========================
+
+To typeset a documented code file (a .dtx file) you simply run LaTeX
+on it. The file source2e.tex is a master file which produces the
+documented code for the whole LaTeX kernel (but not the standard
+packages, classes, or compatibility mode). You need to have LaTeX2e
+installed before doing this.
+
+To configure the appearance of this documentation, you can use a
+ltxdoc.cfg file. For example, putting the following line into this
+file will format the documentation for A4 paper:
+
+ \PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article}
+
+The doc package, which is used by the documentation files, writes
+index files and change-history files that can be processed by the
+program MakeIndex. If this program is part of your TeX installation,
+you can get an index and history listing for a documentation file
+by running the .idx and .glo files through this program.
+
+For example, in Unix MakeIndex, you should say:
+
+ makeindex -s gind.ist FILENAME
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o FILENAME.gls FILENAME.glo
+
+source2e.tex needs a special source2e.ist file (in place of gind.ist).
+Running makeindex will produce some warning messages about ignored
+style specifiers; these can be safely ignored.
+
+See the comments at the end of source2e.tex for more information.
+
+
+CONFIGURING LaTeX
+=================
+
+In addition to the system-dependent customisation in texsys.cfg,
+various other parts of LaTeX can be configured to suit local needs.
+Further details can be found in the document cfgguide.tex. We
+recommend that you install the standard system before attempting any
+further customisation.
+
+If you are thinking of making other changes to LaTeX, please read the
+document modguide.tex as it describes the precautions you need to take
+when making modifications in order to ensure that standard LaTeX
+remains a stable, maintainable system.
+
+
+FURTHER INFORMATION
+===================
+
+You will find further information about various aspects of LaTeX in
+the distributed files with names <*>guide.tex. You will need
+to install the new version before you can typeset these files.
+
+
+--- Copyright 1995-1997 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/textures.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/textures.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5ef11a6d42c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/textures.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,1771 @@
+Building LaTeX for distribution with Textures
+
+Written by Arthur Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com).
+Date: 4 July 1996
+Updated: 4 April 1997
+Updated: 11 February 2004
+
+This document describes how to create a distribution kit for
+runtime LaTeX for Textures. It is keyed to the file
+
+$CTAN/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/install.txt
+
+to which you should refer for general instructions. If you are viewing
+this document in QUED/M (recommended), you will find it nicely folded
+into hierarchical divisions.
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+LaTeX R6P1 is built with Classic Textures 1.8, or later with RAM
+footprint of 6.5Mb (smaller might still be feasible; try your luck).
+
+Given a allocation block of 2k (131Mb partition), you can expect to
+need free disk space for $CTAN/tex-archive/macros/latex: 60Mb. (Space
+for the /latex/contrib directory alone is 44Mb.) Additional disk space
+for the development files and runtime files of about 5Mb.
+
+Font Requirements
+
+You should have the AMS fonts installed. Blue Sky's LaTeX2e
+distribution has a minimal set of fonts for LaTeX2e. If you wish to
+typeset in many languages besides English, you should also install the
+EC fonts, available as:
+$CTAN/tex-archive/systems/mac/textures/fonts/BitmapFonts/EC_(European_CM)_1.0
+.
+
+YOUR VERSION OF TEX
+===================
+
+I assume you are using the latest Textures (as of LaTeX R6P1, Textures 1.8 or later).
+
+HOW THE INSTALLATION WORKS
+==========================
+
+
+
+SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+================================
+
+You should already have saved your old version of LaTeX based on information
+in the Textures LaTeX2e installation guide. You can have any number of LaTeXs
+simultaneously active.
+
+PICKING UP THE SOURCE OF LATEX
+==============================
+
+(This section is not in install.txt.) When picking up the source files
+for LaTeX, you should create a mirror of CTAN
+
+ftp://CTAN/tex-archives
+
+thus:
+
+fonts/
+ ams/
+ amsfonts/
+ amslatex/
+ psfonts/
+ adobe/
+ bh/
+ textures/
+ tools/
+macros/
+ latex/
+ base/ (optional if picking up unpacked/)
+ contrib/
+ other/
+ supported/
+ doc/
+ fonts/ (this is a link to fonts/latex, which is standard with Textures)
+ packages/
+ amslatex/
+ babel/
+ graphics/
+ mfnfss/
+ psnfss/
+ tools/
+ unpacked/ (optional if picking up base/)
+
+You can pick up compressed source on CTAN and decompress locally to
+save bandwidth. Be careful to not translate line terminators of any
+binary files (e.g., tfm, vf, dvi, or zip) in the process. Alternative:
+Textures 1.8 and later will support UNIX line terminators, so you can
+pick up the files BINARY and use them without modification.
+
+You can set the name of the latex directory to "latexRxPy" to
+distinguish it from other LaTeX releases in your CTAN mirror.
+
+I picked files up in April 1997. I concluded them to be
+Release 6 (based on the presence of the file unpacked/ltnews06.tex)
+at Patchlevel 1 (from an examination of unpacked/ltpatch.ltx).
+
+In what follows, the files in the CTAN mirror will be referred to via
+their UNIX-like path names to distinguish them from files in the
+Development folder. In this build, no files are created in any of
+these directories (with the possible exception of creating unpacked/
+from base/), and no new resources are created in any of the CTAN
+files. Therefore, the runtime kit consists of files copied directly
+over from CTAN and generated files (generated by Textures as part of
+the build process), the latter always generated in a separate set of
+folders.
+
+BEFORE UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+=================================
+
+Create the following working directory structure (or duplicate it from
+a previous release):
+
+:LaTeX RxPy Isolates this particular version of LaTeX
+ Textures.txt This file--update it for use in your next round of work
+ :Development Generate the runtime files, doc files, etc.
+ :base run unpack.ins (optional)
+ :Documentation Generate user-level documentation
+ :fonts PS_Fonts_NFSS (optional)
+ :graphics Graphics_Bundle (optional)
+ :TeX inputs Generate files read by LaTeX at run time
+ :€LaTeX RxPy hierarchical version of one in :Distribution:TeX inputs:
+ color.cfg runtime file
+ graphics.cfg runtime file
+ ltxdoc.cfg runtime file
+ :amsfonts alias to :ams:amsfonts:latex
+ :amslatex alias to :ams:amslatex:inputs
+ :base aliases of the runtime files
+ idx.tex
+ lablst.tex
+ latexbug.tex
+ ltnews.cls
+ ltxguide.cls
+ minimal.cls
+ nfssfont.tex
+ sample2e.tex
+ small2e.tex
+ testpage.tex
+ :contrib
+ :other
+ :supported
+ :packages
+ :babel gen the runtime files
+ :graphics gen the runtime files
+ color.sty
+ dvi2ps.def
+ dvialw.def
+ dvilaser.def
+ dvips.def
+ dvipsnam.def
+ dvipsone.def
+ dvitops.def
+ dviwin.def
+ emtex.def
+ epsfig.sty
+ graphics.sty
+ graphicx.sty
+ keyval.sty
+ ln.def
+ lscape.sty
+ oztex.def
+ pctex32.def
+ pctexhp.def
+ pctexps.def
+ pctexwin.def
+ psprint.def
+ pstcol.sty
+ pubps.def
+ textures.def
+ trig.sty
+ :mfnfss gen the runtime files
+ oldgerm.sty
+ OT1panr.fd
+ OT1pss.fd
+ pandora.sty
+ Uyfrak.fd
+ Uygoth.fd
+ Uyinit.fd
+ Uyswab.fd
+ :psnfss gen the runtime files
+ avant.sty
+ bookman.sty
+ chancery.sty
+ helvet.sty
+ mathptm.sty
+ newcent.sty
+ palatino.sty
+ pifont.sty
+ times.sty
+ :tools gen the runtime files
+ .tex
+ afterpage.sty
+ array.sty
+ dcolumn.sty
+ delarray.sty
+ e.tex
+ enumerate.sty
+ fontsmpl.sty
+ fontsmpl.tex
+ ftnright.sty
+ h.tex
+ hhline.sty
+ indentfirst.sty
+ layout.sty
+ longtable.sty
+ multicol.sty
+ rawfonts.sty
+ s.tex
+ showkeys.sty
+ somedefs.sty
+ tabularx.sty
+ thb.sty
+ thc.sty
+ thcb.sty
+ theorem.sty
+ thm.sty
+ thmb.sty
+ thp.sty
+ varioref.sty
+ verbatim.sty
+ verbtest.tex
+ x.tex
+ xr.sty
+ xspace.sty
+ :psfonts based on the new fontinst-based metrics
+ :adobe aliases of the runtime files
+ :bh aliases of the runtime files
+ :tools
+ :psnfss gen the runtime files
+ :unpacked aliases of the runtime files
+ alltt.sty
+ ansinew.def
+ applemac.def
+ article.cls
+ article.sty
+ ascii.def
+ bezier.sty
+ bk10.clo
+ bk11.clo
+ bk12.clo
+ book.cls
+ book.sty
+ cp437.def
+ cp437de.def
+ cp850.def
+ cp852.def
+ doc.sty
+ docstrip.tex
+ exscale.sty
+ flafter.sty
+ fleqn.clo
+ fleqn.sty
+ fontenc.sty
+ gglo.ist
+ gind.ist
+ graphpap.sty
+ ifthen.sty
+ inputenc.sty
+ latex209.def
+ latexsym.sty
+ latin1.def
+ latin2.def
+ leqno.clo
+ leqno.sty
+ letter.cls
+ letter.sty
+ ltxdoc.cls
+ makeidx.sty
+ newlfont.sty
+ next.def
+ oldlfont.sty
+ OMLcmm.fd
+ OMLcmr.fd
+ OMLenc.def
+ OMLlcmm.fd
+ OMScmr.fd
+ OMScmsy.fd
+ OMSenc.def
+ OMSlcmsy.fd
+ OMXcmex.fd
+ OMXlcmex.fd
+ openbib.sty
+ OT1cmdh.fd
+ OT1cmfib.fd
+ OT1cmfr.fd
+ OT1cmr.fd
+ OT1cmss.fd
+ OT1cmtt.fd
+ OT1cmvtt.fd
+ OT1enc.def
+ OT1lcmss.fd
+ OT1lcmtt.fd
+ proc.cls
+ proc.sty
+ report.cls
+ report.sty
+ sfonts.def
+ shortvrb.sty
+ showidx.sty
+ size10.clo
+ size11.clo
+ size12.clo
+ slides.cls
+ slides.def
+ slides.sty
+ syntonly.sty
+ T1cmdh.fd
+ T1cmfib.fd
+ T1cmfr.fd
+ T1cmr.fd
+ T1cmss.fd
+ T1cmtt.fd
+ T1cmvtt.fd
+ T1enc.def
+ t1enc.sty
+ texsys.cfg
+ tracefnt.sty
+ TS1cmr.fd
+ TS1cmss.fd
+ TS1cmtt.fd
+ TS1cmvtt.fd
+ Ucmr.fd
+ Ucmss.fd
+ Ucmtt.fd
+ Ulasy.fd
+ Ullasy.fd
+ :Distribution The files to be distributed to end users
+ ReadMe Basic installation instructions
+ :Documentation User guides in ready-to-read format
+ a.ps
+ Author Guide
+ Class Guide
+ color
+ Configuration Options
+ Font Selection
+ Graphics Bundle
+ LaTeX News 01
+ LaTeX News 02
+ LaTeX News 03
+ LaTeX News 04
+ LaTeX News 05
+ Modifying LaTeX
+ PS Fonts NFSS
+ :TeX fonts Alias files into Textures' TeX fonts folder
+ :TeX formats Alias files into Textures' TeX formats folder
+ :unpacked gen the .fmt and run ltcheck
+ :TeX inputs Alias folder into Textures' TeX inputs folder
+ :€LaTeX RxPy
+
+The general strategy in what follows is to avoid altering or
+unnecessarily duplicating the files in the CTAN mirror as one proceeds
+with the build. To accomplish this, any file that you open in
+Textures, or especially any file that you typeset in Textures, should
+be a file that you create expressely for that purpose, generally
+somewhere in the :Development folder. Thus, one avoids putting new
+resources into the CTAN files. As a byproduct of this technique, it is
+simple indeed to know which files are generated files: after
+typesetting one of the install files in the :Development folder, any
+new files that appear in the same folder will be generated files, and
+will need to be moved (somewhere) into the €LaTeX RxPy folder.
+
+As you generate the files for the distribution, you will not only move
+generated files into the €LaTeX RxPy folder, but also leave behind
+aliases of these same files; this will facilitate your understanding
+of the purpose of each generated file. you can do a Find FileŠ on
+any file in the :TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy folder: two files will be
+found, the second will be an alias of the first and will indicate (by
+its location in the hierarchy) which package it belongs to.
+
+After you complete the generation of the runtime files, you will have
+a :TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy folder that is completely flat. This is
+important to Textures' speed.
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+Note: If you picked up the unpacked/ directory from CTAN, you do not need to run
+the (time-consuming) unpacking procedure here.
+
+1. To proceed, open the file in :Development:base: called unpack that
+contains the single line "\input unpack.ins" and typeset under virtex.
+When prompted, navigate to the file base\unpack.ins. The generated
+files will all show up in the unpacked directory.
+
+2. Move all the new files into
+
+:Development:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:base:
+
+And create an alias of latex/base/ltpatch.ltx in this directory.
+
+3. Save the TeX log into :Development:unpacked: for future reference
+
+You have now created a latex/unpacked/ that will serve as a vehicle for creating
+the LaTeX preformatted macro package in the next step. Any runtime files will be
+found in latex/base/.
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+1. From Textures, open :Distribution:TeX formats:LaTeX R6P1 (which has
+a single line in it: \input latex.ltx\endinput). Make sure
+Typeset:Virtex 1.8ß1 is checked, then select File:Make Format. All of
+the files required for the run are in the folder unpacked, an alias of
+/latex/unpacked. Textures will ask you to help it find latex.ltx; once
+you do so, it will find the remainder.
+
+As part of Make Format, Textures will create an alias of LaTeX R6P1 in
+its TeX formats folder and immediately add it to its list of
+preformatted macro packages (under the Typeset menu). You will use
+this new version of LaTeX to generate further components of the
+runtime kit.
+
+2. The generated preformatted macro package is :Distribution:TeX
+formats:LaTeX RxPy, the very file you opened in Textures. Save the TeX
+Log in the same file after the \endinput statement following the
+suggestion in install.txt.
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+1. From latex/base and latex/unpacked, move into :Distribution:TeX
+inputs:€LaTeX RxPy all of the files specified in base/install.txt
+and leave an alias to each file in Development:TeX inputs:€LaTeX
+R5P0:base or -:unpacked, respectively.
+
+To paraphrase those instructions, move the files:
+docstrip.tex, idx.tex, lablst.tex, latexbug.tex, nfssfont.tex,
+sample2e.tex, small2e.tex, testpage.tex,
+and files matching * .cls, * .clo, * .sty, * .fd, * .def, * .cfg
+from latex/(base|unpacked)/.
+
+Note: If you have created your own latex/unpacked/, you will find that
+the *.tex files are mostly to be found in the latex/base/ directory
+(with the exception of docstrip.tex) and the rest of the files are
+mostly to be found in latex/unpacked/ (with the exception of
+ltnews.cls, ltxguide.cls, and minimal.cls). Also in this case, most
+all the files in latex/unpacked/ fall in this category, with the
+exception of the *.ltx files. The latter were generated in order to
+build the preformatted macro package and should be moved into the
+:Distribution:TeX formats:unpacked: folder.
+
+2. Put an alias of the folder :Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy: into
+the :Textures:TeX inputs: folder.
+
+Note that this last step mimics that taken when the end user installs
+LaTeX. Note also that when the end user wants to rebuild the
+preformattted macro package, they will simply retypeset the file
+:Distribution:TeX formats:LaTeX R6P1.
+
+GETTING A WORKING LaTeX
+=======================
+
+You need do nothing further to use your new LaTeX R6P1 format.
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+1. Open :Distribution:TeX formats:check.tex and typeset it under the
+LaTeX RxPy format. For comparison, my result is pasted into that file.
+
+2. Fonts: I am presently using Constantine Kahn's Textures metric
+suitcases named 8r reencoding, LucidaBright psnfss metrics, and
+LW35nfss metrics. These metric suitcases are required for the new
+psfonts font scheme, which appears to replace packages/psnfss.
+
+Note that in his own instructions, Kahn specifies adding resources to
+Edmetrics and, by extension, to Textures. This should be done by Blue
+Sky Research before this kit is distributed.
+
+For R4P0 and later, ltcheck complains that the ec fonts aren't there.
+These fonts may be obtained at
+$CTAN/systems/mac/textures/BitmapFonts/EC<version number>. If you are
+using the EC fonts, you may want to look at latex/base/ec.ins.
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+Please correspond with me if you have any problems:
+
+mailto: ogawa@teleport.com
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+There is no need to do any clearing up, because the only files
+included in the runtime kit are those specifically required at run
+time. All of the .dtx, .fdd, etc files remain in the CTAN mirror area,
+where you can process them further (for documentation) as you see fit.
+
+You might want to systematically typeset these documentation files,
+thereby creating a prepared documentation set for end-user
+distribution. A number of them already appear in /latex/docs; some
+further doc files are:
+
+*.ltx
+
+begleit.err
+compan.err
+manual.err
+
+ltx3info.tex
+
+FINALLY
+=======
+
+This file is the very <system>.tex file suggested by Team LaTeX. But
+it does not end here because preparing a runtime kit involves
+additionally creating the runtime files for LaTeX's packages.
+
+FILES THAT HAVE BEEN CUSTOMIZED FOR THE TEXTURES RELEASE OF LATEX
+=================================================================
+
+Four files customize LaTeX2e to Textures. They are:
+
+color.cfg
+graphics.cfg
+ltxdoc.cfg
+texsys.cfg (I'm trying out leaving this file out.)
+textures.def
+
+RUNTIME FILES FOR LATEX PACKAGES
+================================
+
+For each of the subdirectories under latex/packages, you carry out the
+following steps. For the purposes of illustration, consider the
+graphics package.
+
+1. In the folder :Development:TeX inputs:packages:graphics, open the
+file install, which has a single line:
+"\input graphics.ins".
+
+2. Now open latex/packages/graphics/graphics.ins.
+Then typeset "install" under the LaTeX RxPy format. Numerous files are
+created in the same folder as "install".
+
+3. Close graphics.ins and "install". Save the TeX log at the end of
+the file "install".
+
+4. Move all of the generated files into :Distribution:TeX
+inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:graphics.
+
+5. Make aliases of those same files in :Development:TeX
+inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:.
+
+The same series of steps can be carried out for mfnfss, psnfss, and tools but
+with the following qualifications:
+
+babel: This package involves creating a new preformatted macro package
+(with embedded hypenation patterns). Exactly which patterns are
+preloaded is determined by the builder. I have not included babel in
+the runtime kit because the configuration of babel depends on the
+needs of the end user. Suggestions?
+
+graphics: The build will not generate a textures.def. That file is
+provided directly in CTAN/macros/latex/packages/graphics/textures.def.
+Copy (or alias) that file to :Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX
+RxPy:graphics
+
+psnfss: this package is superseded by the new
+CTAN/tex-archive/fonts/psfonts macros. I have accordingly built that
+package and moved the relevant files into :Distribution:TeX
+inputs:€LaTeX RxPy. I built psfonts, lucida, and mathtime.
+
+mfnfss: proceed as for graphics. dccr not supported by Textures
+installation (no fonts).
+
+tools: proceed as for graphics.
+
+amslatex: simply alias the files in the packages/amslatex/inputs directory into
+:Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:amslatex.
+
+5. Put in files that customize LaTeX to the Textures environment. These are
+
+color.cfg
+graphics.cfg
+ltxdoc.cfg
+
+You can put them directly in :Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy. The files
+color.cfg ans graphics.cfg apply to the graphics package
+and the file ltxdoc.cfg applies to base/ltxdoc.ltx.
+
+RUNTIME FILES FOR THE PSFONTS PACKAGE
+=====================================
+
+The runtime files for fonts/psfonts is incorporated into the Textures
+release of LaTeX. The psfonts package supports typesetting with many
+PostScript Type 1 fonts from many different font foundaries.
+
+The files included are those in the respective tex/ directories and
+consist of mainly .fd files. There used to be a clobbering problem
+with the .sty files; the tools/ directory no longer contains a psnfss
+subdirectory, so things have changed.
+
+DOCUMENTATION IN TEXTURES FORMAT
+================================
+
+The DVI files in latex/docs are provided in :Distribution:Documentation:.
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+The following is a conveniently indented list showing the directory
+structure of the development environment and runtime kit for LaTeX.
+
+:LaTeX RxPy
+ Textures.txt
+ :Development
+ :base
+ unpack.ins
+ unpack
+ unpack TeX Log
+ :Documentation
+ :fonts
+ PS_Fonts_NFSS
+ PS_Fonts_NFSS.aux
+ PS_Fonts_NFSS.toc
+ :graphics
+ a.ps
+ Graphics_Bundle
+ Graphics_Bundle.aux
+ Graphics_Bundle.toc
+ :TeX formats
+ latex
+ texsys.aux
+ :TeX inputs
+ :€LaTeX RxPy flattened alias in :Distribution:TeX inputs:
+ color.cfg
+ contrib
+ graphics
+ graphics.cfg
+ ltxdoc.cfg
+ :amsfonts
+ amsdtx.cls
+ amsfonts.sty
+ amssymb.sty
+ cmmib57.sty
+ eucal.sty
+ eufrak.sty
+ euscript.sty
+ Ueuex.fd
+ Ueuex57.fd
+ Ueuf.fd
+ Ueuf57.fd
+ Ueur.fd
+ Ueur57.fd
+ Ueus.fd
+ Ueus57.fd
+ Umsa.fd
+ Umsa57.fd
+ Umsb.fd
+ Umsb57.fd
+ :amslatex
+ amsart.cls
+ amsbook.cls
+ amsbsy.sty
+ amscd.sty
+ amsdtx.cls
+ amsgen.sty
+ amsintx.sty
+ amsldoc.cls
+ amsmath.sty
+ amsopn.sty
+ amsproc.cls
+ amstex.sty
+ amstext.sty
+ amsthm.sty
+ amsxtra.sty
+ upref.sty
+ :babel
+ :base
+ alltt.sty
+ ansinew.def
+ applemac.def
+ article.cls
+ article.sty
+ ascii.def
+ bezier.sty
+ bk10.clo
+ bk11.clo
+ bk12.clo
+ book.cls
+ book.sty
+ cp437.def
+ cp437de.def
+ cp850.def
+ cp852.def
+ doc.sty
+ docstrip.tex
+ exscale.sty
+ flafter.sty
+ fleqn.clo
+ fleqn.sty
+ fontenc.sty
+ gglo.ist
+ gind.ist
+ graphpap.sty
+ idx.tex
+ ifthen.sty
+ inputenc.sty
+ lablst.tex
+ latex209.def
+ latexbug.tex
+ latexsym.sty
+ latin1.def
+ latin2.def
+ leqno.clo
+ leqno.sty
+ letter.cls
+ letter.sty
+ ltnews.cls
+ ltxdoc.cls
+ ltxguide.cls
+ makeidx.sty
+ minimal.cls
+ newlfont.sty
+ next.def
+ nfssfont.tex
+ oldlfont.sty
+ OMLcmm.fd
+ OMLcmr.fd
+ OMLenc.def
+ OMLlcmm.fd
+ OMScmr.fd
+ OMScmsy.fd
+ OMSenc.def
+ OMSlcmsy.fd
+ OMXcmex.fd
+ OMXlcmex.fd
+ openbib.sty
+ OT1cmdh.fd
+ OT1cmfib.fd
+ OT1cmfr.fd
+ OT1cmr.fd
+ OT1cmss.fd
+ OT1cmtt.fd
+ OT1cmvtt.fd
+ OT1enc.def
+ OT1lcmss.fd
+ OT1lcmtt.fd
+ proc.cls
+ proc.sty
+ report.cls
+ report.sty
+ sample2e.tex
+ sfonts.def
+ shortvrb.sty
+ showidx.sty
+ size10.clo
+ size11.clo
+ size12.clo
+ slides.cls
+ slides.def
+ slides.sty
+ small2e.tex
+ syntonly.sty
+ T1cmdh.fd
+ T1cmfib.fd
+ T1cmfr.fd
+ T1cmr.fd
+ T1cmss.fd
+ T1cmtt.fd
+ T1cmvtt.fd
+ T1enc.def
+ t1enc.sty
+ testpage.tex
+ texsys.cfg
+ tracefnt.sty
+ TS1cmr.fd
+ TS1cmss.fd
+ TS1cmtt.fd
+ TS1cmvtt.fd
+ Ucmr.fd
+ Ucmss.fd
+ Ucmtt.fd
+ Ulasy.fd
+ Ullasy.fd
+ :contrib
+ :graphics
+ color.sty
+ dvi2ps.def
+ dvialw.def
+ dvilaser.def
+ dvips.def
+ dvipsnam.def
+ dvipsone.def
+ dvitops.def
+ dviwin.def
+ emtex.def
+ epsfig.sty
+ graphics.sty
+ graphicx.sty
+ keyval.sty
+ ln.def
+ lscape.sty
+ oztex.def
+ pctexhp.def
+ pctexps.def
+ pctexwin.def
+ psprint.def
+ pstcol.sty
+ pubps.def
+ textures.def
+ trig.sty
+ :mfnfss
+ oldgerm.sty
+ OT1panr.fd
+ OT1pss.fd
+ pandora.sty
+ Uyfrak.fd
+ Uygoth.fd
+ Uyinit.fd
+ Uyswab.fd
+ :psfonts
+ :adobe
+ :agaramon
+ 8rpad.fd
+ OMLpad.fd
+ OMSpad.fd
+ OT1pad.fd
+ T1pad.fd
+ :avantgar
+ 8rpag.fd
+ OMLpag.fd
+ OMSpag.fd
+ OT1pag.fd
+ T1pag.fd
+ :baskervi
+ 8rpnb.fd
+ OMLpnb.fd
+ OMSpnb.fd
+ OT1pnb.fd
+ T1pnb.fd
+ :bembo
+ 8rpbb.fd
+ OMLpbb.fd
+ OMSpbb.fd
+ OT1pbb.fd
+ T1pbb.fd
+ :bookman
+ 8rpbk.fd
+ OMLpbk.fd
+ OMSpbk.fd
+ OT1pbk.fd
+ T1pbk.fd
+
+ :courier
+ 8rpcr.fd
+ courier.sty
+ OMLpcr.fd
+ OMSpcr.fd
+ OT1pcr.fd
+ T1pcr.fd
+ :garamond
+ 8rpgm.fd
+ OMLpgm.fd
+ OMSpgm.fd
+ OT1pgm.fd
+ T1pgm.fd
+ :gillsans
+ 8rpgs.fd
+ gillsans.sty
+ OMLpgs.fd
+ OMSpgs.fd
+ OT1pgs.fd
+ T1pgs.fd
+ :helvetic
+ 8rphv.fd
+ OMLphv.fd
+ OMSphv.fd
+ OT1phv.fd
+ T1phv.fd
+ :ncntrsbk
+ 8rpnc.fd
+ OMLpnc.fd
+ OMSpnc.fd
+ OT1pnc.fd
+ T1pnc.fd
+ :optima
+ 8rpop.fd
+ OMLpop.fd
+ OMSpop.fd
+ optima.sty
+ OT1pop.fd
+ T1pop.fd
+ :palatino
+ 8rppl.fd
+ OMLppl.fd
+ OMSppl.fd
+ OT1ppl.fd
+ T1ppl.fd
+ :symbol
+ Upsy.fd
+ :times
+ 8rptm.fd
+ OMLptm.fd
+ OMLptmcm.fd
+ OMSptm.fd
+ OMSpzccm.fd
+ OMXpsycm.fd
+ OT1ptm.fd
+ OT1ptmcm.fd
+ T1ptm.fd
+ :univers
+ 8rpun.fd
+ OMLpun.fd
+ OMSpun.fd
+ OT1pun.fd
+ T1pun.fd
+ univers.sty
+ :utopia
+ 8rput.fd
+ OMLput.fd
+ OMSput.fd
+ OT1put.fd
+ T1put.fd
+ :zapfchan
+ 8rpzc.fd
+ OMLpzc.fd
+ OMSpzc.fd
+ OT1pzc.fd
+ T1pzc.fd
+ :zapfding
+ Upzd.fd
+ :bh
+ :lubright
+ 8rhlh.fd
+ lubright.sty
+ OMLhlh.fd
+ OMShlh.fd
+ OT1hlh.fd
+ T1hlh.fd
+ :lucida
+ 8rhlce.fd
+ 8rhlcf.fd
+ 8rhlcn.fd
+ 8rhlct.fd
+ 8rhlcw.fd
+ lucida.sty
+ OMLhlce.fd
+ OMLhlcf.fd
+ OMLhlcn.fd
+ OMLhlct.fd
+ OMLhlcw.fd
+ OMShlce.fd
+ OMShlcf.fd
+ OMShlcn.fd
+ OMShlct.fd
+ OMShlcw.fd
+ OT1hlce.fd
+ OT1hlcf.fd
+ OT1hlcn.fd
+ OT1hlct.fd
+ OT1hlcw.fd
+ T1hlce.fd
+ T1hlcf.fd
+ T1hlcn.fd
+ T1hlct.fd
+ T1hlcw.fd
+ :lucidfax
+ 8rhlx.fd
+ lucidfax.sty
+ OMLhlx.fd
+ OMShlx.fd
+ OT1hlx.fd
+ T1hlx.fd
+ :lucsans
+ 8rhls.fd
+ 8rhlst.fd
+ lucsans.sty
+ OMLhls.fd
+ OMLhlst.fd
+ OMShls.fd
+ OMShlst.fd
+ OT1hls.fd
+ OT1hlst.fd
+ T1hls.fd
+ T1hlst.fd
+ :tools
+ avant.sty
+ basker.sty
+ bembo.sty
+ bookman.sty
+ chancery.sty
+ charter.sty
+ garamond.sty
+ helvet.sty
+ LMRhlcm.fd
+ LMRlbm.fd
+ lucbmath.sty
+ lucbr.sty
+ lucfont.tex
+ lucid.sty
+ lucidbrb.sty
+ lucidbry.sty
+ lucmath.sty
+ lucmtime.sty
+ mathptm.sty
+ mathtime.sty
+ mtimes.sty
+ newcent.sty
+ nimbus.sty
+ OMLhlcm.fd
+ OMLhlh.fd
+ OMLlbm.fd
+ OMLmtt.fd
+ OMLplcm.fd
+ OMShlcy.fd
+ OMShlh.fd
+ OMSlb.fd
+ OMSlby.fd
+ OMSmtt.fd
+ OMSplcy.fd
+ OMXhlcv.fd
+ OMXlbv.fd
+ OMXmtt.fd
+ OMXplcv.fd
+ OT1lb.fd
+ OT1lbf.fd
+ OT1lbs.fd
+ OT1lbt.fd
+ OT1unmr.fd
+ OT1unmrs.fd
+ palatino.sty
+ pifont.sty
+ T1unmr.fd
+ T1unmrs.fd
+ times.sty
+ utopia.sty
+ :psnfss
+ avant.sty
+ bookman.sty
+ chancery.sty
+ helvet.sty
+ mathptm.sty
+ newcent.sty
+ palatino.sty
+ pifont.sty
+ times.sty
+ :tools
+ .tex
+ afterpage.sty
+ array.sty
+ dcolumn.sty
+ delarray.sty
+ e.tex
+ enumerate.sty
+ fontsmpl.sty
+ fontsmpl.tex
+ ftnright.sty
+ h.tex
+ hhline.sty
+ indentfirst.sty
+ layout.sty
+ longtable.sty
+ multicol.sty
+ rawfonts.sty
+ s.tex
+ showkeys.sty
+ somedefs.sty
+ tabularx.sty
+ thb.sty
+ thc.sty
+ thcb.sty
+ theorem.sty
+ thm.sty
+ thmb.sty
+ thp.sty
+ varioref.sty
+ verbatim.sty
+ verbtest.tex
+ x.tex
+ xr.sty
+ xspace.sty
+ :packages
+ :graphics
+ install
+ install.TeX Log
+ :mfnfss
+ oldgerm
+ oldgerm TeX log
+ pandora
+ pandora TeX log
+ :psnfss
+ psfonts
+ psfonts TeX log
+ :tools
+ tools
+ tools TeX log
+ :psnfss.beta
+ charter
+ charter TeX log
+ lucida
+ lucida TeX log
+ mathtime
+ mathtime TeX log
+ nimbus
+ nimbus TeX log
+ psfonts
+ psfonts TeX Log
+ utopia
+ utopia TeX log
+ :unpacked
+ check
+ check TeX Log
+ :Distribution
+ :Documentation
+ a.ps
+ Author Guide
+ Class Guide
+ Configuration Options
+ Font Selection
+ Graphics Bundle
+ LaTeX News 01
+ LaTeX News 02
+ LaTeX News 03
+ LaTeX News 04
+ LaTeX News 05
+ Modifying LaTeX
+ PS Fonts NFSS
+ color
+ :TeX fonts
+ 8r reencoding
+ AMS virtual metrics
+ AMS/PS Metrics
+ Lucida Bright psnfss metrics
+ LW35 psnfss metrics
+ phvluc metrics
+ ptmluc metrics
+ :TeX formats
+ LaTeX RxPy
+ LaTeX RxPy TeX log
+ :TeX inputs
+ :€LaTeX RxPy
+ .tex
+ 8rhlce.fd
+ 8rhlcf.fd
+ 8rhlcn.fd
+ 8rhlct.fd
+ 8rhlcw.fd
+ 8rhlh.fd
+ 8rhls.fd
+ 8rhlst.fd
+ 8rhlx.fd
+ 8rpad.fd
+ 8rpag.fd
+ 8rpbb.fd
+ 8rpbk.fd
+ 8rpcr.fd
+ 8rpgm.fd
+ 8rpgs.fd
+ 8rphv.fd
+ 8rpnb.fd
+ 8rpnc.fd
+ 8rpop.fd
+ 8rppl.fd
+ 8rptm.fd
+ 8rpun.fd
+ 8rput.fd
+ 8rpzc.fd
+ afterpage.sty
+ alltt.sty
+ amsart.cls
+ amsbook.cls
+ amsbsy.sty
+ amscd.sty
+ amsdtx.cls
+ amsdtx.cls 2
+ amsfonts.sty
+ amsgen.sty
+ amsintx.sty
+ amsldoc.cls
+ amsmath.sty
+ amsopn.sty
+ amsproc.cls
+ amssymb.sty
+ amstex.sty
+ amstext.sty
+ amsthm.sty
+ amsxtra.sty
+ ansinew.def
+ applemac.def
+ array.sty
+ article.cls
+ article.sty
+ ascii.def
+ avant.sty
+ basker.sty
+ bembo.sty
+ bezier.sty
+ bk10.clo
+ bk11.clo
+ bk12.clo
+ book.cls
+ book.sty
+ bookman.sty
+ chancery.sty
+ charter.sty
+ cmmib57.sty
+ color.cfg
+ color.sty
+ courier.sty
+ cp437.def
+ cp437de.def
+ cp850.def
+ cp852.def
+ dcolumn.sty
+ delarray.sty
+ doc.sty
+ docstrip.tex
+ dvi2ps.def
+ dvialw.def
+ dvilaser.def
+ dvips.def
+ dvipsnam.def
+ dvipsone.def
+ dvitops.def
+ dviwin.def
+ e.tex
+ emtex.def
+ enumerate.sty
+ epsfig.sty
+ eucal.sty
+ eufrak.sty
+ euscript.sty
+ exscale.sty
+ flafter.sty
+ fleqn.clo
+ fleqn.sty
+ fontenc.sty
+ fontsmpl.sty
+ fontsmpl.tex
+ ftnright.sty
+ garamond.sty
+ gglo.ist
+ gillsans.sty
+ gind.ist
+ graphics.cfg
+ graphics.sty
+ graphicx.sty
+ graphpap.sty
+ h.tex
+ helvet.sty
+ hhline.sty
+ idx.tex
+ ifthen.sty
+ indentfirst.sty
+ inputenc.sty
+ keyval.sty
+ lablst.tex
+ latex209.def
+ latexbug.tex
+ latexsym.sty
+ latin1.def
+ latin2.def
+ layout.sty
+ leqno.clo
+ leqno.sty
+ letter.cls
+ letter.sty
+ LMRhlcm.fd
+ LMRlbm.fd
+ ln.def
+ longtable.sty
+ lscape.sty
+ ltnews.cls
+ ltxdoc.cfg
+ ltxdoc.cls
+ ltxguide.cls
+ lubright.sty
+ lucbmath.sty
+ lucbr.sty
+ lucfont.tex
+ lucid.sty
+ lucida.sty
+ lucidbrb.sty
+ lucidbry.sty
+ lucidfax.sty
+ lucmath.sty
+ lucmtime.sty
+ lucsans.sty
+ makeidx.sty
+ mathptm.sty
+ mathtime.sty
+ minimal.cls
+ mtimes.sty
+ multicol.sty
+ newcent.sty
+ newlfont.sty
+ next.def
+ nfssfont.tex
+ nimbus.sty
+ oldgerm.sty
+ oldlfont.sty
+ OMLcmm.fd
+ OMLcmr.fd
+ OMLenc.def
+ OMLhlce.fd
+ OMLhlcf.fd
+ OMLhlcm.fd
+ OMLhlcn.fd
+ OMLhlct.fd
+ OMLhlcw.fd
+ OMLhlh.fd
+ OMLhls.fd
+ OMLhlst.fd
+ OMLhlx.fd
+ OMLlbm.fd
+ OMLlcmm.fd
+ OMLmtt.fd
+ OMLpad.fd
+ OMLpag.fd
+ OMLpbb.fd
+ OMLpbk.fd
+ OMLpcr.fd
+ OMLpgm.fd
+ OMLpgs.fd
+ OMLphv.fd
+ OMLplcm.fd
+ OMLpnb.fd
+ OMLpnc.fd
+ OMLpop.fd
+ OMLppl.fd
+ OMLptm.fd
+ OMLptmcm.fd
+ OMLpun.fd
+ OMLput.fd
+ OMLpzc.fd
+ OMScmr.fd
+ OMScmsy.fd
+ OMSenc.def
+ OMShlce.fd
+ OMShlcf.fd
+ OMShlcn.fd
+ OMShlct.fd
+ OMShlcw.fd
+ OMShlcy.fd
+ OMShlh.fd
+ OMShls.fd
+ OMShlst.fd
+ OMShlx.fd
+ OMSlb.fd
+ OMSlby.fd
+ OMSlcmsy.fd
+ OMSmtt.fd
+ OMSpad.fd
+ OMSpag.fd
+ OMSpbb.fd
+ OMSpbk.fd
+ OMSpcr.fd
+ OMSpgm.fd
+ OMSpgs.fd
+ OMSphv.fd
+ OMSplcy.fd
+ OMSpnb.fd
+ OMSpnc.fd
+ OMSpop.fd
+ OMSppl.fd
+ OMSptm.fd
+ OMSpun.fd
+ OMSput.fd
+ OMSpzc.fd
+ OMSpzccm.fd
+ OMXcmex.fd
+ OMXhlcv.fd
+ OMXlbv.fd
+ OMXlcmex.fd
+ OMXmtt.fd
+ OMXplcv.fd
+ OMXpsycm.fd
+ openbib.sty
+ optima.sty
+ OT1cmdh.fd
+ OT1cmfib.fd
+ OT1cmfr.fd
+ OT1cmr.fd
+ OT1cmss.fd
+ OT1cmtt.fd
+ OT1cmvtt.fd
+ OT1enc.def
+ OT1hlce.fd
+ OT1hlcf.fd
+ OT1hlcn.fd
+ OT1hlct.fd
+ OT1hlcw.fd
+ OT1hlh.fd
+ OT1hls.fd
+ OT1hlst.fd
+ OT1hlx.fd
+ OT1lb.fd
+ OT1lbf.fd
+ OT1lbs.fd
+ OT1lbt.fd
+ OT1lcmss.fd
+ OT1lcmtt.fd
+ OT1pad.fd
+ OT1pag.fd
+ OT1panr.fd
+ OT1pbb.fd
+ OT1pbk.fd
+ OT1pcr.fd
+ OT1pgm.fd
+ OT1pgs.fd
+ OT1phv.fd
+ OT1pnb.fd
+ OT1pnc.fd
+ OT1pop.fd
+ OT1ppl.fd
+ OT1pss.fd
+ OT1ptm.fd
+ OT1ptmcm.fd
+ OT1pun.fd
+ OT1put.fd
+ OT1pzc.fd
+ OT1unmr.fd
+ OT1unmrs.fd
+ oztex.def
+ palatino.sty
+ pandora.sty
+ pctexhp.def
+ pctexps.def
+ pctexwin.def
+ pifont.sty
+ proc.cls
+ proc.sty
+ psprint.def
+ pstcol.sty
+ pubps.def
+ rawfonts.sty
+ report.cls
+ report.sty
+ s.tex
+ sample2e.tex
+ sfonts.def
+ shortvrb.sty
+ showidx.sty
+ showkeys.sty
+ size10.clo
+ size11.clo
+ size12.clo
+ slides.cls
+ slides.def
+ slides.sty
+ small2e.tex
+ somedefs.sty
+ syntonly.sty
+ T1cmdh.fd
+ T1cmfib.fd
+ T1cmfr.fd
+ T1cmr.fd
+ T1cmss.fd
+ T1cmtt.fd
+ T1cmvtt.fd
+ T1enc.def
+ t1enc.sty
+ T1hlce.fd
+ T1hlcf.fd
+ T1hlcn.fd
+ T1hlct.fd
+ T1hlcw.fd
+ T1hlh.fd
+ T1hls.fd
+ T1hlst.fd
+ T1hlx.fd
+ T1pad.fd
+ T1pag.fd
+ T1pbb.fd
+ T1pbk.fd
+ T1pcr.fd
+ T1pgm.fd
+ T1pgs.fd
+ T1phv.fd
+ T1pnb.fd
+ T1pnc.fd
+ T1pop.fd
+ T1ppl.fd
+ T1ptm.fd
+ T1pun.fd
+ T1put.fd
+ T1pzc.fd
+ T1unmr.fd
+ T1unmrs.fd
+ tabularx.sty
+ testpage.tex
+ texsys.cfg
+ textures.def
+ thb.sty
+ thc.sty
+ thcb.sty
+ theorem.sty
+ thm.sty
+ thmb.sty
+ thp.sty
+ times.sty
+ tracefnt.sty
+ trig.sty
+ TS1cmr.fd
+ TS1cmss.fd
+ TS1cmtt.fd
+ TS1cmvtt.fd
+ Ucmr.fd
+ Ucmss.fd
+ Ucmtt.fd
+ Ueuex.fd
+ Ueuex57.fd
+ Ueuf.fd
+ Ueuf57.fd
+ Ueur.fd
+ Ueur57.fd
+ Ueus.fd
+ Ueus57.fd
+ Ulasy.fd
+ Ullasy.fd
+ Umsa.fd
+ Umsa57.fd
+ Umsb.fd
+ Umsb57.fd
+ univers.sty
+ upref.sty
+ Upsy.fd
+ Upzd.fd
+ utopia.sty
+ Uyfrak.fd
+ Uygoth.fd
+ Uyinit.fd
+ Uyswab.fd
+ varioref.sty
+ verbatim.sty
+ verbtest.tex
+ x.tex
+ xr.sty
+ xspace.sty
+
+
+The installation kit for the runtime files is the :Distribution:
+folder and its contents. The end user should install by creating
+aliases of the contents of the TeX fonts, TeX formats, and TeX inputs
+folders in the respective folders of their Textures installation.
+
+Note in particular that this means putting an alias of €LaTeX RxPy
+into their TeX inputs folder, *not* aliases of the *contents* of the
+€LaTeX RxPy folder. The object is to ensure that, insofar possible,
+the only aliases in the TeX inputs folder are aliases of €-style
+folders.
+
+contrib/
+ other/
+ adrlist/
+ alg/
+ apa/
+ apacite/
+ bg/
+ calrsfs/
+ chemsym/
+ cmcyralt/
+ concmath/
+ crosswrd/
+ dmfonts/
+ dotseqn/
+ dropping/
+ eepic/
+ eiad/
+ envbig/
+ epic/
+ floatflt/
+ fp/
+ fragments/
+ fraktur/
+ gene/
+ grnumalt/
+ ipa/
+ lastpage/
+ lexitex/
+ lgreek/
+ lifia-th/
+ misc/
+ mpfnmark/
+ newthm/
+ ogonek/
+ oldstyle/
+ psnfss-addons/
+ qobitree/
+ recipe/
+ script/
+ seminar/
+ siam/
+ smallcap/
+ swift/
+ timesht/
+ timing/
+ vdm/
+ vita/
+ williams/
+ xymtex/
+ yplan96/
+ yplan97/
+ zed-csp/
+ supported/
+ a4/
+ achemso/
+ acronym/
+ afthesis/
+ aguplus/
+ aiaa/
+ akletter/
+ algorithms/
+ altfont/
+ answers/
+ bbm/
+ beton/
+ bm/
+ booktabs/
+ calc/
+ calendar/
+ camel/
+ caption/
+ carlisle/
+ ccfonts/
+ changebar/
+ chemcono/
+ cite/
+ codepage/
+ concprog/
+ count1to/
+ covington/
+ curves/
+ custom-bib/
+ cweb/
+ dates/
+ deleq/
+ dialogl/
+ dinbrief/
+ draftcopy/
+ dtk/
+ easy/
+ elsevier/
+ endfloat/
+ envlab/
+ eqnarray/
+ ethiop/
+ euler/
+ everysel/
+ everyshi/
+ exams/
+ expdlist/
+ export/
+ fancyhdr/
+ fax/
+ feynmf/
+ float/
+ fncychap/
+ foiltex/
+ footnote/
+ footnpag/
+ fribrief/
+ g-brief/
+ gb4e/
+ geometry/
+ harpoon/
+ harvard/
+ hh/
+ histogr/
+ hyper/
+ hyperref/
+ ieeepes/
+ ifaccong/
+ ifacmtg/
+ indxcite/
+ inputenc/
+ isostds/
+ jknappen/
+ jura/
+ koi8/
+ koma-script/
+ labels/
+ levy/
+ LH/
+ lineno/
+ localloc/
+ ltablex/
+ mailing/
+ mapcodes/
+ maple/
+ mathcomp/
+ mcite/
+ mdwfonts/
+ mdwtools/
+ mff/
+ mflogo/
+ minitoc/
+ mlbib/
+ monster/
+ moreverb/
+ mslapa/
+ nassflow/
+ natbib/
+ newalg/
+ niceframe/
+ nomencl/
+ ntgclass/
+ numline/
+ objectz/
+ paper/
+ parallel/
+ pb-diagram/
+ piff/
+ pmat/
+ pmgraph/
+ prelim2e/
+ prettyref/
+ progkeys/
+ program/
+ psfrag/
+ pslatex/
+ psnfssx/
+ qsymbols/
+ ragged2e/
+ rcs/
+ rcsinfo/
+ refman/
+ rotating/
+ rotfloat/
+ rplain/
+ saferef/
+ scale/
+ semantic/
+ setspace/
+ shadbox/
+ shadethm/
+ showlabels/
+ siggraph/
+ slidenotes/
+ songbook/
+ ssqquote/
+ stmaryrd/
+ subeqn/
+ subeqnarray/
+ subfigure/
+ supertabular/
+ termcal/
+ textfit/
+ textmerg/
+ thesis/
+ tpcmfont/
+ tracking/
+ treesvr/
+ tugboat/
+ type1cm/
+ uaclasses/
+ ucthesis/
+ ulsy/
+ umlaute/
+ underlin/
+ unswthesis/
+ utthesis/
+ uwthesis/
+ vector/
+ vrsion/
+ wasysym/
+ xypic/
+ yhmath/
+ youngtab/
+
+Bugs:
+
+compare p. 10 of the grfguide (Textures vs. dvips):
+Replacement bounding box and clipping do not work in Textures.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/truetex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/truetex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ab7d56449b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/truetex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for TrueTeX for Windows 95/98/NT
+
+ 19 February 1999
+ (Revised 31 August 2001)
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file (truetex.txt) is part of the LaTeX distribution, and contains
+instructions on how to install LaTeX with TrueTeX for Windows 95/98/NT.
+
+Since the TrueTeX distribution includes all of the base LaTeX macros, you
+should be installing another LaTeX base distribution only to update the LaTeX
+base macros. In fact, you may find it more convenient to simply order and
+install the lastest TrueTeX update when you want the latest LaTeX; that way
+you can get the freshest TrueTeX *and* LaTeX software with the ease and
+security of TrueTeX automatic installation.
+
+Before reading this file, you should review install.txt from the LaTeX
+distribution, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works in general.
+TrueTeX introduces very few exceptions to that generic process.
+
+This file describes the following, specifically for TrueTeX:
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the file
+"hyphen.tex" (English hyphenation) and the .tfm (TeX font metric) files, which
+are included in the TrueTeX distribution and should already be installed.
+
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+TrueTeX is carefully designed and implemented to bring the widest
+compatibility with TeX and LaTeX to the Windows environment. We have included
+features like virtual fonts and recursive directory searching that many other
+implementations omit. The luxury of Windows virtual memory and the voluptuous
+allowances in TrueTeX remove the constraints implied by the old TeX memory
+limitations.
+
+The Unix-style configuration to which the LaTeX distribution defaults is
+appropriate and compatible with TrueTeX. TrueTeX does not require any special
+configuration to run LaTeX, such as a texsys.cfg file.
+
+Note that the earlier releases of TrueTeX used the directory \TrueTeX\macros
+for both plain TeX and LaTeX base macros. Later releases (4.1D and later)
+use the standard TeX directory structure (TDS) directory
+\TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base. All of the instructions below assume you are using
+the directory \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base for the LaTeX base macros, and you
+should substitute the appropriate directory if you have an older release or a
+different starting directory.
+
+The availability of non-English hyphenation in LaTeX is controlled by a
+configuration file hyphen.cfg, which you can create to alter the LaTeX
+defaults. Creating such a file is explained elsewhere in the LaTeX
+distribution, and in references such as _The LaTeX Companion_. If you want to
+configure LaTeX for non-English hyphenation, we suggest that you create a
+bi-lingual hyphenation configuration, with language 0 (the default) as
+English, which will provide compatibility with the LaTeX documentation files,
+which are written in English.
+
+SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+================================
+
+There are several techniques for retaining the older version of LaTeX.
+Usually, the only compelling reason to do so is to insure against trouble with
+a failed installation of the new version. If you are brave and reckless,
+you can just wipe the old files and start over with the new distribution.
+
+However, for the more conservative and cautious, if you're not concerned with
+being able to actually run the old version in parallel with the new, then we
+recommend you create a zip archive of the old macro and format files and then
+delete the unzipped versions. Another easy technique which leaves the old
+version readily accessible is to rename a subdirectory of the base directory,
+for example renaming \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base to \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\oldbase or
+\TrueTeX\TeX\oldLaTeX\base; then re-creating the \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+directory to receive the new installation.
+
+In either case, once you are satisfied that the new LaTeX is working and
+complete, you have already separated the old version and made it easy to
+delete.
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+The LaTeX project authors publish their work as a set of distribution files
+named with a .ins ("install") extension. Each such distribution file combines
+the macros and documentation for a component of LaTeX. Your first step in
+installing LaTeX is to unpack these install-files, thereby creating more
+compact versions (having the documentation stripped out).
+
+The unpacking method is unusual: To unpack the LaTeX distribution files, you
+run iniTeX (not LaTeX or plain TeX) on unpack.ins, which has a side effect of
+writing out a large set of files that make up the LaTeX macros. The procedure
+is as follows, running the TrueTeX formatter as iniTeX:
+
+ * Launch the TrueTeX formatter. Select "Cancel" on the file-open
+ dialog if that dialog appears.
+
+ * Select "Preload" (which might read "Preload=latex" or some other
+ preloaded format name) from the menu bar.
+
+ * Observe the "Select Preloaded Format File" dialog. Select "Default"
+ (which indicates you want no file preloaded) and "OK". The "Preload"
+ item on the menu bar should now read simply "Preload".
+
+ * Select File + Open, navigate to the directory where you have placed the
+ LaTeX distribution files, and type in the filename you want to
+ format, namely unpack.ins in this case.
+
+ * Select "Go" to begin the formatting. The formatter window will close
+ after it finishes, and you can examine the file unpack.log to examine
+ the messages that might have scrolled by too quickly for you to read.
+
+ This does not generate a format file; the instructions in the next section
+ create the LaTeX format file.
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+To create the LaTeX format file (latex.fmt) for TrueTeX, run iniTeX on
+latex.ltx. The procedure using TrueTeX is as follows:
+
+ * Follow the steps in the previous section to launch the TrueTeX
+ formatter and select no preloaded format file; except on the last
+ step, select latex.ltx as the file in the File Open dialog. This
+ will generate the format file latex.fmt and close the formatter
+ window.
+
+ * Move the file latex.fmt to the TrueTeX formats directory. Normally this
+ is c:\truetex\formats (in TrueTeX releases up to and including 4.1C) or
+ c:\truetex\truetex (in later releases). The drive and top directory
+ will be different if you chose to install TrueTeX in a different
+ directory than the default c:\truetex during TrueTeX installation.
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+Use the following console commands to copy the LaTeX files (which are now
+unpacked) to the appropriate inputs directory for TrueTeX (you may want to
+paste the following lines into a batch file and run them that way instead of
+typing them yourself):
+
+ copy latexbug.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy testpage.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy lablst.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy idx.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy nfssfont.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy small2e.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy sample2e.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy docstrip.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy *.cls \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy *.clo \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy *.sty \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy *.fd \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy *.def \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy *.cfg \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+ copy *.ist \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base
+
+ Note: the LaTeX base directory is \truetex\macros instead of
+ \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base in TrueTeX releases 4.1C and earlier.
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+You now have a new working LaTeX installed. If you had a LaTeX icon
+specifying "&latex" in the command-line as an option, it should automatically
+use the new LaTeX. You should also be able to select the preloaded format
+latex.fmt using the Preload item in the formatter menu by selecting the Search
+button.
+
+Launch LaTeX and format the file ltxcheck.tex from the LaTeX distribution.
+This will produce some `OK' and the following `BAD' warnings, which you can
+ignore:
+
+ "article.cls appears to be in current directory! ... ! BAD: This file
+ should not be run in a `standard input directory'."
+
+ EXPLANATION: If article.cls is not in the current directory (that is, the
+ directory where you navigated to open ltxcheck.lts) this can be a false
+ alarm, due to the fact that LaTeX is not aware that the TrueTeX formatter
+ (release 4.1C or earlier) did path-searching for input files, even if when
+ file names indicated the current directory. This lack of awareness does
+ not affect normal operation of LaTeX. If you are running release 4.1D or
+ later of the formatter, you should not see this message, unless article.cls
+ is indeed in the current directory. If you really want to know where the
+ formatter is finding the file article.cls, select "Debug+Show File Opens"
+ and run the format of ltxcheck.ltx again.
+
+ "! BAD: No ec fonts found!! ... LaTeX does not require the use of ec
+ fonts however they are strongly recommended."
+
+ - or -
+
+ "! BAD dc fonts 1.2 or older installed.
+ Current (as of 1997/01/14) dc font release is 1.3.
+ These dc fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:
+ tex-archive/fonts/dc.
+ They are expected to be replaced by ec fonts very soon."
+
+ EXPLANATION: TrueTeX does not supply the dc fonts release 1.2 or the ec
+ fonts, although a dc fonts release 1.1 is available. Regrettably, the
+ later releases of the METAFONT bitmap fonts were re-designed such that the
+ font name is used to indicate the font's optical scaling, which is an
+ irrational scheme generally incompatible with scalable font technology such
+ as is used in TrueType or ATM. (Later releases multiplied optical sizes to
+ the point that lately there are over 500 EC fonts, which is an impossible
+ amount of effort to convert to scalable form or to reliably install in
+ Windows.) If you want to use the TrueTeX dc fonts release 1.1, run the
+ olddc.ins through initex and move the resulting files to the TrueTeX inputs
+ directory.
+
+ "The LaTeX2e installation has installed fd files for release 1.2 (or
+ later) of the dc fonts. However, you appear to have only release 1.1 of
+ these fonts. You must now generate the correct fd files by running:
+ latex olddc.ins and then rebuild the format by rerunning: initex
+ latex.ltx ... ! BAD LaTeX2e system!!."
+
+ EXPLANATION: You no doubt forgot to run olddc.ins through iniTeX before
+ generating the LaTeX format file.
+
+ "The fd files for the obsolete release 1.1 of the
+ dc fonts have been loaded into the LaTeX format.
+ However, you appear to have at least release 1.2 of the dc fonts.
+ You should generate suitable fd files by running ..."
+
+ EXPLANATION: You probably have the DC 1.2 metric files (*.tfm's, which is
+ all ltxcheck.ltx is looking for) from some other source. But you won't
+ have the actual TrueType fonts (not from TrueTeX, anyway; they don't exist,
+ at least not yet). Leave the selection of the release 1.1 names in place;
+ *don't* take the advice to "generate suitable fd files".
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+If you get error messages regarding missing fonts lcircle10 and lcirclew10,
+use the Winodws 95/98/NT console to copy the 8-character names to the longer
+names:
+
+ cd \truetex\fonts
+ copy lcircle1.tfm lcircle10.tfm
+ copy lcirclw1.tfm lcirclew10.tfm
+
+You may report additional problems installing LaTeX with TrueTeX to the
+publisher's e-mail address given in the "About" dialog of either the TrueTeX
+formatter or previewer, which as of this writing is: kinch@truetex.com.
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+Consult the install.txt instructions for removing unneeded LaTeX distribution
+files.
+
+ --- Copyright 1997, 1999 Richard J Kinch and the LaTeX3 project ---
+ --- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..96be0c5a97e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c07585982ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1810 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: usrguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[2001/05/28]
+
+\title{\LaTeXe~for authors}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2001, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+ All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{31 July 2001}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+Welcome to \LaTeXe, the new standard version of the \LaTeX{} Document
+Preparation System.
+
+This document describes how to take advantage of the new features of
+\LaTeX, and how to process your old \LaTeX{} documents with
+\LaTeXe. However, this document is only a brief introduction to the
+new facilities and is intended for authors who are already familiar
+with the old version of \LaTeX{}. It is \emph{not} a reference manual
+for \LaTeXe{} nor is it a complete introduction to \LaTeX.
+
+\subsection{\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release}
+
+The previous version of \LaTeX{} was known as \LaTeX~2.09. Over the
+years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This is, of
+course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had one
+unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at
+different sites. This included `standard \LaTeX~2.09', \LaTeX{} built
+with the \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~(\NFSS), \SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX,
+and so on. Thus, to process documents from various places, a site
+maintainer was forced to keep multiple versions of the \LaTeX{}
+program. In addition, when looking at a source file it was not always
+clear for which format the document was written.
+
+To put an end to this unsatisfactory situation, \LaTeXe{} has been
+produced; it brings all such extensions back under a single format and
+thus prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of
+\LaTeX~2.09. With \LaTeXe{} the `new font selection scheme' is
+standard and, for example, \textsf{amsmath} (formerly the \AmSLaTeX{}
+format) or \textsf{slides} (formerly the \SLiTeX{} format) are simply
+extensions, which may be loaded by documents using the same base format.
+
+The introduction of a new release also made it possible to add a small
+number of often-requested features and to make the task of writing
+packages and classes simpler.
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX3---The long-term future of \LaTeX}
+\label{Sec:ltx3}
+
+\LaTeXe{} is the consolidation step in a comprehensive
+reimplementation of the \LaTeX{} system. The next major release of
+\LaTeX{} will be \LaTeX3, which will include a radical overhaul of the
+document designers' and package writers' interface to \LaTeX.
+
+\LaTeX3 is a long-term research project but, until it is completed,
+the project team are committed to the active maintenance of \LaTeXe{}.
+Thus the experience gained from the production and maintenance of
+\LaTeXe{} will be a major influence on the design of \LaTeX3.
+A brief description of the project can be found in the document
+|ltx3info.tex|.
+
+If you would like to support the project then you are welcome to send
+donations to the \LaTeX3 Project Fund; this has been set up to help
+the research team by financing various expenses associated with this
+voluntary work of maintaining the current \LaTeX{} and developing
+\LaTeX3.
+
+The fund is administered by The \TeX{} Users Group and by various
+local user groups. Information about making donations and joining
+these groups is available from:
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+ \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239, Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\
+ Fax:~+1~209~561~4584 \ Email: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org}
+
+ UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB, UK\\
+ Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk}
+\end{quote}
+
+The \LaTeX3{} project has its home page
+on the World Wide Web at:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ http://www.latex-project.org/
+\end{verbatim}
+This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains
+pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the
+\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database.
+
+Older articles covering aspects of the \LaTeX3 project are also
+available for anonymous ftp from the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, in
+the directory:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ tex-archive/info/ltx3pub
+\end{verbatim}
+The file |ltx3pub.bib| in that directory contains an abstract of each
+of the files.
+
+\subsection{Overview}
+
+This document contains an overview of the new structure and features
+of \LaTeX. It is \emph{not} a self-contained document, as it contains
+only the features of \LaTeX{} which have changed since version 2.09.
+You should read this document in conjunction with an introduction to
+\LaTeX{}.
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages}]
+ contains an overview of the new structure of
+ \LaTeX{} documents. It describes how classes and packages work and
+ how class and package options can be used. It lists the standard
+ packages and classes which come with \LaTeX.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] describes the new commands available
+ to authors in \LaTeXe.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:209}] shows how to process old \LaTeX{}
+ documents with \LaTeXe.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:problems}] contains advice on dealing with
+ problems you may encounter in running \LaTeXe.
+ It lists some error messages which are new in \LaTeXe{} and
+ it describes some of the more common problems and how to cure them,
+ or where to find further information.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Further information}
+
+For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of
+\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}
+by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}.
+
+A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including
+an overview of more than 150 packages, is to be found in
+\emph{\LaTeXcomp} by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
+Samarin~\cite{A-W:GMS94}.
+
+Packages and programs for producing and manipulating graphics are
+discussed at length in \emph{\LaTeXGcomp} by Michel Goossens,
+Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach~\cite{A-W:GRM97}.
+
+Solutions for publishing with \LaTeX{} on the World Wide Web are given
+in \emph{\LaTeXWcomp} by Michel Goossens and Sebastian
+Rahtz~\cite{A-W:GR99}.
+
+For more information about the many new \LaTeX{} packages you should
+read the package documentation, which should be available from the
+same source as your copy of \LaTeX.
+
+There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy
+of \LaTeX. A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each
+six-monthly release of \LaTeX; it will be found in the files
+|ltnews*.tex|. The class- and package-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide}
+describes the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes
+and packages; it is in |clsguide.tex|. The guide \emph{\fntguide}
+describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for class- and
+package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Support for cyrillic languages
+in \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\cyrguide}.
+
+We are gradually turning the source code for \LaTeX{} into a \LaTeX{}
+document \emph{\sourcecode}. This document includes an index of
+\LaTeX{} commands and can be typeset from |source2e.tex|.
+
+For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX, please contact your
+local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group (see
+page \pageref{addrs}).
+
+
+\section{Classes and packages}
+\label{Sec:class+packages}
+
+This section describes the new structure of \LaTeX{} documents and the
+new types of file: \emph{classes} and \emph{packages}.
+
+\subsection{What are classes and packages?}
+
+The main difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in the
+commands before |\begin{document}|.
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09, documents had \emph{styles},
+such as \textsf{article} or \textsf{book}, and \emph{options},
+such as \textsf{twoside} or \textsf{epsfig}.
+These were indicated by the |\documentstyle| command:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\documentstyle|\oarg{options}\arg{style}
+\end{quote}
+For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated
+PostScript figures, you said:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentstyle[twoside,epsfig]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, there were two different types of document style option:
+\emph{built-in options} such as |twoside|; and \emph{packages} such as
+|epsfig.sty|. These were very different, since any \LaTeX{} document
+style could use the \textsf{epsfig} package but only document styles
+which declared the \textsf{twoside} option could use that option.
+
+To avoid this confusion, \LaTeXe{} differentiates between built-in
+options and packages. These are given by the new |\documentclass| and
+|\usepackage| commands:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\
+ |\usepackage|\oarg{options}\arg{packages}
+\end{quote}
+For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated
+PostScript figures, you now write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+ \usepackage{epsfig}
+\end{verbatim}
+You can load more than one package with a single |\usepackage|
+command; for example, rather than writing:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{epsfig}
+ \usepackage{multicol}
+\end{verbatim}
+you can specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{epsfig,multicol}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that \LaTeXe{} still understands the \LaTeX~2.09 |\documentstyle|
+command. This command causes \LaTeXe{} to enter \emph{\LaTeX~2.09
+compatibility mode}, which is described in Section~\ref{Sec:209}.
+
+You should not, however, use the |\documentstyle| command for new
+documents because this compatibility mode is very slow and the new
+features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in this mode.
+
+To help differentiate between classes and packages, document classes
+now end with |.cls| rather than |.sty|. Packages still end with
+|.sty|, since most \LaTeX~2.09 packages work well with \LaTeXe.
+
+\subsection{Class and package options}
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09, only document styles could have options such as
+|twoside| or |draft|. In \LaTeXe{}, both classes and packages are
+allowed to have options. For example, to specify a two-sided article
+with graphics using the |dvips| driver, you write:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+ \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}
+\end{verbatim}
+It is possible for packages to share common options. For example,
+you could, in addition, load the \textsf{color} package by specifying:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+ \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}
+ \usepackage[dvips]{color}
+\end{verbatim}
+But because |\usepackage| allows more than one package to be listed,
+this can be shortened to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+ \usepackage[dvips]{graphics,color}
+\end{verbatim}
+In addition, packages will also use each option given to
+the |\documentclass| command (if they know what to do with it), so you
+could also write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[twoside,dvips]{article}
+ \usepackage{graphics,color}
+\end{verbatim}
+Class and package options are covered in more detail in
+\emph{\LaTeXcomp} and in \emph{\clsguide}.
+
+\subsection{Standard classes}
+
+The following classes are distributed with \LaTeX:
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[article] The |article| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[book] The |book| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[report] The |report| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[letter] The |letter| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[slides] The |slides| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook},
+ formerly \SLiTeX.
+\item[proc] A document class for proceedings, based on |article|.
+ Formerly the |proc| package.
+\item[ltxdoc] The document class for documenting the \LaTeX{}
+ program, based on |article|.
+\item[ltxguide] The document class for \emph{\usrguide} and
+ \emph{\clsguide}, based on |article|. The document you are reading
+ now uses the |ltxguide| class. The layout for this class is likely
+ to change in future releases of \LaTeX.
+\item[ltnews] The document class for the \emph{\LaTeX{} News}
+ information sheet, based on |article|. The layout for this class
+ is likely to change in future releases of \LaTeX.
+\item[minimal]
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+ This class is the bare minimum (3 lines) that is needed in a
+ \LaTeX\ class file. It just sets the text width and height, and
+ defines |\normalsize|. It is principally intended for debugging
+ and testing \LaTeX\ code in situations where you do not need to
+ load a `full' class such as |article|. If, however, you are
+ designing a completely new class that is aimed for documents with
+ structure radically different from the structure supplied by the
+ article class, then it may make sense to use this as a base and add
+ to it code implementing the required structure, rather than
+ starting from |article| and modifying the code there.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Standard packages}
+\label{Sec:st-pack}
+
+The following packages are distributed with \LaTeX:
+\begin{description}
+\item[alltt]
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+ This package provides the |alltt| environment, which is like
+ the |verbatim| environment except that |\|, |{|, and |}|
+ have their usual meanings. It is described in |alltt.dtx| and
+ \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[doc] This is the basic package for typesetting the documentation
+ of \LaTeX{} programs. It is described in |doc.dtx| and in
+ \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[exscale] This provides scaled versions of the math extension
+ font. It is described in |exscale.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[fontenc] This is used to specify which font encoding \LaTeX{}
+ should use. It is described in |ltoutenc.dtx|.
+\item[graphpap]
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+ This package defines the |\graphpaper| command; this
+ can be used in a |picture| environment.
+\item[ifthen] Provides commands of the form `if\dots then do\dots
+ otherwise do\dots'.
+ It is described in |ifthen.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[inputenc]
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+ This is used to specify which input encoding \LaTeX{} should use.
+ It is described in |inputenc.dtx|.
+\item[latexsym] \LaTeXe{} no longer loads the \LaTeX{} symbol font by
+ default. To access it, you should use the |latexsym| package. It
+ is described in |latexsym.dtx| and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}; see also
+ Section~\ref{Sec:problems}.
+ \item[makeidx] This provides commands for producing indexes. It is
+ described in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[newlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of
+ \LaTeX~2.09 with the New Font Selection Scheme. It is described in
+ \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[oldlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of
+ \LaTeX~2.09. It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[showidx]
+ This causes the argument of each |\index| command to
+ be printed on the page where it occurs.
+ It is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+ \item[syntonly] This is used to process a document without
+ typesetting it. It is described in |syntonly.dtx| and in
+ \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[tracefnt] This allows you to control how much information about
+ \LaTeX's font loading is displayed. It is described in
+ \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Related software}
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+The following software should be available from the same distributor
+as your copy of \LaTeXe. You should obtain at least the
+\textsf{graphics} and \textsf{tools} collections in order to have all
+the files described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. The |amsmath| package (part
+of \textsf{amslatex} and formerly known as |amstex|)
+and \textsf{babel} are also mentioned in the list
+of `standard packages' in section C.5.2 of that book.
+\begin{description}
+\item[amslatex] Advanced mathematical typesetting from the American
+ Mathematical Society. This includes the |amsmath| package; it
+ provides many commands for typesetting mathematical formulas of
+ higher complexity. It is produced and supported by the American
+ Mathematical Society and it is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[babel] This package and related files support typesetting in
+ many languages. It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[cyrillic]
+\NEWfeature{1998/12/01}
+ Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for
+ typesetting with Cyrillic fonts.
+\item[graphics] This includes the |graphics| package which
+ provides support for the inclusion and transformation of graphics,
+ including files produced by other software. Also included, is the
+ |color| package which provides support for typesetting in colour.
+ Both these packages are described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[psnfss] Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for
+ typesetting with a large range of Type~1 (PostScript) fonts.
+\item[tools] Miscellaneous packages written by the \LaTeX3
+ project team.
+\end{description}
+These packages come with documentation and each of them is also
+described in at least one of the books \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and
+\emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+
+\subsubsection{Tools}
+
+This collection of packages includes, at least, the following (some
+files may have slightly different names on certain systems):
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[array]
+ Extended versions of the environments |array|, |tabular|
+ and |tabular*|, with many extra features.
+\item[calc]
+\NEWfeature{1996/12/01}
+ Enables the use of certain algebraic notation when specifying
+ values for lengths and counters.
+\item[dcolumn]
+ Alignment on `decimal points' in tabular entries. Requires the
+ |array| package.
+\item[delarray]
+ Adds `large delimiters' around arrays. Requires |array|.
+\item[hhline]
+ Finer control over horizontal rules in tables. Requires |array|.
+\item[longtable]
+ Multi-page tables. (Does not require |array|, but it uses the
+ extended features if both are loaded.)
+\item[tabularx]
+ Defines a |tabularx| environment that is similar to |tabular*|
+ but it modifies the column widths, rather than the inter-column
+ space, to achieve the desired table width.
+\item[afterpage]
+ Place text after the current page.
+\item[bm]
+ Access bold math symbols.
+\item[enumerate]
+ Extended version of the |enumerate| environment.
+\item[fontsmpl]
+ Package and test file for producing `font samples'.
+\item[ftnright]
+ Place all footnotes in the right-hand column in two-column mode.
+\item[indentfirst]
+ Indent the first paragraph of sections, etc.
+\item[layout]
+ Show the page layout defined by the current document class.
+\item[multicol]
+ Typeset text in columns, with the length of the columns
+ `balanced'.
+\item[rawfonts]
+ Preload fonts using the old internal font names of \LaTeX~2.09.
+ See Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals}.
+\item[somedefs]
+ Selective handling of package options. (Used by the rawfonts
+ package.)
+\item[showkeys]
+ Prints the `keys' used by |\label|, |\ref|, |\cite| etc.; useful
+ whilst drafting.
+\item[theorem]
+ Flexible declaration of `theorem-like' environments.
+\item[varioref]
+ `Smart' handling of page references.
+\item[verbatim]
+ Flexible extension of the verbatim environment.
+\item[xr]
+ Cross reference other `external' documents.
+\item[xspace]
+ `Smart space' command that helps you to avoid the common mistake
+ of missing spaces after command names.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\section{Commands}
+\label{Sec:commands}
+
+This section describes the new commands available in \LaTeXe.
+They are covered in more detail in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in
+\emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+
+\subsection{Initial commands}
+
+Initial commands can appear only before the |\documentclass|
+line.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\begin{filecontents}| \arg{file-name} \\
+ \m{file-contents} \\
+|\end{filecontents}|
+\end{decl}
+
+The |filecontents| environment is intended for bundling within a
+single document file the contents of packages, options, or other
+files. When the document file is run through \LaTeXe{} the body of
+this environment is written verbatim (preceded by a comment line) to a
+file whose name is given as the environment's only argument. However,
+if that file already exists then nothing happens except for an
+information message.
+
+Only normal ASCII text characters (7-bit visible text) should be
+included in a |filecontents| environment. Anything else, such as tab
+characters, form-feeds or 8-bit characters, should not be included in a
+|filecontents| environment.
+
+Tabs and form feeds produce a warning, explaining that they are turned
+into spaces or blank lines, respectively.
+What happens to 8-bit characters depends on the \TeX{} installation and
+is in general unpredictable.
+
+The |filecontents| environment is used for including \LaTeX{} files.
+For other plain text files (such as Encapsulated PostScript files),
+you should use the |filecontents*| environment which does not add a
+comment line.
+
+These environments are allowed only before |\documentclass|. This
+ensures that any packages that have been bundled in the document are
+present when needed.
+
+\subsection{Preamble commands}
+\label{Sec:pre}
+
+The changes to the preamble commands are intentionally designed to make
+\LaTeXe{} documents look clearly different from old documents. The
+commands should be used only before |\begin{document}|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\documentclass| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name}
+ \oarg{release-date}
+\end{decl}
+
+This command replaces the
+\LaTeX~2.09 command |\documentstyle|.
+
+There must be exactly one |\documentclass| command in a document; and
+it must come after the |filecontents| environments, if any, but before
+any other commands.
+
+The \m{option-list} is a list of options, each of which may modify the
+formatting of elements which are defined in the \m{class-name} file,
+as well as those in all following |\usepackage| commands (see
+below).
+
+The optional argument \m{release-date} can be used to specify the
+earliest desired release date of the class file; it should contain a
+date in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}. If a version of the class
+older than this date is found, a warning is issued.
+
+For example, to specify a two-column article, using a version of
+|article.cls| released after June 1994, you specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\documentstyle| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name}
+\end{decl}
+
+This command is still supported for compatibility with old files. It
+is essentially the same as |\documentclass| except that it invokes
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. It also causes any options in
+the \m{option-list} that are not processed by the class file to be
+loaded as packages after the class has been loaded. See
+Section~\ref{Sec:209} for more details on \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility
+mode.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\usepackage| \oarg{option-list} \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-date}
+\end{decl}
+
+Any number of |\usepackage| commands is allowed. Each package file
+(as denoted by \m{package-name}) defines new elements (or modifies
+those defined in the class file loaded by the \m{class-name} argument
+of the |\documentclass| command). A package file thus extends the
+range of documents which can be processed.
+
+The \m{option-list} argument can contain a list of options, each of
+which can modify the formatting of elements which are defined in this
+\m{package-name} file.
+
+As above, \m{release-date} can contain the earliest desired release
+date of the package file in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}; if an
+older version of the package is found, a warning is issued.
+
+For example, to load the |graphics| package for the |dvips| driver,
+using a version of |graphics.sty| released after June 1994, you write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+Each package is loaded only once. If the same package is requested
+more than once, nothing happens in the second or following attempt
+unless the package has been requested with options that were not given
+in the original |\usepackage|. If such extra options are specified
+then an error message is produced. See Section~\ref{Sec:problems} how
+to resolve this problem.
+
+As well as processing the options given in the \m{option-list} of the
+|\usepackage| command, each package processes the
+\m{option-list} of the |\documentclass| command as well. This
+means that any option which should be processed by every package (to
+be precise, by every package that specifies an action for it) can be
+specified just once, in the |\documentclass| command, rather than
+being repeated for each package that needs it.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\listfiles|
+\end{decl}
+
+If this command is placed in the preamble then a list of the files
+read in (as a result of processing the document) will be displayed
+on the terminal (and in the log file) at the end of the run. Where
+possible, a short description will also be produced.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+\emph{Warning}: this command will list only files which were read
+using \LaTeX{} commands such as |\input|\arg{file} or
+|\include|\arg{file}. If the file was read using the primitive \TeX{}
+syntax |\input |\emph{file} (without |{ }| braces around the file name)
+then it will not be listed; failure to use the \LaTeX{} form with the
+braces can cause more severe problems, possibly leading to overwriting
+important files, so \textbf{always put in the braces}.
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\setcounter{errorcontextlines}| \arg{num}
+\end{decl}
+
+\TeX~3 introduced a new primitive |\errorcontextlines| which controls
+the format of error messages. \LaTeXe\ provides an interface to this
+through the standard |\setcounter| command. As most \LaTeX\ users do
+not want to see the internal definitions of \LaTeX\ commands each time
+they make an error, \LaTeXe{} sets this to $-1$ by default.
+
+\subsection{Document structure}
+
+The |book| document class introduces new commands to indicate
+document structure.
+\begin{decl}
+|\frontmatter| \\ |\mainmatter| \\ |\backmatter|
+\end{decl}
+These commands indicate the beginning of the front matter (title page,
+table of contents and prefaces), main matter (main text) and back
+matter (bibliography, indexes and colophon).
+
+\subsection{Definitions}
+
+In \LaTeX, commands can have both mandatory and optional arguments,
+for example in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[11pt]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+the |11pt| argument is optional, whereas the |article| class name is
+mandatory.
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09 users could define commands with arguments, but these
+had to be mandatory arguments. With \LaTeXe, users can now define
+commands and environments which also have one optional argument.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\newcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\renewcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\renewcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+
+These commands have a new, second, optional argument; this is used for
+defining commands which themselves take one optional argument. This
+new argument is best introduced by means of a simple (and hence not
+very practical) example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\example}[2][YYY]{Mandatory arg: #2;
+ Optional arg: #1.}
+\end{verbatim}
+This defines |\example| to be a command with two arguments, referred
+to as |#1| and |#2| in the \arg{definition}---nothing new so far. But
+by adding a second optional argument to this |\newcommand| (the
+|[YYY]|) the first argument (|#1|) of the newly defined command
+|\example| is made optional with its default value being |YYY|.
+
+Thus the usage of |\example| is either:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \example{BBB}
+\end{verbatim}
+which prints:
+\begin{quote}
+ Mandatory arg: BBB;
+ Optional arg: YYY.
+\end{quote}
+or:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \example[XXX]{AAA}
+\end{verbatim}
+which prints:
+\begin{quote}
+ Mandatory arg: AAA;
+ Optional arg: XXX.
+\end{quote}
+
+The default value of the optional argument is \texttt{YYY}.
+This value is specified as the \oarg{default} argument of the
+|\newcommand| that created |\example|.
+
+As another more useful example, the definition:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\seq}[2][n]{\lbrace #2_{0},\ldots,\,#2_{#1} \rbrace}
+\end{verbatim}
+means that the input |$\seq{a}$| produces
+the formula $\lbrace a_{0},\ldots,\,a_{n} \rbrace$,
+whereas the input |$\seq[k]{x}$| produces the formula
+$\lbrace x_{0},\ldots,\,x_{k} \rbrace$.
+
+In summary, the command:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{quote}
+defines \m{cmd} to be a command with \m{num} arguments, the first of
+which is optional and has default value \m{default}.
+
+Note that there can only be one optional argument but, as before,
+there can be up to nine arguments in total.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\newenvironment|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\
+|\newenvironment*|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\
+|\renewenvironment|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\
+|\renewenvironment*|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def}
+\end{decl}
+
+\LaTeXe\ also supports the creation of environments that have one
+optional argument. Thus the syntax of these two commands has
+been extended in the same way as that of |\newcommand|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\providecommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\providecommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+
+This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand|. If \m{cmd} is already
+defined then the existing definition is kept; but if it is currently
+undefined then the effect of |\providecommand| is to define \m{cmd}
+just as if |\newcommand| had been used.
+
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+ All the above five `defining commands' now have \texttt{*}-forms that
+ are usually the better form to use when defining commands with
+ arguments, unless any of these arguments is intended to contain
+ whole paragraphs of text. Moreover, if you ever do find yourself
+ needing to use the non-star form then you should ask whether
+ that argument would not better be treated as the contents of a
+ suitably defined environment.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+ The commands produced by the above five `defining commands' are
+ now robust.
+
+\subsection{Boxes}
+
+These next three commands for making LR-boxes all existed in
+\LaTeX~2.09. They have been enhanced in two ways.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\makebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} \\
+|\framebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} \\
+|\savebox| \arg{cmd} \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+One small but far-reaching change for \LaTeXe\ is that, within the
+\m{width} argument only, four special lengths can be used. These are
+all dimensions of the box that would be produced by using simply
+|\mbox|\arg{text}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item [] |\height|\quad its height above the baseline;
+\item [] |\depth|\quad its depth below the baseline;
+\item [] |\totalheight|\quad the sum of |\height| and |\depth|;
+\item [] |\width|\quad its width.
+\end{itemize}
+Thus, to put `hello' in the centre of a box of twice its natural
+width, you would use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \makebox[2\width]{hello}
+\end{verbatim}
+Or you could put \textit{f} into a square box, like
+this:
+ \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that it is the total width of the framed box, including the
+frame, which is set to |\totalheight|.
+
+The other change is a new possibility for \m{pos}: |s| has been added
+to |l| and |r|. If \m{pos} is |s| then the text is stretched the full
+length of the box, making use of any `rubber lengths' (including any
+inter-word spaces) in the contents of the box. If no such `rubber
+length' is present, an `underfull box' will probably be produced.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\parbox| \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width}
+ \arg{text} \\
+|\begin{minipage}|
+ \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width}\\
+\m{text}\\
+|\end{minipage}|
+\end{decl}
+
+As for the box commands above, |\height|, |\width|, etc.~may be used
+in the \oarg{height} argument to denote the natural dimensions of the
+box.
+
+The \m{inner-pos} argument is new in \LaTeXe. It is the vertical
+equivalent to the \m{pos} argument for |\makebox|, etc, determining
+the position of \m{text} within the box. The \m{inner-pos} may be any
+one of |t|, |b|, |c|, or |s|, denoting top, bottom, centered, or
+`stretched' alignment respectively. When the \m{inner-pos} argument
+is not specified, \LaTeX\ gives it same value as \m{pos} (this could be
+the latter's default value).
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\begin{lrbox}| \arg{cmd}\\
+\m{text}\\
+|\end{lrbox}|
+\end{decl}
+
+This is an environment which does not directly print anything.
+Its effect is to save the typeset \m{text} in the bin \m{cmd}. Thus
+it is like |\sbox| \arg{cmd} \arg{text}, except that any white space
+before or after the contents \m{text} is ignored.
+
+This is very useful as it enables both the |\verb| command and the
+\texttt{verbatim} environment to be used within \m{text}.
+
+It also makes it possible to define, for example, a `framed box'
+environment. This is done by first using this environment to save
+some text in a bin \m{cmd} and then calling
+|\fbox{\usebox{|\m{cmd}|}}|.
+
+The following example defines an environment, called |fmpage|, that is
+a framed version of |minipage|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newsavebox{\fmbox}
+ \newenvironment{fmpage}[1]
+ {\begin{lrbox}{\fmbox}\begin{minipage}{#1}}
+ {\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\fbox{\usebox{\fmbox}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Measuring things}
+
+The first of these next commands was in \LaTeX~2.09. The two new
+commands are the obvious analogues.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\settowidth| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\
+|\settoheight| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\
+|\settodepth| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\subsection{Line endings}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+The command |\\|, which is used to indicate a line-end in various
+places, is now a robust command when used within arguments such as
+section titles.
+
+Also, because it is often necessary to distinguish which type of line
+is to be ended, we have introduced the following new command; it
+has the same argument syntax as that of |\\|.
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+|\tabularnewline| \oarg{vertical-space}
+\end{decl}
+One example of its use is when the text in the last
+column of a |tabular| environment is set with |\raggedright|; then
+|\tabularnewline| can be used to indicate the end of a row of the
+|tabular|, whilst |\\| will indicate the end of a line of text in a
+paragraph within the column. This command can be used in the |array|
+environment as well as |tabular|, and also the extended versions of
+these environments offered by the \textsf{array} and \textsf{longtable}
+packages in the tools collection.
+
+\subsection{Controlling page breaks}
+
+Sometimes it is necessary, for a final version of a document, to
+`help' \LaTeX\ break the pages in the best way. \LaTeX~2.09 had a
+variety of commands for this situation: |\clearpage|, |\pagebreak|
+etc. \LaTeXe\ provides, in addition, commands which can produce
+longer pages as well as shorter ones.
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\enlargethispage| \arg{size} \\
+|\enlargethispage*| \arg{size}
+\end{decl}
+
+These commands increase the height of a page (from its normal value of
+|\textheight|) by the specified amount \m{size}, a rigid length. This
+change affects \emph{only} the current page.
+
+This can be used, for example, to allow an extra line to be fitted
+onto the page or, with a negative length, to produce a page
+shorter than normal.
+
+The star form also shrinks any vertical white space on the page as
+much as possible, so as to fit the maximum amount of text on the
+page.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+These commands do not change the position of the footer text; thus, if
+a page is lengthened too far, the main text may overprint the footer.
+
+\subsection{Floats}
+
+There is a new command, |\suppressfloats|, and a new `float
+specifier'. These will enable people to gain better
+control of \LaTeX's float placement algorithm.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\suppressfloats| \oarg{placement}
+\end{decl}
+
+This command stops any further floating environments from being placed
+on the current page. With an optional argument, which should be either
+|t| or |b| (not both), this restriction applies only to putting
+further floats at the top or at the bottom. Any floats which would
+normally be placed on this page are placed on the next page instead.
+
+\begin{decl}
+The extra float location specifier: \ \texttt{!}
+\end{decl}
+
+This can be used, along with at least one of \texttt{h}, \texttt{t},
+\texttt{b} and \texttt{p}, in the location optional argument of a
+float.
+
+If a \texttt{!} is present then, just for this particular float,
+whenever it is processed by the float mechanism the following are
+ignored:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item all restrictions on the number of floats which can appear;
+\item all explicit restrictions on the amount of space on a text page
+which may be occupied by floats or must be occupied by text.
+\end{itemize}
+The mechanism will, however, still attempt to ensure that pages are
+not overfull and that floats of the same type are printed in the
+correct order.
+
+Note that its presence has no effect on the production of float pages.
+
+A \texttt{!} specifier overrides the effect of any |\suppressfloats|
+command for this particular float.
+
+\subsection{Font changing: text}
+
+The font selection scheme used in \LaTeXe{} differs a lot from that
+used in \LaTeX~2.09. In this section, we give a brief description of
+the new commands. A more detailed description with examples is given
+in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, and the interface for class- and package-writers
+is described in \emph{\fntguide}.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\rmfamily|\\
+|\sffamily|\\
+|\ttfamily|\\
+|\mdseries|\\
+|\bfseries|\\
+|\upshape|\\
+|\itshape|\\
+|\slshape|\\
+|\scshape|
+\end{decl}
+
+These are font commands whose use is the same as the commands |\rm|,
+|\bf|, etc. The difference is that each command changes just one
+attribute of the font (the attribute changed is part of the name).
+One result of this is that, for example, |\bfseries\itshape| produces
+both a change of series and a change of shape, to give a bold italic
+font.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\textrm|\arg{text}\\
+|\textsf|\arg{text}\\
+|\texttt|\arg{text}\\
+|\textmd|\arg{text}\\
+|\textbf|\arg{text}\\
+|\textup|\arg{text}\\
+|\textit|\arg{text}\\
+|\textsl|\arg{text}\\
+|\textsc|\arg{text}\\
+|\emph|\arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+These are one-argument commands; they take as an argument the
+text which is to be typeset in the particular font. They also
+automatically insert italic corrections where appropriate; if you do
+not like the result, you can add an italic correction with |\/| or
+remove it with |\nocorr|. The |\nocorr| should always be the first or
+last thing within the \arg{text} argument.
+
+\subsection{Font changing: math}
+
+Most of the fonts used within math mode do not need to be explicitly
+invoked; but to use letters from a range of fonts, the following
+class of commands is provided.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\mathrm| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathnormal| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathcal| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathbf| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathsf| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathtt| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathit| \arg{letters}
+\end{decl}
+
+These are also one-argument commands which take as an argument the
+letters which are to be typeset in the particular font. The argument
+is processed in math mode so spaces within it will be ignored. Only
+letters, digits and accents have their font changed, for example
+|$\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$| produces $\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$.
+
+\subsection{Ensuring math mode}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\ensuremath| \arg{math commands}
+\end{decl}
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09, if you wanted a command to work both in math mode and
+in text mode, the suggested method was to define something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\Gp}{\mbox{$G_p$}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Unfortunately, the |\mbox| stops |\Gp| changing size correctly in (for
+instance) subscripts or a fraction.
+
+In \LaTeXe{} you can define it thus:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\Gp}{\ensuremath{G_p}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Now |\Gp| will work correctly in all contexts.
+
+This is because the |\ensuremath| does nothing, producing simply
+|G_p|, when |\Gp| is used within math mode; but it ensures that math
+mode is entered (and exited) as required when |\Gp| is used in text
+mode.
+
+
+\subsection{Setting text superscripts}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\textsuperscript| \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} In \LaTeX~2.09 textual superscripts such as
+footnote markers were produced by internally entering math mode and
+typesetting the number as a math superscript. This normally looked
+fine since the digits in math fonts are the same as those in text
+fonts when Computer Modern fonts are used. But when a different
+document font (such as Times) is selected, the results look rather
+strange. For this reason the command |\textsuperscript| has been
+introduced which typesets its argument in the current text font, in a
+superscript position and in the correct size.
+
+\subsection{Text commands: all encodings}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+ One of the main differences between \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX~2.09 is
+ that \LaTeXe{} can deal with fonts in arbitrary \emph{encodings}.
+ (A font encoding is the sequence of characters in the font---for
+ example a Cyrillic font would have a different encoding from a Greek
+ font.)
+
+ The two major font encodings that are used for Latin languages such
+ as English or German are |OT1| (Donald Knuth's 7-bit encoding, which
+ has been used during most of \TeX's lifetime) and |T1| (the new
+ 8-bit `Cork' encoding).
+
+ \LaTeX~2.09 only supported the |OT1| encoding, whereas \LaTeXe{} has
+ support for both |OT1| and |T1| built-in. The next section will
+ cover the new commands which are available if you have |T1|-encoded
+ fonts. This section describes new commands which are available in
+ all encodings.
+
+ Most of these commands provide characters which were available in
+ \LaTeX~2.09 already. For example |\textemdash| gives an `em dash',
+ which was available in \LaTeX~2.09 by typing |---|. However, some
+ fonts (for example a Greek font) may not have the |---| ligature,
+ but you will still be able to access an em dash by typing
+ |\textemdash|.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\r{<text>}|
+\end{decl}
+ This command gives a `ring' accent, for example `\r{o}' can be typed
+ |\r{o}|.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\SS|
+\end{decl}
+ This command produces a German `SS', that is a capital `\ss'. This
+ letter can hyphenate differently from `SS', so is needed for entering
+ all-caps German.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\textcircled{<text>}|
+\end{decl}
+ This command is used to build `circled characters' such as
+ |\copyright|. For example |\textcircled{a}| produces
+ \textcircled{a}.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\textcompwordmark|
+\end{decl}
+ This command is used to separate letters which would normally
+ ligature. For example `f\textcompwordmark i' is produced with
+ |f\textcompwordmark i|. Note that the `f' and `i' have not
+ ligatured to produce `fi'. This is rarely useful in English
+ (`shelf\textcompwordmark ful' is a rare example of where it might be
+ used) but is used in languages such as German.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\textvisiblespace|
+\end{decl}
+ This command produces a `visible space' character
+ `\textvisiblespace'. This is sometimes used in computer listings,
+ for example `type \textsf{hello\textvisiblespace world}'.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\textemdash|
+ |\textendash|
+ |\textexclamdown|
+ |\textquestiondown| \\
+ |\textquotedblleft|
+ |\textquotedblright|
+ |\textquoteleft|
+ |\textquoteright|
+\end{decl}
+ These commands produce characters which would otherwise be
+ accessed via ligatures:
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ccl}
+ \emph{ligature} & \emph{character} & \emph{command} \\
+ |---| & --- & |\textemdash| \\
+ |--| & -- & |\textendash| \\
+ |!`| & !` & |\textexclamdown| \\
+ |?`| & ?` & |\textquestiondown| \\
+ |``| & `` & |\textquotedblleft| \\
+ |''| & '' & |\textquotedblright| \\
+ |`| & ` & |\textquoteleft| \\
+ |'| & ' & |\textquoteright|
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+ The reason for making these characters directly accessible is so
+ that they will work in encodings which do not have these characters.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\textbullet|
+ |\textperiodcentered|
+\end{decl}
+ These commands allow access to characters which were previously only
+ available in math mode:
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{lcl}
+ \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\
+ |\bullet| & $\bullet$ & |\textbullet| \\
+ |\cdot| & $\cdot$ & |\textperiodcentered|
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+\begin{decl}[1995/12/01]
+ |\textbackslash|
+ |\textbar|
+ |\textless|
+ |\textgreater|
+\end{decl}
+ These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were
+ only available in verbatim or math mode:
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{lcl}
+ \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\
+ |\backslash| & $\backslash$ & |\textbackslash| \\
+ |\mid| & $\mid$ & |\textbar| \\
+ |<<| & $<$ & |\textless| \\
+ |>>| & $>$ & |\textgreater|
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+\begin{decl}[1995/12/01]
+ |\textasciicircum|
+ |\textasciitilde|
+\end{decl}
+ These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were
+ previously only available in verbatim:
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{cl}
+ \emph{verbatim} & \emph{text command} \\
+ |^| & |\textasciicircum| \\
+ |~| & |\textasciitilde|
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+\begin{decl}[1995/12/01]
+ |\textregistered|
+ |\texttrademark|
+\end{decl}
+ These commands provide the `registered trademark' (R) and
+ `trademark' (TM) symbols.
+
+\subsection{Text commands: the T1 encoding}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+ The |OT1| font encoding is fine for typesetting in English, but has
+ problems when typesetting other languages. The |T1| encoding solves
+ some of these problems, by providing extra characters (such as `eth'
+ and `thorn'), and it allows words containing accented letters to be
+ hyphenated (as long as you have a package like |babel| which allows
+ for non-American hyphenation).
+
+ This section describes the commands you can use if you have the |T1|
+ fonts. To use them, you need to get the `ec fonts', or the
+ |T1|-encoded PostScript fonts, as used by \textsf{psnfss}.
+ All these fonts are
+ available by anonymous ftp in the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, and
+ are also available on the CD-ROMs \emph{4all \TeX} and
+ \emph{\TeX{} Live} (both available from the \TeX{} Users Group).
+
+ You can then select the |T1| fonts by saying:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+ This will allow you to use the commands in this section.
+
+ \emph{Note:} Since this document must be processable on any site
+ running an up-to-date \LaTeX, it does not contain any characters
+ that are present only in |T1|-encoded fonts. This means that this
+ document cannot show you what these glyphs look like! If you want
+ to see them then run \LaTeX{} on the document |fontsmpl| and
+ respond `|cmr|' when it prompts you for a family name.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\k{<text>}|
+\end{decl}
+ This command produces an `ogonek' accent.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\DH|
+ |\DJ|
+ |\NG|
+ |\TH|
+ |\dh|
+ |\dj|
+ |\ng|
+ |\th|
+\end{decl}
+ These commands produce characters `eth', `dbar', `eng', and `thorn'.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+ |\guillemotleft|
+ |\guillemotright|
+ |\guilsinglleft|
+ |\guilsinglright| \\
+ |\quotedblbase|
+ |\quotesinglbase|
+ |\textquotedbl|
+\end{decl}
+ % A local hack (could be improved):
+ \newcommand{\fauxguillemet}[1]{$\vcenter{\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}$}
+ These commands produce various sorts of quotation mark.
+ Rough representations of them are:
+ \fauxguillemet\ll a\fauxguillemet\gg{}
+ \fauxguillemet<a\fauxguillemet>
+ ,\kern -0.1em,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em``
+ ,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em` and |"|a|"|.
+
+\NEWdescription{2001/06/01}
+ There are therefore some extra short-form ligatures available for
+ use in documents that will only be used with |T1|-encoded fonts.
+
+ The guillemets |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright|%
+ \footnote{We apologise once again for maintaining Adobe's
+ enormous solipsism~(sic) of confusing a diving bird with
+ punctuation marks!}
+ can be obtained by typing |<<<<| and |>>>>| and |\quotedblbase|
+ by typing |,,|\,.
+
+ Also, unlike the unexpected results with
+ |OT1|-encoded fonts, |<<| and |>>| will produce \textless{} and
+ \textgreater{}.
+
+ Note also that the single character |"| will no longer produce ''
+ but rather |\textquotedbl|.
+
+\subsection{Logos}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\LaTeX|\\
+|\LaTeXe|
+\end{decl}
+
+|\LaTeX| (producing `\LaTeX') is still the `main' logo command,
+but if you need to refer to the new features, you can write
+|\LaTeXe| (producing `\LaTeXe').
+
+\subsection{Picture commands}
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\qbezier[<N>](<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)| \\
+ | \bezier{<N>}(<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)|
+\end{decl}
+The |\qbezier| command can be used in |picture| mode to draw a
+quadratic Bezier curve from position |(<AX>,<AY>)| to |(<CX>,<CY>)| with
+control point |(<BX>,<BY>)|. The optional argument \m{N} gives the
+number of points on the curve.
+
+For example, the diagram:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{picture}(50,50)
+ \thicklines
+ \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50)
+ \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50)
+ \thinlines
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}}
+ \end{picture}
+\end{center}
+is drawn with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{picture}(50,50)
+ \thicklines
+ \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50)
+ \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50)
+ \thinlines
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}}
+ \end{picture}
+\end{verbatim}
+The |\bezier| command is the same, except that the argument \m{N} is not
+optional. It is provided for compatibility with the \LaTeX~2.09
+|bezier| document style option.
+
+\subsection{Old commands}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\samepage|
+\end{decl}
+
+The |\samepage| command still exists but is no longer being
+maintained.
+This is because it only ever worked erratically; it does not
+guarantee that there will be no page-breaks within its scope; and
+it can cause footnotes and marginals to be wrongly placed.
+
+We recommend using |\enlargethispage| in conjunction with page-break
+commands such as |\newpage| and |\pagebreak| to help control page
+breaks.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\SLiTeX|
+\end{decl}
+Since \SLiTeX{} no longer exists, the logo is no longer defined in the
+\LaTeX{} kernel. A suitable replacement is |\textsc{Sli\TeX}|. The
+\SLiTeX{} logo is defined in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\mho| |\Join| |\Box| |\Diamond| |\leadsto| \\
+|\sqsubset| |\sqsupset| |\lhd| |\unlhd| |\rhd| |\unrhd|
+\end{decl}
+
+These symbols are contained in the \LaTeX{} symbol font, which was
+automatically loaded by \LaTeX~2.09. However, \TeX{} has room for
+only sixteen math font families; thus many users discovered that they
+ran out. Because of this, \LaTeX{} does not load the \LaTeX{} symbol
+font unless you use the \textsf{latexsym} package.
+
+These symbols are also made available, using different fonts, by the
+\textsf{amsfonts} package, which also defines a large number of other
+symbols. It is supplied by the American Mathematical Society.
+
+The \textsf{latexsym} package is loaded automatically in \LaTeX~2.09
+compatibility mode.
+
+\section{\LaTeX~2.09 documents}
+\label{Sec:209}
+
+\LaTeXe{} can process (almost) any \LaTeX~2.09 document, by entering
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. Nothing has changed, you run
+\LaTeX{} in the same way you always did, and you will get much the
+same results.
+
+The reason for the `almost' is that some \LaTeX~2.09 packages made use
+of low-level unsupported features of \LaTeX. If you discover such a
+package, you should find out if it has been updated to work with
+\LaTeXe. Most packages will still work with \LaTeXe---the easiest way
+to find out whether a package still works is to try it!
+
+\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode is a comprehensive emulation of
+\LaTeX~2.09, but at the cost of time. Documents can run up to 50\%
+slower in compatibility mode than they did under \LaTeX~2.09.
+In addition, many of the new features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in
+\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+\subsection{Warning}
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+This \emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} is provided solely to allow
+you to process 2.09 documents, i.e.~documents that were written (we
+hope, a long time ago) for a very old system and therefore could be
+processed by using a genuine antique \LaTeX~2.09 system.
+
+This mode is therefore \emph{not} intended to provide access to the
+enhanced features of \LaTeXe{}. Thus it must not be used to process
+new documents which masquerade as 2.09 documents (i.e.~they begin with
+|\documentstyle|) but which could not be processed using that genuine
+antique \LaTeX~2.09 system because they contain some new,
+\LaTeXe{}-only, commands or environments.
+
+To prevent such misuse of the system, and the consequent trouble it
+causes when such misleadingly encoded documents are distributed, the
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} turns off most of these new
+features and commands. Any attempt to use them will give you an error
+message and, moreover, many of them simply will not work, whilst
+others will produce unpredictable results.
+So don't bother sending us any bug reports about such occurences since
+they are intentional.
+
+
+\subsection{Font selection problems}
+\label{Sec:fsprob}
+
+When using compatibility mode, it is possible that you will find
+problems with font-changing commands in some old documents. These
+problems are of two types:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item producing error messages;
+\item not producing the font changes you expected.
+\end{itemize}
+
+In case of error messages it is possible that the document (or an old
+style file used therein) contains references to old internal commands
+which are no longer defined, see Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals} for
+more information if this is the case.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+One example of the unexpected is if you use one of the new style of
+math-mode font changing command as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+$ \mathbf{xy} A $
+\end{verbatim}
+You may well find that this behaves as if you had put:
+\begin{verbatim}
+$ \bf {xy} A $
+\end{verbatim}
+everything including the $A$ coming out bold.
+
+\LaTeX~2.09 allowed sites to customize their \LaTeX{} installation,
+which resulted in documents producing different results on different
+\LaTeX{} installations. \LaTeXe{} no longer allows so much
+customization but, for compatibility with old documents, the local
+configuration file |latex209.cfg| is loaded every time \LaTeXe{}
+enters \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+For example, if your site was customized to use the New Font
+Selection Scheme (\NFSS) with the |oldlfont| option, then you can
+make \LaTeXe{} emulate this by creating a |latex209.cfg| file
+containing the commands:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ExecuteOptions{oldlfont}\RequirePackage{oldlfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+Similarly, to emulate \NFSS{} with the |newlfont| option, you can
+create a |latex209.cfg| file containing:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ExecuteOptions{newlfont}\RequirePackage{newlfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Native mode}
+\label{Sec:native}
+
+To run an old document faster, and use the new features of
+\LaTeXe, you should try using \emph{\LaTeXe{} native mode}.
+This is done by replacing the command:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\documentstyle[|\m{options}|,|\m{packages}|]|\arg{class}
+\end{quote}
+with:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\
+ |\usepackage{latexsym,|\m{packages}|}|
+\end{quote}
+However, some documents which can be processed in \LaTeX~2.09
+compatibility mode may not work in native mode. Some \LaTeX~2.09
+packages will only work with \LaTeXe{} in 2.09 compatibility mode.
+Some documents will cause errors because of \LaTeXe's improved error
+detection abilities.
+
+But most \LaTeX~2.09 documents can be processed by \LaTeXe{}'s native
+mode with the above change. Again, the easiest way to find out
+whether your documents can be processed in native mode is to try it!
+
+
+\section{Local modifications}
+\label{sec:loc}
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+There are two common types of local modifications that can be done
+very simply. Do not forget that documents produced using such
+modifications will not be usable at other places (such documents are
+called `non-portable').
+
+One type of modification is the use of personal commands for commonly
+used symbols or constructions. These should be put into a package
+file (for example, one called \texttt{mymacros.sty}) and loaded by
+putting |\usepackage{mymacros}| in the document preamble.
+
+Another type is a local document class that is very similar to one of
+the standard classes but contains some straightforward modifications
+such as extra environments, different values for some parameters, etc.
+These should be put into a class file; here we shall describe a simple
+method of constructing such a file using, as an example, a class
+called \textsf{larticle} that is very similar to the \textsf{article}
+class.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+The class file called \texttt{larticle.cls} should (after the
+preliminary identification commands) start as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+This command should be followed by whatever additions and changes you
+wish to make to the results of reading in the file
+\texttt{article.sty}.
+
+The effect of using the above |\LoadClassWithOptions| command is to
+load the standard class file \textsf{article} with whatever options
+are asked for by the document. Thus a document using your
+\textsf{larticle} class can specify any option that could be specified
+when using the standard \textsf{article} class; for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[a4paper,twocolumn,dvips]{larticle}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\section{Problems}
+\label{Sec:problems}
+
+This section describes some of the things which may go wrong when
+using \LaTeXe, and what you can do about it.
+
+\subsection{New error messages}
+
+\LaTeXe{} has a number of new error messages.
+Please also note that many error messages now produce further helpful
+information if you press |h| in response to the error prompt.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|Option clash for package |\m{package}|.|
+\end{decl}
+The named package has been loaded twice with different options. If
+you enter |h| you will be told what the options were, for example, if
+your document contained:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[foo]{fred}
+ \usepackage[baz]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you will get the error message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Option clash for package fred.
+\end{verbatim}
+and typing |h| at the |?| prompt will give you:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ The package fred has already been loaded with options:
+ [foo]
+ There has now been an attempt to load it with options:
+ [baz]
+ Adding the line:
+ \usepackage[foo,baz]{fred}
+ to your document may fix this.
+ Try typing <<return>> to proceed.
+\end{verbatim}
+The cure is, as suggested, to load the package with both sets of
+options. Note that since \LaTeX{} packages can call other packages,
+it is possible to get a package option clash without explicitly
+requesting the same package twice.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |Command |\m{command}| not provided in base NFSS.|
+\end{decl}
+The \m{command} is not provided by default in \LaTeXe. This error is
+generated by using one of the commands:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \mho \Join \Box \Diamond \leadsto
+ \sqsubset \sqsupset \lhd \unlhd \rhd \unrhd
+\end{verbatim}
+which are now part of the \textsf{latexsym} package.
+The cure is to add:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{latexsym}
+\end{verbatim}
+in the preamble of your document.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |LaTeX2e command <command> in LaTeX 2.09 document.|
+\end{decl}
+The \m{command} is a \LaTeXe{} command but this is a \LaTeX~2.09
+document. The cure is to replace the command by a \LaTeX~2.09
+command, or to run document in native mode, as described in
+Section~\ref{Sec:native}.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |NFSS release 1 command \newmathalphabet found.|
+\end{decl}
+The command |\newmathalphabet| was used by the New Font Selection
+Scheme Release 1 but it has now been replaced by
+|\DeclareMathAlphabet|, the use of which is described in
+\emph{\fntguide}.
+
+The best cure is to update the package which contained the
+|\newmathalphabet| command. Find out if there is a new release of
+the package, or (if you wrote the package yourself) consult
+\emph{\fntguide} for the new syntax of font commands.
+
+If there is no updated version of the package then you can cure this
+error by using the \textsf{newlfont} or \textsf{oldlfont} package,
+which tells \LaTeX{} which version of |\newmathalphabet| should be
+emulated.
+
+You should use \textsf{oldlfont} if the document selects math fonts with
+syntax such as this:
+\begin{quote}
+ |{\cal A}|, etc.
+\end{quote}
+Use \textsf{newlfont} if the document's syntax is like this:
+\begin{quote}
+ |\cal{A}|, etc.
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |Text for \verb command ended by end of line.|
+\end{decl}
+The |\verb| command has been begun but not ended on that line. This
+usually means that you have forgotten to put in the end-character of
+the |\verb| command.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |Illegal use of \verb command.|
+\end{decl}
+The |\verb| command has been used inside the argument of another
+command. This has never been allowed in \LaTeX{}---often producing
+incorrect output without any warning---and so \LaTeXe{} produces
+an error message.
+
+\subsection{Old internal commands}
+\label{Sec:oldinternals}
+
+A number of \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands have been removed, since
+their functionality is now provided in a different way. See
+\emph{\clsguide} for more details of the new, supported interface for
+class and package writers.
+
+\begin{decl}
+ |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\
+ |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\
+ |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\
+ $\vdots$
+\end{decl}
+These commands provided access to the seventy fonts preloaded by
+\LaTeX~2.09. In contrast, \LaTeXe{} normally preloads at most
+fourteen fonts, which saves a lot of font memory; but a consequence is
+that any \LaTeX{} file which used the above commands to directly
+access fonts will no longer work.
+
+Their use will usually produce an error message such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ! Undefined control sequence.
+ l.5 \tenrm
+\end{verbatim}
+The cure for this is to update the document to use the new
+font-changing commands provided by \LaTeXe; these are described in
+\emph{\fntguide}.
+
+If this is not possible then, as a last resort, you can
+use the \textsf{rawfonts} package, which loads the
+seventy \LaTeX~2.09 fonts and provides direct access to them using the
+old commands. This takes both time and memory. If you do not
+wish to load all seventy fonts, you can select some of them by using the
+|only| option to \textsf{rawfonts}. For example, to load only |tenrm|
+and |tenbf| you write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[only,tenrm,tenbf]{rawfonts}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \textsf{rawfonts} package is distributed as part of the \LaTeX{}
+tools software, see Section~\ref{Sec:st-pack}.
+
+\subsection{Old files}
+
+One of the more common mistakes in running \LaTeX{} is to read in old
+versions of packages instead of the new versions. If you get an
+incomprehensible error message from a standard package, make sure you
+are loading the most recent version of the package. You can find out
+which version of the package has been loaded by looking in the log
+file for a line like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Package: fred 1994/06/01 v0.01 Fred's package.
+\end{verbatim}
+You can use the \m{release-date} options to |\documentclass| and
+|\usepackage| to make sure that you are getting a suitably recent copy
+of the document class or package. This is useful when sending a
+document to another site, which may have out-of-date software.
+
+\subsection{Where to go for more help}
+
+If you can't find the answer for your problem here, try looking in
+\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. If you have a problem with
+installing \LaTeX, look in the installation guide files which come with
+the distribution.
+
+If this doesn't help, contact your local \LaTeX{} guru or local
+\LaTeX{} mailing list.
+
+If you think you've discovered a bug then please report it! First,
+you should find out if the problem is with a third-party package or
+class. If the problem is caused by a package or class other than
+those listed in Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages} then please report
+the problem to the author of the package or class, not to the \LaTeX3
+project team.
+
+If the bug really is with core \LaTeX{} then you should create a
+\emph{short}, \emph{self-contained} document which exhibits the
+problem. You should run a \emph{recent} (less than a year old)
+version of \LaTeX{} on the file and then run \LaTeX{} on
+|latexbug.tex|. This will create an error report which you should
+send, together with the sample document and log file, to the
+\LaTeX{} bugs address which can be found in the file
+|latexbug.tex| or |bugs.txt|.
+
+
+\section{Enjoy!}
+\label{Sec:enjoy}
+
+We certainly hope you will enjoy using the new standard \LaTeX{} but,
+if this is not possible, we hope that you will enjoy success and
+fulfillment as a result of the documents which it will help you to
+create.
+
+If you find that the contribution of \LaTeX{} to your life is such
+that you would like to support the work of the project team, then
+please read Section~\ref{Sec:ltx3} and discover practical ways to do
+this.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+
+\bibitem{A-W:GMS94}
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
+
+
+\bibitem{A-W:GRM97}
+Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1997.
+
+
+\bibitem{A-W:GR99}
+Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Web Companion}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1999.
+
+
+\bibitem{A-W:DEK91}
+Donald~E. Knuth.
+\newblock {\em The \TeX book}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986.
+\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991.
+
+
+\bibitem{A-W:LLa94}
+Leslie Lamport.
+\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8-test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8-test.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..96d9ec2f322
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8-test.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `utf8-test.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% utf8ienc.dtx (with options: `test')
+%%
+%% This is a generated file.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+%% base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+%% such generated files.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\ProvidesFile{utf8-test.tex}
+ [2004/02/09 v1.1b UTF-8 support for inputenc]
+
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage[latin1,utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{trace}
+
+\scrollmode % to run past the error below
+
+\begin{document}
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc %%% ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+\inputencoding{latin1} % switch to latin1
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8 but read by latin1 (and will produce one
+ error since \verb=\textcurrency= is not provided): ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+\inputencoding{utf8} % switch back to utf8
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+Some codes that should produce errors as nothing is set up
+for them: ^^c3F ^^e1^^a4^^b6
+
+And some that are not legal utf8 sequences: ^^c3X ^^e1XY
+
+\showoutput
+\tracingstats=2
+\stop
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `utf8-test.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8test.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2e91578d212
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8test.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `utf8test.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% utf8ienc.dtx (with options: `test')
+%%
+%% This is a generated file.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+%% base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+%% such generated files.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\ProvidesFile{utf8-test.tex}
+ [2004/02/09 v1.1b UTF-8 support for inputenc]
+
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage[latin1,utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{trace}
+
+\scrollmode % to run past the error below
+
+\begin{document}
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc %%% ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+\inputencoding{latin1} % switch to latin1
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8 but read by latin1 (and will produce one
+ error since \verb=\textcurrency= is not provided): ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+\inputencoding{utf8} % switch back to utf8
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+Some codes that should produce errors as nothing is set up
+for them: ^^c3F ^^e1^^a4^^b6
+
+And some that are not legal utf8 sequences: ^^c3X ^^e1XY
+
+\showoutput
+\tracingstats=2
+\stop
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `utf8test.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64e913ee6dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+ LaTeX installation instructions for VTeX 4.x
+
+ 1996 June 25
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for
+VTeX 4.x. Before reading this file, you may read
+install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works
+in general.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to configure LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+ * Possible problems with versions earlier than 4.2
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the
+following:
+
+ * Standard VTeX distribution files
+
+ * Customization files for VTeX fonts
+ TEXSYS.CFG LV1CMR.FD
+ FONTMATH.CFG LV1CMSS.FD LV1LCMSS.FD
+ SFONTS.CFG LV1CMTT.FD LV1LCMTT.FD
+ LV1ENC.DEF
+
+ These files can be obtained from
+ http://www.micropress-inc.com/latexcfg.zip
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+===============================
+
+VTeX allows LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX 2E to coexist on the same system.
+LaTeX 2E is normally installed in the subdirectory VTEX/L2E, while
+LaTeX 2.09 is in VTEX/SRC.
+
+ Because of file name conflicts, you have to ensure that:
+
+ when using LaTeX 2E
+ * The input directory path lists VTEX/L2E before VTEX/SRC
+ * The format file field is set to "LATEX"
+ when using LaTeX 2.09
+ * The input directory path lists VTEX/SRC before VTEX/L2E
+ * The format file field is set to "LPLAIN"
+
+CONFIGURING LATEX
+=================
+
+ To configurate LaTeX 2E for use with VTeX, you have to
+ <1> copy the customization files listed above into the
+ VTEX/L2E subdirectory,
+ <2> insert this directory into the input path *prior* to VTEX/SRC
+ <3> select the LATEX format in the [Run]/[Typeset] dialog.
+
+ If you are using MicroPress' distribution, <1> and <2> are done
+ automatically.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+ If you are using the MicroPress distribution, all unpacking is done
+ automatically during the installation.
+
+ If you are usign the CTAN distribution, you should unpack the files
+ manually:
+
+ assuming that VTEX has been installed in C:\VTEX,
+ * create subdirectory L2E (C:\VTEX\L2E)
+ * switch to it
+ * copy all CTAN distribution files there
+ * copy all MicroPress customization file there
+ * append C:/VTEX/L2E to the beginning of the input path
+ using the [Setup]/[Directories] menu item of the shell.
+ * run
+ VTEXWS -i unpack.ins (Windows)
+ or
+ VTEX3S -i unpack.ins (DOS)
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+ If you are using the MicroPress distribution, this is done
+ automatically.
+
+ To create format files manually, run
+ (in the C:/VTEX/L2E subdirectory)
+
+ VTEXWS -i -m LATEX.LTX (Windows, Small TeX)
+ VTEXWB -i -m LATEX.LTX (Windows, Big TeX)
+ VTEX3S -i -m LATEX.LTX (DOS, Small TeX)
+ VTEX3B -i -m LATEX.LTX (DOS, Big TeX)
+
+ Notice that you do not need to issue all four commands. The formats
+ for DOS and Windows are identical; and, unless you are using a 4mb
+ machine, you should not use Small TeX at all.
+
+ Technical info:
+ The names of the format files are LATEX.FM2 and LATEX.FM3
+ (small and big versions). The "-i" switch runs VTEX in the
+ IniTeX mode; the "-m" switch forces creation of the LATEX.EMF
+ file which is used by the editors for syntax hilighting of
+ LaTeX documents.
+
+
+GETTING A WORKING LaTeX
+=======================
+
+ If you followed all the previous steps, you now have a fully working
+ installation.
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+ To insure that the installation worked, you may want to run
+
+ VTEX## &LATEX ltxcheck.tex
+ (## is WS, WB, 3S, or 3B, as above)
+
+ you should get a complain about missing dc fonts. At this time, VTeX
+ distribution does not use dc fonts. If you really need them, you can
+ obtain them from CTAN.
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+ If you run into unexpected problems during the installation,
+ please contact us for assistance.
+
+
+Email : micropress-inc.com
+Http : www.micropress-inc.com
+Fax : 1 718 575 8038
+Voice : 1 718 575 1816
+Post : MicroPress, Inc.
+ 6830 Harrow Street
+ Forest Hills NY 11375
+
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+ If you are short on space, you can delete all files with the
+ extension .dtx after the installation.
+
+SYSTEM-SPECIFIC SECTIONS
+========================
+
+ Everything above fully applies to all versions of VTeX starting
+ with 4.00.
+
+ However, some previous versions did not correctly configure or
+ detect SliTeX fonts (before 4.14) and AmsTeX fonts (before 4.12).
+ These problems can be solved by updating the customization files.
+
+
+--- Copyright 1996 by MicroPress, Inc. and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtexfree.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtexfree.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..df66318c271
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtexfree.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+ LaTeX installation instructions for
+ VTeX/Free, version 7.30 and above
+
+ 2001-09-19
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for VTeX/Free
+version 7.30 and above. In case you are still running an older
+version, upgrading to the latest one is heavily recommended.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+The below instructions refer to VTeX/Free for Linux-x86 (VTeX/Lnx) as
+well as to VTeX/Free for OS/2 (VTeX/2). Differences are indicated,
+where necessary. Paths are always written in Unix style, i.e., using
+slashes.
+
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+============
+
+These installation instructions assume that you have installed the
+VTeX/Free system already and want to upgrade LaTeX to a newer version.
+
+
+
+SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX
+================================
+
+Back up the contents of the directories texmf/source/latex/base and
+texmf/tex/latex/base.
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+Copy all the files from the CTAN directory macros/latex/base to the
+directory texmf/source/latex/base of your VTeX system.
+
+Open a shell or OS/2 window and make the above directory the current
+one. Then unpack the distribution by executing the command:
+
+ vtexlnx -i unpack.ins (Linux)
+or
+ vtex -i unpack.ins (OS/2)
+
+NB: If you are still using version 7.3x of VTeX/Lnx, the full path of
+the vtexlnx executable, usually /usr/local/vtex/bin/vtexlnx, is to be
+specified!
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+The next step in the installation of LaTeX is to move the files needed
+to run the system into the correct directories (folders).
+
+The following files are to be moved from texmf/source/latex/base to
+the LaTeX input directory texmf/tex/latex/base:
+
+ * latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex
+ small2e.tex, sample2e.tex and docstrip.tex:
+
+ * the file texsys.cfg, if it exists (this depends on your version
+ of VTeX/Free)
+
+and any files whose name ends with:
+
+ * .cls document class files,
+
+ * .clo document class options files,
+
+ * .sty package files,
+
+ * .fd, font definition files,
+
+ * .def files of definitions which may be read by LaTeX while
+ processing documents.
+
+ * .ltx, the files from which the format can be built.
+
+You should move to the MakeIndex input directory texmf/makeindex
+all files whose name ends with:
+
+ * .ist, MakeIndex style files.
+
+Please, note that any files existing already in the target directories
+must be overwritten!
+
+
+CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT AND CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+===================================================================
+
+See the LaTeX Local Guide, section "Creating the format file"!
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+The installation should proceed smoothly. However, you may get some
+errors.
+
+`File missing': Some of the files from the LaTeX distribution are
+ missing. There are a number of possible reasons for this:
+
+ * The files really are missing.
+ You should get the missing files from the same place you got the
+ rest of the distribution. If you cannot do this then you should
+ complain to whoever gave you this distribution.
+
+ * The files are present, but in the wrong directory. See the
+ section above "Putting the files where LaTeX can read them"
+
+ * The files are present, and in the right directory. Check the
+ path setttings in the main configuration file (vtex.ini or
+ vtexlnx.rc, resp.).
+
+`Font missing': Some of the fonts (.tfm and/or .pfb files) required
+ by LaTeX are missing. As above, either you have not got the
+ required files, they have been deleted, or TeX is not able to find
+ them. Check the main configuration file and the files
+ texmf/vtex/config/pdf.fm and texmf/vtex/config/ps.fm.
+
+
+If you have any problems installing LaTeX, you should:
+
+ * consult the LaTeX Local Guide and the VTeX/Free manual;
+
+ * if this fails, try asking the ntg-vtex mailing list or a general
+ TeX mailing list.
+
+
+CLEARING UP
+===========
+
+You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files in
+the directory texmf/source/latex/base that are not needed to run
+LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of personal taste and
+availability of disk space but here is some guidance.
+
+ * The files ltnews<xx>.tex contain the LaTeX newsletters. You should
+ run the latest one through LaTeX and nove the resulting PDF file to
+ the directory texmf/doc/latex/base
+
+ * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference
+ information covering (amongst other things) those features new to
+ this version of LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user
+ guide or a complete reference for the system. You should run them
+ through LaTeX and move the resulting PDF files to the directory
+ texmf/doc/latex/base, thus replacing the previous versions.
+
+ * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex,
+ can be used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt
+ for further information).
+
+ * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for
+ the font definition files.
+
+ * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project
+ and how you can support it.
+
+ * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst
+ other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports; and
+ those with extension .err contain errata lists for various
+ publications: see 00readme.txt for further details.
+
+ * The file ltxcheck.tex is used to test the format; therefore you
+ should keep it if you expect to remake the format before getting
+ the next full distribution.
+
+ * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the
+ .dtx and .fdd files.
+
+ * We recommend that you keep, in the formats directory vtex/fmt, the
+ transcript file that was produced whilst creating the format; this
+ file is named latex.log.
+
+
+
+ --- Copyright 2001 Walter Schmidt and the LaTeX3 project ---
+
+ --- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/web2ctex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/web2ctex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f92b4165bb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/web2ctex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for web2c Unix TeX
+
+ 3 June 97
+
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for web2c Unix
+TeX. Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which
+will explain how the LaTeX installation works.
+
+This file describes:
+
+ * Preliminary actions that ease the installation process.
+
+ * How to save any old version of LaTeX.
+
+ * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution.
+
+ * How to create the LaTeX format.
+
+ * How to install the LaTeX files.
+
+
+ESTABLISH DIRECTORY PATHS
+=========================
+
+It helps to set some environment variables to the paths needed by
+LaTeX prior to the installation procedure. Also it helps to write the
+assignments into a file, which can be saved and used any number of
+times. Here is a sample .profile file (for the Bourne sh or a
+derivative, see later for csh format), and the command that would use
+it.
+
+# Paths file for installing LaTeX2e. See web2ctex.txt
+# 2 June 97
+
+LATEXINPUTS=/usr/lib/texmf/texmf/tex/latex/base ; export LATEXINPUTS
+LATEXFORMATS=/usr/lib/texmf/texmf/web2c ; export LATEXFORMATS
+LATEXBIN=/usr/lib/texmf/bin/i586-linux ; export LATEXBIN
+LATEXDIST=/home/Current-Install/latex2e/base ; export LATEXDIST
+INDEXSTYLE=/usr/lib/texmf/texmf/makeindex ; export INDEXSTYLE
+
+ source ./.profile
+
+
+You can identify each of these paths by using the find command to look
+for one of the files specified in each section below. For example,
+LATEXINPUTS can be identified with the following commands.
+
+ cd /usr
+ find . -name article.sty -print
+
+
+The $LATEXINPUTS directory is where the LaTeX packages and classes are
+kept. This is on the TEXINPUTS path. This directory contains the
+files: article.sty, report.cls, lablst.tex and ltxguide.cls.
+
+For csh or a derivative use the command form below, otherwise use the
+form shown above in the sample file content above.
+
+ setenv LATEXINPUTS /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/latex
+
+
+The $LATEXFORMATS directory is where the LaTeX format is kept. This
+is on the TEXFORMATS path. This directory contains the files:
+latex.fmt, tex.fmt and mf.base.
+
+
+The $LATEXBIN directory is where the LaTeX binary is kept. This is on
+the PATH path. This directory contains the files: virtex, kpsetool
+and dvips. Note that the required directory is the one actually
+containing these files, not one with soft links (i.e., ffff -> gggg)
+to these files; look in the directories to be sure. The command
+ which latex
+will give the wrong directory if a soft link is in use.
+
+
+The $LATEXDIST directory is where the LaTeX distribution is kept.
+This is normally NOT on a path. This directory contains the files
+that you have just acquired and wish to install.
+
+
+The $INDEXSTYLE directory is where the makeindex program looks for its
+style files. This directory contains the files with suffix .ist which
+can be found with
+ find . -name *.ist -print
+
+
+SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX
+===============================
+
+If you have a copy of LaTeX 2.09, you may wish to save it before
+installing LaTeX2e.
+
+To begin with, you should save the LaTeX format.
+
+ cd $LATEXFORMATS
+ mv latex.fmt latex209.fmt
+
+Then you should save the LaTeX inputs. This will depend on whether
+your LaTeX inputs are kept in the same directory as all the other
+inputs. If they are, then:
+
+ cd $LATEXINPUTS
+ mkdir ../latex209
+ cp *.sty ../latex209
+
+If they are not, and are kept in a separate directory, or if you are
+not sure, then:
+
+ cd $LATEXINPUTS
+ mkdir ../latex209
+ cp * ../latex209
+
+Finally, you can create a shell script to run the old latex, for
+example:
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ TEXINPUTS=${LATEX209INPUTS:- \
+ .:/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/latex209:$TEXINPUTS}
+ export TEXINPUTS
+ virtex \&latex209 $*
+
+
+UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION
+==========================
+
+To unpack the LaTeX distribution, you should:
+
+ cd $LATEXDIST
+ initex unpack.ins
+
+This may take 5 or 10 minutes to unpack.
+
+
+CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT
+=========================
+
+To create the LaTeX format, you should:
+
+ initex latex.ltx
+
+This will create a file latex.fmt. You should install this with:
+
+ mv latex.fmt $LATEXFORMATS
+
+If you had a latex binary before, it will now pick up the new
+format. Otherwise, you should say:
+
+ cd $LATEXBIN
+ ln virtex latex
+
+
+PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LATEX CAN READ THEM
+===========================================
+
+To install the LaTeX files, you should:
+
+ cd $LATEXDIST
+ mv latexbug.tex testpage.tex lablst.tex idx.tex nfssfont.tex \
+ small2e.tex sample2e.tex docstrip.tex \
+ *.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg \
+ $LATEXINPUTS
+ mv *.ist $INDEXSTYLE
+
+You have now installed LaTeX!
+
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To check that the installation worked, you should:
+
+ cd $LATEXDIST
+ latex ltxcheck
+
+This will perform a number of tests, which should all report `OK'.
+
+
+--- Contributed by: David Outteridge <DOUTTERIDGE@bendata.com>
+--- Copyright 1997 by David Outteridge and the LaTeX3 project. ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64c885df7c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err
@@ -0,0 +1,300 @@
+\newcommand\erratafiledate{1999/06/05}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
+% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
+% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
+% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
+% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
+% .cfg file.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls}
+% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach
+
+\ProvidesClass{errata}
+ [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)]
+
+\LoadClass{article}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
+\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
+
+\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
+
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+
+
+\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
+\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
+
+
+\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ \let\endgobble\egroup
+ \let\hideamp\relax
+ \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
+
+\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
+
+\let\endgobble\relax
+
+
+\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
+\newcommand\myprinting{}
+
+
+\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
+ \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi
+ \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
+ \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+
+\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
+\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
+
+\newcommand\showallerrors{%
+ \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
+ \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
+ \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
+
+
+\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
+ \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
+
+\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
+ \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
+
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
+ {
+ \input{\jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
+ \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
+ \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
+ \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Current settings are:}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ }
+ {}
+
+%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
+
+\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
+ \endgobble
+ \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \expandafter\gobbleerrata
+ \fi
+ \hideamp \\%
+ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
+ \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
+}
+
+\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
+ &\\[4pt]%
+ \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
+
+\newenvironment{erratalist}
+ {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
+ {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
+
+\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
+ {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
+ Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
+ \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2
+ \end{center}%
+ \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \vspace{20pt}}
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\small}
+
+\setlength\parindent{0pt}
+\setlength\parskip{2pt}
+
+\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
+
+% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
+
+\let\u\underline
+\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
+
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
+%
+%
+% Configuration file for the errata listing of
+%
+% The LaTeX Web Companion
+%
+%
+% \erratastartdate
+%
+% Specifies the date from which on
+% errata entries should be listed.
+%
+% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all
+% entries are typeset.
+%
+\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1999/05/01}
+
+%
+% \myprinting
+%
+% Specifies which (revised) printing you
+% own. For example, if you have the second
+% printing set this to 2 so that errors
+% already corrected in that printing will not
+% appear in your errata listing.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all
+% entries are typeset.
+%
+\renewcommand\myprinting{1}
+%
+%
+% \norevisionnumbers
+%
+% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
+% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
+% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
+% italic and add the revision number as a superscript.
+%
+%
+% \showallerrors
+%
+% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
+% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
+% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
+% default.
+%
+%
+\endinput
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+
+\documentclass{errata}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Web Companion}{\erratafiledate}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@book(A-W:GR99,
+ author = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz},
+ title = {The {\LaTeX} Web Companion},
+ substitle = {Integrating {\TeX}, HTML, and XML},
+ series = "Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting",
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ address = {Reading, Massachusetts},
+ year = 1999,
+ ISBN = "0-201-43311-7",
+ LCCN = "QA76.76.H94G66 1999",
+ pagenums = {xxii + 522},
+ source-infos = {yes},
+ bibliography = {yes},
+ index = {yes},
+ price = "US\$39.95",
+ note = "With Eitan M. Gurari and Ross Moore and Robert S.
+ Sutor.",
+)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}}
+\item[]
+The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found
+as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata
+entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed
+revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives
+the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the
+bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the
+problem.
+
+\end{list}
+
+
+\begin{erratalist}
+
+%=======================================================================
+\CHAPTER{Chapter 6}
+
+\erroronpage{247}{3 para l.5}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{}
+ GenCod \> GenCode
+
+\CHAPTER{Appendix B}
+
+\erroronpage{418}{3 para}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{}
+ The \texttt{book} element types (lines 10--\u{15})
+
+\end{erratalist}
+
+
+
+%==========================================================================
+
+\bigskip
+
+
+\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or
+ omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.]
+\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens}
+\end{multicols}
+
+
+If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+ sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk\\
+ goossens@cern.ch
+\end{quote}
+preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e.,
+\begin{flushleft}
+|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|%
+ \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\
+ \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata}
+\end{flushleft}
+Here is an example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
+ surprisingly \> surprising
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcompg.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcompg.err
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..58220dd7bdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcompg.err
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+\newcommand\erratafiledate{2000/07/30}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
+% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
+% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
+% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
+% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
+% .cfg file.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls}
+% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach
+
+\ProvidesClass{errata}
+ [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)]
+
+\LoadClass{article}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
+\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
+
+\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
+
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+
+
+\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
+\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
+
+
+\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ \let\endgobble\egroup
+ \let\hideamp\relax
+ \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
+
+\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
+
+\let\endgobble\relax
+
+
+\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
+\newcommand\myprinting{}
+
+
+\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
+ \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi
+ \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
+ \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+
+\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
+\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
+
+\newcommand\showallerrors{%
+ \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
+ \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
+ \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
+
+
+\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
+ \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
+
+\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
+ \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
+
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
+ {
+ \input{\jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
+ \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
+ \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
+ \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* Current settings are:}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
+ \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
+ \typeout{*}
+ \typeout{***************************************************}
+ }
+ {}
+
+%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
+
+\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
+ \endgobble
+ \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \else
+ \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
+ \expandafter\gobbleerrata
+ \fi
+ \hideamp \\%
+ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
+ \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
+}
+
+\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
+ &\\[4pt]%
+ \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
+
+\newenvironment{erratalist}
+ {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
+ {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
+
+\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
+ {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
+ Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
+ \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2
+ \end{center}%
+ \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \vspace{20pt}}
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\small}
+
+\setlength\parindent{0pt}
+\setlength\parskip{2pt}
+
+\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
+
+% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
+
+\let\u\underline
+\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
+
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
+%
+%
+% Configuration file for the errata listing of
+%
+% Mit LaTeX ins Web
+%
+%
+% \erratastartdate
+%
+% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed.
+%
+% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
+%
+% The default below ensures that all entries are typeset.
+%
+
+\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2000/05/01}
+
+
+%
+% \myprinting
+%
+% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. Currently there is
+% only the first printing.
+%
+%
+
+\renewcommand\myprinting{1}
+
+%
+% \norevisionnumbers
+%
+% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
+% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
+% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
+% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. Since the
+% Handbuch no revision we turn this feature off.
+
+\norevisionnumbers
+
+%
+% \showallerrors
+%
+% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
+% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
+% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
+% default.
+%
+%
+\endinput
+\end{filecontents}
+
+\providecommand{\BibTeX}{%
+ B\kern-.05em{\scshape i\kern-.025emb}\kern-.08em\TeX}
+\providecommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}}
+
+\documentclass[ngerman,a4paper]{errata}
+\usepackage{ngerman}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\erratatitle{Mit \LaTeX{} ins Web}{\erratafiledate}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@book{A-W:GoossensRahtz2000,
+ author = "Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz",
+ title = "Mit \LaTeX{} ins Web",
+ publisher = Addison-Wesley,
+ address = {M"unchen: Boston: San Francisco},
+ year = 2000,
+ pagenums = {577 + 26},
+ bibliography = {yes},
+ index = {yes},
+ isbn = {3-8273-1629-4}
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}}
+\item[]
+Die jeweils letzte Version dieser Datei (\texttt{\jobname.err}) ist Teil der
+\LaTeX-Verteilung.
+
+Die erste Spalte der Tabelle enth"alt die Seitenzahl des Fehlereintrags.
+Die zweite Spalte gibt den genauen Ort an; negative Zeilennummern sind vom
+Seitenende gerechnet.
+In der dritten Spalte steht der Entdecker des Fehlers.
+\end{list}
+
+\begin{erratalist}
+
+\CHAPTER{Vorwort}
+
+\erroronpage{xvii}{Aufz"ahlung, erster Punkt}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Adobe Acrobat-Format \> Adobe-Acrobat-Format
+
+\erroronpage{xix}{erster Absatz, vorletzte Zeile}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ das ein oder andere \> das eine oder andere
+
+\erroronpage{xxiii}{zweite Zeile}{MSc}{2000/05/09}{}
+ \texttt{webcomp.err} \> \texttt{webcompg.err}
+
+\CHAPTER{Zur deutschen Ausgabe}
+
+\erroronpage{xxv}{zweiter Absatz, neunte Zeile}{FMi}{2000/07/27}{}
+ Latex-Begleiter \> \LaTeX-Begleiter
+
+\CHAPTER{Das Web, seine Dokumente und \LaTeX}
+
+\erroronpage{9}{Vierter Absatz, letzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{}
+ mithIlfe \> mithilfe
+
+\erroronpage{10}{letzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{}
+ mithIlfe \> mithilfe
+
+\erroronpage{13}{zweiter Absatz, f"unfte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{}
+ mithIlfe \> mithilfe
+
+\erroronpage{13}{zweiter Absatz, siebte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{}
+ mithIlfe \> mithilfe
+
+\erroronpage{16}{zweiter Absatz, vierte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{}
+ mithIlfe \> mithilfe
+
+\erroronpage{18}{dritter Absatz, vorletzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{}
+ MithIlfe \> Mithilfe
+
+\erroronpage{18}{vorletzte und letzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{}
+ mithIlfe \> mithilfe
+
+\erroronpage{19}{Abbildung 1.6}{MSc}{2000/05/09}{}
+ "Ubersetzung fehlt
+
+\CHAPTER{Portable Document Format}
+
+\CHAPTER{Der \LaTeX2HTML-"Ubersetzer}
+
+\CHAPTER{Konvertierung von \LaTeX{} in HTML mit \TeX4ht}
+
+\CHAPTER{Direkte Darstellung von \LaTeX{} im Web}
+
+\erroronpage{220}{zweiter Absatz, vorletzte und letzte Zeile}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ \TeX{} und \LaTeX-Markup."< \> \TeX- und \LaTeX-Markups."<
+
+\CHAPTER{HTML, SGML und XML: Drei Auszeichnungssprachen}
+
+\erroronpage{276}{Punkt 7}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ XML solle schnell \> XML sollte schnell
+
+\CHAPTER{CSS, DSSSL und XSL: Schreiben mit Stil}
+
+\erroronpage{368}{Abbildung 7.10}{MSc}{2000/05/09}{}
+ N"achter Freitag \> N"achster Freitag
+
+\CHAPTER{MathML -- intelligentes Formel-Markup}
+
+\CHAPTER{Beispieldateien}
+
+\CHAPTER{Technische Anh"ange}
+
+\CHAPTER{Fragen der Internationalisierung}
+
+\erroronpage{514}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{515}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{516}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{517}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{518}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{518}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{519}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{520}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{521}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{521}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.3}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{522}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.3}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Table \> Tabelle
+
+\erroronpage{526}{letzte Zeile der Abbildung}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{}
+ Multilinguale \> Mehrsprachige
+
+\CHAPTER{Glossar}
+
+\CHAPTER{URL-Verzeichnis}
+
+\CHAPTER{Literaturverzeichnis}
+
+\CHAPTER{Index}
+
+\end{erratalist}
+
+
+\begin{multicols}{3}[Dank an alle, die Fehler oder Auslassungen
+ gefunden haben. Aufgef"uhrt sind die Entdecker der Fehler.]
+\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach}
+\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr"oder}
+\contributor{Cbe}{Claas Beckmann}
+\end{multicols}
+
+Viele andere haben mir Korrekturen f"ur schon bekannte Fehler
+geschickt. Vielen Dank an euch alle!
+
+Wenn Sie noch mehr Fehler finden, schicken Sie bitte eine Notiz an
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+ webcompg@oneiros.de
+\end{quote}
+am besten in einer Form, die in diese Datei eingebaut werden kann,
+d.\,h.
+\begin{flushleft}
+|\erroronpage{|\textit{Seitenzahl-Nummer}|}{|\textit{Zeile-Position}|}{|%
+ \textit{Ihr-K"urzel}|}{|\textit{Datum}|}{}| \\
+ \hspace*{2em}\textit{Beschreibung des Druckfehlers}
+\end{flushleft}
+Ein Beispiel:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\erroronpage{xxv}{zweiter Absatz, neunte Zeile}{FMi}{2000/07/27}{}
+ Latex-Begleiter \> \LaTeX-Begleiter
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/yandytex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/yandytex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1f7c88402c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/yandytex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+
+ LaTeX installation instructions for Y&Y TeX
+
+ 1996 January 1
+
+SUMMARY
+=======
+
+This file contains instructions for installing LaTeX 2e for Y&Y TeX.
+It describes:
+
+ * How to install LaTeX 2e from the diskette that comes with Y&Y TeX.
+
+ * How to unpack a new LaTeX distribution obtained from CTAN.
+
+ * How to check the LaTeX installation.
+
+ * What to do if you have any problems.
+
+INITIAL INSTALLATION OF LaTaX 2e:
+=================================
+
+The Y&Y TeX System comes with a LaTeX 2e diskette that includes an
+installation batch file. Included is the LaTeX 2e `format' file as
+well as the class files. Just type
+
+ a:install (or b:install)
+
+with the LaTeX 2e diskette in the diskette drive after installing Y&Y TeX
+itself. This will put the files in the standard places. Type a:install -?
+to see how you can control where the files are installed.
+
+The Y&Y TeX System also includes a second diskette with LaTeX 2e packages,
+which you can install in toto using the batch file on that diskette.
+Alternatively, just unzip the files for individual packages as needed.
+
+REFRESHING YOUR INSTALLATION OF LaTeX 2e:
+========================================
+
+If you do at some later time want to refresh your LaTeX 2e installation
+using the latest files from CTAN, do the following:
+
+Find the directory on your machine with the LaTeX 2e files --- in the
+standard installation this would be c:\yandytex\latex2e.
+
+(i) Make this `LaTeX 2e directory' the current directory.
+
+(ii) FTP the files in directory tex-archive/macros/latex2e/base on CTAN
+ and put them into your `LaTeX 2e directory' (overwriting older
+ versions of the files in the process).
+
+(iii) Run TeX on `unpack.ins.' That is, type `tex unpack.ins.'
+ This will create around 230 files (in perhaps five minutes or so).
+
+(iv) Now run ini-TeX on `latex.ltx.' That is, type `tex -i latex.ltx'.
+
+(v) Finally, move the new `latex.fmt' file to the TEXFORMATS directory ---
+ in the standard installation this would be c:\yandytex\fmt.
+
+* You now have an up-to-date LaTeX 2e installation!
+
+You can, if you prefer, call TeX on `unpack.ins' and ini-TeX on `latex.ltx'
+directly from the `TeX Menu' in DVIWindo. But then:
+
+(i) If you use a common working directory for your DVI files, first disable
+ this by removing the check mark on the `Working Directory' menu item.
+ This is to make sure files written by TeX and ini-TeX go right back into
+ the `LaTeX 2e' directory, rather than into the common working directory.
+
+(ii) You may need to temporarily change the TEXINPUTS environment variable
+ (in the [Environment] section of `dviwindo.ini' in the Windows directory)
+ so that it lists the directory with your LaTeX 2e files first. Otherwise
+ you run the risk of getting complaints about old versions of files like
+ `docstrip.tex' being picked up from other directories.
+
+Note: if you have an old installation this may not work correctly because
+the ini-TeX call has some LaTeX 2e names hard-wired in, and these names have
+changed. In this case call ini-TeX directly from the DOS prompt as above.
+
+SOME OTHER HANDY TIPS:
+======================
+
+Creation of the LaTeX 2e format by ini-TeX requires a hyphenation file. For
+English, use the file `hyphen.tex' supplied with the system (in the `LaTeX'
+directory, which is typically c:\yandytex\latex). If ini-TeX complains that
+it can't find `hyphen.tex,' either make sure that it is in one of the
+directories listed in TEXINPUTS, or copy it to the `LaTeX 2e' directory.
+(By the way, for multilingual use consider the `babel' package).
+
+It us useful to create `format specific' TEXINPUTS environment variables.
+This is handy when you regularly used several different TeX `formats'
+(for example, when you need to run both LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX 2e for some
+reason). Use variables named PLAIN, LPLAIN, and LATEX for plain TeX, LaTeX
+2.09, and LaTeX 2e respectively (These go into the [Environment] section
+of the `dviwindo.ini' file in your Windows directory).
+
+Note that in the semicolon-separated list specified for TEXINPUTS (or format
+specific variable as described above), you can add \ or \\ to the end of a
+directory name in order to get one level or recursive directory searching
+respectively. This can be convenient if you have many TeX source files in a
+hierarchical directory structure, as for example, the LaTeX 2e packages.
+
+ADDING LaTeX 2e TO AN OLDER INSTALLATION:
+=========================================
+
+Proceed as above, but make sure to add the `LaTeX 2e' directory to the
+list of directores in the TEXINPUTS environment variable. For example,
+
+ TEXINPUTS=c:\yandytex\latex2e;c:\packages\psnfss;c:\texinput
+
+or create an environment variable called LATEX for this purpose (see above).
+
+Also, create a new `TeX Menu' entry for LaTeX 2e by holding down the
+`Control' key and selecting `LaTeX 2.09' from the `TeX Menu.' Edit the
+`Menu Item Name' field to read `LaTeX 2e|F7' (or whatever `hot key'
+you want to use), and edit the `Application Call Pattern' to read
+
+ tex &latex @.tex
+
+(in Windows NT, use + or ^& instead of &). Then click `Add.'
+
+CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED
+=====================================
+
+To check that the installation worked, run the new LaTeX 2e on the file
+`ltxcheck.tex'. You can do this from DVIWindo's `TeX Menu.' Simply select
+`LaTeX 2e,' and navigate to `c:\yandytex\latex2e\ltxcheck.tex' (or wherever
+you placed your LaTeX 2e source files) in the `Open File' dialog.
+
+It is highly recommended that you run this test before going on!
+The test file will check some basic features of your TeX setup and
+either say they are OK or complain and say they are BAD.
+
+After this, you may also wish to process `usrguide.tex' and print the
+result, unless you have already done so (and perhaps `fntguide.tex').
+Also note that LaTeX 2e `packages' each come with their own documentation
+(which is likely to be more up to date than `The LaTeX Companion').
+
+PROBLEMS
+========
+
+If you have a very old Y&Y TeX System, then it may be set up for the LaTeX 2e
+beta test file names. In this case run ini-TeX from the DOS command line.
+
+If you have other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the `PROBLEMS'
+section in `install.txt'.
+
+If `ltxcheck' produces a `BAD' message, you will typically be able to
+figure out from the message what is wrong. For example, you may not
+have the environment variable TEXINPUTS set up to include the new
+LaTeX 2e files. If it is not obvious what caused the `BAD' message,
+then please consult the section on `ltxcheck' in `texpert.txt'.
+
+WARNING: When using fonts other than Computer Modern, look out for
+ font naming problems. For example, with LucidaBright +
+ LucidaNewMath, \usepackage{lucidbry} will use the actual font
+ names, while \usepackage{lucidbrb} will use Karl Berry names.
+
+WARNING: When using fonts other than Computer Modern, look out for font
+ encoding (character layout) problems. LaTeX 2e directly supports
+ the old `TeX text' encoding (OT1 -- textext.vec), and the new
+ `Cork' encoding (T1 -- tex256.vec). Use `\input texnansi' for
+ TeX 'n ANSI encoding, or `\input ansiacce' for Windows ANSI etc.
+
+Like LaTeX 2e itself, auxiliary files supplied by Y&Y are at times revised
+and improved. Check out the `What's New' section on http://www.YandY.com.
+
+If you have any problems not resolved by the above, please contact Y&Y at:
+
+tech-help@YandY.com (email)
+(508) 371-2004 (fax)
+(508) 371-3286 (voice)
+
+Y&Y, Inc.
+45 Walden Street (snail mail)
+Concord, MA, 01742, USA
+
+--- Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 (C) Y&Y, Inc. and the LaTeX3 project ---
+--- All rights reserved. ---
+
+